Section II Part A 2004 Edition

2004 ASME
BOILER &
PRESSURE
VESSEL CODE
II
Part A –
Ferrous Material
Specifications
A N I N T E R N AT I O N A L C O D E
MATERIALS
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE
AN INTERNATIONAL CODE
MATERIALS
II
Part A –
Ferrous Material
Specifications
2004 Edition
July 1, 2004
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
NEW YORK, NEW YORK
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
ASME BOILER AND
PRESSURE VESSEL
COMMITTEE
SUBCOMMITTEE
ON MATERIALS
Date of Issuance: July 1, 2004
(Includes all Addenda dated July 2003 and earlier)
This international code or standard was developed under procedures accredited as meeting the criteria for American National
Standards and it is an American National Standard. The Standards Committee that approved the code or standard was balanced
to assure that individuals from competent and concerned interests have had an opportunity to participate. The proposed code
or standard was made available for public review and comment that provides an opportunity for additional public input from
industry, academia, regulatory agencies, and the public-at-large.
ASME does not “approve,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity.
ASME does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any items
mentioned in this document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard against liability for infringement of
any applicable letters patent, nor assume any such liability. Users of a code or standard are expressly advised that determination
of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, is entirely their own responsibility.
Participation by federal agency representative(s) or person(s) affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as government
or industry endorsement of this code or standard.
ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the established ASME
procedures and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals.
The footnotes in this document are part of this American National Standard.
ASME collective membership mark
The above ASME symbols are registered in the U.S. Patent Office.
“ASME” is the trademark of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
The Specifications published and copyrighted by the American Society for Testing and Materials
are reproduced with the Society’s permission.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form, in an electronic retrieval system or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher.
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 56-3934
Printed in the United States of America
Adopted by the Council of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 1914.
Revised 1940, 1941, 1943, 1946, 1949, 1952, 1953, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, 1968, 1971, 1974, 1977, 1980, 1983, 1986,
1989, 1992, 1995, 1998, 2001, 2004
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990
Copyright © 2004 by
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
All Rights Reserved
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
2004 ASME
BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE
SECTIONS
I
Rules for Construction of Power Boilers
II
Materials
Part A — Ferrous Material Specifications
Part B — Nonferrous Material Specifications
Part C — Specifications for Welding Rods, Electrodes, and Filler Metals
Part D — Properties (Customary)
Part D — Properties (Metric)
III
Subsection NCA — General Requirements for Division 1 and Division 2
III
Division 1
Subsection NB — Class 1 Components
Subsection NC — Class 2 Components
Subsection ND — Class 3 Components
Subsection NE — Class MC Components
Subsection NF — Supports
Subsection NG — Core Support Structures
Subsection NH — Class 1 Components in Elevated Temperature Service
Appendices
III
Division 2 — Code for Concrete Containments
III
Division 3 — Containments for Transport and Storage of Spent Nuclear Fuel and
High Level Radioactive Material and Waste
IV
Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers
V
Nondestructive Examination
VI
Recommended Rules for the Care and Operation of Heating Boilers
VII
Recommended Guidelines for the Care of Power Boilers
VIII
Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels
Division 1
Division 2 — Alternative Rules
Division 3 — Alternative Rules for Construction of High Pressure Vessels
IX
Welding and Brazing Qualifications
X
Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels
XI
Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components
XII
Rules for Construction and Continued Service of Transport Tanks
iii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
04
ADDENDA
Beginning with the 2004 Edition, Interpretations of the
Code will be distributed annually in July with the issuance
of the edition and subsequent addenda. Interpretations
previously distributed in January will be posted in January
at www.cstools.asme.org/interpretations and included in
the July distribution.
Colored-sheet Addenda, which include additions and
revisions to individual Sections of the Code, are published
annually and will be sent automatically to purchasers of
the applicable Sections up to the publication of the 2007
Code. The 2004 Code is available only in the loose-leaf
format; accordingly, the Addenda will be issued in the
loose-leaf, replacement-page format.
CODE CASES
The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee meets regularly to consider proposed additions and revisions to the
Code and to formulate Cases to clarify the intent of
existing requirements or provide, when the need is urgent,
rules for materials or constructions not covered by
existing Code rules. Those Cases which have been
adopted will appear in the appropriate 2004 Code Cases
book: (1) Boilers and Pressure Vessels and (2) Nuclear
Components. Supplements will be sent automatically to
the purchasers of the Code Cases books up to the publication of the 2007 Code.
INTERPRETATIONS
ASME issues written replies to inquiries concerning
interpretation of technical aspects of the Code. The Interpretations for each individual Section will be published
separately and will be included as part of the update
service to that Section. They will be issued semiannually
(July and December) up to the publication of the 2004
Code. Interpretations of Section III, Divisions 1 and 2,
will be included with the update service to Subsection
NCA.
iv
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
CONTENTS
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
Statements of Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
ASTM Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix
Specifications Listed by Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi
Specification Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxix
Preparation of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xli
Guideline on the Approval of New Materials Under the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xliii
Acceptable ASTM Editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlvii
Guidelines on Multiple Marking of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lvii
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lix
Specifications
SA-6/SA-6M
SA-20/SA-20M
SA-29/SA-29M
SA-36/SA-36M
SA-47/SA-47M
SA-53/SA-53M
SA-105/SA-105M
SA-106
SA-134
SA-135
SA-178/SA-178M
SA-179/SA-179M
SA-181/SA-181M
SA-182/SA-182M
SA-192/SA-192M
SA-193/SA-193M
SA-194/SA-194M
SA-202/SA-202M
SA-203/SA-203M
SA-204/SA-204M
SA-209/SA-209M
General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and
Sheet Piling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought and
Cold-Finished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon Structural Steel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless . . . .
Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and Over) . . . . . . .
Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel and Carbon-Manganese Steel
Boiler and Superheater Tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Cold-Drawn Low-Carbon Steel Heat Exchanger and Condenser
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves
and Parts for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Carbon Steel Boiler Tubes for High-Pressure Service. . . . . . . . . . . .
Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or HighTemperature Service, or Both. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Manganese-Silicon . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Carbon-Molybdenum Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
v
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
1
83
127
153
159
167
195
205
221
227
237
243
247
253
275
279
297
315
319
323
327
SA-210/SA-210M
SA-213/SA-213M
SA-214/SA-214M
SA-216/SA-216M
SA-217/SA-217M
SA-225/SA-225M
SA-231/ SA-231M
SA-232/ SA-232M
SA-234/SA-234M
SA-240
SA-249/SA-249M
SA-250/SA-250M
SA-263
SA-264
SA-265
SA-266/SA-266M
SA-268/SA-268M
SA-275/SA-275M
SA-276
SA-278
SA-283/SA-283M
SA-285/SA-285M
SA-299/SA-299M
SA-302/SA-302M
SA-307
SA-311/SA-311M
SA-312/SA-312M
SA-320/SA-320M
SA-325
SA-333/SA-333M
SA-334/SA-334M
SA-335/SA-335M
SA-336/SA-336M
SA-350/SA-350M
SA-351/SA-351M
Seamless Medium-Carbon Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater, and HeatExchanger Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing
Parts Suitable for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Vanadium-Nickel . . . . . . . . .
Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Spring Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Valve Spring Quality Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat-Exchanger, and
Condenser Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric-Resistance-Welded Ferritic Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion-Resisting Chromium Steel-Clad Plate, Sheet, and Strip. . . . . . . . . .
Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel Clad Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nickel and Nickel-Base Alloy-Clad Steel Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon Steel Forgings, for Pressure Vessel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts for Temperature Up to
650°F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low- and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile
Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Silicon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Molybdenum and
Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 psi Tensile Strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold-Drawn, Stress-Relieved Carbon Steel Bars Subject to Mechanical
Property Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120 /105 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Tubes for Low-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . .
Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch Toughness
Testing for Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
333
337
349
351
355
361
365
371
375
387
397
407
413
425
437
443
449
459
467
477
483
487
491
495
499
507
513
525
537
549
563
573
585
595
607
SA-352/SA-352M
SA-353/SA-353M
SA-354
SA-358/SA-358M
SA-369/SA-369M
SA-370
SA-372/SA-372M
SA-376/SA-376M
SA-387/SA-387M
SA-388/SA-388M
SA-395
SA-403/SA-403M
SA-409/SA-409M
SA-414/SA-414M
SA-420/SA-420M
SA-423/SA-423M
SA-426
SA-430/SA-430M
SA-435/SA-435M
SA-437/SA-437M
SA-449
SA-450/SA-450M
SA-451
SA-453/SA-453M
SA-455/SA-455M
SA-476/SA-476M
SA-479/SA-479M
SA-480/SA-480M
SA-484/SA-484M
SA-487/SA-487M
SA-494/SA-494M
SA-508/SA-508M
SA-513
SA-515/SA-515M
SA-516/SA-516M
Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure Containing Parts,
Suitable for Low Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, 9 Percent Nickel, Double-Normalized
and Tempered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally
Threaded Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Alloy Steel Pipe
for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for HighTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products . . . .
Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Thin-Walled Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . .
Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central-Station
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ultrasonic Examination of Heavy Steel Forgings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated
Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or HighTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel, Sheet, Carbon, for Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for LowTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Electric-Welded Low-Alloy Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centrifugally Cast Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Austenitic Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . .
Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alloy Steel Turbine-Type Bolting Material Specially Heat Treated for
High-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy
Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. . . . .
High-Temperature Bolting Materials, With Expansion Coefficients
Comparable to Austenitic Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High-Strength Manganese . . . . . . . . . . .
Ductile Iron Castings for Paper Mill Dryer Rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure
Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and Forgings. . . . . . .
Steel Castings Suitable for Pressure Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Castings, Nickel and Nickel Alloy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quenched and Tempered Vacuum-Treated Carbon and Alloy Steel
Forgings for Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and HigherTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and LowerTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
615
623
629
639
649
655
715
721
731
739
747
759
769
779
783
793
799
805
811
815
821
829
841
847
857
861
867
879
911
929
937
939
949
975
979
SA-517/SA-517M
SA-522/SA-522M
SA-524
SA-530/SA-530M
SA-533/SA-533M
SA-537/SA-537M
SA-540/SA-540M
SA-541/SA-541M
SA-542/SA-542M
SA-543/SA-543M
SA-553/SA-553M
SA-556/SA-556M
SA-557/SA-557M
SA-562/SA-562M
SA-563
SA-564/SA-564M
SA-568/SA-568M
SA-572/SA-572M
SA-574
SA-577/SA-577M
SA-578/SA-578M
SA-587
SA-592/SA-592M
SA-609/SA-609M
SA-612/SA-612M
SA-638/SA-638M
SA-645/SA-645M
SA-649/SA-649M
SA-660
SA-662/SA-662M
SA-666
SA-667/SA-667M
SA-671
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, High Strength, Quenched and
Tempered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forged or Rolled 8 and 9% Nickel Alloy Steel Flanges, Fittings,
Valves, and Parts for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower Temperatures . . . .
General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe. . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered,
Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel. . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel. . . . .
Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quenched and Tempered Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure
Vessel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched-and-Tempered,
Chromium-Molybdenum and Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered, NickelChromium-Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered 8 and 9
Percent Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Cold-Drawn Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Titanium for Glass or
Diffused Metallic Coatings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and
Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel, Sheet, Carbon and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and
Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. . . . . . . . . .
Alloy Steel Socket-Head Cap Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination of Steel Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and Clad Steel Plates for
Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric-Resistance-Welded Low-Carbon Steel Pipe for the Chemical
Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Strength Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Steel Forged
Fittings and Parts for Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Castings, Carbon, Low-Alloy, and Martensitic Stainless Steel, Ultrasonic
Examination Thereof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High Strength, for Moderate and
Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precipitation Hardening Iron Base Superalloy Bars, Forgings, and
Forging Stock for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Five Percent Nickel Alloy Steel, Specially Heat
Treated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forged Steel Rolls, Used for Corrugating Paper Machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centrifugally Cast Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese, for Moderate and Lower
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip,
Plate, and Flat Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centrifugally Cast Dual Metal (Gray and White Cast Iron) Cylinders . . . . . .
Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower
Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
983
987
993
1003
1013
1019
1025
1035
1043
1049
1053
1059
1065
1071
1075
1087
1097
1131
1137
1145
1149
1155
1163
1167
1179
1183
1187
1193
1197
1203
1207
1217
1219
SA-672
SA-675/ SA-675M
SA-688/SA-688M
SA-691
SA-693
SA-695
SA-696
SA-703/SA-703M
SA-705/SA-705M
SA-723/SA-723M
SA-724/SA-724M
SA-727/SA-727M
SA-731/SA-731M
SA-736/SA-736M
SA-737/SA-737M
SA-738/SA-738M
SA-739
SA-745/SA-745M
SA-747/SA-747M
SA-748/SA-748M
SA-749/SA-749M
SA-751
SA-765/SA-765M
SA-770/SA-770M
SA-781/SA-781M
SA-788
SA-789/SA-789M
SA-790/SA-790M
SA-803/SA-803M
SA-813/SA-813M
SA-814/SA-814M
SA-815/SA-815M
Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service at Moderate
Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical
Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion-Welded for HighPressure Service at High Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precipitation-Hardening Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, for Fluid Power
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought or Cold-Finished, Special Quality,
for Pressure Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Castings, General Requirements, for Pressure-Containing Parts. . . . . . .
Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Forgings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alloy Steel Forgings for High-Strength Pressure Component
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, Quenched and
Tempered, for Welded Layered Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components With Inherent Notch
Toughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless, Welded Ferritic, and Martensitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-CopperChromium-Molybdenum-Columbium and Nickel-CopperManganese-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, High-Strength, Low-Alloy Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel,
for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought, for Elevated Temperature or PressureContaining Parts, or Both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ultrasonic Examination of Austenitic Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Castings, Stainless, Precipitation Hardening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Statically Cast Chilled White Iron-Gray Iron Dual Metal Rolls for Pressure
Vessel Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel, Strip, Carbon and High-Strength Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled,
General Requirements for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel
Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon Steel and Low-Alloy Steel Pressure-Vessel-Component
Forgings With Mandatory Toughness Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Through-Thickness Tension Testing of Steel Plates for Special
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Castings, Steel and Alloy, Common Requirements, for General Industrial
Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Forgings, General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Ferritic /Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Ferritic /Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welded Ferritic Stainless Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single- or Double-Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold-Worked Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wrought Ferritic, Ferritic /Austenitic, and Martensitic Stainless Steel Piping
Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ix
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
1229
1239
1245
1257
1265
1273
1277
1281
1301
1309
1315
1319
1325
1331
1337
1341
1347
1351
1357
1363
1365
1377
1385
1393
1401
1419
1433
1441
1453
1465
1475
1483
SA-832/SA-832M
SA-834
SA-836/SA-836M
SA-841/SA-841M
SA-905
SA-941
SA-960
SA-961
SA-962/SA-962M
SA-995
SA-999/SA-999M
SA-1008/SA-1008M
SA-1011/SA-1011M
SA-1016/SA-1016M
SA-1017/SA-1017M
SF-568M
SA/AS 1548
SA/CSA-G40.21
SA/EN 10028-2
SA/EN 10028-3
SA/JIS G3118
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-MolybdenumVanadium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Requirements for Iron Castings for General Industrial Use . . . . . . .
Forgings, Titanium-Stabilized Carbon Steel, for Glass-Lined Piping
and Pressure Vessel Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels, Produced by the Thermo-Mechanical
Control Process (TMCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Wire, Pressure Vessel Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related Alloys, and
Ferroalloys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Requirements for Wrought Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Requirements for Steel Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves and
Parts for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Requirements for Steel Fasteners or Fastener Materials, or Both,
Intended for Use at Any Temperature from Cryogenic to the Creep
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for PressureContaining Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements for Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy
and High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength
Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved
Formability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements for Ferritic Alloy Steel, Austenitic Alloy Steel, and
Stainless Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy-Steel Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten . . . . .
Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Plates for Pressure Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structural Quality Steels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat Products Made of Steels for Pressure Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat Products Made of Steels for Pressure Purposes Part 3: Weldable Fine
Grain Steels, Normalized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels for Intermediate and Moderate
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1495
1501
1505
1511
1521
1527
1535
1547
1559
1569
1573
1587
1597
1605
1619
1623
1635
1637
1639
1641
1643
MANDATORY APPENDIX
Appendix I
Standard Units for Use in Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
x
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
FOREWORD
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers set
up a committee in 1911 for the purpose of formulating
standard rules for the construction of steam boilers and
other pressure vessels. This committee is now called the
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee.
The Committee’s function is to establish rules of safety,
relating only to pressure integrity, governing the construction1 of boilers, pressure vessels, transport tanks and
nuclear components, and inservice inspection for pressure
integrity of nuclear components and transport tanks, and
to interpret these rules when questions arise regarding
their intent. This code does not address other safety issues
relating to the construction of boilers, pressure vessels,
transport tanks and nuclear components, and the inservice
inspection of nuclear components and transport tanks.
The user of the Code should refer to other pertinent codes,
standards, laws, regulations, or other relevant documents.
With few exceptions, the rules do not, of practical necessity, reflect the likelihood and consequences of deterioration in service related to specific service fluids or external
operating environments. Recognizing this, the Committee
has approved a wide variety of construction rules in this
Section to allow the user or his designee to select those
which will provide a pressure vessel having a margin for
deterioration in service so as to give a reasonably long,
safe period of usefulness. Accordingly, it is not intended
that this Section be used as a design handbook; rather,
engineering judgment must be employed in the selection
of those sets of Code rules suitable to any specific service
or need.
This Code contains mandatory requirements, specific
prohibitions, and nonmandatory guidance for construction activities. The Code does not address all aspects of
these activities and those aspects which are not specifically addressed should not be considered prohibited. The
Code is not a handbook and cannot replace education,
experience, and the use of engineering judgment. The
phrase engineering judgment refers to technical judgments made by knowledgeable designers experienced in
the application of the Code. Engineering judgments must
be consistent with Code philosophy and such judgments
must never be used to overrule mandatory requirements
or specific prohibitions of the Code.
The Committee recognizes that tools and techniques
used for design and analysis change as technology progresses and expects engineers to use good judgment in the
application of these tools. The designer is responsible for
complying with Code rules and demonstrating compliance with Code equations when such equations are mandatory. The Code neither requires nor prohibits the use
of computers for the design or analysis of components
constructed to the requirements of the Code. However,
designers and engineers using computer programs for
design or analysis are cautioned that they are responsible
for all technical assumptions inherent in the programs
they use and they are responsible for the application of
these programs to their design.
The Code does not fully address tolerances. When
dimensions, sizes, or other parameters are not specified
with tolerances, the values of these parameters are considered nominal and allowable tolerances or local variances
may be considered acceptable when based on engineering
judgment and standard practices as determined by the
designer.
The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee deals with
the care and inspection of boilers and pressure vessels in
service only to the extent of providing suggested rules
of good practice as an aid to owners and their inspectors.
The rules established by the Committee are not to be
interpreted as approving, recommending, or endorsing
any proprietary or specific design or as limiting in any
way the manufacturer’s freedom to choose any method
of design or any form of construction that conforms to
the Code rules.
The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee meets regularly to consider revisions of the rules, new rules as
dictated by technological development, Code Cases, and
requests for interpretations. Only the Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Committee has the authority to provide official
interpretations of this Code. Requests for revisions, new
rules, Code Cases, or interpretations shall be addressed
to the Secretary in writing and shall give full particulars in
order to receive consideration and action (see Mandatory
Appendix covering preparation of technical inquiries).
Proposed revisions to the Code resulting from inquiries
1
Construction, as used in this Foreword, is an all-inclusive term
comprising materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, testing, certification, and pressure relief.
xi
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
04
will be presented to the Main Committee for appropriate
action. The action of the Main Committee becomes effective only after confirmation by letter ballot of the Committee and approval by ASME.
Proposed revisions to the Code approved by the Committee are submitted to the American National Standards
Institute and published at http://cstools.asme.org/wbpms/
public/index.cfm?PublicReviewpRevisions to invite
comments from all interested persons. After the allotted
time for public review and final approval by ASME,
revisions are published annually in Addenda to the Code.
Code Cases may be used in the construction of components to be stamped with the ASME Code symbol beginning with the date of their approval by ASME.
After Code revisions are approved by ASME, they
may be used beginning with the date of issuance shown on
the Addenda. Revisions, except for revisions to material
specifications in Section II, Parts A and B, become mandatory six months after such date of issuance, except for
boilers or pressure vessels contracted for prior to the end
of the six-month period. Revisions to material specifications are originated by the American Society for Testing
and Materials (ASTM) and other recognized national or
international organizations, and are usually adopted by
ASME. However, those revisions may or may not have
any effect on the suitability of material, produced to earlier editions of specifications, for use in ASME construction. ASME material specifications approved for use in
each construction Code are listed in the Guidelines for
Acceptable ASTM Editions in Section II, Parts A and B.
These Guidelines list, for each specification, the latest
edition adopted by ASME, and earlier and later editions
considered by ASME to be identical for ASME construction.
The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee in the formulation of its rules and in the establishment of maximum
design and operating pressures considers materials, construction, methods of fabrication, inspection, and safety
devices.
The Code Committee does not rule on whether a component shall or shall not be constructed to the provisions
of the Code. The Scope of each Section has been established to identify the components and parameters considered by the Committee in formulating the Code rules.
Questions or issues regarding compliance of a specific
component with the Code rules are to be directed to
the ASME Certificate Holder (Manufacturer). Inquiries
concerning the interpretation of the Code are to be
directed to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee. ASME is to be notified should questions arise
concerning improper use of an ASME Code symbol.
The specifications for materials given in Section II
are identical with or similar to those of specifications
published by ASTM, AWS, and other recognized national
or international organizations. When reference is made
in an ASME material specification to a non-ASME specification for which a companion ASME specification
exists, the reference shall be interpreted as applying to
the ASME material specification. Not all materials
included in the material specifications in Section II have
been adopted for Code use. Usage is limited to those
materials and grades adopted by at least one of the other
Sections of the Code for application under rules of that
Section. All materials allowed by these various Sections
and used for construction within the scope of their rules
shall be furnished in accordance with material specifications contained in Section II or referenced in the Guidelines for Acceptable ASTM Editions in Section II, Parts
A and B, except where otherwise provided in Code Cases
or in the applicable Section of the Code. Materials covered by these specifications are acceptable for use in items
covered by the Code Sections only to the degree indicated
in the applicable Section. Materials for Code use should
preferably be ordered, produced, and documented on this
basis; Guideline for Acceptable ASTM Editions in Section II, Part A and Guideline for Acceptable ASTM Editions in Section II, Part B list editions of ASME and year
dates of specifications that meet ASME requirements and
which may be used in Code construction. Material produced to an acceptable specification with requirements
different from the requirements of the corresponding
specifications listed in the Guideline for Acceptable
ASTM Editions in Part A or Part B may also be used in
accordance with the above, provided the material manufacturer or vessel manufacturer certifies with evidence
acceptable to the Authorized Inspector that the corresponding requirements of specifications listed in the
Guideline for Acceptable ASTM Editions in Part A or
Part B have been met. Material produced to an acceptable
material specification is not limited as to country of origin.
When required by context in this Section, the singular
shall be interpreted as the plural, and vice-versa; and the
feminine, masculine, or neuter gender shall be treated as
such other gender as appropriate.
Either U.S. Customary units or SI units may be used
for compliance with all requirements of this edition, but
one system shall be used consistently throughout for all
phases of construction.
Either the U.S. Customary units or SI units that are
listed in Mandatory Appendix I are identified in the text,
or are identified in the nomenclature for equations, shall
be used consistently for all phases of construction (e.g.
materials, design, fabrication, and reports). Since values
in the two systems are not exact equivalents, each system
shall be used independently of the other without mixing
U.S. Customary units and SI units.
xii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
When SI units are selected, U.S. Customary values in
referenced specifications that do not contain SI units shall
be converted to SI values to at least three significant
figures for use in calculations and other aspects of construction.
With the publication of the 2004 Edition, Section II,
Part D is published as two separate publications. One
publication contains values only in U.S. Customary units
and the other contains values only in SI units. The selection of the version to use is dependent on the set of units
selected for construction.
xiii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
xiv
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
STATEMENT OF POLICY
ON THE USE OF CODE SYMBOLS AND
CODE AUTHORIZATION IN ADVERTISING
ASME has established procedures to authorize qualified organizations to perform various activities in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code. It is the aim of the Society to
provide recognition of organizations so authorized. An
organization holding authorization to perform various
activities in accordance with the requirements of the Code
may state this capability in its advertising literature.
Organizations that are authorized to use Code Symbols
for marking items or constructions that have been constructed and inspected in compliance with the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code are issued Certificates
of Authorization. It is the aim of the Society to maintain
the standing of the Code Symbols for the benefit of the
users, the enforcement jurisdictions, and the holders of
the symbols who comply with all requirements.
Based on these objectives, the following policy has
been established on the usage in advertising of facsimiles
of the symbols, Certificates of Authorization, and reference to Code construction. The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers does not “approve,” “certify,”
“rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, or activity
and there shall be no statements or implications that might
so indicate. An organization holding a Code Symbol
and /or a Certificate of Authorization may state in advertising literature that items, constructions, or activities “are
built (produced or performed) or activities conducted in
accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code,” or “meet the requirements
of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.”
The ASME Symbol shall be used only for stamping
and nameplates as specifically provided in the Code.
However, facsimiles may be used for the purpose of
fostering the use of such construction. Such usage may
be by an association or a society, or by a holder of a Code
Symbol who may also use the facsimile in advertising to
show that clearly specified items will carry the symbol.
General usage is permitted only when all of a manufacturer’s items are constructed under the rules.
The ASME logo, which is the cloverleaf with the letters
ASME within, shall not be used by any organization other
than ASME.
STATEMENT OF POLICY
ON THE USE OF ASME MARKING
TO IDENTIFY MANUFACTURED ITEMS
Symbols shall not be used on any item that is not constructed in accordance with all of the applicable requirements of the Code.
Items shall not be described on ASME Data Report
Forms nor on similar forms referring to ASME that tend
to imply that all Code requirements have been met when,
in fact, they have not been. Data Report Forms covering
items not fully complying with ASME requirements
should not refer to ASME or they should clearly identify
all exceptions to the ASME requirements.
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code provides
rules for the construction of boilers, pressure vessels,
and nuclear components. This includes requirements for
materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection,
and stamping. Items constructed in accordance with all
of the applicable rules of the Code are identified with the
official Code Symbol Stamp described in the governing
Section of the Code.
Markings such as “ASME,” “ASME Standard,” or any
other marking including “ASME” or the various Code
xv
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
xvi
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PERSONNEL
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
Subcommittees, Subgroups, and Working Groups
As of January 1, 2004
MAIN COMMITTEE
G. G. Karcher, Chair
J. G. Feldstein, Vice Chair
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Secretary
R. W. Barnes
J. E. Batey
D. L. Berger
M. N. Bressler
D. A. Canonico
F. C. Cherny
D. A. Douin
R. E. Gimple
M. Gold
T. E. Hansen
C. L. Hoffmann
D. F. Landers
MARINE CONFERENCE GROUP
J. Tiratto, Chair
L. W. Douthwaite
W. M. Lundy
J. R. MacKay
U. R. Miller
R. A. Moen
P. A. Molvie
C. C. Neely
T. P. Pastor
C. J. Pieper
M. D. Rana
B. W. Roberts
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
A. Selz
R. W. Swayne
D. E. Tanner
S. V. Voorhees
CONFERENCE COMMITTEE
D. A. Douin — Illinois
(Chair)
R. D. Reetz — North Dakota
(Vice Chair)
D. E. Tanner — Ohio
(Secretary)
R. J. Aben, Jr. — Michigan
J. S. Aclaro — California
J. T. Amato — Minnesota
E. A. Anderson — Chicago,
Illinois
F. R. Andrus — Oregon
R. D. Austin — Colorado
M. M. Barber — Michigan
R. Barlett — Arizona
F. P. Barton — Virginia
W. K. Brigham — New
Hampshire
D. E. Burns — Nebraska
J. H. Burpee — Maine
C. Castle — Nova Scotia,
Canada
R. R. Cate — Louisiana
D. C. Cook — California
R. A. Coomes — Kentucky
D. Eastman — Newfoundland
and Labrador, Canada
G. L. Ebeyer — New Orleans,
Louisiana
E. Everett — Georgia
J. M. Given, Jr. — North
Carolina
P. C. Hackford — Utah
J. B. Harlan — Delaware
M. L. Holloway — Oklahoma
K. Hynes — Prince Edward
Island, Canada
EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE (MAIN COMMITTEE)
J. G. Feldstein, Chair
G. G. Karcher, Vice Chair
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Secretary
R. W. Barnes
D. A. Canonico
R. E. Gimple
M. Gold
J. R. MacKay
T. P. Pastor
A. Selz
A. J. Spencer
D. E. Tanner
HONORARY MEMBERS (MAIN COMMITTEE)
R. D. Bonner
R. J. Bosnak
R. J. Cepluch
L. J. Chockie
W. D. Doty
J. R. Farr
R. C. Griffin
E. J. Hemzy
M. H. Jawad
J. LeCoff
F. N. Moschini
W. E. Somers
L. P. Zick, Jr.
HONORS AND AWARDS COMMITTEE
J. R. MacKay, Chair
J. N. Shih, Secretary
J. E. Batey
D. L. Berger
J. G. Feldstein
M. Gold
F. E. Gregor
W. L. Haag, Jr.
M. H. Jawad
D. P. Jones
T. P. Pastor
C. J. Pieper
R. R. Stevenson
D. T. Jagger — Ohio
D. J. Jenkins — Kansas
S. Katz — British Columbia,
Canada
M. Kotb — Quebec, Canada
K. T. Lau — Alberta, Canada
S. E. Lyons — Arkansas
M. A. Malek — Florida
G. F. Mankel — Alaska
R. D. Marvin II — Washington
I. W. Mault — Manitoba,
Canada
H. T. McEwen — Mississippi
R. Mile — Ontario, Canada
M. F. Mooney —
Massachusetts
Y. Nagpaul — Hawaii
T. Parks — Texas
J. D. Payton — Pennsylvania
M. R. Peterson — Alaska
H. D. Pfaff — South Dakota
D. C. Price — Yukon
Territory, Canada
R. S. Pucek — Wisconsin
D. E. Ross — New Brunswick,
Canada
M. Shuff — West Virginia
N. Surtees — Saskatchewan,
Canada
M. R. Toth — Tennessee
M. J. Verhagen — Wisconsin
M. Washington — New Jersey
R. B. West — Iowa
M. J. Wheel — Vermont
D. J. Willis — Indiana
INTERNATIONAL INTEREST REVIEW GROUP
V. Felix
S. H. Leong
xvii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
J. L. Jones
Not for Resale
P. Williamson
SUBCOMMITTEE ON POWER BOILERS (SC I)
J. R. MacKay, Chair
D. L. Berger, Vice Chair
J. N. Shih, Secretary
D. A. Canonico
K. K. Coleman
P. D. Edwards
J. Hainsworth
T. E. Hansen
J. S. Hunter
C. F. Jeerings
J. P. Libbrecht
H. Lorenz
Heat Recovery Steam Generators Task Group (SC I & SC VIII)
T. E. Hansen, Chair
R. W. Anderson
G. L. Bostick
I. J. Cotton
L. R. Douglas
J. D. Fishburn
E. M. Ortman
A. L. Plumley
W. L. Lowry
T. C. McGough
R. E. McLaughlin
P. A. Molvie
J. T. Pillow
R. G. Presnak
B. W. Roberts
R. D. Schueler, Jr.
J. P. Swezy
J. M. Tanzosh
R. V. Wielgoszinski
D. J. Willis
SUBCOMMITTEE ON MATERIALS (SC II)
M. Gold, Chair
R. A. Moen, Vice Chair
N. Lobo, Secretary
D. C. Agarwal
W. R. Apblett, Jr.
M. N. Bressler
H. D. Bushfield
J. Cameron
D. A. Canonico
D. W. Gandy
M. H. Gilkey
J. F. Grubb
J. F. Henry
Honorary Members (SC I)
D. N. French
W. E. Somers
R. L. Williams
Subgroup on Design (SC I)
P. A. Molvie, Chair
M. L. Coats
J. D. Fishburn
C. F. Jeerings
J. C. Light
R. D. Schueler, Jr.
J. L. Seigle
N. Surtees
J. P. Swezy
S. V. Torkildson
R. V. Wielgoszinski
A. P. Ahrendt
T. M. Cullen
R. Dirscherl
W. D. Doty
W. D. Edsall
R. E. McLaughlin
Y. Oishi
R. D. Schueler, Jr.
J. P. Swezy
R. V. Wielgoszinski
R. W. Mikitka, Chair
J. A. Morrow, Secretary
S. R. Frost
D. S. Griffin
J. F. Grubb
W. L. Lowry
T. C. McGough
J. T. Pillow
R. P. Sullivan
R. V. Wielgoszinski
D. J. Willis
E. G. Nisbett, Chair
A. Appleton
R. M. Davison
B. M. Dingman
M. J. Dosdourian
T. Graham
J. F. Grubb
K. M. Hottle
D. Janikowski
J. F. Henry
J. P. Libbrecht
F. Masuyama
J. M. Tanzosh
H. N. Titer, Jr.
W. M. Lundy, Chair
J. P. Glaspie, Secretary
D. C. Agarwal
H. D. Bushfield
D. A. Canonico
W. D. Doty
D. M. Fryer
A. F. Garbolevsky
J. P. Glaspie
F. Massi
T. C. McGough
M. W. Smith
E. A. Whittle
xviii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
D. C. Krouse
L. J. Lavezzi
W. C. Mack
J. K. Mahaney
A. S. Melilli
K. E. Orie
E. Upitis
R. Zawierucha
A. W. Zeuthen
Subgroup on International Material Specifications (SC II)
Subgroup on Piping (SC I)
T. E. Hansen, Chair
D. L. Berger
P. D. Edwards
W. L. Lowry
M. Katcher
E. Michalopoulos
D. Nadel
D. F. Shaw
C. H. Sturgeon
Subgroup on Ferrous Specifications (SC II)
Subgroup on Materials (SC I)
B. W. Roberts, Chair
J. S. Hunter, Secretary
D. A. Canonico
K. K. Coleman
K. L. Hayes
J. J. Heger
G. C. Hsu
C. E. Spaeder, Jr.
A. W. Zeuthen
Subgroup on External Pressure (SC II & SC-D)
Subgroup on General Requirements (SC I)
R. E. McLaughlin, Chair
J. Hainsworth, Secretary
D. L. Berger
P. D. Edwards
C. F. Jeerings
J. C. Light
C. L. Hoffmann
F. Masuyama
R. K. Nanstad
M. L. Nayyar
E. G. Nisbett
D. W. Rahoi
B. W. Roberts
E. Shapiro
R. C. Sutherlin
R. W. Swindeman
J. M. Tanzosh
B. E. Thurgood
J. C. Vaillant
Honorary Members (SC II)
Subgroup on Fabrication and Examination (SC I)
D. L. Berger, Chair
J. T. Pillow, Secretary
J. Hainsworth
T. E. Hansen
T. C. McGough
D. W. Rahoi
R. D. Scheuler, Jr.
R. H. Sirois
J. C. Steverman, Jr.
J. K. Tercey
S. R. Timko
S. V. Torkildson
Not for Resale
M. Gold
D. O. Henry
M. Higuchi
H. Lorenz
F. Osweiller
R. D. Schueler, Jr.
E. A. Steen
E. Upitis
Subgroup on Nonferrous Alloys (SC II)
D. W. Rahoi, Chair
M. Katcher, Secretary
W. R. Apblett, Jr.
H. D. Bushfield
L. G. Coffee
M. H. Gilkey
E. L. Hibner
G. C. Hsu
Honorary Member (SC III)
A. G. Kireta, Jr.
J. Kissell
O. Miyahara
D. T. Peters
E. Shapiro
R. C. Sutherlin
R. Zawierucha
F. R. Drahos
Subgroup on Containment Systems for Spent Fuel
and High-Level Waste Transport Packagings (SC III)
G. M. Foster, Chair
G. J. Solovey, Vice Chair
D. K. Morton, Secretary
W. H. Borter
J. T. Conner
E. L. Farrow
J. M. Floyd
R. S. Hill III
H. W. Lee
P. E. McConnell
I. D. McInnes
A. B. Meichler
G. C. Mok
Subgroup on Strength, Ferrous Alloys (SC II)
C. L. Hoffmann, Chair
J. M. Tanzosh, Secretary
W. R. Apblett, Jr.
D. A. Canonico
K. K. Coleman
M. Gold
F. Masuyama
O. Miyahara
R. A. Moen
H. Murakami
D. W. Rahoi
B. W. Roberts
M. S. Shelton
R. W. Swindeman
B. E. Thurgood
T. P. Vassallo
R. E. Nickell
T. J. O’Connell
E. L. Pleins
T. Saegusa
H. P. Shrivastava
N. M. Simpson
R. H. Smith
J. D. Stevenson
C. J. Temus
P. Turula
A. D. Watkins
S. Yukawa
Subgroup on Strength of Weldments (SC II & SC IX)
J. M. Tanzosh, Chair
K. K. Coleman
W. D. Doty
K. L. Hayes
J. F. Henry
Subgroup on Design (SC III)
D. W. Rahoi
B. W. Roberts
W. J. Sperko
B. E. Thurgood
R. P. Deubler, Chair
C. W. Bruny, Vice Chair
A. N. Nguyen, Secretary
T. M. Adams
E. B. Branch
M. N. Bressler
D. L. Caldwell
J. R. Cole
R. E. Cornman, Jr.
A. A. Dermenjian
D. H. Hanrath
R. S. Hill III
R. I. Jetter
Subgroup on Toughness (SC II & SC VIII)
W. S. Jacobs, Chair
J. L. Arnold
R. J. Basile
J. Cameron
W. D. Doty
H. E. Gordon
C. D. Lamb
K. Mokhtarian
C. C. Neely
T. T. Phillips
M. D. Rana
D. A. Swanson
E. Upitis
S. Yukawa
Special Working Group on Nonmetallic Materials (SC II)
C. W. Rowley, Chair
F. L. Brown
P. S. Hill
Working Group on Supports (SG-D) (SC III)
F. R. Volgstadt
R. H. Walker
F. Worth
R. J. Masterson, Chair
F. J. Birch, Secretary
U. S. Bandyopadhyay
R. P. Deubler
J. C. Finneran, Jr.
A. N. Nguyen
SUBCOMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR POWER (SC III)
R. W. Barnes, Chair
R. M. Jessee, Vice Chair
C. A. Sanna, Secretary
Y. Asada
W. H. Borter
E. B. Branch
M. N. Bressler
F. C. Cherny
R. E. Cornman, Jr.
W. D. Doty
R. P. Deubler
B. A. Erler
G. M. Foster
D. H. Hanrath
R. S. Hill III
C. L. Hoffmann
C. C. Kim
D. F. Landers
W. C. LaRochelle
K. A. Manoly
E. A. Mayhew
W. N. McLean
R. A. Moen
C. J. Pieper
R. F. Reedy
B. B. Scott
J. D. Stevenson
C. H. Walters
K. R. Wichman
P. R. Olson
I. Saito
J. R. Stinson
D. V. Walshe
C.-I. Wu
Working Group on Core Support Structures (SG-D) (SC III)
J. T. Land
Working Group on Dynamic and Extreme Load Conditions
(SG-D) (SC III)
D. L. Caldwell, Chair
P. L. Anderson, Secretary
M. K. Au-Yang
R. D. Blevins
xix
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
H. Kobayashi
J. T. Land
D. F. Landers
K. A. Manoly
R. J. Masterson
W. N. McLean
J. C. Minichiello
T. Nakamura
W. Z. Novak
I. Saito
G. C. Slagis
J. D. Stevenson
K. R. Wichman
Not for Resale
P.-Y. Chen
W. S. LaPay
H. Lockert
P. R. Olson
Working Group on Piping (SG-D) (SC III)
J. R. Cole, Chair
P. Hirschberg, Secretary
T. M. Adams
G. A. Antaki
J. Catalano
C. Y. Chern
J. T. Conner
R. J. Gurdal
R. W. Haupt
R. S. Hill III
D. F. Landers
V. Matzen
Subgroup on Materials, Fabrication, and Examination (SC III)
J. F. McCabe
J. C. Minichiello
F. F. Naguib
A. N. Nguyen
O. O. Oyamada
R. D. Patel
E. C. Rodabaugh
M. S. Sills
G. C. Slagis
V. K. Verma
E. A. Wais
C.-I. Wu
C. L. Hoffmann, Chair
G. P. Milley, Secretary
B. H. Berg
W. H. Borter
D. M. Doyle
G. M. Foster
G. B. Georgiev
R. M. Jessee
C. C. Kim
Subgroup on Pressure Relief (SC III)
S. F. Harrison, Jr., Chair
F. C. Cherny
E. M. Petrosky
Working Group on Probabilistic Methods in Design
(SG-D) (SC III)
R. S. Hill III, Chair
J. T. Conner, Secretary
T. Asayama
B. M. Ayyub
K. R. Balkey
A. A. Dermenjian
I. Saito
M. E. Schmidt
J. P. Tucker
R. F. Reedy, Chair
W. H. Borter
M. N. Bressler
D. L. Caldwell
R. P. Deubler
J. E. Livingston
J. R. Rajan
D. B. Spencer, Jr.
G. K. Vaghasia
M. F. Hessheimer, Chair
T. C. Inman, Vice Chair
A. J. Roby, Secretary
J. F. Artuso
A. C. Eberhardt
B. A. Erler
J. Gutierrez
H. R. Sonderegger
J. C. Tsacoyeanes
J. P. Tucker
R. G. Visalli
P. A. Molvie, Chair
S. V. Voorhees, Vice Chair
G. Moino, Secretary
R. Bartlett
T. L. Bedeaux
D. C. Bixby
J. Calland
B. G. French
W. L. Haag, Jr.
J. D. Hoh
D. J. Jenkins
K. M. McTague
R. B. Keating
D. E. Matthews
G. K. Miller
W. Z. Novak
E. Pelling
H. S. Thornton
Special Working Group on Environmental Effects (SG-D) (SC III)
W. Z. Novak, Chair
Y. Asada
R. S. Hill III
C. L. Hoffmann
R. A. Moen
S. Yukawa
S. V. Voorhees, Chair
T. L. Bedeaux
K. J. Hoey
M. R. Minick
B. B. Scott
H. K. Sharma
D. M. Vickery
D. V. Walshe
C. H. Walters
J. D. Hoh
K. M. McTague
P. A. Molvie
Subgroup on Cast Iron Boilers (SC IV)
K. M. McTague, Chair
T. L. Bedeaux
C. P. McQuiggan
xx
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
K. R. Moskwa
E. A. Nordstrom
J. L. Seigle
R. V. Wielgoszinski
F. P. Barton, Honorary
Member
R. B. Duggan, Honorary
Member
R. H. Weigel, Honorary
Member
J. I. Woodward, Honorary
Member
Subgroup on Care and Operation of Heating Boilers (SC IV)
Subgroup on General Requirements (SC III & SC 3C)
W. C. LaRochelle, Chair
C. A. Lizotte, Secretary
A. Appleton
B. H. Berg
E. A. Mayhew
R. P. McIntyre
R. Mile
D. C. Jeng
T. E. Johnson
N.-H. Lee
B. B. Scott
R. E. Shewmaker
J. D. Stevenson
A. Y. C. Wong
SUBCOMMITTEE ON HEATING BOILERS (SC IV)
Working Group on Vessels (SG-D) (SC III)
C. W. Bruny, Chair
F. F. Naguib, Secretary
D. H. Hanrath
M. Hartzman
W. J. Heilker
A. Kalnins
B. A. Erler
D. H. Hanrath
W. C. LaRochelle
J. D. Stevenson
JOINT ACI-ASME COMMITTEE ON
CONCRETE COMPONENTS FOR NUCLEAR SERVICE (SC 3C)
Working Group on Valves (SG-D) (SC III)
W. N. McLean, Chair
R. R. Brodin
R. Koester
J. D. Page
S. N. Shields
A. L. Szeglin
D. G. Thibault
Special Working Group on Editing and Review (SC III)
Working Group on Pumps (SG-D) (SC III)
R. E. Cornman, Jr., Chair
A. A. Fraser
M. Higuchi
G. R. Jones
J. W. Leavitt
M. Lau
R. A. Moen
H. Murakami
C. J. Pieper
N. M. Simpson
W. J. Sperko
K. B. Stuckey
S. Yukawa
Not for Resale
K. R. Moskwa
R. H. Weigel
J. I. Woodworth
Working Group on Ultrasonics (SG-VM) (SC V)
Subgroup on Water Heaters (SC IV)
W. L. Haag, Jr., Chair
J. Calland
T. D. Gantt
F. M. Lucas
K. M. McTague
N. Y. Faransso
O. F. Hedden
R. Kellerhall
R. W. Kruzic
E. Robinson
F. J. Schreiner
M. A. Taylor
T. E. Trant
J. F. Manning
W. C. McGaughey
F. J. Sattler
SUBCOMMITTEE ON PRESSURE VESSELS (SC VIII)
T. P. Pastor, Chair
K. Mokhtarian, Vice Chair
S. J. Rossi, Secretary
R. J. Basile
V. Bogosian
J. Cameron
R. M. Elliott
J. G. Feldstein
J. P. Glaspie
M. J. Houle
W. S. Jacobs
G. G. Karcher
K. T. Lau
R. Mahadeen
Subgroup on Welded Boilers (SC IV)
J. L. Seigle, Chair
R. Bartlett
T. L. Bedeaux
J. Calland
B. G. French
E. A. Nordstrom
R. P. Sullivan
R. V. Wielgoszinski
SUBCOMMITTEE ON
NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (SC V)
J. E. Batey, Chair
F. B. Kovacs, Vice Chair
E. H. Maradiaga, Secretary
S. J. Akrin
A. S. Birks
N. Y. Faransso
G. W. Hembree
R. W. Kruzic
J. F. Manning
W. C. McGaughey
R. D. McGuire
D. R. Quattlebaum, Jr.
F. J. Sattler
E. F. Summers, Jr.
M. J. Wheel
Subgroup on Design (SC VIII)
U. R. Miller, Chair
R. E. Knoblock, Secretary
O. A. Barsky
R. J. Basile
M. R. Bauman
M. R. Breach
S. M. Caldwell
J. R. Farr
J. P. Glaspie
W. S. Jacobs
R. W. Mikitka
Subgroup on General Requirements/
Personnel Qualifications and Inquiries (SC V)
R. D. McGuire, Chair
J. E. Batey
A. S. Birks
N. Y. Faransso
G. W. Hembree
J. R. MacKay
J. P. Swezy
Subgroup on Surface Examination Methods (SC V)
S. J. Akrin, Chair
A. S. Birks
N. Y. Faransso
G. W. Hembree
R. W. Kruzic
C. D. Rodery, Chair
E. A. Steen, Vice Chair
J. L. Arnold
W. J. Bees
H. E. Gordon
M. J. Houle
W. S. Jacobs
R. W. Kruzic
J. F. Manning
W. C. McGaughey
F. J. Sattler
E. F. Summers, Jr.
J. P. Swezy
S. C. Roberts, Chair
D. B. Demichael, Secretary
V. Bogosian
R. M. Elliott
J. P. Glaspie
K. T. Lau
J. Cameron, Chair
E. E. Morgenegg, Secretary
D. C. Agarwal
W. D. Doty
J. F. Grubb
E. L. Hibner
M. Katcher
F. B. Kovacs
R. W. Kruzic
E. F. Summers, Jr.
J. P. Swezy
xxi
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
A. S. Mann
C. C. Neely
A. S. Olivares
K. J. Schneider
K. K. Tam
Subgroup on Materials (SC VIII)
J. F. Manning
Working Group on Radiography (SG-VM) (SC V)
G. W. Hembree, Chair
S. J. Akrin
J. E. Batey
N. Y. Faransso
D. J. Kreft
D. C. Lamb
J. S. Lee
B. R. Morelock
M. J. Pischke
B. F. Shelley
Subgroup on General Requirements (SC VIII)
Working Group on Acoustic Emissions (SG-VM) (SC V)
J. E. Batey
K. Mokhtarian
T. P. Pastor
M. D. Rana
G. B. Rawls, Jr.
C. D. Rodery
A. Selz
S. C. Shah
C. H. Sturgeon
K. K. Tam
E. L. Thomas, Jr.
Subgroup on Fabrication and Inspection (SC VIII)
D. R. Quattlebaum, Jr.
F. J. Sattler
E. F. Summers, Jr.
M. J. Wheel
Subgroup on Volumetric Methods (SC V)
G. W. Hembree, Chair
S. J. Akrin
J. E. Batey
N. Y. Faransso
R. Kellerhall
F. B. Kovacs
R. W. Mikitka
U. R. Miller
C. C. Neely
M. J. Pischke
M. D. Rana
S. C. Roberts
C. D. Rodery
K. J. Schneider
A. Selz
J. R. Sims, Jr.
E. A. Steen
K. K. Tam
E. L. Thomas, Jr.
E. Upitis
Not for Resale
H. Lorenz
W. M. Lundy
E. G. Nisbett
K. E. Orie
D. W. Rahoi
E. Upitis
Special Working Group on Graphite Pressure Equipment
(SC VIII)
M. D. Johnson, Chair
U. D’Urso, Secretary
G. Braussen
F. L. Brown
S. W. Hairston
Subgroup on General Requirements (SC IX)
B. R. Newmark, Chair
P. R. Evans
R. M. Jessee
A. S. Olivares
S. Malone
M. R. Minick
T. A. Pindroh
E. Soltow
A. A. Stupica
Subgroup on Materials (SC IX)
M. L. Carpenter, Chair
M. Bernasek
L. P. Connor
R. M. Jessee
C. C. Kim
S. D. Reynolds, Jr.
Special Working Group on Heat Transfer Equipment (SC VIII)
R. Mahadeen, Chair
G. Aurioles, Secretary
O. A Barsky
S. M. Caldwell
M. J. Holtz
U. R. Miller
T. W. Norton
F. Osweiller
R. J. Stastny
S. Yokell
R. P. Zoldak
D. A. Bowers, Chair
V. A. Bell
L. P. Connor
R. B. Corbit
P. R. Evans
P. D. Flenner
K. L. Hayes
J. A. Kapp
J. Keltjens
D. P. Kendall
A. K. Khare
S. C. Mordre
G. J. Mraz
K. D. Murphy
S. N. Pagay
E. H. Perez
E. D. Roll
J. F. Sullivan
F. W. Tatar
S. Tereda
D. A. Bowers, Chair
M. J. Rice, Secretary
R. K. Brown, Jr.
A. S. Olivares
F. C. Ouyang
S. D. Reynolds, Jr.
D. Eisberg, Chair
P. J. Conlisk, Vice Chair
A. J. Roby, Secretary
F. L. Brown
J. L. Bustillos
T. W. Cowley
T. J. Fowler
L. E. Hunt
J. C. Murphy
R. D. McGuire
B. R. Newmark
A. S. Olivares
M. J. Pischke
S. D. Reynolds, Jr.
M. J. Rice
G. W. Spohn III
M. J. Stanko
P. L. Van Fosson
R. R. Young
W. K. Scattergood, Honorary
Member
R. E. Gimple, Chair
G. C. Park, Vice Chair
O. Martinez, Secretary
W. H. Bamford, Jr.
R. L. Beverly
T. J. Conner
D. D. Davis
R. L. Dyle
E. L. Farrow
F. E. Gregor
D. O. Henry
R. D. Kerr
D. F. Landers
J. T. Lindberg
M. J. Houle
C. F. Jeerings
J. P. Swezy
xxii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
D. J. Painter
D. J. Pinell
G. Ramirez
J. R. Richter
B. F. Shelley
F. W. Van Name
D. O. Yancey, Jr.
P. H. Ziehl
SUBCOMMITTEE ON
NUCLEAR INSERVICE INSPECTION (SC XI)
Subgroup on Brazing (SC IX)
M. J. Pischke, Chair
F. Beckman
L. F. Campbell
M. L. Carpenter
M. B. Sims
W. J. Sperko
J. P. Swezy
P. L. Van Fosson
T. C. Wiesner
SUBCOMMITTEE ON
FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC PRESSURE VESSELS (SC X)
J. E. Didlake, Jr.
T. A. Duffey
B. L. Haroldsen
H. L. Heaton
E. A. Rodriguez
J. R. Sims, Jr.
SUBCOMMITTEE ON WELDING (SC IX)
J. G. Feldstein, Chair
W. J. Sperko, Vice Chair
M. R. Aranzamendez,
Secretary
D. A. Bowers
M. L. Carpenter
L. P. Connor
W. D. Doty
P. D. Flenner
M. J. Houle
J. S. Lee
W. M. Lundy
M. J. Houle
J. S. Lee
W. M. Lundy
R. D. McGuire
M. B. Sims
G. W. Spohn III
Subgroup on Procedure Qualification (SC IX)
Task Group on Impulsively Loaded Vessels (SC VIII)
R. B. Nickell, Chair
S. J. Rossi, Secretary
G. A. Antaki
D. D. Barker
R. C. Biel
D. W. Bowman
D. L. Caldwell
H. A. Sadler
C. E. Sainz
W. J. Sperko
M. J. Stanko
R. R. Young
Subgroup on Performance Qualification (SC IX)
Special Working Group on High-Pressure Vessels (SC VIII)
J. R. Sims, Jr., Chair
D. T. Peters, Vice Chair
P. A. Reddington, Secretary
L. P. Antalffy
R. C. Biel
D. J. Burns
P. N. Chaku
R. E. Feigel
J. L. Heck, Jr.
A. H. Honza
V. T. Hwang
M. M. James
P. Jansson
H. B. Porter
R. A. Weiss
K. R. Willens
Not for Resale
K. Miya
W. E. Norris
A. T. Roberts III
W. R. Rogers III
L. Sage
D. A. Scarth
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
J. C. Spanner, Jr.
J. E. Staffiera
R. W. Swayne
E. W. Throckmorton
C. S. Withers
R. A. Yonekawa
K. K. Yoon
Honorary Members (SC XI)
S. H. Bush
L. J. Chockie
C. D. Cowfer
O. F. Hedden
Subgroup on Liquid-Metal–Cooled Systems (SC XI)
C. G. McCargar, Chair
W. L. Chase
J. P. Houstrup
L. R. Katz
P. C. Riccardella
Working Group on Liquid-Metal Reactor Covers
(SG-LMCS) (SC XI)
Subgroup on Evaluation Standards (SC XI)
W. H. Bamford, Jr., Chair
J. M. Bloom
R. C. Cipolla
S. Coffin
G. H. De Boo
R. M. Gamble
T. J. Griesbach
K. Hasegawa
P. J. Hijeck
D. N. Hopkins
Y. Imamura
K. Koyama
W. L. Chase, Chair
D. R. Lee
S. Ranganath
D. A. Scarth
W. L. Server
G. L. Stevens
C. A. Tomes
A. Van Der Sluys
K. R. Wichman
G. M. Wilkowski
K. K. Yoon
S. Yukawa
Subgroup on Nondestructive Examination (SC XI)
J. C. Spanner, Jr., Chair
C. J. Wirtz, Secretary
F. L. Becker
N. R. Bentley
B. Bevins
T. L. Chan
C. B. Cheezem
C. D. Cowfer
F. J. Dodd
D. O. Henry
Working Group on Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (SC XI)
R. C. Cipolla, Chair
G. H. De Boo, Secretary
W. H. Bamford, Jr.
M. Basol
J. M. Bloom
E. Friedman
T. J. Griesbach
F. D. Hayes
D. N. Hopkins
Y. Imamura
K. Koyama
D. R. Lee
H. S. Mehta
M. A. Mitchell
J. E. O’Sullivan
R. K. Qashu
S. Ranganath
D. A. Scarth
T. S. Schurman
W. L. Server
F. A. Simonen
K. R. Wichman
G. M. Wilkowski
K. K. Yoon
S. Yukawa
V. A. Zilberstein
J. J. McArdle III, Chair
M. F. Sherwin, Secretary
D. R. Cordes
B. L. Curtis
G. B. Georgiev
D. W. Lamond, Chair
J. M. Boughman, Secretary
T. M. Anselmi
J. J. Churchwell
R. J. Cimoch
S. Coffin
G. L. Fechter
K. W. Hall
R. E. Hall
J. K. McClanahan
A. McNeill III
B. L. Montgomery
Working Group on Procedure Qualification
and Volumetric Examination (SG-NDE) (SC XI)
D. W. Peltola
J. R. Pfefferle
S. Ranganath
S. T. Rosinski
W. L. Server
E. A. Siegel
F. A. Simonen
G. L. Stevens
K. K. Yoon
S. Yukawa
C. Santos, Jr., Alternate
N. R. Bentley, Chair
B. Bevins, Secretary
F. L. Becker
C. B. Cheezem
C. D. Cowfer
S. R. Doctor
F. J. Dodd
M. E. Gothard
D. A. Jackson
R. Kellerhall
D. B. King
D. Kurek
G. L. Lagleder
G. A. Lofthus
S. M. Walker
C. E. Moyer, Alternate
Subgroup on Repair/Replacement Activities (SC XI)
R. W. Swayne, Chair
J. T. Conner, Secretary
D. E. Boyle
M. N. Bressler
R. E. Cantrell
E. V. Farrell, Jr.
P. D. Fisher
E. B. Gerlach
R. E. Gimple
R. A. Hermann
T. E. Hiss
K. Hasegawa
D. N. Hopkins
K. K. Kashima
H. S. Mehta
K. Miyazaki
J. S. Panesar
K. K. Yoon
S. Yukawa
V. A. Zilberstein
xxiii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
D. O. Henry
A. S. Reed
J. C. Spanner, Jr.
S. H. Von Fuchs
C. J. Wirtz
Working Group on Pressure Testing (SG-NDE) (SC XI)
Working Group on Pipe Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (SC XI)
D. A. Scarth, Chair
G. M. Wilkowski, Secretary
W. H. Bamford, Jr.
R. C. Cipolla
N. G. Cofie
S. K. Daftuar
G. H. De Boo
E. Friedman
L. F. Goyette
M. R. Hum
G. L. Lagleder
J. T. Lindberg
G. A. Lofthus
J. J. McArdle III
M. C. Modes
A. S. Reed
F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
M. F. Sherwin
Working Group on Personnel Qualification and Surface,
Visual, and Eddy Current Examination (SG-NDE) (SC XI)
Working Group on Operating Plant Criteria (SG-ES) (SC XI)
T. J. Griesbach, Chair
W. H. Bamford, Jr.
H. Behnke
B. A. Bishop
E. Friedman
S. R. Gosselin
P. J. Hijeck
S. N. Malik
P. Manbeck
H. S. Mehta
R. Pace
J. S. Panesar
R. W. King
Not for Resale
E. V. Imbro
R. D. Kerr
S. L. McCracken
M. S. McDonald
B. R. Newton
W. R. Rogers III
R. R. Stevenson
D. E. Waskey
C. S. Withers
R. A. Yonekawa
Working Group on Design and Programs (SG-RRA) (SC XI)
T. E. Hiss, Chair
E. V. Farrell, Jr., Secretary
D. E. Boyle
S. B. Brown
J. T. Conner
S. K. Fisher
E. B. Gerlach
D. R. Graham
E. V. Imbro
Working Group on Implementation of Risk-Based Examination
(SG-WCS) (SC XI)
D. F. Landers
M. S. McDonald
W. R. Rogers III
R. R. Stevenson
R. W. Swayne
A. H. Taufique
T. P. Vassallo, Jr.
R. A. Yonekawa
S. D. Kulat, Chair
J. M. Agold, Secretary
S. A. Ali
K. R. Balkey
B. A. Bishop
H. Q. Do
R. Fougerousse
M. R. Graybeal
M. L. Herrera
J. T. Lindberg
I. Mach
Working Group on Welding and Special Repair Process
(SG-RRA) (SC XI)
D. E. Waskey, Chair
R. E. Cantrell, Secretary
J. A. Davis
S. J. Findlan
P. D. Fisher
A. J. Giannuzzi
R. P. Indap
R. D. Kerr
Working Group on Inspection of Systems and Components
(SG-WCS) (SC XI)
C. C. Kim
M. Lau
S. L. McCracken
B. R. Newton
J. E. O’Sullivan
J. G. Weicks
K. R. Willens
E. V. Andruskiewicz, Alternate
K. B. Thomas, Chair
G. E. Whitman, Secretary
V. L. Armentrout
G. L. Belew
H. Q. Do
R. Fougerousse
M. R. Hum
S. D. Kulat
J. T. Lindberg
Subgroup on Water-Cooled Systems (SC XI)
E. W. Throckmorton, Chair
G. E. Whitman, Secretary
J. M. Agold
G. L. Belew
J. M. Boughman
W. J. Briggs
R. E. Ciemiewicz
D. D. Davis
E. L. Farrow
O. F. Hedden
M. L. Herrera
S. D. Kulat
D. W. Lamond
M. P. Lintz
W. E. Norris
J. E. Staffiera
H. M. Stephens, Jr.
K. B. Thomas
S. M. Walker
R. A. West
H. L. Graves III, Alternate
A. T. Roberts III, Chair
K. Rhyne, Secretary
T. L. Chan
J. W. Crider
E. L. Farrow
R. W. Swayne, Chair
R. L. Beverly
M. P. Lintz
H. L. Graves III
H. T. Hill
R. D. Hough
C. N. Krishnaswamy
M. P. Lintz
D. Naus
S. C. Petitgout
W. E. Norris, Alternate
L. Sage
J. E. Staffiera
C. J. Wirtz
Special Working Group on Plant Life Extension (SC XI)
F. E. Gregor, Chair
M. P. Lintz, Secretary
T. M. Anselmi
D. D. Davis
P.-T. Kuo
T. A. Meyer
SUBCOMMITTEE ON TRANSPORT TANKS (SC XII)
A. Selz, Chair
P. D. Stumpf, Secretary
A. N. Antoniou
C. Becht IV
M. L. Coats
M. A. Garrett
C. H. Hochman
G. G. Karcher
G. McRae
R. E. Hall
D. G. Naujock
M. F. Sherwin
K. B. Thomas
G. E. Whitman
xxiv
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
D. W. Kinley III
R. K. Mattu
L. Sage
S. R. Scott
C. S. Withers
Special Working Group on Editing and Review (SC XI)
Working Group on ISI Optimization (SG-WCS) (SC XI)
E. A. Siegel, Chair
R. L. Turner, Secretary
W. H. Bamford, Jr.
N. R. Bentley
J. M. Boughman
I. Mach
D. G. Naujock
C. Pendleton
C. M. Ross
D. Song
E. W. Throckmorton
R. L. Turner
R. A. West
Working Group on General Requirements (SC XI)
Working Group on Containment (SG-WCS) (SC XI)
J. E. Staffiera, Chair
H. M. Stephens, Jr., Secretary
H. Ashar
W. J. Briggs
S. G. Brown
K. K. N. Chao
R. E. Ciemiewicz
R. C. Cox
M. J. Ferlisi
R. K. Mattu
A. McNeill III
J. T. Mitman
P. J. O’Regan
M. J. Paterak
J. H. Phillips
M. A. Pyne
F. A. Simonen
R. A. West
A. T. Keim, Alternate
Not for Resale
M. R. Minick
M. D. Rana
C. M. Serratella
S. Staniszewski
G. R. Stoeckinger
M. R. Toth
A. P. Varghese
S. V. Voorhees
C. H. Walters
Subgroup on Design and Materials (SC XII)
M. D. Rana, Chair
C. Becht IV
D. A. Canonico
W. D. Doty
G. G. Karcher
M. Manikkam
S. L. McWilliams
T. P. Pastor
SUBCOMMITTEE ON DESIGN (SC-D)
R. J. Basile, Chair
E. H. Maradiaga, Secretary
R. W. Barnes
M. R. Breach
R. P. Deubler
G. G. Graven
R. I. Jetter
M. D. Pham
J. L. Rademacher
T. A. Rogers
C. M. Serratella
A. P. Varghese
M. R. Ward
E. A. Whittle
D. P. Jones
R. W. Mikitka
U. R. Miller
W. J. O’Donnell
R. D. Schueler, Jr.
A. Selz
Subgroup on Design Analysis (SC-D)
M. R. Breach
P. J. Conlisk
R. J. Gurdal
G. L. Hollinger
D. P. Jones
A. Kalnins
Subgroup on Fabrication and Inspection (SC XII)
S. V. Voorhees, Chair
J. A. Byers
D. A. Canonico
M. L. Coats
J. J. Engelking
B. L. Gehl
L. D. Holsinger
D. J. Kreft
G. McRae
M. R. Minick
W. J. Koves
O. Maekawa
G. Taxacher
E. L. Thomas, Jr.
R. A. Whipple
Subgroup on Elevated Temperature Design (SC-D)
Subgroup on General Requirements (SC XII)
C. H. Hochman, Chair
T. W. Alexander
D. M. Allbritten
C. A. Betts
J. F. Cannon
J. L. Freiler
W. L. Garfield
M. A. Garrett
R. I. Jetter, Chair
C. Becht IV
J. Cervenka
D. S. Griffin
M. H. Jawad
K. L. Gilmore
T. B. Lee
N. J. Paulick
G. R. Stoeckinger
M. R. Toth
C. H. Walters
L. Wolpert
Subgroup on Fatigue Strength (SC-D)
W. J. O’Donnell, Chair
P. R. Donavin
R. J. Gurdal
J. A. Hayward
P. Hirschberg
P. Hsu
D. P. Jones
SUBCOMMITTEE ON BOILER AND
PRESSURE VESSEL ACCREDITATION (SC-BPVA)
K. I. Baron, Secretary
M. B. Doherty
P. D. Edwards
R. M. Elliott
P. C. Hackford
W. C. LaRochelle
B. B. MacDonald
L. E. McDonald
K. M. McTague
R. K. Reamey
M. L. Sisk
N. Surtees
D. E. Tanner
B. C. Turczynski
D. E. Tuttle
W. J. O’Donnell
D. A. Osage
J. S. Porowski
D. F. Shaw
M. S. Shelton
V. Bogosian, Alternate
M. A. DeVries, Alternate
C. E. Ford, Alternate
J. W. Frey, Alternate
T. E. Hansen, Alternate
L. J. Kuchera, Alternate
K. T. Lau, Alternate
G. P. Milley, Alternate
B. R. Morelock, Alternate
J. D. O’Leary, Alternate
J. A. West, Alternate
R. V. Wielgoszinski, Alternate
A. J. Spencer, Honorary
Member
G. Kharshafdjian
C. Lawton
S. Majumdar
M. J. Manjoine
T. Nakamura
G. Taxacher
H. H. Ziada
Subgroup on Openings (SC-D)
M. R. Breach, Chair
R. W. Mikitka, Secretary
G. G. Graven
V. T. Hwang
J. C. Light
R. B. Luney
J. P. Madden
D. R. Palmer
J. A. Pfeifer
M. D. Rana
E. C. Rodabaugh
Special Working Group on Bolted Flanged Joints (SC-D)
R. W. Mikitka, Chair
G. D. Bibel
E. Michalopoulos
S. N. Pagay
P. G. Scheckermann
R. W. Schneider
R. D. Schueler, Jr.
A. Selz
M. S. Shelton
SUBCOMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR ACCREDITATION (SC-NA)
R. R. Stevenson, Chair
W. C. LaRochelle, Vice Chair
M. C. Tromba, Secretary
V. Bogosian
M. N. Bressler
G. Deily
S. M. Goodwin
K. A. Huber
M. Kotb
R. P. McIntyre
M. R. Minick
SUBCOMMITTEE ON
SAFETY VALVE REQUIREMENTS (SC-SVR)
H. B. Prasse
T. E. Quaka
A. T. Roberts III
P. D. Edwards, Alternate
B. G. Kovarik, Alternate
C. Lizotte, Alternate
D. E. Tanner, Alternate
R. V. Wielgoszinski, Alternate
H. L. Wiger, Alternate
O. E. Trapp, Staff
Representative
S. F. Harrison, Jr., Chair
J. A. West, Vice Chair
U. D’Urso, Secretary
J. F. Ball
S. Cammeresi
J. A. Cox
R. D. Danzy
D. B. Demichael
R. J. Doelling
xxv
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
H. I. Gregg
P. C. Hackford
W. F. Hart
C. A. Neumann
D. J. Scallan
A. J. Spencer
J. C. Standfast
Z. Wang
Subgroup on Design (SC-SVR)
J. A. West, Chair
R. D. Danzy
R. J. Doelling
H. I. Gregg
Subgroup on Testing (SC-SVR)
D. Miller
A. J. Spencer
T. R. Tarbay
J. A. Cox, Chair
S. Cammeresi
J. E. Cierpiot
G. D. Goodson
Subgroup on General Requirements (SC-SVR)
D. B. Demichael, Chair
J. F. Ball
G. Brazier
J. P. Glaspie
P. C. Hackford
C. A. Neumann
J. W. Ramsey
J. W. Richardson
J. C. Standfast
xxvi
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
W. F. Hart
K. C. Roy
D. J. Scallan
Z. Wang
PERSONNEL
Officers of ASTM Committees
(Cooperating in the Development of the Specifications Herein)
As of December 31, 2003
A1 COMMITTEE ON STEEL, STAINLESS STEEL, AND RELATED
ALLOYS
J. K. Mahaney, Jr., Chair
F. M. Christensen, Producer
Vice Chair
R. M. Davison, Producer Vice
Chair
D. C. Krouse, Producer Vice
Chair
W. H. Childs, User Vice Chair
A4 COMMITTEE ON IRON CASTINGS
R. W. Bonds, Chair
H. R. Sonderegger, Vice Chair
W. H. Le Van, Recording
Secretary
G. M. Cobb, User Vice Chair
A. S. Melilli, User Vice Chair
G. A. Hayden, Secretary
T. E. Murphy, Membership
Secretary
G. Luciw, Staff Manager
xxvii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
T. L. Way, Membership
Secretary
D. Rehiel, Staff Manager
xxviii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PREFACE
Pressure Vessel Code Committees, then subsequently,
by cooperative action, modified and identified as ASTM
specifications. Section II, Parts A and B, currently contain
many material specifications which are identical with
the corresponding ASTM specifications and some which
have been modified for Code usage.
In 1969, the American Welding Society began publication of specifications for welding rods, electrodes, and
filler metals, hitherto issued by ASTM. The Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Committee has recognized this new
arrangement, and is now working with AWS on these
specifications. Section II, Part C, contains the welding
material specifications approved for Code use.
In 1992, the ASME Board of Pressure Technology
Codes and Standards endorsed the use of non-ASTM
material for Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code applications. It is the intent to follow the procedures and practices
currently in use to implement the adoption of non-ASTM
materials.
All identical specifications are indicated by the
ASME /originating organization symbols. The specifications prepared and copyrighted by ASTM, AWS, and
other originating organizations are reproduced in the
Code with the permission of the respective Society. The
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee has given
careful consideration to each new and revised specification, and has made such changes as they deemed necessary to make the specification adaptable for Code usage.
In addition, ASME has furnished ASTM with the basic
requirements that should govern many proposed new
specifications. Joint action will continue an effort to make
the ASTM, AWS, and ASME specifications identical.
To assure that there will be a clear understanding on
the part of the users of Section II, ASME publishes both
the identical specifications and those amended for Code
usage in three parts every three years, in the same page
size to match the other sections of the Code, and Addenda
are issued annually to provide the latest changes in Section II specifications.
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code has been
adopted into law by 49 states and many municipalities
in the United States and by all of the Canadian provinces.
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
(ASME) and the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) have cooperated for more than fifty years
in the preparation of material specifications adequate for
safety in the field of pressure equipment for ferrous and
nonferrous materials, contained in Section II (Part A —
Ferrous and Part B — Nonferrous) of the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code.
The evolution of this cooperative effort is contained
in Professor A. M. Greene’s “History of the ASME Boiler
Code,” which was published as a series of articles in
Mechanical Engineering from July 1952 through August
1953 and is now available from ASME in a special bound
edition. The following quotations from this history, which
was based upon the minutes of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Committee, will help focus on the cooperative nature of the specifications found in Section II,
Material Specifications.
“General discussion of material specifications comprising Paragraphs 1 to 112 of Part 2 and the advisability
of having them agree with ASTM specifications,” (1914).
“ASME Subcommittee appointed to confer with
ASTM,” (1916).
“Because of this cooperation the specifications of the
1918 Edition of the ASME Boiler Code were more nearly
in agreement with ASTM specifications. In the 1924 Edition of the Code, 10 specifications were in complete
agreement with ASTM specifications, 4 in substantial
agreement and 2 covered materials for which ASTM had
no corresponding specifications.”
“In Section II, Material Specifications, the paragraphs
were given new numbers beginning with S-1 and
extending to S-213,” (1925).
“Section II was brought into agreement with changes
made in the latest ASTM specifications since 1921,”
(1932).
“The Subcommittee on Material Specifications
arranged for the introduction of the revisions of many of
the specifications so that they would agree with the latest
form of the earlier ASTM specifications...,” (1935).
From the preceding, it is evident that many of the
material specifications were prepared by the Boiler and
xxix
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
xxx
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SPECIFICATIONS LISTED BY MATERIALS
Steel Plate, Sheets and Strip
SA-568/SA-568M
Steel, Sheet, Carbon and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled
and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
SA-749/SA-749M
Steel, Strip, Carbon and High-Strength Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled
General Requirements for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
Steel Pipe
SA-53/SA-53M
SA-106
SA-134
SA-135
SA-312 /SA-312M
SA-333 /SA-333M
SA-335 /SA-335M
SA-358 /SA-358M
SA-369 /SA-369M
SA-376 /SA-376M
SA-409 /SA-409M
SA-426
SA-430/SA-430M
SA-451
SA-524
SA-530/SA-530M
SA-587
SA-660
SA-671
SA-672
SA-691
SA-727/SA-727M
SA-731/SA-731M
SA-790/SA-790M
SA-813/SA-813M
SA-814/SA-814M
Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless . . . .
Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and Over) . . . . . . .
Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . .
Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Alloy Steel Pipe
for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for HighTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central-Station
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or HighTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centrifugally Cast Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Austenitic Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . .
Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. . . . .
Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower Temperatures . . . .
General Requirements for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe. . . . . . . .
Electric-Resistance-Welded Low-Carbon Steel Pipe for the Chemical
Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centrifugally Cast Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . .
Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower
Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service at Moderate
Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion-Welded for HighPressure Service at High Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components With Inherent Notch
Toughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless, Welded Ferritic, and Martensitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Ferritic /Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single- or Double-Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold-Worked Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxi
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
167
205
221
227
515
549
573
639
649
721
769
799
805
841
993
1003
1155
1197
1219
1229
1257
1319
1325
1441
1465
1475
SA-941
SA-961
SA-999/SA-999M
Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related Alloys, and
Ferroalloys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1527
Common Requirements for Steel, Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves, and
Parts for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1547
General Requirements for Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1573
Steel Tubes
SA-178/SA-178M
SA-179/SA-179M
SA-192/SA-192M
SA-209/SA-209M
SA-210/SA-210M
SA-213/SA-213M
SA-214/SA-214M
SA-249/SA-249M
SA-250/SA-250M
SA-268/SA-268M
SA-334/SA-334M
SA-423/SA-423M
SA-450/SA-450M
SA-513
SA-556/SA-556M
SA-557/SA-557M
SA-688/SA-688M
SA-789/SA-789M
SA-803/SA-803M
SA-941
SA-1016/SA-1016M
Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel and Carbon-Manganese Steel
Boiler and Superheater Tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Cold-Drawn Low-Carbon Steel Heat Exchanger and Condenser
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Carbon Steel Boiler Tubes for High-Pressure Service. . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Carbon-Molybdenum Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Medium-Carbon Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater, and Heat
Exchanger Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat-Exchanger, and
Condenser Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric-Resistance-Welded Ferritic Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater
Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Tubes for Low-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Electric Welded Low-Alloy Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy
Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. . . .
Seamless Cold-Drawn Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . .
Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Ferritic /Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welded Ferritic Stainless Steel Feedwater Heater Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel, Related Alloys, and
Ferroalloys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements for Ferritic Alloy Steel, Austenitic Alloy Steel, and
Stainless Steel Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
237
243
275
327
333
337
349
397
407
449
563
759
829
949
1059
1065
1245
1433
1453
1527
1605
Steel Flanges, Fittings, Valves, and Parts
SA-105/SA-105M
SA-181/SA-181M
SA-182/SA-182M
SA-216/SA-216M
SA-217/SA-217M
Carbon Steel Forgings, for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves
and Parts for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure Containing
Parts Suitable for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
195
247
253
351
355
SA-231/ SA-231M
SA-232/SA-232M
SA-234/SA-234M
SA-350/SA-350M
SA-351/SA-351M
SA-352/SA-352M
SA-403/SA-403M
SA-420/SA-420M
SA-522/SA-522M
SA-592/SA-592M
SA-815/SA-815M
SA-905
SA-960
SA-961
SA-995
Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Spring Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chromium-Vanadium Alloy Steel Valve Spring Quality Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy for Moderate and
High-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch Toughness
Testing for Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure Containing Parts,
Suitable for Low Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for LowTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forged or Rolled 8 and 9% Nickel Alloy Steel Flanges, Fittings,
Valves, and Parts for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Strength Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Steel Forged
Fittings and Parts for Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wrought Ferritic, Ferritic /Austenitic, and Martensitic Stainless Steel Piping
Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Wire, Pressure Vessel Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Requirements for Wrought Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Requirements for Steel Flanges, Forged Fittings, Valves and
Parts for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for PressureContaining Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Plates, Sheets, and Strip for Pressure Vessels
SA-20/SA-20M
General Requirements for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-202/SA-202M
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Manganese-Silicon . . . . . . . .
SA-203/SA-203M
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-204/SA-204M
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-225/SA-225M
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Vanadium-Nickel . . . . . . . . .
SA-240
Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-263
Corrosion-Resisting Chromium Steel-Clad Plate, Sheet, and Strip. . . . . . . . . .
SA-264
Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel Clad Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-265
Nickel and Nickel-Base Alloy Clad Steel Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-285/SA-285M
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile
Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-299/SA-299M
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Silicon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-302/SA-302M
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Molybdenum and
Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-353/SA-353M
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, 9 Percent Nickel, Double-Normalized
and Tempered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-387/SA-387M
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-414/SA-414M
Steel, Sheet, Carbon, for Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-455/SA-455M
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High-Strength Manganese . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-480/SA-480M
General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-515/SA-515M
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and HigherTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-516/SA-516M
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and LowerTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxiii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
365
371
375
595
607
615
759
783
987
1163
1483
1521
1535
1547
1569
83
315
319
323
361
387
413
425
437
487
491
495
623
731
779
857
879
975
979
SA-517/SA-517M
SA-533/SA-533M
SA-537/SA-537M
SA-542/SA-542M
SA-543/SA-543M
SA-553/SA-553M
SA-562/SA-562M
SA-612/SA-612M
SA-645/SA-645M
SA-662/SA-662M
SA-666
SA-693
SA-724/SA-724M
SA-736/SA-736M
SA-737/SA-737M
SA-738/SA-738M
SA-770/SA-770M
SA-832/SA-832M
SA-841/SA-841M
SA-1017/SA-1017M
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, High Strength, Quenched and
Tempered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered,
Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel. . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel. . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched-and-Tempered,
Chromium-Molybdenum and Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered, NickelChromium-Molybdenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered, 8 and 9
Percent Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Titanium for Glass or
Diffused Metallic Coatings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High Strength, for Moderate and
Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Five Percent Nickel Alloy Steel, Specially Heat
Treated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese, for Moderate and Lower
Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate
and Flat Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precipitation-Hardening Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, Quenched and
Tempered, for Welded Layered Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-CopperChromium-Molybdenum-Columbium and Nickel-CopperManganese-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, High-Strength, Low-Alloy Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel,
for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Through-Thickness Tension Testing of Steel Plates for Special
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-MolybdenumVanadium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels, Produced by the Thermo-Mechanical
Control Process (TMCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy-Steel Chromium-Molybdenum-Tungsten . . . . .
983
1013
1019
1043
1049
1053
1071
1179
1187
1203
1207
1265
1315
1331
1337
1341
1393
1495
1511
1619
Structural Steel
SA-6/SA-6M
SA-36/SA-36M
SA-283/SA-283M
SA-572/SA-572M
SA-1008/SA-1008M
SA-1011/SA-1011M
General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes,
and Sheet Piling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon Structural Steel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low- and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. . . . . . . . . .
Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy
and High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength
Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved
Formability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxiv
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
1
153
483
1131
1587
1597
Steel Bars
SA-6/SA-6M
General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes,
and Sheet Piling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-29/SA-29M
General Requirements for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought
and Cold-Finished . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-276
Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-311/SA-311M
Cold-Drawn, Stress-Relieved Carbon Steel Bars Subject to Mechanical
Property Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-479/SA-479M
Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure
Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-484/SA-484M
General Requirements for Stainless and Steel Bars, Billets, and
Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-564/SA-564M
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and
Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-638/SA-638M
Precipitation Hardening Iron Base Superalloy Bars, Forgings, and
Forging Stock for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-675/SA-675M
Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical
Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-695
Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, for Fluid Power
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-696
Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought or Cold-Finished, Special Quality,
for Pressure Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-739
Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought, for Elevated Temperature or PressureContaining Parts, or Both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Bolting Materials
SA-193/SA-193M
Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-194/SA-194M
Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and HighTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-307
Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 psi Tensile Strength. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-320/SA-320M
Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-325
Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120 /105 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-354
Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally
Threaded Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-437/SA-437M
Alloy Steel Turbine-Type Bolting Material Specially Heat Treated for
High-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-449
Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-453/SA-453M
High-Temperature Bolting Materials, With Expansion Coefficients
Comparable to Austenitic Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-540/SA-540M
Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-563
Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-574
Alloy Steel Socket-Head Cap Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-962/SA-962M
Common Requirements for Steel Fasteners or Fastener Materials,
or Both, Intended for Use at Any Temperature from Cryogenic to the
Creep Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SF-568M
Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Billets and Forgings
SA-105/SA-105M
Carbon Steel Forgings, for Piping Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-181/SA-181M
Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-266/SA-266M
Carbon Steel Forgings, for Pressure Vessel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-336/SA-336M
Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxv
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
1
127
467
507
867
911
1087
1183
1239
1273
1277
1347
279
297
499
525
537
629
815
821
847
1025
1075
1137
1559
1623
195
247
443
585
SA-350/SA-350M
SA-372/SA-372M
SA-484/SA-484M
SA-508/SA-508M
SA-541/SA-541M
SA-638/SA-638M
SA-649/SA-649M
SA-705/SA-705M
SA-723/SA-723M
SA-745/SA-745M
SA-765/SA-765M
SA-788
SA-836/SA-836M
Steel Castings
SA-216/SA-216M
SA-217/SA-217M
SA-351/SA-351M
SA-352/SA-352M
SA-487/SA-487M
SA-494/SA-494M
SA-609/SA-609M
SA-667/SA-667M
SA-703/SA-703M
SA-747/SA-747M
SA-781/SA-781M
SA-995
Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch Toughness
Testing for Piping Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Thin-Walled Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . .
General Requirements for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and Forgings. . . . . . .
Quenched and Tempered Vacuum-Treated Carbon and Alloy Steel
Forgings for Pressure Vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quenched and Tempered Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure
Vessel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precipitation Hardening Iron Base Superalloy Bars, Forgings, and
Forging Stock for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forged Steel Rolls, Used for Corrugating Paper Machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Forgings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alloy Steel Forgings for High-Strength Pressure Component
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ultrasonic Examination of Austenitic Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon Steel and Low-Alloy Steel Pressure-Vessel-Component
Forgings With Mandatory Toughness Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Forgings, General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forgings, Titanium-Stabilized Carbon Steel, for Glass-Lined Piping
and Pressure Vessel Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing
Parts Suitable for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Castings, Ferritic and Martensitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts,
Suitable for Low Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steel Castings Suitable for Pressure Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Castings, Nickel and Nickel Alloy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Castings, Carbon, Low-Alloy, and Martensitic Stainless Steel, Ultrasonic
Examination Thereof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centrifugally Cast Dual Metal (Gray and White Cast Iron) Cylinders . . . . . .
Steel Castings, General Requirements, for Pressure-Containing Parts. . . . . . .
Steel Castings, Stainless, Precipitation Hardening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Castings, Steel and Alloy, Common Requirements, for General Industrial
Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for PressureContaining Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion-Resisting and Heat-Resisting Steels
SA-182/SA-182M
Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves
and Parts for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-193/SA-193M
Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-194/SA-194M
Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or HighTemperature Service, or Both. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-213/SA-213M
Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy Steel Boiler, Superheater, and Heat
Exchanger Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-216/SA-216M
Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxvi
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
595
715
911
939
1035
1183
1193
1301
1309
1351
1385
1419
1505
351
355
607
615
929
937
1167
1217
1281
1357
1401
1569
253
279
297
337
351
SA-217/SA-217M
SA-240
SA-249/SA-249M
SA-263
SA-264
SA-265
SA-268/SA-268M
SA-312/SA-312M
SA-320/SA-320M
SA-336/SA-336M
SA-351/SA-351M
SA-358/SA-358M
SA-369/SA-369M
SA-376/SA-376M
SA-403/SA-403M
SA-409/SA-409M
SA-426
SA-430/SA-430M
SA-437/SA-437M
SA-451
SA-479 /SA-479M
SA-484/SA-484M
SA-515/SA-515M
SA-564/SA-564M
SA-638/SA-638M
SA-660
SA-666
SA-691
SA-705/SA-705M
SA-789/SA-789M
SA-790/SA-790M
SA-814/SA-814M
SA-815/SA-815M
Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure Containing
Parts Suitable for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat Exchanger, and
Condenser Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion-Resisting Chromium Steel Clad Plate, Sheet, and Strip. . . . . . . . . .
Stainless Chromium-Nickel Steel Clad Plate, Sheet, and Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nickel and Nickel-Base Alloy Clad Steel Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Ferritic and Martensitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts . . . . . . . . . . . .
Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Alloy Steel Pipe
for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon and Ferritic Alloy Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for HighTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central-Station
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or HighTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centrifugally Cast Ferritic Alloy Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Austenitic Steel Forged and Bored Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . .
Alloy Steel Turbine-Type Bolting Material Specially Heat Treated for
High-Temperature Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service. . . . .
Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure
Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Requirements for Stainless Steel Bars, Billets, and Forgings. . . . . . .
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and HigherTemperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and
Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precipitation Hardening Iron Base Superalloy Bars, Forgings, and
Forging Stock for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Centrifugally Cast Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service . . . . . . .
Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate
and Flat Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion-Welded for HighPressure Service at High Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Age-Hardening Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Forgings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Ferritic /Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seamless and Welded Ferritic /Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold-Worked Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wrought Ferritic, Ferritic /Austenitic, and Martensitic Stainless Steel
Piping Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxvii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
355
387
397
413
425
437
449
513
525
585
607
639
649
721
759
769
799
803
815
841
867
911
975
1087
1183
1197
1207
1257
1301
1433
1441
1475
1483
SA-995
Castings, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex) Stainless Steel, for PressureContaining Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569
Wrought Iron, Cast Iron, and Malleable Iron
SA-47/SA-47M
Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-278
Gray Iron Castings for Pressure Containing Parts for Temperatures
Up to 650°F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-395
Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated
Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-476/SA-476M
Ductile Iron Castings for Paper Mill Dryer Rolls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-748/SA-748M
Statically Cast Chilled White Iron-Gray Iron Dual Metal Rolls for
Pressure Vessel Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SA-834
Common Requirements for Iron Castings for General Industrial Use . . . . . . .
Methods
SA-275/SA-275M
SA-370
SA-388/SA-388M
SA-435/SA-435M
SA-577/SA-577M
SA-578/SA-578M
SA-745/SA-745M
SA-751
Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products . . . .
Ultrasonic Examination of Heavy Steel Forgings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ultrasonic Angle-Beam Examination of Steel Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and Clad Steel Plates for
Special Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ultrasonic Examination of Austenitic Steel Forgings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel
Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxviii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
159
477
747
861
1363
1501
459
655
739
811
1145
1149
1351
1377
SPECIFICATION REMOVAL
From time to time, it becomes necessary to remove
specifications from this Part of Section II. This occurs
because the sponsoring society (e.g., ASTM, AWS, CEN)
has notified ASME that the specification has either been
replaced with another specification, or that there is no
known use and production of a material. Removal of a
specification from this Section also results in concurrent
removal of the same specification from Section IX and
from all of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Construction Codes that reference the material. This action
effectively prohibits further use of the material in ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel construction.
The following specification will be dropped from this
Section in the next Addenda, unless information concerning current production and use of the material is received
before December 1 of this year:
SA-430/SA-430M-91 (discontinued by ASTM in 1995,
not replaced)
If you are currently using and purchasing new material
to this specification for ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code construction, and if discontinuance of this specification would present a hardship, please notify the Secretary of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee,
at the address shown below:
Secretary
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
Three Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016-5990
Tel: (212) 591-8533
Fax: (212) 591-8501
xxxix
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
04
xl
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PREPARATION OF TECHNICAL INQUIRIES TO THE
BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL COMMITTEE
1-100
INTRODUCTION
(b) Background. State the purpose of the inquiry,
which would be either to obtain an interpretation of Code
rules, or to propose consideration of a revision to the
present rules. Provide concisely the information needed
for the Committee’s understanding of the inquiry, being
sure to include reference to the applicable Code Section,
Division, Edition, Addenda, paragraphs, figures, and
tables. If sketches are provided, they shall be limited to
the scope of the inquiry.
(c) Inquiry Structure. Prepare statements in a condensed and precise question format, omitting superfluous
background information, and, where appropriate, composed in such a way that “yes” or “no” (perhaps with
provisos) would be an acceptable reply. This inquiry
statement should be technically and editorially correct.
(d) Proposed Reply. State what it is believed that the
Code requires. If in the inquirer’s opinion a revision
to the Code is needed, recommended wording shall be
provided.
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
meets regularly to consider written requests for interpretations and revisions to the Code rules, and to develop
new rules as dictated by technological development. The
Committee’s activities in this regard are limited strictly
to interpretations of the rules or to the consideration of
revisions to the present rules on the basis of new data or
technology. As a matter of published policy, ASME does
not approve, certify, rate, or endorse any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity, and, accordingly,
inquiries requiring such consideration will be returned.
Moreover, ASME does not act as a consultant on specific
engineering problems or on the general application or
understanding of the Code rules. If, based on the inquiry
information submitted, it is the opinion of the Committee
that the inquirer should seek assistance, the inquiry will
be returned with the recommendation that such assistance
be obtained.
All inquiries that do not provide the information needed
for the Committee’s full understanding will be returned.
1-300
1-200
Inquiries shall preferably be submitted in typewritten
form; however, legible handwritten inquiries will also be
considered. They shall include the name and mailing
address of the inquirer, and be mailed to the following
address:
Secretary
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
Three Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016-5990
INQUIRY FORMAT
Inquiries shall be limited strictly to interpretations of
the rules or to the consideration of revisions to the present
rules on the basis of new data or technology. Inquiries
shall be submitted in the following format.
(a) Scope. Involve a single rule or closely related rules.
An inquiry letter concerning unrelated subjects will be
returned.
xli
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SUBMITTAL
Not for Resale
xlii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
GUIDELINE ON THE APPROVAL OF NEW
MATERIALS UNDER THE ASME BOILER AND
PRESSURE VESSEL CODE
Code Policy. It is the policy of the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Committee to adopt for inclusion in
Section II only such specifications as have been adopted
by the American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM), by the American Welding Society (AWS), and
by other recognized national or international organizations.
It is expected that requests for Code approval will
normally be for materials for which there is a recognized
national or international specification. For materials made
to a recognized national or international specification
other than those of ASTM or AWS, the inquirer shall
give notice to the standards developing organization that
a request has been made to ASME for adoption of their
specification under the ASME Code and shall request
that the organization grant ASME permission to reprint
the specification. For other materials, a request shall be
made to ASTM, AWS, or a recognized national or international organization to develop a specification that can be
presented to the Code Committee.
It is the policy of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Committee to consider requests to adopt new materials
only from boiler, pressure vessel, or nuclear power plant
component Manufacturers or end users. Further, such
requests should be for materials for which there is a
reasonable expectation of use in a boiler, pressure vessel,
or nuclear power plant component constructed to the rules
of one of the Sections of this Code.
Application. The inquirer shall identify to the Committee the Section or Sections and Divisions of the Code in
which the new material is to be incorporated, the temperature range of application, whether cyclic service is to be
considered, and whether external pressure service is to
be considered. The inquirer shall identify all product
forms, size ranges, and specifications for which incorporation is desired.
Mechanical Properties. Together with the specification for the material, the inquirer shall furnish the Committee with adequate data on which to base design values
for inclusion in the applicable tables. The data shall
include values of ultimate tensile strength, yield strength,
reduction of area, and elongation, at 100°F (or 50°C)
intervals, from room temperature to 100°F (or 50°C)
above the maximum intended use temperature, unless
the maximum intended use temperature does not exceed
100°F. Any heat treatment that is required to produce the
mechanical properties should be fully described.
If adoption is desired at temperatures at which timedependent behavior may be expected to control design
values, stress-rupture and creep rate data for these timedependent properties shall be provided, starting at temperatures about 50°F (or 25°C) below the temperature where
time-dependent properties may govern (see Appendix 1
of Section II, Part D) and extending to about 100°F (or
50°C) above the maximum intended use temperature. The
longest rupture time at each test temperature must be in
excess of 6000 hr and the shortest about 100 hr, with at
least three additional tests at stresses selected to provide
rupture times nominally equally spaced in log (time); i.e.,
times nominally of 100, 300, 800, 2200, and 6000 hr
at each test temperature. Obviously, longer times and
additional tests are beneficial. The interval between successive test temperatures shall be chosen such that rupture
lives shall not differ by more than a factor of about 10
at any given stress for two adjacent temperatures. In
general, test temperatures should be in about 50°F (or
25°C) intervals if maximum test times are no longer than
6000 hr. The goal of the testing is to facilitate data analysis
to estimate the average and minimum stresses for rupture
in 100,000 hr and an average creep rate of 10−5 %/hr for
each temperature where design stresses are established.
Alternative test plans that deviate from the prior description but achieve the overall objective may be considered.
Minimum creep rate data shall be provided over the
same range of temperatures as above, with the lowest
stress at each temperature selected, to achieve a minimum
creep rate of 1.0 to 2.0 ⴛ 10− 4 %/hr or less. Creep
rate data may be obtained in the course of stress-rupture
testing or may be obtained on additional specimens. If it
can be conclusively demonstrated that creep rate does
xliii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
not control the design stresses, the creep rate data may
be sparse in relation to the stress-rupture data. Submission
of creep curves for evaluation of creep rate behavior is
acceptable and encouraged.
For materials that will be used in welded applications,
sufficient time-dependent data shall be provided for weldments and filler metals to allow ASME to assess the
properties in comparison with the base material. In the
time-dependent range, this includes providing stress-rupture data for specimen tests in excess of 6000 hr at each
temperature and for each welding process. In addition,
minimum creep rate data on filler metals shall also be
provided to rates below 1.0 to 2.0 ⴛ 10− 4 %/hr.
If adoption at temperatures below room temperature
is requested, and if it is desired to take design advantage
of increased strength at lower temperatures, data on the
time-independent properties shall be provided at 100°F
(or 50°C) intervals to and including the lowest intended
use temperature.
Notch toughness data shall be provided for materials
for which Code toughness rules would be expected to
apply. The data shall include test results for the intended
lowest service metal temperature and for the range of
material thicknesses desired. For welded construction,
the notch toughness data shall include the results of Code
toughness tests for weld metal and heat-affected zone for
weldments made by the intended welding processes.
If the material is to be used in components that operate
under external pressure, stress–strain curves (tension or
compression) shall be furnished, at 100°F (or 50°C) intervals over the range of design temperatures desired. External pressure charts are based on the early portion (up to
1% strain) of the stress–strain curve. The stress–strain
curve (not load versus extension) shall be determined
using a Class B-2 or better accuracy extensometer as
defined in ASTM E 83. Numerical data, when available,
should be submitted. The data should include the original
cross-sectional area of the test specimen and stress–strain
curves with units marked on them.
If the material is to be used in cyclic service and the
construction Code in which adoption is desired requires
explicit consideration of cyclic behavior, fatigue data
shall also be furnished over the range of design temperatures desired.
In general, for all mechanical properties, data shall be
provided from at least three heats of material meeting all
of the requirements of a specification for at least one
product form for which adoption is desired, for each test
at each test temperature. When adoption for both cast
and wrought product forms is desired, data from at least
three heats each of a wrought and of a cast product form
shall be submitted. It is desired that the data represent all
product forms for which adoption is desired. For product
forms for which the properties may be size dependent,
data from products of different sizes, including the largest
size for which adoption is desired, shall be provided.
Test methods employed shall be those referenced in
or by the material specifications, or shall be appropriate
ASTM test methods or recommended practices for the
properties tested.
Information describing service experience in the temperature range contemplated will be useful to the Committee.
Other Properties. The inquirer shall furnish to the
Committee adequate data necessary to establish values
for coefficient of thermal expansion, thermal conductivity
and diffusivity, Young’s modulus, shear modulus, and
Poisson’s ratio, when the construction Code in which
adoption is desired requires explicit consideration of these
properties. Data shall be provided over the range of temperatures for which the material is to be used.
Weldability. The inquirer shall furnish complete data
on the weldability of material intended for welding,
including data on procedure qualification tests made in
accordance with the requirements of Section IX. Welding
tests shall be made over the full range of thickness in
which the material is to be used. Pertinent information,
such as postweld heat treatment required, susceptibility
to air hardening, effect of welding procedure and heataffected zone and weld metal notch toughness, and the
amount of experience in welding the material shall be
given.
Physical Changes. For new materials, it is important
to know the structural stability characteristics and the
degree of retention of properties with exposure at temperature. The influence of fabrication practices, such as forming, welding, and thermal treatment, on the mechanical
properties, ductility, and microstructure of the material
are important, particularly where degradation in properties may occur. Where particular temperature ranges of
exposure or heat treatment, cooling rates, combinations of
mechanical working and thermal treatments, fabrication
practices, exposure to particular environments, etc., cause
significant changes in the mechanical properties, microstructure, resistance to brittle fracture, etc., it is of prime
importance to call attention to those conditions that should
be avoided in service or in manufacture of parts or vessels
from the material.
Requests for Additional Data. The Committee may
request additional data, including data on properties or
material behavior not explicitly treated in the construction
Code in which adoption is desired.
New Materials Checklist. To assist inquirers desiring
Code coverage for new materials, or extending coverage
of existing materials, the Committee has developed the
following checklist of items that ought to be addressed
xliv
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Requirements for Requests for ASME Acceptance
of Material Specifications of Recognized National or
International Organizations Other Than ASTM or
AWS. The Committee will consider only requests for
specifications in the English language and in U.S. or
SI/metric units. The Committee will consider accepting
specifications of recognized national or international
organizations, such as, but not limited to, American Petroleum Institute (API), ASTM, AWS, Canadian Standards
Association (CSA), European Committee for Standardization (CEN), and Japanese Standards Association (JIS).
Material specifications of other than national or international organizations, such as those of material producers
and suppliers, will not be considered for acceptance.
Requirements for Recognized National or International Specifications. Acceptable material specifications
will be identified by date or edition. Approved edition(s)
will be stated in the subtitle of the ASME specification.
Eventually, acceptable previous editions will be maintained in guidelines to Section II, Parts A and B. Minimum requirements that must be contained in a material
specification for which acceptance is being requested
include such items as name of national or international
organization, scope, reference documents, process, manufacture, conditions for delivery, heat treatment, chemical
and tensile requirements, forming properties, testing specifications and requirements, workmanship, finish, marking, inspection, and rejection.
Publication of Recognized National or International
Specifications. Specifications for which ASME has not
been given permission to publish by the originating organization will be on a cover sheet in Section II, Parts A
and B. Information on obtaining a copy of those documents will be maintained in those Parts. Documents that
are referenced in accepted national or international material specifications will not be published by ASME. However, information on obtaining a copy of those documents
will be maintained in Section II, Parts A and B. Additions
and exceptions to the material specification will be noted
in the subtitle of the specification.
Code Case. The Code Committee will consider the
issuance of an ASME Code Case, to be effective for a
period of 3 years, permitting the use of a new material,
provided that the following conditions are met:
(a) the inquirer provides evidence that a request for
coverage of the material in a specification has been made
to ASTM or a recognized national or international organization;
(b) the material is commercially available and can be
purchased within the proposed specification requirements;
by each inquiry. The Committee reserves the right to
request additional data and application information when
considering new materials.
(a) Has a qualified inquirer request been provided?
(b) Has a request either for revision to existing Code
requirements or for a Code Case been defined?
(c) Has a letter to ASTM or AWS been submitted
requesting coverage of the new material in a specification,
and has a copy been submitted to the Committee? Alternatively, is this material already covered by a specification
issued by a recognized national or international organization and has an English language version been provided?
(d) Has the construction Code and Division coverage
been identified?
(e) Has the material been defined as ferrous or nonferrous and has the application (product forms, size range,
and specification) been defined?
(f) Has the range (maximum/minimum) of temperature
application been defined?
(g) Has mechanical property data been submitted (ultimate tensile strength, yield strength, reduction of area,
and elongation at 100°F or 50°C intervals, from room
temperature to 100°F or 50°C above the maximum
intended use temperature for three heats of appropriate
product forms and sizes)?
(h) If requested temperatures of coverage are above
those at which time-dependent properties begin to govern
design values, has appropriate time-dependent property
data for base metal, weld metal, and weldments been
submitted?
(i) If coverage below room temperature is requested,
has appropriate mechanical property data below room
temperature been submitted?
(j) Have toughness considerations required by the construction Code been defined and has appropriate data
been submitted?
(k) Have external pressure considerations been defined
and have stress–strain curves been submitted for the
establishment of external pressure charts?
(l) Have cyclic service considerations and service limits been defined and has appropriate fatigue data been
submitted?
(m) Has physical properties data (coefficient of thermal expansion, thermal conductivity and diffusivity,
Young’s modulus, shear modulus, Poisson’s ratio) been
submitted?
(n) Have welding requirements been defined and has
procedure qualification test data been submitted?
(o) Has influence of fabrication practices on material
properties been defined?
xlv
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
(c) the inquirer shows that there will be a reasonable
demand for the material by industry and that there exists
an urgency for approval by means of a Code Case;
(d) the requests for approval of the material shall
clearly describe it in specification form, including such
items as scope, process, manufacture, conditions for
delivery, heat treatment, chemical and tensile require-
ments, forming properties, testing specifications and
requirements, workmanship, finish, marking, inspection,
and rejection;
(e) all other requirements identified previously under
Code Policy and Application apply; and
(f) the inquirer shall furnish the Code Committee with
all the data specified in this Guideline.
xlvi
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
ACCEPTABLE ASTM EDITIONS
All materials allowed by the various Code Sections
and used for construction within the scope of their rules
shall be furnished in accordance with the Material Specifications contained within Section II and this guideline
except where otherwise provided in Code Cases or in the
applicable Section of the Code. Materials covered by
these Specifications are acceptable for use in items covered by the Code Sections only to the degree indicated
in the applicable Section. Materials for Code use should
preferably be ordered, produced, and documented on this
basis; however, material produced under an ASTM Specification may be used in lieu of the corresponding ASME
Specification as listed in this Appendix. Material produced to an ASME or ASTM Specification with requirements different from the requirements of the
corresponding Specification may also be used in accordance with the above, provided the material manufacturer
or vessel manufacturer certifies with evidence acceptable
to the Authorized Inspector that the corresponding Specification requirements have been met. This guideline lists
the Specifications and acceptable dates of issue as well
as the Book sections of the ASME Boiler Code in which
the specification is approved for use.
Book Section
Specifications
I
III
IV
VIII-1
04
VIII-2
Non
Nuc.
Code
Case
Latest
Adopted
ASTM
VIII-3
XII
Nuc.
Code
Case
Other
Acceptable
ASTM Editions
...
...
ⴛ
...
99b
88c through 99b
SA-6/SA-6M
Identical
-General Requirements, Rolled Products
SA-20/SA-20M
-General Requirements, Plates ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
...
ⴛ
01
88 through 01
Identical
SA-29/SA-29M
-General Requirements, Bars . . .
...
...
...
...
ⴛ
99⑀1
88 through 99⑀1
ⴛ
00a
88 through 00a
SA-47/SA-47M
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
...
Identical except for the deletion of welded repair references in 11.2 and 11.3 and mandatory certification in 14.1
99
84 through 99
SA-53/SA-53M
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
Identical except for the insertion of test practices in 11.1, and editorial corrections to Table X4.1
01
88a through 01
ⴛ
98
87a through 98
SA-106
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
Identical except for editorial differences in 8.1, 13.4, and 24.1 and deletion of ASTM caveat 1.5
95
88a through 95
Identical except for an editorial correction to the Mo content for Grade 94B17 in Table 2
SA-36/SA-36M
Identical
SA-105/SA-105M
Identical
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
SA-134
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
Identical except for additional requirement as shown in the specification
...
xlvii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
96(R01)
85 through 96(R01)
Book Section
Non
Nuc.
Code
Case
I
III
IV
VIII-1
VIII-2
VIII-3
XII
Nuc.
Code
Case
SA-135
Identical
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
01
88 through 01
SA-178/SA-178M
Identical
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
95
89 through 95
SA-179/SA-179M
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
90a
88a through 90a
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
95b
87 through 95b
Specifications
SA-181/SA-181M
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
Identical except for editorial differences in 7.3.2 and 12.6
Latest
Adopted
ASTM
Other
Acceptable
ASTM Editions
SA-182/SA-182M
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
99
87a through 99
Identical except for the inclusion of Grades S33228 and S30815
in the parenthetical section of 5.3.1 disallowing direct heat treatment. Editorial changes have been made in 1.2, 2.1, and Table 2
SA-192/SA-192M
Identical
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
91
88 through 91
SA-193/SA-193M
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
98a
Identical except for editorial differences in 3.1.1, 19.4, Note 6, Table 1, and editorial differences in Table 2
87 through 98a
SA-194/SA-194M
...
ⴛ
Identical except for the addition of 6.7
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
01a
87 through 01a
SA-202/SA-202M
Identical
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
...
93
82 through 93
SA-203/SA-203M
Identical
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
97
82 through 97
SA-204/SA-204M
Identical
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
93
88 through 93
SA-209/SA-209M
Identical
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
98
88 through 98
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
95
88 through 95
SA-210/SA-210M
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
Identical except for editorial differences in Table 2
88a through 99a⑀1
SA-213/SA-213M
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
99a⑀1
Identical except for the additional H Grade heat treatment requirements in 6.4, the editorial deletion of 11.5, and the editorial
addition of Grade T92 to 6.1.3
...
ⴛ
...
...
90a
88 through 90a
SA-216/SA-216M
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
Identical except for addition of 2.3 and editorial differences in 2.1 and 10.1
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
93
84b through 93
SA-217/SA-217M
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
Identical except for the addition of a new para. 6.2
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
02
93 through 02
SA-225/SA-225M
Identical
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
93
86 through 93
SA-231/SA-231M
...
...
...
...
...
Identical except that certification requirements in 13.1 are mandatory
ⴛ
...
...
...
96
...
SA-232/SA-232M
Identical
ⴛ
...
...
...
91
...
SA-214/SA-214M
Identical
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
xlviii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Book Section
Specifications
SA-234/SA-234M
Identical
Non
Nuc.
Code
Case
I
III
IV
VIII-1
VIII-2
VIII-3
XII
Nuc.
Code
Case
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
97
82a through 97
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
97a
88c through 97a
SA-240
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
Identical except for editorial differences in Tables 1 and 2
Latest
Adopted
ASTM
Other
Acceptable
ASTM Editions
SA-249/SA-249M
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
02
88b through 02
Identical except for the deletion of S5, which addresses unstraightened tubes, and editorial correction to UNS designation in Table 4
SA-250/SA-250M
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
95
Identical except that Supplementary Requirement S1 is mandatory when 100% weld joint efficiency is required
88a through 95
SA-263
Identical
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
94
88 through 94
SA-264
Identical
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
94a
88 through 94a
SA-265
Identical
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
94a
88 through 94a
SA-266/SA-266M
Identical
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
99
87 through 99
SA-268/SA-268M
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
Identical except for editorial corrections to the Ti equations in Table 1 for Grades S44660,
S44735, and S46800. Also editorial correction to Table 3 for Grade S42900.
ⴛ
01
88b through 01
SA-275/SA-275M
Identical
...
98
86 through 98
- Magnetic Particle Examination of Forgings
...
...
...
SA-276
Identical
...
...
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
97
...
SA-278
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
ⴛ
93
85 through 93
SA-283/SA-283M
Identical
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
00
88 through 00
SA-285/SA-285M
Identical
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
90
82(R87) through 90
SA-299/SA-299M
Identical
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
97
82(R87) through 97
SA-302/SA-302M
Identical
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
97⑀1
82 through 97⑀1
00
84 through 00
SA-307
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
Identical except for the addition of 5.2 providing chemical requirements for Grade C anchor bolts
SA-311/SA-311M
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
...
ⴛ
95(R00)
Identical except for the deletion of 5.1.11, revision of Table 1 footnote A, and editorial corrections to Table 2
90b through 95(R00)
SA-312/SA-312M
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
Identical except for the deletion of 5.2, revision to 6.2 to add “H” Grade heat treatment requirements, and editorial differences in 7.1 and Table 1
01a
88a through 01a
99
85 through 99
SA-320/SA-320M
Identical
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
xlix
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
Book Section
Specifications
I
III
IV
VIII-1
VIII-2
VIII-3
XII
Nuc.
Code
Case
SA-325
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
Identical except for the deletion of the term “private label distributor” in 16.1 and 16.5
Non
Nuc.
Code
Case
...
Latest
Adopted
ASTM
00
Other
Acceptable
ASTM Editions
86a through 00
SA-333/SA-333M
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
99
94 through 99
Identical except for the deletion of 12.2 that conflicts with 15, and the editorial addition of 2.2 to the Referenced Documents section, and
editorial differences in 15.6.1 and 16.1
SA-334/SA-334M
Identical
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
99
88⑀1 through 99
SA-335/SA-335M
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
99
88a through 99
Identical except for the addition of a maximum hardness requirements of 250 HB for Grades P91 and P92 in 9.3. In 9.4, reference has
been made to Grade P92 in two locations under the heading Direction of Test. The headings for Tables 3 and 4 have been corrected such
that all three Grades P91, P92, and P122 have been included. In 5.3.4, reference to Grade T92 has been changed editorially to P92. In
13.2 on hardness test requirements, reference to P91 and P92 has been made
SA-336/SA-336M
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
Identical except for clarified heat treatment requirements in 6.2
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
SA-350/SA-350M
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
Identical except for the deletion of 6.1.2 and 14.1, revision to 14.2.5, and test reports have been
made mandatory
87 through 02b
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
00
86 through 00
SA-352/SA-352M
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
Identical except for editorial differences in 2.3 and 9.1
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
93⑀1
88 through 93⑀1
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
93
87 through 93
SA-354
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
Identical except for the deletion of the term “private label distributor” in 15.1 and 15.3.5
...
00a
86 through 00a
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
02b
ⴛ
SA-353/SA-353M
Identical
ⴛ
87a through 96
ⴛ
SA-351/SA-351M
Identical
ⴛ
96
...
ⴛ
SA-358/SA-358M
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
01
88 through 01
Identical except for clarified heat treatment requirements in 6.3.1, the deletion of 6.3.2.2 for HT-O pipe and 6.3.2.3 for HT-SO pipe, an editorial difference in 1.2, and the following additional requirements apply as shown in the specification.
SA-369/SA-369M
Identical
SA-370
Identical
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
- Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
92
88 through 92
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
02⑀1
77 through 02⑀1
SA-372/SA-372M
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
95
...
Identical except for a new para. 4.3.1 on the timing of heat treatment and renumbering of the existing paras. 4.3.1 through 4.3.4
SA-376/SA-376M
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
Identical except for the deletion of Grade HT-O and clarified heat treatment requirements in 6.2
SA-387/SA-387M
Identical
SA-388/SA-388M
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
- Ultrasonic Testing of Forgings
88 through 02
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
99⑀1
88 through 99⑀1
...
...
...
...
ⴛ
95
86 through 95
Identical
l
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
02
Not for Resale
Book Section
Specifications
SA-395
Identical
I
III
IV
VIII-1
VIII-2
VIII-3
XII
Nuc.
Code
Case
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
Non
Nuc.
Code
Case
Latest
Adopted
ASTM
ⴛ
88(R93)⑀1
Other
Acceptable
ASTM Editions
80 through 88(R93)⑀1
SA-403/SA-403M
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
00a
86 through 00a
Identical except for changes to 6.1 and the addition of 6.5.1 requiring separate heat treatment of the H grades and S33228
SA-409/SA-409M
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
95a⑀1
88 through 95a⑀1
Identical except for clarified heat treatment requirements for H grade stainless steels and S30815 editorial corrections in 5.3.1 and Tables
1, 2, and 3, deletion of 5.3.2.2 and 5.3.2.3 for the non-heat treated pipe provisions, and the inclusion of a grain size requirement in 5.1.1
for H grade stainless steels. A requirement for ASME Stamping has been added and editorial requirements apply as shown in the subtitle of
the specification
SA-414/SA-414M
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
01
Identical except for the deletion of Note A under para. 1.3 and the addition of para. 6.2 on thickness tolerances
SA-420/SA-420M
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
Identical except for editorial corrections to Tables 4 and 5
88 through 01
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
99
85a through 99
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
95
89 through 95
SA-426
...
ⴛ
...
...
Identical except for deletion of Grade CP7 in Table 3
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
92
80 through 92
SA-430/SA-430M
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
Identical except for clarified heat treatment requirements in 5.4.1
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
91
88⑀1 through 91
SA-435/SA-435M
Identical
...
...
...
...
...
90
82(R87) through 90
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
01a
84b through 01a
SA-449
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
Identical except for requiring all mating fastener components to be coated by the same zinc-coating
process in 5.1.4 and the deletion of private label distributor in 15.1 and 15.4
00
87 through 00
ⴛ
SA-423/SA-423M
Identical
...
- Straight Beam Ultrasonic of Plates
SA-437/SA-437M
Identical
SA-450/SA-450M
Identical
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
- General Requirements for Tubes
SA-451
...
ⴛ
...
Identical except for editorial differences in 15.1
...
...
...
...
...
ⴛ
96
88a through 96
...
...
...
...
...
93
80(R85) through 93
SA-453/SA-453M
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
99
86 through 99
Identical except for addition of Table 10 on threading and the editorial revision of 5.2.2 on threading. Editorial revision of 13.
Certification Section to clarify that the bolting Grade, Class, and Type must be included
...
ⴛ
90(R96)⑀1
SA-476
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
Identical except for editorial changes in 4.1.6 and 13.1 to make certification mandatory
...
00
82 through 00
SA-455/SA-455M
Identical
...
ⴛ
SA-479/SA-479M
Identical
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
82(R87) through
90(R96)⑀1
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
99a
87b through 99a
SA-480/SA-480M
Identical
- General Requirements - Flat Products
...
...
...
...
99b
88 through 99b
SA-484/SA-484M
Identical
- General Requirements Wrought SS Products
...
...
...
...
98
87 through 98
li
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Book Section
Specifications
SA-487/SA-487M
Identical
SA-494/SA-494M
SA-508/SA-508M
Identical
Non
Nuc.
Code
Case
I
III
IV
VIII-1
VIII-2
VIII-3
XII
Nuc.
Code
Case
Latest
Adopted
ASTM
Other
Acceptable
ASTM Editions
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
93
88 through 93
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
95
87 through 95
- See Section II, Part B
...
ⴛ
...
SA-513
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
...
...
00
...
Identical except that Supplementary Requirements S6 and either S7 or S8 at the manufacturer’s option are mandatory
SA-515/SA-515M
Identical
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
93
82 through 93
SA-516/SA-516M
Identical
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
90
86 through 90
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
93
87a⑀1 through 93
SA-517/SA-517M
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
Identical except for Grades A, B, E, F, J, P, and deletion of fusion in 1.1
SA-522/SA-522M
Identical
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
01
87 through 01
SA-524
Identical
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
93
88 through 93
...
...
...
...
99
88a through 99
SA-530/SA-530M
Identical
- General Requirements for Pipe
SA-533/SA-533M
Identical
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
95(R00)
87 through 95(R00)
SA-537/SA-537M
Identical
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
95(R00)
86 through 95(R00)
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
00
84a through 00
SA-540/SA-540M
...
ⴛ
...
Identical except for correction to the title in section 3
SA-541/SA-541M
Identical
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
95
87a through 95
SA-542/SA-542M
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
99⑀1
88 through 99⑀1
SA-543/SA-543M
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
...
93
87 through 93
SA-553/SA-553M
Identical
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
95(R00)
SA-556/SA-556M
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
SA-557/SA-557M
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
90a
88 through 90a
SA-562/SA-562M
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
90
82(R87) through 90
SA-563
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
94
84 through 94
lii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
87b through 95(R00)
90a(R95)⑀1 88 through 90a(R95)⑀1
Book Section
Specifications
SA-564/SA-564M
Identical
SA-568/SA-568M
Identical
I
III
IV
VIII-1
VIII-2
VIII-3
XII
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
02
87b through 02
...
...
...
...
02
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
01
...
- General Requirements for Steel Sheet
SA-572/SA-572M
Identical
Non
Nuc.
Code
Case
Nuc.
Code
Case
...
...
...
...
...
Latest
Adopted
ASTM
Other
Acceptable
ASTM Editions
SA-574
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
97a
82 through 97a
Identical except that Table 1 on chemical requirements has been deleted and Supplementary Requirement S1 is now mandatory.
Paragraphs 6.1 and 6.2 have been revised to refer to Table S1.1 and 6.3 has been deleted. The yield strength value in 7.3 has been
corrected editorially.
SA-577/SA-577M
Identical
- Ultrasonic Angle Beam of Plates
...
...
...
...
90
86 through 90
SA-578/SA-578M
Identical
- Ultrasonic Straight Beam of Plates
...
...
...
...
96
85 through 96
88 through 93
SA-587
...
Identical except for deletion of 1.5
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
93
SA-592/SA-592M
Identical
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
89(R94)⑀1
...
...
...
...
91
83 through 91
SA-609/SA-609M
Identical
...
- Ultrasonic Longitudinal Beam - Castings
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
01
87 through 01
SA-638/SA-638M
...
ⴛ
...
Identical except for an editorial correction in 6.2
...
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
00
87 through 00
SA-645/SA-645M
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
99a
87(R91) through 99a
SA-649/SA-649M
Identical
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
ⴛ
99
91a through 99
SA-660
Identical
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
91a
88 through 91a
SA-662/SA-662M
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
93
86 through 93
SA-666
Identical
...
...
...
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
00
90 through 00
SA-667/SA-667M
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
...
87
87(R93)
SA-671
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
Identical except for additional requirements that apply as shown in Specification
...
...
ⴛ
94
85 through 94
SA-612/SA-612M
Identical
...
ⴛ
85 through 89(R94)⑀1
SA-672
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
94
Identical except for the deletion of pipe Grade K. The additional requirements apply as shown in the Specification.
SA-675/SA-675M
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
Identical except for an editorial difference in Table 2
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
liii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
81 through 94
90a(R95)⑀1 85 through 90a(R95)⑀1
Book Section
Specifications
I
III
IV
VIII-1
VIII-2
VIII-3
XII
Nuc.
Code
Case
Non
Nuc.
Code
Case
Latest
Adopted
ASTM
Other
Acceptable
ASTM Editions
SA-688/SA-688M
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
01a
88a through 01a
Identical except that in the case of the -96 and -98 ASTM revisions, solution treatment of Grade UNS N08367 is mandatory
SA-691
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
...
Identical except that the additional requirements apply as shown in the Specification
ⴛ
...
SA-693
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Identical except for aligning the elongation requirements for Gr. XM-16 and correction of the max.
hardness for Gr. XM-12 and 630 in Table 5. Also a revision to Note B of Table 1.
98
85a through 98
02⑀1
88 through 02⑀1
90b
84 through 90b
SA-695
...
Identical for Type B only
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
SA-696
Identical
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
01b
...
SA-703/SA-703M
- General Requirements for Castings
Identical except for editorial corrections to Table 1
87b through 01b
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
95(R00)
SA-723/SA-723M
...
ⴛ
...
...
Identical except for editorial differences in 6.2.2 and 6.2.3
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
...
94
86a through 94
SA-724/SA-724M
...
...
...
ⴛ
Identical except for an editorial correction to Note B in Table 1
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
99
88 through 99
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
96
87 through 96
SA-731/SA-731M
...
...
...
Identical except for an editorial correction in Table 2
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
91
88 through 91
SA-736/SA-736M
Identical
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
88(R94). . .
SA-737/SA-737M
Identical
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
87(R91). . .
SA-738/SA-738M
Identical
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
00
SA-739
Identical
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
90a(R95)
...
...
...
94
...
SA-747/SA-747M
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
...
Identical except for the revision of the mandatory ordering requirements of 4.1.6 and the mandatory
use of Supplementary Requirement S15 of SA-781/SA-781M
99
86 through 99
SA-705/SA-705M
Identical
SA-727/SA-727M
Identical
...
...
ⴛ
90a(R95)⑀1 85 through 90a(R95)⑀1
ⴛ
...
...
SA-745/SA-745M
- Ultrasonic of Stainless Steel Forgings
Identical except for deletion of 1.5
SA-748/SA-748M
Identical
SA-749/SA-749M
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
- General Requirements for Steel Strip
87a through 00
81a through 90a(R95)
...
...
...
...
87
...
...
...
...
...
97
...
...
01
89a through 01
SA-751
- Chemical Analysis Test Methods for Steel
...
...
Identical except for editorial corrections to an element designation in Tables 1 and 2
liv
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
...
87a through 95(R00)
Not for Resale
...
Book Section
Specifications
SA-765/SA-765M
Identical
Non
Nuc.
Code
Case
I
III
IV
VIII-1
VIII-2
VIII-3
XII
Nuc.
Code
Case
Latest
Adopted
ASTM
Other
Acceptable
ASTM Editions
...
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
01
94 through 01
SA-770/SA-770M
Identical
- Tension Testing of Steel Plates
...
...
...
ⴛ
86
86(R90)e1
SA-781/SA-781M
Identical
- Common Requirements for Castings
...
...
...
...
99a
87a through 99a
SA-788
Identical
- General Requirements for Forgings
...
...
...
...
02⑀1
87 through 02⑀1
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
01a
88a through 01a
99
88 through 99
02
96 through 02
SA-789/SA-789M
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
SA-790/SA-790M
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
Identical except for the editorial revision to move the alternate heat treatment provisions from para.
6.1 to para. 5.3
SA-803/SA-803M
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
SA-813/SA-813M
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
...
...
95
88a through 95
Identical except for clarified heat treatment requirements for the H grade stainless steels and S30815 in 4.2.2, editorial corrections in Tables 2
and 3 and deletion of the provision for non-heat treated pipe in 4.2.5, 4.2.6, 4.2.7 and 13.2, as well as an added requirement for grain size limitation for the H grade stainless steels and S30815 in 4.1.4. In Table 2 the carbon requirement for S30815 has been corrected.
SA-814/SA-814M
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
Identical except for clarified heat treatment requirements in 4.2.2
...
ⴛ
...
...
01a
88a through 01a
SA-815/SA-815M
Identical
...
...
...
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
99
86 through 99
SA-832/SA-832M
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
...
...
...
99⑀1
84(R89) through 99⑀1
...
...
...
...
95(R01)
SA-834
Identical
- Common Requirements for Iron Castings
84 through 95(R01)
SA-836/SA-836M
Identical
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
ⴛ
95b
87a through 95b
SA-841/SA-841M
Identical
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
01
88 through 01
SA-905
Identical
...
...
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
93
91 through 93
SA-941
Identical
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
99b
...
SA-960
Identical
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
99b
...
SA-961
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Identical except for the deletion of the time requirement for purchaser rejection of material in para.
18.1
02
99 through 02
SA-962/SA-962M
Identical
99
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
lv
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
...
...
...
Book Section
Non
Nuc.
Code
Case
ⴛ
98
...
SA-999/SA-999M
- General Requirements, Pipes
...
...
...
...
...
Identical except for the addition of para. 5.4 on grade substitution and editorial corrections in 3.3, 8.1,
25.5, and 27.3
01
...
SA-1008/SA-1008M
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
ⴛ
...
Identical except for the addition of 8.1.1.1 on mechanical properties for pressure vessel design
...
01a
00 through 01a
SA-1011/SA-1011M
Identical
Specifications
SA-995
Identical
SA-1016/SA-1016M
Identical
SA-1017/SA-1017M
Identical
SF-568M
Identical
I
III
IV
VIII-1
VIII-2
VIII-3
XII
Nuc.
Code
Case
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
ⴛ
...
...
...
...
...
- General Requirements, Tubes
...
...
...
- Threaded Metric Fasteners
...
...
...
Latest
Adopted
ASTM
Other
Acceptable
ASTM Editions
...
...
...
...
01a
...
...
...
...
...
01
...
...
...
...
ⴛ
01
...
...
...
...
...
98
93a through 98
NOTE:
(1) SA-350/SA-350M Grade LF2 forgings, made to revisions earlier than the 2001 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, or to ASTM Specification
A 350/A 350M with year dates from 1987 through 1997 are acceptable for either Class 1 or Class 2 applications, unless Supplementary Requirement S4 was used to test forgings at a higher test temperature.
lvi
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
GUIDELINES ON MULTIPLE MARKING OF
MATERIALS
B-100
BACKGROUND
than one specification, grade, class, or type. Examples
are SA-53 and SA-106 (some grades and classes); SA-213
TP304L and TP304; SA-213 TP304 and 304H; and
SA-106 B and SA-106 C.
A common inquiry topic is the permissibility of using
material that is identified with two or more specifications
(or grades, classes, or types), even if they have different
strengths, or even if one of them is not permitted for use
in the construction code of application. The Committee
has addressed variants of these questions in several interpretations: I-89-11, IIA-92-08, VIII-1-89-269, and VIII1-89-197.
B-200
B-220
Dual or multiple marking is not acceptable if two or
more specifications to which the material is marked have
mutually exclusive requirements.
This prohibition includes more than just chemistry and
property requirements. Examples are SA-515 and
SA-516; the former requires melting to coarse grain practice while the latter requires melting to fine grain practice.
Another example is SA-213 TP304L and TP304H; the
carbon content ranges of these grades have no overlap.
GUIDELINES
The construction codes individually define what materials may be used in boilers, vessels, and components
constructed in compliance to their rules. If a material
meets all of the requirements for a specification for which
it is marked, including documentation, if any, and if it
meets all requirements for use imposed by the construction code, it may be used. The construction codes, in
general, do not address the case of materials marked with
more than one specification, grade, class, or type, so these
guidelines are offered for clarification.
B-210
B-230
GRADE SUBSTITUTION
Grade substitution is not permitted. Grade substitution
occurs when: (1) the material contains an element (other
than nitrogen) that is unspecified for one of the grades
marked; and (2) the amount of that element present in the
material meets the minimum and maximum composition
limits for that element in another grade of a specification
contained in Section II, Part A or Part B, whether or not
it is also so marked.
For example, a material meets all of the composition
limits for SA-240 304, contains 0.06C and 0.02N, but
also contains 0.45% Ti. This material cannot be marked
or provided as meeting SA-240 304 because the Ti content
meets the requirements of SA-240 321 [which is, Ti
greater than 5 ⴛ (C + N) but less than 0.7.].
Another material, with identical composition, except
0.35% Ti, may be marked SA-240 304 because the Ti
content does not meet the minimum requirement for 321.
The Ti content is just a residual.
ACCEPTABILITY OF MULTIPLE
MARKING
Dual or multiple marking is acceptable, as long as the
material so marked meets all of the requirements of all
the specifications, grades, classes, and types with which
it is marked.
All of the measured and controlled attributes of the
multiply-marked grades or specifications must overlap
(e.g., chemistry, mechanical properties, dimensions, and
tolerances) and the material so marked must exhibit values that fall within the overlaps. Further, the controlled
but unmeasured attributes of the specifications or grades
must overlap (e.g., melting practices, heat treatments, and
inspection.)
Many specifications or grades have significant overlap
of chemistry ranges or properties. It is common for material manufacturers to produce materials that satisfy more
B-240
MARKING SELECTION
If a material is marked with specifications, grades,
classes, or types, it may be used with the allowable
lvii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
PROHIBITION ON MULTIPLE
MARKING
Not for Resale
stresses, design stress intensities, or ratings appropriate
for any of the markings on the material, as long as the
material specification, grade, class, and type is permitted
by the code of construction governing the boiler, vessel,
or component in which the material is to be used. However, once the designer has selected which marking
applies (specification, grade, class types, etc.), the
designer must use all the design values appropriate for
that selection and may not mix and match values from
any other specifications, grades, classes, types, etc., with
which the material may be marked.
B-250
Any other markings, such as marking of non-ASME
or non-ASTM material specifications, have no relevance,
even if those markings are for materials explicitly prohibited by the construction code being used. That is, as long
as the one marking, and the documentation required by
the material and by the construction code, shows that it
meets all the requirements for use of that material in that
construction code, any additional markings are irrelevant.
lviii
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
OTHER MARKINGS
Not for Resale
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
The 2004 Edition of this Code contains revisions in addition to the 2001 Edition with 2002
and 2003 Addenda. The revisions are identified with the designation 04 in the margin and,
as described in the Foreword, become mandatory six months after the publication date of the
2004 Edition. To invoke these revisions before their mandatory date, use the designation
“2004 Edition” in documentation required by this Code. If you choose not to invoke these
revisions before their mandatory date, use the designation “2001 Edition through the 2003
Addenda” in documentation required by this Code.
Changes given below are identified on the pages by a margin note, 04, placed next to the
affected area.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Location
Page
Change
List of Sections
iii
Updated to reflect 04
Foreword
xi–xiii
Editorially revised
Specification Removal
xxxix
Added
Acceptable ASTM Editions
xlvii–lvi
Revised in its entirety, and columns for
Sections VIII-3 and XII added
SA-47/SA-47M
159–165
SA-47 redesignated as SA-47/SA-47M
and revised in its entirety
SA-53/SA-53M
167–193
Revised in its entirety
SA-134
221–225
Revised in its entirety
SA-135
227–235
Revised in its entirety
SA-194/SA-194M
297–313
Revised in its entirety
SA-209/SA-209M
327–331
Revised in its entirety
SA-217/SA-217M
355–359
Revised in its entirety
SA-268/SA-268M
449–457
Revised in its entirety
SA-302/SA-302M
495–498
Revised in its entirety
SA-312/SA-312M
513–524
Revised in its entirety
SA-334/SA-334M
563–572
Revised in its entirety
SA-350/SA-350M
595–605
Revised in its entirety
SA-358/SA-358M
639–647
Revised in its entirety
SA-376/SA-376M
721–730
Revised in its entirety
SA-387/SA-387M
731–737
Revised in its entirety
SA-437/SA-437M
815–819
Revised in its entirety
SA-449
821–828
Revised in its entirety
SA-476/SA-476M
861–866
SA-476 redesignated as SA-476/SA476M and revised in its entirety
SA-537/SA-537M
1019–1023
Revised in its entirety
SA-540/SA-540M
1025–1034
Revised in its entirety
lix
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Location
Page
Change
SA-553/SA-553M
1053–1057
Revised in its entirety
SA-564/SA-564M
1087–1095
Revised in its entirety
SA-572/SA-572M
1131–1135
Added
SA-666
1207–1216
Revised in its entirety
SA-671
1219
Paragraph 1.3.3 corrected by errata
SA-688/SA-688M
1245–1255
Revised in its entirety
SA-691
1257–1264
Revised in its entirety
SA-693
1265–1272
Revised in its entirety
SA-703/SA-703M
1281–1300
Revised in its entirety
SA-705/SA-705M
1301–1308
(1) Title revised
(2) Revised in its entirety
SA-724/SA-724M
1315–1318
(1) Title revised
(2) Revised in its entirety
SA-747/SA-747M
1357–1361
(1) Title revised
(2) Revised in its entirety
SA-751
1377–1383
Revised in its entirety
SA-790/SA-790M
1441–1451
Revised in its entirety
SA-803/SA-803M
1453–1463
Revised in its entirety
SA-814/SA-814M
1475–1482
Revised in its entirety
SA-832/SA-832M
1495–1500
Revised in its entirety
SA-961
1547–1557
Revised in its entirety
SA-999/SA-999M
1573–1585
Added
SA-1008/SA-1008M
1587–1596
Revised in its entirety
SA-1017/SA-1017M
1619–1622
Added
Mandatory Appendix I
1645
Added
NOTE: Volume 54 of the Interpretations to Section II, Part A of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code follows the last page of the Edition to Section II, Part A.
lx
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SPECIFICATION FOR GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
ROLLED STRUCTURAL STEEL BARS, PLATES,
SHAPES, AND SHEET PILING
SA-6 /SA-6M
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 6 /A 6M-99b.)
ASTM
Designation
1.
Scope
1.1 This specification covers a group of common
requirements that, unless otherwise specified in the material specification, apply to rolled steel plates, shapes, sheet
piling, and bars under each of the following specifications
issued by ASTM:
ASTM
Designation
A 36 /A 36M
A 131 /A 131M
A 242 /A 242M
A 283 /A 283M
A 328 /A 328M
A 514 /A 514M
A 529 /A 529M
A 572 /A 572M
A 573 /A 573M
A 588 /A 588M
A 633 /A 633M
A 656 /A 656M
A 678 /A 678M
A 690 /A 690M
A 709 /A 709M
Carbon and High-Strength Low-Alloy
Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and
Bars and Quenched-and-Tempered
Alloy Structural Steel Plates for
Bridges
A 710 /A 710M
Age-Hardening Low-Carbon NickelCopper-Chromium-MolybdenumColumbium Alloy Structural Steel
Plates
A 769 /A 769M
Carbon and High-Strength Electric
Resistance Welded Steel Structural
Shapes
A 786 /A 786M
Rolled Steel Floor Plates
A 808 /A 808M
High-Strength Low-Alloy Carbon, Manganese, Columbium, Vanadium Steel
of Structural Quality with Improved
Notch Toughness
A 827 /A 827M
Plates, Carbon Steel, for Forging and
Similar Applications
A 829 /A 829M
Plates, Alloy Steel, Structural Quality
A 830 /A 830M
Plates, Carbon Steel, Structural Quality,
Furnished to Chemical Composition
Requirements
A 852 /A 852M
Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy
Structural Steel Plate with 70 ksi
[485 MPa] Minimum Yield Strength
to 4 in. [100 mm] Thick
A 857 /A 857M
Steel Sheet Piling, Cold Formed, Light
Gage
A 871 /A 871M
High-Strength Low Alloy Structural
Steel Plate With Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
A 913 /A 913M
Specification for High-Strength LowAlloy Steel Shapes of Structural
Quality, Produced by Quenching and
Self-Tempering Process (QST)
Title of Specification
Carbon Structural Steel
Structural Steel for Ships
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural
Steel
Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength
Carbon Steel Plates
Steel Sheet Piling
High-Yield Strength, Quenched and
Tempered Alloy Steel Plate Suitable
for Welding
High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel
of Structural Quality
High-Strength Low-Alloy ColumbiumVanadium Steel
Structural Carbon Steel Plates of
Improved Toughness
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural
Steel with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point to 4 in. [100 mm]
Thick
Normalized High-Strength Low-Alloy
Structural Steel Plates
Hot-Rolled Structural Steel, HighStrength Low-Alloy Plate with
Improved Formability
Quenched-and-Tempered Carbon and
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural
Steel Plates
High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel H-Piles
and Sheet Piling for Use in Marine
Environments
Title of Specification
1
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
ASTM
Designation
A 945 /A 945M
A 992 /A 992M
the limiting values in accordance with the rounding
method of Practice E 29.
Title of Specification
Specification for High-Strength LowAlloy Structural Steel Plate with
Low Carbon and Restricted Sulfur
for Improved Weldability, Formability, and Toughness
Specification for Steel for Structural
Shapes for Use in Building Framing
1.12 The values stated in either inch-pound units or
SI units are to be regarded as standard. Within the text,
the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in
each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
system is to be used independently of the other, without
combining values in any way.
1.2 Annex A1 lists permissible variations in dimensions and mass (Note 1) in SI (metric) units. The values
listed are not exact conversions of the values in Tables
1 through 31 inclusive but are, instead, rounded or rationalized values. Conformance to Annex A1 is mandatory
when the “M” specification designation is used.
1.13 This specification and the applicable material
specifications are expressed in both inch-pound units and
SI units. However, unless the order specifies the applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the material
shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
1.14 The text of this specification contains notes and/
or footnotes that provide explanatory material. Such notes
and footnotes, excluding those tables and figures, do not
contain any mandatory requirements.
NOTE 1 — The term “weight” is used when inch-pound units are the
standard; however, under SI, the preferred term is “mass.”
1.3 Annex A2 lists the dimensions of some shape
profiles.
1.4 Appendix X1 provides information on coiled
product as a source of structural plates, shapes, sheet
piling, and bars.
2.
Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
A 673 /A 673M Specification for Sampling Procedure for
Impact Testing of Structural Steel
A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading
Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment
A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
A 829 Specification for Plates, Alloy Steel, Structural
Quality
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data
to Determine Conformance with Specifications
E 112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
E 208 Test Method for Conducting Drop-Weight Test
to Determine Nil-Ductility Transition Temperature of
Ferritic Steels
1.5 Appendix X2 provides information on the variability of tensile properties in plates and structural shapes.
1.6 Appendix X3 provides information on weldability.
1.7 Appendix X4 provides information on cold bending of plates, including suggested minimum inside radii
for cold bending.
1.8 This specification also covers a group of supplementary requirements that are applicable to several of
the above specifications as indicated therein. Such
requirements are provided for use where additional testing
or additional restrictions are required by the purchaser,
and apply only when specified individually in the purchase order.
1.9 In case of any conflict in requirements, the requirements of the individual material specification shall prevail
over those of this general specification.
2.2 American Welding Society Standards:
A5.1 Mild Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes
A5.5 Low-Alloy Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes
1.10 Additional requirements that are specified in the
purchase order and accepted by the supplier are permitted,
provided that such requirements do not negate any of the
requirements of this general specification or the individual
material specification.
2.3 U.S. Military Standards:
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products Preparation for Shipment and Storage
1.11 For purposes of determining conformance with
this specification and the various material specifications
referenced in 1.1, values shall be rounded to the nearest
unit in the right-hand place of figures used in expressing
2.4 U.S. Federal Standard:
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipments (Civil
Agencies)
2
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
2.5 AIAG Standard:
B-1 Bar Code Symbology Standard
3.1.2.8 “MC” shapes — channels that cannot be
classified as “C” shapes.
3.
Terminology
3.1 Descriptions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.2.9 “L” shapes — shapes having equal-leg
and unequal-leg angles.
3.1.1 Plates (other than floor plates or coiled product) — Flat, hot-rolled steel, classified as follows:
3.1.3 sheet piling — rolled steel sections that are
capable of being interlocked, forming a continuous wall
when individual pieces are driven side by side.
3.1.1.1 When Ordered to Thickness:
(1) Over 8 in. [200 mm] in width and 0.230 in.
[over 6 mm] or over in thickness.
(2) Over 48 in. [1200 mm] in width and 0.180
in. [over 4.5 mm] or over in thickness.
3.1.1.2 When Ordered to Weight [Mass]:
(1) Over 8 in. [200 mm] in width and 9.392 lb /ft2
[47.10 kg /m2] or heavier.
(2) Over 48 in. [1200 mm] in width and 7.350
lb /ft2 [35.32 kg /m2] or heavier.
3.1.4 bars — rounds, squares, and hexagons, of all
sizes; flats 13⁄64 in. (0.203 in.) and over [over 5 mm] in
specified thickness, not over 6 in. [150 mm] in specified
width; and flats 0.230 in. and over [over 6 mm] in specified thickness, over 6 to 8 in. [150 to 200 mm] inclusive,
in specified width.
3.1.5 exclusive — when used in relation to ranges,
as for ranges of thickness in the tables of permissible
variations in dimensions, is intended to exclude only the
greater value of the range. Thus, a range from 60 to 72
in. [1500 to 1800 mm] exclusive includes 60 in. [1500
mm], but does not include 72 in. [1800 mm].
3.1.1.3 Slabs, sheet bars, and skelp, though frequently falling in the foregoing size ranges, are not
classed as plates.
3.1.6 rimmed steel — steel containing sufficient
oxygen to give a continuous evolution of carbon monoxide during solidification, resulting in a case or rim of
metal virtually free of voids.
3.1.1.4 Coiled product is excluded from qualification to individual material specifications governed by
this specification until decoiled, leveled, cut to length,
and, if required, properly tested by the processor in accordance with ASTM specification requirements (see 6.4.2
and the individual material specification).
3.1.7 semi-killed steel — incompletely deoxidized
steel containing sufficient oxygen to form enough carbon
monoxide during solidification to offset solidification
shrinkage.
3.1.2 Shapes (Flanged Sections):
3.1.2.1 structural-size shapes — rolled flanged
sections having at least one dimension of the cross section
3 in. [75 mm] or greater. Structural shape size groupings
used for tensile property classification are listed in
Table A.
3.1.8 capped steel — rimmed steel in which the
rimming action is limited by an early capping operation.
Capping is carried out mechanically by using a heavy
metal cap on a bottle-top mold or chemically by an addition of aluminum or ferrosilicon to the top of the molten
steel in an open-top mold.
3.1.2.2 bar size shapes — rolled flanged sections
having a maximum dimension of the cross section less
than 3 in. [75 mm].
3.1.9 killed steel — steel deoxidized, either by addition of strong deoxidizing agents or by vacuum treatment,
to reduce the oxygen content to such a level that no
reaction occurs between carbon and oxygen during solidification.
3.1.2.3 “W” shapes — doubly-symmetric, wideflange shapes with inside flange surfaces that are substantially parallel.
3.1.2.4 “HP” shapes — are wide-flange shapes
generally used as bearing piles whose flanges and webs
are of the same nominal thickness and whose depth and
width are essentially the same.
3.1.10 groupings for tensile property classification — in some of the material specifications, the tensile
property requirements vary for different sizes of shapes
due to mass effect, etc. For the convenience of those
using the specifications, the various sizes of shapes have
been divided into groups based on section thickness at
the standard tension test location (webs of beams, channels, and zees; legs of angles; and stems of tees). The
material specifications designate shape sizes by reference
to the group designations. The groupings are shown in
Table A.
3.1.2.5 “S” shapes — doubly-symmetric beam
shapes with inside flange surfaces that have a slope of
approximately 162⁄3%.
3.1.2.6 “M” shapes — doubly-symmetric shapes
that cannot be classified as “W,” “S,” or “HP” shapes.
3.1.2.7 “C” shapes — channels with inside flange
surfaces that have a slope of approximately 162⁄3%.
3
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
3.1.11 mill edge — the normal edge produced by
rolling between horizontal finishing rolls. A mill edge
does not conform to any definite contour. Mill edge plates
have two mill edges and two trimmed edges.
4.1.8 Exclusion of either structural product from
coil or discrete cut lengths of flat product (see 6.3 or
Appendix X1), if applicable,
4.1.9 Heat treatment requirements (see 7.2 and 7.3),
if any,
3.1.12 universal mill edge — the normal edge produced by rolling between horizontal and vertical finishing
rolls. Universal mill plates, sometimes designated UM
Plates, have two universal mill edges and two trimmed
edges.
4.1.10 Mechanical property test report requirements (see Section 15), if any,
4.1.11 Special packaging, marking, and loading for
shipment requirements (see Section 18), if any,
3.1.13 sheared edge — the normal edge produced
by shearing. Sheared edge plates are trimmed on all edges.
4.1.12 Supplementary requirements, if any, including any additional requirements called for in the supplementary requirements,
3.1.14 gas cut edge — the edge produced by gas
flame cutting.
4.1.13 End use, if there are any end-use-specific
requirements (see 5.1, 12.3.4, Table 22 or Table A1.22,
and Table 24 or Table A1.24), and
3.1.15 special cut edge — usually the edge produced
by gas flame cutting involving special practices such as
preheating or postheating, or both, in order to minimize
stresses, avoid thermal cracking, and reduce the hardness
of the gas cut edge. In special instances, special cut edge
is used to designate an edge produced by machining.
4.1.14 Special requirements (see 1.10), if any,
4.1.15 Repair welding requirements (see 10.5), if
any.
4.1.16 Color Marking of plates (see 5.1.5).
3.1.16 sketch — when used to describe a form of
plate, denotes a plate other than rectangular, circular, or
semicircular. Sketch plates may be furnished to a radius
or with four or more straight sides.
5.
3.1.17 normalizing — a heat treating process in
which a steel plate is reheated to a uniform temperature
above the upper critical temperature and then cooled in
air to below the transformation range.
Identification of Structural Products
5.1 Required Plate Markings:
5.1.1 Except as allowed by 5.1.4.2 and 5.7, plates
shall be legibly marked with the following: applicable
ASTM designation (see 1.1) (year of issue not required);
“G” or “MT” if applicable (see 5.1.2); applicable grade;
heat number; size and thickness; color marking, if applicable (see 5.1.5); and name, brand, or trademark of the
manufacturer (for plates produced in discrete cut lengths)
or the processor (for plates produced from coil and for
subdivided plates (see 5.7).
3.1.18 plate-as-rolled — when used in relation to
the location and number of tests, the term referes to the
unit plate rolled from a slab or directly from an ingot. It
does not refer to the condition of the plate.
4.
Ordering Information
4.1 Information items to be considered, if appropriate,
for inclusion in purchase orders are as follows:
5.1.2 Plates that are required to be heat treated, but
have not been so heat treated, shall be marked, by the
manufacturer or processor, with the letter “G” (denoting
green) following the required ASTM designation mark,
except that “G” marking is not necessary if such plates
are for shipment, for the purpose of obtaining the required
heat treatment, to an organization under the manufacturer’s control. Such plates shall have been qualified for
shipment on the basis of test specimens that have been
so heat treated. Plates that are required to be heat treated,
and have been so heat treated, shall be marked, by the
party that performed the heat treatment, with the letter
“MT” (denoting material treated) following the required
ASTM designation mark.
4.1.1 ASTM specification designation (see 1.1) and
year of issue,
4.1.2 Name of material (plates, shapes, bars, or
sheet piling),
4.1.3 Shape designation, or size and thickness or
diameter,
4.1.4 Grade, class, and type designation, if applicable,
4.1.5 Condition, (see Section 7) if other than asrolled,
5.1.3 Types of Marking:
5.1.3.1 Any required color marking (see 5.1.5)
shall be by paint marking.
4.1.6 Quantity (weight [mass] or number of pieces),
4.1.7 Length,
4
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
5.1.3.2 Except as allowed by 5.1.4.2 and 5.7, the
required markings for plates shall be by steel die stamping
or paint marking. (See also 5.1.5)
and mill identification marks on each piece. Either the
manufacturer’s name, brand, or trademark shall be shown
in raised letters at intervals along the length.
5.1.4 Location of Markings:
5.1.4.1 The required markings for plates shall
be in at least one place on each finished plate.
5.4 Bars — Bars of all sizes, when loaded for shipment, shall be properly identified with the name or brand
of manufacturer, purchaser’s name and order number, the
ASTM designation number (year of issue not required),
grade number where appropriate, size and length, weight
[mass] of lift, and the heat number for identification.
Unless otherwise specified, the method of marking is
at the manufacturer’s option and shall be made by hot
stamping, cold stamping, painting, or marking tags
attached to the lifts of bars. Bars are not required to be
die-stamped.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
5.1.4.2 For secured lifts of all sizes of plates 3⁄8
in. [10 mm] (or 5⁄16 in. [8 mm] for material specified for
bridge construction end use) or under in thickness, and
for secured lifts of all thicknesses of plates 36 in. [900
mm] or under in width, the manufacturer or processor
shall have the option of placing such markings on only
the top piece of each lift, or of showing such markings
on a substantial tag attached to each lift, unless otherwise
specified (See also 5.6)
5.5 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements of
5.1 to 5.4 inclusive, the manufacturer or processor shall
have the option of using bar coding as a supplementary
identification method.
5.1.5 Color Marking:
5.1.5.1 When specified in the Purchase Order,
each plate (except for plates in secured lifts), for which
a color scheme is given for the respective ASTM Designation and Grade listed in 5.6, shall be marked with that
color scheme along one edge or on the rolled surface
within 12 in. [300 mm] of the heat number identification.
For plates in secured lifts, a vertical color scheme identification stripe for the full height of the lift is permissible.
Each plate in the lift shall be marked with this stripe.
Color markings shall be distinct and of sufficient size to
be clearly visible.
NOTE 2 —Bar
5.6 Colors — The following color scheme shall be
used to identify the listed ASTM Designation and Grade
of structural plate and shapes:
ASTM Designation and Grade
A 242 /A 242M
A 283 /A 283M (Grade D)
A 514 /A 514M
A 529 /A 529M Grade 50
A 529 /A 529M Grade 55
A 572 Grade 42 /A 572M Grade 290
A 572 Grade 50 /A 572M Grade 345
A 572 /A 572M Grade 55
A 572 Grade 60 /A 572M Grade 415
A 572 Grade 65 /A 572M Grade 450
A 588 /A 588M
A 709 Grade 50 /A 709M Grade 345
A 709 Grade 50W /A 709M Grade 345W
A 709 Grade 70W /A 709M Grade 485W
A 709 Grade HPS70W /A 709M Grade
HPS485W
A 709 Grade 100 /A 709M Grade 690
A 709 Grade 100W /A 709M Grade 690W
A 852 /A 852M
A 913 Grade 50
A 913 Grade 60
A 913 Grade 65
A 913 Grade 70
5.2 Shapes:
5.2.1 Except as allowed by 5.2.2 and 5.7, shapes
shall be marked with the heat number, size of section,
length, and mill identification marks on each piece. The
manufacturer’s name, brand, or trademark shall be shown
in raised letters at intervals along the length. In addition,
shapes shall be identified with the ASTM designation
(year of issue not required) and grade, either by marking
each piece individually or, if bundled, by attaching a
substantial tag to the bundle.
5.2.2 Bundling for shipment of small shapes with
the greatest cross-sectional dimensional not greater than
6 in. [150 mm] is permissible. Each lift or bundle shall be
marked or substantially tagged showing the identification
information listed in 5.2.1.
5.2.3 Each structural shape or lift, for which a color
scheme is given for the respective ASTM Designation
and Grade listed in 5.6, shall be marked with the color
scheme on one cut end or across the rolled face of one
flange or leg, adjacent to one cut end. Color markings
shall be distinct and of sufficient size to be clearly visible.
Color Scheme
blue
orange
red
black and yellow
black and red
green and white
green and yellow
green and red
green and gray
green and blue
blue and yellow
green and yellow
blue and yellow
blue and orange
blue and red
red
red and orange
blue and orange
red and yellow
red and gray
red and blue
red and white
5.7 Subdivided Material:
5.7.1 Pieces separated from master structural product by a processor shall be identified with the ASTM
designation (year of issue not required), grade, heat number, and the heat treatment identification, if applicable,
5.3 Steel Sheet Piling — Steel sheet piling shall be
marked with the heat number, size of section, length,
5
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
coding should be consistent with AIAG
Standard B-1.
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
along with the trademark, brand, or name of the organization subdividing the structural product. The identification
methods shall be in accordance with the requirements of
5.1 to 5.4 inclusive, except that the raised letters method
for shapes and steel sheet piling is not required. If the
original manufacturer’s identification remains intact, the
structural product need not be additionally identified by
the organization supplying the structural product.
repairs, and inspection; and except as allowed by Section
7, performs operations not intended to affect the properties of the material. Specific sections of this specification
for which the processor is responsible are 10, 11, 12, 5,
13, 16, 14, 15, and 18.
6.4.3 When part of a heat is rolled into discrete
lengths of flat product and the balance of the heat into
coiled product, each part must be tested separately.
6.4.4 Structural products produced from coils shall
not contain splice welds, unless previously approved by
the purchaser.
5.7.2 As an alternative, pieces from the same heat
of structural product shall be bundled or placed in secured
lifts, with the identification specified in 5.7.1 placed on
the top piece of each lift or shown on a substantial tag
attached to each lift or bundle.
7.
Heat Treatment
7.1 When material is required to be heat treated, such
heat treatment may be performed by the manufacturer,
the processor, or the fabricator, unless otherwise specified
in the material specification.
6.
Manufacture
6.1 Unless otherwise specified in the material specification, the steel shall be made by the open-hearth, basicoxygen, or electric-furnace process. Additional refining
by vacuum-arc-remelt (VAR) or electroslag-remelt (ESR)
is permitted.
NOTE 3 — When no heat treatment is required, the manufacturer or
processor has the option of heat treating the products by normalizing,
stress relieving, or normalizing then stress relieving to meet the material
specification.
6.2 The steel shall be strand cast or cast in stationary
molds.
7.2 When heat treatment is to be performed by other
than the material manufacturer, the order shall so state.
7.2.1 When heat treatment is to be performed by
other than the material manufacturer, the structural plates
shall be accepted on the basis of tests made on specimens
taken from full thickness coupons heat treated in accordance with the requirements specified in the material
specification or on the order. If the heat-treatment temperatures are not specified, the manufacturer or processor
shall heat treat the coupons under conditions he considers
appropriate. The purchaser shall be informed of the procedure followed in heat treating the specimens.
6.2.1 Strand Cast:
6.2.1.1 When heats of the same nominal chemical composition are consecutively strand cast at one time,
the heat number assigned to the cast product need not be
changed until all of the steel in the cast product is from
the following heat.
6.2.1.2 When two consecutively strand cast heats
have different nominal chemical composition ranges, the
manufacturer shall remove the transition material by an
established procedure that positively separates the grades.
6.3 Structural products are produced in either discrete
cut lengths of flat product or from coils.
7.3 When heat treatment is to be performed by the
manufacturer or the processor, the material shall be heat
treated as specified in the material specification, or as
specified in the purchase order, provided that the heat
treatment specified by the purchaser is not in conflict
with the requirements of the material specification.
6.3.1 Structural products produced from coil means
structural products that have been cut to individual lengths
from a coiled product and are furnished without heat
treatment. For the purposes of this paragraph, stress
relieving is not considered to be a heat treatment.
6.3.2 Structural products that are heat treated
(except stress relieving) after decoiling shall be considered to be discrete cut lengths of flat product.
7.4 When normalizing is to be performed by the fabricator, the material shall be either normalized or heated
uniformly for hot forming, provided that the temperature
to which the structural products are heated for hot forming
does not significantly exceed the normalizing temperature.
6.4 When structural products are produced from coils:
6.4.1 The manufacturer directly controls one or
more of the operations (that is, melting, rolling, coiling,
etc.), that affect the chemical composition or the mechanical properties, or both, of the material.
6.4.2 The processor decoils, forms, cuts to length,
and marks; performs and certifies tests, examinations,
7.5 The use of cooling rates that are faster than those
obtained by cooling in air to improve the toughness shall
be subject to approval by the purchaser, and structural
products so treated shall be tempered subsequently in the
range from 1100 to 1300°F [595 to 705°C].
6
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
8.
Chemical Analysis
8.1 Heat Analysis — An analysis of each heat shall
be made by the manufacturer to determine the percentage
of carbon, manganese, phosphorus, sulfur, and any other
elements specified or restricted by the applicable specification. This analysis shall be made from a test sample
preferably taken during the pouring of the heat. The heat
analysis shall be reported to the purchaser or his representative and shall conform to the heat analysis requirements
of the applicable specification.
9.
Metallurgical Structure
9.1 When a grain size is specified, it shall be specified
as fine austenitic grain size or coarse austenitic grain size.
Austenitic grain size shall be determined in accordance
with Test Methods E 112.
9.2 Coarse Austenitic Grain Size — When coarse austenitic grain size is specified, steel having grain size number of 1 to 5 as determined by the method described in
9.1 shall be acceptable. Conformance to the specified
grain size for at least 70% of the area examined shall
constitute the basis of acceptance. One test per heat shall
be made and the grain size results shall be reported.
8.1.1 When vacuum-arc-remelting or electroslag
remelting is used, a heat is defined as all the ingots
remelted from a single primary melt. The heat analysis
shall be obtained from one remelted ingot, or the product
of one remelted ingot, of each primary melt providing
the heat analysis of the primary melt meets the heat
analysis requirements of the material specification. If the
heat analysis of the primary melt does not meet the heat
analysis requirements of the material specification, one
test sample shall be taken from the product of each
remelted ingot. In either case, the analyses so obtained
from the remelted material shall conform to the heat
analysis requirements of the applicable specification.
9.3 Fine Austenitic Grain Size:
9.3.1 When fine austenitic grain size is specified,
steel having grain size number 5 or higher as determined
by the method described in 9.1 shall be acceptable. Conformance to the specified grain size for at least 70% of
the area examined shall constitute the basis of acceptance.
One grain size test per heat shall be performed except as
described in 9.3.2 and the grain size results shall be
reported.
9.3.2 When aluminum is used as the grain refining
element and on heat analysis the aluminum content is
not less than 0.020% total aluminum, or alternatively,
0.015% acid soluble aluminum, the fine austenitic grain
size requirement shall be deemed fulfilled and the testing
requirement of 9.1 shall be waived. The aluminum content
shall be reported if the testing requirement is waived.
8.1.2 In addition to the elements specified by the
applicable specification, test reports shall include for
information the chemical analyses for copper, columbium, chromium, nickel, molybdenum, silicon, and
vanadium.
NOTE 4 — When the amount of copper, chromium, nickel, molybdenum or silicon is less than 0.02%, the analysis may be reported as
“<0.02.%.” When the amount of columbium or vanadium is less than
0.008%, the analysis may be reported as “<0.008%.”
9.3.3 When specified on the order, one grain size
test (see 9.1) per heat shall be made regardless of type
or content of grain refining element. Austenitic grain size
shall conform to 9.3.1.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
8.2 Product Analysis — The purchaser shall have the
option of analyzing finished material representing each
heat. Sampling shall be in accordance with Test Methods,
Practices, and Terminology A 751. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements
of the product specification subject to the permitted variations in product analysis given in Table B. If a range is
specified, the determinations of any element in a heat
shall not vary both above and below the specified range.
Rimmed or capped steel is characterized by a lack of
homogeneity in its composition, especially for the elements carbon, phosphorus, and sulfur. Therefore, the limitations for these elements shall not be applicable unless
misapplication is clearly indicated.
9.3.4 Where elements other than aluminum are used
for grain refining, the content of such elements shall be
reported with the heat analysis.
10. Quality
10.1 General — The material shall be free of injurious
defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.
NOTE 5 — Unless otherwise specified, structural quality steels are
normally furnished in the as-rolled condition and subjected to visual
inspection by the manufacturer. Non-injurious surface or internal imperfections or both may be present in the steel as delivered and may require
conditioning by the purchaser to improve the appearance of the steel
or in preparation for welding, coating, or other further processing.
More restrictive requirements may be specified by invoking supplementary requirements or by agreement between purchaser and supplier.
Materials that exhibit injurious defects during subsequent fabrication
are deemed not to comply with the specification. (See 17.2.) Fabricators
should be aware that cracks may initiate upon bending a sheared or
burned edge during the fabrication process. This is not considered to
8.3 Referee Analysis — For referee purposes, Test
Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751 shall be used.
8.4 Grade Substitution— Alloy steel grades that meet
the chemical requirements of Table 1 of Specification A
829 shall not be substituted for carbon steel grades.
7
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
be a fault of the steel but is rather a function of the induced cold-work
or heat-affected zone.
The conditioning requirements in 10.2, 10.3, and 10.4 limit the conditioning allowed to be performed by the manufacturer. Conditioning of
imperfections beyond the limits of 10.2, 10.3, and 10.4 may be performed by parties other than the manufacturer at the discretion of the
purchaser.
10.3.2 The deposition of weld metal (see 10.5)
following removal of imperfections that are greater in
depth than the limits listed in 10.3.1 shall be subject to
the following limiting conditions:
10.3.2.1 The total area of the chipped or ground
surface of any piece prior to welding shall not exceed
2% of the total surface area of that piece.
10.2 Plate Conditioning:
10.2.1 The grinding of plates by the manufacturer
or processor to remove imperfections on the top or bottom
surface shall be subject to the limitations that the area
ground is well faired without abrupt changes in contour
and the grinding does not reduce the thickness of the
plate by (1) more than 7% under the nominal thickness
for plates ordered to weight per square foot or mass per
square metre, but in no case more than 1⁄8 in. [3 mm]; or
(2) below the permissible minimum thickness for plates
ordered to thickness in inches or millimetres.
10.3.2.2 The reduction of thickness of the material resulting from removal of imperfections prior to welding shall not exceed 30% of the nominal thickness at
the location of the imperfection, nor shall the depth of
depression prior to welding exceed 11⁄4 in. [32 mm] in
any case except as noted in 10.3.2.3.
10.3.2.3 The deposition of weld metal (see 10.5)
following grinding, chipping, or arc-air gouging of the
toes of angles, beams, channels, and zees and the stems
and toes of tees shall be subject to the limitation that,
prior to welding, the depth of the depression, measured
from the toe inward, is not more than the thickness of
the material at the base of the depression or 1⁄2 in. [12.5
mm], whichever is the lesser.
10.2.2 The deposition of weld metal (see 10.5)
following the removal of imperfections on the top or
bottom surface of plates by chipping, grinding, or arcair gouging shall be subject to the following limiting
conditions:
10.3.2.4 The deposition of weld metal (see 10.5)
and grinding to correct or build up the interlock of any
sheet piling section at any location shall be subject to the
limitation that the total surface area of the weld not exceed
2% of the total surface area of the piece.
10.2.2.1 The chipped, ground, or gouged area
shall not exceed 2% of the area of the surface being
conditioned.
10.2.2.2 After removal of any imperfections preparatory to welding, the thickness of the plate at any
location shall not be reduced by more than 30% of the
nominal thickness of the plate. (Specification A 131/A
131M restricts the reduction in thickness to 20%
maximum.)
10.4 Bar Conditioning:
10.4.1 The conditioning of bars by the manufacturer or processor to remove imperfections by grinding,
chipping, or some other means shall be subject to the
limitations that the conditioned area is well faired and
the affected sectional area is not reduced by more than
the applicable permitted variations (see Section 13).
10.2.3 The deposition of weld metal (see 10.5)
following the removal of injurious imperfections on the
edges of plates by grinding, chipping, or arc-air gouging
by the manufacturer or processor shall be subject to the
limitation that, prior to welding, the depth of the depression, measured from the plate edge inward, is not more
than the thickness of the plate or 1 in. [25 mm], whichever
is the lesser.
10.4.2 The deposition of weld metal (see 10.5)
following chipping or grinding to remove imperfections
that are greater in depth than the limits listed in 10.4.1
shall be subject to the following conditions:
10.4.2.1 The total area of the chipped or ground
surface of any piece, prior to welding, shall not exceed
2% of the total surface area of the piece.
10.3 Structural Size Shapes, Bar Size Shapes, and
Sheet Piling Conditioning:
10.3.1 The grinding, or chipping and grinding, of
structural size shapes, bar size shapes, and sheet piling
by the manufacturer or processor to remove imperfections
shall be subject to the limitations that the area ground is
well faired without abrupt changes in contour and the
depression does not extend below the rolled surface by
more than (1) 1⁄32 in. [1 mm], for material less than 3⁄8
in. [10 mm] in thickness; (2) 1⁄16 in. [2 mm], for material
3
⁄8 to 2 in. [10 to 50 mm] inclusive in thickness; or (3)
1
⁄8 in. [3 mm], for material over 2 in. [50 mm] in thickness.
10.4.2.2 The reduction of sectional dimension
of a round, square, or hexagon bar, or the reduction in
thickness of a flat bar, resulting from removal of an
imperfection, prior to welding, shall not exceed 5% of
the nominal dimension or thickness at the location of the
imperfection.
10.4.2.3 For the edges of flat bars, the depth of
the conditioning depression prior to welding shall be
measured from the edge inward and shall be limited to
8
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
a maximum depth equal to the thickness of the flat bar
or 1⁄2 in. [12.5 mm], whichever is less.
is considered to be prequalified if its chemical composition and mechanical properties are comparable to those
for one of the prequalified base metals listed in ANSI/
AWS D1.1.
(e) Any material not listed in ASME Section IX also
is considered to be a material with an S-number in ASME
Section IX if its chemical composition and its mechanical
properties are comparable to those for one of the materials
listed in ASME Section IX with an S-number.
10.5 Repair by Welding:
10.5.1 General Requirements:
10.5.1.1 Repair by welding shall be in accordance with a welding procedure specification (WPS)
using shielded metal arc welding (SMAW), gas metal arc
welding (GMAW), flux cored are welding (FCAW), or
submerged arc welding (SAW) processes. Shielding
gases used shall be of welding quality.
10.5.1.8 When so specified in the purchase order,
the WPS shall include qualification by Charpy V-notch
testing, with the test locations, test conditions, and the
acceptance criteria meeting the requirements specified for
repair welding in the purchase order.
10.5.1.2 Electrodes and electrode-flux combinations shall be in accordance with the requirements of
AWS Specification A5.1, A5.5, A5.17, A5.18, A5.20,
A5.23, A5.28, or A5.29, whichever is applicable. For
SMAW, low hydrogen electrodes shall be used.
10.5.1.9 When so specified in the purchase order,
the welding procedure specification (WPS) shall be subject to approval by the purchaser prior to repair welding.
10.5.1.3 Electrodes and electrode-flux combinations shall be selected so that the tensile strength of the
deposited weld metal (after any required heat treatment)
is consistent with the tensile strength specified for the
base metal being repaired.
10.5.2 Steels with Specified Minimum Tensile
Strength of 100 ksi [690 MPa] and Higher — Repair
welding of steels with specified minimum tensile strength
of 100 ksi [690 MPa] shall be subject to the following
additional requirements:
10.5.1.4 Welding electrodes and flux materials
shall be dry and protected from moisture during storage
and use.
10.5.2.1 When so specified in the purchase order,
prior approval for repair by welding shall be obtained
from the purchaser.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
10.5.1.5 Prior to repair welding, the surface to be
welded shall be inspected to verify that the imperfections
intended to be removed have been removed completely.
Surfaces to be welded and surfaces adjacent to the weld
shall be dry and free of scale, slag, rust, moisture, grease,
and other foreign material that would prevent proper
welding.
10.5.2.2 The surface to be welded shall be
inspected using a magnetic particle method or a liquid
penetrant method to verify that the imperfections intended
to be removed have been completely removed. When
magnetic particle inspection is employed, the surface
shall be inspected both parallel and perpendicular to the
length of the area to be repaired.
10.5.1.6 Welders and welding operators shall be
qualified in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/
AWS D1.1 or ASME Section IX, except that any complete joint penetration groove weld qualification also
qualifies the welder or welding operator to do repair
welding.
10.5.2.3 When weld repairs are to be post-weld
heat-treated, special care shall be exercised in the selection of electrodes to avoid those compositions that embrittle as a result of such heat treatment.
10.5.2.4 Repairs on material that subsequently
is heat-treated at the mill shall be inspected after heat
treatment; repairs on material that subsequently is not
heat-treated at the mill shall be inspected no sooner than
48 h after welding. Such inspection shall use a magnetic
particle method or a liquid penetrant method; when magnetic particle inspection is involved, such inspection shall
be both parallel to and perpendicular to the length of the
repair.
10.5.1.7 Repair welding of materials shall be in
accordance with a welding procedure specification (WPS)
that is in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/
AWS D1.1 or ASME Section IX, with the following
exceptions or clarifications:
(a) The WPS shall be qualified by testing a complete
joint penetration groove weld or a surface groove weld.
(b) The geometry of the surface groove weld need not
be described in other than a general way.
(c) An ANSI/AWS D1.1 prequalified complete joint
penetration groove weld WPS is acceptable.
(d) Any material not listed in the prequalified base
metal-filler metal combinations of ANSI/AWS D1.1 also
10.5.2.5 The location of the weld repairs shall
be marked on the finished piece.
10.5.3 Repair Quality — The welds and adjacent
heat-affected zone shall be sound and free of cracks, the
weld metal being thoroughly fused to all surfaces and
9
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
edges without undercutting or overlap. Any visible
cracks, porosity, lack of fusion, or undercut in any layer
shall be removed prior to deposition of the succeeding
layer. Weld metal shall project at least 1⁄16 in. [2 mm]
above the rolled surface after welding, and the projecting
metal shall be removed by chipping or grinding, or both,
to make it flush with the rolled surface, and to produce
a workmanlike finish.
12.1.1 When the plate is heat treated with a cooling
rate faster than still-air cooling from the austenitizing
temperature, one of the following shall apply in addition
to other requirements specified herein:
12.1.1.1 The gage length of the tension test specimen shall be taken at least 1T from any as-heat treated
edge where T is the thickness of the plate and shall be
at least 1⁄2 in. [12.5 mm] from flame cut or heat-affectedzone surfaces.
10.5.4 Inspection of Repair — The manufacturer or
processor shall maintain an inspection program to inspect
the work to see that:
12.1.1.2 A steel thermal buffer pad, 1T by 1T
by at least 3T, shall be joined to the plate edge by a
partial penetration weld completely sealing the buffered
edge prior to heat treatment.
10.5.4.1 Imperfections have been completely
removed.
10.5.4.2 The limitations specified above have
not been exceeded.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
10.5.4.4 Any weld deposit is of acceptable quality as defined above.
12.1.1.3 Thermal insulation or other thermal barriers shall be used during the heat treatment adjacent to
the plate edge where specimens are to be removed. It
shall be demonstrated that the cooling rate of the tension
test specimen is no faster than, and not substantially
slower than, that attained by the method described in
12.1.1.2.
11. Test Methods
11.1 All tests shall be conducted in accordance with
Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
12.1.1.4 When test coupons cut from the plate
but heat treated separately are used, the coupon dimensions shall be not less than 3T by 3T by T and each
tension specimen cut from it shall meet the requirements
of 12.1.1.1.
10.5.4.3 Established welding procedures have
been followed, and
11.2 Yield strength shall be determined either by the
0.2% offset method or by the 0.5% extension under load
method, unless otherwise stated in the material specification.
12.1.1.5 The heat treatment of test specimens
separately in the device shall be subject to the limitations
that (1) cooling rate data for the plate are available; (2)
cooling rate control devices for the test specimens are
available; and, (3) the method has received prior approval
by the purchaser.
11.3 Rounding Procedures — For purposes of
determining conformance with the specification, a calculated value shall be rounded to the nearest 1 ksi [5 MPa]
tensile and yield strength, and to the nearest unit in the
right-hand place of figures used in expressing the limiting
value for other values in accordance with the rounding
method given in Practice E 29.
12.2 Orientation — For plates wider than 24 in. [600
mm], test specimens shall be taken such that the longitudinal axis of the specimen is transverse to the final direction
of rolling of the plate. Test specimens for all other products shall be taken such that the longitudinal axis of the
specimen is parallel to the final direction of rolling.
11.4 For full-section test specimens of angles, the
cross-sectional area used for calculating the yield and
tensile strengths shall be a theoretical area calculated on
the basis of the weight of the test specimen (see 13.1).
12.3 Location:
12.3.1 Plates — Test specimens shall be taken from
a corner of the plate.
12.3.2 W, HP, S, and M Shapes with Flanges 6 in.
[150 mm] or Wider — Test specimens shall be selected
from a point in the flange 2⁄3 of the way from the flange
centerline to the flange toe.
12. Tension Tests
12.1 Condition — Test specimens for non-heat-treated
material shall be prepared for testing from the material
in its delivered condition. Test specimens for heat-treated
material shall be prepared for testing from the material
in its delivered condition or from a separate piece of full
thickness or full section from the same heat similarly
heat treated.
12.3.3 Shapes Other Than Those in 12.3.2 — Test
specimens shall be selected from the webs of beams,
channels, and zees; from the stems of rolled tees; and
from the legs of angles and bulb angles, except where
full-section test specimens for angles are used and the
10
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
elongation acceptance criteria are increased accordingly.
(See 12.6.2)
12.5 Preparation:
12.5.1 Plates:
12.5.1.1 Tension test specimens for plates 3⁄4 in.
[20 mm] and under in thickness shall be the full thickness
of the plates. The test specimens shall conform to the
requirements of Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions
A 370 for either 11⁄2-in. [40-mm] wide specimen or the
1
⁄2-in. [12.5-mm] wide specimen.
12.5.1.2 For plates up to 4 in. [100 mm], inclusive, in thickness, the use of 11⁄2-in. [40-mm] wide specimens, full thickness of the material and conforming to the
requirements of Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions A
370, shall be subject to the limitation that adequate testing
machine capacity is available.
12.5.1.3 For plates over 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] in thickness, except as permitted in 12.5.1.2, tension test specimens shall conform to the requirements as shown in Fig.
4 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, for the 0.500in. [12.5-mm] diameter specimen. The axis of such specimens shall be located midway between the center of
thickness and the top or bottom surface of the plate.
12.5.2 Shapes:
12.5.2.1 Except when angles are tested in full
section, tension test specimens for shapes 3⁄4 in. [20 mm]
and under in thickness shall be the full thickness of the
material. The test specimen shall conform to the requirements of Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370
for either the 11⁄2-in. [40-mm] wide specimen or the 1⁄2in. [12.5-mm] wide specimen.
12.5.2.2 For shapes up to 4 in. [100 mm], inclusive, in thickness, the use of 11⁄2-in. [40-mm] wide test
specimens, full thickness of the material and conforming
to the requirements of Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, shall be subject to the limitation that adequate
testing machine capacity is available.
12.5.2.3 For shapes over 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] in thickness, except as permitted in 12.5.2.2, tension test specimens shall conform to the requirements as shown in Fig.
4 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, for the 0.500in. [12.5-mm] diameter specimens. The axis of such specimens shall be located midway between the center of
thickness and the top or bottom surface of the material.
12.5.3 Bars:
12.5.3.1 Except as otherwise provided below,
test specimens for bars shall be in accordance with Annex
A1 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
12.5.3.2 Except as provided in 12.5.3.5, test
specimens for bars 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] and under in thickness
may conform to the requirements of Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370 for either the 11⁄2-in. [40-mm]
wide specimen or the 1⁄2-in. [12.5-mm] wide specimen.
12.3.4 Bars:
12.3.4.1 Test specimens for bars to be used for
pins and rollers shall be taken so that the axis is: midway
between the center and the surface for pins and rollers
less than 3 in. [75 mm] in diameter; 1 in. [25 mm] from
the surface for pins and rollers 3 in. [75 mm] and over
in diameter; or as specified in Annex A1 of Test Methods
and Definitions A 370 if the applicable foregoing requirement is not practicable.
12.3.4.2 Test specimens for bars other than those
to be used for pins and rollers shall be taken as specified
in Annex A1 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
12.4 Test Frequency:
12.4.1 Structural Products Produced in Discrete
Cut Lengths — For structural products produced in discrete cut lengths, the minimum number of pieces or
plates-as-rolled to be tested for each heat and strength
gradation, where applicable, shall be as follows, except
that it shall be permissible for any individual test to
represent multiple strength gradations:
12.4.1.1 As given in Table C, or
12.4.1.2 One taken from the minimum thickness
in the heat and one taken from the maximum thickness
in the heat, where thickness means the specified thickness,
diameter, or comparable dimension, whichever is appropriate for the specific structural product rolled.
12.4.2 Structural Products Produced from Coils:
12.4.2.1 For structural products produced from
coils, the minimum number of coils to be tested for each
heat and strength gradation, where applicable, shall be
as given in Table D, except that it shall be permissible
for any individual coil to represent multiple strength gradations.
12.4.2.2 Except as required by 12.4.2.3, two tension test specimens shall be taken from each coil tested,
with the first being taken immediately prior to the first
structural product to be qualified, and the second being
taken from the approximate center lap.
12.4.2.3 If, during decoiling, the amount of material decoiled is less than that required to reach the approximate center lap, the second test for the qualification of
the decoiled portion of such a coil shall be taken from a
location adjacent to the end of the innermost portion
decoiled. For qualification of successive portions from
such a coil, an additional test shall be taken adjacent to
the innermost portion decoiled, until a test is obtained
from the approximate center lap.
11
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
12.5.3.3 Except as provided in 12.5.3.4 and
12.5.3.5, test specimens for bars over 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] in
thickness or diameter shall conform either to the requirements for the 11⁄2-in. [40-mm] or 1⁄2-in. [12.5-mm] wide
specimen of Fig. 3 of Test Methods and Definitions A
370, or to the requirements for the 0.500-in. [12.5-mm]
diameter specimen of Fig. 4 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
from the specified percentage of elongation in 2 in. [50
mm] shall be made for each 0.5-in. [12.5-mm] increment
of thickness over 3.5 in. [90 mm]. This deduction shall not
exceed 3 percentage points. Accordingly, the following
deductions from the base elongation requirements shall
apply:
12.5.3.4 For bars other than those to be used for
pins and rollers, the manufacturer or processor shall have
the option of using test specimens that are machined to
a thickness or diameter of at least 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] for a
length of at least 9 in. [230 mm].
12.5.3.5 Test specimens for bars to be used for
pins and rollers shall conform to the requirements of Fig.
4 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370 for the 0.500in. [12.5-mm] diameter specimen.
Elongation
Deduction, %
3.500–3.999 [90.00–102.49]
4.000–4.499 [102.50–114.99]
4.500–4.999 [115.00–127.49]
5.000–5.499 [127.50–139.99]
5.500–5.999 [140.00–152.49]
6.000 and thicker [152.50 and thicker]
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
12.6.4 When so stated in the material specification,
for plates up to 3⁄4 in. [20 mm], inclusive, in thickness,
if the percentage of elongation of an 8-in. [200-mm] gage
length test specimen falls not more than 3 percentage
points below the amount prescribed, the elongation shall
be considered satisfactory, provided the percentage of
elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] across the break is not less
than 25%.
12.6 Elongation Requirement Adjustments:
12.6.1 Due to the specimen geometry effect
encountered when using the rectangular tension test specimen for testing thin material, adjustments in elongation
requirements must be provided for thicknesses under
0.312 in. [8 mm]. Accordingly, the following deductions
from the base elongation requirements shall apply:
Nominal Thickness
Range, in. [mm]
0.299–0.311 [7.60–7.89]
0.286–0.298 [7.30–7.59]
0.273–0.285 [7.00–7.29]
0.259–0.272 [6.60–6.99]
0.246–0.258 [6.20–6.59]
0.233–0.245 [5.90–6.19]
0.219–0.232 [5.50–5.89]
0.206–0.218 [5.20–5.49]
0.193–0.205 [4.90–5.19]
0.180–0.192 [4.60–4.89]
0.166–0.179 [4.20–4.59]
0.153–0.165 [3.90–4.19]
0.140–0.152 [3.60–3.89]
0.127–0.139 [3.20–3.59]
0.114–0.126 [2.90–3.19]
Nominal Thickness
Range, in. [mm]
NOTE 6 — A characteristic of certain types of alloy steels is a local
disproportionate increase in the degree of necking down or contraction
of the specimens under tension test, resulting in a decrease in the
percentage of elongation as the gage length is increased. The effect is
not so pronounced in the thicker plates.
Elongation
Deduction, %A
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
12.6.5 The tensile property requirements tables in
many of the material specifications covered by this general specification specify elongation requirements in both
8-in. [200-mm] and 2-in. [50-mm] gage lengths. Unless
otherwise provided in the individual material specification, both requirements are not required to be applied
simultaneously and elongation need only be determined
in gage length appropriate for the test specimen used.
After selection of the appropriate gage length, the elongation requirement for the alternative gage length shall be
deemed not applicable.
12.7 Yield Strength Application:
A
Elongation deductions for thicknesses less than 0.180 in. [4.60
mm] apply to structural shapes only.
12.7.1 When test specimens do not exhibit a welldefined disproportionate yield point, yield strength shall
be determined and substituted for yield point.
12.6.2 Due to the specimen geometry effect
encountered when using full-section test specimens for
angles, the elongation requirements for structural-size
angles shall be increased by six percentage points when
full-section test specimens are used.
12.7.2 The manufacturer or processor shall have
the option of substituting yield strength for yield point if
the test specimen exhibits a well-defined disproportionate
yield point.
12.6.3 Due to the inherently lower elongation that is
obtainable in thicker material, adjustments in elongation
requirements must be provided. For material over 3.5 in.
[90 mm] in thickness, a deduction of 0.5 percentage point
12.7.3 Yield strength shall be determined either by
the 0.2% offset method or by the 0.5% extension-underload method.
12
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
12.8 Product Tension Tests — This specification does
not provide requirements for product tension testing subsequent to shipment (see 16.1). Therefore, the requirements of 12.1 to 12.7 inclusive and Section 14 apply only
for tests conducted at the place of manufacture prior to
shipment.
13.4 Sheet Piling — The weight [mass] of each steel
sheet pile shall not vary more than 2.5% from the theoretical or specified weight [or mass]. The length of each steel
sheet pile shall not vary more than 5 in. [125 mm] over,
and shall not be less than the length specified.
13.5 Hot-Rolled Bars — The permitted variations in
dimensions shall not exceed the applicable limits in
Tables 26 to 31 [Annex A1, Tables A1.26 to A1.31],
inclusive.
NOTE 7 — Compliance to Specification A 6/A 6M and the individual
material specifications by a manufacturer does not preclude the possibility that product tension test results might vary outside specified ranges.
The tensile properties will vary within the same heat or piece, be it asrolled, control-rolled, or heat-treated. Tension testing according to the
requirements of Specification A 6/A 6M does not provide assurance
that all products of a heat will be identical in tensile properties with
the products tested. If the purchaser wishes to have more confidence than
that provided by Specification A 6/A 6M testing procedures, additional
testing or requirements, such as Supplementary Requirement S4, should
be imposed.
14. Retests
14.1 If any test specimen shows defective machining
or develops flaws, the manufacturer or processor shall
have the option of discarding it and substituting another
test specimen.
12.8.1 Appendix X2 provides additional information on the variability of tensile properties in plates and
structural shapes.
14.2 If the percentage of elongation of any tension
test specimen is less than that specified and any part of
the fracture is more than 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] from the center
of the gage length of a 2 in. [50-mm] specimen or is
outside the middle half of the gage length of an 8 in.
[200-mm] specimen, as indicated by scribe scratches
marked on the specimen before testing, a retest shall be
allowed.
13.
Permitted Variations in Dimensions and
Weight [Mass]
13.1 One cubic foot of rolled steel is assumed to
weigh 490 lb. One cubic metre of rolled steel is assumed
to have a mass of 7850 kg.
14.3 Except as provided in 14.3.1, if the results from
an original tension specimen fails to meet the specified
requirements, but are within 2 ksi [14 MPa] of the
required tensile strength, within 1 ksi [7 MPa] of the
required yield strength or yield point, or within 2 percentage points of the required elongation, a retest shall be
permitted to replace the failing test. A retest shall be
performed for the failing original test, with the specimen
being randomly selected from the heat. If the results of
the retest meet the specified requirements, the heat or lot
shall be approved.
13.2 Plates — The permissible variations for dimensions and weight [mass] shall not exceed the applicable
limits in Tables 1 to 15 [Annex A1, Tables A1.1 to
A1.15], inclusive.
13.3 Shapes:
13.3.1 Annex A2 lists the designations and dimensions, in both inch-pound and SI units, of shapes that are
most commonly available. Radii of fillets and toes of
shape profiles vary with individual manufacturers and
therefore are not specified.
13.3.2 The permitted variations for dimensions
shall not exceed the applicable limits in Tables 16 to 25
[Annex A1, Tables A1.16 to A1.25], inclusive. Permitted
variations for special shapes not listed in such tables shall
be as agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
14.3.1 For structural products produced from coils,
both tests from each coil tested to qualify a heat are
required to meet all mechanical property requirements.
Should either test fail to do so, then that coil cannot be
used to qualify the parent heat, however, the portion of
that individual coil that is bracketed by acceptable tests
(see 12.4.2.3) is considered to be qualified.
NOTE 8 — Tolerances are shown in Tables 16 to 25 [Annex A1,
Tables A1.16 to A1.25], inclusive, for some shapes that are not listed
in Annex A2 (that is, bulb angles, tees, zees). Addition of such sections
to Annex A2 will be considered by Subcommittee A01.02 when and
if a need for such listing is shown.
14.4 Quenched and tempered steel plates are subject
to the additional retest requirements contained in the
material specification.
13.3.3 Shapes Having One Dimension of the Cross
Section 3 in. [75 mm] or Greater (Structural-Size
Shapes) — The cross-sectional area or weight [mass]
of each shape shall not vary more than 2.5% from the
theoretical or specified amounts.
14.5 When the full-section option of 12.3.3 is used
and the elongation falls below the specified requirement,
the manufacturer or processor shall have the option of
making another test using a test specimen permitted in
12.5.2.
13
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
15. Test Reports
15.1 Test reports for each heat supplied are required
and they shall report the following:
15.6 A signature is not required on the test report.
However, the document shall clearly identify the organization submitting the report. Notwithstanding the absence
of a signature, the organization submitting the report is
responsible for the content of the report.
15.1.1 The specification designation, including
year of issue, and the grade or class if applicable, to
which the material is furnished.
15.7 When finished material is supplied to a purchase
order specifying an ASTM material specification listed
in the Scope section of Specification A 6/A 6M, the
organization supplying that material shall provide the
purchaser with a copy of the original manufacturer’s test
report.
15.1.2 The heat number, heat analysis, and nominal sizes.
15.1.3 Two tension test results appropriate to qualify the material shipped (see 12.4), except that only one
test result need be reported if the shipment consists of a
single piece or plate-as-rolled.
15.8 A material test report, certificate of inspection,
or similar document printed from or used in electronic
form from an electronic data interchange (EDI) transmission shall be regarded as having the same validity as a
counterpart printed in the certifier’s facility. The content
of the EDI transmitted document must meet the requirements of the invoked ASTM standard(s) and conform to
any existing EDI agreement between the purchaser and
the supplier. Notwithstanding the absence of a signature,
the organization submitting the EDI transmission is
responsible for the content of the report.
15.1.3.1 In reporting elongation values, both the
percentage increase and the original gage length shall be
stated.
15.1.4 When the material is required to be heat
treated, either by the designated ASTM specification, or
when specified in the purchase order, all heat treatments,
including temperature ranges and time at temperature.
15.1.4.1 The supply of a heat treatment procedure in place of the actual temperatures and times shall
be subject to agreement between the purchaser and the
supplier.
NOTE 9 — The industry definition as invoked here is: EDI is the
computer to computer exchange of business information in a standard
format such as ANSI ASC X12.
15.1.4.2 Subcritical heat treatment to soften thermally cut edges need not be reported except for materials
having specified minimum tensile strengths of 95 ksi
[655 MPa] or higher, unless such subcritical heating is
accomplished at temperatures at least 75°F [40°C] lower
than the minimum tempering temperature.
16.
Inspection and Testing
16.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall
have free entry, at all times, while work on the contract
of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the
manufacturer’s works that concern the manufacture of
the material ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the
inspector all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the
material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. All tests (except product analysis) and inspection
shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be conducted
so as not to interfere with the operation of the works.
15.1.5 The results of all other tests required by the
material specification, applicable supplementary requirements, and the order.
15.2 The thickness of the product tested is not necessarily the same as an individual ordered thickness since
it is the heat that is tested rather than each ordered item.
Tests from material thicknesses in accordance with 12.4
and encompassing the thicknesses in a shipment shall be
sufficient for qualifying the material in the shipment.
These test thicknesses are not required to be within previously tested and shipped thicknesses from the same
heat.
16.2 When structural products are produced from
coils, 16.1 shall apply to the processor instead of the
manufacturer, and the place of process shall apply instead
of the place of manufacture. When structural products
are produced from coils and the processor is different
from the manufacturer, the inspector representing the
purchaser shall have free entry at all times while work
on the contract of the purchaser is being performed to
all parts of the manufacturer’s works that concerns the
manufacturer of the material ordered.
15.3 For structural products produced from coils, both
test results shall be reported for each qualifying coil.
15.4 For structural products produced from coils, both
the manufacturer and processor shall be identified on the
test report.
15.5 When full-section test specimens have been used
for the qualification of angles, that information shall be
stated on the test report.
14
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
17. Rejection
17.1 Any rejection based on product analysis made
in accordance with the material specification shall be
reported to the supplier and samples that represent the
rejected material shall be preserved for 2 weeks from the
date of notification of such rejection. In case of dissatisfaction with the results of the tests, the supplier shall
have the option of making claim for a rehearing within
that time.
packaging, and packing shall be in accordance with the
Level A requirements of MIL-STD-163.
18.3 When specified in the contract or order, and for
direct procurement by or direct shipment to the U.S.
government, marking for shipment, in addition to requirements specified in the contract or order, shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-129 for military agencies and with
Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies.
17.2 The purchaser shall have the option of rejecting
material that exhibits injurious defects subsequent to its
acceptance at the manufacturer’s works, and so notifying
the manufacturer or processor.
19. Retreatment
19.1 If any heat-treated material fails to meet the
mechanical property requirements of the applicable specification, the manufacturer or the processor shall have the
option of heat treating the material again. All mechanical
property tests shall be repeated and the material surface
shall be reexamined for defects when the material is
resubmitted for inspection.
18.
Packaging, Marking, and Loading for
Shipment
18.1 Packaging, marking, and loading for shipment
shall be in accordance with Practices A 700.
20. Keywords
20.1 bars; general requirements; plates; rolled;
shapes; sheet piling; structural steel
18.2 When Level A is specified, and when specified
in the contract or order, and for direct procurement by
or direct shipment to the U.S. government, preservation,
15
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Not for Resale
16
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
over 3⁄4 in.
[over 19 mm]
over 102 lb/ft
[over 152 kg/m]
W40 ⴛ 277 to 328 incl
[W1000 ⴛ 412 to 488 incl]
W36 ⴛ 230 to 300 incl
[W920 ⴛ 342 to 446 incl]
W33 ⴛ 201 to 291 incl
[W840 ⴛ 299 to 433 incl]
W30 ⴛ 235 to 261 incl
[W760 ⴛ 350 to 389 incl]
W27 ⴛ 194 to 258 incl
[W690 ⴛ 289 to 384 incl]
W24 ⴛ 176 to 229 incl
[W610 ⴛ 262 to 341 incl]
W21 ⴛ 166 to 223 incl
[W530 ⴛ 248 to 331 incl]
W18 ⴛ 158 to 192 incl
[W460 ⴛ 235 to 286 incl]
W14 ⴛ 145 to 211 incl
[W360 ⴛ 216 to 314 incl]
W12 ⴛ 120 to 190 incl
[W310 ⴛ 179 to 283 incl]
Group 3
W40 ⴛ 362 to 655 incl
[W1000 ⴛ 539 to 976 incl]
W36 ⴛ 328 to 798 incl
[W920 ⴛ 488 to 1188 incl]
W33 ⴛ 318 to 619 incl
[W920 ⴛ 473 to 922 incl]
W30 ⴛ 292 to 581 incl
[760 ⴛ 434 to 865 incl]
W27 ⴛ 281 to 539 incl
[W690 ⴛ 419 to 892 incl]
W24 ⴛ 250 to 492 incl
[W610 ⴛ 372 to 732 incl]
W21 ⴛ 248 to 402 incl
[W530 ⴛ 370 to 599 incl]
W18 ⴛ 211 to 311 incl
[W460 ⴛ 315 to 464 incl]
W14 ⴛ 233 to 550 incl
[W360 ⴛ 347 to 818 incl]
W12 ⴛ 210 to 336 incl
[W310 ⴛ 313 to 500 incl]
Group 4
W36 ⴛ 920
[W920 ⴛ 1369]
W14 ⴛ 605 to 873 incl
[W360 ⴛ 900 to 1299 incl]
Group 5
Note 1 — SI designations, from Annex A2, are shown in brackets. Tees cut from W, M, and S shapes fall within the same group as the shape from which they are cut.
L Shapes
MC Shapes
C Shapes
HP Shapes
to 20.7 lb/ft, incl
[to 30.8 kg/m, incl]
to 28.5 lb/ft, incl
[to 42.4 kg/m, incl]
to 1⁄2 in., incl
[to 13 mm, incl]
to 18.9 lb/ft, incl
[to 28.1 kg/m, incl]
to 35 lb/ft, incl
[to 52 kg/m, incl]
M Shapes
over 35 lb/ft
[over 52 kg/m]
to 102 lb/ft, incl
[to 152 kg/m, incl]
over 20.7 lb/ft
[over 30.8 kg/m]
over 28.5 lb/ft
[over 42.4 kg/m]
over 1⁄2 to 3⁄4 in., incl
[over 13 to 19 mm, incl]
W40 ⴛ 149 to 268 incl
[W1000 ⴛ 222 to 399 incl]
W36 ⴛ 135 to 210 incl
[W920 ⴛ 201 to 313 incl]
W33 ⴛ 118 to 152 incl
[W840 ⴛ 176 to 226 incl]
W30 ⴛ 90 to 211 incl
[W760 ⴛ 134 to 314 incl]
W27 ⴛ 84 to 178 incl
[W690 ⴛ 125 to 263 incl]
W24 ⴛ 68 to 162 incl
[W610 ⴛ 101 to 241 incl]
W21 ⴛ 62 to 147 incl
[W530 ⴛ 92 to 219 incl]
W18 ⴛ 76 to 143 incl
[W460 ⴛ 113 to 213 incl]
W16 ⴛ 67 to 100 incl
[W410 ⴛ 100 to 149 incl]
W14 ⴛ 61 to 132 incl
[W360 ⴛ 91 to 196 incl]
W12 ⴛ 65 to 106 incl
[W310 ⴛ 97 to 158 incl]
W10 ⴛ 49 to 112 incl
[W250 ⴛ 73 to 167 incl]
W8 ⴛ 58 & 67
[W200 ⴛ 86 & 100]
W24 ⴛ 55 & 62
[W610 ⴛ 82 & 92]
W21 ⴛ 44 to 57 incl
[W530 ⴛ 66 to 85 incl]
W18 ⴛ 35 to 71 incl
[W460 ⴛ 52 to 106 incl]
W16 ⴛ 26 to 57 incl
[W410 ⴛ 38.8 to 85 incl]
W14 ⴛ 22 to 53 incl
[W360 ⴛ 32.9 to 79 incl]
W12 ⴛ 14 to 58 incl
[W310 ⴛ 21.0 to 86 incl]
W10 ⴛ 12 to 45 incl
[W250 ⴛ 17.9 to 67 incl]
W8 ⴛ 10 to 48 incl
[W200 ⴛ 15.0 to 71 incl]
W6 ⴛ 9 to 25 incl
[W150 ⴛ 13.5 to 37.1 incl]
W5 ⴛ 16 & 19
[W130 ⴛ 23.8 & 28.1]
W4 ⴛ 13
[W100 ⴛ 19.3]
W Shapes
S Shapes
Group 2
Group 1
Shape Type
TABLE A
SHAPE SIZE GROUPINGS FOR TENSILE PROPERTY CLASSIFICATION
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE B
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN PRODUCT ANALYSIS
INDEX TO TABLES OF PERMITTED VARIATIONS
Table
Permitted
Variations, %
Element
Carbon
ManganeseA
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Upper Limit, or
Maximum Specified
Value, %
Under
Minimum
Limit
Over
Maximum
Limit
to 0.15 incl
over 0.15 to 0.40 incl
over 0.40 to 0.75 incl
over 0.75
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
to 0.60 incl
over 0.60 to
over 0.90 to
over 1.20 to
over 1.35 to
over 1.65 to
over 1.95
0.05
0.06
0.08
0.09
0.09
0.11
0.12
0.06
0.08
0.10
0.11
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.90
1.20
1.35
1.65
1.95
incl
incl
incl
incl
incl
Phosphorus
to 0.04 incl
over 0.04 to 0.15 incl
...
...
0.010
NAB
Sulfur
to 0.06 incl
over 0.06
...
N/AB
0.010
N/AB
Silicon
to 0.30 incl
over 0.30 to 0.40 incl
over 0.40 to 2.20 incl
0.02
0.05
0.06
0.03
0.05
0.06
Nickel
to 1.00 incl
over 1.00 to 2.00 incl
over 2.00 to 3.75 incl
over 3.75 to 5.30 incl
over 5.30
0.03
0.05
0.07
0.08
0.10
0.03
0.05
0.07
0.08
0.10
Chromium
to 0.90 incl
over 0.90 to 2.00 incl
over 2.00 to 4.00 incl
0.04
0.06
0.10
0.04
0.06
0.10
Molybdenum
to 0.20 incl
over 0.20 to 0.40 incl
over 0.40 to 1.15 incl
0.01
0.03
0.04
0.01
0.03
0.04
Copper
0.20 minimum only
to 1.00 incl
over 1.00 to 2.00 incl
0.02
0.03
0.05
...
0.03
0.05
Titanium
Vanadium
to 0.10 incl
C
0.01
C
0.01
to 0.10 incl
over 0.10 to 0.25 incl
over 0.25
minimum only specified
0.01
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.02
0.03
...
Boron
any
NAB
NAB
Columbium
to 0.10 incl
0.01C
0.01
Zirconium
to 0.15 incl
0.03
0.03
Nitrogen
to 0.030 incl
0.005
0.005
Dimension
12
11
11
A1.12
A1.11
A1.11
21
24
25
A1.21
A1.24
A1.25
Cross Section of Shapes and Bars
Flats
Hexagons
Rounds and Squares
Shapes, Rolled; L, Bulb Angles, and Z
Shapes, Rolled; W, HP, S, M, C, and MC
Shapes, Rolled; T
Shapes, Split; L and T
26
28
27
17
16
18
25
A1.26
A1.28
A1.27
A1.17
A1.16
A1.18
A1.25
Diameter
Plates, Sheared
Plates, Other than Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut
Plates, Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut
Rounds
6
7
10
27
A1.6
A1.7
A1.10
A1.27
End Out-of-Square
Shapes, Other than W
Shapes, W
Shapes, Milled, Other than W
20
22
23
A1.20
A1.22
A1.23
13
14
S27.1
S27.3
A1.13
A1.14
S27.2
S27.4
Length
Bars
Bars, Recut
Plates, Sheared and Universal Mill
Plates, Other than Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut
Plates, Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut
Plates, Mill Edge
Shapes, Rolled; Other than W
Shapes, Rolled; W and HP
Shapes, Split; L and T
Shapes, Milled
30
31
3
9
8
4
19
22
25
23
A1.30
A1.31
A1.3
A1.9
A1.8
A1.4
A1.19
A1.22
A1.25
A1.23
Straightness
Bars
Shapes, Other than W
29
21
A1.29
A1.21
Sweep
Shapes, W and HP
24
A1.24
Thickness
Flats
Plates, Ordered to Thickness
26
1
A1.26
A1.1
Waviness
Plates
15
A1.15
2
A1.2
26
3
5
9
8
4
A1.26
A1.3
A1.5
A1.9
A1.8
A1.4
Carbon Steel
Other than Carbon Steel
Restrictive—Carbon Steel
Restrictive—Other than Carbon Steel
Weight [Mass]
Plates, Ordered to Weight [Mass]
Width
Flats
Plates,
Plates,
Plates,
Plates,
Plates,
A
Permitted variations in manganese content for bars and bar
size shapes shall be: to 0.90 incl ±0.03; over 0.90 to 2.20 incl
±0.06.
B
NA — Product analysis not applicable.
C
0.005% if the minimum of the range is 0.01%.
Inch-Pound
Units
SI Units
Camber
Plates, Carbon Steel; Sheared and Gas-Cut
Plates, Carbon Steel; Universal Mill
Plates, Other than Carbon Steel; Sheared, Gas-Cut
and Universal Mill
Shapes, Rolled; S, M, C, MC, and L
Shapes, Rolled; W and HP
Shapes, Split; L and T
Flatness
Plates,
Plates,
Plates,
Plates,
Note 1 — Where “. . .” appears in this table there is no
requirement.
Sheared
Universal Mill
Other than Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut
Alloy Steel, Gas-Cut
Mill Edge
17
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE C
STRUCTURAL PRODUCTS PRODUCED IN DISCRETE CUT LENGTHS — MINIMUM NUMBER OF TENSION TESTS
REQUIRED
A
Thickness Range Rolled
for the Heat
Under 3⁄8 in. [10 mm]
ThicknessA Difference
Between Pieces or Plates-asrolled in the ThicknessA Range
TwoB tests per heat, taken from different pieces or plates-asrolled having any thicknessA in the thicknessA range
TwoB tests per heat, one taken from the minimum thicknessA
in the thicknessA range and one taken from the maximum
thicknessA in the thicknessA range
TwoB tests per heat, taken from different pieces or plates-asrolled having any thicknessA range.
TwoB tests per heat, one taken from the minimum thicknessA
in the thicknessA range and one taken from the maximum
thicknessA in the thicknessA range
TwoB tests per heat, taken from different pieces or plates-asrolled having any thicknessA in the thicknessA range
TwoB tests per heat, one taken from the minimum thicknessA
in the thicknessA range and one taken from the maximum
thicknessA in the thicknessA range
1
⁄16 in. [2 mm] or less
More than 1⁄16 in. [2 mm]
3
⁄8 to 2 in. [10 to 50 mm], incl
Less than 3⁄8 in. [10 mm]
3
⁄8 in. [10 mm] or more
Over 2 in. [50 mm]
Minimum Number of Tension Tests Required
Less than 1 in. [25 mm]
1 in. [25 mm] or more
A
Thickness means the specified thickness, diameter, or camparable dimension, whichever is appropriate for the specific structural product
rolled.
B
One test, if only one piece or plate-as-rolled is to be qualified.
TABLE D
STRUCTURAL PRODUCTS PRODUCED FROM COILS — MINIMUM NUMBER OF COILS REQUIRED TO BE TENSION
TESTED
ThicknessA Difference Between Coils in the Heat
Minimum Number of Coils Required to Be Tension Tested
Less than 1⁄16 in. [2 mm]
1
⁄16 in. [2 mm] or more
TwoB coils per heat, at any thicknessA in the heat
TwoB coils per heat, one at the minimum thicknessA
in the heat and one at the maximum thicknessA in
the heat
NOTE — See 12.4.2.2 and 12.4.2.3 for the number of tests to be taken per coil.
A
Thickness means the specified thickness, diameter, or comparable dimension, whichever is appropriate for the specific structural product
rolled.
B
One coil, if the product of only one coil is to be qualified.
18
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.06
0.09
0.11
0.15
0.23
0.29
0.29
48 and
under
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.06
0.09
0.11
0.15
0.24
0.29
0.29
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.06
0.09
0.11
0.15
0.24
0.33
0.35
60 to
72, excl
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.06
0.10
0.11
0.15
0.24
0.33
0.35
72 to
84, excl
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.06
0.10
0.11
0.15
0.24
0.33
0.35
84 to
96, excl
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.07
0.11
0.13
0.15
0.24
0.33
0.35
96 to
108,
excl
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.08
0.12
0.14
0.15
0.24
0.33
0.35
108 to
120, excl
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.10
0.13
0.14
0.15
0.24
0.33
0.35
120 to
132, excl
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.06
0.10
0.14
0.14
0.15
0.24
0.33
0.35
132 to
144, excl
Permitted Variations Over Specified Thickness for Widths Given, in inches, in.
...
...
0.05
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.07
0.11
0.15
0.15
0.20
0.27
0.33
0.35
144 to
168, excl
...
...
...
0.06
0.06
0.07
0.07
0.08
0.13
0.15
0.17
0.20
0.28
0.35
0.35
168 to
182, excl
...
...
...
...
...
...
0.07
0.09
0.16
...
...
...
...
...
...
182 and
over
Note 1 — Tables 1–31, inclusive, contain permitted variations in dimensions and weight stated in inch-pound units.
Note 2 — Permissible variation under specified thickness, 0.01 in.
Note 3 — Thickness to be measured at 3⁄8 to 3⁄4 in. from the longitudinal edge.
Note 4 — For thicknesses measured at any location other than that specified in Note 3, the permitted variations over specified thickness shall be 13⁄4 times the amounts in this table,
rounded to the nearest 0.01 in.
Note 5 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
To 1⁄4, excl
1
⁄4 to 5⁄16, excl
5
⁄16 to 3⁄8, excl
3
⁄8 to 7⁄16, excl
7
⁄16 to 1⁄2, excl
1
⁄2 to 5⁄8, excl
5
⁄8 to 3⁄4, excl
3
⁄4 to 1, excl
1 to 2, excl
2 to 3, excl
3 to 4, excl
4 to 6, excl
6 to 10, excl
10 to 12, excl
12 to 15, excl
Specified Thickness,
in.
Over 48
to 60,
excl
TABLE 1
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN THICKNESS FOR RECTANGULAR, CARBON, HIGH-STRENGTH, LOW-ALLOY, AND ALLOY-STEEL PLATES, 15 IN. AND
UNDER IN THICKNESS WHEN ORDERED TO THICKNESS
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
19
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
84 to 96,
excl
96 to 108,
excl
108 to 120,
excl
120 to 132,
excl
132 to 144,
excl
144 to 168,
excl
168 and
over
20
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Not for Resale
A
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
5.0
4.5
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
7.5
6.5
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
9.0
7.0
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
11.0
8.0
7.5
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
Permitted variations in overweight for lots of circular and sketch plates shall be 11⁄4 times the amounts in this table.
Permitted variations in overweight for single plates shall be 11⁄3 times the amounts in this table.
Permitted variations in overweight for single circular and sketch plates shall be 12⁄3 times the amounts in this table.
The adopted standard density of rolled steel is 490 lb/ft3.
Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
4.5
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.0
The term “lot” means all the plates of each tabular width and weight group represented in each shipment.
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
13.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
...
12.0
11.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.5
6.0
5.5
4.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
...
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
...
...
...
10.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.5
6.0
4.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.5
...
...
...
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.0
72 to 84,
excl
To 10, excl
10 to 12.5, excl
12.5 to 15.0, excl
15 to 17.5, excl
17.5 to 20, excl
20 to 25, excl
25 to 30, excl
30 to 40, excl
40 to 81.7, excl
81.7 to 122.6, excl
122.6 to 163.4, excl
163.4 to 245.1, excl
245.1 to 409.0, excl
409.0 to 490.1, excl
490.1 to 613.0, excl
60 to 72,
excl
Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under
Over 48 to
60, excl
Specified Weights,
lb/ft2
48 and
Under
Permitted Variation in Average Weight of LotsA for Widths Given in Inches, Expressed in Precentage of the Specified Weights per Square Foot
TABLE 2
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WEIGHT FOR RECTANGULAR SHEARED PLATES AND UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES 613.0 LB/FT2 AND UNDER WHEN
ORDERED TO WEIGHT
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
TABLE 3
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR SHEARED PLATES 11⁄2 IN. AND UNDER IN THICKNESS;
LENGTH ONLY OF UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES 21⁄2 IN. AND UNDER IN THICKNESS
Permitted Variations Over Specified Width and LengthA for Thicknesses, in., or Equivalent
Weights, lb/ft2, in.
⁄8 to 1, excl
1 to 2, inclB
15.3 to 25.5, excl
25.5 to 40.8, excl
40.8 to 81.7, incl
Width
Width
To 3⁄8, excl
Specified Dimensions, in.
Length
To 120, excl
120 to 240, excl
240 to 360, excl
360 to 480, excl
480 to 600, excl
600 to 720, excl
700 and over
Width
To 15.3, excl
Width
Length
3
⁄8 to 5⁄8, excl
To 60, excl
60 to 84, excl
84 to 108, excl
108 and over
3
⁄8
⁄16
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
1
7
⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
7
5
1
⁄16
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
To 60, excl
60 to 84, excl
84 to 108, excl
108 and over
3
⁄8
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
⁄4
7
⁄8
1
1
⁄2
⁄8
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
To 60, excl
60 to 84, excl
84 to 108, excl
108 and over
3
⁄8
⁄2
9
⁄16
11
⁄16
1
1
1
11⁄8
1
To 60, excl
60 to 84, excl
84 to 108, excl
108 and over
7
⁄16
⁄2
9
⁄16
3
⁄4
To 60, excl
60 to 84, excl
84 to 108, excl
108 and over
7
Length
Length
Width
5
7
7
⁄8
1
⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
3
⁄4
⁄8
1
11⁄8
⁄8
⁄4
1
11⁄8
1
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
7
⁄8
⁄8
15
⁄16
11⁄8
5
⁄8
⁄4
13
⁄16
7
⁄8
3
1
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
3
7
⁄4
⁄8
1
11⁄8
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
13⁄8
⁄2
⁄8
11
⁄16
7
⁄8
11⁄8
11⁄8
11⁄8
11⁄4
5
⁄8
⁄4
7
⁄8
1
11⁄4
11⁄4
13⁄8
13⁄8
3
⁄4
⁄8
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
13⁄4
11⁄8
11⁄4
11⁄4
13⁄8
1
⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
13⁄8
11⁄2
5
⁄8
⁄4
7
⁄8
1
13⁄8
11⁄2
11⁄2
15⁄8
3
⁄4
⁄8
1
11⁄4
15⁄8
15⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
⁄16
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
11⁄4
13⁄8
13⁄8
11⁄2
1
⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
15⁄8
5
⁄8
⁄4
7
⁄8
1
15⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8
13⁄4
3
⁄4
⁄8
1
11⁄4
17⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
To 60, excl
60 to 84, excl
84 to 108, excl
108 and over
1
⁄2
⁄8
5
⁄8
7
⁄8
13⁄4
13⁄4
13⁄4
13⁄4
5
⁄8
⁄4
3
⁄4
1
17⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
2
3
⁄4
⁄8
7
⁄8
11⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
21⁄4
7
⁄8
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄2
To 60, excl
60 to 84, excl
84 to 108, excl
108 and over
9
2
2
2
2
3
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
23⁄8
7
⁄8
1
1
11⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄2
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
23⁄4
23⁄4
23⁄4
3
1
1
1
5
⁄16
⁄4
3
⁄4
1
3
3
5
5
5
5
3
⁄4
⁄8
7
⁄8
11⁄8
7
⁄8
11
⁄16
A
3
3
3
7
5
Length
1
1
5
5
3
7
7
7
7
Permitted variation under specified width and length, 1⁄4 in.
Permitted variations in length apply also to Universal Mill plates up to 12 in. in width for thicknesses over 2 to 21⁄2 in., incl, except for
alloy steel up to 13⁄4 in. thick.
B
21
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE 4
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH FOR MILL EDGE
CARBON AND HIGH-STRENGTH, LOW-ALLOY PLATES
PRODUCED ON STRIP MILLS
(Applies to Either Plates Produced from Coils or Plates
Produced in Discrete Cut Lengths of Flat Product)
Permitted Variation
Over Specified
Width, in.A
Specified Width, in.
To
14
17
19
21
24
26
28
35
50
60
65
70
80
A
7
14, excl
to 17, excl
to 19, excl
to 21, excl
to 24, excl
to 26, excl
to 28, excl
to 35, excl
to 50, excl
to 60, excl
to 65, excl
to 70, excl
to 80, excl
and over
⁄16
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
13
⁄16
15
⁄16
11⁄8
11⁄4
11⁄2
15⁄8
13⁄4
17⁄8
2
1
No permitted variation under specified width.
TABLE 5
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN ROLLED WIDTH FOR UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES
15 IN. AND UNDER IN THICKNESS
Permitted Variations over Specified WidthA for Thicknesses Given in Inches or
Equivalent Weights Given in Pounds per Square Foot, in.
To 3⁄8,
excl
Specified Width, in.
Over 8 to 20, excl
20 to 36, excl
36 and over
A
To 15.3,
excl
1
⁄8
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
3
5
5
⁄8 to
⁄8, excl
⁄8 to
1, excl
1 to 2,
incl
Over 2 to
10, incl
Over 10 to
15, incl
15.3 to
25.5,
excl
25.5 to
40.8,
excl
40.8 to
81.7,
incl
81.7 to
409.0,
incl
409.0 to
613.0,
incl
1
3
1
1
5
3
⁄8
⁄4
3
⁄8
⁄16
⁄16
7
⁄16
⁄4
⁄8
1
⁄2
Permitted variation under specified width, 1⁄8 in.
22
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
3
⁄8
⁄16
9
⁄16
7
1
⁄2
⁄16
5
⁄8
9
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
TABLE 6
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR
SHEARED CIRCULAR PLATES 1 IN. AND UNDER IN
THICKNESS
Permitted Variation Over
Specified Diameter for Thicknesses
Given in Inches, in.A
Specified Diameters, in.
To 3⁄8,
excl
To 32,excl
32 to 84, excl
84 to 108, excl
108 to 130, excl
130 and over
A
3
⁄8 to 5⁄8,
excl
5
⁄8 to 1,
incl
1
3
1
5
7
9
⁄4
⁄16
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
⁄8
⁄16
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
⁄2
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
No permitted variation under specified diameter.
TABLE 7
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR GAS-CUT CIRCULAR PLATES
(Not Applicable to Alloy Steel)
Specified Diameter,
in.
To 32, excl
32 to 84, excl
84 to 108, excl
108 to 130, excl
130 and over
A
Permitted Variation Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses
Given in Inches, in.A
to 1, excl
1 to 2, excl
2 to 4, excl
3
3
1
3
1
1
⁄8
⁄8
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
⁄8
⁄2
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
3
⁄4
⁄2
⁄2
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
7
⁄8
4 to 6, excl
1
⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
1
5
6 to 8, excl
5
⁄8
⁄4
7
⁄8
1
11⁄8
3
8 to 15, incl
3
⁄4
⁄8
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
7
No permitted variation under specified diameter.
TABLE 8
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH
FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES WHEN GAS CUTTING IS
SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED
(Applies to Alloy Steel Specifications Only)
Specified Thickness, in.
To 2, excl
2 to 4, excl
4 to 6, excl
6 to 8, excl
8 to 15, incl
TABLE 9
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH
FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES WHEN GAS CUTTING IS
SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED
(Not Applicable to Alloy Steel)
Permitted Variation Over
Specified Width and Length, in.
Specified Thickness, in.
3
To 2, excl
2 to 4, excl
4 to 6, excl
6 to 8, excl
8 to 15, incl
⁄4
1
11⁄8
15⁄16
11⁄2
1
⁄2
⁄8
13⁄4
17⁄8
1
5
Note 1 — These permitted variations may be taken all under or
divided over and under, if so specified.
Note 2 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to
length only.
Note 1 — These permitted variations shall be taken all under or
divided over and under, if so specified.
Note 2 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to
length only.
23
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Permitted Variation Over
Specified Width and Length, in.
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE 10
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR GAS-CUT CIRCULAR PLATES
(Applies to Alloy Steel Specifications Only)
Specified
Diameter, in.
To 32, excl
32 to 84, excl
84 to 108, excl
108 to 130, excl
A
Permitted Variations Over Specified Diameter for Specified
Thicknesses Given in Inches, in.A
to 1, excl
1 to 2, excl
1
1
1
5
⁄2
⁄2
5
⁄8
7
⁄8
2 to 4, excl
4 to 6, excl
6 to 8, excl
8 to 15, incl
3
⁄4
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
1
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
3
⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄4
⁄8
1
11⁄8
7
No permitted variation under specified diameter.
TABLE 11
PERMITTED CAMBERA FOR CARBON STEEL, HIGH-STRENGTH
LOW-ALLOY STEEL, AND ALLOY STEEL UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES AND
HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL SHEARED,
SPECIAL-CUT, OR GAS-CUT RECTANGULAR PLATES
Specified
Thickness,
in.
Specified Weight,
lb/ft2
Specified
Width,
in.
To 2, incl
Over 2 to 15, incl
Over 2 to 15, incl
to 81.7, incl
81.7 to 613.0, incl
81.7 to 613.0, incl
all
to 30, incl
over 30
Permitted Camber, in.
⁄8 ⴛ (no. of feet of length/5)
⁄16 ⴛ (no. of feet of length/5)
1
⁄4 ⴛ (no. of feet of length/5)
1
3
A
Camber as it relates to plates is the horizontal edge curvature in the length, measured over the entire
length of the plate in the flat position.
TABLE 12
PERMITTED CAMBERA FOR SHEARED PLATES AND
GAS-CUT RECTANGULAR PLATES, ALL
THICKNESSES
(Applies to Carbon Steel Only)
Permitted camber, in. p 1⁄8 ⴛ (number of feet of length/5)
A
Camber as it relates to plates is the horizontal edge curvature
in the length, measured over the entire length of the plate in the
flat position.
24
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
To 10.2, excl
10.2 to 15.3, excl
15.3 to 20.4, excl
20.4 to 30.6, excl
30.6 to 40.8, excl
40.8 to 81.7, excl
81.7 to 163.4, excl
163.4 to 245.1, excl
245.1 to 326.8, excl
326.8 to 409.0, excl
409.0 to 490.1, excl
490.1 to 613.0, incl
To 1⁄4, excl
1
⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl
3
⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl
1
⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl
3
⁄4 to 1, excl
1 to 2, excl
2 to 4, excl
4 to 6, excl
6 to 8, excl
8 to 10, excl
10 to 12, excl
12 to 15, excl
⁄16
⁄2
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
1
9
To 36,
excl
⁄4
⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
5
3
36 to 48,
excl
⁄16
⁄4
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
13
⁄16
3
15
48 to 60,
excl
11⁄4
15
⁄16
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
13
⁄16
7
⁄8
60 to 72,
excl
1 3 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄8
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
72 to 84,
excl
11⁄2
11⁄4
7
⁄8
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
3
⁄4
13
⁄16
15
⁄16
1
84 to 96,
excl
15⁄8
13⁄8
1
1
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
7
⁄8
7
⁄8
1
1
96 to
108, excl
13⁄4
11⁄2
11⁄8
1
7
⁄8
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
1
1
108 to
120, excl
1 7 ⁄8
1 5 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄4
1 1 ⁄8
1
11
⁄16
5
⁄8
7
⁄8
1
1
1
1
120 to
144, excl
...
...
1 7 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄2
1 3 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄8
7
⁄8
7
⁄8
1
1
1
1
144 to
168, excl
...
...
2 1 ⁄8
2
1 3 ⁄4
1 1 ⁄2
1 1 ⁄8
1
1
1
1
...
168 and
Over
25
Not for Resale
A
Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall
not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width for plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft for longer plates.
B
Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface for Width — The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width should not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
Note 1 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 1⁄4 in. When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 in., incl, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 1⁄4 in.
Note 2 — These permitted variations apply to plates that have a specified minimum tensile strength of not more than 60 ksi or comparable chemical composition or hardness. The limits
in this table are increased 50% for plates that have a higher specified minimum tensile strength or comparable chemical composition or hardness.
Note 3 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of such plates.
Note 4 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
Note 5 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
Specified Weight,
lb/ft2
Specified
Thickness, in.
Permitted Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in.A,B
TABLE 13
PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR CARBON STEEL PLATES
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
To 10.2, excl
10.2 to 15.3, excl
15.3 to 20.4, excl
20.4 to 30.6, excl
30.6 to 40.8, excl
40.8 to 81.7, excl
81.7 to 163.4, excl
163.4 to 245.1, excl
245.1 to 326.8, excl
326.8 to 409.0, excl
409.0 to 490.1, excl
490.1 to 613.0, incl
To 1⁄4, excl
1
⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl
3
⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl
1
⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl
3
⁄4 to 1, excl
1 to 2, excl
2 to 4, excl
4 to 6, excl
6 to 8, excl
8 to 10, excl
10 to 12, excl
12 to 15, incl
⁄16
⁄4
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
3
13
To 36,
excl
11⁄8
15
⁄16
7
⁄8
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
13
⁄16
15
⁄16
1
36 to 48,
excl
1 3 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄8
15
⁄16
13
⁄16
7
⁄8
3
⁄4
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
15
⁄16
1 1 ⁄8
13⁄16
48 to 60,
excl
1 7 ⁄8
1 3 ⁄8
15
⁄16
7
⁄8
7
⁄8
13
⁄16
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
15
⁄16
1
1 1 ⁄4
15⁄16
60 to 72,
excl
2
13⁄4
11⁄8
1
15
⁄16
7
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
1
11⁄8
15⁄16
13⁄8
72 to 84,
excl
21⁄4
17⁄8
15⁄16
11⁄8
1
15
⁄16
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
84 to 96,
excl
2 3 ⁄8
2
1 1 ⁄2
1 1 ⁄4
1 1 ⁄8
1
3
⁄4
15
⁄16
1 1 ⁄4
115⁄16
1 1 ⁄2
1 1 ⁄2
96 to
108, excl
25⁄8
21⁄4
15⁄8
13⁄8
15⁄16
1
7
⁄8
11⁄8
15⁄16
13⁄8
11⁄2
11⁄2
108 to
120, excl
2 3 ⁄4
2 3 ⁄8
1 7 ⁄8
1 5 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄2
1
1
1 1 ⁄4
1 1 ⁄2
1 1 ⁄2
1 1 ⁄2
1 1 ⁄2
120 to
144, excl
...
...
2 3 ⁄4
2 1 ⁄4
2
1 5 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄4
1 1 ⁄4
1 1 ⁄2
1 1 ⁄2
1 1 ⁄2
1 1 ⁄2
144 to
168, excl
...
...
3 1 ⁄8
3
2 5 ⁄8
2 1 ⁄4
1 5 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄2
1 1 ⁄2
1 1 ⁄2
1 1 ⁄2
1 1 ⁄2
168 and
Over
26
Not for Resale
A
Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall
not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft for longer plates.
B
Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface for Width — The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
Note 1 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 3⁄8 in. When the larger dimension is from 36 to 72 in., incl, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width.
Note 2 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of such plates.
Note 3 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
Note 4 — Plates must be a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
Specified Weight,
lb/ft2
Specified
Thickness, in.
Permitted Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in.A,B
TABLE 14
PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL PLATES,
HOT ROLLED OR THERMALLY TREATED
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
TABLE 15
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WAVINESS FOR PLATES
Permitted
Variation
from a
Flat Surface
(from Table
13 or 14), in.
5
⁄16
⁄8
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
13
⁄16
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
13⁄4
17⁄8
2
21⁄8
21⁄4
23⁄8
21⁄2
25⁄8
23⁄4
27⁄8
3
31⁄8
3
Permitted Variation in Waviness in., When
Number of Waves in 12 ft is
1
5
⁄16
⁄8
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
13
⁄16
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
13⁄4
17⁄8
2
21⁄8
21⁄4
23⁄8
21⁄2
25⁄8
23⁄4
27⁄8
3
31⁄8
3
2
1
⁄4
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
11⁄16
11⁄8
11⁄4
15⁄16
17⁄16
11⁄2
15⁄8
111⁄16
113⁄16
17⁄8
2
21⁄16
23⁄16
21⁄4
23⁄8
5
3
3
⁄16
⁄16
1
⁄4
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
1
11⁄16
11⁄8
13⁄16
11⁄4
15⁄16
17⁄16
11⁄2
19⁄16
15⁄8
111⁄16
13⁄4
3
4
1
⁄8
⁄16
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
13
⁄16
7
⁄8
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
1
11⁄16
11⁄8
11⁄8
13⁄16
11⁄4
15⁄16
3
5
1
⁄8
⁄8
1
⁄8
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
13
⁄16
13
⁄16
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
15
⁄16
1
1
6
7
1
1
1
1
⁄16
⁄16
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
⁄16
⁄16
1
⁄16
1
⁄16
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
Note 1— Waviness denotes the maximum deviation of the surface of the plate from a plane parallel to
the surface of the point of measurement and contiguous to the surface of the plate at each of the two adjacent wave peaks, when the plate is resting on a flat horizontal surface, as measured in an increment of
less than 12 ft of length. The permitted variation in waviness is a function of the permitted variation from
a flat surface as obtained from Table 13 or 14, whichever is appropriate.
Note 2— Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when waviness is measured.
27
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE 16
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN CROSS SECTION FOR W, HP, S, M, C, AND MC SHAPES
Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, in.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Shape
Section Nominal
Sizes, in.
C, Maximum
T+
Depth at any
T ′A
Cross Section
A, Depth
B, Flange Width
Flanges E, Web
over
Over
Under
Over
Under
Out-ofoff
Theoretical
Theoretical Theoretical Theoretical Theoretical SquareB CenterC
Depth, in.
Permitted
Variations Over
or Under
Theoretical Web
Thickness for
Thicknesses
Given in
Inches, in.
3
⁄16 and
Under
Over
3
⁄16
W and HP Up to 12, incl
Over 12
1
1
1
3
1
3
1
1
1
1
3
5
3
1
⁄4
⁄4
...
...
...
...
S and M
3 to 7, incl
Over 7 to 14, incl
Over 14 to 24, incl
3
⁄32
⁄8
3
⁄16
1
⁄16
⁄32
1
⁄8
1
5
⁄32
⁄32
1
⁄32
3
5
⁄8
⁄32
3
⁄16
1
3
⁄8
⁄32
3
⁄16
1
1
1
3
⁄16
⁄16
3
⁄16
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
11⁄2 and under
Over 11⁄2 to 3, excl
3 to 7, incl
Over 7 to 14, incl
Over 14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
0.010
0.015
...
...
...
0.015
0.020
...
...
...
C and MC
⁄8
⁄8
⁄32
⁄16
3
⁄32
1
⁄8
3
⁄16
⁄8
⁄8
⁄32
⁄16
1
⁄16
3
⁄32
1
⁄8
⁄4
⁄4
⁄16
⁄16
⁄32
⁄16
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
⁄32
⁄16
1
⁄8
5
⁄32
3
⁄16
⁄4
⁄16
⁄32
⁄32
1
⁄32
1
⁄32
1
⁄32
⁄16
⁄16
Note 1 — A is measured at center line of web for S, M, and W and HP shapes; at back of web for C and MC shapes. Measurement is
overall for C shapes under 3 in. B is measured parallel to flange. C is measured parallel to web.
Note 2 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
A
T + T ′ applies when flanges of channels are toed in or out. For channels 5⁄8 in. and under in depth, the permitted out-of-square is 3⁄64
in./in. of depth.
B
Permitted variation is per inch of flange width for S, M, C, and MC shapes.
C
Permitted variation of 5⁄16 in. max for sections over 426 lb/ft.
28
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
TABLE 17
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN CROSS SECTION FOR ANGLES (L SHAPES), BULB ANGLES, AND ZEES
Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, in.
B, Flange Width or
Length of Leg, in.
A, Depth, in.
Section
Nominal Size, in.
Over
Theoretical
Under
Theoretical
Over
Theoretical
Under
Theoretical
T, Out-ofSquare per
Inch of B,
in.
⁄16 and
under
Over 3⁄16
to 3⁄8, incl
Over 3⁄8
⁄128B
⁄128B
3
⁄128B
3
⁄128B
3
⁄128B
3
⁄128B
0.008
0.010
0.012
...
...
...
0.010
0.010
0.015
...
...
...
...
0.012
0.015
...
...
...
⁄128B
⁄128B
3
⁄128B
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
⁄128B
⁄128B
...
...
...
...
...
...
AnglesA
(L Shapes)
1 and under
Over 1 to 2, incl
Over 2 to 3, excl
3 to 4, incl
Over 4 to 6, incl
Over 6
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
1
⁄32
⁄64
1
⁄16
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
3
⁄16
1
⁄32
⁄64
1
⁄16
3
⁄32
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
3
3
3
3
Bulb angles
(Depth) 3 to 4, incl
Over 4 to 6, incl
Over 6
1
⁄8
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄16
⁄16
1
⁄16
1
1
⁄32
⁄8
1
⁄8
3
1
⁄8
⁄8
3
⁄16
3
1
1
3
3 to 4, incl
Over 4 to 6, incl
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
1
1
3
Zees
⁄8
⁄8
⁄16
⁄16
⁄8
⁄8
⁄32
⁄8
Note 1—Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
A
For unequal leg angles, longer leg determines classification.
⁄128 in./in. p 11⁄2°.
B3
29
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Permitted Variations Over or
Under Theoretical Thickness
for Thicknesses Given in
Inches, in.
3
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE 18
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR ROLLED TEES
Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, in.
Tees
A, DepthB
Nominal SizeA
Over
11⁄4 and under
Over 11⁄4 to 2, incl
Over 2 to 3, excl
3 to 5, incl
Over 5 to 7, incl
Under
B, WidthB
Over
Under
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
⁄64
⁄16
3
⁄32
3
⁄32
3
⁄32
⁄64
⁄16
3
⁄32
1
⁄16
1
⁄16
⁄64
⁄16
3
⁄32
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
T, Outof-Square
per inch
of B
E, Weboff-Center
...
...
...
1
⁄32
1
⁄32
...
...
...
3
⁄32
1
⁄8
⁄64
⁄16
3
⁄32
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
Thickness of
Flange
Stem
Out-ofSquareC
1
⁄32
⁄16
3
⁄32
...
...
1
Thickness of
Stem
Over
Under
Over
Under
0.010
0.012
0.015
...
...
0.010
0.012
0.015
...
...
0.005
0.010
0.015
...
...
0.020
0.020
0.020
...
...
Note 1 — * Back of square and center line of stem are to be parallel when measuring “out-of-square.”
Note 2 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
A
The longer member of an unequal tee determines the size for permitted variations.
Measurements for both depth and width are overall.
C
Stem-out-of-square is the permitted variation from its true position of the center line of stem, measured at the point.
B
TABLE 19
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, AND BULB ANGLE SHAPES
Permitted Variations from Specified Length for Lengths Given in Feet, in.
Nominal
Size,A in.
Under 3
3 and over
5 to 10, excl
Over
5
⁄8
1
Under
0
0
10 to 20, excl
20 to 30, incl
Over
Under
Over
0
0
1
1
11⁄2
1 ⁄2
13⁄4
Under
Over 30 to
40, incl
Over
0
0
2
21⁄4
Over 40 to
50, incl
Under
Over
0
0
1
2 ⁄2
23⁄4
Note 1— Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
A
Greatest cross-sectional dimension.
30
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Over 50 to
65, incl
Over 65 ft
Under
Over
Under
Over
Under
0
0
1
0
0
...
...
...
...
2 ⁄2
23⁄4
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
TABLE 20
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN END OUT-OF-SQUARE
FOR S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, AND BULB ANGLE SHAPES
Shapes
S, M, C, and MC
LA
Bulb angles
Rolled TeesA
Zees
Permitted Variation
1
⁄64 in./in. of depth
⁄128 in./in. of leg length or 11⁄2°
3
⁄128 in./in. of depth or 11⁄2°
1
⁄64 in./in. of flange or stem
3
⁄128 in./in. of sum of both flange lengths
3
A
Permitted variations for end out-of-square are determined on
the longer members of the shape.
TABLE 21
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN STRAIGHTNESS FOR S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, AND BULB ANGLE SHAPES
Positions for Measuring Camber of Shapes
Variable
Nominal Size,A in.
Camber
under 3
3 and over
all
Sweep
A
Permitted Variation, in.
⁄4 in. in any 5 ft, or 1⁄4 ⴛ (number of feet of total length/5)
⁄8 ⴛ (number of feet of total length/5)
Due to the extreme variations in flexibility of these shapes, permitted variations for sweep are subject to
negotiations between the manufacturer and the purchaser for the individual sections involved.
1
1
Greatest cross-sectional dimension.
31
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
TABLE 22
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR W AND HP SHAPES
Permitted Variations from Specified Length for Lengths Given in Feet, in.A,B
30 ft and Under
W and HP Shapes
Over
Beams 24 in. and under in nominal depth
Beams over 24 in. in nominal depth and all columns
Over 30 ft
Under
Over
Under
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
⁄8
⁄2
⁄8
⁄2
⁄8 plus 1⁄16 for each additional 5 ft or fraction thereof
⁄2 plus 1⁄16 for each additional 5 ft or fraction thereof
⁄8
⁄2
A
For HP and W shapes specified in the order for use as bearing piles, the permitted variations in length are plus 5 in. and minus 0 in.
These permitted variations in length also apply to sheet piles.
B
The permitted variations in end out-of-square W and HP shapes shall be 1⁄64 in. per inch of depth, or per inch of flange width if the
flange width is larger than the depth.
TABLE 23
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH AND END OUT-OF-SQUARE, MILLED SHAPES
Permitted Variations in Length and End Out-of-Square, in.A
Milled Both EndsC
Milled One-EndC
Length
Nominal, Depth, in.
6 to 36
Length, ftB
6 to 70
Over
1
⁄32
Length
Under
1
End Out-ofSquare
1
⁄32
⁄32
A
Over
1
⁄4
Under
1
⁄4
End Out-ofSquare (for
Milled End)
1
⁄32
Length is measured along center line of web. Measurements are made with the steel and tape at the same temperature.
The permitted variations in length and out-of-square are additive.
C
End out-of-square are measured by (a) squaring from the center line of the web and (b) squaring from the center line of the flange. The
measured variation from true squareness in either plane shall not exceed the total tabular amount.
B
32
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
TABLE 24
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN STRAIGHTNESS FOR W AND HP SHAPES
Positions for Measuring Camber and Sweep of W and HP Shapes
Permitted Variation in Straightness, in.
⁄8 ⴛ (number of feet of total length/10)A
1
Camber and sweep
When certain sectionsB with a flange width approximately equal to
depth are specified in the order for use as columns:
Lengths of 45 ft and under
Lengths over 45 ft
⁄8 in. ⴛ (number of feet of total length/10) but not over 3⁄8 in.
⁄8 in. + [1⁄8 in. ⴛ ([number of feet of total length — 45]/10)]
1
3
Sections with a flange width less than 6 in., permitted variation for sweep, in. p 1⁄8 in. ⴛ (number of feet of total length/5).
Applies only to:
8-in. deep sections 31 lb/ft and heavier,
10-in. deep sections 49 lb/ft and heavier,
12-in. deep sections 65 lb/ft and heavier, and
14-in. deep sections 90 lb/ft and heavier.
For other sections specified in the order for use as columns, the permitted variation is subject to negotiation with the manufacturer.
A
B
TABLE 25
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS FOR
SPLIT TEES AND SPLIT ANGLES (L SHAPES)A
Permitted Variation Over or
Under Specified Depth,B in.
Specified Depth, in.
To 6, excl (beams and channels)
6 to 16, excl (beams and channels)
16 to 20, excl (beams and channels)
20 to 24, excl (beams)
24 and over (beams)
1
⁄8
⁄16
1
⁄4
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
3
A
The permitted variations in length for split tees or angles are
the same as those applicable to the section from which the tees or
angles are split.
B
The above permitted variations in depth of tees or angles
include the permitted variations in depth for the beams or channels
before splitting. Permitted variations in dimensions and
straightness, as set up for the beams or channels from which these
tees or angles are cut, apply, except:
straightness p 1⁄8 in. ⴛ (length in feet/5).
33
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE 26
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR SQUARE-EDGE AND ROUND-EDGE FLAT BARS
Permitted Variations Over or Under Specified Thickness, for Thicknesses Given in
Inches, in.
Specified Widths, in.
To 1, incl
Over 1 to 2,
Over 2 to 4,
Over 4 to 6,
Over 6 to 8,
incl
incl
incl
incl
0.203 to
0.230,
excl
0.007
0.007
0.008
0.009
A
0.203 to
1
⁄4, excl
0.007
0.007
0.008
0.009
0.015
1
⁄4 to 1⁄2
incl
Over 1⁄2 to
1, incl
0.008
0.012
0.015
0.015
0.016
0.010
0.015
0.020
0.020
0.025
Over 1
to 2,
incl
...
1
⁄32
1
⁄32
1
⁄32
1
⁄32
Over 2
to 3,
incl
...
...
3
⁄64
3
⁄64
3
⁄64
Over 3
...
...
3
⁄64
3
⁄64
1
⁄16
Permitted
Variations from
Specified Width,
in.
Over
Under
1
1
⁄64
⁄32
1
⁄16
3
⁄32
1 B
⁄8
⁄64
⁄32
1
⁄32
1
⁄16
3 B
⁄32
1
1
Note 1— Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
A
B
Flats over 6 to 8 in., incl, in width are not available as hot-rolled carbon steel bars in thickness under 0.230 in.
For flats over 6 to 8 in., in width, and 3 in. incl in thickness.
TABLE 27
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL
DIMENSIONS FOR ROUND AND SQUARE BARS AND
ROUND-CORNERED SQUARES
Permitted
Variations from
Specified Size, in.
Specified Size, in.
Over
Under
Permitted
Out-ofRound or
Out-ofSquare, in.A
To 5⁄16
Over 5⁄16 to 7⁄16, incl
Over 7⁄16 to 5⁄8, incl
Over 5⁄8 to 7⁄8, incl
Over 7⁄8 to 1, incl
Over 1 to 11⁄8, incl
Over 11⁄8 to 11⁄4, incl
Over 11⁄4 to 13⁄8, incl
Over 13⁄8 to 11⁄2, incl
Over 11⁄2 to 2, incl
Over 2 to 21⁄2, incl
Over 21⁄2 to 31⁄2, incl
Over 31⁄2 to 41⁄2, incl
Over 41⁄2 to 51⁄2, incl
Over 51⁄2 to 61⁄2, incl
Over 61⁄2 to 81⁄4, incl
Over 81⁄4 to 91⁄2, incl
Over 91⁄2 to 10, incl
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.009
0.010
0.011
0.012
0.014
1
⁄64
1
⁄32
3
⁄64
1
⁄16
5
⁄64
1
⁄8
5
⁄32
3
⁄16
1
⁄4
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.009
0.010
0.011
0.012
0.014
1
⁄64
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.008
0.009
0.010
0.012
0.013
0.015
0.016
0.018
0.021
0.023
0.023
0.035
0.046
0.058
0.070
0.085
0.100
0.120
TABLE 28
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL
DIMENSIONS FOR HEXAGONS
Permitted
Variations from
Specified Size, in.
Specified Sizes Between
Opposite Sides, in.
1
⁄2 and under
Over 1⁄2 to 1, incl
Over 1 to 11⁄2, incl
Over 11⁄2 to 2, incl
Over 2 to 21⁄2, incl
Over 21⁄2 to 31⁄2, incl
Under
0.007
0.010
0.021
1
⁄32
3
⁄64
1
⁄16
0.007
0.010
0.013
1
⁄64
1
⁄64
1
⁄64
0.011
0.015
0.025
1
⁄32
3
⁄64
1
⁄16
A
Out-of-hexagon section is the greatest difference in distance
between any two opposite faces measured at the same transverse
cross section.
TABLE 29
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN STRAIGHTNESS FOR
BARS
Permitted Variations in Straightness, in.A
1
A
Out-of-round is the difference between the maximum and minimum diameters of the bar, measured at the same transverse cross
section. Out-of-square section is the difference in perpendicular distance between opposite faces, measured at the same transverse
cross section.
⁄4 in any 5 ft, or 1⁄4 ⴛ (number of feet of total length/5)
A
Permitted variations in straightness do not apply to hot-rolled
bars if any subsequent heating operation has been performed.
34
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Over
Permitted
Out-of-Hexagon
Section,
Three Measurements, in.A
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
TABLE 30
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR HOT-CUT STEEL BARSA
Permitted Variations Over Specified Length Given in Feet, in.
(No Variation Under)
Specified Sizes of Flats, in.
Specified Sizes of Rounds,
Squares, and Hexagons, in.
To 1, incl
Over 1 to 2, incl
Over 1 to 2, incl
Over 2 to 5, incl
Over 5 to 10, incl
Thickness
To 1, incl
Over 1
To 1, incl
Over 1
...
0.230 to 1, incl
Over 1 to 3, incl
5 to
10,
excl
Width
To 3, incl
To 3, incl
Over 3 to 6,
Over 3 to 6,
...
Over 6 to 8,
Over 6 to 8,
10 to
20,
excl
40 to
60,
incl
3
⁄4
1
1
11⁄2
21⁄2
11⁄4
13⁄4
11⁄4
11⁄2
11⁄2
13⁄4
23⁄4
13⁄4
2
13⁄4
2
2
21⁄4
3
31⁄2
31⁄2
21⁄4
21⁄2
21⁄2
23⁄4
31⁄4
4
4
B
11⁄2
21⁄2
13⁄4
23⁄4
21⁄4
3
23⁄4
31⁄4
5
incl
incl
30 to
40,
excl
⁄2
⁄8
5
⁄8
1
2
3
⁄4
11⁄4
1
incl
incl
20 to
30,
excl
Hot Sawing
B
2 to 5, incl
Over 5 to 10, incl
1 and over
...
3 and over
...
B
Note 1— Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
A
B
For flats over 6 to 8 in., incl, in width and over 3 in. in thickness, consult the manufacturer for permitted variations in length.
Smaller sizes and shorter lengths are not commonly hot sawed.
TABLE 31
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR BARS
RECUT BOTH ENDS AFTER STRAIGHTENINGA,B
Sizes of Rounds, Squares,
Hexagons, Width of Flats
and Maximum Dimension
of Other Sections, in.
To 3, incl
Over 3 to 6, incl
Over 6 to 8, incl
Rounds over 8 to 10, incl
Permitted Variations from
Specified Lengths
Given in Feet, in.
To 12, incl
Over
Under
Over 12
Over
Under
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
⁄16
⁄4
3
⁄8
1
⁄2
⁄16
⁄16
1
⁄16
1
⁄16
A
⁄4
⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
⁄16
⁄16
1
⁄16
1
⁄16
For flats over 6 to 8 in., incl, in width, and over 3 in. in thickness, consult the manufacturer or processor for permitted variations in length.
B
Permitted variations are sometimes required all over or all
under the specified length, in which case the sum of the two permitted variations applies.
35
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
The following standardized supplementary requirements are for use when desired by the
purchaser. Those that are considered suitable for use with each material specification are
listed in the specification. Other tests may be performed by agreement between the supplier
and the purchaser. These additional requirements shall apply only when specified in the
order, in which event the specified tests shall be made by the manufacturer or processor
before shipment of the material.
S5.2 The frequency of testing, the test temperature
to be used, and the absorbed energy requirements shall
be as specified on the order.
S1. Vacuum Treatment
S1.1 The steel shall be made by a process which
includes vacuum degassing while molten. Unless otherwise agreed upon with the purchaser, it is the responsibility of the manufacturer to select suitable process
procedures.
S6.
Drop-Weight Test (for Material 0.625 in.
[16 mm] and over in Thickness)
S6.1 Drop-weight tests shall be made in accordance
with Method E 208. The specimens shall represent the
material in the final condition of heat treatment.
Agreement shall be reached between the purchaser and
the manufacturer or processor as to the number of pieces
to be tested and whether a maximum nil-ductility transition (NDT) temperature is mandatory or if the test results
are for information only.
S2. Product Analysis
S2.1 Product analyses shall be made for those elements listed in the material specification. Test frequency
shall be as specified on the order. Specimens for analysis
shall be taken adjacent to or from the tension test specimen, or from a sample taken from the same relative
location as that from which the tension test specimen was
taken.
S3.
Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of
Mechanical Test Coupons
S3.1 Prior to testing, the test specimens representing
the structural product for acceptance purposes for
mechanical properties shall be thermally treated to simulate a post-weld heat treatment below the critical temperature (Ac3), using the heat treatment parameters (such as
temperature range, time, and cooling rates) specified in
the order. The test results for such heat-treated test specimens shall meet the applicable product specification
requirements.
S8.
Ultrasonic Examination
S8.1 The material shall be ultrasonically examined in
accordance with the requirements specified on the order.
S15.
Reduction of Area Measurement
S15.1 The reduction of area, as determined on the
0.500 in. [12.5 mm] diameter round tension test specimen
in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370,
shall not be less than 40%.
S4. Additional Tension Test
S4.1 Plate — One tension test shall be made from
each unit plate rolled from a slab or directly from an
ingot, except that for quenched and tempered plates, a
test shall be taken from each unit plate heat treated. The
results obtained shall be reported on the mill test reports
when such tests are required by the order.
Maximum Tensile Strength
S18.1 Steel having a specified minimum tensile
strength of less than 70 ksi [485 MPa] shall not exceed
the minimum specified tensile strength by more than 30
ksi [205 MPa].
S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test
S5.1 Charpy V-notch impact tests shall be conducted
in accordance with Specification A 673 /A 673M.
S18.2 Steel having a minimum specified tensile
strength of 70 ksi [485 MPa] or higher shall not exceed
the minimum specified tensile strength by more than 25
ksi [170 MPa].
S18.
36
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
S23.
Copper-Bearing Steel (for improved
atmospheric corrosion resistance)
S27. Restrictive Plate Flatness
S27.1 As-rolled or normalized carbon steel plates
ordered to restrictive flatness shall conform to the permitted variations from a flat surface given in Table S27.1
or Table S27.2, whichever is applicable.
S23.1 The copper content shall be a minimum of
0.20% on heat analysis, 0.18 on product analysis.
S26.
SA-6 /SA-6M
S27.2 As-rolled or normalized high-strength lowallow steel plates ordered to restrictive flatness shall conform to the permitted variations from a flat surface given
in Table S27.3 or Table S27.4, whichever is applicable.
Subdivided Material — Marking of
Individual Pieces
S74. Maximum Carbon Equivalent for Weldability
S74.1 Plates and shapes shall be supplied with a specific maximum carbon equivalent value as specified by
the purchaser. This value shall be based on heat analysis.
The required chemical analysis as well as the carbon
equivalent shall be reported.
S26.1 Subdivided pieces shall be individually identified by marking, stenciling, or die stamping the specification number (year-date not required), grade, heat number,
and the heat treatment identification, if applicable, along
with the trademark, brand, or name of the organization
subdividing the material. As an alternative, individual
subdivided pieces shall be identified by a code traceable
to the original required identification, provided that the
trademark, name, or brand of the organization subdividing
the material is also placed on the material and the original
required identification, cross referenced on the code, is
furnished with the material.
S74.2 The carbon equivalent shall be calculated using
the following formula:
CE p C + Mn /6 + (Cr + Mo + V) /5 + (Ni + Cu) /15
S74.3 For additional information on the weldability
of steel, see Appendix X3.
TABLE S27.1
PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED CARBON STEEL PLATES
ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS
Specified
Thickness, in.
Specified Weights,
lb/ft2
To 1⁄4, excl.
1
⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl.
3
⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl.
1
⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl.
3
⁄4 to 1, excl.
1 to 2, incl.
To 10.2 excl.
10.2 to 15.3,
15.3 to 20.4,
20.4 to 30.6,
30.6 to 40.8,
40.8 to 51.7,
excl.
excl.
excl.
excl.
incl.
Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Inches, in.
48 to 60,
excl.
60 to 72,
excl.
3
15
9
3
⁄4
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
1
⁄4
72 to 84,
excl.
84 to 96,
excl.
A
⁄16
⁄4
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
7
⁄8
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
A
15
⁄16
7
⁄16
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
96 to 108,
excl.
108 to 120,
incl.
A
A
1-1⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
1-1⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
3
⁄8
NOTE 1 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the
permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft. in
length, or in any 12 ft. of longer plates.
NOTE 2 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Across the Width — The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width
shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 1⁄4 in. in each direction.
When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 in., incl., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular
amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 1⁄4 in.
NOTE 4 — The permitted variations given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 60 ksi or
comparable chemistry or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or compatible chemistry or hardness, the permitted variations are 11⁄2 times the amounts in this table.
NOTE 5 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the
maximum dimensions of such plates.
NOTE 6 — Permitted variations in waviness do not apply.
NOTE 7 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
A
There is no published restricted value for this size.
37
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE S27.2
PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED CARBON STEEL PLATES
ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS
Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Inches, in.
Specified
Thickness, mm
Specified Weights,
kg/m2
1200
to
1500,
excl.
1500
to
1800,
excl.
1800
to
2100,
excl.
2100
to
2400,
excl.
2400
to
2700,
excl.
2700
to
3000,
incl.
To 6, excl.
6 to 10, excl.
10 to 12, excl.
12 to 20, excl.
20 to 25, excl.
25 to 50, incl.
To 47.1 excl.
47.1 to 78.5, excl.
78.5 to 94.2, excl.
78.5 to 94.2, excl.
157.0 to 196.2, excl.
196.2 to 392.7, incl.
18
15
8
7
7
7
24
18
8
8
8
7
A
A
A
A
22
10
8
8
7
24
11
10
8
8
27
13
13
10
8
29
15
13
11
8
NOTE 1 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the
permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 3700 mm
in length, or in any 3700 mm of longer plates.
NOTE 2 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Across the Width — The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width
shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 6 mm in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, incl., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 6 mm.
NOTE 4 — The permitted variations given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 415 MPa
or comparable chemistry or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or compatible chemistry or hardness, the permitted variations are 11⁄2 times the amounts in this table.
NOTE 5 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the
maximum dimensions of such plates.
NOTE 6 — Permitted variations in waviness do not apply.
NOTE 7 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
A
There is no published restricted value for this size.
TABLE S27.3
PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED HIGH-STRENGTH LOWALLOY STEEL PLATES ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS
Specified
Thickness, in.
Specified Weights,
lb/ft2
To 1⁄4, excl.
1
⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl.
3
⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl.
1
⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl.
3
⁄4 to 1, excl.
1 to 2, incl.
To 10.2 excl.
10.2 to 15.3,
15.3 to 20.4,
20.4 to 30.6,
30.6 to 40.8,
40.8 to 51.7,
excl.
excl.
excl.
excl.
incl.
Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Inches, in.
48 to 60,
excl.
60 to 72,
excl.
72 to 84,
excl.
84 to 96,
excl.
96 to 108,
excl.
108 to 120,
incl.
1-1⁄16
7
⁄8
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
3
⁄8
1-7⁄16
1-1⁄16
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
A
A
A
A
1-5⁄16
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
1-7⁄16
11
⁄16
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
1-1⁄2
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
1-11⁄16
13
⁄16
11
⁄16
11
⁄16
1
⁄2
NOTE 1 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the
permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft. in
length, or in any 12 ft. of longer plates.
NOTE 2 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Across the Width — The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width
shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 3⁄8 in. in each direction.
When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 in., incl., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular
amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 3⁄8 in.
NOTE 4 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the
maximum dimensions of such plates.
NOTE 5 — Permitted variations in waviness do not apply.
NOTE 6 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
A
There is no published restricted value for this size.
38
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
TABLE S27.4
PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED HIGH-STRENGTH LOWALLOY STEEL PLATES ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS
Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in
Millimeters, mm
Specified
Thickness, mm
Specified Weights,
kg/m2
1200
to
1500,
excl.
1500
to
1800,
excl.
1800
to
2100,
excl.
To 6, excl.
6 to 10, excl.
10 to 12, excl.
12 to 20, excl.
20 to 25, excl.
25 to 50, incl.
To 47.1 excl.
47.1 to 78.5, excl.
78.5 to 94.2, excl.
94.2 to 157.0, excl.
157.0 to 196.2, excl.
196.2 to 392.5, incl.
27
22
12
11
11
10
36
27
12
11
11
11
A
A
A
A
33
15
13
12
11
36
17
15
13
12
39
19
16
15
13
43
21
18
17
13
2100
to
2400,
excl.
2400
to
2700,
excl.
2700
to
3000,
incl.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NOTE 1 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the
permitted variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 3700 mm
in length, or in any 3700 mm of longer plates.
NOTE 2 — Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Across the Width — The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width
shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 10 mm in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800, incl., the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular
amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 10 mm.
NOTE 4 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the
maximum dimensions of such plates.
NOTE 5 — Permitted variations in waviness do not apply.
NOTE 6 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
A
There is no published restricted value for this size.
39
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
ANNEXES
(Mandatory Information)
A1. PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN
DIMENSIONS AND MASS IN SI UNITS
A1.1 Tables A1.1 through A1.31 contain permitted
variations in dimensions and mass stated in SI Units.
40
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
TABLE A1.1
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN THICKNESS FOR RECTANGULAR CARBON, HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALL0Y, AND
ALLOY STEEL PLATES, 300 MM AND UNDER IN THICKNESS WHEN ORDERED TO THICKNESS
Permitted Variations Over Specified Thickness for Widths Given in Millimetres, mm
Specified
Thickness,
mm
5.0
5.5
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
14.0
16.0
18.0
20.0
22.0
25.0
28.0
30.0
32.0
35.0
38.0
40.0
45.0
50.0
55.0
60.0
70.0
80.0
90.0
100.0
110.0
120.0
130.0
140.0
150.0
160.0
180.0
200.0
250.0
300.0
1200
and Under
Over 1200
to 1500,
excl
1500 to
1800,
excl
1800 to
2100,
excl
2100 to
2400,
excl
2400 to
2700,
excl
2700 to
3000,
excl
3000 to
3300,
excl
3300 to
3600,
excl
3600 to
4200,
excl
4200
and
Over
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
5.8
7.5
7.5
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
5.8
7.5
7.5
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.5
9.0
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.5
9.0
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.5
3.5
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.5
9.0
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.8
3.8
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.5
9.0
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.5
3.8
3.8
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.5
9.0
0.9
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.3
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.8
3.8
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.5
9.0
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.4
1.4
1.5
1.5
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.3
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.4
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.8
3.8
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.5
9.0
...
...
...
1.4
1.4
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.6
1.6
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.1
2.3
2.5
2.7
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.8
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.4
4.4
4.8
5.2
5.6
5.6
5.6
6.3
7.0
7.5
9.0
...
...
...
...
...
...
1.7
1.7
1.8
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.2
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.8
3.8
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.4
4.4
4.4
4.8
5.2
5.6
5.6
5.6
6.3
7.0
8.8
9.0
Note 1 — Permitted variation under specified thickness, 0.3 mm.
Note 2 — Thickness to be measured at 10 to 20 mm from the longitudinal edge.
Note 3 — For specified thicknesses not listed in this table, the permitted variations in thickness shall be as given for the next higher value
of specified thickness that is listed in this table.
Note 4 — For thickness measured at any location other than that specified in Note 5, the permitted variations over specified thickness
shall be 13⁄4 times the amounts in this table, rounded to the nearest 0.1 mm.
Note 5 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
41
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
42
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Not for Resale
A
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
1500 to
1800,
excl
1800 to
2100,
excl
2100 to
2400,
excl
2400 to
2700,
excl
2700 to
3000,
excl
3000 to
3300,
excl
3300 to
3600,
excl
3600 to
4200,
excl
4200
and
Over
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
4.5
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
5.0
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
5.5
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
6.0
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
7.5
6.5
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
9.0
7.0
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
...
8.0
7.5
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
Permitted variations in excess mass for lots of circular and sketch plates shall be 11⁄4 times the amounts in this table.
Permitted variations in excess mass for single plates shall be 11⁄3 times the amounts in this table.
Permitted variations in excess mass for single circular and sketch plates shall be 12⁄3 times the amounts in this table.
The adopted standard density for rolled steel is 7850 kg/m3.
Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
4.0
4.0
4.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.0
...
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
...
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
...
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
...
...
11
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.5
6.0
5.5
4.0
3.0
3.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
...
...
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
...
...
...
10
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.5
6.0
4.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.5
...
...
...
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under Over Under
Over 1200
to 1500,
excl
The term “lot” means all the plates of each tabular width and mass group represented in each shipment.
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
To 51.02, excl
51.02 to 62.80, excl
62.80 to 74.58, excl
74.58 to 86.35, excl
86.35 to 102.0, excl
102.0 to 125.6, excl
125.6 to 149.2, excl
149.2 to 196.2, excl
196.2 to 392.5, excl
392.5 to 588.8, excl
588.8 to 785.0, excl
785.0 to 1178, excl
1178 to 1962, excl
1962 to 2355, excl
2355 to 2983, incl
Specified
Mass, kg/m2
1200 and
Under
Permitted Variations in Average Mass of LotsA for Widths Given in Millimetres, Expressed in Percentage of the Specified Masses per Square Metre
TABLE A1.2
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN MASS FOR RECTANGULAR SHEARED PLATES AND UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES 2983 kg/m2 AND UNDER WHEN
ORDERED TO MASS
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
TABLE A1.3
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR SHEARED PLATES 40 MM AND UNDER IN THICKNESS;
LENGTH ONLY OF UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES 65 MM AND UNDER IN THICKNESS
Permitted Variations Over Specified Width and LengthA for Thicknesses Given in
Millimetres and Equivalent Masses Given in Kilograms per Square Metre, mm
To 10.5 excl
Specified Dimensions, mm
Length
To 78.50, excl
10.5 to 16, excl
16 to 25, excl
25 to 50, inclB
78.50 to
125.6, excl
125.6 to
196.2, excl
196.2 to
392.5, excl
Width
Width
Length
Width
Length
Width
Length
Width
Length
To 3000, excl
To 1500, excl
1500 to 2100, excl
2100 to 2700, excl
2700 and over
10
11
13
16
13
16
19
22
11
13
16
19
16
18
22
25
13
16
19
22
19
22
25
29
16
19
25
29
25
25
29
32
3000 to 6000, excl
To 1500, excl
1500 to 2100, excl
2100 to 2700, excl
2700 and over
10
13
14
16
19
19
22
25
13
16
18
19
22
22
24
29
16
19
21
22
25
25
29
32
19
22
25
29
29
32
35
35
6000 to 9000, excl
To 1500, excl
1500 to 2100, excl
2100 to 2700, excl
2700 and over
10
13
14
18
25
25
25
29
13
16
18
22
29
29
32
32
16
19
22
25
32
32
35
35
19
22
25
32
38
38
38
44
9000 to 12 000, excl
To 1500, excl
1500 to 2100, excl
2100 to 2700, excl
2700 and over
11
13
14
19
29
32
32
35
13
16
19
22
32
35
35
38
16
19
22
25
35
38
38
41
19
22
25
32
41
41
48
48
12 000 to 15 000, excl
To 1500, excl
1500 to 2100, excl
2100 to 2700, excl
2700 and over
11
13
16
19
32
35
35
38
13
16
19
22
38
38
38
41
16
19
22
25
41
41
41
44
19
22
25
32
48
48
48
48
15 000 to 18 000, excl
To 1500, excl
1500 to 2100, excl
2100 to 2700, excl
2700 and over
13
16
16
22
44
44
44
44
16
19
19
25
48
48
48
51
19
22
22
29
48
48
48
57
22
25
29
32
57
57
57
64
18 000 and over
To 1500, excl
1500 to 2100, excl
2100 to 2700, excl
2700 and over
14
19
19
25
51
51
51
51
19
22
22
29
54
54
54
60
22
25
25
32
57
57
57
64
25
29
32
35
70
70
70
76
A
Permitted variations under specified width and length, 6 mm.
Permitted variations in length apply also to Universal Mill plates up to 300 mm in width for thicknesses over 50 to 65 mm, incl, except
for alloy steel up to 50 mm thick.
B
43
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE A1.4
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH FOR MILL EDGE
CARBON AND HIGH STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY PLATES
PRODUCED ON STRIP MILLS
(Applies to Either Plates Produced from Coils or Plates
Produced in Discrete Cut Lengths of Flat Product)
Specified Width, mm
Permitted Variation
Over
Specified Width, mmA
To 360, excl
360 to 430, excl
430 to 480, excl
480 to 530, excl
530 to 610, excl
610 to 660, excl
660 to 710, excl
710 to 890, excl
890 to 1270, excl
1270 to 1520, excl
1520 to 1650, excl
1650 to 1780, excl
1780 to 2030, excl
2030 and over
11
13
14
16
17
21
24
29
32
38
41
44
47
51
A
No permitted variation under specified width.
TABLE A1.5
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN ROLLED WIDTH FOR UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES 380 MM AND
UNDER IN THICKNESS
Permitted Variations Over Specified WidthA for Thickness Given in Millimetres or Equivalent Masses Given in
Kilograms per Square Metre, mm
Over 50 to 250, Over 250 to 400,
incl
incl
To 10, excl
10 to 16, excl
16 to 25, incl
25 to 50, incl
Specified Width, mm
To 78.50,
excl
78.50 to
125.6, excl
125.6 to
196.2, excl
196.2 to
392.5, incl
Over 392.5
to 1962, incl
Over 1962
to 3140, incl
Over 200 to 500, excl
500 to 900, excl
900 and over
3
5
8
3
6
10
5
8
11
6
10
13
10
11
14
13
14
16
A
Permitted variation under specified width, 3 mm.
TABLE A1.6
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR SHEARED CIRCULAR PLATES
25 MM AND UNDER IN THICKNESS
Specified
Diameters, mm
To 800, excl
800 to 2100, excl
2100 to 2700, excl
2700 to 3300, excl
3300 and over
A
Permitted Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given
in Millimetres, mmA
To 10,
excl
10 to 16,
excl
16 to 25,
incl
6
8
10
11
13
10
11
13
14
16
13
14
16
17
19
No permitted variation under specified diameter.
44
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE A1.7
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR GASCUT CIRCULAR PLATES
(Not Applicable to Alloy Steel)
TABLE A1.10
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR GASCUT CIRCULAR PLATES
(Applies to Alloy Steel Specifications Only)
Permitted Variations Over Specified
Diameter for Thicknesses Given, mmA
Specified
Diameters, mm
To 25,
excl
25 to
50,
excl
To 800, excl
800 to 2100, excl
2100 to 2700, excl
2700 to 3300, excl
3300 and over
10
10
13
13
16
10
13
14
14
19
A
Permitted Variations Over Specified
Diameter for Specified Thicknesses Given
in Millimetres, mmA
50 to 100 to 150 to 200 to
100, 150, 200, 400,
excl
excl
excl
incl
13
13
16
17
22
13
16
19
22
25
16
19
22
25
29
SA-6 /SA-6M
19
22
25
29
32
Specified
Diameter, mm
To
25,
excl
25
to
50,
excl
50
to
100,
excl
100
to
150,
excl
150
to
200,
excl
200
to
400,
incl
To 800, excl
800 to 2100, excl
2100 to 2700, excl
2700 to 3300, incl
13
13
16
22
13
16
19
25
19
22
25
29
19
25
29
32
25
29
32
35
25
32
35
38
No permitted variations under specified diameter.
A
No permitted variations under specified diameter.
TABLE A1.8
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH
FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES WHEN GAS CUTTING IS
SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED
(Applies to Alloy Steel Specifications Only)
Specified Thickness, mm
Permitted Variation Over
Specified Width and Length,
mm
To 50, excl
50 to 100, excl
100 to 150, excl
150 to 200, excl
200 to 400, excl
19
25
29
33
38
TABLE A1.11
PERMITTED CAMBERA FOR CARBON STEEL, HIGHSTRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL, AND ALLOY STEEL
UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES AND HIGH-STRENGTH
LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL SHEARED OR
GAS-CUT RECTANGULAR PLATES
Note 1 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to
length only.
Note 2 — These permitted variations shall be taken all under or
divided over and under, if so specified.
Specified Thickness, mm
To 50, excl
50 to 100, excl
100 to 150, excl
150 to 200, excl
200 to 400, incl
13
16
19
22
25
Permitted Camber,
mm
To 750, incl
Over 750 to 1500
Length in millimetres/300
Length in millimetres/250
A
Camber as it relates to plates is the horizontal edge curvature
in the length, measured over the entire length of the plate in the
flat position.
TABLE A1.9
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH
FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES WHEN GAS CUTTING IS
SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED
(Not Applicable to Alloy Steel)
Permitted Variations Over
Specified Width and Length,
mmA
Specified Width,
mm
TABLE A1.12
PERMITTED CAMBERA FOR SHEARED PLATES AND
GAS-CUT RECTANGULAR PLATES, ALL
THICKNESSES
(Applies to Carbon Steel Only)
Permitted camber, mm p length in millimetres/500
Note 1 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to
length only.
A
Camber as it relates to plates is the horizontal edge curvature
in the length, measured over the entire length of the plate in the
flat position.
A
These permitted variations may be taken all under or divided
over and under, if so specified.
45
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE A1.13
PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR CARBON STEEL PLATES
Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Milimetres, mmA,B
Specified
Thickness, mm
Specified Mass,
kg/m2
To
900,
excl
To 6, excl
6 to 10, excl
10 to 12, excl
12 to 20, excl
20 to 25, excl
25 to 50, excl
50 to 100, excl
100 to 150, excl
150 to 200, excl
200 to 250, excl
250 to 300, excl
300 to 400, incl
To 47.1, excl
47.1 to 78.5, excl
78.5 to 94.2, excl
94.2 to 157.0, excl
157.0 to 196.2, excl
196.2 to 392.5, excl
392.5 to 785.0, excl
785.0 to 1178, excl
1178 to 1570, excl
1570 to 1962, excl
1962 to 2355, excl
2355 to 3140, incl
14
13
13
11
11
10
8
10
11
13
13
16
900
1200
to
to
1200, 1500,
excl
excl
19
16
14
13
13
13
10
11
13
13
16
19
1500
to
1800,
excl
1800
to
2100,
excl
2100
to
2400,
excl
2400
to
2700,
excl
2700
to
3000,
excl
3000
to
3600,
excl
3600
to
4200,
excl
4200
and
over
32
24
16
16
16
14
13
13
16
18
21
22
35
29
19
16
16
14
13
14
18
19
22
24
38
32
22
19
16
16
13
14
19
21
24
25
41
35
25
25
19
16
13
16
22
22
25
25
44
38
29
25
22
16
14
19
22
24
25
25
48
41
32
29
25
18
16
22
25
25
25
25
...
...
48
38
35
29
22
22
25
25
25
25
...
...
54
51
44
38
29
25
25
25
25
...
24
19
16
14
14
13
11
13
13
16
19
21
Note 1 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 6 mm. When the
longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, incl, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for
the specified width, but in no case less than 6 mm.
Note 2 — These permitted variations apply to plates that have a specified minimum tensile strength of not more than 415 MPa or comparable chemical composition or hardness. The limits in the table are increased 50% for plates that have a higher specified minimum tensile
strength or comparable chemical composition or hardness.
Note 3 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based upon the maximum dimensions of such plates.
Note 4 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
Note 5 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
A
Permitted Variation From a Flat Surface Along the Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and the permitted
variation from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width for plates up to 4000 mm in length,
or in any 4000 mm for longer plates.
B
Permitted Variation from a Flat Surface Across the Width — The permitted variation from the flat surface across the width shall not
exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
46
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
TABLE A1.14
PERMITTED VARIATIONS FROM A FLAT SURFACE FOR HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY AND ALLOY STEEL
PLATES, HOT ROLLED OR THERMALLY TREATED
Permitted Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths Given in Milimetres, mmA,B
Specified
Thickness, mm
Specified Mass,
kg/m2
To
900,
excl
To 6, excl
6 to 10, excl
10 to 12, excl
12 to 20, excl
20 to 25, excl
25 to 50, excl
50 to 100, excl
100 to 150, excl
150 to 200, excl
200 to 250, excl
250 to 300, excl
300 to 400, incl
To 47.1, excl
47.1 to 78.5, excl
78.5 to 94.2, excl
94.2 to 157.0, excl
157.0 to 196.2, excl
196.2 to 392.5, excl
392.5 to 785.0, excl
785.0 to 1178, excl
1178 to 1570, excl
1570 to 1962, excl
1962 to 2355, excl
2355 to 3140, incl
21
19
19
16
16
14
13
14
16
19
19
22
900
1200
to
to
1200, 1500,
excl
excl
29
24
22
19
19
16
14
18
19
21
24
25
1500
to
1800,
excl
1800
to
2100,
excl
2100
to
2400,
excl
2400
to
2700,
excl
2700
to
3000,
excl
3000
to
3600,
excl
3600
to
4200,
excl
4200
and
over
48
35
24
22
22
21
19
19
24
25
32
33
51
44
29
25
24
22
19
22
25
29
33
35
57
48
33
29
25
24
19
22
29
32
35
38
60
51
38
32
29
25
19
24
32
33
38
38
67
57
41
35
33
25
22
29
33
35
38
38
70
60
48
41
38
25
25
32
38
38
38
38
...
...
70
57
51
41
32
32
38
38
38
38
...
...
79
76
67
57
41
38
38
38
38
38
35
29
24
22
22
19
18
19
19
24
29
30
Note 1 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the permitted variation shall not exceed 10 mm. When the longer dimension is
from 900 to 1800 mm, incl, the permitted variation from a flat surface shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width.
Note 2 — This table and these notes cover the permitted variations from a flat surface for circular and sketch plates, based on the maximum dimensions of such plates.
Note 3 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
Note 4 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
A
Permitted Variations from a Flat Surface Along the Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and permitted
variations from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 4000 mm in length,
or in any 4000 mm for longer plates.
B
Permitted Variations from a Flat Surface Across the Width — The permitted variation from a flat surface across the width shall not
exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
47
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE A1.15
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN WAVINESS FOR PLATES
Permitted Variation
From
a Flat Surface
(from Table
A1.13 or
A1.14) mm
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
13
14
16
17
19
21
22
24
25
29
32
35
38
41
44
48
51
54
57
60
64
67
70
73
76
79
8
10
11
13
14
16
17
19
21
22
24
25
29
32
35
38
41
44
48
51
54
57
60
64
67
70
73
76
79
6
8
8
10
11
13
13
14
16
17
17
19
22
24
27
29
32
33
37
38
41
43
46
48
51
52
56
57
60
5
5
6
8
8
10
10
11
11
13
13
14
16
17
19
22
24
25
27
29
30
32
33
37
38
40
41
43
44
3
5
5
5
6
6
8
8
8
10
10
11
13
13
14
16
17
19
21
22
22
24
25
27
29
29
30
32
33
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
8
8
10
10
11
13
13
14
14
16
17
17
19
21
21
22
24
24
25
2
2
3
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
8
8
10
10
11
11
13
13
14
14
14
16
16
17
17
19
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
5
5
6
6
6
8
8
8
10
10
10
11
11
11
13
13
14
14
Permitted Variations in Waviness, mm, When Number of Waves
in 4000 mm is
Note 1 — Waviness denotes the maximum deviation of the surface of the plate from a plane parallel to
the surface of the point of measurement and contiguous to the surface of the place at each of the two adjacent wave peaks, when the plate is resting on a flat horizontal surface, as measured in an increment of
less than 4000 mm of length. The permitted variation in waviness is a function of the permitted variation
from a flat surfaced as obtained from Table A1.13 or A1.14, whichever is applicable.
Note 2 — Plates must be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when waviness is measured.
48
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
TABLE A1.16
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN CROSS SECTION FOR W, HP, S, M, C, AND MC SHAPES
Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, mm
B, Flange
Width
A, Depth
Shape
Section
Nominal Size,
mm
Over
Theoretical
Under
Theoretical
Over
Theoretical
Under
Theoretical
T + T ′A
Flanges
Out-ofSquareB
Permitted Variations Over or
Under Theoretical Web
Thickness for
Thicknesses
Given in Milimetres, mm
E, Web
off
CenterC
C, Maximum
Depth at any
Cross Section
over
Theoretical
Depth
5 and
Under
Over 5
W and HP
up to 310, incl
over 310
4
4
3
3
6
6
5
5
6
8
5
5
6
6
...
...
...
...
S and M
75 to 180, incl
over 180 to 360, incl
over 360 to 610, incl
2
3
5
2
2
3
3
4
5
3
4
5
0.03
0.03
0.03
5
5
5
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
C and MC
40 and under
over 40 to 75, excl
75 to 180, incl
over 180 to 360, incl
over 360
1
2
3
3
5
1
2
2
3
4
1
2
3
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
0.2
0.4
...
...
...
0.4
0.5
...
...
...
Note 1 — A is measured at center lines of web for S, M, W, and HP shapes; at back of web for C and MC shapes. Measurement is overall
for C shapes under 75 mm. B is measured parallel to flange. C is measured parallel to web.
Note 2 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
T + T ′ applies when flanges of channels are toed in or out. For channels 16 mm and under in depth, the permitted out-of-square is 0.05
mm/mm of depth. The permitted variation shall be rounded to the nearest millimetre after calculation.
B
Permitted variation is per millimetre of flange width for S, M, C, and MC shapes.
C
Permitted variation of 8 mm max for sections over 634 kg/m.
A
49
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE A1.17
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN CROSS SECTION FOR ANGLES (L SHAPES), BULB ANGLES, AND ZEES
Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, mm
B, Flange
Width, or
Length of Leg
A, Depth
Section
Nominal Size,
mm
Over
Theoretical
Under
Theoretical
Over
Theoretical
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
2
3
3
5
Permitted Variations Over
or Under Theoretical Thickness for Thicknesses Given
in Milimetres, mm
T, Out-of-Square,
per Milimetre of
B
5 and
Under
Over 5
to 10
Over 10
1
1
2
2
3
3
0.026B
0.026B
0.026B
0.026B
0.026B
0.026B
0.2
0.2
0.3
...
...
...
0.2
0.2
0.4
...
...
...
...
0.3
0.4
...
...
...
Under
Theoretical
AnglesA (L shapes)
25 and under
over 25 to 50, incl
over 50 to 75, excl
75 to 100, incl
over 100 to 150 incl
over 150
Bulb angles
(depth) 75 to 100, incl
over 100 to 150, incl
over 150
3
3
3
2
2
2
4
4
5
2
3
3
0.026B
0.026B
0.026B
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Zees
75 to 100, incl
over 100 to 150, incl
3
3
2
2
4
4
2
3
0.026B
0.026B
...
...
...
...
...
...
Note 1 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
A
B
For unequal leg angles, longer leg determines classification.
0.026 mm/mm p 11⁄2°. The permitted variation shall be rounded to the nearest millimetre after calculation.
50
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
TABLE A1.18
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR ROLLED TEES
Permitted Variations in Sectional Dimensions Given, mm
Nominal SizeA
Over
Under
Over
Under
T, Out-ofSquare per
Milimetre
of B
30 and under
Over 30 to 50, incl
Over 50 to 75, excl
75 to 125, incl
Over 125 to 180, incl
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
3
3
1
2
2
3
3
...
...
...
0.03
0.03
A, DepthB
B, WidthB
Thickness of
Flange
Thickness of
Stem
E, Weboff-Center,
max
Stem
Out-ofSquareC
Over
Under
Over
Under
...
...
...
2
3
1
2
2
...
...
0.2
0.3
0.4
...
...
0.2
0.3
0.4
...
...
0.1
0.2
0.4
...
...
0.5
0.5
0.5
...
...
Note 1 — * Back of square and center line of stem are to be parallel when measuring “out-of-square.”
Note 2 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
A
The longer member of an unequal tee determines the size for Permitted variations.
Measurements for both depth and width are overall.
C
Stem-out-of-square is the permitted variation from its true position of the center line of stem, measured at the point.
B
TABLE A1.19
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, AND BULB ANGLE SHAPES
Permitted Variations from Specified Length for Lengths Given in Metres, mm
1.5 to 3, excl
3 to 6, excl
Over 9 to 12,
incl
6 to 9, incl
Over 12 to
15, incl
Over 15 to
20, incl
Over 20 m
Over
Under
Over
Under
Over
Under
Over
Under
Over
Under
Over
Under
Over
Under
Under 75
75 and over
16
25
0
0
25
38
0
0
38
45
0
0
51
57
0
0
64
70
0
0
64
70
0
0
...
...
...
...
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Nominal
Size,A mm
Note 1 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
A
Greatest cross-sectional dimension.
TABLE A1.20
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN END OUT-OF-SQUARE
FOR S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, AND BULB ANGLE SHAPES
Shapes
S, M, C, and MC
LA
Bulb angles
Rolled teesA
Zees
Permitted Variation
0.017
0.026
0.026
0.017
0.026
mm/mm
mm/mm
mm/mm
mm/mm
mm/mm
of
of
of
of
of
depth
leg length or 11⁄2 deg
depth or 11⁄2 deg
flange or stem
sum of both flange lengths
A
Permitted variations in ends out-of-square are determined on
the longer members of the shape.
51
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
TABLE A1.21
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN STRAIGHTNESS FOR S, M, C, MC, L, T, Z, AND BULB ANGLE SHAPES
Variable
Nominal Size,A mm
Camber
under 75
75 and over
all
Sweep
A
Permitted Variation, mm
4 ⴛ number of metres of total length
2 ⴛ number of metres of total length
Due to the extreme variations in flexibility of these shapes, permitted variations for sweep are subject
to negotiations between the manufacturer and the purchaser for the individual sections involved.
Greatest cross-sectional dimension.
TABLE A1.22
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR W AND HP SHAPES
Permitted Variations From Specified Length for Lengths Given in
Metres, mmA,B
9 and Under
W Shapes
Beams 610 mm and under in nominal depth
Beams over 610 mm in nominal depth and all columns
Over
10
13
Over 9
Under
10
13
Over
Under
10 plus 1 for each additional 1 m or fraction thereof
13 plus 1 for each additional 1 m or fraction thereof
10
13
A
For HP shapes or W shapes specified in the order for use as bearing piles, the permitted variations in length are plus 125 and minus 0
mm. These permitted variations in length also apply to sheet piles
B
The permitted variations in end out-of-square for W and HP shapes shall be 0.016 mm per milimetre of depth, or per milimetre of flange
width if the flang width is larger than the depth. The permitted variations shall be rounded to the nearest millimetre after calculation.
52
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
TABLE A1.23
PERMITTED VARIATIONS FOR LENGTH AND END OUT-OF-SQUARE, MILLED SHAPES
Permitted Variations in Length and End Out-of-Square, mmA
Milled Both EndsC
Nominal Depth, mm
150 to 920
Length
Length,Bm
2 to 21
Milled One EndC
Over
Under
End Outof-Square
1
1
1
Over
Under
End Out-ofSquare (for
Milled End)
6
6
1
Length
A
The permitted variations in length and end out-of-square are additive.
Length is measured along center line of web. Measurements are made with the steel and tape at the same temperature.
C
End out-of-square is measured by (a) squaring from the center line of the web and (b) squaring from the center line of the flange. The
measured variation from true squareness in either plane shall not exceed the total tabular amount.
B
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
TABLE A1.24
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN STRAIGHTNESS FOR W AND HP SHAPES
Permitted Variation in Straightness, mm
1 ⴛ number of metres of total lengthA
Camber and sweep
When certain sectionsB with a flange width approximately equal to
depth are specified in the order for use as columns:
Lengths of 14 mm and under
Lengths over 14 m
1 ⴛ number of metres of total length, but not over 10
10 + [1 ⴛ (number of metres of total length − 14 m)]
Sections with a flange width less than 150 mm, permitted variation for sweep p 2 mm ⴛ number of metres of total length.
Applies only to:
200-mm deep sections — 46.1 kg/m and heavier,
250-mm deep sections — 73 kg/m and heavier,
310-mm deep sections — 97 kg/m and heavier, and
360-mm deep sections — 116 kg/m and heavier.
For other sections specified in the order for use as columns, the permitted variation is subject to negotiation with the manufacturer.
A
B
53
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
TABLE A1.25
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN DIMENSIONS FOR
SPLIT TEES AND SPLIT ANGLES (L SHAPES)A
Specified Depth, mm
Permitted
Variation over or
under Specified
Depth,B mm
To 150, excl (beams and channels)
150 to 410, excl (beams and channels)
410 to 510, excl (beams and channels)
510 to 610, excl (beams)
610 and over (beams)
3
5
6
8
10
A
The permitted variations in length for split tees or angles are
the same as those applicable to the section from which the tees or
angles are split.
B
The above permitted variations in depth of tees or angles
include the permitted variations in depth for the beams or channels
before splitting. Permitted variations in dimensions and
straightness, as set up for the beams or channels from which these
tees or angles are cut, apply, except
straightness p 2 mm ⴛ length in metres
TABLE A1.26
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR SQUARE-EDGE AND ROUND-EDGE FLAT BARS
Permitted Variations Over or Under Specified Thickness, for Thicknesses Given in
milimetres, mm
Permitted Variations
from Specified
Width, mm
Specified Widths,
mm
Over 5 to 6,
incl
Over 6 to 12,
incl
Over 12 to 25,
incl
Over 25 to 50,
incl
Over
50 to 75
Over 75
Over
Under
To 25, incl
Over 25 to 50, incl
Over 50 to 100, incl
Over 100 to 150, incl
Over 150 to 200, incl
0.18
0.18
0.20
0.25
0.20
0.30
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.25
0.40
0.50
0.50
0.65
...
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
...
...
1.2
1.2
1.2
...
...
1.2
1.2
1.6
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.5
3.0
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
A
Note 1 — Where “. . .” appears in this table there is no requirement.
A
Flats over 150 to 200 mm, incl, in width are not available as hot-rolled bars in thickness 6 mm and under.
54
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE A1.27
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL
DIMENSIONS FOR ROUND AND SQUARE BARS AND
ROUND-CORNERED SQUARES
Permitted
Variation Over
or Under
Specified Size
Permitted Outof-Round
or Out-ofSquare
SectionA
Specified Sizes, mm
mm
%
mm
%
Up to 7.0, incl
Over 7.0 to 11.0, incl
Over 11.0 to 15.0, incl
Over 15.0 to 19.0, incl
Over 19.0 to 250, incl
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.20
...
...
...
...
...
1B
0.20
0.22
0.27
0.30
...
...
...
...
...
11⁄2B
Note 1 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no
requirement.
A
Out-of-round is the difference between the maximum and minimum diameters of the bar, measured at the same transverse cross
section. Out-of-square section is the difference in perpendicular distance between opposite faces, measured at the same transverse
cross section.
B
The permitted variation shall be rounded to the nearest tenth
of a millimetre after calculation.
TABLE A1.28
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN SECTIONAL
DIMENSIONS FOR HEXAGONS
Specified Sizes Between
Opposite Sides, mm
To 13 incl
Over 13 to
Over 25 to
Over 40 to
Over 50 to
Over 65 to
25
40
50
65
80
incl
incl
incl
incl
incl
Permitted
Variations from
Specified
Size, mm
Over
Under
0.18
0.25
0.55
0.8
1.2
1.6
0.18
0.25
0.35
0.40
0.40
1.6
Out-ofHexagon
Section,
mmA
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.2
A
Out-of-hexagon section is the greatest difference in distance
between any two opposite faces measured at the same transverse
cross section.
TABLE A1.29
PERMITTED VARIATIONS IN STRAIGHTNESS FOR
BARS
Maximum Permitted Variation in Straightness, mmA
6 mm in any 1500 mm, or (length in millimetres/250)B
A
Permitted variations in straightness do not apply to hot-rolled
bars if any subsequent heating operation has been performed.
B
Round to the nearest whole millimetre.
55
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE A1.30
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR HOT-CUT STEEL BARSA
Permitted Variations Over Specified Lengths
Given in Metres, mm (No Variation Under)
Specified Sizes of Flats, mm
Specified Sizes of Rounds,
Squares, and Hexagons, mm
To 25, incl
Over 25 to 50, incl
Over 50 to 125, incl
Over 125 to 250, incl
Bar size sections
Thickness
Width
1.5 to
3, excl
3 to
6, excl
6 to
9, excl
9 to
12, excl
12 to
18, incl
to 25, incl
over 25
to 25, incl
over 25
...
over 6 to 25, incl
over 25 to 75, incl
...
to 75, incl
to 75, incl
over 75 to 150, incl
over 75 to 150, incl
...
over 150 to 200, incl
over 150 to 200, incl
...
15
15
15
25
50
20
30
15
20
25
25
40
65
30
45
25
35
40
40
45
70
45
50
40
45
50
50
60
75
90
90
50
60
65
65
70
85
100
100
65
B
40
65
45
70
60
75
70
85
Hot Sawing
50 to 125, incl
Over 125 to 250, incl
25 and over
...
75 and over
...
B
Note 1 — Where “. . .” appears in this table, there is no requirement.
A
B
For flats over 150 to 200 mm, incl, in width and over 75 mm in thickness, consult the manufacturer for permitted variations in length.
Smaller sizes and shorter lengths are not commonly hot sawed.
TABLE A1.31
PERMIITTED VARIATIONS IN LENGTH FOR BARS
RECUT BOTH ENDS AFTER STRAIGHTENINGA,B
Permitted Variations
Over Specified Length
Given in Metres, mm
(No Variation Under)
Sizes of Rounds, Squares, Hexagons,
Widths of Flats and Maximum
Dimensions of Other Sections, mm
to 3.7, incl
over 3.7
To 75, incl
Over 75 to 150, incl
Over 150 to 200, incl
Rounds over 200 to 250, incl
6
8
11
14
8
11
14
18
A
For flats over 150 to 200 mm, incl, in width, and over 75 mm
in thickness, consult the manufacturer or the processor for permitted variations in length.
B
Permitted variations are sometimes required all over or all
under the specified length, in which case the sum of the two permitted variations applies.
56
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
A2. DIMENSIONS OF STANDARD SHAPE
PROFILES
A2.1 Listed herein are dimensions and weight [mass]
of some standard shape profiles. The values stated in
inch-pound units are independent of the values stated in
SI units, and the values from the two systems are not to
be combined in any way. Unless the order specifies the
applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the
material shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
57
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
Area A,
in.2
98.7
85.8
77.2
67.9
174.4
147.8
126.7
117
109.4
107
97.5
95.3
87.4
81.3
73.3
63.3
58.4
W44 ⴛ 335
ⴛ 290
ⴛ 262
ⴛ 230
W40 ⴛ 593
ⴛ 503
ⴛ 431
ⴛ 397
ⴛ372
ⴛ 362
ⴛ 331
ⴛ324
ⴛ297
ⴛ 277
ⴛ 249
ⴛ 215
ⴛ 199
58
Not for Resale
42.99
42.05
41.26
40.95
40.63
40.55
40.79
40.16
39.84
39.69
39.38
38.98
38.67
44.02
43.62
43.31
42.91
Depth d,
in.
16.690
16.417
16.220
16.12
16.063
16.02
12.165
15.91
15.825
15.830
15.750
15.750
15.750
15.945
15.827
15.748
15.748
Width bf,
in.
3.230
2.756
2.362
2.20
2.047
2.01
2.126
1.81
1.650
1.575
1.420
1.220
1.065
1.772
1.575
1.417
1.220
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
d
X
1.790
1.535
1.339
1.22
1.161
1.12
1.220
1.00
0.930
0.830
0.750
0.650
0.650
1.024
0.866
0.787
0.709
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
tf
tw
X
W1000 ⴛ 883
X 748
ⴛ 642
ⴛ 591
ⴛ 554
ⴛ 539
ⴛ 494
ⴛ483
ⴛ 443
ⴛ 412
ⴛ 371
ⴛ 321
ⴛ 296
W1100 X 499
X 433
X 390
X 343
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
bf
Y
Y
TABLE A2.1
“W” SHAPES
112 517
95 345
81 765
75 300
70 581
68 700
62 913
61 500
56 387
52 470
47 271
40 849
37 699
63 521
55 119
49 703
43 647
Area A,
mm2
1 092
1 068
1 048
1 040
1 032
1 030
1 036
1 020
1 012
1 008
1 000
990
982
1 118
1 108
1 100
1 090
Depth d,
mm
424
417
412
409
408
407
309
404
402
402
400
400
400
405
402
400
400
Width bf,
mm
82.0
70.0
60.0
55.9
52.0
51.1
54.0
46.0
41.9
40.0
36.1
31.0
27.1
45.0
40.0
36.0
31.0
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
45.5
39.0
34.0
31.0
29.5
28.4
31.0
25.4
23.6
21.1
19.0
16.5
16.5
26.0
22.0
20.0
18.0
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
Area A,
in.2
115.3
95.9
81.9
77.6
68.9
62.0
53.7
49.1
43.8
234.6
191.0
154.7
129.0
115.6
105.4
96.4
88.3
82.4
76.5
75.4
72.1
68.1
67.6
61.8
57.0
53.6
44.2
47.0
44.2
39.7
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
W40 ⴛ 392
ⴛ 327
ⴛ 278
ⴛ 264
ⴛ 235
ⴛ 211
ⴛ 183
ⴛ 167
ⴛ 149
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
W36 ⴛ 798
ⴛ 650
ⴛ 527
ⴛ 439
ⴛ 393
ⴛ 359
ⴛ 328
ⴛ 300
ⴛ 280
ⴛ 260
ⴛ 256
ⴛ 245
ⴛ 232
ⴛ 230
W36 ⴛ 210
ⴛ 194
ⴛ 182
ⴛ 170
ⴛ 160
ⴛ 150
ⴛ 135
59
Not for Resale
36.69
36.49
36.33
35.85
36.01
35.85
35.55
41.97
40.47
39.21
38.26
37.80
37.40
37.09
36.74
36.52
36.26
37.43
36.08
37.12
35.90
41.57
40.79
40.16
40.00
39.69
39.37
38.98
38.59
38.20
Depth d,
in.
12.180
12.15
12.075
11.975
12.000
11.975
11.950
17.990
17.575
17.220
16.965
16.830
16.730
16.630
16.655
16.595
16.550
12.215
16.510
12.120
16.470
12.362
12.13
11.969
11.930
11.890
11.810
11.810
11.810
11.810
1.360
1.260
1.180
0.940
1.020
0.940
0.790
4.290
3.540
2.910
2.440
2.200
2.010
1.850
1.680
1.570
1.440
1.730
1.350
1.570
1.260
2.520
2.13
1.811
1.730
1.575
1.415
1.200
1.025
1.830
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
Width bf,
in.
0.830
0.765
0.725
0.625
0.650
0.625
0.600
2.380
1.970
1.610
1.360
1.220
1.120
1.020
0.945
0.885
0.840
0.960
0.800
0.870
0.760
1.417
1.18
1.024
0.960
0.830
0.750
0.650
0.650
0.630
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
W920 ⴛ 313
ⴛ 289
ⴛ 271
ⴛ 253
ⴛ 238
ⴛ 223
ⴛ 201
W920 ⴛ 1188
ⴛ967
ⴛ 784
ⴛ653
ⴛ 585
ⴛ 534
ⴛ 488
ⴛ 446
ⴛ 417
ⴛ 387
ⴛ 381
ⴛ 365
ⴛ345
ⴛ 342
W1000 ⴛ 584
ⴛ 486
ⴛ 415
ⴛ393
ⴛ 350
ⴛ 314
ⴛ 272
ⴛ 249
ⴛ 222
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
TABLE A2.1
“W” SHAPES (CONT’D)
39 900
36 800
34 600
32 300
30 300
28 500
25 600
151 347
123 210
99 835
83 195
71 559
68 004
62 165
57 000
53 200
49 400
48 600
46 500
44 000
43 600
74 373
61 900
52 869
50 100
44 600
40 000
34 647
31 675
28 232
Area A,
mm2
932
927
923
919
915
911
903
1 066
1 028
996
972
960
950
942
933
928
921
951
916
943
912
1 056
1 036
1 020
1 016
1 008
1 000
990
980
970
Depth d,
mm
309
308
307
306
305
304
304
457
446
437
431
427
425
422
423
422
420
310
419
308
418
314
308
304
303
302
300
300
300
300
Width
bf,mm
34.5
32.0
30.0
27.9
25.9
23.9
20.1
109.0
89.9
73.9
62.0
55.9
51.1
47.0
42.7
39.9
36.6
43.3
34.3
39.9
32.0
64.0
54.1
46.0
43.9
40.0
35.9
31.0
26.0
21.1
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
21.1
19.4
18.4
17.3
16.5
15.9
15.2
60.5
50.0
40.9
34.5
31.0
28.4
25.9
24.0
22.5
21.3
24.4
20.3
22.1
19.3
36.0
30.0
26.0
24.4
21.1
19.1
16.5
16.5
16.0
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Area A,
in.2
114
104.1
93.5
85.6
77.4
70.9
65.0
59.1
49.5
44.7
41.6
38.3
34.7
115.0
104.8
95.7
85.7
76.7
69.0
62.0
56.1
50.8
43.5
38.9
36.5
34.2
31.7
29.1
26.4
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
W33 ⴛ 387
ⴛ 354
ⴛ 318
ⴛ 291
ⴛ 263
ⴛ 241
ⴛ 221
ⴛ 201
ⴛ 169
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
W33 ⴛ 152
ⴛ 141
ⴛ 130
ⴛ 118
W30 ⴛ 391
ⴛ 357
ⴛ 326
ⴛ 292
ⴛ 261
ⴛ 235
ⴛ 211
ⴛ 191
ⴛ 173
ⴛ 148
W30 ⴛ 132
ⴛ 124
ⴛ 116
ⴛ 108
ⴛ 99
ⴛ 90
60
Not for Resale
30.31
30.17
30.01
29.83
29.65
29.53
33.19
32.80
32.40
32.01
31.61
31.30
30.94
30.68
30.44
30.67
33.49
33.30
33.09
32.86
35.95
35.55
35.16
34.84
34.53
34.18
33.93
33.68
33.82
Depth d,
in.
10.545
10.515
10.495
10.475
10.450
10.400
15.590
15.470
15.370
15.255
15.155
15.055
15.105
15.040
14.985
10.480
11.565
11.535
11.510
11.480
16.20
16.100
15.985
15.905
15.805
15.860
15.805
15.745
11.500
1.000
0.930
0.850
0.760
0.670
0.610
2.440
2.240
2.050
1.850
1.650
1.500
1.315
1.185
1.065
1.180
1.055
0.960
0.855
0.740
2.28
2.090
1.890
1.730
1.570
1.400
1.275
1.150
1.220
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
Width bf,
in.
0.615
0.585
0.565
0.545
0.520
0.470
1.360
1.240
1.140
1.020
0.930
0.830
0.755
0.710
0.655
0.650
0.635
0.605
0.580
0.550
1.26
1.160
1.040
0.960
0.870
0.830
0.775
0.715
0.670
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
W760 ⴛ 196
ⴛ 185
ⴛ 173
ⴛ 161
ⴛ 147
ⴛ 134
W760 ⴛ 582
ⴛ 531
ⴛ 484
ⴛ 434
ⴛ 389
ⴛ 350
ⴛ 314
ⴛ 284
ⴛ 257
ⴛ 220
W840 ⴛ 226
ⴛ 210
ⴛ 193
ⴛ 176
W840 ⴛ 576
ⴛ 527
ⴛ 473
ⴛ 433
ⴛ 392
ⴛ 359
ⴛ 329
ⴛ 299
ⴛ 251
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
TABLE A2.1
“W” SHAPES (CONT’D)
25 100
23 500
22 100
20 500
18 800
17 041
74 171
67 617
61 718
55 293
49 499
44 541
40 000
36 200
32 800
28 100
28 800
26 800
24 700
22 400
73 500
67 173
60 316
55 218
49 915
45 700
41 900
38 100
31 900
Area A,
mm2
770
766
762
758
753
750
843
833
823
813
803
795
786
779
773
779
851
846
840
835
913
903
893
885
877
868
862
855
859
Depth d,
mm
268
267
267
266
265
264
396
393
390
387
385
382
384
382
381
266
294
293
292
292
411
409
406
404
401
403
401
400
292
Width
bf,mm
25.4
23.6
21.6
19.3
17.0
15.5
62.0
56.9
52.1
47.0
41.9
38.1
33.4
30.1
27.1
30.0
26.8
24.4
21.7
18.8
57.9
53.1
48.0
43.9
39.9
35.6
32.4
29.2
31.0
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
15.6
14.9
14.4
13.8
13.2
11.9
34.5
31.5
29.0
25.9
23.6
21.1
19.7
18.0
16.6
16.5
16.1
15.4
14.7
14.0
32.0
29.5
26.4
24.4
22.1
21.1
19.7
18.2
17.0
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
Area A,
in.2
158.4
108.1
98.7
90.2
82.6
75.7
69.1
57.0
52.3
47.4
42.9
63.8
37.8
33.5
30.0
27.7
24.8
108
98.4
89.8
82.0
73.5
67.2
60.7
56.3
51.7
47.7
43.0
38.5
34.4
30.6
30.3
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
W27 ⴛ 539
ⴛ 368
ⴛ 336
ⴛ 307
ⴛ 281
ⴛ 258
ⴛ 235
ⴛ 194
ⴛ 178
ⴛ 161
ⴛ 146
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
W27 ⴛ 217
ⴛ129
W27 ⴛ 114
ⴛ 102
ⴛ 94
ⴛ 84
W24 ⴛ 370
ⴛ 335
ⴛ 306
ⴛ 279
ⴛ 250
ⴛ 229
ⴛ 207
ⴛ 192
ⴛ 176
ⴛ 162
ⴛ 146
ⴛ 131
ⴛ 117
ⴛ 104
ⴛ 103
61
Not for Resale
27.99
27.52
27.13
26.73
26.34
26.02
25.71
25.47
25.24
25.00
24.74
24.48
24.26
24.06
24.53
27.29
27.09
26.92
26.71
28.43
27.63
32.52
30.39
30.00
29.61
29.29
28.98
28.66
28.11
27.81
27.59
27.38
Depth d,
in.
13.66
13.520
13.405
13.305
13.185
13.110
13.010
12.950
12.890
12.955
12.900
12.855
12.800
12.750
9.000
10.070
10.015
9.990
9.960
14.115
10.010
15.255
14.665
14.55
14.445
14.35
14.270
14.190
14.035
14.085
14.020
13.965
2.72
2.480
2.28
2.090
1.890
1.730
1.570
1.460
1.340
1.220
1.090
0.960
0.850
0.750
0.980
0.930
0.830
0.745
0.640
1.500
1.100
3.540
2.480
2.28
2.090
1.93
1.770
1.610
1.340
1.190
1.080
0.975
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
Width bf,
in.
1.52
1.380
1.26
1.160
1.040
0.960
0.870
0.810
0.750
0.705
0.650
0.605
0.550
0.500
0.550
0.570
0.515
0.490
0.460
0.830
0.610
1.970
1.380
1.26
1.160
1.06
0.980
0.910
0.750
0.725
0.660
0.605
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
W610 ⴛ 551
ⴛ 498
ⴛ 455
ⴛ 415
ⴛ 372
ⴛ 341
ⴛ 307
ⴛ 285
ⴛ 262
ⴛ 241
ⴛ 217
ⴛ 195
ⴛ 174
ⴛ 155
W610 ⴛ 153
W690 ⴛ 170
ⴛ 152
ⴛ 140
ⴛ 125
W690 ⴛ 323
ⴛ 192
W690 ⴛ 802
ⴛ 548
ⴛ 500
ⴛ457
ⴛ 419
ⴛ 384
ⴛ 350
ⴛ 289
ⴛ 265
ⴛ 240
ⴛ 217
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
TABLE A2.1
“W” SHAPES (CONT’D)
70 211
63 495
57 859
52 902
47 437
43 383
39 169
36 125
33 348
30 800
27 700
24 800
22 200
19 700
19 600
21 600
19 400
17 900
16 000
41 100
24 400
102 208
69 762
63 700
58 180
53 300
48 869
44 608
36 765
33 700
30 600
27 700
Area A,
mm2
711
699
689
679
669
661
653
647
641
635
628
622
616
611
623
693
688
684
678
722
702
826
772
762
752
744
736
728
714
706
701
695
Depth d,
mm
347
343
340
338
335
333
330
329
327
329
328
327
325
324
229
256
254
254
253
359
254
387
372
369
367
364
362
360
356
358
356
355
Width
bf,mm
69.1
63.0
57.9
53.1
48.0
43.9
39.9
37.1
34.0
31.0
27.7
24.4
21.6
19.0
24.9
23.6
21.1
18.9
16.3
38.1
27.9
89.9
63.0
57.9
53.1
49.0
45.0
40.9
34.0
30.2
27.4
24.8
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
38.6
35.1
32.0
29.5
26.4
24.4
22.1
20.6
19.0
17.1
16.5
15.4
14.0
12.7
14.0
14.5
13.1
12.4
11.7
21.1
15.5
50.0
35.1
32.0
29.5
26.9
24.9
23.1
19.0
18.4
16.8
15.4
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Area A,
in.2
27.7
24.7
22.4
20.1
18.2
16.2
59.2
53.7
48.9
43.2
38.8
35.9
32.7
29.8
27.3
24.3
21.5
20.0
18.3
16.2
14.1
16.7
14.7
13.0
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
W24 ⴛ 94
ⴛ 84
ⴛ 76
ⴛ 68
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
W24 ⴛ 62
ⴛ 55
W21 ⴛ 201
ⴛ 182
ⴛ 166
ⴛ 147
ⴛ 132
ⴛ 122
ⴛ 111
ⴛ 101
W21 ⴛ 93
ⴛ 83
ⴛ 73
ⴛ 68
ⴛ 62
ⴛ 55
ⴛ 48
W21 ⴛ 57
ⴛ 50
ⴛ 44
Not for Resale
21.06
20.83
20.66
21.62
21.43
21.24
21.13
20.99
20.80
20.62
23.03
22.72
22.48
22.06
21.83
21.68
21.51
21.36
23.74
23.57
24.31
24.10
23.92
23.73
Depth d,
in.
6.555
6.530
6.500
8.420
8.355
8.295
8.270
8.240
8.220
8.140
12.575
12.500
12.420
12.510
12.440
12.390
12.340
12.290
7.040
7.005
9.065
9.020
8.990
8.965
0.650
0.535
0.450
0.930
0.835
0.740
0.685
0.615
0.522
0.430
1.630
1.480
1.360
1.150
1.035
0.960
0.875
0.800
0.590
0.505
0.875
0.770
0.680
0.585
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
Width bf,
in.
0.405
0.380
0.350
0.580
0.515
0.455
0.430
0.400
0.375
0.350
0.910
0.830
0.750
0.720
0.650
0.600
0.550
0.500
0.430
0.395
0.515
0.470
0.440
0.415
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
17 600
15 700
13 900
12 900
11 800
10 500
9 180
10 800
9 480
8 390
W530 ⴛ 85
ⴛ 74
ⴛ 66
38 222
34 620
31 524
27 900
25 000
23 200
21 100
19 200
11 700
10 500
17 900
15 900
14 500
13 000
Area A,
mm2
W530 ⴛ 138
ⴛ 123
ⴛ 109
ⴛ 101
ⴛ 92
ⴛ 82
ⴛ 72
ⴛ 300
ⴛ 272
ⴛ 248
ⴛ 219
ⴛ 196
ⴛ 182
ⴛ 165
ⴛ 150
W610 ⴛ 92
ⴛ 82
W610 ⴛ 140
ⴛ 125
ⴛ 113
ⴛ 101
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
TABLE A2.1
“W” SHAPES (CONT’D)
535
529
525
549
544
539
537
533
528
524
585
577
571
560
554
551
546
543
603
599
617
612
608
603
Depth d,
mm
166
166
165
214
212
211
210
209
209
207
319
317
315
318
316
315
313
312
179
178
230
229
228
228
Width
bf,mm
16.5
13.6
11.4
23.6
21.2
18.8
17.4
15.6
13.3
10.9
41.4
37.6
34.5
29.2
26.3
24.4
22.2
20.3
15.0
12.8
22.2
19.6
17.3
14.9
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
10.3
9.7
8.9
14.7
13.1
11.6
10.9
10.2
9.00
9.00
23.1
21.1
19.0
18.3
16.5
15.2
14.0
12.7
10.9
10.0
13.1
11.9
11.2
10.5
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
62
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
63
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Not for Resale
16.8
14.7
13.3
11.8
10.6
W16 ⴛ 57
ⴛ 50
ⴛ 45
ⴛ 40
ⴛ 36
9.12
7.68
29.4
26.2
22.6
19.7
W16 ⴛ 100
ⴛ 89
ⴛ 77
ⴛ 67
W16 ⴛ 31
ⴛ 26
13.5
11.8
10.3
51.3
46.3
42.1
38.2
35.1
31.1
28.5
25.3
22.3
20.8
19.1
17.6
16.2
14.7
W18 ⴛ 175
ⴛ 158
ⴛ 143
ⴛ 130
ⴛ 119
ⴛ 106
ⴛ 97
ⴛ 86
ⴛ 76
ⴛ 71
ⴛ 65
ⴛ 60
ⴛ 55
ⴛ 50
W18 ⴛ 46
ⴛ 40
ⴛ 35
Area A,
in.2
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
15.88
15.69
16.43
16.26
16.13
16.01
15.86
16.97
16.75
16.52
16.33
18.06
17.90
17.70
20.04
19.72
19.49
19.25
18.97
18.73
18.59
18.39
18.21
18.47
18.35
18.24
18.11
17.99
Depth d,
in.
5.525
5.500
7.120
7.070
7.035
6.995
6.985
10.425
10.365
10.295
10.235
6.060
6.015
6.000
11.375
11.300
11.220
11.160
11.265
11.200
11.145
11.090
11.035
7.635
7.590
7.555
7.530
7.495
0.440
0.345
0.715
0.630
0.565
0.505
0.430
0.985
0.875
0.760
0.665
0.605
0.525
0.425
1.590
1.440
1.320
1.200
1.060
0.940
0.870
0.770
0.680
0.810
0.750
0.695
0.630
0.570
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
Width bf,
in.
0.275
0.250
0.430
0.380
0.345
0.305
0.295
0.585
0.525
0.455
0.395
0.360
0.315
0.300
0.890
0.810
0.730
0.670
0.655
0.590
0.535
0.480
0.425
0.495
0.450
0.415
0.390
0.355
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
10 800
9 480
8 580
7 610
6 840
5 880
4 950
W410 ⴛ 46.1
ⴛ 38.8
19 000
16 900
14 600
12 700
8 710
7 610
6 650
33 120
29 899
27 148
24 666
22 600
20 100
18 400
16 300
14 400
13 400
12 300
11 400
10 500
9 480
Area A,
mm2
W410 ⴛ 85
ⴛ 75
ⴛ 67
ⴛ 60
ⴛ 53
W410 ⴛ 149
ⴛ 132
ⴛ 114
ⴛ 100
W460 ⴛ 68
ⴛ 60
ⴛ 52
W460 ⴛ 260
ⴛ 235
ⴛ 213
ⴛ193
ⴛ 177
ⴛ 158
ⴛ 144
ⴛ 128
ⴛ 113
ⴛ106
ⴛ 97
ⴛ 89
ⴛ 82
ⴛ 74
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
TABLE A2.1
“W” SHAPES (CONT’D)
403
399
417
413
410
407
403
431
425
420
415
459
455
450
509
501
495
489
482
476
472
467
463
469
466
463
460
457
Depth d,
mm
140
140
181
180
179
178
177
265
263
261
260
154
153
152
289
287
285
283
286
284
283
282
280
194
193
192
191
190
Width
bf,mm
11.2
8.8
18.2
16.0
14.4
12.8
10.9
25.0
22.2
19.3
16.9
15.4
13.3
10.8
40.4
36.6
33.5
30.5
26.9
23.9
22.1
19.6
17.3
20.6
19.0
17.7
16.0
14.5
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
7.0
6.4
10.9
9.7
8.8
7.7
7.5
14.9
13.3
11.6
10.0
9.1
8.0
7.6
22.6
20.6
18.5
17.0
16.6
15.0
13.6
12.2
10.8
12.6
11.4
10.5
9.9
9.0
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Area A,
in.2
237.4
215.0
196.0
178.0
162.0
147.0
134.0
125.0
117.0
109.0
101.0
91.4
83.3
75.6
68.5
62.0
56.8
51.8
46.7
42.7
38.8
35.3
32.0
29.1
26.5
24.1
21.8
20.0
17.9
15.6
14.1
12.6
11.2
10.0
8.85
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
W14 ⴛ 808
ⴛ 730
ⴛ 665
ⴛ 605
ⴛ 550
ⴛ 500
ⴛ 455
ⴛ 426
ⴛ 398
ⴛ 370
ⴛ 342
ⴛ 311
ⴛ 283
ⴛ 257
ⴛ 233
ⴛ 211
ⴛ 193
ⴛ 176
ⴛ 159
ⴛ 145
W14ⴛ ⴛ 132
ⴛ 120
ⴛ 109
ⴛ 99
ⴛ 90
ⴛ 82
ⴛ 74
ⴛ 68
ⴛ 61
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
W14 ⴛ 53
ⴛ 48
ⴛ 43
64
Not for Resale
W14 ⴛ 38
ⴛ 34
ⴛ 30
14.10
13.98
13.84
13.92
13.79
13.66
14.66
14.48
14.32
14.16
14.02
14.31
14.17
14.04
13.89
22.84
22.42
21.64
20.92
20.24
19.60
19.02
18.67
18.29
17.92
17.54
17.12
16.74
16.38
16.04
15.72
15.48
15.22
14.98
14.78
Depth d,
in.
6.770
6.745
6.730
8.060
8.030
7.995
14.725
14.670
14.605
14.565
14.520
10.130
10.070
10.035
9.995
18.560
17.890
17.650
17.415
17.200
17.010
16.835
16.695
16.590
16.475
16.360
16.230
16.110
15.995
15.890
15.800
15.710
15.650
15.565
15.500
Width bf,
in.
0.515
0.455
0.385
0.660
0.595
0.530
1.030
0.940
0.860
0.780
0.710
0.855
0.785
0.720
0.645
5.120
4.910
4.520
4.160
3.820
3.500
3.210
3.035
2.845
2.660
2.470
2.260
2.070
1.890
1.720
1.560
1.440
1.310
1.190
1.090
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
0.310
0.285
0.270
0.370
0.340
0.305
0.645
0.590
0.525
0.485
0.440
0.510
0.450
0.415
0.375
3.740
3.070
2.830
2.595
2.380
2.190
2.015
1.875
1.770
1.655
1.540
1.410
1.290
1.175
1.070
0.980
0.890
0.830
0.745
0.680
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
W360ⴛ 57.8
ⴛ 51
ⴛ 44
W360 ⴛ 79
ⴛ 72
ⴛ 64
W360 ⴛ 196
ⴛ 179
ⴛ 162
ⴛ 147
ⴛ 134
ⴛ 122
ⴛ 110
ⴛ 101
ⴛ 91
W360 ⴛ 1202
ⴛ 1086
ⴛ 990
ⴛ 900
ⴛ 818
ⴛ 744
ⴛ 677
ⴛ 634
ⴛ 592
ⴛ 551
ⴛ 509
ⴛ 463
ⴛ 421
ⴛ 382
ⴛ 347
ⴛ 314
ⴛ 287
ⴛ 262
ⴛ 237
ⴛ 216
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
TABLE A2.1
“W” SHAPES (CONT’D)
7 230
6 450
5 710
10 100
9 100
8 130
25 000
22 800
20 600
18 800
17 100
15 500
14 100
12 900
11 500
153 000
139 000
126 000
115 000
105 000
94 800
86 500
80 600
75 500
70 300
65 200
59 000
53 700
48 800
44 200
40 000
36 600
33 400
30 100
27 500
Area A,
mm2
358
355
352
354
350
347
372
368
364
360
356
363
360
357
353
580
569
550
531
514
498
483
474
465
455
446
435
425
416
407
399
393
387
380
375
Depth d,
mm
172
171
171
205
204
203
374
373
371
370
369
257
256
255
254
471
454
448
442
437
432
428
424
421
418
416
412
409
406
404
401
399
398
395
394
Width
bf,mm
13.1
11.6
9.8
16.8
15.1
13.5
26.2
23.9
21.8
19.8
18.0
21.7
19.9
18.3
16.4
130.0
125.0
115.0
106.0
97.0
88.9
81.5
77.1
72.3
67.6
62.7
57.4
52.6
48.0
43.7
39.6
36.6
33.3
30.2
27.7
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
7.9
7.2
6.9
9.4
8.6
7.7
16.4
15.0
13.3
12.3
11.2
13.0
11.4
10.5
9.5
95.0
78.0
71.9
65.9
60.5
55.6
51.2
47.6
45.0
42.0
39.1
35.8
32.8
29.8
27.2
24.9
22.6
21.1
18.9
17.3
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
98.8
89.6
81.9
74.1
67.7
61.8
55.8
50.0
44.7
39.9
35.3
31.2
28.2
25.6
23.2
21.1
19.1
17.0
15.6
14.7
13.2
11.8
10.3
8.79
7.65
6.48
5.57
4.71
4.16
W12 ⴛ 58
ⴛ 53
W12 ⴛ 50
ⴛ 45
ⴛ 40
W12 ⴛ 35
ⴛ 30
ⴛ 26
W12 ⴛ 22
ⴛ 19
ⴛ 16
ⴛ 14
7.69
6.49
Area A,
in.2
W12 ⴛ 336
ⴛ 305
ⴛ 279
ⴛ 252
ⴛ 230
ⴛ 210
ⴛ 190
ⴛ 170
ⴛ 152
ⴛ 136
ⴛ 120
ⴛ 106
ⴛ 96
ⴛ 87
ⴛ 79
ⴛ 72
ⴛ 65
W14 ⴛ 26
ⴛ 22
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
65
Not for Resale
12.31
12.16
11.99
11.91
12.50
12.34
12.22
12.19
12.06
11.94
12.19
12.06
16.82
16.32
15.85
15.41
15.05
14.71
14.38
14.03
13.71
13.41
13.12
12.89
12.71
12.53
12.38
12.25
12.12
13.91
13.74
Depth d,
in.
4.030
4.005
3.990
3.970
6.560
6.520
6.490
8.080
8.045
8.005
10.010
9.995
13.385
13.235
13.140
13.005
12.895
12.790
12.670
12.570
12.480
12.400
12.320
12.220
12.160
12.125
12.080
12.040
12.000
5.025
5.000
0.425
0.350
0.265
0.225
0.520
0.440
0.380
0.640
0.575
0.515
0.640
0.575
2.955
2.705
2.470
2.250
2.070
1.900
1.735
1.560
1.400
1.250
1.105
0.990
0.900
0.810
0.735
0.670
0.605
0.420
0.335
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
Width bf,
in.
0.260
0.235
0.220
0.200
0.300
0.260
0.230
0.370
0.335
0.295
0.360
0.345
1.775
1.625
1.530
1.395
1.285
1.180
1.060
0.960
0.870
0.790
0.710
0.610
0.550
0.515
0.470
0.430
0.390
0.255
0.230
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
11 000
10 100
9 480
8 520
7 610
6 650
5 670
4 940
4 180
3 590
3 040
2 680
W310 ⴛ 74
ⴛ 67
ⴛ 60
W310 ⴛ 52
ⴛ 44.5
ⴛ 38.7
W310 ⴛ 32.7
ⴛ 28.3
ⴛ 23.8
ⴛ 21.0
63 700
57 800
52 800
47 800
43 700
39 900
36 000
32 300
28 800
25 700
22 800
20 100
18 200
16 500
15 000
13 600
12 300
4 960
4 190
Area A,
mm2
W310 ⴛ 86
ⴛ 79
W310 ⴛ 500
ⴛ 454
ⴛ 415
ⴛ 375
ⴛ 342
ⴛ 313
ⴛ 283
ⴛ 253
ⴛ 226
ⴛ 202
ⴛ 179
ⴛ 158
ⴛ 143
ⴛ 129
ⴛ 117
ⴛ 107
ⴛ 97
W360 ⴛ 39.0
ⴛ 32.9
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
TABLE A2.1
“W” SHAPES (CONT’D)
313
309
305
303
317
313
310
310
306
303
310
306
427
415
403
391
382
374
365
356
348
341
333
327
323
318
314
311
308
353
349
Depth d,
mm
102
102
101
101
167
166
165
205
204
203
254
254
340
336
334
330
328
325
322
319
317
315
313
310
309
308
307
306
305
128
127
Width
bf,mm
10.8
8.9
6.7
5.7
13.2
11.2
9.7
16.3
14.6
13.1
16.3
14.6
75.1
68.7
62.7
57.2
52.6
48.3
44.1
39.6
35.6
31.8
28.1
25.1
22.9
20.6
18.7
17.0
15.4
10.7
8.5
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
6.6
6.0
5.6
5.1
7.6
6.6
5.8
9.4
8.5
7.5
9.1
8.8
45.1
41.3
38.9
35.4
32.6
30.0
26.9
24.4
22.1
20.1
18.0
15.5
14.0
13.1
11.9
10.9
9.9
6.5
5.8
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Area A,
in.2
32.9
29.4
25.9
22.6
20.0
17.6
15.8
14.4
13.3
11.5
9.71
8.84
7.61
6.49
5.62
4.99
4.41
3.54
19.7
17.1
14.1
11.7
10.3
9.13
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
W10 ⴛ 112
ⴛ 100
ⴛ 88
ⴛ 77
ⴛ 68
ⴛ 60
ⴛ 54
ⴛ 49
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
W10 ⴛ 45
ⴛ 39
ⴛ 33
W10 ⴛ 30
ⴛ 26
ⴛ 22
W10 ⴛ 19
ⴛ 17
ⴛ 15
ⴛ 12
W8 ⴛ 67
ⴛ 58
ⴛ 48
ⴛ 40
ⴛ 35
ⴛ 31
66
Not for Resale
9.00
8.75
8.50
8.25
8.12
8.00
10.24
10.11
9.99
9.87
10.47
10.33
10.17
10.10
9.92
9.73
11.36
11.10
10.84
10.60
10.40
10.22
10.09
9.98
Depth d,
in.
8.280
8.220
8.110
8.070
8.020
7.995
4.020
4.010
4.000
3.960
5.810
5.770
5.750
8.020
7.985
7.960
10.415
10.340
10.265
10.190
10.130
10.080
10.030
10.000
0.935
0.810
0.685
0.560
0.495
0.435
0.395
0.330
0.270
0.210
0.510
0.440
0.360
0.620
0.530
0.435
1.250
1.120
0.990
0.870
0.770
0.680
0.615
0.560
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
Width bf,
in.
0.570
0.510
0.400
0.360
0.310
0.285
0.250
0.240
0.230
0.190
0.300
0.260
0.240
0.350
0.315
0.290
0.755
0.680
0.605
0.530
0.470
0.420
0.370
0.340
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
3 630
3 220
2 850
2 280
W250 ⴛ 28.4
ⴛ 25.3
ⴛ 22.3
ⴛ 17.9
12 700
11 000
9 100
7 550
6 650
5 890
5 700
4 910
4 190
W250 ⴛ 44.8
ⴛ 38.5
ⴛ 32.7
W200 ⴛ 100
ⴛ 86
ⴛ 71
ⴛ 59
ⴛ 52
ⴛ 46.1
8 580
7 420
6 260
21 200
19 000
16 700
14 600
12 900
11 400
10 200
9 290
Area A,
mm2
W250 ⴛ 67
ⴛ 58
ⴛ 49.1
W250 ⴛ 167
ⴛ 149
ⴛ 131
ⴛ 115
ⴛ 101
ⴛ 89
ⴛ 80
ⴛ 73
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
TABLE A2.1
“W” SHAPES (CONT’D)
229
222
216
210
206
203
260
257
254
251
266
262
258
257
252
247
289
282
275
269
264
260
256
253
Depth d,
mm
210
209
206
205
204
203
102
102
102
101
148
147
146
204
203
202
265
263
261
259
257
256
255
254
Width
bf,mm
23.7
20.6
17.4
14.2
12.6
11.0
10.0
8.4
6.9
5.3
13.0
11.2
9.1
15.7
13.5
11.0
31.8
28.4
25.1
22.1
19.6
17.3
15.6
14.2
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
13.0
10.2
9.1
7.9
7.2
6.4
6.1
5.8
4.8
7.6
6.6
6.1
8.9
8.0
7.4
19.2
17.3
15.4
13.5
11.9
10.7
9.4
8.6
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
A
67
Not for Resale
6.16
5.26
4.44
3.84
2.96
7.34
5.87
4.43
4.74
3.55
2.68
2.52
5.54
4.68
3.83
W8 ⴛ 21
ⴛ 18
W8 ⴛ 15
ⴛ 13
ⴛ 10
W6 ⴛ 25
ⴛ 20
ⴛ 15
W6 ⴛ 16
ⴛ 12
ⴛ9
ⴛ 8.5
W5 ⴛ 19
ⴛ 16
W4 ⴛ 13
4.16
5.15
5.01
6.28
6.03
5.90
5.83
6.38
6.20
5.99
8.11
7.99
7.89
8.28
8.14
8.06
7.93
Depth d,
in.
4.060
5.030
5.000
4.030
4.000
3.940
3.940
6.080
6.020
5.990
4.015
4.000
3.940
5.270
5.250
6.535
6.495
0.345
0.430
0.360
0.405
0.280
0.215
0.194
0.455
0.365
0.260
0.315
0.255
0.205
0.400
0.330
0.465
0.400
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
Width bf,
in.
0.280
0.270
0.240
0.260
0.230
0.170
0.170
0.320
0.260
0.230
0.245
0.230
0.170
0.250
0.230
0.285
0.245
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
W100 ⴛ 19.3
W130 ⴛ 28.1
ⴛ 23.8
W150 ⴛ 24.0
ⴛ 18.0
ⴛ 13.5
ⴛ 13
W150 ⴛ 37.1
ⴛ 29.8
ⴛ 22.5
W200 ⴛ 22.5
ⴛ 19.3
ⴛ 15.0
W200 ⴛ 31.3
ⴛ 26.6
W200 ⴛ 41.7
ⴛ 35.9
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
2 470
3 590
3 040
3 060
2 290
1 730
1 630
4 740
3 790
2 860
2 860
2 480
1 910
3 970
3 390
5 320
4 570
Area A,
mm2
106
131
127
160
153
150
148
162
157
152
206
203
200
210
207
205
201
Depth d,
mm
Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed.
8.25
7.08
Area A,
in.2
W8 ⴛ 28
ⴛ 24
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
TABLE A2.1
“W” SHAPES (CONT’D)
103
128
127
102
102
100
100
154
153
152
102
102
100
134
133
166
165
Width
bf,mm
8.8
10.9
9.1
10.3
7.1
5.5
4.9
11.6
9.3
6.6
8.0
6.5
5.2
10.2
8.4
11.8
10.2
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
7.1
6.9
6.1
6.6
5.8
4.3
4.3
8.1
6.6
5.8
6.2
5.8
4.3
6.4
5.8
7.2
6.2
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Area A,
in.2
35.6
31.2
29.3
26.5
23.5
28.2
25.3
22.0
19.4
20.6
16.1
14.7
12.6
14.7
12.0
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
S 24 ⴛ 121
ⴛ 106
S 24 ⴛ 100
ⴛ 90
ⴛ 80
S 20 ⴛ 96
ⴛ 86
68
Not for Resale
S 20 ⴛ 75
ⴛ 66
S 18 ⴛ 70
ⴛ 54.7
S 15 ⴛ 50
ⴛ 42.9
S 12 ⴛ 50
ⴛ 40.8
12.00
12.00
15.00
15.00
18.00
18.00
20.00
20.00
20.30
20.30
24.00
24.00
24.00
24.50
24.50
Depth d,
in.
5.477
5.252
5.640
5.501
6.251
6.001
6.385
6.255
7.200
7.060
7.245
7.125
7.000
8.050
7.870
0.659
0.659
0.622
0.622
0.691
0.691
0.795
0.795
0.920
0.920
0.870
0.870
0.870
1.090
1.090
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
Width bf,
in.
X
0.687
0.462
0.550
0.411
0.711
0.461
0.635
0.505
0.800
0.660
0.745
0.625
0.500
0.800
0.620
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
d
tf
tw
X
S 310 ⴛ 74
ⴛ 60.7
S 380 ⴛ 74
ⴛ 64
S 460 ⴛ 104
ⴛ 81.4
S 510 ⴛ 112
ⴛ 98.2
9 480
7 740
9 480
8 130
13 300
10 400
14 200
12 500
18 200
16 300
18 900
17 100
15 200
S 610 ⴛ 149
ⴛ 134
ⴛ 119
S 510 ⴛ 143
ⴛ 128
23 000
20 100
Area A,
mm2
S 610 ⴛ 180
ⴛ 158
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
bf
Y
Y
TABLE A2.2
“S” SHAPES
305
305
381
381
457
457
508
508
516
516
610
610
610
622
622
Depth d,
mm
139
133
143
140
159
152
162
159
183
179
184
181
178
204
200
16.7
16.7
15.8
15.8
17.6
17.6
20.2
20.2
23.4
23.4
22.1
22.1
22.1
27.7
27.7
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
Width bf,
mm
17.4
11.7
14.0
10.4
18.1
11.7
16.1
12.8
20.3
16.8
18.9
15.9
12.7
20.3
15.7
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
69
Not for Resale
2.79
2.26
2.21
1.67
S 4 ⴛ 9.5
ⴛ 7.7
S 3 ⴛ 7.5
ⴛ 5.7
3.00
3.00
4.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
6.00
8.00
8.00
10.00
10.00
12.00
12.00
Depth d,
in.
2.509
2.330
2.796
2.663
3.004
3.565
3.332
4.171
4.001
4.944
4.661
5.078
5.000
0.260
0.260
0.293
0.293
0.326
0.359
0.359
0.425
0.425
0.491
0.491
0.544
0.544
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
Width bf,
in.
0.349
0.170
0.326
0.193
0.214
0.465
0.232
0.441
0.271
0.594
0.311
0.428
0.350
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
1 800
1 450
1 430
1 080
S 75 ⴛ 11.2
ⴛ 8.5
1 880
S 130 ⴛ 15
S 100 ⴛ 14.1
ⴛ 11.5
3 270
2 360
S 150 ⴛ 25.7
ⴛ 18.6
4 370
3 480
6 650
4 810
S 250 ⴛ 52
ⴛ 37.8
S 200 ⴛ 34
ⴛ 27.4
6 650
6 030
Area A,
mm2
S 310 ⴛ 52
ⴛ 47.3
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
76
76
102
102
127
152
152
203
203
254
254
305
305
Depth d,
mm
Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed.
2.94
S 5 ⴛ 10
A
5.07
3.67
S 6 ⴛ 17.25
ⴛ 12.5
10.3
7.46
S 10 ⴛ 35
ⴛ 25.4
6.77
5.41
10.3
9.35
S 12 ⴛ 35
ⴛ 31.8
S 8 ⴛ 23
ⴛ 18.4
Area A,
in.2
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
TABLE A2.2
“S” SHAPES (CONT’D)
64
59
71
68
76
91
85
106
102
126
118
129
127
6.6
6.6
7.4
7.4
8.3
9.1
9.1
10.8
10.8
12.5
12.5
13.8
13.8
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
Width bf,
mm
8.9
4.3
8.3
4.9
5.4
11.8
5.9
11.2
6.9
15.1
7.9
10.9
8.9
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
70
Not for Resale
A
12 ⴛ 11.8
12 ⴛ 10.8
12 ⴛ 10.0
10 ⴛ 9
10 ⴛ 8
10 ⴛ 7.5
8 ⴛ 6.5
8 ⴛ 6.2
6 ⴛ 4.4
6 ⴛ 3.7
5 ⴛ 18.9
4ⴛ6
3.47
3.18
2.94
2.65
2.35
2.21
1.92
1.81
1.29
1.09
5.55
1.78
Area A,
in.2
12.00
11.97
11.97
10.00
9.95
9.99
8.00
8.00
6.00
5.922
5.00
3.80
Depth d,
in.
3.065
3.065
3.250
2.690
2.690
2.688
2.281
2.281
1.844
2.00
5.003
3.80
0.225
0.210
0.180
0.206
0.182
0.173
0.189
0.177
0.171
0.129
0.416
0.160
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
Width bf,
in.
0.177
0.160
0.149
0.157
0.141
0.130
0.135
0.129
0.114
0.0980
0.316
0.130
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
X
tw
X
M 310 ⴛ 17.6
M 310 ⴛ 16.1
M 310 ⴛ 14.9
M 250 ⴛ 13.4
M 250 ⴛ 11.9
M 250 ⴛ 11.2
M 200 ⴛ 9.7
M 200 ⴛ 9.2
M 150 ⴛ 6.6
M 150 ⴛ 5.5
M 130 ⴛ 28.1
M 100 ⴛ 8.9
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
bf
Y
Y
2 240
2 050
1 900
1 710
1 520
1 430
1 240
1 170
832
703
3 580
1 150
Area A,
mm2
305
304
304
254
253
253.7
203
203.2
152.4
150.4
127
97.0
Depth d,
mm
Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed.
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
d
tf
TABLE A2.3
“M” SHAPES
78
78
82.55
68
68
68.3
57
58
46.84
50.8
127
96.52
5.7
5.3
4.57
4.6
5.2
4.39
4.8
4.5
4.34
3.28
10.6
4.06
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
Width bf,
mm
4.5
4.1
3.78
3.6
4.0
3.3
3.4
3.28
2.90
2.49
8.0
3.30
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
71
Not for Resale
16.8
12.4
10.6
HP10 ⴛ 57
ⴛ 42
HP8 ⴛ 36
8.02
9.99
9.70
12.28
12.13
11.94
11.78
14.21
14.01
13.83
13.61
Depth d,
in.
8.155
10.225
10.075
12.295
12.215
12.125
12.045
14.885
14.785
14.695
14.585
Width bf,
in.
0.445
0.565
0.420
0.685
0.610
0.515
0.435
0.805
0.705
0.615
0.505
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
X
0.455
0.565
0.415
0.685
0.605
0.515
0.435
0.805
0.705
0.615
0.505
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
tf
tw
X
10 800
8 000
HP250 ⴛ 85
ⴛ 62
6 840
15 900
14 100
11 900
10 000
HP310 ⴛ 125
ⴛ 110
ⴛ 93
ⴛ 79
HP200 ⴛ 53
22 200
19 400
16 800
13 800
Area A,
mm2
HP360 ⴛ 174
ⴛ 152
ⴛ 132
ⴛ 108
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
bf
Y
Y
204
254
246
312
308
303
299
361
356
351
346
Depth d,
mm
Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed.
24.6
21.8
18.4
15.5
HP12 ⴛ 84
ⴛ 74
ⴛ 63
ⴛ 53
A
34.4
30.0
26.1
21.4
Area A,
in.2
HP14 ⴛ 117
ⴛ 102
ⴛ 89
ⴛ 73
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
d
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
TABLE A2.4
“HP” SHAPES
207
260
256
312
310
308
306
378
376
373
370
Width bf,
mm
11.3
14.4
10.7
17.4
15.5
13.1
11.0
20.4
17.9
15.6
12.8
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
11.3
14.4
10.5
17.4
15.4
13.1
11.0
20.4
17.9
15.6
12.8
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Area A,
in.2
14.7
11.8
9.96
8.82
7.35
6.09
8.82
7.35
5.88
4.49
5.88
4.41
3.94
5.51
4.04
3.38
4.33
3.60
2.87
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
C 15 ⴛ 50
ⴛ 40
ⴛ 33.9
C 12 ⴛ 30
ⴛ 25
ⴛ 20.7
C 10 ⴛ 30
ⴛ 25
ⴛ 20
ⴛ 15.3
C 9 ⴛ 20
ⴛ 15
ⴛ 13.4
Not for Resale
C8 ⴛ 18.75
ⴛ 13.75
ⴛ 11.5
C7 ⴛ 14.75
ⴛ 12.25
ⴛ 9.8
72
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
7.00
7.00
7.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
9.00
9.00
9.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
12.00
12.00
12.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
Depth d,
in.
2.299
2.194
2.090
2.527
2.343
2.260
2.648
2.485
2.433
3.033
2.886
2.739
2.600
3.170
3.047
2.942
3.716
3.520
3.400
0.366
0.366
0.366
0.390
0.390
0.390
0.413
0.413
0.413
0.436
0.436
0.436
0.436
0.501
0.501
0.501
0.650
0.650
0.650
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
Width bf,
in.
bf
Y
0.419
0.314
0.210
0.487
0.303
0.220
0.448
0.285
0.233
0.673
0.526
0.379
0.240
0.510
0.387
0.282
0.716
0.520
0.400
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
X
Y
x
d
5 690
4 740
3 930
5 690
4 740
3 790
2 900
3 790
2 850
2 540
3 550
2 610
2 180
2 790
2 320
1 850
C 250 ⴛ 45
ⴛ 37
ⴛ 30
ⴛ 22.8
C 230 ⴛ 30
ⴛ 22
ⴛ 19.9
C 200 ⴛ 27.9
ⴛ 20.5
ⴛ 17.1
C 180 ⴛ 22
ⴛ 18.2
ⴛ 14.6
9 480
7 610
6.430
Area A,
mm2
C 310 45
ⴛ 37
ⴛ 30.8
C 380 ⴛ 74
ⴛ 60
ⴛ 50.4
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
X
tw
tf
TABLE A2.5
“C” SHAPES
178
178
178
203
203
203
229
229
229
254
254
254
254
305
305
305
381
381
381
Depth d,
mm
58
55
53
64
59
57
67
63
61
76
73
69
65
80
77
74
94
89
86
9.3
9.3
9.3
9.9
9.9
9.9
10.5
10.5
10.5
11.1
11.1
11.1
11.1
12.7
12.7
12.7
16.5
16.5
16.5
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
Width bf,
mm
10.6
8.0
5.3
12.4
7.7
5.6
11.4
7.2
5.9
17.1
13.4
9.6
6.1
13.0
9.8
7.2
18.2
13.2
10.2
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
A
73
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Not for Resale
2.13
1.59
1.32
1.76
1.47
1.21
1.03
C4 ⴛ 7.25
ⴛ 5.4
ⴛ 4.5
C3 ⴛ 6
ⴛ5
ⴛ 4.1
ⴛ 3.5
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
5.00
5.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
Depth d,
in.
1.596
1.498
1.410
1.372
1.721
1.584
1.584
1.885
1.750
2.157
2.034
1.920
0.273
0.273
0.273
0.273
0.296
0.296
0.296
0.320
0.320
0.343
0.343
0.343
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
Width bf,
in.
0.356
0.258
0.170
0.132
0.321
0.184
0.125
0.325
0.190
0.437
0.314
0.200
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
1 700
1 270
1 370
1 030
852
1 130
948
781
665
C 100 ⴛ 10.8
ⴛ8
ⴛ 6.7
C 75 ⴛ 8.9
ⴛ 7.4
ⴛ 6.1
ⴛ 5.2
2 470
1 990
1 550
Area A,
mm2
C 130 ⴛ 13
ⴛ 10.4
C 150 ⴛ 19.3
ⴛ 15.6
ⴛ 12.2
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
76
76
76
76
102
102
102
127
127
152
152
152
Depth d,
mm
Actual flange and web thicknesses vary due to mill rolling practices; however, permitted variations for such dimensions are not addressed.
2.64
1.97
3.83
3.09
2.40
C6 ⴛ 13
ⴛ 10.5
ⴛ 8.2
C5 ⴛ 9
ⴛ 6.7
Area A,
in.2
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
TABLE A2.5
“C” SHAPES (CONT’D)
40
37
35
35
43
40
40
47
44
54
51
48
6.9
6.9
6.9
6.9
7.5
7.5
7.5
8.1
8.1
8.7
8.7
8.7
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
Width bf,
mm
9.0
6.6
4.3
3.4
8.2
4.7
3.2
8.3
4.8
11.1
8.0
5.1
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Area A,
in.2
17.1
15.3
13.5
12.6
14.7
11.8
10.3
9.35
14.7
13.2
11.8
10.3
9.12
3.10
12.1
9.87
8.37
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
MC 18 ⴛ 58
ⴛ 51.9
ⴛ 45.8
ⴛ 42.7
MC 13 ⴛ 50
ⴛ 40
ⴛ 35
ⴛ 31.8
MC 12 ⴛ 50
ⴛ 45
ⴛ 40
ⴛ 35
ⴛ 31
74
Not for Resale
MC 12 ⴛ 10.6
MC 10 ⴛ 41.1
ⴛ 33.6
ⴛ 28.5
10.00
10.00
10.00
12.00
12.00
12.00
12.00
12.00
12.00
13.00
13.00
13.00
13.00
18.00
18.00
18.00
18.00
Depth d,
in.
4.321
4.100
3.950
1.500
4.135
4.010
3.890
3.765
3.670
4.412
4.185
4.072
4.000
4.200
4.100
4.000
3.950
0.575
0.575
0.575
0.309
0.700
0.700
0.700
0.700
0.700
0.610
0.610
0.610
0.610
0.625
0.625
0.625
0.625
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
Width bf,
in.
bf
Y
0.796
0.575
0.425
0.190
0.835
0.710
0.590
0.465
0.370
0.787
0.560
0.447
0.375
0.700
0.600
0.500
0.450
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
X
Y
x
d
MC 250 ⴛ 61.2
ⴛ 50
x42.4
MC 310 ⴛ 15.8
MC 310 ⴛ 74
ⴛ 67
ⴛ 60
ⴛ 52
ⴛ 46
MC 330 ⴛ 74
ⴛ 60
ⴛ 52
ⴛ 47.3
MC 460 ⴛ 86
ⴛ 77.2
ⴛ 68.2
ⴛ 63.5
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
X
tw
tf
TABLE A2.6
“MC” SHAPES
7 810
6 370
5 400
2 000
9 480
8 502
7 610
6 620
5 890
9 480
7 610
6 640
6 030
11 000
9 870
8 710
8 130
Area A,
mm2
254
254
254
305
305
305
305
305
305
330
330
330
330
457
457
457
457
Depth d,
mm
110
104
100
38
105
102
98
96
93
112
106
103
102
107
104
102
100
14.6
14.6
14.6
7.8
17.8
17.8
17.8
17.8
17.8
15.5
15.5
15.5
15.5
15.9
15.9
15.9
15.9
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
Width bf,
mm
20.2
14.6
10.8
4.8
21.2
18.0
15.0
11.8
9.4
20.0
14.2
11.4
9.5
17.8
15.2
12.7
11.4
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Area A,
in.2
7.35
6.45
2.46
7.47
7.02
6.70
6.28
5.88
5.50
2.50
6.67
5.61
5.29
4.50
4.79
4.44
3.53
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Inches and
Weight in Pounds
per Linear Foot)
MC 10 ⴛ 25
ⴛ 22
MC 10 ⴛ 8.4
MC 9 ⴛ 25.4
ⴛ 23.9
MC 8 ⴛ 22.8
ⴛ 21.4
MC 8 ⴛ 20
ⴛ 18.7
MC 8 ⴛ 8.5
MC 7 ⴛ 22.7
ⴛ 19.1
75
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Not for Resale
MC 6 ⴛ 18
ⴛ 15.3
MC 6 ⴛ 16.3
ⴛ 15.1
MC 6 ⴛ 12
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
6.00
7.00
7.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
9.00
9.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
Depth d,
in.
2.497
3.000
2.941
3.504
3.500
3.603
3.452
1.874
3.025
2.978
3.502
3.450
3.500
3.450
1.500
3.405
3.315
Width bf,
in.
0.375
0.475
0.475
0.475
0.385
0.500
0.500
0.311
0.500
0.500
0.525
0.525
0.550
0.550
0.280
0.575
0.575
Thickness
tf, in.A
Flange
0.310
0.375
0.316
0.379
0.340
0.503
0.352
0.179
0.400
0.353
0.427
0.375
0.450
0.400
0.170
0.380
0.290
Web
Thickness
tw, in.A
MC 150 ⴛ 17.9
MC 150 ⴛ 24.3
ⴛ 22.5
MC 150 ⴛ 26.8
ⴛ 22.8
MC 180 ⴛ 33.8
ⴛ 28.4
MC 200 ⴛ 12.6
MC 200 ⴛ 29.8
ⴛ 27.8
MC 200 ⴛ 33.9
ⴛ 31.8
2 280
3 090
2 860
3 410
2 900
4 300
3 620
1 610
3 790
3 550
4 320
4 050
4 820
4 530
1 590
MC 250 ⴛ 12.5
MC 230 ⴛ 37.8
ⴛ 35.6
4 740
4 160
Area A,
mm2
MC 250 ⴛ 37
ⴛ 33
Designation
(Nominal Depth in
Millimetres and
Mass in Kilograms
per Metre)
TABLE A2.6
“MC” SHAPES (CONT’D)
152
152
152
152
152
178
178
203
203
203
203
203
229
229
254
254
254
Depth d,
mm
63
76
74
88
88
91
87
47
76
75
88
87
88
87
38
86
84
Width bf,
mm
9.5
12.1
12.1
12.1
9.8
12.7
12.7
7.9
12.7
12.7
13.3
13.3
14.0
14.0
7.1
14.6
14.6
Thickness
tf, mmA
Flange
7.9
9.5
8.0
9.6
8.6
12.8
8.9
4.5
10.2
9.0
10.8
9.5
11.4
10.2
4.3
9.7
7.4
Web
Thickness
tw, mmA
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE A2.7
“L” SHAPES (EQUAL LEGS)
Y
x
Z
X
X
y
Y
Z
k
Size and Thickness,
in.
Weight per
Foot, lb
Area, in.2
Size and Thickness,
mm
Mass per
Metre, kg
Area, mm2
11⁄8
1
7
⁄8
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
56.9
51.0
45.0
38.9
32.7
29.6
26.4
16.7
15.0
13.2
11.4
9.61
8.68
7.75
L203
L203
L203
L203
L203
L203
L203
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
203
203
203
203
203
203
203
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
28.6
25.4
22.2
19.0
15.9
14.3
12.7
84.7
75.9
67.0
57.9
48.7
44.0
39.3
10 800
9 680
8 502
7 360
6 200
5 600
5 000
1
⁄8
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
37.4
33.1
28.7
24.2
21.9
19.6
17.2
14.9
12.4
11.0
9.73
8.44
7.11
6.43
5.75
5.06
4.36
3.65
L152
L152
L152
L152
L152
L152
L152
L152
L152
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
152
152
152
152
152
152
152
152
152
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
25.4
22.2
19.0
15.9
14.3
12.7
11.1
9.5
7.9
55.7
49.3
42.7
36.0
32.6
29.2
25.6
22.2
18.5
7 100
6 280
5 450
4 590
4 150
3 710
3 270
2 810
2 360
L8
L8
L8
L8
L8
L8
L8
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
L6
L6
L6
L6
L6
L6
L6
L6
L6
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
L5
L5
L5
L5
L5
L5
L5
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
7
⁄8
⁄4
5
⁄8
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
27.2
23.6
20.0
16.2
14.3
12.3
10.3
7.98
6.94
5.86
4.75
4.18
3.61
3.03
L127
L127
L127
L127
L127
L127
L125
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
22.2
19.0
15.9
12.7
11.1
9.5
7.9
40.5
35.1
29.8
24.1
21.3
18.3
15.3
5 150
4 480
3 780
3 070
2 700
2 330
1 960
L4
L4
L4
L4
L4
L4
L4
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
3
18.5
15.7
12.8
11.3
9.8
8.2
6.6
5.44
4.61
3.75
3.31
2.86
2.40
1.94
L102
L102
L102
L102
L102
L102
L102
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
19.0
15.9
12.7
11.1
9.5
7.9
6.4
27.5
23.4
19.0
16.8
14.6
12.2
9.8
3 510
2 970
2 420
2 140
1 850
1 550
1 250
L31⁄2
L31⁄2
L31⁄2
L31⁄2
L31⁄2
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
11.1
9.8
8.5
7.2
5.8
3.25
2.87
2.48
2.09
1.69
L89
L89
L89
L89
L89
16.5
14.6
12.6
10.7
8.6
2 100
1 850
1 600
1 350
1 090
7
3
⁄4
⁄8
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
1
⁄4
5
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
1
⁄2
⁄16
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
1
⁄4
7
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
89
89
89
89
89
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
12.7
11.1
9.5
7.9
6.4
76
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
TABLE A2.7
“L” SHAPES (EQUAL LEGS) (CONT’D)
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Size and Thickness,
in.
Weight per
Foot, lb
Area, in.2
Mass per
Metre, kg
Area, mm2
9.4
8.3
7.2
6.1
4.9
3.71
2.75
2.43
2.11
1.78
1.44
1.09
L76
L76
L76
L76
L76
L76
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
76
76
76
76
76
76
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
12.7
11.1
9.5
7.9
6.4
4.8
14.0
12.4
10.7
9.1
7.3
5.5
1 770
1 570
1 360
1 150
929
703
7.7
5.9
5.0
4.1
3.07
2.25
1.73
1.46
1.19
0.90
L64
L64
L64
L64
L64
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
64
64
64
64
64
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
12.7
9.5
7.9
6.49
4.8
11.4
8.7
7.4
6.1
4.6
1 450
1 120
942
768
581
4.7
3.92
3.19
2.44
1.65
1.36
1.15
0.938
0.715
0.484
L51
L51
L51
L51
L51
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
51
51
51
51
51
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
9.5
7.9
6.4
4.8
3.2
7.0
5.8
4.7
3.6
2.4
877
742
605
461
312
2.77
2.12
1.44
0.813
0.621
0.422
L44 ⴛ 44 ⴛ 6.4
L44 ⴛ 44 ⴛ 4.8
L44 ⴛ 44 ⴛ 3.2
4.1
3.1
2.1
525
401
272
11⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄4
11⁄2 ⴛ 3⁄16
1
⁄2 ⴛ 5⁄32
11⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄8
2.34
1.80
1.52
1.23
0.688
0.527
0.444
0.359
L38
L38
L38
L38
6.4
4.8
4.0
3.2
3.4
2.7
2.2
1.8
444
340
286
232
L11⁄4 ⴛ 11⁄4 ⴛ 1⁄4
L11⁄4 ⴛ 11⁄4 ⴛ 3⁄16
L11⁄4 ⴛ 11⁄4 ⴛ 1⁄8
1.92
1.48
1.01
0.563
0.434
0.297
L32 ⴛ 32 ⴛ 6.4
L32 ⴛ 32 ⴛ 4.8
L32 ⴛ 32 ⴛ 3.2
2.8
2.2
1.5
363
280
192
L1 ⴛ 1 ⴛ 1⁄4
L1 ⴛ 1 ⴛ 3⁄16
L1 ⴛ 1 ⴛ 1⁄8
1.49
1.16
0.80
0.438
0.340
0.234
L25 ⴛ 25 ⴛ 6.4
L25 ⴛ 25 ⴛ 4.8
L25 ⴛ 25 ⴛ 3.2
2.2
1.8
1.2
283
219
151
L3⁄4 ⴛ 3⁄4 ⴛ 1⁄8
0.59
0.172
L19 ⴛ 19 ⴛ 3.2
0.9
111
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
3
3
3
3
3
3
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
L21⁄2
L21⁄2
L21⁄2
L21⁄2
L21⁄2
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
2
2
2
2
2
ⴛ 3⁄8
ⴛ 5⁄16
ⴛ 1⁄4
ⴛ 3⁄16
ⴛ 1⁄8
L3
L3
L3
L3
L3
L3
L2
L2
L2
L2
L2
1
⁄2
⁄16
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
1
⁄4
3
⁄16
7
ⴛ 1⁄2
ⴛ 3⁄8
ⴛ 5⁄16
ⴛ 1⁄4
ⴛ 3⁄16
L13⁄4 ⴛ 13⁄4 ⴛ 1⁄4
L13⁄4 ⴛ 13⁄4 ⴛ 3⁄16
L13⁄4 ⴛ 13⁄4 ⴛ 1⁄8
L11⁄2
L11⁄2
L11⁄2
L11⁄2
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
Size and Thickness,
mm
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
38
38
38
38
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
77
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE A2.8
“L” SHAPES (UNEQUAL LEGS)
Y
x
Z
X
X
y
k
Y
Size and Thickness,
in.
Z
Weight per
Foot, lb
Area, in.2
1
⁄8
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
44.2
39.1
33.8
28.5
25.7
23.0
20.2
13.0
11.5
9.94
8.36
7.56
6.75
5.93
L203
L203
L203
L203
L203
L203
L203
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
152
152
152
152
152
152
152
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
1
⁄4
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
37.4
28.7
21.9
19.6
11.0
8.44
6.43
5.75
L203
L203
L203
L203
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
102
102
102
102
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
L8 ⴛ 4 ⴛ 7⁄8
L8 ⴛ 4 ⴛ 5⁄8
L8 ⴛ 4 ⴛ 7⁄16
33.1
24.2
17.2
L8
L8
L8
L8
L8
L8
L8
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
L8
L8
L8
L8
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
4
4
4
4
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
L7
L7
L7
L7
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
4
4
4
4
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
7
3
3
⁄4
⁄8
1
⁄2
3
⁄8
5
L7 ⴛ 4 ⴛ 7⁄16
L6
L6
L6
L6
L6
L6
L6
L6
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
7
⁄8
⁄4
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
3
L6 ⴛ 31⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄2
L6 ⴛ 31⁄2 ⴛ 3⁄8
L6 ⴛ 31⁄2 ⴛ 5⁄16
Size and Thickness,
mm
Mass per
Metre, kg
Area, mm2
25.4
22.2
19.0
15.9
14.3
12.7
11.1
65.5
57.9
50.1
42.2
38.1
34.1
29.9
8 390
7 420
6 410
5 390
4 880
4 350
3 830
25.4
19.0
14.3
12.7
55.4
42.5
32.4
29.0
7 100
5 450
4 150
3 710
9.73
7.11
5.06
L203 ⴛ 102 ⴛ 22.2
L203 ⴛ 102 ⴛ 15.9
L203 ⴛ 102 ⴛ 11.1
49.3
36.0
25.6
6 280
4 590
3 260
26.2
22.1
17.9
13.6
7.69
6.48
5.25
3.98
L178
L178
L178
L178
19.0
15.9
12.7
9.5
38.8
32.7
26.5
20.2
4 960
4 180
3 390
2 570
15.7
4.62
L178 ⴛ 102 ⴛ 11.1
23.4
2 980
27.2
23.6
20.0
18.1
16.2
14.3
12.3
10.3
7.98
6.94
5.86
5.31
4.75
4.18
3.61
3.03
L152
L152
L152
L152
L152
L152
L152
L152
40.3
35.0
29.6
26.8
24.0
21.2
18.2
15.3
5 150
4 480
3 780
3 430
3 060
3 700
2 330
1 950
15.3
11.7
9.8
4.50
3.42
2.87
L152 ⴛ 89 ⴛ 12.7
L152 ⴛ 89 ⴛ 9.5
L152 ⴛ 89 ⴛ 7.9
22.7
17.3
14.5
2 900
2 210
1 850
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
102
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
22.2
19.0
15.9
14.3
12.7
11.1
9.5
7.9
78
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-6 /SA-6M
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
TABLE A2.8
“L” SHAPES (UNEQUAL LEGS) (CONT’D)
Size and Thickness,
in.
Weight per
Foot, lb
Area, in.2
19.8
16.8
13.6
10.4
8.7
7.0
5.81
4.92
4.00
3.05
2.56
2.06
L127
L127
L127
L127
L127
L127
12.8
11.3
3 ⴛ 3⁄8
3 ⴛ 5⁄16
3 ⴛ 1⁄4
31⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄2
31⁄2 ⴛ 3⁄8
31⁄2 ⴛ 5⁄16
31⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄4
3 ⴛ 5⁄8
3 ⴛ 1⁄2
3 ⴛ 3⁄8
3 ⴛ 5⁄16
3 ⴛ 1⁄4
L31⁄2
L31⁄2
L31⁄2
L31⁄2
L31⁄2
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
3
3
3
3
3
L31⁄2
L31⁄2
L31⁄2
L31⁄2
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
L5
L5
L5
L5
L5
L5
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
31⁄2
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
3
⁄4
⁄8
1
⁄2
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
1
⁄4
5
L5 ⴛ 3 ⴛ 1⁄2
L5 ⴛ 3 ⴛ 7⁄16
L5
L5
L5
L4
L4
L4
L4
L4
L4
L4
L4
L4
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
1
⁄2
⁄16
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
1
⁄4
7
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
1
⁄2
⁄8
5
⁄16
1
⁄4
3
Size and Thickness,
mm
Mass per
Metre, kg
Area, mm2
19.0
15.9
12.7
9.5
7.9
6.4
29.3
24.9
20.2
15.4
12.9
10.4
3 750
3 170
2 580
1 970
1 650
1 330
3.75
3.31
L127 ⴛ 76 ⴛ 12.7
L127 ⴛ 76 ⴛ 11.1
19.0
16.7
2 420
2 140
9.8
8.2
6.6
11.9
9.1
7.7
6.2
13.6
11.1
8.5
7.2
5.8
2.86
2.40
1.94
3.50
2.67
2.25
1.81
3.98
3.25
2.48
2.09
1.69
L127
L127
L127
L102
L102
L102
L102
L102
L102
L102
L102
L102
14.5
12.1
9.8
17.6
13.5
11.4
9.2
20.2
16.4
12.6
10.7
8.6
1 850
1 550
1 250
2 260
1 720
1 450
1 170
2 570
2 100
1 600
1 350
1 090
10.2
9.1
7.9
6.6
5.4
3.00
2.65
2.30
1.93
1.56
L89
L89
L89
L89
L89
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
76
76
76
76
76
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
12.7
11.1
9.5
7.9
6.4
15.1
13.5
11.7
9.8
8.0
1 940
1 710
1 480
1 250
1 010
9.4
7.2
6.1
4.9
2.75
2.11
1.78
1.44
L89
L89
L89
L89
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
64
64
64
64
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
12.7
9.5
7.9
6.4
13.9
10.7
9.0
7.3
1 770
1 360
1 150
929
8.5
7.6
6.6
5.6
4.5
3.39
2.50
2.21
1.92
1.62
1.31
0.996
L76
L76
L76
L76
L76
L76
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
64
64
64
64
64
64
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
12.7
11.1
9.5
7.9
6.4
4.8
12.6
11.3
9.8
8.3
6.7
5.1
1 610
1 430
1 240
1 050
845
643
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
89
89
89
89
89
89
76
76
76
89
89
89
89
76
76
76
76
76
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
9.5
7.9
6.4
12.7
9.5
7.9
6.4
15.9
1.27
9.5
7.9
6.4
L3
L3
L3
L3
L3
L3
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
21⁄2
L3
L3
L3
L3
L3
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
2
2
2
2
2
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
1
⁄2
⁄8
5
⁄16
1
⁄4
3
⁄16
7.7
5.9
5.0
4.1
3.07
2.25
1.73
1.46
1.19
0.902
L76
L76
L76
L76
L76
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
51
51
51
51
51
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
12.7
9.5
7.9
6.4
4.8
11.5
8.8
7.4
6.1
4.6
1 450
1 120
942
768
582
L21⁄2
L21⁄2
L21⁄2
L21⁄2
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
2
2
2
2
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
5.3
4.5
3.62
2.75
1.55
1.31
1.06
0.809
L64
L64
L64
L64
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
51
51
51
51
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
9.5
7.9
6.4
4.8
7.9
6.7
5.4
4.2
1 000
845
684
522
L21⁄2 ⴛ 11⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄4
L21⁄2 ⴛ 11⁄2 ⴛ 3⁄16
3.19
2.44
0.938
0.715
L64 ⴛ 38 ⴛ 6.4
L64 ⴛ 38 ⴛ 4.8
4.8
3.6
605
461
L2 ⴛ 11⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄4
L2 ⴛ 11⁄2 ⴛ 3⁄16
L2 ⴛ 11⁄2 ⴛ 1⁄8
2.77
2.12
1.44
0.813
0.621
0.422
L51 ⴛ 38 ⴛ 6.4
L51 ⴛ 38 ⴛ 4.8
L51 ⴛ 38 ⴛ 3.2
4.2
3.1
2.1
525
401
272
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
ⴛ
1
⁄2
⁄16
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
1
⁄4
3
⁄16
7
3
3
⁄8
⁄16
1
⁄4
3
⁄16
5
79
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
,,`,,`,`,,`---
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
APPENDICES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. COILED PRODUCT AS A SOURCE OF
STRUCTURAL PLATES, SHAPES, SHEET
PILING, AND BARS
X1.1 Continuous wide hot strip rolling mills are normally equipped with coilers. Regardless of the different
types of systems employed during or following the rolling
operations, it is common for the steel to be reeled into
the coiler at temperatures in the stress-relieving range.
In general, these temperatures are higher as material
thickness increases. The coils subsequently cool to ambient temperature with outer and inner laps cooling more
rapidly than central laps. The difference in cooling rate
can result in measurable differences in the mechanical
properties throughout a coil. Data confirm reduced yield
and tensile strength with increased percent elongation for
the product with slower cooling rates from the coiling
temperature to ambient. These differences are in addition
to the effects on mechanical properties caused by differences in heat analysis and chemical segregation.
Carbon Steel Plates and Wide Flange Shapes” (SU /18,
SU /19, and SU /20), published in September 1974. The
data are presented in tables of probability that tensile
properties at other than the official location may differ
from those of the reported test location.
X2.3 Specification A 6 /A 6M contains no requirements applicable to product tension tests; conformance
to the material specifications is determined on the basis
of tests performed at the place of manufacture prior to
shipment, unless otherwise specified.
X2.4 A Task Group of ASTM Subcommittee A01.02
has determined, based on review of the AISI data, that
the variation in tensile properties of plates and structural
shapes can be expressed as a function of specified requirements: one standard deviation equals approximately 4%
of required tensile strength, 8% of required yield strength,
and 3 percentage units of required elongation.
X2.5 Acceptance criteria for product testing based on
these values either below the minimum or above the
maximum allowed by the material specification are generally acceptable to material manufacturers. Such tolerances could be considered by users of this product as a
reasonable basis for acceptance of materials which, due
to their inherent variability, deviate from material specification requirements when subjected to product tension
testing.
X2. VARIATION OF TENSILE PROPERTIES
IN PLATES AND STRUCTURAL SHAPES
X2.1 The tension testing requirements of Specification A 6 /A 6M are intended only to characterize the
tensile properties of a heat of steel for determination of
conformance to the requirements of the material specifications. These testing procedures are not intended to
define the upper or lower limits of tensile properties at
all possible test locations within a heat of steel. It is well
known and documented that tensile properties will vary
within a heat or individual piece of steel as a function of
chemical composition, processing, testing procedure, and
other factors. It is, therefore, incumbent on designers and
engineers to use sound engineering judgement when using
tension test results shown on mill test reports. The testing
procedures of Specification A 6 /A 6M have been found
to provide material adequate for normal structural design
criteria.
X3. WELDABILITY OF STEEL
X3.1 Weldability is a term that usually refers to the
relative ease with which a metal can be welded using
conventional practice. Difficulties arise in steel when the
cooling rates associated with weld thermal cycles produce
microstructures (for example, martensite) that are susceptible to brittle fracture or, more commonly, hydrogeninduced (or cold) cracking. (Solidification or hot cracking
is a relatively rare phenomenon that will not be
addressed here.)
X2.2 A survey of the variation to be expected in
tensile properties obtained from plates and structural
shapes was conducted by the American Iron and Steel
Institute (AISI). The results of this survey are contained
in a Contributions to the Metallurgy of Steel entitled “The
Variation of Product Analysis and Tensile Properties —
X3.2 The relative sensitivity of steels to forming cold
cracking microstructures is called hardenability and can
be measured in a number of ways. Perhaps the most
popular method of assessing this is by the carbon equivalent (CE) formula, which attempts to equate the relative
hardening contributions of a steel’s constituent elements
80
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
(for example, manganese, vanadium) to an equivalent
amount of carbon, which is the most significant hardening
agent. The most popular formula is the IIW (International
Institute of Welding) equation presented in S74.2, which
has been found suitable for predicting hardenability in a
wide range of commonly used carbon-manganese and
low alloy steels.
X4. RADIUS FOR COLD BENDING
X4.1 Suggested minimum inside bend radii for cold
forming are referenced to Group Designations A to F
inclusive as defined in Table X4.1. The suggested radii
listed in Table X4.2 should be used as minimums in
typical shop fabrication. Material that does not form satisfactorily when fabricated in accordance with Table X4.2
may be subject to rejection pending negotiation with the
steel supplier. When tighter bends are required, the manufacturer should be consulted.
X3.3 It should be noted, however, that for the current
generation of low carbon (<0.10%) low alloy steels that
derive strength from a combination of microalloys and
thermal processing methods, the use of other formulae
may more accurately assess hardenability and cold cracking sensitivity.
X4.2 The bend radius and the radius of the male die
should be as liberal as the finished part will permit. The
width across the shoulders of the female die should be
at least eight times the plate thickness. Higher strength
steels require larger die openings. The surface of the dies
in the area of radius should be smooth.
X3.4 For a vast number of common structural applications it is unnecessary to specify the use of CE limits.
However, in order to obtain a higher level of confidence
in avoiding cold cracking, the chemistry controls in S74
are available. A purchaser who specifies the use of S74
should be aware that there are several factors involved
in the judicious selection of a maximum CE value, such
as the following:
X4.2.1 Since cracks in cold bending commonly
originate from the outside edges, shear burrs and gas cut
edges should be removed by grinding. Sharp corners on
edges and on punched or gas cut holes should be removed
by chamfering or grinding to a radius.
X3.4.1 Actual production joint restraint /base metal
thickness(es),
X4.2.2 If possible, parts should be formed such
that the bend line is perpendicular to the direction of final
rolling. If it is necessary to bend with the bend line parallel
to the direction of final rolling, a more generous radius
is suggested (11⁄2 times applicable value given in Table
X4.2 for bend lines perpendicular to the direction of
rolling).
X3.4.2 Filler metal and base metal strength compatibility,
X3.4.3 Deposited weld metal diffusible hydrogen
content,
X3.4.4 Preheat and interpass temperatures,
X3.4.5 Filler metal and base metal cleanliness, and
X3.4.6 Heat input.
X4.3 References:
X3.5 Though it is widely believed that low CE steels
are immune to weld cracking problems, failure to consider
these factors and others have resulted in weld or base
metal HAZ (heat affected zone) cracks in such steels.
X4.3.1 Holt, G. E., et al, “Minimum Cold Bend
Radii Project—Final Report,” Concurrent Technologies
Corporation, January 27, 1997.
X4.3.2 Brockenbrough, R. L., “Fabrication Guidelines for Cold Bending,” R. L. Brockenbrough & Associates, June 28, 1998.
X3.6 It is important to note that carbon equivalence
is only a qualitative assessment of potential welding problems, and should never be solely relied on to ensure
weld integrity. The proper use of welding specifications,
coupled with the knowledge of actual construction conditions, must also be used.
X4.3.3 Both of these references are available from
American Iron and Steel Institute, 1101 17th Street NW,
Washington, DC 20036-4700.
81
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-6 /SA-6M
Not for Resale
SA-6 /SA-6M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE X4.1
GROUP DESIGNATIONS FOR COLD BENDING
Specification
A 36/A 36M
A 242/A 242M
A 283/A 283M
A 514/A 514M
A 529/A 529M
A 572/A 572M
A 573/A 573M
A 588/A 588M
A 633/A 633M
A 656/A 656M
A 678/A 678M
A 690/A 690M
A 709/A 709M
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
A
A
A
A
A
710/A
808/A
852/A
871/A
945/A
710M
808M
852M
871M
945M
Grade
B
B
A or B
C or D
any
50 [345] or 55 [380]
42 [290]
50 [345]
55 [380]
60 [415] or 65 [450]
58 [400] or 65 [450]
70 [485]
any
any
50 [345]
60 [415]
70 [485]
80 [550]
A or B
C or D
B
36 [250]
50 [345] or 50W [345W]
70W [485W] or
HPS70W [HPS485W]
100 [690] or 100W
[690W]
A
B
B
60 [415] or 65 [450]
50 [345] or 65 [450]
Group
DesignationA
B
C
A
B
F
C
B
C
D
E
B
C
C
B
B
D
E
F
C
D
C
B
C
D
TABLE X4.2
SUGGESTED MINIMUM INSIDE RADII FOR COLD
BENDINGA
Thickness (t), in. [mm]
Group
DesignationB
Up to
3
⁄4 in.
[20 mm]
Over 3⁄4 in.
[20 mm]
To 1 [25
mm, incl.]
Over 1 in.
[25 mm]
To 2 in. [50
mm], incl.
Over 2 in.
[50 mm]
A
B
C
D
E
F
1.5t
1.5t
1.5t
1.5t
1.5t
1.75t
1.5t
1.5t
1.5t
1.5t
1.5t
2.25t
1.5t
1.5t
2.0t
2.5t
3.0t
4.5t
1.5t
2.0t
2.5t
3.0t
3.5t
5.5t
A
Values are for bend lines perpendicular to the direction of final
rolling. These radii apply when the precautions listed in X 4.2 are
followed. If bend lines are parallel to the direction of the final rolling, multiply values by 1.5.
B
Steel specifications included in the group designations may not
include the entire thickness range shown in this table.
F
F
C
D
E
B
A
Steels having a ratio of specified minimum tensile strength to
specified minimum yield strength of 1.15 or less are in Group F;
other steels are in Groups A to E inclusive, which are grouped on
the basis of their having similar specified values for minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm].
B
Grade designations are not applicable for this specification.
82
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SPECIFICATION FOR GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
STEEL PLATES FOR PRESSURE VESSELS
SA-20 /SA-20M
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 20 /A 20M-01)
1.
Scope
1.1 This specification covers a group of common
requirements which, unless otherwise specified in the
individual material specification, shall apply to rolled
steel plates for pressure vessels under each of the following specifications issued by ASTM:
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Title of Specification
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Manganese-Silicon
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Nickel
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Molybdenum
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Vanadium
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Lowand Intermediate-Tensile Strength
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Silicon
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, 9 Percent
Nickel, Double-Normalized and Tempered
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High
Strength Manganese
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, HighStrength, Quenched and Tempered
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched
and Tempered Manganese-Molybdenum and
Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel
Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, CarbonManganese-Silicon Steel
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched
and Tempered Chromium-Molybdenum
Title of Specification
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched
and Tempered Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched
and Tempered 8 and 9 Percent Nickel
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Manganese-Titanium for Glass or Diffused Metallic Coatings
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, High
Strength, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service
Pressure Vessel Plates, Five Percent Nickel
Alloy Steel, Specially Heat Treated
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon-Manganese, for
Moderate and Lower Temperature Service
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel,
Quenched and Tempered, for Welded Layered Pressure Vessels
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel and HighStrength Low-Alloy Steel, Quenched and
Tempered
Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Manganese-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Steel,
for Moderate and Lower Temperature
Service
Pressure Vessel Plates, Low-Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-Copper-Chromium-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Steel
Pressure Vessel Plates, High-Strength LowAlloy Steel
Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, CarbonManganese-Silicon Steel, for Moderate and
Lower Temperature Service
Pressure Vessel Plates, Quenched and Tempered Manganese-Chromium-MolybdenumSilicon-Zirconium
Alloy Steel
Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium
ASTM
Designation
A 202 /A 202M
A 203 /A 203M
A 204 /A 204M
A 225 /A 225M
A 285 /A 285M
A 299 /A 299M
A 302 /A 302M
A 353 /A 353M
A 387 /A 387M
A 455 /A 455M
A 515 /A 515M
A 516 /A 516M
A 517 /A 517M
A 533 /A 533M
A 537 /A 537M
A 542 /A 542M
83
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
ASTM
Designation
A 543 /A 543M
A 553 /A 553M
A 562 /A 562M
A 612 /A 612M
A 645 /A 645M
A 662 /A 662M
A 724 /A 724M
A 734 /A 734M
A 735 /A 735M
A 736 /A 736M
A 737 /A 737M
A 738 /A 738M
A 782 /A 782M
A 832 /A 832M
SA-20 /SA-20M
Title of Specification
Pressure Vessel Plates, Produced by the
Thermo-Mechanical Control Process
(TMCP)
Pressure Vessel Plates, 9% Nickel Alloy, Produced by the Direct-Quenching Process
2004 SECTION II
ASTM
Designation
system must be used independently of the other. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance with this specification.
A 841 /A 841M
1.11 This specification and the applicable material
specifications are expressed in both inch-pound units and
SI units. However, unless the order specifies the applicable “M” specification designation (SI units), the material
shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
A 844 /A 844M
1.1.1 This specification also covers a group of supplementary requirements which are applicable to several
of the above specifications as indicated therein. These
are provided for use when additional testing or inspection
is desired and apply only when specified individually by
the purchaser in the order.
2.
Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
A 202 /A 202M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Alloy Steel, Chromium-Manganese-Silicon
A 203 /A 203M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Alloy Steel, Nickel
A 204 /A 204M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Alloy Steel, Molybdenum
A 225 /A 225M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Alloy Steel, Manganese-Vanadium-Nickel
A 285 /A 285M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Carbon Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile Strength
A 299 /A 299M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Carbon Steel, Manganese-Silicon
A 302 /A 302M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Alloy Steel, Manganese-Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel
A 353 /A 353M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Alloy Steel, 9 Percent Nickel, Double-Normalized and
Tempered
A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
A 387 /A 387M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum
A 435 /A 435M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates
A 455 /A 455M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Carbon Steel, High Strength Manganese
A 515 /A 515M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service
A 516 /A 516M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature
Service
A 517 /A 517M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Alloy Steel, High-Strength, Quenched and Tempered
A 533 /A 533M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered ManganeseMolybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel
A 537 /A 537M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel
1.2 Appendix X1 describes the production and some
of the characteristics of coiled product from which pressure vessel plates may be produced.
1.3 Appendix X2 provides information on the variability of tensile properties in plates for pressure vessels.
1.4 Appendix X3 provides information on the variability of Charpy V-Notch impact test properties in plates
for pressure vessels.
1.5 Appendix X4 provides information on cold bending of plates including suggested minimum inside radii
for cold bending.
1.6 These materials are intended to be suitable for
fusion welding. When the steel is to be welded, it is
presupposed that a welding procedure suitable for the
grade of steel and intended use or service will be utilized.
1.7 In case of any conflict in requirements, the requirements of the individual material specification shall prevail
over those of this general specification.
1.8 The purchaser may specify additional requirements which do not negate any of the provisions of this
general specification or of the individual material specifications. Such additional requirements, the acceptance of
which is subject to negotiation with the supplier, must
be included in the order information (see 4.1.8).
1.9 For purposes of determining conformance with
this specification and the various material specifications
referenced in 1.1, values shall be rounded to the nearest
unit in the right-hand place of figures used in expressing
the limiting values in accordance with the rounding
method of Practice E 29.
1.10 The values stated in either inch-pound units or
SI units are to be regarded as standard. Within the text,
the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in
each system are not exact equivalents. Therefore, each
84
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
A 542 /A 542M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered ChromiumMolybdenum and Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium
A 543 /A 543M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum
A 553 /A 553M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered 8 and 9 Percent
Nickel
A 562 /A 562M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Carbon Steel, Manganese-Titanium for Glass or Diffused Metallic Coatings
A 577 /A 577M Specification for Ultrasonic Angle-Beam
Examination of Steel Plates
A 578 /A 578M Specification for Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Plain and Clad Steel Plates for
Special Applications
A 612 /A 612M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Carbon Steel, High Strength, for Moderate and Lower
Temperature Service
A 645 /A 645M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Five Percent Nickel Alloy Steel, Specially Heat
Treated
A 662 /A 662M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Carbon-Manganese, for Moderate and Lower Temperature Service
A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading
Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment
A 724 /A 724M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Carbon Steel, Quenched and Tempered, for Welded
Layered Pressure Vessels
A 734 /A 734M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Alloy Steel and High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel,
Quenched and Tempered
A 735 /A 735M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Low-Carbon Manganese-Molybdenum-Columbium
Alloy Steel, for Moderate and Lower Temperature
Service
A 736 /A 736M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Low-Carbon Age-Hardening Nickel-Copper-Chromium-Molybdenum-Columbium and Nickel-CopperManganese-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy Steel
A 737 /A 737M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
High-Strength, Low-Alloy Steel
A 738 /A 738M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel, for
Moderate and Lower Temperature Service
A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
A 770 /A 770M Specification for Through-Thickness
Tension Testing of Steel Plates for Special Applications
A 782 /A 782M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Quenched and Tempered Manganese-ChromiumMolybdenum-Silicon-Zirconium Alloy Steel
A 832 /A 832M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Alloy Steel, Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium
A 841 /A 841M Specification for Steel Plates for Pressure
Vessels, Produced by the Thermo-Mechanical Control
Process (TMCP)
A 844 /A 844M Specification for Steel Plates, 9% Nickel
Alloy, for Pressure Vessels, Produced by the DirectQuenching Process
A 919 Terminology Relating to Heat Treatment of Metals
A 941 Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel,
Related Alloys, and Ferroalloys
E 21 Test Methods for Elevated Temperature Tension
Tests of Metallic Materials
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data
to Determine Conformance with Specifications
E 112 Test Methods for Determining Average Grain Size
E 208 Test Method for Conducting Drop-Weight Test
to Determine Nil-Ductility Transition Temperature of
Ferritic Steels
E 709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination
2.2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers Code :
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX,
Welding Qualifications
2.3 U.S. Military Standard:
MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products Preparation for Shipment and Storage
2.4 U.S. Federal Standard:
Fed. Std. No. 123, Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
2.5 Automotive Industry Action Group Standard:
B 1 Bar Code Symbology Standard
3.
Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 capped steel — rimmed steel in which the
rimming action is limited by an early capping operation.
Capping may be carried out mechanically by using a
heavy metal cap on a bottle-top mold or it may be carried
out chemically by an addition of aluminum or ferrosilicon
to the top of the molten steel in an open-top mold.
3.1.2 exclusive — when used in relation to ranges,
as for ranges of thicknesses in the tables of permissible
variations in dimensions, the term is intended to exclude
only the greater value of the range. Thus, a range from
60 to 72 in. [1500 to 1800 mm] exclusive includes 60 in.
[1500 mm], but does not include 72 in. [1800 mm].
85
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-20 /SA-20M
Not for Resale
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
3.1.3 heat treatment terms — see 3.1.7, 3.11, and
Terminology A 941.
3.1.4 hot forming — a forming operation producing
permanent deformation, performed after the plate has
been heated to the temperature required to produce grain
refinement.
3.1.5 killed steel — steel deoxidized, either by addition of strong deoxidizing agents or by vacuum treatment,
to reduce the oxygen content to such a level that no
reaction occurs between carbon and oxygen during solidification.
3.1.6 manufacturer (material manufacturer) — an
organization that performs or directly controls one or
more operations, such as melting, rolling, coiling, and
heat treating, that affect the chemical composition or
mechanical properties of the material.
3.1.7 normalizing — a heat treating process in which
a steel plate is reheated to a uniform temperature above
the upper critical temperature and then cooled in air to
below the transformation range.
3.1.8 plate-as-rolled — when used in relation to the
location and number of tests, the term refers to the unit
plate rolled from a slab or directly from an ingot. It does
not refer to the condition of the plate.
3.1.9 plate identifier — the alpha, numeric, or alphanumeric designation used to identify the plate.
3.1.10 plates — flat hot-rolled steel, commonly
available by size as follows:
Width, in. [mm]
Over 8 [200]
Over 48 [1200]
4.1.1 Quantity (weight or number of plates);
4.1.2 Dimensions;
4.1.3 Name of material (plates, carbon steel; plates,
alloy steel);
4.1.4 Specification designation (including type,
class, and grade as applicable) and year of issue;
4.1.5 Condition (as-rolled, normalized, quenched
and tempered, etc. If heat treatment of material is to be
performed by the fabricator, this must be so stated. Also,
if purchaser specifies a heat-treatment cycle, it must be
stated.);
4.1.6 Impact test requirements, if any (Section 12).
(For Charpy V-notch test, include specimen orientation,
testing temperature, and acceptance criteria. For dropweight test give testing temperature.);
4.1.7 Either plates from coil or discrete cut lengths
of flat product may be supplied unless one is specifically
excluded on the order (see Appendix X1);
4.1.8 If the processor (see 5.5.2) intends to qualify
plates cut from a coiled product as pressure vessel plates,
the order to the manufacturer (see 5.5.1) should state the
intended ASTM specification designation, grade, and type
(as applicable);
4.1.9 Paint markings (see 13.2.1);
4.1.10 Supplementary requirements, if any (test
specimen heat treatment, special impact test requirements, etc.); and
Thickness, in. [mm]
4.1.11 Additional requirements, if any.
Over 0.229 [6.0 mm and over]
Over 0.179 [4.6 mm and over]
3.1.11 precipitation heat treatment — a subcritical
temperature thermal treatment performed to cause precipitation of submicroscopic constituents, etc., to result in
enhancement of some desirable property.
3.1.12 processor — an organization that performs
operations, such as decoiling, cutting to length, marking,
inspecting, examining, and testing.
3.1.13 rimmed steel — steel containing sufficient
oxygen to give a continuous evolution of carbon monoxide while the ingot is solidifying, resulting in a case or
rim of metal virtually free of voids.
3.1.14 semikilled steel — incompletely deoxidized
steel containing sufficient oxygen to form enough carbon
monoxide during solidification to offset solidification
shrinkage.
5.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Materials and Manufacture
5.1 The steel shall be produced by one of the following
primary steelmaking processes: open hearth, basic oxygen, electric furnace. The steel may be further refined
by secondary processes, including but not restricted to:
vacuum-secondary processes, including but not restricted
to: vacuum-arc remelt (VAR), electroslag remelt (ESR),
and ladle treatment.
5.2 The steel may be cast in ingots or may be
strand cast.
5.2.1 Strand-Cast Slabs :
5.2.1.1 When heats of the same nominal chemical composition are consecutively strand cast at one time,
the heat number assigned to the cast product (slab) may
remain unchanged until all of the steel in the slab is from
the following heat.
4.
Ordering Information
4.1 Orders should include the following information,
as necessary, to adequately describe the desired material.
5.2.1.2 When two consecutively strand-cast
heats have different nominal chemical composition
86
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
inspection, or operations not intended to affect the properties of the material. The processor may subsequently heat
treat the plates (see Section 6). Specific sections of this
specification for which the processor is responsible are
9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, and 20.
ranges, the manufacturer shall remove the transition material by any established procedure that positively separates
the grades.
5.3 The ratio of reduction of thickness from a strandcast slab to plate shall be at least 3.0:1, except that reduction ratios as low as 2.0:1 are permitted if all of the
following limitations are met:
5.3.1 The purchaser agrees to the use of such reduction ratios.
5.3.2 The applicable material specification is a
A 299 / A 299M, A 515 / A 515M, A 516 / A 516M,
A 537 /A 537M, A 662 /A 662M, or A 737 /A 737M.
5.3.3 The specified plate thickness is 3.0 in. [75
mm] or more.
5.3.4 One or more of the following low hydrogen
practices are used; vacuum degassing during steelmaking;
controlled soaking of the slabs or plates; or controlled
slow cooling of the slabs or plates.
5.3.5 The sulfur content is 0.004% or less, based
upon heat analysis.
5.3.6 One or more of the following practices are
used: electromagnetic stirring during strand casting; soft
reduction during strand casting; heavy pass reductions or
other special practices during plate rolling; or combined
forging and rolling during plate rolling.
5.3.7 The plates are ultrasonically examined in
accordance with Specification A 578 /A 578M, Level C
based on continuous scanning over 100% of the plate
surface.
5.3.8 The plates are through thickness tension
tested in accordance with Specification A 770 /A 770M.
5.5.2.1 Coiled product is excluded from qualification to individual material specifications governed by
this specification until decoiled, leveled, cut to length, and
tested by the processor in accordance with the specified
requirements.
5.5.3 Plates produced from coils shall not contain
splice welds, unless approved by the purchaser.
6.
Heat Treatment
6.1 When material is required to be heat treated, the
heat treatment may be performed either by the manufacturer or processor or by the fabricator unless otherwise
specified in the material specification.
6.2 When the heat treatment required by the material
specification is to be performed by the purchaser or the
purchaser’s agent, and the material is to be supplied by
the material producer in a condition other than that
required by the material specification, the order shall
so state.
6.2.1 When plates are ordered without the heat
treatment required by the material specification, heat
treatment of the plates to conform to the requirements of
the material specification shall be the responsibility of the
purchaser.
6.3 When heat treatment is to be performed, the material shall be heat treated as specified in the material specification. The purchaser may specify the heat treatment
to be used provided it is not in conflict with the requirements of the material specification.
5.4 Plates are produced in either discrete cut lengths
of flat product or from coils.
5.4.1 Plates produced from coil means plates that
have been leveled or flattened and cut to length from a
coiled product and that are furnished without heat treatment. For the purposes of this paragraph, stress relieving
is not considered to be a heat treatment.
5.4.2 Plates that are annealed, normalized, normalized-and-tempered, or quenched-and-tempered after
decoiling shall be considered to be discrete cut lengths
of flat products.
6.4 When normalizing is to be performed by the fabricator, it may be accomplished by heating uniformly for
hot forming. The temperature to which the plates are
heated for hot forming shall not significantly exceed the
normalizing temperature.
6.5 When no heat treatment is required, the manufacturer or processor may opt to heat treat the plates by
normalizing, stress relieving, or normalizing and then
stress relieving to meet the material specification.
5.5 When plates are produced from coils:
5.5.1 The manufacturer directly controls one or
more of the operations (that is, melting, rolling, coiling,
etc.) that affect the chemical composition or the mechanical properties, or both, of the material.
5.5.2 The processor decoils, cuts to length, and
marks; performs and certifies tests, examination repairs,
6.6 If approved by the purchaser, cooling rates faster
than those obtained by cooling in air are permissible
to achieve specified mechanical properties, provided the
plates are subsequently tempered in the temperature range
from 1100 to 1300°F [595 to 705°C].
87
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-20 /SA-20M
Not for Resale
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
7.
8.2.2.1 When aluminum is used as the grain
refining element, the fine austenitic grain size requirement
shall be deemed to be fulfilled if, on heat analysis, the
aluminum content is not less than 0.020% total aluminum
or, alternately, 0.015% acid soluble aluminum.
Chemical Composition
7.1 Heat Analysis of each heat shall be made by the
manufacturer to determine the percentage of elements
specified in the individual material specification. This
analysis shall be made from a test specimen preferably
taken during the pouring of the heat. The chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to the purchaser, or the purchaser’s representative, and shall
conform to the heat analysis requirements of the applicable specification.
8.2.3 When specified on the order, one McQuaidEhn test (see 8.1) per heat shall be made and the austenitic
grain size of the steel, as represented by the test, shall
be Number 5 or finer.
8.2.4 By agreement between the purchaser and the
supplier, elements other than aluminum may be used for
grain refining. In such instances, the heat analysis limits
for the element, or elements, permitted shall be specified
on the order. In addition, the McQuaid-Ehn test of 8.2.3
shall be required.
7.1.1 Unspecified elements may be present. Unless
otherwise specified in the material specification, limits
on elements shall be as stated in Table 1.
7.1.1.1 Each of the elements listed in Table 1
shall be included in the report of the heat analysis. When
the amount of an element present is less than 0.02%, the
analysis may be reported as “< 0.02%.”
9.
Quality
9.1 General — Plates furnished under this specification shall be free of injurious defects and shall have a
workmanlike finish.
7.2 Product Analysis representing each plate as-rolled
may be made by the purchaser from a broken tension
test specimen or from a sample taken from the same
relative location as that from which the tension test specimen was obtained. The chemical composition thus determined, as to elements required or restricted, shall conform
to the product analysis requirements specified in the applicable specification.
9.2 Surface Imperfections:
9.2.1 All injurious surface imperfections shall be
removed by the manufacturer of discrete cut length plates.
For plates provided from coils, the processor shall remove
the injurious imperfections, rather than the manufacturer.
7.3 Referee Analysis — For referee purposes, Test
Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751 shall be
used.
9.2.1.1 Shallow imperfections shall be ground
to sound metal; the ground area shall be well faired and
the thickness of the ground plate shall not be reduced
below the minimum thickness permitted.
9.2.1.2 All surface imperfections, the removal
of which will reduce the plate thickness below this minimum, shall be cause for rejection of the plate; however,
by agreement with the purchaser, the metal so removed
may be replaced with weld metal as provided in 9.4.
8.
Metallurgical Structure
8.1 Where coarse austenitic grain size is specified,
the steel shall have a carburized austenitic grain size
number in the range from 1 to 5, inclusive, as determined
by the McQuaid-Ehn test. Determination shall be in
accordance with Test Methods E 112, Plate IV, by carburizing for 8 h at 1700°F [925°C]. At least 70% of the
grains in the area examined shall conform to the specified
grain size requirement. One test per heat shall be made.
9.3 Edge Imperfections:
9.3.1 Laminar-type discontinuities 1 in. [25 mm]
and less in length visible to the unaided eye on the edges
of a plate as prepared for shipment by the manufacturer or
processor are acceptable and do not require exploration.
8.2 Fine Austenitic Grain Size:
8.2.1 When a fine austenitic grain size is specified,
aluminum shall be used as the grain refining element
unless the order provides otherwise as specified in 8.2.4.
9.3.2 All larger discontinuities shall be explored to
determine their depth and extent. Discontinuities shall be
considered continuous when located in the same plane
within 5% of the plate thickness and separated by a distance less than the length of the smaller of two adjacent
discontinuities.
8.2.2 When a fine austenitic grain size is specified,
except as otherwise provided in 8.2.2.1, the steel shall
have a carburized austenitic grain size number of 5 or
higher (finer) as determined by the McQuaid-Ehn test in
accordance with Methods E 112, Plate IV. One test per
heat shall be made.
9.3.3 Indications visible to the unaided eye on the
cut edges of a plate as prepared for shipment by the
manufacturer or processor shall not exceed the limits
given in columns 1 and 2 of Table A1.14 [A2.14].
88
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
9.3.4 Larger indications shall be removed by the
manufacturer or processor by grinding provided the resultant cavity does not exceed the limits given in columns
3 and 4 of Table A1.14 [A2.14].
9.3.5 Indications of greater magnitude shall be
cause for rejection of a plate; however, by agreement
with the purchaser, the defects may be removed and
replaced with weld metal as provided in 9.4.
9.3.6 Indications on the edges of a plate cut during
the fabrication shall be cause for rejection of the plate at
the discretion of the purchaser when the magnitude
exceeds the limits given in columns 5 and 6 of Table
A1.14 [A2.14]. The defects may be removed and replaced
with weld metal as provided in 9.4.
9.3.7 Fabricators should be aware that edge cracks
may initiate upon bending a sheared or burned edge during the fabrication process. This is not considered to be
a fault of the steel, but is rather a function of the induced
cold work or heat-affected zone.
10. Test Methods
10.1 All tests shall be conducted in accordance with
Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
10.2 Yield strength may be determined either by the
0.2% offset method or the 0.5% extension under load
method unless otherwise stated in the material specification.
10.3 Rounding Procedures — For purposes of
determining conformance with the specification, a calculated value shall be rounded to the nearest 1 ksi [5 MPa]
tensile and yield strength, and to the nearest unit in the
right-hand place of figures used in expressing the limiting
value for other values in accordance with the rounding
method given in Practice E 29.
11. Tension Tests
11.1 Number of Tests — Except as specified in 11.1.1,
one tension test shall be taken from each plate-as-rolled,
except for plates subjected to heat treatment by quenching
and tempering. Two tension tests shall be taken from
each quenched and tempered plate. When plates are furnished by the manufacturer or processor in accordance
with 11.4.2 and qualified by heat-treated specimens
(including normalized, normalized and tempered, and
quenched and tempered), one tension test specimen shall
be taken from each plate-as-rolled (see 3.1.8 for the definition of plate-as-rolled).
9.4 Repair by Welding:
9.4.1 Repair welding shall be permitted only with
the approval of the purchaser.
9.4.2 Preparation for repair welding shall include
inspection to assure complete removal of the defect.
9.4.3 Repairs shall be made utilizing welding procedures qualified in accordance with Section IX of the
ASME Code and repair welding shall be done by welders
or welding operators meeting the qualification requirements of ASME Section IX.
9.4.4 The weld metal shall have the A-number
analysis corresponding to the equivalent ASME P number
of the plate material except that A-1 or A-2 analysis
weld metal may be employed for P-1 materials. Other
weld metals may be employed that are compatible with
the base material being repaired, when so approved by
the purchaser. Such weld metals must be qualified in
accordance with the requirements of Section IX of the
ASME Code.
9.4.5 If Charpy impact tests are required on the
plate material, the welding procedure qualification tests
shall also include Charpy impact tests of the weld, heataffected zone, and plate material, and shall be reported
to the purchaser.
9.4.6 If the plate material is subjected to normalizing, quenching and tempering, hot forming, or post-weld
heat treating, the welding procedure qualification test
plates and the weld-repaired plate shall be subjected to
the thermal heat treatment as specified by the purchaser.
9.4.7 In addition, repair welds shall meet the
requirements of the construction code specified by the
purchaser.
11.1.1 Plates Produced from Coils — Coiled product is excluded from qualification to individual material
specifications governed by this specification until
decoiled, leveled, cut to length, and properly tested by
the processor in accordance with ASTM specification
requirements. When plates are produced from coils, a
minimum of three tension tests shall be made from each
coil qualified, except as otherwise indicated as follows
for qualification of a portion of a coil.
11.1.1.1 The first test coupon shall be taken
immediately prior to the first plate produced to the qualifying specification, the second test coupon shall be taken
from the approximate center lap, and the third test coupon
shall be taken immediately after the last plate produced
to the qualifying specification. If, during decoiling, the
amount of material decoiled is less than that required to
reach the next standard test location, a test for qualification of that particular shipment may be made from a test
coupon taken from a location adjacent to the innermost
portion shipped.
11.1.1.2 All material between any two test locations that meet the requirements of the material specification is acceptable.
89
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-20 /SA-20M
Not for Resale
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
11.1.1.3 All material between a test location that
fails to meet the requirements of the material specification
and an adjacent acceptable test is rejectable. However,
other tests may be made after cutting back the coil in
either direction.
slower than, that attained by the method described in
11.4.4.2.
11.4.4.4 When test coupons cut from the plate
but heat treated separately are used, the coupon dimensions shall be not less than 3T by 3T by T and each
tension specimen cut from it shall meet the requirements
of 11.4.4.1.
11.2 Orientation of Tests — The longitudinal axis of
the tension-test specimens shall be transverse to the final
rolling direction of the plate.
11.3 Location of Tests — The tension test specimen
shall be taken from a corner of the plate. For quenched
and tempered plates, the tension test specimens shall be
taken from a corner of the plate at both ends of the plate.
11.4.4.5 If cooling rate data for the plate and
cooling rate control devices for the test specimens are
available, the test specimens may be heat treated separately in the device. This method shall require prior
approval of the purchaser.
11.4 Tests from Heat-Treated Plates:
11.4.1 When heat treatment is performed by the
manufacturer or processor, the test specimens shall be
taken from the plate in the heat-treated condition or from
full-thickness coupons simultaneously heat treated with
the plate.
11.5 Specimen Preparation:
11.5.1 Tension test specimens for plates 3⁄4 in. [20
mm] and under in thickness shall be the full thickness
of the plates. The test specimens shall conform to the
requirements for either the 11⁄2 in. [40 mm] wide or the
1
⁄2 in. [12.5 mm] wide rectangular tension test specimen
of Methods and Definitions A 370. The 11⁄2 in. [40 mm]
wide specimen may have both edges parallel. The 1⁄2 in.
[12.5 mm] wide specimen may have a maximum nominal
thickness of 3⁄4 in. [20 mm].
11.4.2 When heat treatment is to be performed by
the fabricator, the plates shall be accepted on the basis
of tests made on specimens taken from full thickness
coupons heat treated in accordance with the requirements
specified in the material specification or on the order.
If the heat-treatment temperatures are not specified, the
manufacturer or processor shall heat treat the coupons
under conditions he considers appropriate. The purchaser
shall be informed of the procedure followed in heat treating the specimens.
11.5.2 For plates up to 4 in. [100 mm], inclusive,
in thickness, tension test specimens may be the full thickness of the material and conform to the requirements for
the 11⁄2 in. [40 mm] wide rectangular tension test specimen of Methods and Definitions A 370 when adequate
testing machine capacity is available.
11.4.3 When approved by the purchaser, the procedures of paragraph 11.4.2 may be implemented on plates
heat treated by the manufacturer or processor.
11.4.4 When the plate is heat treated with a cooling
rate faster than still-air cooling from the austenitizing
temperature, one of the following shall apply in addition
to other requirements specified herein:
11.5.3 For plates over 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] in thickness,
except as permitted in 11.5.2, tension test specimens shall
conform to the requirements for the 0.500 in. [12.5 mm]
round specimen of Methods and Definitions A 370. The
axis of the specimen shall be located, as nearly as practicable, midway between the center of thickness and the top
or bottom surface of the plate.
11.4.4.1 The gage length of the tension test specimen shall be taken at least 1T from any as-heat treated
edge where T is the thickness of the plate and shall be
at least 1⁄2 in. [12.5 mm] from flame cut or heat-affectedzone surfaces.
11.4.4.2 A steel thermal buffer pad, 1T by 1T
by at least 3T, shall be joined to the plate edge by a
partial penetration weld completely sealing the buffered
edge prior to heat treatment.
11.6 Elongation Requirement Adjustments:
11.6.1 Due to the specimen geometry effect
encountered when using the rectangular tension test specimen for testing thin material, adjustments in elongation
requirements must be provided for thicknesses under
0.312 in. [8 mm]. Accordingly, the following deductions
shall be made from the base elongation requirements in
the individual plate specifications:
11.4.4.3 Thermal insulation or other thermal barriers shall be used during the heat treatment adjacent to
the plate edge where specimens are to be removed. It
shall be demonstrated that the cooling rate of the tension
test specimen is no faster than, and not substantially
90
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal Thickness
Range, in. [mm]
0.299–0.311
0.286–0.298
0.273–0.285
0.259–0.272
0.246–0.258
0.233–0.245
0.219–0.232
0.206–0.218
0.193–0.205
0.180–0.192
[7.60–7.89]
[7.30–7.59]
[7.00–7.29]
[6.60–6.99]
[6.20–6.59]
[5.90–6.19]
[5.50–5.89]
[5.20–5.49]
[4.90–5.19]
[4.60–4.89]
Elongation
Deduction, %
11.7 This specification does not provide requirements
for product tension testing subsequent to shipment (see
15.1). Therefore, the requirements of 11.1 through 11.6
and Section 16 apply only for tests conducted at the
place of manufacture prior to shipment. Compliance to
Specification A 20 /A 20M and the individual material
specifications does not preclude the possibility that product tension test results may vary outside specified ranges.
The tensile properties will vary within the same plateas-rolled or piece, be it as-rolled, control-rolled, or heattreated. The purchaser should, therefore, be aware that
tension testing in accordance with the requirements of
Specification A 20 /A 20M does not provide assurance
that all products of a plate-as-rolled will be identical in
tensile properties with the products tested. If the purchaser
wishes to have more confidence than that provided by
Specification A 20 /A 20M testing procedures, additional
testing or requirements, such as Supplementary Requirement S4, should be imposed.
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
11.6.2 Due to the inherently lower elongation
which is obtainable in thicker material, adjustments in
elongation requirements in 2 in. [50 mm] gage length
must be provided for thicknesses over 3.5 in. [90 mm].
Accordingly, the following deductions shall be made
from the base elongation requirements in 2 in. [50 mm]
listed in the individual plate specifications:
Plate Nominal Thickness
Range, in. [mm]
Elongation
Deduction, %
3.501–3.999 [90.00–102.49]
4.000–4.499 [102.50–114.99]
4.500–4.999 [115.00–127.49]
5.000–5.499 [127.50–139.99]
5.500–5.999 [140.00–152.49]
6.000 and thicker [152.50 and thicker]
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
11.8 Appendix X2 provides additional information on
the variability of tensile properties in plates for pressure
vessels.
12. Notch-Toughness Tests
12.1 Charpy V-Notch Tests:
12.1.1 Number of Tests — Except for plates subjected to quenching-and-tempering, and except as specified in 12.1.1.1 and 12.1.1.2, one impact test (3
specimens) for each specified orientation (see 12.1.2)
shall be made from each plate-as-rolled. For plates subjected to quenching-and-tempering, one impact test shall
be made from each plate-as-heat-treated.
11.6.3 A characteristic of certain types of alloy
steels is a local disproportionate increase in the degree
of necking down or contraction of the specimens under
tension test, resulting in a decrease in the percentage of
elongation as the gage length is increased. The effect is
not so pronounced in the thicker plates. On such material,
when so stated in the material specification for plates up
to 3⁄4 in. [20 mm], inclusive, in thickness, if the percentage
of elongation of an 8 in. [200 mm] gage length test
specimen falls not more than 3% below the amount prescribed, the elongation shall be considered satisfactory
provided the percentage of elongation in 2 in. [50 mm]
across the break is not less than 25%.
12.1.1.1 Plates Ordered Without the Heat Treatment Specified by the Material Specification — When
the material specification requires heat treatment but the
plates are ordered without such heat treatment, and when
Charpy V-notch tests are specified, one coupon shall be
taken from each plate-as-rolled. The coupon shall be heat
treated in accordance with the material specification and
the purchase order and the plate qualified by specimens
taken from the heat-treated coupon.
11.6.4 The tensile requirements tables in many of
the plate specifications covered by these general requirements specify elongation requirements in both 8 in. [200
mm] and 2 in. [50 mm] gage lengths. Unless otherwise
provided in the individual plate specification, it is not the
intent that both requirements apply simultaneously and
that the elongation be determined in both gage lengths.
Instead, it is intended that the elongation be determined
only in the gage length appropriate for the test specimen
used. After selection of the appropriate gage length, the
elongation requirement for the alternative gage length
shall be deemed not applicable.
12.1.1.2 Plates Produced from Coils — When the
plates are produced from coils and when Charpy V-notch
tests are specified, the number of impact tests required
shall be the same as the number specified in 11.1.1 for
tension tests. The test coupons shall be taken from the
material after flattening.
12.1.2 Orientation of Test Specimens — The long
axes of the specimens shall be oriented either longitudinal
(parallel to the final direction of rolling) or transverse
91
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-20 /SA-20M
Not for Resale
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
(transverse to the final direction of rolling) as specified
in the material specification or order.
12.1.6.2 When the acceptance criteria is based
on lateral expansion opposite the notch, the acceptance
value shall be the same for all sizes of specimens.
12.1.3 Location of Test Coupons — The impact test
coupons shall be taken adjacent to the tension test coupons. The impact test coupons shall be subject to the
same requirements as those specified for tension tests in
11.4 except that the provisions of 11.4.4.1 apply to the
area under the notch of the impact test specimen instead
of to the gage length of the tension test specimen.
12.1.7 Marking — The letters “LTV” shall be stenciled or stamped on each plate following the class number,
grade, etc.
12.1.8 Variability — The impact properties of steel
can vary within the same plate-as-rolled or piece, be it
as-rolled, control-rolled, or heat-treated. The purchaser
should, therefore, be aware that testing of one plate-asrolled does not provide assurance that all locations within
a plate-as-rolled will be identical in toughness with the
location tested. Normalizing or quenching and tempering
the product will reduce the degree of variation.
12.1.4 Test Method — Impact testing shall be performed in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions
A 370 using Charpy V-notch (Type A) specimens as
shown in Test Methods and Definitions A 370. Except
as provided in 12.1.4.1, full-size (10 by 10 mm) specimens shall be used when the plate thickness permits, and
their central axis shall correspond as near as practical to
the 1⁄4 t plane in the plate thickness t. Where the plate
thickness is insufficient to obtain full-size specimens,
sub-size specimens shall be used. The sub-size specimens
may have a width of full material thickness or may be
reduced in thickness to produce the largest possible standard sub-size specimen listed in Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
12.1.8.1 Appendix X3 provides additional information on the variability of Charpy V-Notch test properties in plates for pressure vessels.
12.2 Drop-Weight Tests:
12.2.1 When specified, one drop-weight test, consisting of a set of two specimens, shall be made to the
same frequency stated in 12.1.1 in accordance with
Method E 208.
12.2.2 The test coupons shall be obtained adjacent
to a tension test coupon. For plates produced from coils,
the test coupon locations shall be the same as for Charpy
V-notch tests. (See 12.1.) The provisions of 11.4 shall
also apply.
12.1.4.1 For materials that normally have
absorbed energy values in excess of 180 ft·lbf [245 J]
when tested using full-size specimens at the specified
testing temperature, sub-size 0.4 by 0.268 in. [10 by 6.7
mm] specimens may be used in lieu of full-size specimens. However, when this option is used, the acceptance
value shall be 75 ft·lbf [100 J] minimum for each specimen and the lateral expansion in mils [␮m] shall be
reported.
12.2.3 The testing temperature shall be as specified
in the material specification or order.
12.2.4 Acceptance shall be on the basis of no-break
performance of both specimens at the specified testing
temperature.
12.2.5 The plates shall be marked as required in
12.1.7 except that the letters “LTD” shall be used instead
of “LTV.”
12.1.5 Test Temperature — The test temperature
should be specified on the order. At the supplier’s option,
the actual test temperature may be lower than the specified
test temperature. When a test temperature is not specified,
tests shall be conducted at a temperature no higher than
listed in Table A1.15 [A2.15] for the class, grade, and
thickness of the material specified. The actual test temperature shall be reported with the test results.
13. Identification of Plates
13.1 Required Markings:
13.1.1 Except as allowed by 13.4, plates shall be
legibly marked with the following information: applicable
ASTM designation (see 1.1) (year of issue not required);
“G” or “MT” if applicable (see 13.1.2); applicable grade,
type, and class; heat number; plate identifier; and name,
brand, or trademark of the manufacturer (for plates produced in discrete cut lenghts of flat product) or the processor (for plates produced from coil and for subdivided
plates (see 13.4)).
12.1.6 Acceptance Criteria — Unless otherwise
agreed upon, the acceptance criteria shall be as listed in
Table A1.15 [A2.15] for the class, grade, and thickness
of the material specified.
12.1.6.1 When the acceptance criteria is based on
energy absorption of a full-size specimen, the acceptance
criteria for the various sub-size specimens shall be as
shown in Table A1.16 [A2.16] except as otherwise provided in 12.1.4.1.
13.1.2 Plates that are required to be heat treated,
but have not been so heat treated, shall be marked by the
92
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
manufacturer or processor with the letter “G” (denoting
green) following the required ASTM designation mark,
except that “G” marking is not necessary if such plates
are for shipment, for the purpose of obtaining the required
heat treatment, to an organization under the manufacturer’s control. Such plates shall have been qualified for
shipment on the basis of test specimens that have been
so heat treated. Plates that are required to be heat treated,
and have been so heat treated, shall be marked by the
party that performed the heat treatment with the letters
“MT” (denoting material treated) following the required
ASTM designation mark.
13.5 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements of
13.1 to 13.4 inclusive, the manufacturer or processor shall
have the option of using bar coding as a supplementary
identification method.
NOTE 2 — Bar coding should be consistent with AIAG Standard B 1.
14. Permissible Variations in Dimensions or Mass
14.1 One cubic foot of rolled steel shall be assumed
to weigh 490 lb, unless otherwise stated in the material
specification. One cubic meter of rolled steel is assumed
to have a mass of 7850 kg, unless otherwise stated in the
material specification.
NOTE 1 — Any stress relief of test specimens intended to simulate
post-weld heat treatment is not included in the above heat treatment.
14.2 For carbon steel plates the permissible variations
for dimensions shall not exceed the applicable limits
stated in Annex A1, Tables A1.1 to A1.9, and Table A1.13
[Annex A2, Tables A2.1 to A2.9, and Table A2.13].
13.2 Types of Marking:
13.2.1 Except as allowed by 13.4, the required
markings for plates over 1⁄4 in. [6 mm] in thickness shall
be by steel die stamping, unless paint marking is specified
in the purchase order.
14.3 For alloy steel plates the permissible variations
for dimensions shall not exceed the applicable limits
stated in Annex A1, Tables A1.1 to A1.4, A1.8, and
A1.10 to A1.13 [Annex A2, Tables A2.1 to A2.4, A2.8,
and A2.10 to A2.13].
13.2.2 Except as allowed by 13.4, the required
markings for plates 1⁄4 in. [6 mm] and under in thickness
shall be by paint marking or by steel die stamping using
low-stress (either round-nose or interrupted-dot) impressions.
15. Inspection and Testing
15.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall
have entry at all times while work on the contract of the
purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s works that concern the manufacture of the material
ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is
being furnished in accordance with the specification. All
tests (except product analysis) and inspection shall be
made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless
otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
13.3 Location of Markings:
13.3.1 Except as allowed by 13.4, the required
markings for plates with a maximum lenghtwise or crosswise dimensions more than 72 in. [1800 mm] shall be in
at least two places on each finished plate, at least 12 in.
[300 mm] from the edges of the plate.
13.3.2 Except as allowed by 13.4, the required
markings for plates with a maximum lenghtwise or crosswise dimensions of 72 in. [1800 mm] or less shall be in
at least one place on each finished plate, approximately
midway between the center and an edge of the plate.
15.2 When plates are produced from coils, 15.1 shall
apply to the “processor” instead of to the “manufacturer”
and the “place of process” shall apply instead of the
“place of manufacture.” When plates are produced from
coils and the processor is different from the manufacturer,
the inspector representing the purchaser shall have free
entry, at all times while work on the contract of the
purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s works that concern the manufacture of the material
ordered.
13.4 Subdivided Plates:
13.4.1 By agreement between the purchaser and
the processor, each subdivided plate (a plate separated
from a master plate) shall be legibly marked with the
name, brand, or trademark of the processor plus a code
traceable to the required markings, provided that the
information required in 13.1, cross-referenced to that
code, is furnished with the plates.
13.4.2 By agreement between the purchaser and
the processor, subdivided plates that are from the same
master plate and placed in secured lifts shall have the
information required in 13.1 paint marked on the top
piece of each lift or shown on a substantial tag attached
to each lift.
16. Retests
16.1 Tension Tests — In addition to the provisions of
Test Methods and Definitions A 370, the following retest
provisions shall apply:
93
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-20 /SA-20M
Not for Resale
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
16.1.1 If any test specimen shows defective
machining, or develops flaws, it may be discarded and
another specimen substituted.
the material may be reheat treated. All mechanical property tests shall be repeated and the plate surface shall be
reexamined for defects when the material is resubmitted
for inspection.
16.1.2 If the percentage of elongation of any tension
test specimen is less than that specified, and any part of
the fracture is more than 3⁄4 in. [20 mm] from the center
of the gage length of a 2 in. [50 mm] specimen or is
outside the middle half of the gage length of an 8 in.
[200 mm] specimen as indicated by scribe marks on the
specimen before testing, one retest shall be allowed.
18. Rejection
18.1 Any rejection based on product analysis made
in accordance with the material specification shall be
reported to the supplier and samples that represent the
rejected material shall be preserved for 2 weeks from the
date of notification of such rejection. In case of dissatisfaction with the results of the tests, the supplier may
make claim for a rehearing within that time.
16.1.3 If the results from an original tension test
specimen fail to meet the specified requirements but are
within 2 ksi [14 MPa] of the required tensile strength or
within 1 ksi [7 MPa] of the required yield strength or
yield point, or within 2% points of the required elongation
or reduction in area, one retest shall be permitted to
replace the failing test.
18.2 Material that shows injurious defects subsequent
to its acceptance at the manufacturer’s or processor’s
works may be rejected. In such cases, the manufacturer
or processor shall be notified.
16.1.4 The results of the retest shall meet the specified requirements.
19. Test Reports
19.1 The manufacturer or processor shall report the
results of all tests required by the material specification,
applicable supplementary requirements, and the order.
The heat number, the plate identifier of the plate tested,
and the nominal plate thickness shall be shown on the
test report. The year-date of the specification to which
the material is furnished shall be included on the test
report.
16.2 Charpy V-Notch Tests:
16.2.1 The retest provisions of Test Methods and
Definitions A 370 shall apply except that the 5 ft·lbf
[7 J] absolute minimum for an individual specimen, as
specified in Test Methods and Definitions A 370, does
not apply when two-thirds of the specified minimum average is less than 5 ft·lbf [7 J].
16.2.2 When Charpy V-notch impact test lateral
expansion values are specified, if the value of one specimen falls below the specified minimum value and not
below two-thirds of the specified minimum value, and if
the average of the three specimens equals or exceeds the
specified minimum value, a retest of three additional
specimens may be made. Each of the three retest specimens must equal or exceed the specified minimum value.
19.1.1 In reporting elongation values, both the percentage increases and the original gage length shall be
stated.
19.2 For plates rolled from a strand-cast slab with a
reduction ratio in the range from 2.0:1 to 3.0:1, exclusive,
the specific practices (see 5.3.4 and 5.3.6) that were used
by the manufacturer shall be reported, and the test reports
shall state that the limitations of 5.3 have been met.
16.2.3 If the required values are not obtained on
Charpy V-notch retests as specified in 16.2.1 and 16.2.2,
or if the values in the initial test are below the values
required for retest, no further retests are permitted unless
the plate is heat treated or reheat treated. After heat treatment or reheat treatment, a set of three specimens shall
be tested and each must equal or exceed the specified
minimum value.
19.3 All heat treatment, exclusive of subcritical heating to soften thermally cut edges, shall be reported including temperature ranges and time at temperature. This
exclusion does not apply to those materials with specified
minimum tensile strengths of 95 ksi [655 MPa] or higher
unless such subcritical heating is accomplished at temperatures at least 75°F [40°C] below the minimum tempering
temperature. The reports shall state whether the plates
only, the test specimens only, or both plates and test
specimens were heat treated.
16.2.4 When the option of 12.1.4.1 is used and the
test result falls below the 75 ft·lbf [100 J] minimum
specified, another test may be made using full-size specimens.
19.4 When Charpy V-notch tests are specified, the
specimen size used shall be reported.
17. Retreatment
17.1 If any heat-treated material fails to meet the
mechanical requirements of the applicable specification,
19.5 When required by the purchase order, the manufacturer shall also furnish a certification that the material
94
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-20 /SA-20M
has been manufactured and tested in accordance with
the requirements of the material specification. For plates
provided from coils, the processor shall furnish the
required certification.
the supplier. Notwithstanding the absence of a signature,
the organization submitting the EDI transmission is
responsible for the content of the report.
19.6 For plates produced from coils, both the manufacturer and processor shall be identified on the test report.
20.
Packaging, Marking, and Loading for
Shipment
20.1 Packaging, marking, and loading for shipment
shall be in accordance with those procedures recommended by Practices A 700.
19.7 A signature is not required on the test report.
However, the document shall clearly identify the organization submitting the report. Notwithstanding the absence
of a signature, the organization submitting the report is
responsible for the content of the report.
20.2 For USA Government Procurement — Packaging, packing, and marking of material for military procurement shall be in accordance with the requirements
of MIL-STD-163, Level A, Level C, or commercial as
specified in the contract or purchase order. Marking for
shipment of material for civil agencies shall be in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123.
19.8 Copies of the original manufacturer’s test report
shall be included with any subsequent test report.
19.9 A Material Test Report, Certificate of Inspection,
or similar document printed from or used in electronic
form from an electronic data interchange (EDI) transmission shall be regarded as having the same validity as a
counterpart printed in the certifier’s facility. The content
of the EDI transmitted document must meet the requirements of the invoked ASTM standard(s) and conform to
any existing EDI agreement between the purchaser and
21. Keywords
21.1 general delivery requirement; pressure containing parts; pressure vessel steels; steel plates; steel
plates for pressure vessel applications
95
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE 1
LIMITS ON UNSPECIFIED ELEMENTS (SEE 7.1.1)
Copper, max. %A
Heat analysis
Product analysis
0.40
0.43
Nickel, max. %A
Heat analysis
Product analysis
0.40
0.43
Chromium, max. %A,B
Heat analysis
Product analysis
0.30
0.34
Heat analysis
Product analysis
0.12
0.13
Vanadium, max. %C
Heat analysis
Product analysis
0.03
0.04
Columbium, max. %D
Heat analysis
Product analysis
0.02
0.03
Titanium, max. %E
Heat analysis
Product analysis
0.03
0.04
Molybdenum, max. %
A,B
TABLE 2
MAXIMUM CARBON EQUIVALENT FOR
WELDABILITY
Specified Minimum UTS
ksi [MPa]
NOTES:
A
The sum of copper, nickel, chromium, and molybdenum shall
not exceed 1.00% on heat analysis. When one or more of these elements are specified, the sum does not apply; in which case, only
the individual limits on the remaining unspecified elements will
apply.
B
The sum of chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed
0.32% on heat anaylsis. When one or more of these elements are
specified, the sum does not apply; in which case, only the individual
limits on the remaining unspecified elements will apply.
C
By agreement between the purchaser and the supplier, the heat
analysis limit for vanadium is permitted to be increased to a value
not higher than 0.10%, and the product analysis limit for vanadium is permitted to be increased to a value not higher than
0.11%.
D
By agreement between the purchaser and the supplier, the heat
analysis limit for columbium is permitted to be increased to a
value not higher than 0.05%, and the product analysis limit for
columbium is permitted to be increased to a value not higher than
0.06%.
E
By agreement between the purchaser and the supplier, the heat
analysis limit for titanium is permitted to be increased to a value
not higher than 0.04%, and the product analysis limit for titanium
is permitted to be increased to a value not higher than 0.05%.
Thickness up
to 2 in.
[50 mm]
Incl.
Thickness
Over 2 in.
[50 mm]
60 ≤ UTS < 70
[415 ≤ UTS < 485]
0.45
0.46
70 ≤ UTS < 80
[485 ≤ UTS < 550]
0.47
0.48A
UTS ≥ 80
[UTS ≥ 550]
0.48A,B
...
NOTES:
A
If simulated PWHT of the test coupons is specified (S3), the
maximum carbon equivalent value may be increased up to 0.50
upon agreement between purchaser and supplier.
B
Applicable to quenched-and-tempered material; for other conditions, maximum carbon equivalent shall be by agreement between
purchaser and supplier.
96
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Maximum Carbon
Equivalent Value
Not for Resale
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-20 /SA-20M
TABLE 3
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR
CARBON STEEL PLATES AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS
Specified
Thickness, in.
Permissible Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in.
48 to 60, Excl.
1
To ⁄4, excl.
1
⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl.
3
⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl.
1
⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl.
3
⁄4 to 1, excl.
1 to 2, incl.
60 to 72, Excl.
3
15
9
3
⁄4
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
1
⁄4
⁄16
⁄4
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
72 to 84, Excl.
Z
7
⁄8
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
84 to 96, Excl.
Z
15
⁄16
7
⁄16
⁄8
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
96 to 108, Excl.
108 to 120, Incl.
Z
11⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
Z
11⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
3
⁄8
NOTE 1 — Flatness Variations for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the
length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft of longer plates.
NOTE 2 — Flatness Variations for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified
width.
NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 1⁄4
in. in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 in., inclusive, the permissible flatness variation shall not exceed 75% of
the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 1⁄4 in.
NOTE 4 — The variations given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 60 ksi or comparable
chemistry or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or compatible chemistry or hardness, the permissible variations are 11⁄2 times the amounts shown in the table below.
NOTE 5 — This table and these notes cover the flatness variations of circular and sketch plates based on the maximum dimensions of
those plates.
NOTE 6 — Waviness tolerances for rectangular plates, universal mill plates, and circular and sketch plates do not apply.
NOTE 7 — A “Z” indicates that there is no published restricted value for the size.
NOTE 8 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
TABLE 4
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR
CARBON STEEL PLATES AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS
Permissible Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, mm
Specified
Thickness,
mm
1200 to 1500,
Excl.
1500 to 1800,
Excl.
1800 to 2100,
Excl.
2100 to 2400,
Excl.
2400 to 2700,
Excl.
2700 to 3000,
Incl.
To 6, excl.
6 to 10, excl.
10 to 12, excl.
12 to 20, excl.
20 to 25, excl.
25 to 50, excl.
18
15
8
7
7
7
24
18
8
8
8
7
Z
22
10
8
8
7
Z
24
11
10
8
8
Z
27
13
13
10
8
Z
29
15
13
11
8
NOTE 1 — Flatness Variations for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the
length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 3700 mm in length, or in any 3700 mm of longer plates.
NOTE 2 — Flatness Variations for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified
width.
NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 6
mm in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, inclusive, the permissible flatness variation shall not exceed
75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 6 mm.
NOTE 4 — The variations given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 415 MPa or comparable chemistry or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or compatible chemistry or hardness, the permissible variations are 11⁄2 times the amounts shown in the table below.
NOTE 5 — This table and these notes cover the flatness variations of circular and sketch plates based on the maximum dimensions of
those plates.
NOTE 6 — Waviness tolerances for rectangular plates, universal mill plates, and circular and sketch plates do not apply.
NOTE 7 — A “Z” indicates that there is no published restricted value for the size.
NOTE 8 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
97
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE 5
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR HIGH-STRENGTH
LOW-ALLOY STEEL PLATES AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS
Specified
Thickness,
in.
To 1⁄4, excl.
1
⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl.
3
⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl.
1
⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl.
3
⁄4 to 1, excl.
1 to 2, incl.
Permissible Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
48 to 60,
Excl.
60 to 72,
Excl.
72 to 84,
Excl.
84 to 96,
Excl.
96 to 108,
Excl.
108 to 120,
Incl.
11⁄16
⁄8
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
3
⁄8
17⁄16
11⁄16
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
Z
15⁄16
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
Z
17⁄16
11
⁄16
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
Z
11⁄2
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
Z
111⁄16
13
⁄16
11
⁄16
11
⁄16
1
⁄2
7
NOTE 1 — Flatness Variations for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the
length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft of longer plates.
NOTE 2 — Flatness Variations for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified
width.
NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 3⁄8
in. in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 in., inclusive, the permissible flatness variation shall not exceed 75% of
the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 3⁄8 in.
NOTE 4 — This table and these notes cover the flatness variations of circular and sketch plates based on the maximum dimensions of
those plates.
NOTE 5 — Waviness tolerances for rectangular plates, universal mill plates, and circular and sketch plates do not apply.
NOTE 6 — A “Z” indicates that there is no published restricted value for the size.
NOTE 7 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
TABLE 6
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR HIGH-STRENGTH
LOW-ALLOY STEEL PLATES AS-ROLLED OR NORMALIZED ORDERED TO RESTRICTIVE FLATNESS
Permissible Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, mm
Specified
Thickness,
mm
1200 to 1500,
Excl.
1500 to 1800,
Excl.
1800 to 2100,
Excl.
2100 to 2400,
Excl.
2400 to 2700,
Excl.
2700 to 3000,
Incl.
To 6, excl.
6 to 10, excl.
10 to 12, excl.
12 to 20, excl.
20 to 25, excl.
25 to 50, excl.
27
22
12
11
11
10
36
27
12
11
11
11
Z
33
15
13
12
11
Z
36
17
15
13
12
Z
39
19
16
15
13
Z
43
21
18
17
13
NOTE 1 — Flatness Variations for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the
length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 3700 mm in length, or in any 3700 mm of longer plates.
NOTE 2 — Flatness Variations for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified
width.
NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed
10 mm in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, inclusive, the permissible flatness variation shall not exceed
75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 10 mm.
NOTE 4 — This table and these notes cover the variations for flatness of circular and sketch plates based on the maximum dimensions of
those plates.
NOTE 5 — Waviness tolerances for rectangular plates, universal mill plates, and circular and sketch plates do not apply.
NOTE 6 — A “Z” indicates that there is no published restricted value for the size.
NOTE 7 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
98
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-20 /SA-20M
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
The following standardized supplementary requirements are for use when desired by the
purchaser. Several of those that are considered suitable for use with each material specification are listed in the specification. Other tests may be performed by agreement between
the supplier and the purchaser. These supplementary requirements shall apply only when
specified in the order, in which event the specified tests shall be made by the supplier
before shipment of the plates.
S1. Vacuum Treatment
S1.1 The steel shall be made by a process which
includes vacuum degassing while molten. Unless otherwise agreed upon with the purchaser, it is the responsibility of the manufacturer to select suitable process
procedures.
additional tests with specified properties shall be a matter
of agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
S2. Product Analysis
S2.1 A product analysis shall be made of each plate
as rolled. The specimens for analysis shall be taken adjacent to or from a broken tension-test specimen.
S5. Charpy V-Notch Impact Test
S5.1 Charpy V-notch impact tests shall be conducted
in accordance with 12.1.
S4.3 For plates produced from coils, the additional
tension test shall be taken immediately after the last plate
produced to the qualifying specification.
S5.2 The orientation of the test bars, whether longitudinal or transverse to the direction of rolling, shall be as
stated on the order.
S3.
Simulated Post-Weld Heat Treatment of
Mechanical Test Coupons
S3.1 Prior to testing, the test specimens representing
the plate for acceptance purposes for mechanical properties shall be thermally treated to simulate a post-weld
heat treatment below the critical temperature (Ac3), using
the heat treatment parameters (such as temperature range,
time, and cooling rates) specified in the order. The test
results of such heat-treated test specimens shall meet the
applicable product specfication requirements.
S5.3 The test temperature and the required acceptance
criteria, if other than those required in 12.1, shall be as
stated on the order.
S5.4 The recorded results shall include test-bar orientation, specimen size, test temperature, absorbed energy
values, and, when specified on the order for other than
Class VI material, lateral expansion opposite the notch.
The percent shear fracture appearance shall also be recorded when specified on the order.
S6.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Drop-Weight Test (for Plates 0.625 in. [16
mm] and Over in Thickness)
S6.1 Drop-weight tests shall be made in accordance
with the requirements of Test Method E 208. The specimens shall represent the plates in the final condition of
heat treatment. Agreement shall be reached between the
purchaser and the manufacturer or processor as to the
number of plates to be tested and whether a maximum
NDT temperature is mandatory or if the test results are
for information only.
S4. Additional Tension Test
S4.1 Other Than Quenched-and-Tempered Plates —
In addition to the required single-tension test, a second
tension test shall be made on a specimen taken from a
corner of the plate-as-rolled on the end opposite the single
specimen and in a direction parallel to the single specimen. The results obtained on testing this second specimen
shall conform to the requirements of the specification.
S4.2 Quenched-and-Tempered Plates 2 in. [50 mm]
or Greater in Thickness — In addition to the required
tension tests, two additional specimens shall be taken
from the bottom corner of the plate. One shall be taken at
the center of the plate thickness and the other immediately
beneath the surface. Mandatory conformance of these
S7. High-Temperature Tension Tests
S7.1 A short-time elevated temperature tension test
shall be made to represent each plate or each heat of steel
99
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
as indicated by the purchaser. The material for testing
shall be obtained as required for the room temperature
tension tests specified in the body of the specification.
The hot tests shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Practice E 21. Mandatory conformance of these
additional tests with specified properties shall be a matter
for agreement between the manufacturer or processor and
the purchaser.
A 578 /A 578M. The acceptance level shall be as specified on the order.
S13. NDT Temperature Determination
S13.1 The NDT temperature shall be established in
accordance with Method E 208 using coupons from a
single plate. The number of plates to be so tested shall
be subject to agreement between the purchaser and the
manufacturer or processor.
S8.
Ultrasonic Examination in Accordance with
A 435 /A435M
S8.1 All plates shall be ultrasonically examined in
accordance with the requirements of Specification
A 435 /A 435M.
S15. Reduction of Area Measurement
S15.1 A reduction of area measurement shall be taken
while making the required tension test. Reduction of area
shall be determined only on the 0.500 in. [12.5 mm]
round specimen as shown in Fig. 5 of Test Methods and
Definitions A 370. The minimum acceptance limit shall
be 40%.
S9. Magnetic Particle Examination
S9.1 All plate edges shall be examined by magnetic
particles in accordance with the procedures covered in
Practice E 709. The acceptability of defects revealed by
this examination shall be judged in accordance with the
requirements for quality in 9.3.
S16.
Thermal Stress Relief of Mechanical Test
Coupons
S16.1 Test coupons representing the plates shall be
thermally stress relieved by gradually and uniformly heating them to a temperature between 1100 and 1200°F [595
and 650°C], or a temperature range otherwise agreed upon
between the manufacturer or processor and the purchaser,
holding at temperature for at least 1 h /in. [2.4 min /mm]
of thickness and cooling in still air to a temperature not
exceeding 600°F [315°C].
S10. Charpy V-Notch Impact Transition Curve
S10.1 Sufficient impact tests of the same specimen
size shall be made from the plate test material to establish
a transition curve. The test temperature range shall be
wide enough to establish the upper and lower shelf energies, with sufficient testing at intermediate temperatures
to permit plotting a reasonable smooth curve. A plot of
the data is not required. The manufacturer shall report
the specimen orientation, test temperature, and absorbed
energy for each specimen tested. Lateral expansion and
percent shear shall also be reported when specified in the
order. The number of plates tested and the specimen
orientation shall be the same as in 12.1 unless otherwise
specified in the order.
S17. Vacuum Carbon-Deoxidized Steel
S17.1 Material shall be vacuum carbon-deoxidized,
in which case the silicon content at the time of vacuum
deoxidizing shall be 0.12% maximum, and the content
of deoxidizers such as aluminum, zirconium, and titanium
should be kept low enough to allow deoxidation by carbon. The test report shall indicate that the steel was vacuum carbon-deoxidized. The minimum heat analysis and
product analysis requirements for silicon do not apply to
vacuum carbon-deoxidized steel.
S11.
Ultrasonic Examination in Accordance with
A 577 /A 577M
S11.1 All plates shall be ultrasonically examined in
accordance with the requirements of Specification
A 577 /A 577M.
S19. Restricted Chemical Requirements
S19.1 Restricted heat analysis and product analysis
limits are applicable as defined on the order.
S12.
Ultrasonic Examination in Accordance with
A 578 /A 578M
S12.1 All plates shall be ultrasonically examined in
accordance with the requirements of Specification
S20. Maximum Carbon Equivalent for Weldability
S20.1 Plates shall be supplied with a specific maximum carbon equivalent value. This value shall be based
100
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
on heat analysis. The required chemical analysis as well
as the carbon equivalent shall be reported.
S25.
SA-20 /SA-20M
Weldability
S25.1 Weldability tests shall be conducted. The type
of test and the acceptance criteria shall be as agreed upon
between the manufacturer and purchaser.
S20.2 The carbon equivalent shall be calculated using
the following formula:
CE p C + Mn/6 + (Cr + Mo + V)/5 + (Ni + Cu)/15
S20.3 The maximum value of the carbon equivalent
for carbon steels (including C-Mn, C-Mn-Si, C-Mn-SiAl steels), are given in Table 2.
S26.
Low-Sulfur Steels
S26.1 The steel shall be made to 0.010% sulfur maximum. Lower sulfur levels and sulfide shape control practices can be specified by agreement between purchaser
and supplier.
S21. Restricted Unspecified Elements
S21.1 The maximum limits on certain elements are
0.35% Cu, 0.25% Ni, 0.25% Cr, and 0.08% Mo on heat
analysis. The sum of Cu, Ni, Cr, and Mo shall not exceed
0.70% on heat analysis.
S27.
Restrictive Plate Flatness
S27.1 Carbon steel plates, as-rolled or normalized,
shall conform to the permissible restrictive variations
from flatness as detailed in Table 3 or 4.
S22. Through-Thickness Tension Tests
S22.1 Through-thickness tension tests shall be made
in accordance with the requirements of Specification
A 770 /A 770M. (See Ordering Information in Specification A 770 /A 770M for the additional information that
may be needed.)
S27.2 High-strength low-alloy steel plates, as-rolled
or normalized, shall conform to the permissible restrictive
variations from flatness as detailed in Table 5 or 6.
S28.
Heat Treatment in the Working Zone of a
Surveyed Furnace
S28.1 Plates shall be heat treated in the working zone
of a furnace that has been surveyed in accordance with
Test Method A 991 /A 991M, provided that such working
zone was established using a variation of 25°F [15°C] or
less from the furnace set point.
S24. Strain Age Test
S24.1 Test coupons shall be given a strain age treatment designated by the purchaser. Charpy V-notch tests
shall be conducted on the strain aged specimens. Heat
treatment, strain aging, test temperature, and acceptance
criteria shall be as agreed upon between the manufacturer
and purchaser.
S28.2 The test report shall indicate that S28 applies.
101
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
ANNEXES
(Mandatory Information)
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
A1. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN
DIMENSIONS, ETC. — INCH-POUND
UNITS
A1.1 Listed below are permissible variations in
dimensions, and notch toughness information, expressed
in inch-pound units of measurement.
102
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
103
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Not for Resale
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.06
0.09
0.11
0.15
0.23
0.29
0.29
To 1⁄4, excl.
1
⁄4 to 5⁄16, excl.
5
⁄16 to 3⁄8, excl.
3
⁄8 to 7⁄16, excl.
7
⁄16 to 1⁄2, excl.
1
⁄2 to 5⁄8, excl.
5
⁄8 to 3⁄4, excl.
3
⁄4 to 1, excl.
1 to 2, excl.
2 to 3, excl.
3 to 4, excl.
4 to 6, excl.
6 to 10, excl.
10 to 12, excl.
12 to 15, incl.
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.06
0.09
0.11
0.15
0.24
0.29
0.29
Over 48
to 60,
Excl.
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.06
0.09
0.11
0.15
0.24
0.33
0.35
60 to
72,
Excl.
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.06
0.10
0.11
0.15
0.24
0.33
0.35
72 to
84,
Excl.
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.06
0.10
0.11
0.15
0.24
0.33
0.35
84 to
96,
Excl.
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.07
0.11
0.13
0.15
0.24
0.33
0.35
96 to
108,
Excl.
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.08
0.12
0.14
0.15
0.24
0.33
0.35
108 to
120,
Excl.
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.10
0.13
0.14
0.15
0.24
0.33
0.35
120 to
132,
Excl.
Tolerance Over Specified Thickness for Widths Given, in.
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.06
0.10
0.14
0.14
0.15
0.24
0.33
0.35
132 to
144,
Excl.
...
...
0.05
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.06
0.07
0.11
0.15
0.15
0.20
0.27
0.33
0.35
144 to
168,
Excl.
...
...
...
0.06
0.06
0.07
0.07
0.08
0.13
0.15
0.17
0.20
0.28
0.35
0.35
168 to
182,
Excl.
...
...
...
...
...
...
0.07
0.09
0.16
...
...
...
...
...
...
182
and
Over
NOTE 1 — Permissible variation under specified thickness, 0.01 in.
NOTE 2 — Thickness to be measured at 3⁄8 to 3⁄4 in. from the longitudinal edge.
NOTE 3 — For thickness measured at any location other than that specified in Note 2, the permissible maximum over-tolerance shall be increased by 75%, rounded to the nearest
0.01 in.
48
and
Under
Specified
Thickness,
in.
TABLE A1.1
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN THICKNESS FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-20 /SA-20M
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE A1.2
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS OVER IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR SHEARED PLATES (NOTE 1)
AND LENGTH ONLY FOR UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES (NOTE 2)
Variations Over Specified Width and Length for Thicknesses, Given in.
To 3⁄8, Excl.
Specified Dimensions, in.
Length
To 120, excl.
120 to 240, excl.
240 to 360, excl.
360 to 480, excl.
480 to 600, excl.
600 to 720, excl.
720 and over
Width
3
⁄8 to 5⁄8, Excl.
5
⁄8 to 1, Excl.
1 to 2, Incl.A
Width
Length
Width
Length
Width
Length
Width
Length
over 8 to 60, excl.
60 to 84, excl.
84 to 108, excl.
108 and over
3
⁄8
⁄16
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
1
5
1
3
5
7
⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
7
5
1
5
7
3
1
11⁄8
1
11⁄8
1
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
over 8 to 60, excl.
60 to 84, excl.
84 to 108, excl.
108 and over
3
⁄8
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
⁄4
7
⁄8
1
1
1
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
3
over 8 to 60, excl.
60 to 84, excl.
84 to 108, excl.
108 and over
3
1
1
1
11⁄8
over 8 to 60, excl.
60 to 84, excl.
84 to 108, excl.
108 and over
1
⁄8
⁄2
1
9
⁄16
11
⁄16
7
⁄16
⁄2
1
9
⁄16
3
⁄4
⁄16
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
⁄2
⁄8
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
3
5
1
⁄2
⁄8
11
⁄16
7
⁄8
5
⁄8
⁄16
7
⁄8
1
7
⁄8
⁄8
15
⁄16
11⁄8
7
11⁄8
11⁄8
11⁄8
11⁄4
11⁄8
11⁄4
11⁄4
13⁄8
1
⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
13⁄8
11⁄2
5
⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
11
5
⁄8
⁄4
13
⁄16
7
⁄8
3
⁄4
⁄8
7
⁄8
⁄4
⁄4
⁄8
1
11⁄8
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
13⁄8
⁄8
⁄4
7
⁄8
11⁄4
11⁄4
13⁄8
13⁄8
5
⁄8
⁄4
7
⁄8
13⁄8
11⁄2
11⁄2
15⁄8
5
⁄8
⁄4
7
⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8
15⁄8
13⁄4
1
11⁄4
17⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
3
5
3
1
3
1
3
⁄4
⁄8
7
1
11⁄4
3
⁄4
⁄8
7
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
13⁄4
15⁄8
15⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
over 8 to 60, excl.
60 to 84, excl.
84 to 108, excl.
108 and over
7
⁄16
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
11⁄4
13⁄8
13⁄8
11⁄2
1
⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
15⁄8
over 8 to 60, excl.
60 to 84, excl.
84 to 108, excl.
108 and over
1
⁄2
⁄8
5
⁄8
7
⁄8
13⁄4
13⁄4
13⁄4
13⁄4
5
⁄8
⁄4
3
⁄4
17⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
2
⁄4
⁄8
7
⁄8
11⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
17⁄8
21⁄4
7
⁄8
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄2
over 8 to 60, excl.
60 to 84, excl.
84 to 108, excl.
108 and over
9
2
2
2
2
3
21⁄8
21⁄8
21⁄8
23⁄8
7
⁄8
1
1
11⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄4
21⁄2
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
23⁄4
23⁄4
23⁄4
3
1
5
⁄16
⁄4
3
⁄4
3
1
5
3
1
⁄4
⁄8
7
⁄8
11⁄8
7
3
1
7
3
⁄4
⁄8
7
NOTE 1 — Carbon steel and high-strength low-alloy steel plates 11⁄2 in. and under in thickness. Alloy steel plates 11⁄4 in. and under in
thickness.
NOTE 2 — Carbon steel and high-strength low-alloy steel plates 21⁄2 in. and under in thickness. Alloy steel plates 2 in. and under in
thickness.
NOTE 3 — Permissible variation under specified width and length: 1⁄4 in.
A
Permissible variations in length apply also to carbon-steel and high-strength low-alloy steel universal mill plates up to 12 in. in width for
thicknesses over 2 to 21⁄2 in., incl.
104
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-20 /SA-20M
TABLE A1.3
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN ROLLED WIDTH FOR
UNIVERSAL MILL CARBON-STEEL, HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND
ALLOY-STEEL PLATES 15 IN. AND UNDER IN THICKNESS
Variations Over Specified Width for
Thicknesses Given, in.
Specified Width, in.
Over 8 to 20, excl.
20 to 36, excl.
36 and over
To 3⁄8,
Excl.
3
⁄8 to 5⁄8,
Excl.
1
1
⁄8
⁄16
5
⁄16
⁄8 to 1,
Excl.
Over 2
to 10,
Incl.
1 to 2,
Incl.
3
⁄8
⁄4
3
⁄8
1
⁄16
⁄16
7
⁄16
1
3
5
3
⁄4
⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
⁄16
9
⁄16
3
7
NOTE 1 — Permissible variation under specified width shall be 1⁄8 in.
TABLE A1.4
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN
DIAMETER FOR SHEARED CIRCULAR
CARBON-STEEL, HIGH-STRENGTH
LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY-STEEL PLATES
1 IN. AND UNDER IN THICKNESS
Permissible Variations Over Specified
Diameter for Thicknesses Given, in.
Specified
Diameter, in.
3
3
To ⁄8, Excl.
To 32, excl.
32 to 84, excl.
84 to 108, excl.
108 to 130, incl.
⁄8 to 5⁄8,
Excl.
1
3
5
7
⁄4
⁄16
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
5
⁄8 to 1,
Incl.
1
⁄8
⁄16
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
⁄2
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
9
NOTE 1 — No permissible variations under specified diameter.
TABLE A1.5
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH
FOR RECTANGULAR CARBON-STEEL AND
HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL PLATES
WHEN GAS CUTTING IS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED
Specified Thickness, in.
Variations Over for All Specified
Widths or Lengths, in.
1
To 2, excl.
2 to 4, excl.
4 to 6, excl.
6 to 8, excl.
8 to 15, incl.
⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
1
5
NOTE 1 — These variations may be taken all under or divided
over and under, if so specified.
NOTE 2 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to
length only.
105
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Over 10
to 15,
Incl.
1
⁄2
⁄16
5
⁄8
9
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE A1.6
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR GAS-CUT
CIRCULAR CARBON-STEEL AND HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL PLATES
Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given, in.
Specified
Diameter, in.
To 1,
Excl.
1 to 2,
Excl.
3
3
To 32, excl.
32 to 84, excl.
84 to 108, excl.
108 to 130, excl.
130 and over
2 to 4,
Excl.
⁄8
⁄8
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
1
⁄8
⁄2
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
3
⁄4
⁄2
⁄2
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
7
⁄8
1
3
1
4 to 6,
Excl.
6 to 8,
Excl.
1
⁄8
⁄4
7
⁄8
1
11⁄8
⁄2
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
1
5
NOTE 1 — No permissible variations under specified diameter.
TABLE A1.7
PERMISSIBLE CAMBER FOR
CARBON STEEL SHEARED OR GAS-CUT
RECTANGULAR PLATES ALL THICKNESSES
Maximum permissible camber, in. p 1⁄8 in. ⴛ (number of feet of
length/5)
NOTE 1 — Camber, as it relates to plates, is the horizontal
edge curvature in the length, measured over the entire length of the
plate in the flat position.
TABLE A1.8
PERMISSIBLE CAMBER FOR CARBON STEEL, HIGHSTRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL
UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES AND HIGH-STRENGTH
LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL SHEARED OR
GAS-CUT RECTANGULAR PLATES
Dimension, in.
Thickness
Camber for Thickness
and Widths Given
Width
⁄8 in. ⴛ (number of feet of
length/5)
3
⁄16 in. ⴛ (number of feet of
length/5)
1
⁄4 in. ⴛ (number of feet of
length/5)
1
To 2, incl.
all
Over 2 to 15, incl.
to 30, incl.
Over 2 to 15, incl.
over 30
106
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
8 to 15,
Incl.
5
3
3
7
⁄4
⁄8
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
⁄16
⁄2
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
3
⁄8
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
9
1
⁄4
⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
5
3
36 to 48,
Excl.
⁄16
⁄4
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
13
⁄16
3
15
48 to 60,
Excl.
11⁄4
15
⁄16
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
13
⁄16
7
⁄8
60 to 72,
Excl.
13⁄8
11⁄8
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
72 to 84,
Excl.
11⁄2
11⁄4
7
⁄8
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
3
⁄4
13
⁄16
15
⁄16
1
84 to 96,
Excl.
15⁄8
13⁄8
1
1
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
1
⁄2
5
⁄8
7
⁄8
7
⁄8
1
1
96 to 108,
Excl.
13⁄4
11⁄2
11⁄8
1
7
⁄8
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
1
1
17⁄8
15⁄8
11⁄4
11⁄8
1
11
⁄16
5
⁄8
7
⁄8
1
1
1
1
...
...
17⁄8
11⁄2
13⁄8
11⁄8
7
⁄8
7
⁄8
1
1
1
1
108 to 120, 120 to 144, 144 to 168,
Excl.
Excl.
Excl.
Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in.
...
...
21⁄8
2
13⁄4
11⁄2
11⁄8
1
1
1
1
...
168 and
Over
NOTE 1 — Flatness Variations for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount
for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft of longer plates.
NOTE 2 — Flatness Variations for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 1⁄4 in. in each direction. When the longer
dimension is from 36 to 72 in., inclusive, the flatness variation shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 1⁄4 in.
NOTE 4 — The tolerances given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 60,000 psi or compatible chemistry or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or compatible chemistry or hardness, the limits given in the table are increased to 11⁄2 times the amounts in the above table.
NOTE 5 — This table and notes cover the flatness tolerances of circular and sketch plates, based on the maximum dimensions of those plates.
NOTE 6 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
To 1⁄4, excl.
⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl.
3
⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl.
1
⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl.
3
⁄4 to 1, excl.
1 to 2, excl.
2 to 4, excl.
4 to 6, excl.
6 to 8, excl.
8 to 10, excl.
10 to 12, excl.
12 to 15, incl.
1
Specified
Thickness, in.
Over 8
to 36,
Excl.
TABLE A1.9
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR CARBON-STEEL PLATES
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
107
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Not for Resale
SA-20 /SA-20M
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE A1.10
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH
FOR RECTANGULAR ALLOY-STEEL PLATES WHEN
GAS CUTTING IS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED
Variations Over for All Specified
Widths and Lengths, in.
Specified Thickness, in.
3
⁄4
1
11⁄8
15⁄16
11⁄2
To 2, excl.
2 to 4, excl.
4 to 6, excl.
6 to 8, excl.
8 to 15, incl.
NOTE 1 — These variations may be taken all under or divided
over and under, if so specified.
NOTE 2 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to
length only.
TABLE A1.11
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR
GAS-CUT CIRCULAR ALLOY-STEEL PLATES
Variations Over Specified Diameter for Thicknesses Given, in.
Specified
Diameter, in.
To 32, excl.
32 to 84, excl.
84 to 108, excl.
108 to 130, incl.
To 1,
Excl.
1
⁄2
⁄2
5
⁄8
7
⁄8
1
1 to 2,
Excl.
2 to 4,
Excl.
3
3
5
7
⁄4
⁄8
3
⁄4
1
⁄4
⁄8
1
11⁄8
4 to
6,
Excl.
6 to
8,
Excl.
8 to
15,
Incl.
3
⁄4
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
1
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
NOTE 1 — No permissible variations under specified diameter.
108
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
⁄16
⁄4
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
3
13
Over 8
to 36,
Excl.
11⁄8
15
⁄16
7
⁄8
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
5
⁄8
9
⁄16
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
13
⁄16
15
⁄16
1
36 to
48, Excl.
13⁄8
11⁄8
15
⁄16
13
⁄16
7
⁄8
3
⁄4
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
15
⁄16
11⁄8
13⁄16
48 to
60, Excl.
17⁄8
13⁄8
15
⁄16
7
⁄8
7
⁄8
13
⁄16
3
⁄4
3
⁄4
15
⁄16
1
1
⁄4
15⁄16
60 to
72, Excl.
2
13⁄4
11⁄8
1
15
⁄16
7
⁄8
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
1
11⁄8
15⁄16
13⁄8
72 to
84, Excl.
21⁄4
17⁄8
15⁄16
11⁄8
1
15
⁄16
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
84 to
96, Excl.
23⁄8
2
11⁄2
11⁄4
11⁄8
1
3
⁄4
15
⁄16
11⁄4
15⁄16
11⁄2
11⁄2
96 to
108, Excl.
25⁄8
21⁄4
15⁄8
13⁄8
15⁄16
1
7
⁄8
11⁄8
15⁄16
13⁄8
11⁄2
11⁄2
108 to
120, Excl.
23⁄4
23⁄8
17⁄8
15⁄8
11⁄2
1
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
120 to
144, Excl.
...
...
23⁄4
21⁄4
2
15⁄8
11⁄4
11⁄4
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
144 to
168, Excl.
...
...
31⁄8
3
25⁄8
21⁄4
15⁄8
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
11⁄2
168 and
Over
NOTE 1 — Flatness Tolerance for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in from a flat surface along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 ft in length, or in any 12 ft of longer plates.
NOTE 2 — Flatness Tolerances for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width.
NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 36 in., the variation shall not exceed 3⁄8 in. When the larger dimension is from 36 to 72 in., incl., the variation shall not exceed
75% of the tabular amount for the specified width.
NOTE 4 — This table and these notes cover the variations for flatness of circular and sketch plates based on the maximum dimensions of those plates.
NOTE 5 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
To 1⁄4, excl.
⁄4 to 3⁄8, excl.
3
⁄8 to 1⁄2, excl.
1
⁄2 to 3⁄4, excl.
3
⁄4 to 1, excl.
1 to 2, excl.
2 to 4, excl.
4 to 6, excl.
6 to 8, excl.
8 to 10, excl.
10 to 12, excl.
12 to 15, incl.
1
Specified
Thickness, in.
Variations From a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, in.
TABLE A1.12
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY AND ALLOY-STEEL PLATES
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-20 /SA-20M
109
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE A1.13
WAVINESS TOLERANCES FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES, UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES,
AND CIRCULAR AND SKETCH PLATES
Flatness
Tolerance
from Tables
A1.9 and
A1.12
When Number of Waves in 12 ft is:
5
⁄16
⁄8
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
13
⁄16
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
1
1 1⁄8
1 1⁄4
1 3⁄8
1 1⁄2
1 5⁄8
1 3⁄4
1 7⁄8
2
2 1⁄8
2 1⁄4
2 3⁄8
2 1⁄2
2 5⁄8
2 3⁄4
2 7⁄8
3
3 1⁄8
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
1
⁄4
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
1 1⁄16
1 1⁄8
1 1⁄4
1 5⁄16
1 7⁄16
1 1⁄2
1 5⁄8
111⁄16
113⁄16
1 7⁄8
2
2 1⁄16
2 3⁄16
2 1⁄4
2 3⁄8
3
⁄16
⁄16
1
⁄4
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
1
1 1⁄16
1 1⁄8
1 3⁄16
1 1⁄4
1 5⁄16
1 7⁄16
1 1⁄2
1 9⁄16
1 5⁄8
111⁄16
1 3⁄4
1
⁄8
⁄16
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
13
⁄16
7
⁄8
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
1
1 1⁄16
1 1⁄8
1 1⁄8
1 3⁄16
1 1⁄4
1 5⁄16
1
⁄8
⁄8
1
⁄8
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
13
⁄16
13
⁄16
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
15
⁄16
1
⁄16
⁄16
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
⁄16
⁄8
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
3
⁄4
13
⁄16
7
⁄8
15
⁄16
1
1 1⁄8
1 1⁄4
1 3⁄8
1 1⁄2
1 5⁄8
1 3⁄4
1 7⁄8
2
2 1⁄8
2 1⁄4
2 3⁄8
2 1⁄2
2 5⁄8
2 3⁄4
2 7⁄8
3
3 1⁄8
3
3
5
3
3
7
1
1
1
⁄16
⁄16
1
⁄16
1
⁄16
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
1
⁄8
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
3
⁄16
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
1
⁄4
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
5
⁄16
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
3
⁄8
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
7
⁄16
1
⁄2
1
⁄2
9
⁄16
9
⁄16
1
1
NOTE 1 — Waviness denotes the deviation of the top or bottom surface from a horizontal line, when
the plate is resting on a flat surface, as measured in an increment of less than 12 ft of length. The waviness tolerance is a function of the flatness tolerance as obtained from Tables A1.9 and A1.12.
TABLE A1.14
VISIBLE EDGE INDICATIONS EXTENDING APPROXIMATELY PARALLEL TO ROLLED SURFACES
Acceptable
Acceptable on Edges
Cut in Fabrication
Remove by Grinding
Plate Specification
and Thickness
Depth
LengthA
Depth
LengthA
Depth
LengthA
Column
1
2
3
4
5
6
any
any
any
over 1⁄8 in. to 1⁄4 in., incl.
over 1⁄16 in. to 1⁄8 in., incl.
over 1⁄8 in. to 1⁄2 in., incl.
over 1 in.
over 1 in.
over 1 in.
⁄4 in. max.
⁄8 in. max.
1
⁄2 in. max.
any
any
any
Nonkilled,B to 2 in., incl.
Killed,C to 6 in., incl.
Killed,C over 6 in.
1
⁄8 in. max.
⁄16 in. max.
1
⁄8 in. max.
1
A
Laminar-type discontinuities 1 in. and less in length are acceptable and do not require exploration.
Specifications: A 285; A 433; A 442 in thicknesses to 1 in., incl.; or A 455.
C
The specification in 1.1 of this standard other than those listed in footnote B of the preceding table.
B
110
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
1
1
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
13
13
I
II
III
15
10
ClassB
IV
Average For 3
SpecimensC
ft-lbf, Min.
Energy Absorption
12
10
10
7
Minimum For
1 SpecimenC
ft-lbf
Acceptance Criteria Charpy V-Notch
111
Not for Resale
A 203
A 203
A 203
A 299
A 516
A 537
A 537
A 662
A 203
A 203
A 442
A 442
A 516
A 516
A 516
A 537
A 662
A 662
A 455
Grade 70
Class 1 (21⁄2 in. max.)
Class 2 (Over 21⁄2–4 in.)
Grade C
Grade B
Grade E
Grade F (4 in. max.)
Grade A
Grade D
Grade 55 (11⁄2 in. max. thickness)
Grade 60 (11⁄2 in. max. thickness)
Grade 55
Grade 60
Grade 65
Class 1 (Over 21⁄2–4 in.)
Grade A
Grade B
A 285 Grade A
A 285 Grade B
A 285 Grade C
Specification and GradeA
−90
−150
...
+20
−50
−80
...
−50
−90
−150
...
...
−60
−60
−60
...
−75
−60
+25
+40
+50
+60
1 in. and
Under
−90
−150
...
+30
−40
−75
...
−50
−90
−150
−20
−15
−60
−50
−50
...
−75
−60
...
+60
+70
+80
Over 1 in. to
2 in., Incl.
−75
−125
−160
+30
−30
−75
−75
...
−75
−125
...
...
−50
−50
−40
−75
...
...
...
...
...
...
Over 2 in. to
3 in., Incl.
Test Temperature, °F for Plate Thicknesses
(Unless Otherwise Agreed Upon)
TABLE A1.15
GENERALLY AVAILABLE GRADE-THICKNESS-MINIMUM TEST TEMPERATURE COMBINATIONS
MEETING CHARPY V-NOTCH REQUIREMENTS INDICATED (NORMALIZED OR QUENCHED AND TEMPERED CONDITION)
...
...
−160
+40
−20
...
−50
...
...
...
...
...
−50
−50
−25
−50
...
...
...
...
...
...
Over 3 in. to
5 in., Incl.
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-20 /SA-20M
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
V
112
Not for Resale
15
15
Minimum For
1 SpecimenC
ft-lbf
A 353
A 553
A 553
A 645
A 517
A 724
all (21⁄2 in. max. thickness)
Grade B
Type I
Type II
A 203 Grade F
A 537 Class 2 (21⁄2 in. max.)
A 612
A 724 Grade A
Specification and GradeA
B
Testing temperature as specified on order but no higher than 32°F.
Class I is Other Than Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi or lower.
Class II is Other Than Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 65 ksi to 75 ksi.
Class III is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 65 ksi or lower.
Class IV is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 65 ksi to 75 ksi.
Class V is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 75 ksi to but not including 95 ksi.
Class VI is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 95 ksi and over.
C
Full size (10 by 10 mm) specimens.
A
Lateral Expansion
Mils. Minimum
Each Specimen
Transverse Test
20
ClassB
Energy Absorption
Acceptance Criteria Charpy V-Notch
Average For 3
SpecimensC
ft-lbf, Min.
VI
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
−320
−320
−275
−275
A
...
A
−50
−160
−90
...
...
Over 1 in. to
2 in., Incl.
−320
−320
−275
−275
−160
−90
−50
−50
1 in. and
Under
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
−90
...
...
Over 2 in. to
3 in., Incl.
Test Temperature, °F for Plate Thicknesses
(Unless Otherwise Agreed Upon)
TABLE A1.15 (CONT’D)
GENERALLY AVAILABLE GRADE-THICKNESS-MINIMUM TEST TEMPERATURE COMBINATIONS
MEETING CHARPY V-NOTCH REQUIREMENTS INDICATED (NORMALIZED OR QUENCHED AND TEMPERED CONDITION)
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Over 3 in. to
5 in., Incl.
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-20 /SA-20M
TABLE A1.16
CHARPY V-NOTCH TEST ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR VARIOUS SUB-SIZE SPECIMENSA
Full Size, 10 by
10 mm
3
2
⁄4 Size, 10 by
7.5 mm
1
⁄3 Size, 10 by
6.7 mm
1
⁄2 Size, 10 by 5
mm
⁄3 Size, 10 by
3.3 mm
1
⁄4 Size, 10 by
2.5 mm
ft-lbf
[J]
ft-lbf
[J]
ft-lbf
[J]
ft-lbf
[J]
ft-lbf
[J]
ft-lbf
[J]
40
35
30
25
20
16
15
13
12
10
7
[54]
[48]
[41]
[34]
[27]
[22]
[20]
[18]
[16]
[14]
[10]
30
26
22
19
15
12
11
10
9
8
5
[41]
[35]
[30]
[26]
[20]
[16]
[15]
[14]
[12]
[11]
[7]
27
23
20
17
13
11
10
9
8
7
5
[37]
[31]
[27]
[23]
[18]
[15]
[14]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[7]
20
18
15
12
10
8
8
6
6
5
4
[27]
[24]
[20]
[16]
[14]
[11]
[11]
[8]
[8]
[7]
[5]
13
12
10
8
7
5
5
4
4
3
2
[18]
[16]
[14]
[11]
[10]
[7]
[7]
[5]
[5]
[4]
[3]
10
9
8
6
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
[14]
[12]
[11]
[8]
[7]
[5]
[5]
[4]
[4]
[3]
[3]
A
Interpolation shall be made for specimens with widths intermediate of those listed. Interpolated values shall be rounded to the nearest
whole number as prescribed in Practice E 29.
TABLE A1.17
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WIDTH FOR MILL
EDGE CARBON STEEL AND HIGH-STRENGTH LOWALLOY STEEL PLATES PRODUCED ON STRIP MILLS
Variations
Over Specified
Width, in.A
Specified Width, in.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
To
14
17
19
21
24
26
28
35
50
60
65
70
80
7
14, excl.
to 17, excl.
to 19, excl.
to 21, excl.
to 24, excl.
to 26, excl.
to 28, excl.
to 35, excl.
to 50, excl.
to 60, excl.
to 65, excl.
to 70, excl.
to 80, excl.
and over
⁄16
⁄2
9
⁄16
5
⁄8
11
⁄16
13
⁄16
15
⁄16
1 1⁄8
1 1⁄4
1 1⁄2
1 5⁄8
1 3⁄4
1 7⁄8
2
1
NOTE 1 — Applies to either plates produced from coils or
plates produced in discrete cut lengths of flat product.
A
No permissible variation under specified width.
113
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
A2. PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN
DIMENSIONS, ETC. — SI UNITS
A2.1 Listed herein are permissible variations in
dimensions, and notch toughness information, expressed
in SI units.
TABLE A2.1
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN THICKNESS FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES
Tolerance Over Specified Thickness for Widths Given in Millimeters, mm
Specified
Thickness,
mm
5.0
5.5
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
14.0
16.0
18.0
20.0
22.0
25.0
28.0
30.0
32.0
35.0
38.0
40.0
45.0
50.0
55.0
60.0
70.0
80.0
90.0
100.0
110.0
120.0
130.0
140.0
150.0
160.0
180.0
200.0
250.0
300.0
Over
1200 to
1200 and 1500,
Under
Excl.
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
5.8
7.5
7.5
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
5.8
7.5
7.5
1500 to
1800,
Excl.
1800 to
2100,
Excl.
2100 to
2400,
Excl.
2400 to
2700,
Excl.
2700 to
3000,
Excl.
3000 to
3300,
Excl.
3300 to
3600,
Excl.
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.5
9.0
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.5
9.0
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.5
3.5
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.5
9.0
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.8
3.8
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.5
9.0
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.5
3.8
3.8
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.5
9.0
0.9
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.3
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.8
3.8
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.5
9.0
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.4
1.4
1.5
1.5
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.3
2.5
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.4
3.6
3.6
3.6
3.8
3.8
3.8
4.0
4.3
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.0
7.5
9.0
3600 to
4200, 4200 and
Excl.
Over
...
...
1.4
1.4
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.6
1.6
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.1
2.3
2.5
2.7
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.8
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.4
4.4
4.8
5.2
5.6
5.6
5.6
6.3
7.0
7.5
9.0
...
...
...
...
...
1.7
1.7
1.8
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.2
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.3
3.5
3.8
3.8
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.4
4.4
4.4
4.8
5.2
5.6
5.6
5.6
6.3
7.0
8.8
9.0
...
...
NOTE 1 — Permissible variation under specified thickness, 0.3 mm.
NOTE 2 — Thickness shall be measured 10 to 20 mm from the longitudinal edge.
NOTE 3 — For specified thicknesses other than those shown, the tolerances for the next higher thickness shall apply.
NOTE 4 — For thickness measured at any location other than that specified in Note 2, the permissible maximum over tolerance shall be
increased by 75%, rounded to the nearest 0.1 mm.
114
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-20 /SA-20M
TABLE A2.2
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS OVER IN WIDTH AND LENGTH FOR
SHEARED PLATES (NOTE 1) AND LENGTH ONLY FOR UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES (NOTE 2)
Variations Over Specified Width and Length
for Thicknesses Given, mm
Specified Dimensions, mm
To 10, Excl.
Length
Width
10 to 16, Excl.
16 to 25, Excl.
Width
Length
Width
Length
Width
Length
25 to 50, Incl.A
Width Length
To 3,000 excl.
To 1500, excl.
1500 to 2100, excl.
2100 to 2700, excl.
2700 and over
10
11
13
16
13
16
19
22
11
13
16
19
16
17
22
25
13
16
19
22
19
22
25
29
16
19
25
29
25
25
29
32
3,000 to 6,000 excl.
To 1500, excl.
1500 to 2100, excl.
2100 to 2700, excl.
2700 and over
10
13
14
16
19
19
22
25
13
16
17
19
22
22
24
29
16
19
21
22
25
25
29
32
19
22
25
29
29
32
35
35
6,000 to 9,000, excl.
To 1500, excl.
1500 to 2100, excl.
2100 to 2700, excl.
2700 and over
10
13
14
17
25
25
25
29
13
16
17
22
29
29
32
32
16
19
22
25
32
32
35
35
19
22
25
32
38
38
38
44
9,000 to 12,000, excl.
To 1500, excl.
1500 to 2100, excl.
2100 to 2700, excl.
2700 and over
11
13
14
19
29
32
32
35
13
16
19
22
32
35
35
38
16
19
22
25
35
38
38
41
19
22
25
32
41
41
48
48
12,000 to 15,000, excl.
To 1500, excl.
1500 to 2100, excl.
2100 to 2700, excl.
2700 and over
11
13
16
19
32
35
35
38
13
16
19
22
38
38
38
41
16
19
22
25
41
41
41
44
19
22
25
32
48
48
48
48
15,000 to 18,000, excl.
To 1500, excl.
1500 to 2100, excl.
2100 to 2700, excl.
2700 and over
13
16
16
22
44
44
44
44
16
19
19
25
48
48
48
51
19
22
22
29
48
48
48
57
22
25
29
32
57
57
57
64
18,000 and over
To 1500, excl.
1500 to 2100, excl.
2100 to 2700, excl.
2700 and over
14
19
19
25
51
51
51
51
19
22
22
29
54
54
54
60
22
25
25
32
57
57
57
64
25
29
32
35
70
70
70
76
NOTE 1 — Carbon steel and high-strength low-alloy steel plates 40 mm and under in thickness. Alloy steel plates 30 mm and under in
thickness.
NOTE 2 — Carbon steel and high-strength low-alloy steel plates 65 mm and under in thickness. Alloy steel plates 50 mm and under in
thickness.
NOTE 3 — Permissible variation under in specified width and length: 6 mm.
A
Permissible variations in length apply also to carbon-steel and high-strength low-alloy steel universal mill plates up to 300 mm in width
for thicknesses over 50 to 65 mm, incl.
115
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE A2.3
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN ROLLED WIDTH FOR UNIVERSAL
MILL CARBON-STEEL, HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY
AND ALLOY-STEEL PLATES 400 MM AND UNDER IN THICKNESS
Variations Over Specified Width for Thickness Given, mm
Specified Width,
mm
Over 200 to 500, excl.
500 to 900, excl.
900 and over
To 10,
Excl.
10 to
16,
Excl.
16 to
25,
Excl.
25 to
50,
Excl.
Over
50 to
250,
Incl.
Over
250 to
400,
Incl.
3
5
8
3
6
10
5
8
11
6
10
13
10
11
14
13
14
16
GENERAL NOTE: Permissible variation under specified width shall be 3 mm.
TABLE A2.4
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR
SHEARED CIRCULAR CARBON STEEL, HIGHSTRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND ALLOY-STEEL
PLATES 25 MM AND UNDER IN THICKNESS
TABLE A2.6
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR
GAS-CUT CIRCULAR CARBON-STEEL AND
HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL PLATES
Variations Over Specified Diameter
for Thicknesses Given, mm
Permissible Variations
Over Specified Diameter
for Thicknesses Given, mm
Specified
Diameters, mm
To 800, excl.
800 to 2100, excl.
2100 to 2700, excl.
2700 to 3300, excl.
3300 and over
To 10,
Excl.
10 to
16, Excl.
16 to 25,
Incl.
6
8
10
11
13
10
11
13
14
16
13
14
16
17
19
Specified
Diameters,
mm
To 800, excl.
800 to 2100, excl.
2100 to 2700, excl.
2700 to 3300, excl.
3300 and over
TABLE A2.5
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH
FOR RECTANGULAR CARBON-STEEL AND HIGHSTRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL PLATES WHEN GAS
CUTTING IS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED
Specified Thickness, mm
To 50, excl.
50 to 100, excl.
100 to 150, excl.
150 to 200, excl.
200 to 400, incl.
13
16
19
22
25
10
13
14
14
19
13
13
16
17
22
13
16
19
22
25
16
19
22
25
29
19
22
25
29
32
TABLE A2.7
PERMISSIBLE CAMBER FOR CARBON STEEL
SHEARED OR GAS-CUT RECTANGULAR PLATES
ALL THICKNESSES
Maximum permissible camber, mm p length
in millimeters/500
GENERAL NOTE: Camber, as it relates to plates, is the horizontal
edge curvature in the length, measured over the entire length of the
plate in the flat position.
NOTE 1 — These variations may be taken all under or divided
over and under, if so specified.
NOTE 2 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to
length only.
116
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
10
10
13
13
16
GENERAL NOTE: No permissible variations under specified
diameter.
GENERAL NOTE: No permissible variations under specified
diameter.
Variations Over for All Specified
Widths or Lengths, mm
25 to 50 to 100 to 150 to 200 to
To 25, 50, 100, 150, 200, 400,
Excl. Excl. Excl. Excl. Excl. Excl.
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-20 /SA-20M
TABLE A2.8
PERMISSIBLE CAMBER FOR CARBON STEEL,
HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL AND
ALLOY STEEL UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES
AND HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY STEEL
AND ALLOY STEEL SHEARED OR GAS-CUT
RECTANGULAR PLATES
Camber for Width
Given, mm
Width, mm
To 750, incl.
Over 750 to 1500
Length/300
Length/250
GENERAL NOTE: Camber, as it relates to plates, is the horizontal
edge curvature in the length, measured over the entire length of the
plate in the flat position.
TABLE A2.9
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR CARBON-STEEL PLATES
Permissible Variations from a Flat Surface for Specified Widths, mm
Specified Thickness,
mm
To 6, excl.
6 to 10, excl.
10 to 12, excl.
12 to 20, excl.
20 to 25, excl.
25 to 50, excl.
50 to 100, excl.
100 to 150, excl.
150 to 200, excl.
200 to 250, excl.
250 to 300, excl.
300 to 400, incl.
To 900,
Excl.
900 to
1200
1200 to
1500
1500 to
1800
1800 to
2100
2100 to
2400
2400 to
2700
2700 to
3000
3000 to
3600
14
13
13
11
11
10
8
10
11
13
13
16
19
16
14
13
13
13
10
11
13
13
16
19
24
19
16
14
14
13
11
13
13
16
19
21
32
24
16
16
16
14
13
13
16
18
21
22
35
29
19
16
16
14
13
14
18
19
22
24
38
32
22
19
16
16
13
14
19
21
24
25
41
35
25
25
19
16
13
16
22
22
25
25
44
38
29
25
22
16
14
19
22
24
25
25
48
41
32
29
25
18
16
22
25
25
25
25
3600 to 4200 and
4200
Over
...
...
48
38
35
29
22
22
25
25
25
25
...
...
54
51
44
38
29
25
25
25
25
...
NOTE 1 — Flatness Variations for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variation in flatness along the
length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 4000 mm in length, or in any 4000 mm of longer plates.
NOTE 2 — Flatness Variations for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified
width.
NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the variation in flatness along the length and across the width shall not exceed 6
mm in each direction. When the longer dimension is from 900 to 1800 mm, inclusive, the flatness variation shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 6 mm.
NOTE 4 — The tolerances given in this table apply to plates that have a minimum specified tensile strength not over 400 MPa or compatible chemistry or hardness. For plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or compatible chemistry or hardness, the limits given in
the table are increased to 11⁄2 times the amounts in the above table.
NOTE 5 — This table and notes cover the flatness tolerances of circular and sketch plates, based on the maximum dimensions of those
plates.
NOTE 6 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
117
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE A2.10
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WIDTH AND LENGTH
FOR RECTANGULAR ALLOY-STEEL PLATES WHEN
GAS CUTTING IS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED
Specified Thickness, mm
Variations Over for All Specified
Widths and Lengths, mm
To 50, excl.
50 to 100, excl.
100 to 150, excl.
150 to 200, excl.
200 to 400, incl.
19
25
29
33
38
TABLE A2.11
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN DIAMETER FOR
GAS-CUT CIRCULAR ALLOY-STEEL PLATES
Variations Over Specified Diameter for
Thicknesses Given, mm
Specified
Diameter, mm
To 800, excl.
800 to 2100, excl.
2100 to 2700, excl.
2700 to 3300, incl.
NOTE 1 — These variations may be taken all under or divided
over and under, if so specified.
NOTE 2 — Plates with universal rolled edges will be gas cut to
length only.
25 to 50 to 100 to 150 to 200 to
To 25, 50, 100, 150, 200, 400,
Excl. Excl. Excl. Excl. Excl. Incl.
13
13
16
22
13
16
19
25
19
22
25
29
19
25
29
32
25
29
32
35
25
32
35
38
GENERAL NOTE: No permissible variations under specified
diameter.
TABLE A2.12
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FROM FLATNESS FOR HIGH-STRENGTH LOW-ALLOY AND ALLOY-STEEL PLATES
Flatness Tolerances for Specified Widths, mm
To 900,
Excl.
900 to
1200
1200 to
1500
1500 to
1800
1800 to
2100
2100 to
2400
2400 to
2700
2700 to
3000
3000 to
3600
To 6, excl.
6 to 10, excl.
10 to 12, excl.
12 to 20, excl.
20 to 25, excl.
25 to 50, excl.
50 to 100, excl.
100 to 150, excl.
150 to 200, excl.
200 to 250, excl.
250 to 300, excl.
300 to 400, incl.
21
19
19
16
16
14
13
14
16
19
19
22
29
24
22
19
19
16
14
18
19
21
24
25
35
29
24
21
22
19
18
19
19
24
29
30
48
35
24
22
22
21
19
19
24
25
32
33
51
44
29
25
24
22
19
22
25
29
33
35
57
48
33
29
25
24
19
22
29
32
35
38
60
51
38
32
29
25
19
24
32
33
38
38
67
57
41
35
33
25
22
29
33
35
38
38
70
60
48
41
38
25
25
32
38
38
38
38
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Specified Thickness,
mm
3600 to 4200 and
4200
Over
...
...
70
57
51
41
32
32
38
38
38
38
...
...
79
76
67
57
41
38
38
38
38
38
NOTE 1 — Flatness Tolerances for Length — The longer dimension specified is considered the length and variations from a flat surface
along the length shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 4000 mm in length, or in any 4000 mm of longer
plates.
NOTE 2 — Flatness Tolerances for Width — The flatness variation across the width shall not exceed the tabular amount for the specified
width.
NOTE 3 — When the longer dimension is under 900 mm, the variation shall not exceed 10 mm. When the larger dimension is from 900
to 1800 mm, incl, the variation shall not exceed 75% of the tabular amount for the specified width.
NOTE 4 — This table and notes cover the tolerances for flatness of circular and sketch plates, based on the maximum dimensions of those
plates.
NOTE 5 — Plates shall be in a horizontal position on a flat surface when flatness is measured.
118
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-20 /SA-20M
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
TABLE A2.13
WAVINESS TOLERANCES FOR RECTANGULAR PLATES,
UNIVERSAL MILL PLATES AND CIRCULAR AND SKETCH PLATES
Flatness
Tolerance
from Tables
A2.9 and
A2.12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
13
14
16
17
19
21
22
24
25
29
32
35
38
41
44
48
51
54
57
60
64
67
70
73
76
79
8
10
11
13
14
16
17
19
21
22
24
25
29
32
35
38
41
44
48
51
54
57
60
64
67
70
73
76
79
6
8
8
10
11
13
13
14
16
17
17
19
22
24
27
29
32
33
37
38
41
43
46
48
51
52
56
57
60
5
5
6
8
8
10
10
11
11
13
13
14
16
17
19
22
24
25
27
29
30
32
33
37
38
40
41
43
44
3
5
5
5
6
6
8
8
8
10
10
11
13
13
14
16
17
19
21
22
22
24
25
27
29
29
30
32
33
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
8
8
10
10
11
13
13
14
14
16
17
17
19
21
21
22
24
24
25
2
2
3
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
8
8
10
10
11
11
13
13
14
14
14
16
16
17
17
19
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
5
5
6
6
6
8
8
8
10
10
10
11
11
11
13
13
14
14
When Number of Waves in 4000 mm is:
GENERAL NOTE: Waviness denotes the deviation of the top or bottom surface from a horizontal line, when
the plate is resting on a flat surface, as measured in an increment of less than 4000 mm of length. The
waviness tolerance is a function of the flatness tolerance as obtained from Tables A2.9 and A2.12.
119
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE A2.14
VISIBLE EDGE INDICATIONS EXTENDING APPROXIMATELY PARALLEL TO ROLLED SURFACES
Acceptable
Acceptable on Edges
Cut in Fabrication
Remove by Grinding
Plate Specification
and Thickness
Depth
LengthA
Depth
LengthA
Depth
LengthA
Column
1
2
3
4
5
6
Nonkilled,B to 50 mm, incl.
Killed,C to 150 mm, incl.
Killed,C over 150 mm
3 mm, max.
2 mm, max.
3 mm, max.
any
any
any
over 3 to 6 mm, incl.
over 2 to 3 mm, incl.
over 3 to 13 mm, incl.
over 25 mm
over 25 mm
over 25 mm
6 mm max.
3 mm max.
13 mm max.
any
any
any
A
Laminar-type discontinuities 25 mm and less in length are acceptable and do not require exploration.
Specifications: A 285; A 433; A 442 in thicknesses to 25 mm, incl., or A 455.
C
The specifications in 1.1 Scope of this document other than those listed in the above footnote B.
B
TABLE A2.15
GENERALLY AVAILABLE GRADE-THICKNESS-MINIMUM TEST TEMPERATURE COMBINATIONS
MEETING CHARPY V-NOTCH REQUIREMENTS INDICATED
(NORMALIZED OR QUENCHED AND TEMPERED CONDITION)
Acceptance Criteria Charpy V-Notch
Test Temperature, °C, for Plate Thicknesses
(Unless Otherwise Agreed Upon)
Energy Absorption
Average
for 3
SpecimensB, J,
Min.
Minimum
for 1
SpecimenB,
J
I
14
10
II
18
III
18
ClassA
IV
20
25 mm
and
Under
Over
25 mm to
50 mm,
Incl.
Over
50 mm to
75 mm,
Incl.
Over
75 mm to
125 mm,
Incl.
A 285 Grade A
A 285 Grade B
A 285 Grade C
+4
+10
+16
+16
+21
+27
...
...
...
...
...
...
14
A 455
−4
...
...
...
14
A 203 Grade A
A 203 Grade D
A 442 Grade 55 (38 mm
max. thickness)
A 442 Grade 60 (38 mm
max. thickness)
A 516 Grade 55
A 516 Grade 60
A 516 Grade 65
A 537 Class 1 (Over 64–100
mm)
A 662 Grade A
A 662 Grade B
−68
−101
−68
−101
−60
−87
...
...
...
−29
...
...
...
−51
−51
−51
−26
−51
−46
−46
...
−46
−46
−40
...
−46
−46
−32
...
−60
−51
...
−60
−51
−60
...
...
−46
...
...
A 203 Grade B
A 203 Grade E
A 203 Grade F (100 mm
max.)
A 299
A 516 Grade 70
A 537 Class 1 (64 mm max.)
A 537 Class 2 (Over 64–100
mm)
A 662 Grade C
−68
−101
−68
−101
−60
−87
...
...
...
−7
−46
−62
...
−1
−40
−60
−107
−1
−35
−60
−107
+4
−29
...
...
−46
...
−46
−60
...
−46
...
16
Specification and Grade
120
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-20 /SA-20M
TABLE A2.15
GENERALLY AVAILABLE GRADE-THICKNESS-MINIMUM TEST TEMPERATURE COMBINATIONS
MEETING CHARPY V-NOTCH REQUIREMENTS INDICATED
(NORMALIZED OR QUENCHED AND TEMPERED CONDITION) (CONT’D)
Acceptance Criteria Charpy V-Notch
Test Temperature, °C for Plate Thicknesses
(Unless Otherwise Agreed Upon)
Energy Absorption
ClassA
Average
for 3
SpecimensB, J,
Min.
Minimum
for 1
SpecimenB,
J
27
V
Specification and Grade
25 mm
and
Under
Over
25 mm to
50 mm,
Incl.
Over
50 mm to
75 mm,
Incl.
Over
75 mm to
125 mm,
Incl.
20
A 203 Grade F
A 537 Class 2 (64 mm max.)
A 612
A 724 Grade A
−107
−68
−46
−46
−107
−68
...
...
...
−68
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
A 353
A 553 Type I
A 553 Type II
A 645
A 517 all (64 mm max.
thickness)
A 724 Grade B
−196
−196
−170
−170
−196
−196
−170
−170
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
C
...
...
...
...
Lateral Expansion mm, Minimum
Each Specimen Transverse Test
VI
0.38
C
−46
...
GENERAL NOTE: The minimum temperatures listed are for longitudinal tests. For transverse tests, the available minimum temperature may
be somewhat higher.
NOTES:
A
Class I is Other Than Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 450 MPa or lower.
Class II is Other Than Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 450 to 520 MPa, incl.
Class III is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 450 MPa or lower.
Class IV is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 450 to 520 MPa, incl.
Class V is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of over 520 MPa to but not including 655 MPa.
Class VI is Fully Killed with a specified minimum tensile strength of 655 MPa and over.
B
Full size (10 by 10 mm) specimens.
C
Testing temperature as specified on order but no higher than 0°C.
121
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE A2.16
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN WIDTH FOR MILL
EDGE CARBON STEEL AND HIGH-STRENGTH LOWALLOY STEEL PLATES PRODUCED ON STRIP MILLS
Variations Over
Specified Width,
mmA
Specified Width, mm
To 360, excl.
360 to 430, excl.
430 to 480, excl.
480 to 530, excl.
530 to 610, excl.
610 to 660, excl.
660 to 710, excl.
710 to 890, excl.
890 to 1270, excl.
1270 to 1520, excl.
1520 to 1650, excl.
1650 to 1780, excl.
1780 to 2030, excl.
2030 and over
11
13
14
16
17
21
24
29
32
38
41
44
47
51
NOTE — Applies to either plates produced from coils or plates
produced in discrete cut lengths of flat product.
A
No permissible variation under specified width.
122
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-20 /SA-20M
APPENDICES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. COILED PRODUCTS
X1.1 Continuous wide hot strip rolling mills are normally equipped with coilers. Regardless of the different
types of systems employed during or following the rolling
operations, it is common for the steel to be reeled into
the coiler at temperatures in the stress-relieving range.
In general, these temperatures are higher as material
thickness increases. The coils subsequently cool to ambient temperature with outer and inner laps cooling more
rapidly than central laps. The difference in cooling rate
can result in measurable differences in the mechanical
properties throughout a coil. Data confirm reduced yield
and tensile strength, and increased percent elongation,
for the product with slower cooling rates from the coiling
temperature to ambient. These differences are in addition
to the effects on mechanical properties caused by differences in heat analysis and chemical segregation.
properties at other than the official location may differ
from those of the reported test location.
X2.3 This specification contains no requirements
applicable to product tension tests; conformance to the
material specifications is determined on the basis of tests
performed at the place of manufacture prior to shipment,
unless otherwise specified.
X2.4 A Task Group of ASTM Subcommittee A01.11
has determined, based on review of the AISI data (SU20),
that the variation in tensile properties within a plate-asrolled can be expressed as a function of specified requirements; one standard deviation equals approximately 3%
of required tensile strength, 5% of required yield strength,
and 3 percentage units of required elongation.
X3. VARIATION IN CHARPY V-NOTCH
TESTS
X3.1 A survey of the variation to be expected in
Charpy V-Notch test results obtained from three common
fine grain plate steels was conducted by the American
Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). The results of the survey
are contained in a Contributions to the Metallurgy of
Steel entitled, “The Variations of Charpy V-Notch Impact
Test Properties in Steel Plates,” (SU/24), published January 1979. The survey data consists of test values obtained
from six locations in addition to the locations specified
in 12.1.3 of this specification. The plate conditions tested
involved as-rolled, normalized, and quench and tempered.
Sufficient full-size specimens were taken from each sample so that three longitudinal and three transverse specimens could be broken at three test temperatures defined
for each grade. The data is presented in tables of probability that impact properties at other than the official location
which may differ from those of the reported test location.
Additional data of the same type, but utilizing samples
from thicker plates, was published by AISI as SU/27.
X2. VARIATION OF TENSILE PROPERTIES
IN PLATES
X2.1 The tension requirements of this specification
are intended only to characterize the tensile properties of
a plate-as-rolled for determination of conformance to the
requirements of the material specifications. These testing
procedures are not intended to define the upper or lower
limits of tensile properties at all possible test locations
within a plate-as-rolled. It is well known and documented
that tensile properties vary within a plate-as-rolled or
individual piece of steel as a function of chemical composition, processing, testing procedure, and other factors.
It is, therefore, incumbent on designers and engineers to
use sound engineering judgment when using tension test
results shown on mill test reports. The testing procedures
of this specification have been found to provide material
adequate for normal pressure vessel design criteria.
X2.2 A survey of the variation to be expected in
tensile properties obtained from plates and structural
shapes was conducted by the American Iron and Steel
Institute (AISI). The results of this survey are contained
in a Contributions to the Metallurgy of Steel entitled “The
Variation of Product Analysis and Tensile Properties —
Carbon Steel Plate, and Wide Flange Shapes” (SU/18,
SU/19, and SU/20), published in September 1974. The
data are presented in tables of probability that tensile
X4. RADIUS FOR COLD BENDING
X4.1 Suggested minimum inside bend radii for cold
forming are referenced to group Designations A through
F as defined in Table X4.1. The suggested radii listed in
Table X4.2 should be used as minimums in typical shop
fabrication. Material that does not form satisfactorily
123
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-20 /SA-20M
2004 SECTION II
when fabricated in accordance with Table X4.2 may be
subject to rejection pending negotiation with the steel
supplier. When tighter bends are required, the manufacturer should be consulted.
should be removed by grinding. Sharp corners on edges
and on punched or gas cut holes should be removed by
chamfering or grinding to a radius.
X4.4 If possible, parts should be formed such that
the bend line is perpendicular to the direction of final
rolling. If it is necessary to bend with the bend line parallel
to the direction of final rolling, a more generous radius
is suggested (11⁄2 times applicable value given in Table
X4.2 for bend lines perpendicular to the direction of
rolling.
X4.2 The bend radius and the radius of the male die
should be as liberal as the finished part will permit. The
width across the shoulders of the female die should be
at least 8 times the plate thickness. Higher strength steels
require larger die openings. The surface of the dies in
the area of radius should be smooth.
X4.3 Since cracks in cold bending commonly originate from the outside edges, shear burrs and gas cut edges
X4.5 DELETED
124
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-20 /SA-20M
TABLE X4.1
GROUP DESIGNATIONS FOR COLD BENDING
Specification
Class Where
Applicable
A 202/A 202M
A 204/A 204M
A 225/A 225M
A 285/A 285M
A 299/A 299M
A 302/A 302M
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
A, C, or D
B
1 or 2
1
2
A 455/A 455M
A 515/A 515M
A 516/A 516M
A 517/A 517M
A 533/A 533M
A 537/A 537M
A 542/A 542MD
A 543/A 543M
A 553/A 553MD
A 562/A 562M
A 612/A 612M
A 645/A 645M
A 662/A 662M
any
anyB
anyC
1 or 2
3 or 4
4a
any
A 782/A 782M
A 832/A 832M
A 841/A 841M
A 844/A 844M
2, 11, 12
5, 9, 21, 21L, 22, 22L
5, 9, 21, 22, 91
60 or 65
70
55
60 or 65
70
any
any
A or B
C
A or C
B
A 724/A 724M
A 734/A 734MD
A 735/A 735M
A 736/A 736M
A 737/A 737M
A 738/A 738M
Group
DesignationA
A
B
A or B
B or E
F
A
B
C
C or D
any
A 203/A 203M
A 353/A 353M
A 387/A 387M
Grade Where
Applicable
any
any
any
any
A or B
CB
CC
1 or 2
3
any
any
any
D
E
B
C
D
B
C
D
D
A
D
D
E
D
C
E
E
C
B
C
A
B
C
F
E
C
D
F
D
E
F
D
A
C
D
B
C
D
E
D
E
D
B
D
C
D
E
F
E
C
D
TABLE X4.2
SUGGESTED MINIMUM INSIDE RADII FOR COLD
BENDINGA
Thickness (t), in. [mm]
Group
DesignationB
Over 3⁄4 in.
Up to
[20 mm] to
3
⁄4 in.
1 [25 mm],
[20 mm]
Incl.
A
B
C
D
E
F
1.5t
1.5t
1.5t
1.5t
1.5t
2.25t
Over 2 in.
[50 mm]
1.5t
1.5t
2.0t
2.5t
3.0t
4.5t
1.5t
2.0t
2.5t
3.0t
3.5t
5.5t
NOTES
A
Values are for bend lines perpendicular to the direction of final
rolling. These radii apply when the precautions listed in X4.2 are
followed. If bend lines are parallel to the direction of the final rolling, multiply values by 1.5.
B
Steel specifications included in the group designations may not
include the entire thickness range shown in this table.
NOTES
A
Steels in Groups A to E inclusive are grouped on the basis of
similar specified values for minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm];
Group F includes steels which have a specified minimum elongation
in 2 in. [50 mm] of 16 or less, and steels which have a ratio of
specified minimum tensile strength to specified minimum yield
strength of 1.15 or less.
B
For thicknesses of 4 in. [25 mm] or less.
C
For thicknesses over 4 in. [25 mm].
D
For any type.
125
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
1.5t
1.5t
1.5t
1.5t
1.5t
1.75t
Over 1 in.
[25 mm]
to 2 in. [50
mm], Incl.
Not for Resale
126
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 29/A 2 9 ~ - 9 9 ' ' except for an editorial correction to the Mo content for Grade 94B17 in Table 2.)
1.
Scope
1.1 This specification covers a group of common
requirements which, unless otherwise specified in the
purchase order or in an individual specification, shall
apply to carbon and alloy steel bars under each of the
following ASTM specifications (or under any other
ASTM specification which invokes this specification or
portinns th~reef):
Title of Specification
Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars:
Steel Bars, Carbon, Quenched and
Tempered
Steel Bars and Shapes, Carbon Rolled from
"T"Rails
Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, MGrades
Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special
Quality
Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality,
Mechanical Properties
Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special
Quality, Mechanical Properties
Steel Bars for Springs, Carbon and Alloy
Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special
Quality, for Fluid Power Applications
Cold-Finislzed Carbon Steel Bars:
Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard
Quality
Stress-Relieved Steel Bars Subject to
Mechanical Property Requirements, ColdDrawn Carbon
Hot-Rolled Alloy Steel Bars:
Steel Bars, Alloy, Standard Grades
Steel Bars, Alloy, Subject to End-Quench
Hardenability Requirements
ASTM
Designation
Title of Specification
ASTM
Designation
Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought or ColdFinished, Quenched and Tempered
A 434
Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought, for
Elevated Temperature or PressureContaining Parts, or Both
A 739
Cold-Finished Alloy Steel Bars:
Steel Bars, Alloy, Cold-Finished
A 331
Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Rolled or ColdFinished, Quenched and Tempered
A 434
Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought or ColdFinished, Special Quality. for Pressure
Piping Components
A 696
1.2 In case of any conflict in requirements, the requirements of the purchase order, the individual material specification, and this general specification shall prevail in the
sequence named.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units or SI units
are to be regarded as the standard. Within the text, the
SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in each
system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each system
must be used independently of the other. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance
with the specification.
1.4 For purposes of determining conformance to this
specification and the various material specifications referenced in 1.1, dimensional values shall be rounded to the
nearest unit in the right-hand place of figures used in
expressing the limiting values in accordance with the
rounding method of Practice E 29.
SA-291SA-29M
2004 SECTION I1
2.
Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Sta~zdards:
A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading
Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment
A 75 1 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data
to Determine Confo~mancewith Specifications
E 112 Test Methods for Determining the Average
Grain Size
2.2 Federal Staim'ards:
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
Fed. Std. No. 183 Continuous Identification Marking of
Iron and Steel Products
2.3 Militaiy Staildard:
MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products - Preparation for
Shipment and Storage
2.4 Otlzer Sta~zdards:
AIAG B-1 Bar Code Symbology Standard for 3-of-9 Bar
Codes
AIAG B-5 02.00 Primary Metals Tag Application
Standard
3.
Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms SpeciJic To This Stanrlni.d:
3.1.1 Hot-Wrotrglzt Steel Bars - Steel bars produced by hot forming ingots, blooms, billets, or other
semifinished fonns to yield straight lengths (or coils,
depending upon size, section, and mill equipment) in
sections which are uniform throughout their length, and
in the following sections and sizes:
3.1.1.1 Rounds,
inclusive,
3.1.1.2 Squares,
inclusive,
g2 to 10.0 in. [5.5 to 250 mm],
g2 to 6.0 in.
[6 to 160 mm],
3.1.1.3 Round-Cornered Squnres,
[6 to 200 mm], inclusive,
742to
8.0 in.
3.1.1.4 Flats, '4 to 8 in. inclusive, in width:
in. in minimum thickness up to 6 in. in width; and 0.230
in. in minimum thiclcness for over 6 to 8 in. in width,
inclusive [over 5 mm in thiclcness up to 150 mm in width;
and over 6 mm in thickness for over 150 m n through
200 mm in width]. Maximum thiclcness for all widths is
4 in. [I00 mm].
3.1.1.5 Hexagons and Octagorzs, '4to 4'/j6 in. [6
to 103 mm], inclusive, between parallel surfaces,
3.1.1.6 Bar Size Slzapes -Angles, channels, tees,
zees, when their greatest cross-sectional dimension is
under 3 in. [75 mm], and
3.1.1.7 Special Bar Sections - Half-rounds,
ovals, half-ovals, other special bar size sections.
3.1.2 Cold-Finished Steel Bars - Steel bars produced by cold finishing previously hot-wrought bars by
means of cold drawing, cold forming, turning, grinding,
or polishing (singly or in combination) to yield straight
lengths or coils in sections which are uniform throughout
their length and in the following sections and sizes:
3.1.2.1 Rourzds, 9 in. [230 mm] and under in
diameter,
3.1.2.2 Squares, 6 in. [150 mm] and under
between parallel surfaces,
3.1.2.3 Hexagons, 4 in. [ I 0 0 mm] and under
between parallel surfaces,
3.1.2.4 Flats, '/s in. [3 mm] and over in thiclu~ess
and not over 12 in. [300 mm] in width, and
3.1.2.5 Special Bar Sections.
3.1.3 Lot - Unless otherwise specified in the contract or order, 2 lot sha!l consist: of dl b a ~ ssihnitted for
inspection at the same time of the same heat, condition,
finish, size, or shape. For bars specified in the quenched
and tempered condition, when heat treated in batch-type
furnaces, a lot shall consist of all bars from the same
heat, of the same prior condition, the same size, and
subjected to the same heat treatment in one tempering
charge. For bars specified in the quenched and tempered
condition, when heat treated without interruption in a
continuous-type furnace. a lot shall consist of all bars
from the same heat, of the same prior condition, of the
same size, and subjected to the same heat treatment.
4.
Chemical Composition
4.1 Limits:
4.1.1 The chemical composition shall confosm to
the requirements specified in the purchase order or the
individual product specifications. For convenience the
grades commonly specified for carbon steel bars are
shown in Tables 1 and 2. Bars may be ordered to these
grade designations and when so ordered shall confosm
to the specified limits by heat analysis.
4.1.2 When compositions other than those shown
in Tables 1 and 2 are required, the composition limits
shall be prepared using the ranges and limits shown in
Table 3 for carbon steel and Table 4 for alloy steel.
PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
4.2 Heat or Cast Analysis:
4.2.1 The chemical composition of each heat or
cast shall be determined by the manufacturer in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology
A 751.
4.2.2 The heat or cast analysis shall conform to
the requirements specified in the product specification or
purchase order. These can be the heat chemical range
and limit for a grade designated in Tables 1 and 2, or
another range and limit in accordance with 4.1.2, or with
requirements of the product specification.
NOTE 1 - Heat aualysis for lead is not determinable since lead is
added to the ladle stream while each ingot is poured. When specified
as an added element to a standard steel, the percentage of lead is reported
as 0.15 to 0.35 incl, which is the range commonly specified for this
element.
.2.3 If requested or required, the heat analysis
shall be reported to the purchaser or his representative.
4.2.4 Reporting of significant figures and rounding
shall be in accordance with Test Methods, Practices, and
Terminology A 75 1.
4.3 Product Analysis:
4.3.1 Merchant quality carbon bar steel is not subject to rejection for product analysis unless misapplication
of & heat is cle&-lYindicate&
4.3.2 Analyses may be made by the purchaser from
finished bars other than merchant quality representing
each heat of open-hearth, basic-oxygen, or electric-furnace steel. The chemical composition thus determined
shall not vary from the limits specified in the applicable
specification by more than the amounts prescribed in
Table 5 and Table 6, but the several determinations of
any element, excluding lead, in a heat may not vary both
above and below the specified range. Rimmed or capped
steel is characterized by a lack of homogeneity in its
composition, especially for the elements carbon, phosphorus, and sulfur; therefore, when rimmed or capped
steel is specified or required, the limitations for these
elements shall not be applicable. Because of the degree
to which phosphorus and sulfur segregate, the limitations
for these elements shall not be applicable to rephosphorized or resulfurized steels.
4.3.3 Samples for product analysis shall be taken
by one of the following methods:
4.3.3.1 Applicable to small sections whose crosssectional area does not exceed 0.75 in.2 [500 mm2] such
as rounds, squares, hexagons, etc. Chips are taken by
milling or machining the full cross section of the piece.
Drilling is not a feasible method for sampling sizes 0.75
in.2 2 and smaller.
§A-29ISA-29M
.3.3.2 Applicable to products where the width
of the cross section greatly exceeds the thickness, such
as bar size shapes and light flat bars. Chips are taken
by drilling entirely through the steel at a point midway
between the edge and the middle of the section, or by
milling or machining the entire cross section.
4.3.3.3 Applicable to large rounds, squares semifinished, etc. Chips are taken at any point midway
between the outside and the center of the piece by drilling
parallel to the axis or by milling or machining the full
cross section. In cases where these methods are not practicable, the piece may be drilled on the side, but chips are
not talcen until they represent the portion midway between
the outside and the center.
4.3.3.4 When the steel is subject to tension test
requirements, the tension test specimen can also be used
for product analysis. In that case, chips for product analysis can be taken by drilling entirely through the tension
test specimens or by the method described in 4.3.3.1.
.3.4 When chips are taken by drilling, the diameter
of the drill used shall conform to the following:
Area of Sample
Cross Section,
in.' (cm2)
Approximate Drill
Diameter, in. (mm)
16 [I%] oi less
Over 16 [I001
4.3.5 The minimum number of samples to be taken
from material representing the same heat or lot before
rejection by the purchaser shall be as follows:
Minimum Number
of Samples
15 tons [I5 Mg] and under
Over 15 tons [15 Mg]
3.6 In case the number of pieces in a heat is less
than the number of samples required, one sample from
each piece shall be considered sufficient.
4.3.7 In the event that product analysis deteirninations are outside the pennissible limits as prescribed in
4.3.2, additional samples shall be analyzed and the acceptability of the heat negotiated between the pnrchaser and
the producer.
4.4 Referee Ailnlysis - In case a referee analysis is
required and agreed upon to resolve a dispute concerning
the results of a chemical analysis, the referee analysis
shall be performed in accordance with the latest issue of
Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A 751, unless
otherwise agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
SA-2915%-29M
2004 SECTION I1
Grain Size Requirement
5.1 Aztstenitic Grain Size
5.1.1 When a coarse austenitic grain size is specified, the steel shall have a grain size number of 1 to 5
exclusive as dete~minedin accordance with Test Methods
E 112. Conformance to this grain size of 70% of the
grains in the area examined shall constitute the basis of
acceptance. One test per heat shall be made.
5.1.2 When a fine autenitic grain size is specified,
the steel shall have a grain size number of 5 or higher
as determined in accordance with Test Methods E 112.
Conformance to this grain size of 70% of the area examined shall constitute the basis of acceptance. One test per
heat shall be made unless the provisions of 5.1.2.1 or
5.1.2.2 are exercised.
5.1.2.1 When aluminum is used as the grain
refining element, the fine austenitic grain size requirement
shall be deemed to be fulfilled if, on heat analysis, the
aluminum content is not less than 0.020% total aluminum
or, alternately, 0.015% acid soluble aluminum. The aluminum content shall be reported. The grain size test specified in 5.1.2 shall be the referee test.
5.
5.1.2.2 By agreement between purchaser and
supplier, columbium or vanadium or both may be used
for grain refining instead of or with aluminum. When
columbium or vanadium is used as a grain refining element, the fine austenitic grain size requirement shall be
deemed to be fulfilled if, on heat analysis, the columbium
or vanadium content is as follows (the content of the
elements shall be reported with the heat analysis):
Steels having 0.25% carbon or less:
Cb
0.025 min
V
0.05 min
Steels having over 0.25% carbon:
Cb
0.015 min
V
0.02 min
The maximum contents shall be:
Cb
0.05 lnax
V
0.08 max
Cb + V
0.06 ~ n a x
5.1.2.3 Whenprovisionsof5.1.2.1or5.1.2.2are
exercised, a grain size test is not required unless specified
by the purchaser. Unless otherwise specified, fine austenitic grain size shall be certified using the analysis of grain
refining element(s).
5.1.2.4 Referee Test -In the event that the
chemical analysis of columbium or vanadi~undoes not
meet the req~~irements
of 5.12.2, the grain size test shown
in 5.1.2 shall be the referee test unless an alternative test
method is agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
6.
Mechanical Property Requirements
6.1 Test Specimens:
6.1.1 Selectio~z- Test specimens shall be selected
in accordance with the requirements of the applicable
product specification or in accordance with Supplement
I of the latest issue of Test Methods and Definitions
A 370, in the sequence named.
6.1.2 Preparation - Unless otherwise specified in
the applicable product specification, test specimeus shall
be prepared in accordance with the latest issue of Test
Methods and Definitions A 370, and especially Supplement I thereof.
6.2 Metlzods of Mechanical Testing - All mechanical
tests shall be conducted in accordance with the latest issue
of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, and especially
Supplen~entI thereof, on steel bar products.
6.3 Retests:
6.3.1 If any test specimen shows defective machining or develops flaws, the specimen may be discarded
and another substituted.
6.3.2 If the percentage elongation of any tension
specimen is less than that specified and any part of the
fracture is more than % in. [20 mm] from the center of
a 2 in. [50 mm] specimen, or is outside the middle half
of the gage length of an 8 in. [200 mmJ specimen as
indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen
before testing, a retest shall be allowed.
6.3.3 For "as-wrought" mateiial, if the results for
any original tension specimen are within 2000 psi [14
MPa] of the required tensile strength, within 1000 psi [7
MPa] of the required yield point, or within 2% of the
required elongation, retesting shall be permitted. If the
original testing required only one test, the retest shall
consist of two random tests from the heat or lot involved.
If the original testing required two tests of which one
failed by the amounts listed in this paragraph, the retest
shall be made on one random test from the heat or lot.
If the results on the retest specimen or specimens meet
the specified requirements, the heat or test lot will be
accepted. If the results of one retest specimen do not
meet the specified requirements, the material is subject
to rejection.
6.3.4 For thermally treated bars, if the results of
the mechanical tests do not confonn to the requirements
specified, two more tests may be selected for each bar
failing, and each of these retests shall confonn to the
requirements of the product specification.
6.3.5 If a bend specimen fails, due to conditions
of bending more severe than required by the specification,
a retest shall be permitted from the heat or test lot involved
PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
for which one random specimen for each original specimen showing failure shall be used. If the results on the
retest specimen meet the requirements of the specification, the heat or test lot will be accepted.
Dimensions, Mass, and Permissible Variations
7.1 Hot-Wrought B a n - The permissible variations
for dimensions of hot-wrought carbon and alloy steel bars
shall not exceed the applicable limits stated in Annex A1
for inch-pound values and Annex A2 for metric values.
7.
7.2 Cold-Finished Bars - The permissible variations
for dimensions of cold-finished carbon and alloy steel
bass shall not exceed the applicable limits stated in Annex
A1 for inch-pound values and Annex A2 for metric
values.
ip, Finish, and A
8.1 The material shall be free of injurious defects and
shall have a workmanlike finish.
9.1 For thermally treated bars only, the manufacturer
may retreat a lot one or more times, and retests shall be
made in the same manner as the original tests. Each such
retest shall conform to the requirements specified.
ector representing the purchaser shall
have entry, at all times while work on the contract of the
purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer's works that concern the manufacture of the material
ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is
beil~gfurnishcc!in accordmx with this specification. Aii
tests (except product analysis) and inspection shall be
made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless
otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
10.2 All required tests and inspection shall be made
by the manufacturer prior to shipment.
11. Rejection
11.1 Unless otherwise specified, any rejection because
of noncompliance to the requirements of the specification
shall be reported by the purchaser to the manufacturer
within 30 working days after receipt of samples.
11.2 Material that shows imperfections capable of
adversely affecting processibility subsequent to its
acceptance at the purchaser's works will be rejected, and
the manufacturer shall be notified.
§A-29/§A-29M
12. Rehearing
12.1 Samples that represent rejected material shall be
preserved for two weelcs from the date rejection is
reported to the manufacturer. In case of dissatisfaction
with the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make
claim for a rehearing within that time.
13.1 Civilian Procurement - Bass of all sizes, when
loaded for shipment, shall be properly identified with the
name or brand of manufacturer, purchaser's name and
order number, the ASTM designation (yeas date is not
required), grade number where appropriate, size and
length, weight of lift, and the heat number for identification. Unless otherwise specified, the method of marking
is at the manufacturer's option and may be made by
hot stamping, cold stamping, painting, or marking tags
attached to the lifts of bars.
13.1.1 Bar code marking may be used as an auxiliary method of identification. Such bar-code markings
shall be of the 3-of-9 type and shall conform to AIAG
B 1. When barcoded tags are used, they shall confonn to
AIAG B5.
13.2 Governnzent Procurement:
13.2.1 Marking for shipment shall be in accordance
with the requirements specified in the contract or order
and shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-163 for military agencies and in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 123
for civil agencies.
13.2.2 For government procurement by the Defense
Supply Agency, the bars shall be continuously masked
for identification in accordance with Fed. Std. No. 183.
14.1 Civilian Procurement - Unless otherwise specified, the bars shall be packaged and loaded in accordance
with Practices A 700.
14.2 Govenzment Procurenzent -MIL-STD- 163 shall
apply when packaging is specified in the contract or order,
or when Level A for preservation, packaging, and packing
is specified for direct procurement by or direct shipment
to the government.
15. Keywords
15.1 alloy steel bars; carbon steel bars; cold finished
steel bars; general delivery requirements; hot wrought
steel bars; steel bars.
2004 SECTION I1
TABLE 1
GRADE DESIGNATIONS AND CHEMICAL
COMPOSITIONS OF CARBON STEEL BARS (CONT'D)
TABLE 1
GRADE DESIGNATIONS AND CHEMICAL
COMPOSITIONS OF CARBON STEEL BARS
Heat Chemical Ranges and Limits, %
Grade
Designation
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus,
max
Sulfur,
maxA
Nonresulfurized Carbon ~ t e e l s ' , ~ , ~ ~ ~
1095
0.06 max
0.08 max
0.10 rnax
0.08-0.13
0.08-0.13
0.35 rnax
0.25-0.40
0.30-0.50
0.30-0.60
0.60-0.90
0.10-0.15
0.11-0.16
0.13-0.18
0.13-0.18
0.15-0.20
0.30-0.60
0.50-0.80
0.30-0.60
0.60-0.90
0.30-0.60
0.15-0.20
0.15-0.20
0.18-0.23
0.18-0.23
0.18-0.23
0.60-0.90
0.70-1.00
0.30-0.60
0.60-0.90
0.70-1.00
0.20-0.25
0.22-0.28
0.22-0.28
0.25-0.31
0.28-0.34
0.30-0.60
0.30-0.60
0.60-0.90
0.60-0.90
0.60-0.90
0.32-0.38
0.32-0.38
0.32-0.38
0.35-0.42
0.37-0.44
0.50-0.80
0.60-0.90
0.70-1.00
0.60-0.90
0.70-1.00
0.37-0.44
0.40-0.47
0.40-0.47
0.43-0.50
0.43-0.50
0.60-0.90
0.60-0.90
0.70-1.00
0.30-0.60
0.60-0.90
0.43-0.50
0.46-0.53
0.48-0.55
0.48-0.55
0.50-0.60
0.70-1.00
0.60-0.90
0.60-0.90
0.70-1.00
0.60-0.90
0.55-0.65
0.55-0.65
0.60-0.70
0.60-0.70
0.65-0.75
0.50-0.80
0.60-0.90
0.50-0.80
0.60-0.90
0.40-0.70
0.65-0.75
0.65-0.70
0.70-0.80
0.70-0.80
0.72-0.85
0.60-0.90
0.75-1.05
0.50-0.80
0.40-0.70
0.30-0.60
0.75-0.88
0.80-0.93
0.80-0.93
0.85-0.98
0.90-1.03
0.60-0.90
0.60-0.90
0.30-0.50
0.60-0.90
0.30-0.50
Grade
Designation
Rephosphorized and Resulfurized Carbon steelsQGF
Carbon
max
max
max
rnax
max
max
max
1211
1212
1213
1215
12L13
12L14
12L15
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.09
0.13
0.15
0.09
Grade
Designation
Former
Designation
Manganese
Phosphorus
Sulfur
Lead
0.60-0.90
0.70-1.00
0.70-1.00
0.75-1.05
0.70-1.00
0.85-1.15
0.75-1.05
0.07-0.12
0.07-0.12
0.07-0.12
0.04-0.09
0.07-0.12
0.04-0.09
0.04-0.09
0.10-0.15
0.16-0.23
0.24-0.33
0.26-0.35
0.24-0.33
0.26-0.35
0.26-0.35
...
...
...
...
0.15-0.35
0.15-0.35
0.15-0.35
High-Manganese Carbon ~ t e e l s ' ~ ~ , ~ ~
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus,
max
Sulfur,
ma:
Heat Chemical Ranges and Limits, percent
Grade
Designation
0.040
Resulfurized Carbon ~ t e e l s ~ , ~ ~
0.050
0.050
Merchant Quality M Series Carbon Steel Bars
Carbon
~anganese~
Fhosphorus,
max
Sulfur,
max
A Maximum unless otherwise indicated.
'When silicon is required, the following ranges and limits are commonly
specified: 0.10%, max, 0.10% to 0.20%, 0.15% to 0.35%, 0.20% to
0.40%, or 0.30% to 0.60%.
Copper can be specified when required as 0.20% minimum.
When lead is required as an added element to a standard steel, a range
of 0.15 to 0.35% inclusive is specified. Such a steel is identified by inserting
the letter "L" between the second and third numerals of the grade designation, for example, 10 L 45. A cast or heat analysis is not determinable when
lead is added to the ladle stream.
when boron treatment for ltilled steels is specified, the steels can be
expected to contain 0.0005 to 0.003% boron. I f the usual titanium additive
is not permitted, tlie steels can be expected to contain up to 0.005% boron.
F ~ h eelements bismuth, calcium, selenium, or tellurium may be added as
agreed upon between purchaser and supplier.
Unless prohibited by tlie purchaser, the manganese content lnay exceed
0.60% on heat analysis to a maximum of 0.75%, provided the carbon range
on lieat analysis has the minimum and maximum reduced by 0.01% for each
0.05% manganese over 0.60%.
SA-29lSA-29M
PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE 2
GRADE DESIGNATIONS AND CHEMICAL COMPOSITIONS OF ALLOY STEEL BARS
Grade
Designation
Heat Chemical Ranges and Limits, %
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus, max
Sulfur, lnax
siliconA
Nicltel
Chromium
Molybdenum
Note 1 - Sinall quantities of certain elements are present in alloy steels which are not specified or required. These elements are considered as incidental and may be present to the following maximum amounts: copper, 0.35%; nicltel, 0.25%; chromium, 0.20%; and molybdenum, 0.06%.
Note 2 - Where minimum and maximum sulfur content is shown i t is indicative of resulfurized steel.
Note 3 - The chemical ranges and limits shown in Table 2 are produced to product analysis tolerances shown in Table 6.
Note 4 - Standard alloy steels can be produced with a lead range of 0.15-0.35%. S L K ~steels are identified by inserting the letter "L"
between the second and third numerals of the A I S I number, for example, 4 1 L 40. A cast or heat analysis is not determinable when lead is
added t o the ladle stream.
SA-29tSA-29M
2004 SECTION I1
TABLE 2
GRADE DESIGNATIONS AND CHEMICAL COMPOSITIONS OF ALLOY STEEL BARS (CONT'D)
Grade
Designation
Heat Chemical Ranges and Limits, %
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus, lnax
Sulfur, lnax
SiliconA
Nickel
Cli~~on~ium
Molybdenum
Standard Boron SteelsB
A Silicon lnay be specified by the purchaser as 0.10% maximum. The need for 0.10% tnaxi~numgenerally relates to severe cold-formed
parts.
'These steels can be expected t o contain 0.0005 t o 0.003% boron. I f the usual titanium additive is not permitted, the steels can be
expected t o contain up to 0.005% boron.
PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE 3
HEAT ANALYSIS CHEMICAL RANGES AND L I M I T S
OFCARBON STEEL BARS
TABLE 4
HEAT ANALYSIS CHEMICAL RANGES AND L I M I T S
OF ALLOY STEEL BARS
Chemical Ranges and Limits, %
Element
carbonA
When Maximum of Specified
Elements is:
Lowest
Maximum
...
t o 0.12, incl
over 0.12 t o
over 0.25 t o
over 0.40 t o
over 0.55 t o
over 0.80
Manganese
Range
0.25, incl
0.40, incl
0.55, incl
0.80, incl
...
Phospl1or~1~to 0.040, incl
over 0 . 0 4 0 to 0.08, incl
over 0.08 t o 0.13, incl
siliconC
t o 0.050, incl
over 0 . 0 5 0 to 0.09, incl
over 0.09 t o 0.15, incl
over 0.15 t o 0.23, incl
over 0.23 t o 0.50, incl
...
t o 0.10, incl
over 0.10 t o
over 0.15 t o
over 0.20 t o
over 0.30 t o
Copper
~ead
Element
Chemical Ranges and Limits, %
OpenMaxiHearth or Electric mum
BasicFurnace Limit,
When Maximum of
Oxygen Steel Steel %
Specified Element is:
Carbon
t o 0.40, incl
over 0.40 t o 0.50, incl
over 0.50 t o 1.65, incl
Sulfur
§A-29/§A-29M
0.15, incl
0.20, incl
0.30, incl
0.60, incl
When copper is required 0.20
niiti is generally used
When lead is required, a range
of 0.15 to 0.35 is specified
t3ismuthE
calciumE
seleniumE
A The carbon ranges shown in the colunin Iheaded "Range" apply
when the specified maximum limit for manganese does not exceed
1.10%. When the maximum manganese limit exceeds 1.10%, add
0.01 to the carbon ranges shown above.
'For steels produced in merchant quality the phosphorus maximum is 0 . 0 4 % and the sulfur maximum is 0.05%.
It is not common practice t o produce a rephosphorized and
resulfurized carbon steel to specified limits for silicon because of
its adverse effect on machinability.
' A cast or heat a~ialysisis not determinable when lead is added
to the ladle stream.
Element specification range as agreed upon between purchaser
and supplier.
To 0.55, incl
Over 0.55-0.70, incl
Over 0.70 to 0.80, incl
Over 0.80-0.95, incl
Over 0.95-1.35, incl
Manganese To 0.60, incl
Over 0.60-0.90, incl
Over 0.90-1.05, incl
Over 1.05-1.90, incl
Over 1.90-2.10, incl
Phosphorus Basic open-hearth or basicoxygen steel
Acid open-hearth steel
Basic electric-furnace steel
Acid electric-furnace steel
Sulfur
To 0.050, incl
Over 0.050-0.07, ilicl
Over 0.07-0.10, incl
Over 0.10-0.14, incl
Basic open-hearth or basicoxygen steel
Acid open-heart11 steel
Basic electric-furnace steel
Acid electric-furnace steel
Silicon
To 0.20, incl
Over 0.20-0.30, incl
Over 0.30-0.60, iticl
Over 0.60-1.00, incl
Over 1.00-2.20, incl
Acid steelsB
Nicltel
To 0.50, incl
Over 0.50-1.50, incl
Over 1.50-2.00, incl
Over 2.00-3.00; incl
Over 3.00-5.30, incl
Over 5.30-10.00, incl
Chromium To 0.40, incl
Over 0.40-0.90. incl
Over 0.90-1.05; incl
Over 1.05-1.60, incl
Over 1.60-1.75, incl
Over 1.75-2.10, incl
Over 2.10-3.99, incl
Molybdenum To 0.10, incl
Over 0.10-0.20, incl
Over 0.20-0.50, incl
Over 0.50-0.80, incl
Over 0.80-1.15, incl
Tungsten
To 0.50, incl
Over 0.50-1.00, incl
Over 1.00-2.00, incl
Over 2.00-4.00, incl
Vanadium
To 0.25, incl
Over 0.25-0.50, incl
Aluminum
Up to 0.10, incl
Over 0.10-0.20, ilicl
Over 0.20-0.30, ilicl
Over 0.30-0.80, incl
Over 0.80-1.30, incl
Over 1.30-1.80, incl
Copper
To 0.60, incl
Over 0.60-1.50, incl
Over 1.50-2.00, incl
Note 1 - Eoron steels can be expected to have 0.0005% minimum boron
content.
Note 2 - Alloy steels can be produced with a lead range of 0.15-0.35%.
A cast or heat analysis is not determinable when lead is added to the ladle
stream.
A
Applies to only notirepliospliorized and tionresulf~~rized
steels.
" Minimutn silicon limit for acid open-liearth or acid electric-furnace alloy
steels is 0.15%.
Not normally prodi~cedin open-hearth.
SA-29/SA-29M
2004 SECTION I1
TABLE 5
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FOR PRODUCT
ANALYSIS OF CARBON STEEL
Element
Limit, or Maximum of
Specified Range, %
Over
Maximum
Limit, %
Under
Minimum
Limit, %
0.25 and under
over 0.25 to 0.55, incl
over 0.55
Manganese
0.90 and under
over 0.90 to 1.65, incl
basic steels
acid bessemer steel
sulf~lr~,~
Silicon
0.35 and under
over 0.35 to 0.60, incl
Copper
under minimum only
~ead
0.15 to 0.35, incl
TABLE 6
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS FOR PRODUCT
ANALYSIS OF ALLOY STEEL
Rimmed and capped steels are not subject to rejection on product analysis unless misapplication is clearly indicated.
Resulfurized or rephosphorized steels are [not subject to rejection on product analysis for these elements unless misapplication is
clearly indicated.
Product analysis tolerance for lead applies both over and under
to a specified range of 0.15 to 0.35%.
Elements
Limit, or Maximum of
Specified Range, %
Carbon
0.30 and under
over 0.30 to 0.75, incl
over 0.75
Manganese
0.90 and under
over 0.90 to 2.10, incl
Phosphorus
over maximum only
Sulfur
0.060 and under
Silicon
0.40 and under
over 0.40 to 2.20, incl
Nickel
1.00 and under
over 1.00 to 2.00, incl
over 2.00 to 5.30, incl
over 5.30 to 10.00, incl
Chromium
0.90 and under
over 0.90 to 2.10, incl
over 2.10 to 3.99, incl
A
Permissible
Variations Over
Maximum
Limit or
Under Minimum
Limit, %
0.20 and under
over 0.20 to 0.40, incl
over 0.40 to 1.15, incl
Vanadiuni
0.10 and under
over 0.10 to 0.25, incl
over 0.25 to 0.50, incl
minimum value
specified, under
minimum limit only
Tungsten
1.00 and under
over 1.00 to 4.00, incl
Aluminum
0.10
over
over
over
over
and under
0.10 to 0.20,
0.20 to 0.30,
0.30 to 0.80,
0.80 to 1.80,
incl
incl
incl
incl
~ e a d ~
0.15 to 0.35, incl
Copper
to 1.00 incl
over 1.00 to 2.00, incl
A Product analysis tolerance for lead applies both over and under
to a specified range of 0.15 to 0.35%.
PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
N
The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the contract or order.
ar Thicltness Tolerances
Sl.1 When flat bars are specified in metric units to
a thickness under tolerance of 0.3 mm, the thickness
tolerance of Table S I. 1 shall apply.
TABLE S1.l
THICKNESS AND WIDTH TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT SQUARE-EDGE AND ROUND-EDGE FLAT BARS
ORDERED TO 0.3 M M UNDER TOLERANCE^
Tolerance
from
Specified
Width, nirn
Tolerances over Specified Tliicl~nessfor Thickness Given, mlii
Specified Width, lnln
To 25, incl
Over 25 t o 50, incl
Over 5 0 t o 100, incl
Over 1 0 0 t o 150, incl
Over 1 5 0 t o 200, incl
Note
-
Over 6 t o 12, incl
Over 1 2 t o 25, incl
...
...
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.7
0.7
1.0
...
Over 2 5 to 50, incl
Over 5 0 to 75, iricl
Over 7 5
Over
Untler
Tolerance under specified thicl(ness 0.3 mm.
"When a square is held against a face and an edge of a square-edge flat liar, the edge shall not deviate by more than 3" or 5 % of the
thickness.
2004 SECTION I1
Al.
TIONS IN
. - INCH-POU
UNITS
A l . l Listed below are permissible variations in
dimensions expressed in inch-pound units of measuremcnt.
TABLE A l . 1
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N CROSS SECTION FOR
HOT-WROUGHT ROUND, SQUARE, AND ROUNDCORNEREDSQUAREBARSOFSTEEL
Permissible
Variation from
Out-of-Round or
in.A
Specified Size, in.
Over
Under
Out-of-Square,
in.'
To 5/1b, incl
Over 5/1b t o 7/1b,incl
Over 7/1b t o 5/,, incl
Over 5/, t o 7/8, incl
Over 7/, t o 1, incl
Over 1 t o 11/,, incl
Over 11/, t o 11/,, incl
Over 1% t o 13/,, incl
Over 13/, t o 11/,, incl
Over 11/, t o 2, incl
Over 2 t o 21/,,incl
Over zl/, t o 31/,,incl
Over 35; t o 41/2,inci
Over 4
'
/
, t o 5Y2,incI
Over 5l/, t o 61/,,incl
Over 61/2t o 8'4, incl
Over
t o 9'/2, incl
Over 91/2t o 10, incl
A Steel bars are regularly C L I ~t o length by shearing or hot sawing, which can cause end distortion resulting in those portions of
the bar being outside the applicable size tolerance. When this end
condition is objectionabie, a machine C L I ~end should be considered.
Out-of-round is the difference between the maximum and minilnum diameters of the bar, measured at the same cross section.
Out-of-square is the difference in the two dimensions at the same
cross section of a square bar between opposite faces.
'
TABLE A1.2
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N CROSS SECTION FOR
HOT-WROUGHT HEXAGONAL BARS OF STEEL
Specified Sizes
Between
Opposite Sides, in.
To I/,, incl
t o 1, incl
Over
Over 1 t o 11/,,incl
Over 11/2t o 2, incl
Over 2 t o 21/,,incl
Over 25; t o 3V2,incl
'/,,
incl
Over 31/2t o 4
'/,
Permissible
Variations
from Specified
Size, in.A
Over
Under
Out-of-Hexagon
(Carbon Steel and
Alloy Steel) or
Out-of-Octagon
(Alloy Steel), in.B
0.011
0.015
0.025
'/32
3/b 4
l/' b
5/b4
A Steel bars are regularly cut t o length by shearing or hot sawing, which can cause end distortion resulting in those portions of
the bar being outside the applicable size tolerance. When this end
condition is objectionabie, a machine cut end should be considered.
Out-of-hexagon or out-of-octagon is the greatest difference
between any two dimensions at the same cross section between
opposite faces.
'
PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
§A-29lSA-29M
TABLE A1.3
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N THICKNESS AND WIDTH FOR HOT-WROUGHT SQUARE EDGE AND ROUND EDGE
FLAT BARS*
--
-pppppp
Permissible
Variations
in Width, in.
Permissible Variations i n Thicl(ness, for Thickness Given,
Over and Under, in.'
Specified Width, in.
0.203 t o
0.230, excl
0.230 t o
excl
0.007
0.007
0.008
0.009
0.007
0.007
0.008
0.009
0.015
TO 1, incl
Over
Over
Over
Over
1 to
2 to
4 to
6 to
2, incl
4, incl
6, incl
8, incl
C
to
i c
,
0.008
0.012
0.015
0.015
0.016
Over 1/2 t o
1, incl
Over 1t o
2, incl
Over 2 t o
3, incl
Over 3
0.010
0.015
0.020
0.020
0.025
...
'/j~
...
...
...
...
Over
Under
'/64
'/64
2
1/3 2
3/64
3/b4
'/16
132'
3/64
3/64
3
/'
'I32
3/b4
l/' b
'/32
2
5;6
'4
2
A When a square is lhelcl against a face and an edge of a square edge flat bar, the edge shall not deviate by more than 3" or 5% of the
thickness.
'Steel bars are regularly cut to length by shearing or hot sawing, which can cause end distortion resulting in those portions of the bar
being outside the applicable size tolerance. When this end condition is objectionable, a machine cut end should be consiclered.
Flats over 6 to 8 in., incl, in width, are not available as hot-wrought steel bars in thickness under 0.230 in.
TABLE A1.4
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N THICKNESS,
LENGTH, AND OUT-OF-SQUARE FOR HOT-WROUGHT
B A R S I Z E A N G L E S O F C A R B O N STEEL
Permissible Variations in
Thickness, for Thicknesses
Given, Over and Under, in.
Permissible
Variations
for Length
o f Leg, Over
and Under,
Specified Length
Over 3/16
of Leg, in.A
To 3/16, incl to 3/8, incl Over 3/s
in.
TO 1,incl
0.008
0.010
0.012
Over 1 t o 2, incl
Over 2 t o 3,excl
0.010
0.010
0.015
...
0.012
0.015
l/32
3/64
6
A he longer leg of an unequal angle determines the size for tolerance. The out-of-square tolerance in either clirection is 1%".
TABLE A1.5
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N DIMENSIONS FOR
HOT-WROUGHT BAR SIZE CHANNELS OF CARBON
STEEL
Permissible Variations in Size,
Over and Under, in.
Thickness of
Specified
Size of
Channel, in.
I'/~,incl
Over 11/, t o 3,
excl
TO
for
Depth
Width
Thickness Given
Over
of
of
To 3/1b,
sectionB ~ l a n g e s ~ incl
5;z
Vlb
0.010
0.015
0.015
0.020
Out-ofsquareA
if Either
Flange,
in.lin. of
Flange
Width
I
4 2
/3 2
"or
channels 5,/ in. and under in depth, the out-of-square tolerance is 3/b4 in./in. of depth.
BMeas~trementsfor depth of section and width of flanges are
overall.
TABLE A1.6
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N DIMENSIONS FOR
HOT-WROUGHT BAR SIZE TEES OF CARBON STEEL
Permissible Variations in Size, in.
Specified size
of Tee, in.A
Width or
~epth'
Thickness
of Flange
Thickness
of Stem
Stem
outof-
Over Under Over Under Over Under squarec
TO I%, incl
3/64
?/b4
Over 11/, t o 2, incl
Over 2 to 3, excl
3/32
3/,,
0.010 0.010 0.005 0.020
0.012 0.012 0.010 0.020
0.015 0.015 0.015 0.020
1/32
1/,,
3/32
A The longer member of the unequal tee determines the size for
tolerances.
Measurements for both width and depth are overall.
Stem out-of-square is the variation from its true position of
the center line of the stem measured at the point.
TABLE A1.7
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N DIMENSIONS FOR
HALF-ROUNDS, OVALS, HALF-OVALS, AND OTHER
SPECIAL BAR SIZE SECTIONS
Due t o Inill facilities, tolerances on half-rounds, ovals, half-ovals,
and other special bar size sections vary among the
manufacturers and such tolerances should be negotiated between
the manufacturer and the ourchaser.
2004 SECTION I1
TABLE A1.8
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N LENGTH FOR HOT-WROUGHT ROUNDS, SQUARES, HEXAGONS, FLATS, AND BAR
SIZE SECTIONS OF STEEL
Permissible Variations Over Specified Length,
Specified Size of Flats, in.
Specified Size o f Rounds, Squares,
and Hexagons, in.
5 t o 1 0 ft,
Thickness
Width
excl
1 0 t o 2 0 ft,
excl
2 0 t o 3 0 ft,
excl
30 t o 4 0 ft,
excl
4 0 t o 6 0 ft,
excl
2
2
2 3/4
M i l l Shearincl
To 1, incl
Over 1 t o 2 , incl
Over 2 t o 5, incl
Over 5 t o 10, incl
Bar Size Sections
t o 1, incl
over 1
to 1, incl
over 1
t o 3, incl
to 3, incl
over 3 t o 6, incl
over 3 t o 6, incl
...
...
/4'
1
1
1
2112
1
13/4
1
1
1
1
1314
2'4
1%
2
1
13/4
2
2
2
2
4
4
2 112
1
21/2
13/4
23/4
2
3
2 3/4
3
5/8
1
2
0.230 to 1, incl over 6 t o 8, incl
over 1 t o 3, incl over 6 t o 8, incl
3/4
...
%
11/4
...
z~/~
/2'
a/'
v2
3
3
3
v2
3
Hot Sawing
2 t o 5, incl
Over 5 t o 10, incl
1 and over
3 and over
6
...
...
B
No permissible variations under.
'Smaller sizes and shorter lengths are liot hot sawed.
A
TABLE A1.9
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N LENGTH FOR
!?EC-UTT![\!G OF B.4P.S IVlEETING SPECIAL
STRAIGHTNESSTOLERANCES
Sizes of Rounds, Squares,
Hexagons,
. Width of Flats
and Maximum Dimension of
Other Sections, ikA
TO 3, incl
Over 3 t o 6, incl
Over 6 t o 8, incl
Rounds over 8 t o 10, incl
" No tolerance under.
Tolerances Over Specified
Length, in.A
To 12 ft, incl
Over 1 2 f t
'14
5/16
5/16
7/16
7/16
9/16
11
/I 6
9/16
TABLE A1.10
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N STRAIGHTNESS FOR
HOT-WROUGHT BARS AND BAR SIZE SECTIONS OF
STEEL*
Standard tolerances
Special tolerances
I/,
in. in any 5 f t or
in. in any 5 ft or
(I/,
in. x length in ftY5
in. x length in ftV5
A Because of warpage, straightness tolerances do not apply to
bars i f any subsequent heating operation or controlled cooling has
been performed.
PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
§A-29lSA-29M
TABLE Al.11
SIZE TOLERANCES FOR COLD-FINISHED CARBON STEEL BARS, COLD DRAWN OR
TURNED AND POLISHED~
Maximum of
Carbon
Range
0.28% or
less
Size, in.'
Maximum of
Carbon
Range Over
0.28% t o
0.55%, incl
Maximuni of
Carbon
Range t o
0.55%, incl,
Stress
Relieved or
Annealed
after Cold
Finishing
All tolerances are in inches'and
Maximum of Carboll
Range Over 0.55%
or All Grades
Quenched and
Tempered or
Normalized and
Tempered before
Cold Finishing
are minusc
Rounds - Cold Drawn (to 4 in.) or Turned and Polished
To 11/,, incl
Over 11/,to 2?;, incl
Over zl/, to 4, incl
Over 4 t o 6, incl
Over 6 t o 8, incl
Over 8 t o 9, incl
0.002
0.003
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.003
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.009
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.009
0.010
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.009
Hexagons
To 3/,, incl
Over 3/4 t o 11/,,incl
Over 1112
t o zl/,, incl
Over 2'/, t o 3l/,, incl
Over 358 t o 4, incl
0.002
0.003
0.004
0.005
0.005
0.003
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.006
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.007
To 3/4, incl
Over 3/4 to ll&,incl
Over 11
' , t o 21/,, incl
Over zl/, t o 4, incl
Over 4 to 5, incl
Over 5 t o 6, incl
0.002
0.003
0.004
0.006
0.010
0.014
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.008
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.009
0.007
0.008
0.009
0.011
...
...
...
...
...
...
0.003
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.008
0.013
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.008
0.010
0.015
0.006
0.008
0.010
0.011
0.012
0.008
0.010
0.012
0.016
0.020
width,'
...
...
in.
To 3/4, incl
Over
t o 11/,, incl
Over 1%t o 3, incl
Over 3 to 4, incl
Over 4 to 6, iticl
Over 6
-
A This table iiicludes tolerances for bars that have been annealed, spheroidize annealed, normalized, nornialized and tempered, or quenched and tempered before cold finishing. T h ~ stable does not include tolerances for bars that are annealed, spheroidize annealed, normalized, normalized and tempered, or
for tolerances for s~iclibars.
quenched and tempered after cold finishing; the producer should be cons~~lted
BWidth governs the tolerances for both width and thicl(ness of flats. For example, wlie~ithe maximum
of carbon range is 0.28% or less, for a flat 2 in. wide and 1 in. thick, the width tolerance is 0.005 In.
and the thickness tolerance is the same, ~namely, 0.005 in.
Standard manufacturing practice is a shear cut for cold drawn bars (size limits vary by proclucer)
which can cause end distortion resulting in those portions of the bar being outside the applicable size tolerance. When this end condition is objectionable, a machine cut end should be considered.
Tolerances may be ordered all pl~is,or distributed plus and minus with the sun1 equivalent to the tolerances listed.
2004 SECTION I1
TABLE A1.12
SIZE TOLERANCES FOR COLD FINISHED ROUND
BARS COLD DRAWN, GROUND AND POLISHED OR
TURNED, GROUND AND POLISHED
Size, in. Cold Drawn,
Ground and Polished
Turned, Ground and
Polished
To ll&
incl
Over 11/, t o 2/,'
excl
2/,' t o 3, incl
Over 3 to 4, incl
To ll&
incl
Over 11/, t o 2'/?, excl
2/,' t o 3, incl
Over 3 t o 4, incl
Over 4 to 6, incl
Over 6
...
...
Tolerances from
Specified Size,
Minus Only, in.
0.001
0.0015
0.002
0.003
0.004~
0.005~
A For non-resulfurized steels (steels specified t o maximum sulphur limits under 0.08%), or f o r steels thermally treated, the tolerance is increased by 0.001 in.
PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
T A B L E A1.13
SIZE TOLERANCE FOR COLD-FINISHED ALLOY STEEL BARS, COLD DRAWN, OR
TURNED AND POLISHED
Maximum of Carbon
Maximum of
Carbon
Range
0.28% or
less
Size
Maxilnu~nof
Carbon
Range Over
0.28% t o
0.55%, iricl
Maximum of
Carbon
Range t o
0.55%, incl,
Stress
Relieved or
Annealed
after Cold
Finishing
Range Over 0.55%
With or Without
Stress Relieving or
A~inealingafter
Cold Finishing.
Also, all Carbons,
Quenclied and
Tempered (Heat
Treated), or
Normalized and
Tempered, before
Cold Finishing
All tolerances are in inches and are minusB
Rounds - Cold Drawn (to 4 in.) or Turned and Polished
To 1,incl, in coils
Cut Lengths:
To 11/,,incl
Over
to 21/,,
incl
Over 21/2to 4,incl
Over 4 to 6,incl
Over 6 to 8,incl
Over 8 to 9,incl
0.002
0.003
0.004
0.005
0.003
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.009
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.009
0.010
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.009
0.010
0.011
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.007
0.008
0.009
0.010
...
...
...
Hexagons
To 3/4,incl
Over 3/4to I?,, incl
Over 11/,t o 2
'/,, incl
Over 2
'
/
, t o 3'/,, incl
Over 3
'
/
, t o 4,incl
0.003
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.006
Squares
To 3/4,iticl
Over
t o lk,incl
Over 15i to 21/,,
incl
Over 2
'
/
, to 4,incl
Over 4 to 5,incl
0.003
0.004
0.005
0.007
0.011
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.009
0.006
0.007
0.008
0.010
0.008
0.009
0.010
0.012
...
...
...
To 3/4,incl
Over 3/, to 1'4, incl
Over 11/,t o 3,incl
Over 3 to 4, incl
Over 4 to 6,incl
Over 6
0.004
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.009
0.014
0.005
0.006
0.007
0.009
0.011
0.007
0.009
0.011
0.012
0.013
0.009
0.011
0.013
0.017
0.021
...
...
...
A Width governs tlie tolerances for both wiclth and tliiclcness of flats. For exaniple, when tlie maximuni
of carbon range is 0.28% or less, for a flat 2 in. wide and 1 in. tliicl(, the wicith tolerance is 0.006 in.
and the thickness tolerance is the same, namely 0.006in.
"Standard manufacturing practice is a shear cut for cold drawn bars (size limits vary by proclucer)
which can cause end distortion res~lltingin those portions of tlie liar being o~~tsicle
the applicable size tolerance. When this end condition is objectionable, a machine cut end slio~~lcl
be considered.
2004 SECTION I1
TABLE A1.14
STRAIGHTNESS TOLERANCES FOR COLD FINISHED
BARS~J~
Straightness Tolerances, in. (Maximum Deviation) from Straightness i n any 10-ft Portion
of the Bar
Maximum of Carbon Range, 0.28% or
Less
Size, in.
Length, ft
Less than 5/,
Less than ?/8
'/,and over
5/n and over
less than 1 5
1 5 and over
less than 1 5
1 5 and over
Rounds
Squares, Hexagons,
and Octagons
Maximum of Carbon Range Over
0.28% and All Grades Thermally
Treated
Rounds
Squares, Hexagons,
and Octagons
sb
I/' 6
Note 1 - All grades quenched and tempered or normalized and tempered t o Brinell 3 0 2 max. before cold finishing; and all grades stress
relieved or annealed after cold finishing. Straightness tolerances are not applicable t o bars having Brinell hardness exceeding 3 0 2 .
A The foregoing tolerances are based on the following method of measuring straightness: Departure from straightness is measured by placing the bar on a level table so that the arc or departure from straightness is horizontal, and the depth of the arc is measured with a feeler
gage and a straightedge.
It should be recognized that straightness is a perishable quality and lnay be altered by mishandling. The preservation of straightness in
cold-finished bars requires the utmost care in subsequent handling. Specific straightness tolerances are sometimes required for carbon and
alloy steels in which case the purchaser should inform the manufacturer of the straightness tolerances and the methods t o be used in checlting
the straightness.
PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENSIONAH, TOLE
UNITS
A2.P Listed below are permissible variations in
dimensions expressed in SI units of measurement.
TABLE A2.1
TOLERANCES I N SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR
ROUND AND SQUARE BARS AND ROUND-CORNERED
SQUARE BARS
Size, lnrn
Tolerance from
Specified Size,
Over arid
Under,
mm or %A
To 7, incl
Over 7 to 11,incl
Over 11 t o 15, incl
Over 15 t o 19, incl
Over 19 t o 250,incl
0.13 mrn
0.15 m m
0.18 m m
0.20 mm
1%
TABLE A2.2
TOLERANCES I N CROSS SECTION FOR HOTWROUGHT HEXAGONALANDOCTAGONALSTEEL
BARS
Tolerance from
Out-of-Round, or
Out-of-Square
Section,'
mln or
0.20 mm
0.22 lnin
0.27 ~ i i m
0.30 mm
1.5%
"he
tolerance shall be rounded t o tlie nearest tenth of a millitnetre after calculation.
B ~ u t - o f - r o ~ ~isnthe
d difference between tlie maximum and tlie
minimum diameters of tlie bar, measured at the same cross section. OL~-of-squareis the difference in the two dimensions at tlie
same cross section of a square bar between opposite faces.
'pecified Size,
mni
Specified Size Between
Opposite Sides, lnm
Over
Under
To 13, incl
Over 13 t o 25, incl
Over 25 to 40, incl
Over 40 to 50, incl
Over 50 to 65,incl
Over 65 to 80,incl
Over 80 to 100,incl
0.18
0.25
0.55
0.8
1.2
1.6
2.0
0.18
0.25
0.35
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
Out of Hexagon
or Out of
Octagon, mniA
A Out of hexagon or out of octagon is tlie greatest difference
between any two dimensions at the cross section between opposite
faces.
TABLE A2.3
THICKNESS AND WIDTH TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT SQUARE-EDGE AND ROUND-EDGE FLAT B A R S ~ , ~
Tolerances from
Specified
Width, rnm
Tolerances fro111 Specified Thicl~nessfor Tliicl(ness Given Over
and Under, rnrn
Specified Width, m ~ n
To 25, incl
Over 25 t o 50,incl
Over 50 to 100, incl
Over 100 t o 150,incl
Over 150 t o 200,incl
Over 5 t o
6, incl
Over 6 to
12, incl
Over 1 2 t o
25, incl
Over 2 5 t o
50, i ~ i c l
Over 5 0
to 75
Over 7 5
Over
Under
0.18
0.18
0.20
0.25
0.20
0.30
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.25
0.40
0.50
0.50
0.65
...
...
...
...
...
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.6
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.5
3.0
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.5
A
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
A When a square is held against a face and an edge of a square edge flat bar, tlie edge shall not deviate by more than 3" or 5% of the
thickness.
'Flats over 150 t o 200 rnrn, incl in wicltli are not available as hot-wrought bars in thickness 6 mm and mder.
2004 SECTION I1
TABLE A2.4
THICI<NESS, LENGTH, AND OUT-OF-SQUARE
TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT BAR SIZE
ANGLES
Tolerances i n Thickness for
Thickness Given, Over and
Under, mm
Tolerances
for Length of
Leg Over and
Specified Length of
Over 5 to
Leg, mmAfB
To 5, incl 10, incl Over 1 0 Under, m m
To 50, incl
Over 5 0 t o 75, excl
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.4
0.3
0.4
1
2
The longer leg of an ~ ~ n e q u angle
al
determines the size for tolerance.
"Out of square tolerances in either direction is 11/," = 0.026
m nilmm.
A
TABLE A2.5
DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT
BAR SIZE CHANNELS
Tolerances i n Size. Over and Under, lnm
Out of
Square of
Either
Flange per
min of
Flange
Depth of Width of To 5,
SeciiotiA ~ l a r i g e s iricl
~
Over 5 Width,' t i i r i i
Thicltness of
Web
Specified Size of
Channel, m m
To 40, incl
Over 40 t o 75, excl
1
2
1
2
0.2
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.03
0.03
A Measurements for depth of section and width of flanges are
overall.
'For channels 16 m m and under in depth, out of square tolerance is 0.05 mnilmm.
TABLE A2.6
DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT
BAR SIZE TEES
Tolerances i n Size, mni
Specified Size of
~ e e mm
, ~
To 30, incl
Over 3 0 to 50, incl
Over 5 0 to 75. excl
Width or
~eptli,'
Tliicltness
of Flange
Tliicltness
of Stein
Stenl Out
of
Over Under Over Under Over Under SquareC
1
2
2
1
2
2
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.5
1
2
2
A The longer member of the unequal tee determines the size for
tolerances.
Measurements for width and depth are over all.
Stem out of square is the tolerance from its true position of
tlie center line of tlie stem measured at the point.
'
TABLE A2.7
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS I N DIMENSIONS FOR
HALF-ROUNDS, OVALS, HALF-OVALS, AND OTHER
SPECIAL BAR SIZE SECTIONS
Due t o ~ n i lfacilities,
l
tolerances on half-rounds, ovals, and other
special bar size sections vary among the manufacturers and such
tolerances sliould be negotiated between tlie manufacturer and the
purchaser.
PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
T A B L E A2.8
LENGTH TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT ROUNDS, SQUARES, HEXAGONS, OCTAGONS, FLATS, AND BAR SIZE
SECTIONS
Specified Size of Flats, tntn
Specified Size of Rounds,
Squares, Hexagons and
Octagons, mtn
Thickness
Tolerances over Specified Length, tnmA
1500 to
3000, excl
Width
3 0 0 0 to
6000, excl
6000 t o
9000, excl
9000 t o
1 2 000, excl
18 000, excl
1 2 000 to
40
65
45
70
60
75
70
85
Hot Shearing
To 25, incl
Over 25 to 50, ilicl
Over 5 0 to 125, incl
Over 125 t o 250, incl
Bar Size Sections
t o 25, incl
over 2 5
t o 25, incl
over 25
t o 75, incl
t o 75, incl
over 75 t o 150, incl
over 75 to 150, incl
...
...
over 6 t o 25, incl
over 25 t o 75, incl
over 1 5 0 t o 200, incl
over 150 t o 200, incl
Hot Sawing
5 0 t o 125, incl
Over 1 2 5 t o 250, incl
25 and over
...
7 5 and over
B
...
B
No tolerance under.
'Smaller sizes and shorter lengths are not hot sawed.
A
T A B L E A2.9
LENGTH TOLERANCES FOR RECUTTING OF BARS
M E E T I N G SPECIAL STRAIGHTNESS TOLERANCES
Sizes of Roitnds, Sqiiaies,
Hexagons, Octagons, Widths
of Flats and Maximum
Dimensions of Other
Sections, lntn
To 75, incl
Over 75 t o 150, incl
Over 1 5 0 to 200, incl
Rounds over 200 to 250, incl
A
No tolerance under.
Tolerances over Specified
Length, miniA
To 3 7 0 0 mm,
incl
6
8
11
14
Over
3700 lnln
8
11
14
18
T A B L E 82.10
STRAIGHTNESS TOLERANCES FOR HOT-WROUGHT
BARS AND
BAR SIZE SECTIONS~
Standard tolerances
Special tolerances
'
6 m m in ally 1500 mm or (length in
mm1250)'
3 mm in any 1500 mm or (lenyth in
mni/500)~
Because of warpaye, straightness tolerances do not apply to
bars i f any subsequent heating operation or controlled cooling has
been performed.
Rou~idt o the nearest whole niillimetre.
'
2004 SECTION I1
TABLE A2.11
SIZE TOLERANCES FOR COLD-FINISHED CARBON STEEL BARS, COLD DRAWN OR
TURNED AND POLISHED*
Tolerances from Specified Size, Under Only, m m
Maximum of
Carbon
Range 0.28
or Less
Size, m m
Maximum of
Carbon
Range Over
0.28 t o
0.55, incl
Maximum of
Carbon
Range t o
0.55%) incl
Stress
Relief or
Annealed
After Cold
Finishing
Maximum of Carbon
Range Over 0.55%
or All Grades
Quenched and
Tempered or
Normalized Before
Cold Finishing
Rounds - Cold Drawn (lo 1 0 0 mm i n size) or Turned and Polished
To 40, incl
Over 40 t o 60, incl
Over 60 t o 100, incl
Over 100 t o 150, incl
Over 150 t o 200, incl
Over 200 t o 230, incl
0.05
0.08
0.10
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.08
0.10
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.20
0.10
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.20
0.23
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.20
0.23
0.25
0.10
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.15
0.18
0.20
0.23
Hexagons - Cold Drawn
Up t o 20, incl
Over 20 t o 40, incl
Over 40 t o 60, incl
Over 60 t o 80, incl
Over 80 t o 100, incl
0.05
0.08
0.10
0.13
0.13
0.08
0.10
0.13
0.15
0.15
SquaresUp t o 20, incl
Over 20 t o 40, incl
Over 40 t o 60, incl
Over 60 t o 100, incl
Over 100 t o 130, incl
Over 130 t o 150, incl
0.05
0.08
0.10
0.15
0.25
0.36
...
Cold ~ r a w n '
0.10
0.13
0.15
0.20
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.23
0.18
0.20
0.23
0.28
...
...
...
...
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.28
0.30
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.40
0.50
...
...
...
...
Flats - Cold ~ r a w n " ~
To 20, incl
Over 20 t o 40, incl
Over 40 to 80, incl
Over 80 t o 100, incl
Over 100 t o 150, incl
Over 150
0.08
0.10
0.13
0.15
0.20
0.33
0.10
0.13
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.38
A This table includes tolerances for bars that have been annealed, spheroidize annealed, normalized, normalized and tempered, or quenched and tempered before cold finishing. This table does not include tolerances for bars that are annealed, spheroidize annealed, normalized, normalized and tempered, 01.
quenched and tempered after cold finishing; the producer should be consulted for tolerances for such bars.
BTolerances lnay be ordered all plus, or distributed plus and minus with the sum equivalent t o the tolerances listed.
Width governs the tolerance for both width and thickness of flats, for example, when the maximum of
carbon range is 0.28% or less for a flat 50 mm wide and 25 m m thick, the width tolerance is 0.13 nim
and the thickness is the same, nearly, 0.13 mm.
PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE A2.12
SIZE TOLERANCES FOR COLD-FINISHED ROUND
BARS, COLD DRAWN, GROUND AND POLISHED, OR
TURNED, GROUND AND POLISHED
Size, m m
Colcl Drawn, Ground,
and Polished
To 4 0 , incl
Over 40 t o 6 0 , incl
Over 60 t o 80, incl
Over 80 to 1 0 0 , incl
...
...
Turned, Ground, and
Polislied
To 40, incl
Over 40 t o 6 0 , incl
Over 60 t o 80, incl
Over 80 t o 1 0 0 , incl
Over 1 0 0 t o 1 5 0 , incl
Over 1 5 0
Tolerances from,
Specified
Size, Minus
Onlv. mm
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.08
0.10~
0.13"
A For nonresulfurized steels (steels specified to maximum S L I I ~ L I ~
0 . 0 8 % ) or for steels thermally treated, the tolerance
limits ~~ncler
is increased by 0.03 mm.
1004 SECTION I1
TABLE A2.13
SIZE TOLERANCES FOR COLD-FINISHED ALLOY STEEL BARS, COLD DRAWN OR
TURNED AND POLISHED~
-
-
Tolerances from Specified Size, Under Only, mm
Maximum of
Carbon
Range 0.28
or less
Size, m m
Rounds
To 25, incl, in coils
Cut Lengths
To 40, incl
Over 40 t o 60, incl
Over 60 t o 100, incl
Over 1 0 0 to 150, incl
Over 1 5 0 to 200, incl
Over 200 t o 230, incl
-
Maximum of
Carbon
Range Over
0.28 t o 0.55,
incl
Maximum of
Carbon
Range t o
0.55%, incl
Stress Relief
or Annealed
After Cold
Finishing
Maximum of Carbon
Range Over 0.55%
or All Grades
Quenched and
Tempered or
Normalized Before
Cold Finishing
-
Cold Drawn (to 1 0 0 m m i n size) or Turned and Polished
0.05
0.08
0.10
0.08
0.10
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.20
0.10
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.20
0.23
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.20
0.23
0.25
Hexagons - Cold Drawn
Up t o 20, i n d
Over 20 t o 40, incl
Over 40 t o 60, incl
Over 60 t o 80, inci
Over 80 t o 100, incl
0.08
0.10
0.13
0.15
0.15
0.10
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.20
0.18
0.20
0.23
0.25
...
...
...
0.15
0.18
0.20
0.25
0.25
0.20
0.23
0.25
0.30
0.30
Squares - Cold Drawn
Up t o 20, incl
Over 20 to 40, incl
Over 40 t o 60, incl
Over 60 t o 100, incl
Over 1 0 0 t o 130, incl
0.08
0.10
0.13
0.18
0.28
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.23
0.23
Flats - Cold ~ r a w n '
width'
To 20, incl
Over 20 t o 40, incl
Over 40 t o 80, incl
Over 80 t o 100, incl
Over 1 0 0 t o 150, incl
Over 150
0.10
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.23
0.36
A This table includes tolerances for bars that have been annealed, spheriodize annealed, normalized, normalized and tempered, or quenched and tempered before cold finishing. This table does not include tolerances for bars that are annealed, spheriodize annealed, normalized, normalized and tempered, or
quenched and tempered after cold finishing; the producer should be consulted for tolerances for such bars.
'Width governs the tolerance for both width and thicltness of flats. For example, when the maximum
of carbon range is 0.28% or less for a flat 50 mni wide and 25 nim thick, the width tolerance is 0.13
mm and the thickness tolerance is the same, namely 0.13 mm.
PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
T A B L E A2.14
STRAIGHTNESS TOLERANCES FOR COLD-FINISHED B A R S ~ ~ ~
Straightness Tolerances, mni (Maximum Deviation) from Straightness in any 3000 m m
Portion of the Bar
Maximum of Carbon Range, 0.28% or
less
Size, ~nln
Less than 1 6
Less than 1 6
16 and over
1 6 and over
Length, lnln
Rounds
Squares, Hexagons,
and Octagons
Maximum of Carbon Range over
0.28% and all Grades Tliermally
Treated
Rounds
Squares, Hexagons,
and Octagons
Less than 4500
4500 and over
Less than 4500
4500 and over
Note - All grades quenched and tempered or normalized and tempered t o Brinnell 302 maximum before cold finishing and all grades
stress relieved or annealed after cold finishing. Straightness tolerances are not applicable t o bars having Brinnell liardness exceeding 302.
A The foregoing tolerances are based obi tlie following method of measuring straighttiess; departure from straightness is measured by placing the bar on a level table so that the arc or departure from straightness is horizontal, and the depth of the arc is measured with a feeler
gage and a straightedge.
'It s l i o ~ ~ be
l d recognized that straightness is a perishable quality and may be altered by mishandling. The preservation of straightness in
cold-finished bars requires tlie utmost care i n subsequent Iiandling. Specific straightness tolerances are sometimes required for carbon and
alloy steels in which case tlie purchaser sI10~1ldinform tlie manufacturer of tlie straightness tolerances and the methods to be used in checking
tlie straightness.
INTERNATIONAL
Slandards Woildivlde
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 36/A 36M-00a.)
Scope
1.1 This specification covers carbon steel shapes,
plates, and bars of structural quality for use in riveted,
bolted, or welded construction of bridges and buildings,
and for general str~~ctural
purposes.
1.2 S~~pple~nentary
requirements are provided for use
where additional testing or additional restrictions are
required by the purchaser. Such requirements apply only
when specified in the purchase order.
1.3 When the steel is to be welded, a welding procedure suitable for the grade of steel and intended use or
service is to be utilized. See Appendix X3 of Specification
A 6/A 6M for infonnation on weldability.
1.4 For Groups 4 and 5 wide flange shapes for use
in tension, it is recommended that the purchaser consider
specifying supplementary requirements, such as fine austenitic grain size and Charpy V-notch impact testing.
1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound n nits or
SI units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within
the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values
stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore,
each system is to be used independently of the other,
without combining values in any way.
1.6 The text of this specification contains notes or
footnotes, or both, that provide explanatory material.
Such notes and footnotes, excluding those in tables and
figures, do not contain any mandatory requirements.
1.7 For plates cut from coiled product, the additional
requirements, including additional testing requirements
and the reporting of additional test results, of A 6/A 6M
apply.
1.
A 27/A 27M Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon,
for General Application
A 307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60, 000 psi Tensile Strength
A 325 Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Struct~~ral
Steel Joints
A 325M Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints [Metric]
A 500 Specification for Cold-Fonned Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and
Shapes
A 501 Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
A 502 Specification for Steel Structural Rivets
A 563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
A 563M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
[Metric]
A 570/A 570M Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Str~~ctural
Quality
A 668/A 688M Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon
and Alloy, for General Industrial Use
F 568M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners
Appurtenant Materials
3.1 When components of a steel structure are identified with this ASTM designation but the product form is
not listed in the scope of this specification, the material
shall conform to one of the standards listed in Table 1
unless otherwise specified by the purchaser.
3.
4.
Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Stnnrlnl-ds:
A 6/A 6M Specification for General Requirements for
Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and
Sheet Piling
2.
General Requirements for Delivery
4.1 Material furnished under this specification shall
conform to the requirements of the current edition of
Specification A 6/A 6M, for the ordered material, unless
a conflict exists in which case this specification shall
prevail.
SA-36lSA-36M
2004 SECTION IS
4.1.1 Coiled product is excluded from qualification
to this specification until decoiled, levelled, and cut to
length. Plates produced from coil means plates that have
been cut to individual lengths from a coiled product and
are furnished without heat treatment. The processor
decoils, levels, cuts to length, and marks the product. The
processor is responsible for performing and certifying all
tests, examinations, repairs, inspections, or operations not
intended to affect the properties of the material. For plates
produced from coils, two test results shall be reported
for each qualifying coil. See Note 1.
NOTE 1 - Additional requirements regarding plate from coil are
described i n Specification A 6/A 6M.
5.1 Unless otherwise specified, plates used as bearing
plates for bridges shall be subjected to mechanical tests
and shall conform to the tensile requirements of Section 8.
5.2 Unless otherwise specified, mechanical tests shall
not be required for plates over 1'/' in. [40 mm] in thickness used as bearing plates in structures other than
bridges, subject to the requirement that they shall contain
0.20 to 0.33% carbon by heat analysis, that the chemical
composition shall conform to the requirements of Table
2 in phosphorus and sulfur content, and that a sufficient
discard shall be made to secure sound plates.
Materials and Manufacture
6.1 The steel for plates and bars over th_ in. [12.5
mm] in thickness and shapes other than Group 1 shall
be semikilled or killed.
7.
Chemical Composition
7.1 The heat analysis shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 2, except as specified in 5.2.
7.2 The steel shall confonn on product analysis to
the requirements prescribed in Table 2, subject to the
product analysis tolerances in Specification A 6/A 6M.
8.
Tension Test
8.1 The material as represented by the test specimen,
except as specified in 5.2 and 8.2, shall conform to the
requirements as to the tensile properties prescribed in
Table 3.
8.2 Shapes less than 1 in.' [645 mm'] in cross-section
and bars, other than flats, less than '4in. [12.5 mm] in
thickness or diameter need not be subjected to tension
tests by the manufacturer, provided that the chemical
composition used is appropriate for obtaining the tensile
properties in Table 3.
6.
9.1 bars; bolted construction; bridges; buildings; carbon; plates; riveted construction; shapes; steel; structural
steel; welded construction
TABLE 1
APPURTENANT MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Material
Steel rivets
Bolts
High-strength bolts
Steel nuts
Cast steel
Forgings (carbon steel)
Hot-rolled sheets and strip
Cold-formed tubing
Hot-formed tubing
Anchor bolts
A S T M Designation
A 502, Grade 1
A 307, Grade A or F 568M,
Class 4.6
A 325 or A 325M
A 563 or A 563M
A 27lA 27M, Grade 65-35
C450-2401
A 668, Class D
A 570lA 570M, Grade 3 6
A 500, Grade B
A 501
F 1554
NOTE 1 - The specifier should be satisfied of the suitability of
these n~aterialsfor the intended application. Chemical compositio~i
andlor mechanical properties may be different than specified in A
36lA 36 M.
TABLE 2
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
platess
Product
Thicl(ness, in. Lmml
....
VI
VI
Carbon, max., %
Manganese, %
P I i o s p h o ~ . ~niax.,
~~, %
Sulfur, max., %
Silicon, %
Copper, min., Yo when copper
steel is specifiecl
shapesA
All
To 3/11
C201,
Incl.
Over 3/4 t o
11/2
L20 t o
401, Incl.
Over 1!/i
t o 21/2 L4.0
t o 651,
Incl.
2
Bars
Over 21/2
t o 4 C65
t o 1001,
Incl.
Over 4
11001
To 3/4
C201,
Incl.
0.26
0.25
...
...
0.25
0.80-1.20
0.26
0.80-1.20
0.27
0.85-1.20
0.29
0.85-1.20
0.26
...
0.04
0.05
0.40 max.
0.20
0.04
0.05
0.40 max.
0.20
0.04
0.05
0.40 iiiax.
0.20
0.04
0.05
0.15-0.40
0.20
0.04
0.05
0.15-0.40
0.20
0.04
0.05
0.15-0.40
0.20
0.04
0.05
0.40 max.
0.20
Over 3/4 t o
1Y2 C20 t o
401, Incl.
Over 11/2
to 4
C40 t o
1001,
Incl.
9
I
Over 4
ClOOl
0.27
0.28
0.29
0.60-0.90
0.04
0.05
0.40 tnax.
0.20
0.60-0.90
0.04
0.05
0.40 ~ i i a x .
0.20
0.60-0.90
0.04
0.05
0.40 wax.
0.20
-
NOTE 1 - Where ". . ." appears in this table, tliere is no !requirement. The heat analysis for manganese shall be determined and reported as described in the heat analysis section of
Specification A 6IA 6M.
" Manganese content of 0.85-1.35% and silicon content of 0.15-0.40% is required for shapes over 426 Iblft C634 kg/ml.
'For each reduction of 0.01% point below the specified carbon maximuni, an increase of 0.06% point manganese above the specified maximum will be permitted, up to the maximum of 1.35%.
P
RJ
2
0
5
4
m
z
CA
'0
h
C!
2
z
0
5
2004 SECTION I1
TABLE 3
TENSILE REQUIREMENTS~
Plates, shapes,' and Bars:
Tensile strength, ltsi CM P a l
Yield point, min., ltsi [ M P a l
Plates and ~ a l . 5 ~ ) ~ :
Elongation in 8 in. C200 mml, mill., %
Elongation in 2 in. C50 mml, lnin., %
Shapes:
Elongation in 8 in. C200 mml, min., %
Elongation i n 2 in. [50 mml, min., %
58-80 C400-5501
3 6 C250lc
20
23
20
218
A See the Orientation subsection in the Tension Tests section of
Specification A 6IA 6M.
'For wide flange shapes over 426 Iblft C634 ltglml, the 8 0 ltsi
C550 M P a l maximum tensile strength does not apply and a minimum elongation in 2 in. C50 m l n l of 1 9 % applies.
Yield point 3 2 ltsi C220 M P a l for plates over 8 in. C200 mrnl
in thicltness.
Elongation not required t o be determined for floor plate.
For plates wider than 24 in. C6OO mml, the elongation requirement is reduced 2% points. See Elongation Requirement Adjustments s~lbsection~lnderthe Tension Tests section of Specification
A 6IA 6M.
PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
These requirements shall not apply unless specified in the order. Standardized supplementary requirements for use at the option of the purchaser are listed in Specification A 6/A
6M. Those that are considered suitable for use with this specification are listed by title.
S5.
Charpy V-Notc
In addition, the following optional supplementary
requirements are also suitable for use with this specification.
S97. Eimitatian on Phmmed or Capped Steel
S97.1 The steel shall be other than rimmed or capped.
(identical will1 ASTM Specification A 47lA 47M-99, except for the deletion of welded repair references in 11.2 and 11.3, and mandatory
certification in 14.1.)
1.
Scope
1.1 This specification covers femtic malleable cast-
ings for general engineering usage at temperatures from
normal ambient to approximately 400°C (750°F).
2.3 Federrrl Stniirlrrrd:
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marlung for Domestic Shipment (Civilian Agencies)
.2 No precise quantitative relationship can be stated
between the properties of the iron in various locations of
the same casting and those of a test specimen cast from
the same iron (see Appendix XI).
3.
1.3 The values stated in either inch-pound units or
SI units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within
the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values
stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore,
each system shall be used independently of the other.
Combining values from the two systems may result in
nonconformance with the specification.
4.
2.
Referenced 9ocurneipts
2.1 ASTM Staizdrrrds:
A 153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron
and Steel Hardware
A 247 Test Method for Evaluating the Microstructure of
Graphite in Iron Castings
A 644 Terminology Relating to Ison Castings
E 8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials
E 10 Test Method for Brine11 Hardness of Metallic Materials
E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials
E 140 Hardness Conversion Tables for Metals
2.2 Militmy Staizdrrrd:
MIL-STD- 129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
Terminology
3.1 DeJiizitioizs -Definitions for many tesms common
to iron are found in Tennillology A 644.
Classification
4.1 Castings ordered and produced under this specification are classified nnder the following grades based on
tests on separately cast test bars. Separately cast test bars
shall be poured from the same lot of iron as the castings
they represent and shall be heat treated with those castings
except as provided in 7.2.3.
4.1.1 Grade 32510 [Grade 22010]:
4.1.1.1 The first three digits of the grade designation indicate the minimum yield strcngth ( X 100 psi
[MPa]) and the last two digits indicate the minimum
elongation (% in 2 in. [50 mm]).
5.1 The purchase order for castings ordered under
this specification shall state the specification designation.
the year in which the specification was issued, and the
grade of ~nalleableiron to be supplied. Any option or
special additions to the basic requirements of this specification shall be clearly and fully stipulated.
6.
Chemical Composition
6.1 The chemical composition of the iron shall be such
as to produce the structural and mechanical properties
required by this specification.
04
SA-47lSA-47M
2004 SECTION I1
Mechanical
7.1 Factors influencing the properties of castings and
their relationship to those of test specimens and separate
test castings are discussed in Appendix X I .
7.
7.2 Temion Tesr Specirnerzs:
7.2.1 The tension test specimens shall be cast to
the form and dimensions shown in Fig. 1 or Fig. 2, in
the same kind of molding material used for the production
castings. At least three such speci~nensshall be cast from
a representative ladle of iron either from each batchmelted heat or, in continuous melting, from each 4-11
pour period during which the purcl~aser'scastings were
poured, or as otherwise agreed upon between manufacturer and purchaser.
7.2.2 All test specimens shall be suitably identified
with the designation of either the batch-melted heat or
the pour period of a continuous heat.
7.2.3 All test specimens shall be heat treated in the
same production furnaces and in the same cycles as the
castings they represent. However, in those instances
wherein the critical sections of the production castings
differ appreciably from that of the central portion of
the test specimens, the time cycle for tempering the test
specimens may be altered from that of the production lot
in order to obtain similar microstructures or hardness, or
both, in both speci~nenand castings. In such cases the
hardness of the specimens shall be tested and reported
along with the tensile test results.
7.2.4 The tension test is usually performed on
unmachined specimens. However, for referee work, the
spccinlen may be machined from the standard cast bar
to the dimensions shown in Fig. 3.
7.3 Terisiorz Test Metliod:
7.3.1 The gage length of [he srandard tension specin-ien shall be 2.00 + 0.01 in. [50.0 + 0.3 mm].
7.3.2 The diameter used to compute the cross-sectional area shall be the average between the largest and
smallest diameters in that section of the 2-in. [50-mm]
gage length having the smallest diameter and shall be
measured to the nearest 0.001 in. [0.2 ~nm].No cast bar
having a mean diamcter less than 0.590 in. [15.0 mm]
shall be accepted for test.
7.3.3 After reaching a stress equivalent to approximately half of the anticipated yield stress, the speed of
the moving head of the testing machine shall not exceed
0.50 in.11nin [12.5 mmlmin] through the breaking load.
7.3.4 While the values for yield point and yield
strength are not identical, they are sufficiently close for
most applications of fessitic malleable irons to be used
interchangeably. They may be detennined by any of the
approved techniques described in the paragraphs on
Determination of Yield Strength and Yield Point of Test
Methods E 8. If determined as yield strength, that stress
producing an extension under load of 0.01 in. 10.25 mm]
over the 2-in. [50-mm] gage length (for example, 0.5%
extension) or an offset of 0.2% shall be taken as the
yield stress, which shall be converted to yield strength
by dividing by the original cross-sectional area of the
gage length found in accordance with 7.3.2. It shall be
reported to the nearest 100 psi [MPa]. In referee work,
yield strength shall be determined as the stress that produces an extension under load of 0.5% of the gage length.
7.3.5 The tensile strcngth shall be the maxi~num
load c m i e d by the specimen during the test divided by
the original cross-sectional area of the gage length, as
found in accordance with 7.3.2. It shall be reported to
the nearest 100 psi [MPa].
7.3.6 The elongation is the increase in gage length
after fracture of a tensile specimen, measured to the nearest 0.01 in. [0.25 mm], expressed as a percentage of the
original gage length. It shall be reported to the nearest
0.5%.
7.4 Retestirrg:
7.4.1 If, after testing, a specimen shows evidence
of a defect, another tension test may be made on a cornpanion specimen. Also, a retest shall be peimiited whenever frach~reoccurs outside the central 50% of the gage
length.
7.4.2 If the results of a valid test fail to conform
to the requirements of this specification, two retests shall
be made. If either retest fails to meet the specification,
the castings represented by these test specimens shall be
rejected. A valid test is one wherein the test specimen
has been properly prepared and appears to be sound and
on which the approved test procedure has been followed.
7.4.3 If sufficient companion test bars are unavailable, the manufacturer shall have the option of testing a
specimen cut from a representative casting. Therefore,
as stated in XI .3, the mechanical properties of such tension test specimen removed from a production casting
will not necessarily correspond to those of a standard
separately cast test specimen, the values in Table 1 do
not apply. Instead, the mechanical properties of the test
specimen from the casting must equal or exceed the average of those from similar test specimens removed from
the same location from two castings of the same design
where separately cast test bars meet the requirements of
Table 1.
7.4.4 If the first test results indicate that a reheat
treatment is needed to meet the test requirements, the
entire lot of castings and the representative test specimens
PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
shall be reheat treated together. Testing shall then be
repeated in accordance with 7.4.1-7.4.3.
7.4.5 The results of all tests, including retests, shall
be posted in permanent record, which shall state any
abnormalities observed during the test and in the fractured
ends. Such records shall be kept for at least 1 year after
shipment of the production castings and shall be available
for examination by the purchaser or by his authorized
representative.
7.4.6 If not covered in the purchase agreement, the
frequency of tension testing shall be in accordance with
7.2.1 and sufficiently often to ensure unifomity of product and compliance with minimum test requirements.
7.4.7 Tension test results, obtained in accordance
with the above subsections, must conform to the values
of Table I for acceptance under this specification except
as provided in 7.4.3.
7.4.8 When agreed upon between manufacturer and
purchaser, tested specimens or unbroken test bars shall
be preserved by the manufacturer for a period of three
months after the date of the test report.
7.5 Hal-dness T e s t - If the purchase agreement
requires hardness testing, the acceptable hardness range
shall be stated and a test location clearly shown on the
covering drawing(s).
7.5.1 Hal-&ess Test Metlzod - The Brinell method
of hardness testing in accordance with Test Method E 10
shall be employed whenever possible.
7.5.2 For castings of such size or shape that do not
pennit Brinell testing with the standard 3000-kgf load,
the 500 kgf may be employed, the hardness number being
reported as HB 101500115. In very unusual cases where
it is impossible to use the Brinell method, the Rockwell
test may bc substituted, nsing Test Methods E 18 with
an appropriate Rockwell scale. Convcrsions of liardness
values from one method to another according to Standard
E 140, which does not specifically cover cast irons, are
approxin~ateonly and, therefore, are generally inadvisable.
7.5.3 Sufficient material shall be removed from
the cast surface to ensure that the measured surface is
representative.
7.5.4 Sampling procedures and the frequency of
hardness testing shall be fully detailed on the purchase
agreement. Otherwise, hardness tests shall be performed
at the discretion of the producer.
7.5.5 Castings failing to conform to the required
hardness range may be reheat treated and retested. If after
reheat treating they still fail the hardness requirements,
they shall be rejected.
§A-47lSA-47M
7.5.6 Typical hardness maximums for this grade
of malleable iron are listed in Table 2.
8.
Microstructure Requirements
8.1 The ~nicrostsuctureof the malleable iron shall
consist of temper carbon nodules distsibuted through a
femtic matrix and shall be free of excessive pearlite,
massive carbides, and primary graphite.
8.2 When agreed upon by the purchaser and producer,
the maxi~numdecarburization at any as-cast surface after
heat treatment may be stipulated in writing, as measured
by visual depletion of combined carbon after polishing,
etching in nital, and viewing at 100x.
8.3 In reference work, the metallographic practice
recommended in Test Method A 247 shall be followed.
Soundness hquirements
9.1 All castings, on visual examination, shall be sound
and free of obvious shrinkage and porosity.
9.
9.2 If the purchaser requires soundness tests to be
performed, it shall be so stated in the purchase agreement,
and the method and soundness requirements shall be
detailed.
10. Dimensional Requirements
10.1 The castings shall conform to the dimensions
given on drawings furnished by the purchaser, or to the
dimensions established by the pattern equipment supplied
by the purchaser, or as agreed upon in specific cases to
gages supplied by the purchaser. Variations in any solid
dimensions will be permitted, as shown in Table 3, unless
otherwise agreed upon by the foundry and purchaser.
11. Worhanship, Finish and Appearance
11.1 The surface of the casting shall be inspected
visually, particularly in critical areas, for such surface
defects as cracks, hot tears, adhering sand and scale, cold
shuts, and gas holes.
11.2 No repairing or plugging of any kind shall be
permitted unless written permission is granted by the
purchaser. Welding or brazing is not permitted under any
circumstances.
11.3 DELETED
onsibility for Inspection
12.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or
purchase order, the manufacturer shall be responsible for
SA-47lSA-47M
2004 SECTION I1
sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with this
specification, including a report of test results signed by
an authorized agent of the manufacturer, shall be furnished at the time of shipment, and such certification or
compliance statement shall be the basis for acceptance
of the casting or lot of castings.
carrying out all the tests and inspections required by this
specification, using his own or other reliable facilities,
and he shall maintain complete records of all such tests
and inspections. Such records shall be available for
review by the purchaser.
12.2 The purchaser reserves the right to perfonn any
inspection set forth in the specification where such inspections are deemed necessary to ensure that supplies and
services conform to the prescribed requirements.
15. Product Marking
15.1 When the size of the casting permits, each casting
shall bear the identifying inarlc of the manufactuser and
the part or pattern number at a location shown on the
covering drawing and, if not shown on the drawing, at
such a location at the discretion of the producer that the
identification will not interfere with s~lbsequentprocessing and service of the casting.
13. Rejection and Rehearing
15.1 Any casting or lot of castings failing to comply
with the requirements of this specification may, where
possible, be reprocessed, retested, and reinspected. If the
tests and inspections on the reprocessed casting(s) show
compliance with this specification, the castings shall be
acceptable; if they do not, they shall be rejected.
13.2 If the purchaser should find that a casting or
lot of castings fails to comply with this specification
subsequent to receipt at his facility, he shall so notify the
manufacturer promptly and in no case later than six weelts
after receipt of the shipment, stating clearly his basis for
rejection. In case of dissatisfaction with the purchaser's
claim, the manufacturer may apply for a hearing before
final rejectior, of the shipment.
16.1 Unless otherwise stated in the contract or order,
the cleaning, preservation, and paclung of castings for
shipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
commercial practice. Packaging and marking shall also
be adequate to identify the contents and to ensure acceptance and safe delivery by the canier for the mode of
transporiaiion employed.
14. Certification
14.1 A manufacturer's certification or compliance
statement that the casting or lot of castings was made,
16.2 U.S. Goveriznzent Procz~reii~eizt
- When specified in the contract or purchase order, marking for shipment shall be in accordance with the requirements of
Fed. Std. No. 123 and MIL-STD-129.
TABLE 1
TENSION TEST REQUIREMENTS
TABLE 2
TYPICAL HARDNESS
Inch-Pound Grade
[Metric Grade3
Hardness,
Maximum
HB
Indentation Value
Diameters, mm
3 2 5 1 0 C220101
156
4.8
Inch-Pound Grades
English
Grade
Tensile
Strength,
min, psi
Yield
Strength,
min, psi
Elongation in
2 in., min, %
Metric Grades
Metric
Grade
Tensile
Strength,
min. MPa
Yield
Strength,
min, MPa
TABLE 3
PERMISSIBLE VARIATION I N ANY
SOLID DIMENSION
Elongation in
50 mm, min, %
Size, in. Cmml
Up to 1 [Up to 251
1to 6 C25 to 1501
6 to 1 2 1151 to 3003
1 2 to 1 8 C30l to 4601
1 8 to 2 4 C461 to 6003
24 to 3 6 C6Ol to 9001
162
Tolerance, -c in. Cmm1
0.03
0.06
0.12
0.15
0.19
0.22
C0.81
C1.61
13.21
C3.81
C4.81
C5.61
PART A -FERROUS MATERW, SPECIFICATIONS
FIG. 1 TENSION TEST SPECIMEN
NOTE 1 - Modifications may be made in the dimensions indicated above
for those details of the specimen outside of the gage length as required by
testing procedure and equipment.
FIG. 2 ALTERNATIVE UNMACHINED TENSION TEST
SPECIMEN
Minimum Radius Recommended318' (IOrnrn),
but not less than 118" (3mm) permitted.
Parallel Section
l7zsikd
Gage Lenglh
NOTE 1- The gage length and fillets shall be as shown, but
the ends may be of any shape to fit the holders of the testing
machine in such a way that the load shall be axial. The reduced
section shall have a gradual taper from the ends toward the center,
with the ends 0.003 t o 0.005 in. C0.08 t o 0.13 m m l larger in
diameter than the center.
FIG. 3 MACHINED TENSION TEST SPECIMEN
S1. Special Conditions
S1.1 IS agreed upon in writing by the foundry and
purchaser, the malleable iron castings may be required
to meet special conditions, hardness or other property
diinensions, surface qnality, or a combiilatioil of conditions.
52. Test Lugs
S2.1 If req~lestedill writing or if included on the
pattern(s) or pattern drawing(s), test lugs may be cast 011
all castings of sufficient size to permit their incorporation.
The size of such lrrgs shall be proportional to the thickness
of the casting. 011 castings over 24 in. [600 inm] in length,
a test lug shall be cast near each end such as not to
interfere with any subsequent processing of the castings.
The purchase order shall stipulate whether the foundry's
inspector or the pnrchaser's inspector shall break, inspect,
and pass judgment on the fracture quality of these test
lugs.
S4. Special Tension Specimens
S4.1 If tension specimens are to be machined from
castings, their location in the casting, the speci~nendimensions, and the required properties shall be agreed upon
in writing by the foundry and purchaser.
S5. Zinc-Coated Castiugs
S5.1 When specified in the contract or purchase order-,
castings shall be zinc-coated by the hot-dip process in
accordance with Specification A 153. Castings shall be
of a composition that will preclude the possibility of
galvanizing embrittlement, or shall be either cooled from
the anneal or subsequently heat treated so as to be immunized against such embrittlement. If regalvanizing is
required, procedures for regalvanizing castings and
determining the effect on the casting perfor~nancemust
be agreed upon between the purchaser and the seller.
S6.
S3. Destrlnctive Tests
$3.1 At the option of the pmchaser or his representative, a casting of each design ordered may be tested to
destntction, or otherwise broken up, to determine the
presence of any manufacturing condition that might be
detrimental to the serviceability of the casting.
Marlring of Casting for Government
Procurement
S6.1 When castings are specified for government procurement, the location of the permanent lnarlcings specified in 15.1, as well as any special making for inechanical
or physical properties (either perinanent or temporary),
shall be as indicated on the goveinment drawings or
sketches.
PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
NICAL PROPERT
CASTINGS
S1.d The mechanical properties of malleable iron
castings are influenced by a number of factors, including
the cooling rate during solidification, chemical composition, the heat treatment, the design of the casting, section
thickness, and the location and effectiveness of gates,
risers, and chills.
X1.2 Because of the complexity of these factors in
influencing the properties of the final product, no precise
quantitative relationship can be stated between the properties of the iron in vasious locations of the same casting
or between the properties of a casting and those of a
test specimen cast from the same iron. When such a
relationship is important and must be known for a specific
application, it may be determined by appropriate experimentation.
X1.3 The specimen specified in 7.2.1 as the standard
tensiie test bar for maileabie iron has a 5/8-in. [16-rmnj
diameter test section that reasonably represents a typical
section of the general run of malleable iron castings.
Furthermore, the initial freezing of malleable irons as
homogeneous white iron, together with the heat treatment
that is inherent in the manufacture of malleable iron,
tends to r e d ~ ~ cthe
e section-sensitivity effect. Therefore,
where experinlentation into precise properties within a
given casting would be infeasible, this standard test bar,
made like any typical casting, should provide a practical
approximation of the properties that can be expected in
average sound malleable iron casting.
X1.4 If malleable iron castings are welded, the microstructure of the iron is markedly affected, pasticularly in
the heat-affected zone. Therefore, since this may
adversely affect the properties of the casting, the welding
of malleable iron castings should be done under strict
metallurgical control, followed by appropriate post-weld
heat treatment, to minimize the substantial reductions in
ductility, impact resistance, and machinability that could
result, particularly in the vicinity of the weldment. Nevertheless, it is generally considered inadvisable to join castings to similar castings or to other materials, by fusion
welding out in the field, or in manufactured assemblies,
without fully testing the entire completed past.
SPECIFICATION FOR PIPE, STEEL, BLACK AND HOTDIPPED, ZINC-COATED, WELDED AND SEAMLESS
SA-53/SA-53M
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 53/A 53M-01 except for the insertion of test practices in 11.1.1, and editorial correction to Table X4.1.)
1.
Scope
1.1 This specification covers seamless and welded
black and hot-dipped galvanized steel pipe in NPS 1⁄8 to
NPS 26 [DN 6 to DN 650] (Note 1), inclusive, with
nominal wall thickness (Note 2) as given in Table X2.2
and Table X2.3. It shall be permissible to furnish pipe
having other dimensions (Note 2) provided such pipe
complies with all other requirements of this specification.
1.3.3 Type E is furnished either nonexpanded or
cold expanded at the option of the manufacturer.
NOTE 1 — The dimensionless designators NPS (nominal pipe size)
[DN (diameter nominal)] have been substituted in this specification for
such traditional terms as “nominal diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.”
1.5 The following precautionary caveat pertains only
to the test method portion, Sections 9, 10, 11, 15, 16, and
17 of this specification: This standard does not purport to
address all of the safety concerns, if any, associated with
its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard
to establish appropriate safety and health practices and
determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior
to use.
1.4 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound
units are to be regarded separately as standard. The values
stated in each system may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each system shall be used independently of the other.
Combining values from the two systems may result in
non-conformance with the standard.
NOTE 2 — The term nominal wall thickness has been assigned for
the purpose of convenient designation, existing in name only, and is
used to distinguish it from the actual wall thickness, which may vary
over or under the nominal wall thickness.
1.2 This specification covers the following types and
grades:
1.6 The text of this specification contains notes or
footnotes, or both, that provide explanatory material.
Such notes and footnotes, excluding those in tables and
figures, do not contain any mandatory requirements.
1.2.1 Type F — Furnace-butt welded, continuous
welded Grade A,
1.2.2 Type E — Electric-resistance welded, Grades
A and B, and
1.2.3 Type S — Seamless, Grades A and B.
2.
Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
A 90/A 90M Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating
on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy
Coatings
A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
A 530/A 530M Specification for General Requirements
for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe
A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading
Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment
A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
NOTE 3 — See Appendix X1 for definitions of types of pipe.
1.3 Pipe ordered under this specification is intended
for mechanical and pressure applications and is also
acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas, and air
lines. It is suitable for welding, and suitable for forming
operations involving coiling, bending, and flanging, subject to the following qualifications:
1.3.1 Type F is not intended for flanging.
1.3.2 When Types S and E are required for close
coiling or cold bending, Grade A is the preferred grade.
This provision is not intended to prohibit the cold bending
of Grade B pipe.
167
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
04
SA-53/SA-53M
2004 SECTION II
A 865 Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black
or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seamless, for
Use in Steel Pipe Joints
B 6 Specification for Zinc
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data
to Determine Conformance with Specifications
E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
and Tubing
E 309 Practice for Eddy-Current Examination of Steel
Tubular Products Using Magnetic Saturation
E 570 Practice for Flux Leakage Examination of Ferromagnetic Steel Tubular Products
E 1806 Practice for Sampling Steel and Iron for Determination of Chemical Composition
3.1.8.3 Plain end, if desired,
3.1.8.4 Couplings power tight, if desired,
3.1.8.5 Taper tapped couplings for NPS 2 [DN
50] and smaller, if desired,
3.1.9 Close coiling, if required (see 8.2),
3.1.10 Skelp for tension tests, if permitted (see
17.2),
3.1.11 Certification (see Section 22),
3.1.12 End use of material,
3.1.13 Special requirements, and
3.1.14 Selection of applicable level of preservation
and packaging and level of packing required, if other
than as specified or if MIL-STD-163 applies (see 21.2).
2.2 ANSI Standards:
ASC X12
B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose
4.
Materials and Manufacture
4.1 The steel for both seamless and welded pipe shall
be made by one or more of the following processes: openhearth, electric-furnace, or basic-oxygen.
2.3 ASME Standard:
B36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
2.4 Military Standards:
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products Preparation for Shipment and Storage
4.2 When steels of different grades are sequentially
strand cast, identification of the resultant transition material is required. The producer shall remove the transition
material by any established procedure that positively separates the grades.
2.5 Federal Standards:
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipment (Civil Agencies)
Fed. Std. No. 183 Continuous Identification Marking of
Iron and Steel Products
4.3 The weld seam of electric-resistance welded pipe
in Grade B shall be heat treated after welding to a minimum of 1000°F [540°C] so that no untempered martensite
remains, or otherwise processed in such a manner that
no untempered martensite remains.
2.6 API Standard:
5L Specification for Line Pipe
4.4 When pipe is cold expanded, the amount of expansion shall not exceed 1 1 ⁄2 % of the outside diameter
pipe size.
3.
Ordering Information
3.1 Information items to be considered, if appropriate,
for inclusion in the purchase order are as follows:
3.1.1 Specification designation (A 53 or A 53M,
including year of issue),
5.
Chemical Composition
5.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
chemical composition in Table 1 and the chemical analysis shall be in accordance with Test Methods, Practices,
and Terminology A 751.
3.1.2 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
3.1.3 Grade (see Table 1),
3.1.4 Type (see 1.2 and Table 2),
3.1.5 Finish (black or galvanized),
3.1.6 Size (either nominal (NPS) [DN] and weight
class or schedule number, or both; or outside diameter
and nominal wall thickness, Table X2.2 and Table X2.3),
6.
Product Analysis
6.1 The purchaser is permitted to perform an analysis
of two pipes from each lot of 500 lengths, or fraction
thereof. Samples for chemical analysis, except for spectrographic analysis, shall be taken in accordance with
Practice E 1806. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements specified in
Table 1.
3.1.7 Length (specific or random, Section 18),
3.1.8 End finish (plain end or threaded, Section 13),
3.1.8.1 Threaded and coupled, if desired,
3.1.8.2 Threads only (no couplings), if desired,
168
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6.2 If the analysis of either pipe does not conform to
the requirements specified in Table 1, analyses shall be
made on additional pipes of double the original number
from the same lot, each of which shall conform to the
requirements specified.
SA-53/SA-53M
is a test for ductility, no cracks or breaks on the inside,
outside, or end surfaces, except as provided for in 9.7,
shall occur until the distance between the plates is less
than the value of H calculated as follows:
H p (1 + e) t/(e + t/D)
where:
7.
Tensile Requirements
7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements
as to tensile properties prescribed in Table 2.
H p distance between flattening plates, in. [mm]
(Note 4),
e p deformation per unit length (constant for a given
grade of steel, 0.09 for Grade A, and 0.07 for
Grade B),
t p nominal wall thickness, in. [mm], and
D p specified outside diameter, in. [mm]
7.2 The yield strength corresponding to a permanent
offset of 0.2% of the gage length of the specimen or to
a total extension of 0.5% of the gage length under load
shall be determined.
9.2.2 During the second step, which is a test for
soundness, the flattening shall be continued until the test
specimen breaks or the opposite sides of the pipe meet.
Evidence of laminated or unsound material that is
revealed during the entire flattening test shall be cause
for rejection.
7.3 The test specimen taken across the weld shall
show a tensile strength not less than the minimum tensile
strength specified for the grade of pipe ordered. This test
will not be required for pipe under NPS 8 [DN 200].
7.4 Transverse tension test specimens for electricwelded pipe NPS 8 [DN 200] and larger shall be taken
opposite the weld. All transverse test specimens shall be
approximately 11⁄2 in. [40 mm] wide in the gage length,
and shall represent the full wall thickness of the pipe
from which the specimen was cut. This test is required
for NPS 8 [DN 200] and larger.
NOTE 4 — The H values have been calculated for standard and extraheavy weight sizes from NPS 21⁄2 to NPS 24 [DN 65 to DN 600],
inclusive, and are shown in Table X2.1.
9.3 Electric-Resistance-Welded Pipe — A test specimen at least 4 in. [100 mm] in length shall be flattened
cold between parallel plates in three steps, with the weld
located either 0° or 90° from the line of direction of force
as required in 9.3.1 or 9.3.2, whichever is applicable.
During the first step, which is a test for ductility of the
weld, no cracks or breaks on the inside or outside surfaces
at the weld shall occur until the distance between the
plates is less than two thirds of the specified diameter of
the pipe. As a second step, the flattening shall be continued as a test for ductility away from the weld. During
the second step, no cracks or breaks on the inside or
outside surfaces away from the weld, except as provided
for in 9.7, shall occur until the distance between the plates
is less than one third of the specified outside diameter of
the pipe but is not less than five times the wall thickness
of the pipe. During the third step, which is a test for
soundness, the flattening shall be continued until the test
specimen breaks or the opposite walls of the pipe meet.
Evidence of laminated or unsound material or of incomplete weld that is revealed by the flattening test shall be
cause for rejection.
8.
Bending Requirements
8.1 For pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and under, a sufficient
length of pipe shall be capable of being bent cold through
90° around a cylindrical mandrel, the diameter of which
is twelve times the outside diameter of the pipe, without
developing cracks at any portion and without opening
the weld.
8.2 When ordered for close coiling, the pipe shall
stand being bent cold through 180° around a cylindrical
mandrel, the diameter of which is eight times the outside
diameter of the pipe, without failure.
8.3 Double-extra-strong pipe over NPS 11⁄4 [DN 32]
need not be subjected to the bend test.
9.
Flattening Test
9.1 The flattening test shall be made on pipe over
NPS 2 [DN 50] with all thicknesses extra strong and
lighter.
9.3.1 For pipe produced in single lengths, the flattening test specified in 9.3 shall be made using a test
specimen taken from each end of each length of pipe.
The tests from each end shall be made alternately with
the weld at 0° and at 90° from the line of direction
of force.
9.2 Seamless Pipe:
9.2.1 For seamless pipe, a test specimen at least
21⁄2 in. [60 mm] in length shall be flattened cold between
parallel plates in two steps. During the first step, which
169
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-53/SA-53M
2004 SECTION II
9.3.2 For pipe produced in multiple lengths, the
flattening test specified in 9.3 shall be made as follows:
cracks at these locations shall not be cause for rejection
if the D-to-t ratio is less than 10.
9.3.2.1 Test specimens taken from, and representative of, the front end of the first pipe intended to be
supplied from each coil, the back end of the last pipe
intended to be supplied from each coil, and each side of
any intermediate weld stop location shall be flattened
with the weld located at 90° from the line of direction
of force.
10. Hydrostatic Test
10.1 The hydrostatic test shall be applied, without
leakage through the pipe wall, to each length of pipe
except as provided in 11.2 for seamless pipe.
10.2 Each length of plain-end pipe shall be hydrostatically tested to the pressures prescribed in Table X2.2, and
each threaded-and-coupled length shall be hydrostatically
tested to the pressures prescribed in Table X2.3. It shall
be permissible, at the discretion of the manufacturer, to
perform the hydrostatic test on pipe with plain ends, with
threads only, or with threads and couplings and also shall
be permissible to test pipe in either single lengths or
multiple lengths.
9.3.2.2 Test specimens taken from pipe at any
two locations intermediate to the front end of the first
pipe and the back end of the last pipe intended to be
supplied from each coil shall be flattened with the weld
located at 0° from the line of direction of force.
9.3.3 For pipe that is to be subsequently reheated
throughout its cross section and hot formed by a reducing
process, the manufacturer shall have the option of
obtaining the flattening test specimens required by 9.3.1
or 9.3.2, whichever is applicable, either prior to or after
such hot reducing.
NOTE 5 — The hydrostatic test pressures given herein are inspection
test pressures, are not intended as a basis for design, and do not have
any direct relationship to working pressures.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
10.3 The minimum hydrostatic test pressure required
to satisfy these requirements need not exceed 2500 psi
[17 200 kPa] for NPS 3 [DN 80] and under, nor 2800
psi [19 300 kPa] for all sizes over NPS 3 [DN 80].
This does not prohibit testing at a higher pressure at the
manufacturer’s option. The hydrostatic pressure shall be
maintained for not less than 5 s for all sizes of seamless
and electric-welded pipe.
9.4 Continuous-Welded Pipe — A test specimen at
least 4 in. [100 mm] in length shall be flattened cold
between parallel plates in three steps. The weld shall be
located at 90° from the line of direction of force. During
the first step, which is a test for ductility of the weld, no
cracks or breaks on the inside, outside, or end surfaces
at the weld shall occur until the distance between the
plates is less than three fourths of the specified diameter
of the pipe. As a second step, the flattening shall be
continued as a test for ductility away from the weld.
During the second step, no cracks or breaks on the inside,
outside, or end surfaces away from the weld, except as
provided for in 9.7, shall occur until the distance between
the plates is less than 60% of the specified outside diameter of the pipe. During the third step, which is a test for
soundness, the flattening shall be continued until the test
specimen breaks or the opposite walls of the pipe meet.
Evidence of laminated or unsound material or of incomplete weld that is revealed by the flattening test shall be
cause for rejection.
11. Nondestructive Electric Test
11.1 Type E Pipe:
11.1.1 The weld seam of each length of ERW pipe
NPS 2 [DN 50] and larger shall be tested with a nondestructive electric test in accordance with Practice E 213,
E 309, or E 570 as follows:
11.1.2 Ultrasonic and Electromagnetic Inspection — Any equipment utilizing the ultrasonic or electromagnetic principles and capable of continuous and
uninterrupted inspection of the weld seam shall be used.
The equipment shall be checked with an applicable reference standard as described in 11.1.3 at least once every
working turn or not more than 8 h to demonstrate its
effectiveness and the inspection procedures. The equipment shall be adjusted to produce well-defined indications
when the reference standard is scanned by the inspection
unit in a manner simulating the inspection of the product.
9.5 Surface imperfections in the test specimen before
flattening, but revealed during the first step of the flattening test, shall be judged in accordance with the finish
requirements in Section 14.
9.6 Superficial ruptures as a result of surface imperfections shall not be cause for rejection.
11.1.3 Reference Standards — The length of the
reference standards shall be determined by the pipe manufacturer, and they shall have the same specified diameter
and thickness as the product being inspected. Reference
9.7 When low D-to-t ratio tubulars are tested, because
the strain imposed due to geometry is unreasonably high
on the inside surface at the 6 and 12 o’clock locations,
170
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
standards shall contain machined notches, one on the
inside surface and one on the outside surface, or a drilled
hole, as shown in Fig. 1, at the option of the pipe manufacturer. The notches shall be parallel to the weld seam, and
shall be separated by a distance sufficient to produce two
separate and distinguishable signals. The 1⁄8-in. [3.2-mm]
hole shall be drilled through the wall and perpendicular
to the surface of the reference standard as shown in Fig.
1. Care shall be taken in the preparation of the reference
standard to ensure freedom from fins or other edge
roughness, or distortion of the pipe.
location of significant longitudinally or circumferentially
oriented imperfections; however, different techniques
need to be employed for the detection of differently oriented imperfections. Ultrasonic testing is not necessarily
capable of detecting short, deep imperfections.
11.2.2.3 The eddy current examination referenced in this specification has the capability of detecting
significant discontinuities, especially of the short
abrupt type.
11.2.2.4 The flux leakage examination referred
to in this specification is capable of detecting the presence
and location of significant longitudinally or transversely
oriented discontinuities. The provisions of this specification only require longitudinal calibration for flux leakage.
Different techniques need to be employed for the detection of differently oriented imperfections.
NOTE 6 — The calibration standards defined in 11.1.3 are convenient
standards for calibration of nondestructive testing equipment. The
dimensions of such standards are not to be construed as the minimum
sizes of imperfections detectable by such equipment.
11.1.4 Acceptance Limits — Table 3 gives the height
of acceptance limit signals in percent of the height of
signals produced by reference standards. Imperfections
in the weld seam that produce a signal greater than the
acceptance limit signal given in Table 3 shall be considered a defect unless the pipe manufacturer can demonstrate that the imperfection does not reduce the effective
wall thickness beyond 12 1 ⁄2 % of the specified wall
thickness.
11.2.2.5 The hydrostatic test referred to in 10.2
has the capability of finding imperfections of a size permitting the test fluid to leak through the tube wall and
may be either visually seen or detected by a loss of
pressure. Hydrostatic testing is not necessarily capable
of detecting very tight through-the-wall imperfections or
imperfections that extend an appreciable distance into the
wall without complete penetration.
11.2 Seamless Pipe — As an alternative to the hydrostatic test, and when specified by the purchaser, the full
body of each seamless pipe shall be tested with a nondestructive electric test in accordance with Practices E 213,
E 309, or E 570. In this case each length so furnished
shall include the mandatory marking of the letters “NDE.”
Except as provided in 11.2.6.2 it is the intent of this
test to reject pipe with imperfections which produce test
signals equal to or greater than that of the calibration
standard.
11.2.2.6 A purchaser interested in ascertaining
the nature (type, size, location, and orientation) of imperfections that are capable of being detected in the specific
application of these examinations is directed to discuss
this with the manufacturer of the tubular product.
11.2.3 For ultrasonic testing, the calibration reference notches shall be at the option of the producer, and
shall be any one of the three common notch shapes shown
in Practice E 213. The depth of notch shall not exceed
12.5% of the specified wall thickness of the pipe or 0.004
in. [0.1 mm], whichever is greater.
11.2.1 When the nondestructive electric test is performed, the lengths shall be marked with the letters
“NDE.” The certification, when required, shall state Nondestructive Electric Tested and shall indicate which of
the tests was applied. Also, the letters NDE shall be
appended to the product specification number and material grade shown on the certification.
11.2.4 For eddy current testing, the calibration pipe
shall contain, at the option of the producer, any one of the
following calibration standards to establish a minimum
sensitivity level for rejection.
11.2.2 The following information is intended to
facilitate the use of this specification.
11.2.4.1 Drilled Hole — Depending upon the
pipe diameter the calibration pipe shall contain three holes
spaced 120° apart or four holes spaced 90° apart and
sufficiently separated longitudinally to ensure separately
distinguishable responses. The holes shall be drilled radially and completely through the pipe wall, care being
taken to avoid distortion of the pipe while drilling.
Depending upon the pipe diameter the calibration pipe
shall contain the following hole:
11.2.2.1 The calibration standards defined in
11.2.3 through 11.2.5 are convenient standards for calibration of nondestructive testing equipment. The dimensions of such standards are not to be construed as the
minimum sizes of imperfections detectable by such
equipment.
11.2.2.2 The ultrasonic testing referred to in this
specification is capable of detecting the presence and
171
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-53/SA-53M
Not for Resale
SA-53/SA-53M
NPS
≤ 1⁄2
> 1⁄2 ≤ 11⁄4
> 11⁄4 ≤ 2
>2≤ 5
>5
2004 SECTION II
DN
≤ 15
> 15 ≤ 32
> 32 ≤ 50
> 50 ≤ 125
> 125
Diameter of Drilled Hole
0.039 in. (1 mm)
0.055 in. (1.4 mm)
0.071 in. (1.8 mm)
0.087 in. (2.2 mm)
0.106 in. (2.7 mm)
with provisions of Section 14. A few examples of these
imperfections would be straightener marks, cutting chips,
scratches, steel die stamps, stop marks, or pipe reducer
ripple.
11.2.7 The test methods described in this section
are not necessarily capable of inspecting the end portion
of pipes. This condition is referred to as end effect. The
length of the end effect shall be determined by the manufacturer and, when specified in the purchase order,
reported to the purchaser.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
11.2.4.2 Transverse Tangential Notch — Using
a round tool or file with a 1⁄4 in. [6 mm] diameter, a
notch shall be filed or milled tangential to the surface
and transverse to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. The
notch shall have a depth not exceeding 12.5% of the
specified wall thickness of the pipe or 0.012 in. [0.3 mm],
whichever is greater.
11.2.4.3 Longitudinal Notch — A notch 0.031 in.
[0.8 mm] or less in width shall be machined in a radial
plane parallel to the tube axis on the outside surface of
the pipe, to have a depth not exceeding 12.5% of the
specified wall thickness of the tube or 0.012 in. [0.3 mm],
whichever is greater. The length of the notch shall be
compatible with the testing method.
11.2.4.4 Compatibility — The discontinuity in the
calibration pipe shall be compatible with the testing
equipment and the method being used.
11.2.5 For flux leakage testing, the longitudinal
calibration reference notches shall be straight sided
notches machined in a radial plane parallel to the pipe
axis. For wall thickness under 0.500 in. [12.7 mm], outside and inside notches shall be used. For wall thickness
equal and above 0.500 in. [12.7 mm], only an outside
notch shall be used. Notch depth shall not exceed 12.5%
of the specified wall thickness, or 0.012 in. [0.3 mm],
whichever is greater. Notch length shall not exceed 1 in.
[25 mm], and the width shall not exceed the depth. Outside diameter and inside diameter notches shall be located
sufficiently apart to allow separation and identification
of the signals.
11.2.6 Pipe containing one or more imperfections
that produce a signal equal to or greater than the signal
produced by the calibration standard shall be rejected or
the area producing the signal shall be rejected.
11.2.6.1 Test signals produced by imperfections
that cannot be identified, or produced by cracks or cracklike imperfections, shall result in rejection of the pipe,
unless it is repaired and retested. To be accepted, the pipe
must pass the same specification test to which it was
originally subjected, provided that the remaining wall
thickness is not decreased below that permitted by the
specification. It shall be permissible to reduce the outside
diameter at the point of grinding by the amount so
removed.
11.2.6.2 It shall be permissible to evaluate test
signals produced by visual imperfections in accordance
12.
Permissible Variations in Weight and
Dimensions
12.1 Weight — The weight of the pipe as specified in
Table X2.2 and Table X2.3 or as calculated from the
relevant equation in ASME B36.10M shall not vary by
more than ±10%.
NOTE 7 — The weight tolerance is determined from the weights of
the customary lifts of pipe as produced for shipment by the mill, divided
by the number of feet of pipe in the lift. On pipe sizes over NPS 4
[DN 100], where individual lengths are weighed, the weight tolerance
is applicable to the individual length.
12.2 Diameter — For pipe NPS 11⁄2 [DN 40] and under,
the outside diameter at any point shall not vary more
than ± 1⁄64 in. [0.4 mm] from the standard specified. For
pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and over, the outside diameter shall
not vary more than ±1% from the standard specified.
12.3 Thickness — The minimum wall thickness at any
point shall be not more than 12.5% under the nominal
wall thickness specified. The minimum wall thickness on
inspection shall conform to the requirements in Table
X2.4.
13.
End Finish
13.1 When ordered with plain ends, the pipe shall
be furnished to the following practice, unless otherwise
specified.
13.1.1 NPS 11⁄2 [DN 40] and Smaller — Unless
otherwise specified on the purchase order, end finish shall
be at the option of the manufacturer.
13.1.2 NPS 2 [DN 50] and Larger:
13.1.2.1 Pipe of standard or extra strong weights,
or in wall thickness less than 0.500 in. [12.7 mm], other
than double extra strong pipe, shall be plain-end beveled
with ends beveled to an angle of 30°, +5°, -0°, measured
from a line drawn perpendicular to the axis of the pipe,
and with a root face of 1⁄16 in. ± 1⁄32 in. [1.6 mm ± 0.8 mm].
172
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
13.1.2.2 Pipe with wall thicknesses over 0.500
in. [12.7 mm], and all double extra strong, shall be plainend square cut.
welding of Type F pipe and the weld seam of Type E is
prohibited.
14.2.3 The section of pipe containing the defect
may be cut off within the limits of requirement on
length, or
13.2 When ordered with threaded ends, the pipe ends
shall be provided with a thread in accordance with the
gaging practice and tolerances of ANSI B1.20.1. For
standard-weight pipe NPS 6 [DN 150] and smaller, refer
to Table X3.1 for threading data. For standard-weight
pipe NPS 8 [DN 200] and larger and all sizes of extrastrong weight and double extra-strong weight, refer to
Table X3.2 for threading data. Threaded pipe NPS 4 [DN
100] and larger shall have thread protectors on the ends
not protected by a coupling.
14.2.4 Rejected.
14.3 At the purchaser’s discretion, pipe shall be subjected to rejection if surface defects repaired in accordance with 14.2 are not scattered, but appear over a large
area in excess of what is considered a workmanlike finish.
Disposition of such pipe shall be a matter of agreement
between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
14.4 When imperfections or defects are removed by
grinding, a smooth curved surface shall be maintained,
and the wall thickness shall not be decreased below that
permitted by this specification. It shall be permissible to
reduce the outside diameter at the point of grinding by
the amount so removed.
13.3 When ordered with couplings, one end of each
length of pipe shall be provided with a coupling manufactured in accordance with Specification A 865. The coupling threads shall be in accordance with the gaging
practice of ANSI B1.20.1. The coupling shall be applied
handling-tight, unless power-tight is specified on the
order. Couplings are to be made of steel. Taper-tapped
couplings shall be furnished on all weights of threaded
pipe sizes NPS 21⁄2 [DN 65] and larger. For pipe NPS 2
[DN 50] and smaller, it is regular practice to furnish
straight-tapped couplings for standard-weight pipe and
taper-tapped couplings for extra-strong and double extrastrong pipe. If taper-tapped couplings are required for
pipe NPS 2 [DN 50] and smaller on standard-weight pipe,
it is recommended that line pipe threads in accordance
with API Specification 5L be ordered. The taper-tapped
couplings provided on line pipe in these sizes may be used
on mill-threaded standard-weight pipe of the same size.
14.4.1 Wall thickness measurements shall be made
with a mechanical caliper or with a properly calibrated
nondestructive testing device of appropriate accuracy. In
the case of a dispute, the measurement determined by
use of the mechanical caliper shall govern.
14.5 Weld repair shall be permitted only subject to
approval of the purchaser and in accordance with Specification A 530/A 530M.
14.6 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight.
14.7 The pipe shall contain no dents greater than 10%
of the pipe diameter or 1⁄4 in. [6 mm], whichever is smaller,
measured as a gap between the lowest point of the dent
and a prolongation of the original contour of the pipe.
Cold-formed dents deeper than 1⁄8 in. [3 mm] shall be
free of sharp bottom gouges; it shall be permissible to
remove the gouges by grinding, provided that the
remaining wall thickness is within specified limits. The
length of the dent in any direction shall not exceed one
half the pipe diameter.
14. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
14.1 The pipe manufacturer shall explore a sufficient
number of visual surface imperfections to provide reasonable assurance that they have been properly evaluated
with respect to depth.
14.2 Surface imperfections that penetrate more than
121⁄2% of the nominal wall thickness or encroach on the
minimum wall thickness shall be considered defects. Pipe
with defects shall be given one of the following dispositions:
15. Number of Tests
15.1 Except as required by 15.2, one of each of the
tests specified in Section 7, 8.2, and Section 9 shall be
made on test specimens taken from one length of pipe
from each lot of each pipe size. For continuous-welded
pipe, a lot shall contain no more than 25 tons [23 Mg]
of pipe for pipe sizes NPS 11⁄2 [DN 40] and smaller, and
no more than 50 tons [45 Mg] of pipe for pipe sizes
NPS 2 [DN 50] and larger. For seamless and electricresistance-welded pipe, a lot shall contain no more than
one heat, and at the option of the manufacturer shall
14.2.1 The defect shall be removed by grinding,
provided that the remaining wall thickness is within specified limits,
14.2.2 Type S pipe and the parent metal of Type
E pipe, except within 1⁄2 in. [13 mm] of the fusion line of
the electric resistance seam, are permitted to be repaired in
accordance with the welding provisions of 14.5. Repair
173
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-53/SA-53M
Not for Resale
SA-53/SA-53M
2004 SECTION II
contain no more than 500 lengths of pipe (as initially cut
after the final pipe-forming operation, prior to any further
cutting to the required ordered lengths) or 50 tons [45
Mg] of pipe.
length and shall represent the full wall thickness of the
pipe from which the specimen was cut.
17.4 Test specimens for the bend and flattening tests
shall be taken from pipe. Test specimens for the flattening
test shall be smooth on the ends and free from burrs.
15.2 The number of flattening tests for electric-resistance-welded pipe shall be in accordance with 9.3.1 or
9.3.2, whichever is applicable.
17.5 All specimens shall be tested at room temperature.
15.3 Except as allowed by 11.2, each length of pipe
shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test specified in Section 10.
18. Lengths
18.1 Unless otherwise specified, pipe lengths shall be
in accordance with the following regular practice.
16. Retests
16.1 If the results of the mechanical tests of any lot
do not conform to the requirements specified in Sections
7, 8, and 9, retests are permitted to be made on additional
pipe of double the original number from the same lot, each
of which shall conform to the requirements specified.
18.1.1 Pipe of weights lighter than extra strong
shall be in single-random lengths of 16 to 22 ft [4.88 to
6.71 m], but not more than 5% of the total number of
threaded lengths are permitted to be jointers (two pieces
coupled together). When ordered with plain ends, 5% are
permitted to be in lengths of 12 to 16 ft [3.66 to 4.88 m].
16.2 For pipe produced in single lengths, if any section of the pipe fails to comply with the requirements of
9.3, it shall be permissible to cut other sections from the
same end of the same length until satisfactory tests are
obtained, except that the finished pipe shall not be shorter
than 80% of its length after the original cropping; otherwise the length shall be rejected. For pipe produced in
multiple lengths, it shall be permissible to cut retests from
each end of each individual length in the multiple. Such
tests shall be made with the weld alternately 0° and 90°
from the line of direction of force.
18.1.2 Pipe of extra-strong and heavier weights
shall be in random lengths of 12 to 22 ft [3.66 to 6.71
m]. Five percent are permitted to be in lengths of 6 to
12 ft [1.83 to 3.66 m].
18.1.3 When extra-strong or lighter pipe is ordered
in double-random lengths, the minimum lengths shall be
not less than 22 ft [6.71 m], with a minimum average
for the order of 35 ft [10.67 m].
18.1.4 When lengths longer than single random are
required for wall thicknesses heavier than extra-strong,
the length shall be subject to negotiation.
18.1.5 When pipe is furnished with threads and
couplings, the length shall be measured to the outer face
of the coupling.
17. Test Methods
17.1 The test specimens and the tests required by this
specification shall conform to those described in the latest
issue of Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
19. Galvanized Pipe
19.1 Galvanized pipe ordered under this specification
shall be coated with zinc inside and outside by the hotdip process. The zinc used for the coating shall be any
grade of zinc conforming to Specification B 6.
17.2 The longitudinal tension test specimen shall be
taken from the end of the pipe or, for continuous-welded
pipe, it shall be permissible to be taken from the skelp,
at a point approximately 90° from the weld, and shall
not be flattened between gage marks. The sides of each
specimen shall be parallel between gage marks. If desired,
the tension tests are permitted to be made on the full
section of pipe. When impracticable to pull a test specimen in full section, the standard 2-in. [50-mm] gage
length tension test specimen shown in Fig. A2.3 of Test
Methods and Definitions A 370 is acceptable.
19.2 Weight of Coating — The weight of zinc coating
shall be not less than 1.8 oz/ft2 [0.55 kg/m2] as determined
from the average results of the two specimens taken for
test in the manner prescribed in 19.5 and not less than
1.6 oz/ft2 [0.49 kg/m2] for either of these specimens. The
weight of coating expressed in ounces per square foot
shall be calculated by dividing the total weight of zinc,
inside plus outside, by the total area, inside plus outside,
of the surface coated. Each specimen shall have not less
than 1.3 oz/ft2 [0.40 kg/m2] of zinc coating on each surface, calculated by dividing the total weight of zinc on
17.3 Transverse weld test specimens from electricresistance-welded pipe shall be taken with the weld at
the center of the specimen. All transverse test specimens
shall be approximately 11⁄2 in. [40 mm] wide in the gage
174
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
the given surface (outside or inside) by the area of the
surface coated (outside or inside).
not meet the requirements of this specification based on
the inspection and test method as outlined in the specification, the length shall be rejected and the manufacturer
shall be notified. Disposition of rejected pipe shall be a
matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
19.3 Weight of Coating Test — The weight of zinc
coating shall be determined by a stripping test in accordance with Test Method A 90/A 90M. The total zinc on
each specimen shall be determined in a single stripping
operation.
21.2 Pipe found in fabrication or in installation to
be unsuitable for the intended use, under the scope and
requirements of this specification, shall be set aside and
the manufacturer notified. Such pipe shall be subject to
mutual investigation as to the nature and severity of the
deficiency and the forming or installation, or both, conditions involved. Disposition shall be a matter for
agreement.
19.4 Test Specimens — Test specimens for determination of weight of coating shall be cut approximately 4
in. [100 mm] in length.
19.5 Number of Tests — Two test specimens for the
determination of weight of coating shall be taken, one
from each end of one length of galvanized pipe selected
at random from each lot of 500 lengths or fraction thereof,
of each size.
19.6 Retests — If the weight of coating of any lot does
not conform to the requirements specified in 19.2, retests
of two additional pipes from the same lot shall be made,
each of which shall conform to the requirements specified.
22. Certification
22.1 The producer or supplier shall, upon request,
furnish to the purchaser a certificate of inspection stating
that the material has been manufactured, sampled, tested,
and inspected in accordance with this specification
(including year of issue), and has been found to meet the
requirements.
19.7 When pipe ordered under this specification is to
be galvanized, the tension, flattening, and bend tests shall
be made on the base material before galvanizing. When
specified, results of the mechanical tests on the base material shall be reported to the purchaser. If it is impracticable
to make the mechanical tests on the base material before
galvanizing, it shall be permissible to make such tests on
galvanized samples, and any flaking or cracking of the
zinc coating shall not be considered cause for rejection.
When galvanized pipe is bent or otherwise fabricated to
a degree that causes the zinc coating to stretch or compress
beyond the limit of elasticity, some flaking of the coating
is acceptable.
22.2 Report — For Types E and S, the producer or
supplier shall furnish to the purchaser a chemical analysis
report for the elements specified in Table 1.
22.3 EDI — A certificate of inspection or chemical
analysis report printed from or used in electronic form
from an electronic data interchange (EDI) transmission
shall be regarded as having the same validity as a counterpart printed in the certifier’s facility. The use and format
of the EDI document are subject to agreement between
the purchaser and the supplier.
NOTE 8 — EDI is the computer to computer exchange of business
information in a standard format such as ANSI ASC X12.
20. Inspection
20.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall
have entry, at all times while work on the contract of the
purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s works that concern the manufacture of the material
ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is
being furnished in accordance with this specification. All
tests (except product analysis) and inspection shall be
made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless
otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted as not to
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
22.4 Notwithstanding the absence of a signature, the
organization submitting the certificate of inspection or
chemical analysis report is responsible for its content.
23. Product Marking
23.1 Except as allowed by 23.5 and 23.6, each length
of pipe shall be legibly marked in the following sequence
by rolling, stamping, or stenciling to show:
23.1.1 Manufacturer’s name or mark,
23.1.2 Specification number (year of issue not
required),
21. Rejection
21.1 The purchaser is permitted to inspect each length
of pipe received from the manufacturer and, if it does
NOTE 9 — Pipe that complies with multiple compatible specifications
may be marked with the appropriate designation for each specification.
175
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-53/SA-53M
Not for Resale
SA-53/SA-53M
2004 SECTION II
23.1.3 Size (NPS and weight class, schedule number, or nominal wall thickness; or specified outside diameter and nominal wall thickness),
that bar coding be consistent with the Automotive Industry Action Group (AIAG) standard prepared by the Primary Metals Subcommittee of the AIAG Bar Code
Project Team.
23.1.4 Grade (A or B),
23.1.5 Type of pipe (F, E, or S),
23.1.6 Test pressure, seamless pipe only (if applicable, in accordance with Table 4),
24. Government Procurement
24.1 When specified in the contract, material shall be
preserved, packaged, and packed in accordance with the
requirements of MIL-STD-163. The applicable levels
shall be as specified in the contract. Marking for shipment
of such material shall be in accordance with Fed. Std.
No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129 or Federal
Std. No. 183 if continuous marking is required, for military agencies.
23.1.7 Nondestructive electric test, seamless pipe
only (if applicable, in accordance with Table 4),
23.2 Unless another marking format is specified in
the purchase order, length shall be marked in feet and
tenths of a foot, or metres to two decimal places, dependent upon the units to which the pipe was ordered. The
location of such marking shall be at the option of the
manufacturer.
24.2 Inspection — Unless otherwise specified in the
contract, the producer is responsible for the performance
of all inspection and test requirements specified herein.
Except as otherwise specified in the contract, the manufacturer shall use its own or any other suitable facilities for
performing the inspection and test requirements specified
herein, unless otherwise disapproved by the purchaser in
the contract or purchase order. The purchaser shall have
the right to perform any of the inspections and tests set
forth in this specification where deemed necessary to
ensure that the material conforms to prescribed requirements.
23.3 Heat number, lot number, run number, or a combination thereof shall be marked at the option of the
manufacturer, unless specific marking is specified in the
purchase order. The location of such marking shall be at
the option of the manufacturer.
23.4 Any additional information desired by the manufacturer or specified in the purchase order.
23.5 For pipe NPS 11⁄2 [DN 40] and smaller that is
bundled, it shall be permissible to mark this information
on a tag securely attached to each bundle.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
23.6 When pipe sections are cut into shorter lengths by
a subsequent producer for resale as material, the processor
shall transfer complete identification including the name
or brand of the manufacturer, to each unmarked cut
length, or to metal tags securely attached to unmarked
pipe bundled in accordance with the requirements of 23.5.
The same material designation shall be included with
the information transferred, and the processor’s name,
trademark, or brand shall be added.
25. Packaging and Package Marking
25.1 When specified on the purchase order, packaging, marking, and loading or shipment shall be in accordance with those procedures recommended by Practices
A 700.
23.7 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements
in 23.1, 23.5, and 23.6, bar coding is acceptable as a
supplementary identification method. It is recommended
26. Keywords
26.1 black steel pipe; seamless steel pipe; steel pipe;
welded steel pipe; zinc coated steel pipe
176
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-53/SA-53M
0.04 in.
[1 mm] max.
30 deg
max.
N10 Depth
Depth
10% t, 15%
with min. of
0.012, 0.002 in.
[0.3 0.5 mm]
121/2% t
or less
Length
For eddy current – 1.5 in. [38 mm] max.
Total Length
For diverted flux
and ultrasonic
– 2 in. [50 mm] min.
at full depth
B (Buttress) Notch
60 deg
max.
10% t
or less
N10 Notch
V10 Notch
1/ in.
8
[3.2 mm]
20% t
or less
Area of each side, 0.006 sq. in. [3.9 mm2] max.
P (Parallel Sided) Notch
Drilled Hole
FIG. 1 CALIBRATION STANDARDS
TABLE 1
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
Composition, max, %
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus
Sulfur
CopperA
NickelA
ChromiumA
MolybdenumA VanadiumA
Type S (seamless pipe)
Open-hearth, electric-furnace,
or basic-oxygen:
Grade A
Grade B
0.25
0.30
0.95
1.20
0.05
0.05
0.045
0.045
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.15
0.15
0.08
0.08
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.15
0.15
0.08
0.08
0.40
0.40
0.15
0.08
Type E (electric-resistance-welded)
Open-hearth, electric-furnace,
or basic-oxygen:
Grade A
Grade B
0.25
0.30
0.95
1.20
0.05
0.05
0.045
0.045
0.40
0.40
Type F (furnace-welded pipe)
Open-hearth, electric-furnace,
or basic oxygen
Grade A
A
0.30
1.20
0.05
0.045
0.40
The combination of these five elements shall not exceed 1.00%.
177
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-53/SA-53M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE 2
TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
Type F
Open-Hearth,
Basic Oxygen,
or ElectricFurnace,
Grade A
Tensile strength,
min, psi [MPa]
Yield strength,
min, psi [MPa]
Elongation in 2 in.
[50 mm]
TABLE 3
ACCEPTANCE LIMITS
Types E and S
Type Notch
Grade A
48 000 [330] 60 000 [415]
30 000 [205]
30 000 [205] 35 000 [240]
A,B
N10, V10
B.P.
Grade B
48 000 [330]
A,B
Size of Hole
A,B
mm
1
⁄8
...
3.2
...
100
80
TABLE 4
MARKING OF SEAMLESS PIPE
A
The minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] shall be that determined by the following equation:
e p 625 000 [1940] A0.2/U 0.9
where:
Hydro
NDE
Marking
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Test pressure
NDE
Test pressure/NDE
e p minimum elongation in 2 in. [50 mm] in percent
rounded to the nearest percent
A p cross-sectional area of the tension specimen, rounded to
the nearest 0.01 in.2 [1 mm2], based on the specified
outside diameter or the nominal specimen width and
specified wall thickness. If the area calculated is equal
to or greater than 0.75 in.2 [500 mm2], then the value
0.75 in.2 [500 mm2] shall be used, and
U p specified tensile strength, psi [MPa]
B
See Table X4.1 or Table X4.2, whichever is applicable, for
minimum elongation values for various size tension specimens and
grades.
178
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
in.
Acceptance
Limit
Signal, %
Not for Resale
APPENDICES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF PIPE
X1.1 Type F, Furnace-Butt-Welded Pipe, ContinuousWelded — Pipe produced in continuous lengths from
coiled skelp and subsequently cut into individual lengths,
having its longitudinal butt joint forge welded by the
mechanical pressure developed in rolling the hot-formed
skelp through a set of round pass welding rolls.
X1.2 Type E, Electric-Resistance-Welded Pipe — Pipe
produced in individual lengths or in continuous lengths
from coiled skelp and subsequently cut into individual
lengths, having a longitudinal butt joint wherein coalescence is produced by the heat obtained from resistance of
the pipe to the flow of electric current in a circuit of which
the pipe is a part, and by the application of pressure.
X1.3 Type S, Wrought Steel Seamless Pipe — Wrought
steel seamless pipe is a tubular product made without a
welded seam. It is manufactured by hot working steel
and, if necessary, by subsequently cold finishing the hotworked tubular product to produce the desired shape,
dimensions, and properties.
X2. TABLES FOR DIMENSIONAL AND
CERTAIN MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
X2.1 Tables X2.1–X2.4 address dimensional and certain mechanical requirements.
179
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-53/SA-53M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE X2.1
CALCULATED H VALUES FOR SEAMLESS PIPE
NPS
Designator
DN
Designator
Outside
Diameter, in.
[mm]
Distance, in. [mm],
Between Plates “H” by
Formula: H p (1 + e ) t /(e + t/D )
Nominal Wall
Thickness, in.
[mm]
Grade A
Grade B
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
21⁄2
65
2.875 [73.0]
0.203 [5.16]
0.276 [7.01]
1.378 [35.0]
1.618 [41.1]
1.545 [39.2]
1.779 [45.2]
3
80
3.500 [88.9]
0.216 [5.49]
0.300 [7.62]
1.552 [39.4]
1.861 [47.3]
1.755 [44.6]
2.062 [52.4]
31⁄2
90
4.000 [101.6]
0.226 [5.74]
0.318 [8.08]
1.682 [42.7]
2.045 [51.9]
1.912 [48.6]
2.276 [57.8]
4
100
4.500 [114.3]
0.237 [6.02]
0.337 [8.56]
1.811 [46.0]
2.228 [56.6]
2.067 [52.5]
2.489 [63.2]
5
125
5.563 [141.3]
0.258 [6.55]
0.375 [9.52]
2.062 [52.4]
2.597 [66.0]
2.372 [60.2]
2.920 [74.2]
6
150
6.625 [168.3]
0.280 [7.11]
0.432 [10.97]
2.308 [58.6]
3.034 [77.1]
2.669 [67.8]
3.419 [86.8]
8
200
8.625 [219.1]
0.277 [7.04]
0.322 [8.18]
0.500 [12.70]
2.473 [62.8]
2.757 [70.0]
3.683 [93.5]
2.902 [73.7]
3.210 [81.5]
4.181 [106.2]
10
250
10.750 [273.0]
0.279
0.307
0.365
0.500
2.623
2.823
3.210
3.993
3.111
3.333
3.757
4.592
12
300
12.750 [323.8]
0.300 [7.62]
0.375 [9.52]
0.500 [12.70]
3.105 [78.9]
3.423 [86.9]
4.218 [107.1]
3.683 [93.5]
4.037 [102.5]
4.899 [124.4]
14
350
14.000 [355.6]
0.375 [9.52]
0.500 [12.70]
3.500 [88.9]
4.336 [110.1]
4.146 [105.3]
5.061 [128.5]
16
400
16.000 [406.4]
0.375 [9.52]
0.500 [12.70]
3.603 [91.5]
4.494 [114.1]
4.294 [109.1]
5.284 [134.2]
18
450
18.000 [457]
0.375 [9.52]
0.500 [12.70]
3.688 [93.7]
4.628 [117.6]
4.417 [112.2]
5.472 [139.0]
20
500
20.000 [508]
0.375 [9.52]
0.500 [12.70]
3.758 [95.5]
4.740 [120.4]
4.521 [114.8]
5.632 [143.1]
24
600
24.000 [610]
0.375 [9.52]
0.500 [12.70]
3.869 [98.3]
4.918 [124.9]
4.686 [119.0]
5.890 [149.6]
A
[7.09] A
[7.80]
[9.27]
[12.70]
Special order only.
180
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
[66.6]
[71.7]
[81.5]
[101.4]
[79.0]
[84.7]
[95.4]
[116.6]
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-53/SA-53M
TABLE X2.2
DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR PLAIN END PIPE
NPS
DN
Designator Designator
Outside
Diameter,
in. [mm]
Nominal Wall
Thickness,
in. [mm]
Nominal Weight [Mass]
per Unit Length,
Weight Schedule
Plain End, lb/ft [kg/m]
Class
No.
Test Pressure, A psi [kPa]
Grade A
Grade B
1
6
0.405 [10.3]
0.068 [1.73]
0.095 [2.41]
0.24 [0.37]
0.31 [0.47]
STD
XS
40
80
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
1
8
0.540 [13.7]
0.088 [2.24]
0.119 [3.02]
0.43 [0.63]
0.54 [0.80]
STD
XS
40
80
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
3
10
0.675 [17.1]
0.091 [2.31]
0.126 [3.20]
0.57 [0.84]
0.74 [1.10]
STD
XS
40
80
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
1
15
0.840 [21.3]
0.109
0.147
0.188
0.294
[2.77]
[3.73]
[4.78]
[7.47]
0.85
1.09
1.31
1.72
[1.27]
[1.62]
[1.95]
[2.55]
STD
XS
...
XXS
40
80
160
...
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
900 [6200]
1000 [6900]
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
900 [6200]
1000 [6900]
3
20
1.050 [26.7]
0.113
0.154
0.219
0.308
[2.87]
[3.91]
[5.56]
[7.82]
1.13
1.48
1.95
2.44
[1.69]
[2.20]
[2.90]
[3.64]
STD
XS
...
XXS
40
80
160
...
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
950 [6500]
1000 [6900]
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
950 [6500]
1000 [6900]
1
25
1.315 [33.4]
0.133
0.179
0.250
0.358
[3.38]
[4.55]
[6.35]
[9.09]
1.68
2.17
2.85
3.66
[2.50]
[3.24]
[4.24]
[5.45]
STD
XS
...
XXS
40
80
160
...
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
950 [6500]
1000 [6900]
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
950 [6500]
1000 [6900]
11⁄4
32
1.660 [42.2]
0.140
0.191
0.250
0.382
[3.56]
[4.85]
[6.35]
[9.70]
2.27
3.00
3.77
5.22
[3.39]
[4.47]
[5.61]
[7.77]
STD
XS
...
XXS
40
80
160
...
1200 [8300]
1300 [9000]
1800 [12 400] 1900 [13 100]
1900 [13 100] 2000 [13 800]
2200 [15 200] 2300 [15 900]
11⁄2
40
1.900 [48.3]
0.145
0.200
0.281
0.400
[3.68]
[5.08]
[7.14]
[10.16]
2.72
3.63
4.86
6.41
[4.05]
[5.41]
[7.25]
[9.56]
STD
XS
...
XXS
40
80
160
...
1200 [8300]
1300 [9000]
1800 [12 400] 1900 [13 100]
1950 [13 400] 2050 [14 100]
2200 [15 200] 2300 [15 900]
2
50
2.375 [60.3]
0.154
0.218
0.344
0.436
[3.91]
[5.54]
[8.74]
[11.07]
3.66 [5.44]
5.03 [7.48]
7.47 [11.11]
9.04 [13.44]
STD
XS
...
XXS
40
80
160
...
2300
2500
2500
2500
[15 900]
[17 200]
[17 200]
[17 200]
2500
2500
2500
2500
[17 200]
[17 200]
[17 200]
[17 200]
21⁄2
65
2.875 [73.0]
0.203
0.276
0.375
0.552
[5.16]
[7.01]
[9.52]
[14.02]
5.80 [8.63]
7.67 [11.41]
10.02 [14.90]
13.71 [20.39]
STD
XS
...
XXS
40
80
160
...
2500
2500
2500
2500
[17 200]
[17 200]
[17 200]
[17 200]
2500
2500
2500
2500
[17 200]
[17 200]
[17 200]
[17 200]
3
80
3.500 [88.9]
0.125
0.156
0.188
0.216
0.250
0.281
0.300
0.438
0.600
[3.18]
[3.96]
[4.78]
[5.49]
[6.35]
[7.14]
[7.62]
[11.13]
[15.24]
4.51 [6.72]
5.58 [8.29]
6.66 [9.92]
7.58 [11.29]
8.69 [12.93]
9.67 [14.40]
10.26 [15.27]
14.34 [21.35]
18.60 [27.68]
...
...
...
STD
...
...
XS
...
XXS
...
...
...
40
...
...
80
160
...
1290 [8900]
1600 [11 000]
1930 [13 330]
2220 [15 300]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
1500 [1000]
1870 [12 900]
2260 [15 600]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
31⁄2
90
4.000 [101.6]
0.125 [3.18]
0.156 [3.96]
5.18 [7.72]
6.41 [9.53]
...
...
...
...
1120 [7700]
1400 [6700]
1310 [19 000]
1640 [11 300]
⁄8
⁄4
⁄8
⁄2
⁄4
181
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-53/SA-53M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE X2.2
DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR PLAIN END PIPE (CONT’D)
Outside
Diameter,
in. [mm]
NPS
DN
Designator Designator
Nominal Wall
Thickness,
in. [mm]
Nominal Weight [Mass]
per Unit Length,
Weight Schedule
Plain End, lb/ft [kg/m]
Class
No.
Test Pressure, A psi [kPa]
Grade A
0.188
0.226
0.250
0.281
0.318
[4.78]
[5.74]
[6.35]
[7.14]
[8.08]
7.66 [11.41]
9.12 [13.57]
10.02 [14.92]
11.17 [16.63]
12.52 [18.63]
...
STD
...
...
XS
...
40
...
...
80
1690
2030
2250
2500
2800
[11 700]
[14 000]
[15 500]
[17 200]
[19 300]
Grade B
1970
2370
2500
2500
2800
[13 600]
[16 300]
[17 200]
[17 200]
[19 300]
4
100
4.500 [114.3]
0.125
0.156
0.188
0.219
0.237
0.250
0.281
0.312
0.337
0.438
0.531
0.674
[3.18]
[3.96]
[4.78]
[5.56]
[6.02]
[6.35]
[7.14]
[7.92]
[8.56]
[11.13]
[13.49]
[17.12]
5.85 [8.71]
7.24 [10.78]
8.67 [12.91]
10.02 [14.91]
10.80 [16.07]
11.36 [16.90]
12.67 [18.87]
13.97 [20.78]
15.00 [22.32]
19.02 [28.32]
22.53 [33.54]
27.57 [41.03]
...
...
...
...
STD
...
...
...
XS
...
...
XXS
...
...
...
...
40
...
...
...
80
120
160
...
1000 [6900]
1250 [8600]
1500 [10 300]
1750 [12 100]
1900 [13 100]
2000 [13 800]
2250 [15 100]
2500 [17 200]
2700 [18 600]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
1170 [8100]
1460 [10 100]
1750 [12 100]
2040 [14 100]
2210 [15 200]
2330 [16 100]
2620 [18 100]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
5
125
5.563 [141.3]
0.156
0.188
0.219
0.258
0.281
0.312
0.344
0.375
0.500
0.625
0.750
[3.96]
[4.78]
[5.56]
[6.55]
[7.14]
[7.92]
[8.74]
[9.52]
[12.70]
[15.88]
[19.05]
9.02 [13.41]
10.80 [16.09]
12.51 [18.61]
14.63 [21.77]
15.87 [23.62]
17.51 [26.05]
19.19 [28.57]
20.80 [30.94]
27.06 [40.28]
32.99 [49.11]
38.59 [57.43]
...
...
...
STD
...
...
...
XS
...
...
XXS
...
...
...
40
...
...
...
80
120
160
...
1010 [7000]
1220 [8400]
1420 [9800]
1670 [11 500]
1820 [12 500]
2020 [13 900]
2230 [15 400]
2430 [16 800]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
1180 [8100]
1420 [9800]
1650 [11 400]
1950 [13 400]
2120 [14 600]
2360 [16 300]
2600 [17 900]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
6
150
6.625 [168.3]
0.188
0.219
0.250
0.280
0.312
0.344
0.375
0.432
0.562
0.719
0.864
[4.78]
[5.56]
[6.35]
[7.11]
[7.92]
[8.74]
[9.52]
[10.97]
[14.27]
[18.26]
[21.95]
12.94
15.00
17.04
18.99
21.06
23.10
25.05
28.60
36.43
45.39
53.21
[19.27]
[22.31]
[25.36]
[28.26]
[31.32]
[34.39]
[37.28]
[42.56]
[54.20]
[67.56]
[79.22]
...
...
...
STD
...
...
...
XS
...
...
XXS
...
...
...
40
...
...
...
80
120
160
...
1020 [7000]
1190 [8200]
1360 [9400]
1520 [10 500]
1700 [11 700]
1870 [12 900]
2040 [14 100]
2350 [16 200]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
1190 [8200]
1390 [9600]
1580 [10 900]
1780 [12 300]
1980 [13 700]
2180 [15 000]
2380 [16 400]
2740 [18 900]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
8
200
8.625 [219.1]
0.188
0.203
0.219
0.250
0.277
0.312
0.322
0.344
0.375
0.406
0.438
0.500
0.594
[4.78]
[5.16]
[5.56]
[6.35]
[7.04]
[7.92]
[8.18]
[8.74]
[9.52]
[10.31]
[11.13]
[12.70]
[15.09]
16.96
18.28
19.68
22.38
24.72
27.73
28.58
30.45
33.07
35.67
38.33
43.43
51.00
[25.26]
[27.22]
[29.28]
[33.31]
[36.31]
[41.24]
[42.55]
[45.34]
[49.20]
[53.08]
[57.08]
[64.64]
[75.92]
...
...
...
...
...
...
STD
...
...
...
...
XS
...
...
...
...
20
30
...
40
...
...
60
...
80
100
780 [5400]
850 [5900]
910 [6300]
1040 [7200]
1160 [7800]
1300 [9000]
1340 [9200]
1440 [9900]
1570 [10 800]
1700 [11 700]
1830 [12 600]
2090 [14 400]
2500 [17 200]
920 [6300]
1000 [6900]
1070 [7400]
1220 [8400]
1350 [9300]
1520 [10 500]
1570 [10 800]
1680 [11 600]
1830 [12 600]
2000 [13 800]
2130 [14 700]
2430 [16 800]
2800 [19 300]
182
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-53/SA-53M
TABLE X2.2
DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR PLAIN END PIPE (CONT’D)
NPS
DN
Designator Designator
Outside
Diameter,
in. [mm]
Nominal Wall
Thickness,
in. [mm]
Nominal Weight [Mass]
per Unit Length,
Weight Schedule
Plain End, lb/ft [kg/m]
Class
No.
Test Pressure, A psi [kPa]
Grade A
0.719
0.812
0.875
0.906
[18.26]
[20.62]
[22.22]
[23.01]
60.77 [90.44]
67.82 [100.92]
72.49 [107.88]
74.76 [111.27]
...
...
XXS
...
120
140
...
160
2800
2800
2800
2800
[19 300]
[19 300]
[19 300]
[19 300]
Grade B
2800
2800
2800
2800
[19 300]
[19 300]
[19 300]
[19 300]
10
250
10.750 [273.0] 0.188
0.203
0.219
0.250
0.279
0.307
0.344
0.365
0.438
0.500
0.594
0.719
0.844
1.000
1.125
[4.78]
[5.16]
[5.56]
[6.35]
[7.09]
[7.80]
[8.74]
[9.27]
[11.13]
[12.70]
[15.09]
[18.26]
[21.44]
[25.40]
[28.57]
21.23 [31.62]
22.89 [34.08]
24.65 [36.67]
28.06 [41.75]
31.23 [46.49]
34.27 [51.01]
38.27 [56.96]
40.52 [60.29]
48.28 [71.87]
54.79 [81.52]
64.49 [95.97]
77.10 [114.70]
89.38 [133.00]
104.23 [155.09]
115.75 [172.21]
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
STD
...
XS
...
...
...
XXS
...
...
...
...
20
...
30
...
40
...
60
80
100
120
140
160
630 [4300]
680 [4700]
730 [5000]
840 [5800]
930 [6400]
1030 [7100]
1150 [7900]
1220 [8400]
1470 [10 100]
1670 [11 500]
1990 [13 700]
2410 [16 600]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
730 [5000]
800 [5500]
860 [5900]
980 [6800]
1090 [7500]
1200 [8300]
1340 [9200]
1430 [9900]
1710 [11 800]
1950 [13 400]
2320 [16 000]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
12
300
12.750 [323.8] 0.203 [5.16]
0.219 [5.56]
0.250 [6.35]
0.281 [7.14]
0.312 [7.92]
0.330 [8.38]
0.344 [8.74]
0.375 [9.52]
0.406 [10.31]
0.438 [11.13]
0.500 [12.70]
0.562 [14.27]
0.688 [17.48]
0.844 [21.44]
1.000 [25.40]
1.125 [28.57]
1.312 [33.32]
27.23 [40.55]
29.34 [43.63]
33.41 [49.71]
37.46 [55.75]
41.48 [61.69]
43.81 [65.18]
45.62 [67.90]
49.61 [73.78]
53.57 [79.70]
57.65 [85.82]
65.48 [97.43]
73.22 [108.92]
88.71 [132.04]
107.42 [159.86]
125.61 [186.91]
139.81 [208.00]
160.42 [238.68]
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
STD
...
...
XS
...
...
...
XXS
...
...
...
...
20
...
...
30
...
...
40
...
...
60
80
100
120
140
160
570 [3900]
620 [4300]
710 [4900]
790 [5400]
880 [6100]
930 [6400]
970 [6700]
1060 [7300]
1150 [7900]
1240 [8500]
1410 [9700]
1590 [11 000]
1940 [13 400]
2390 [16 500]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
670 [4600]
720 [5000]
820 [5700]
930 [6400]
1030 [7100]
1090 [7500]
1130 [7800]
1240 [8500]
1340 [9200]
1440 [9900]
1650 [11 400]
1850 [12 800]
2270 [15 700]
2780 [19 200]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
14
350
14.000 [355.6] 0.210
0.219
0.250
0.281
0.312
0.344
0.375
0.438
0.469
0.500
0.594
0.750
0.938
1.094
1.250
1.406
2.000
30.96 [46.04]
32.26 [47.99]
36.75 [54.69]
41.21 [61.35]
45.65 [67.90]
50.22 [74.76]
54.62 [81.25]
63.50 [94.55]
67.84 [100.94]
72.16 [107.39]
85.13 [126.71]
106.23 [158.10]
130.98 [194.96]
150.93 [224.65]
170.37 [253.56]
189.29 [281.70]
256.56 [381.83]
...
...
...
...
...
...
STD
...
...
XS
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
10
...
20
...
30
40
...
...
60
80
100
120
140
160
...
540 [3700]
560 [3900]
640 [4400]
720 [5000]
800 [5500]
880 [6100]
960 [6600]
1130 [7800]
1210 [8300]
1290 [8900]
1530 [10 500]
1930 [13 300]
2410 [16 600]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
630 [4300]
660 [4500]
750 [5200]
840 [5800]
940 [6500]
1030 [7100]
1120 [7700]
1310 [9000]
1410 [9700]
1500 [10 300]
1790 [12 300]
2250 [15 500]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
[5.33]
[5.56]
[6.35]
[7.14]
[7.92]
[8.74]
[9.52]
[11.13]
[11.91]
[12.70]
[15.09]
[19.05]
[23.83]
[27.79]
[31.75]
[35.71]
[50.80]
183
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-53/SA-53M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE X2.2
DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR PLAIN END PIPE (CONT’D)
Outside
Diameter,
in. [mm]
NPS
DN
Designator Designator
Nominal Wall
Thickness,
in. [mm]
Nominal Weight [Mass]
per Unit Length,
Weight Schedule
Plain End, lb/ft [kg/m]
Class
No.
Test Pressure, A psi [kPa]
Grade A
Grade B
2.125 [53.97]
2.200 [55.88]
2.500 [63.50]
269.76 [401.44]
277.51 [413.01]
307.34 [457.40]
...
...
...
...
...
...
2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300] 2800 [19 300]
16.000 [406.4] 0.219 [5.56]
0.250 [6.35]
0.281 [7.14]
0.312 [7.92]
0.344 [8.74]
0.375 [9.52]
0.438 [11.13]
0.469 [11.91]
0.500 [12.70]
0.656 [16.66]
0.844 [21.44]
1.031 [26.19]
1.219 [30.96]
1.438 [36.53]
1.594 [40.49]
36.95 [54.96]
42.09 [62.64]
47.22 [70.30]
52.32 [77.83]
57.57 [85.71]
62.64 [93.17]
72.86 [108.49]
77.87 [115.86]
82.85 [123.30]
107.60 [160.12]
136.74 [203.53]
164.98 [245.56]
192.61 [286.64]
223.85 [333.19]
245.48 [365.35]
...
...
...
...
...
STD
...
...
XS
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
10
...
20
...
30
...
...
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
490 [3400]
560 [3900]
630 [4300]
700 [4800]
770 [5300]
840 [5800]
990 [6800]
1060 [7300]
1120 [7700]
1480 [10 200]
1900 [13 100]
2320 [16 000]
2740 [18 900]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
570 [3900]
660 [4500]
740 [5100]
820 [5700]
900 [6200]
980 [6800]
1150 [7900]
1230 [8500]
1310 [9000]
1720 [11 900]
2220 [15 300]
2710 [18 700]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
16
400
18
450
18.000 [457]
0.250
0.281
0.312
0.344
0.375
0.406
0.438
0.469
0.500
0.562
0.750
0.938
1.156
1.375
1.562
1.781
[6.35]
[7.14]
[7.92]
[8.74]
[9.52]
[10.31]
[11.13]
[11.91]
[12.70]
[14.27]
[19.05]
[23.83]
[29.36]
[34.92]
[39.67]
[45.24]
47.44 [70.60]
53.23 [79.24]
58.99 [87.75]
64.93 [96.66]
70.65 [105.10]
76.36 [113.62]
82.23 [122.43]
87.89 [130.78]
93.54 [139.20]
104.76 [155.87]
138.30 [205.83]
171.08 [254.67]
208.15 [309.76]
244.37 [363.64]
274.48 [408.45]
308.79 [459.59]
...
...
...
...
STD
...
...
...
XS
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
10
...
20
...
...
...
30
...
...
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
500 [3400]
560 [3900]
620 [4300]
690 [4800]
750 [5200]
810 [5600]
880 [6100]
940 [6500]
1000 [6900]
1120 [7700]
1500 [10 300]
1880 [13 000]
2310 [15 900]
2750 [19 000]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
580 [4000]
660 [4500]
730 [5000]
800 [5500]
880 [6100]
950 [6500]
1020 [7000]
1090 [7500]
1170 [8100]
1310 [9000]
1750 [12 100]
2190 [15 100]
2700 [18 600]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
20
500
20.000 [508]
0.250 [6.35]
0.281 [7.14]
0.312 [7.92]
0.344 [8.74]
0.375 [9.52]
0.406 [10.31]
0.438 [11.13]
0.469 [11.91]
0.500 [12.70]
0.594 [15.09]
0.812 [20.62]
1.031 [26.19]
1.281 [32.54]
1.500 [38.10]
1.750 [44.45]
1.969 [50.01]
52.78 [78.55]
59.23 [88.19]
65.66 [97.67]
72.28 [107.60]
78.67 [117.02]
84.04 [126.53]
91.59 [136.37]
97.92 [145.70]
104.23 [155.12]
123.23 [183.42]
166.56 [247.83]
209.06 [311.17]
256.34 [381.53]
296.65 [441.49]
341.41 [508.11]
379.53 [564.81]
...
...
...
...
STD
...
...
...
XS
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
10
...
...
...
20
...
...
...
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
450 [3100]
510 [3500]
560 [3900]
620 [4300]
680 [4700]
730 [5000]
790 [5400]
850 [5900]
900 [6200]
1170 [8100]
1460 [10 100]
1860 [12 800]
2310 [15 900]
2700 [18 600]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
520 [3600]
590 [4100]
660 [4500]
720 [5000]
790 [5400]
850 [5900]
920 [6300]
950 [6500]
1050 [7200]
1250 [8600]
1710 [11 800]
2170 [15 000]
2690 [18 500]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
24
600
24.000 [610]
0.250 [6.35]
0.281 [7.14]
63.47 [94.46]
71.25 [106.08]
...
...
10
...
380 [2600]
420 [2900]
440 [3000]
490 [3400]
184
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-53/SA-53M
TABLE X2.2
DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR PLAIN END PIPE (CONT’D)
NPS
DN
Designator Designator
26
650
Outside
Diameter,
in. [mm]
26.000 [660]
Nominal Wall
Thickness,
in. [mm]
Nominal Weight [Mass]
per Unit Length,
Weight Schedule
Plain End, lb/ft [kg/m] Class
No.
0.312 [7.92]
0.344 [8.74]
0.375 [9.52]
0.406 [10.31]
0.438 [11.13]
0.469 [11.91]
0.500 [12.70]
0.562 [14.27]
0.688 [17.48]
0.938 [23.83]
0.969 [24.61]
1.219 [30.96]
1.531 [38.89]
1.812 [46.02]
2.062 [52.37]
2.344 [59.54]
79.01 [117.51]
86.99 [129.50]
94.71 [140.88]
102.40 [152.37]
110.32 [164.26]
117.98 [175.54]
125.61 [186.94]
140.81 [209.50]
171.45 [255.24]
231.25 [344.23]
238.57 [355.02]
296.86 [441.78]
367.74 [547.33]
429.79 [639.58]
483.57 [719.63]
542.64 [807.63]
...
...
STD
...
...
...
XS
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
20
...
...
...
...
30
40
...
60
80
100
120
140
160
0.250 [6.35]
0.281 [7.14]
0.312 [7.92]
0.344 [8.74]
0.375 [9.52]
0.406 [10.31]
0.438 [11.13]
0.469 [11.91]
0.500 [12.70]
0.562 [14.27]
68.82 [102.42]
77.26 [115.02]
85.68 [127.43]
94.35 [140.45]
102.72 [152.80]
111.08 [165.28]
119.69 [178.20]
128.00 [190.46]
136.30 [202.85]
152.83 [227.37]
...
...
...
...
STD
...
...
...
XS
...
...
...
10
...
...
...
...
...
20
...
Test Pressure, A psi [kPa]
Grade A
Grade B
470 [3200]
520 [3600]
560 [3900]
610 [4200]
660 [4500]
700 [4800]
750 [5200]
840 [5800]
1030 [7100]
1410 [9700]
1450 [10 000]
1830 [12 600]
2300 [15 900]
2720 [18 800]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
550 [3800]
600 [4100]
660 [4500]
710 [4900]
770 [5300]
820 [5700]
880 [6100]
980 [6800]
1200 [8300]
1640 [11 300]
1700 [11 700]
2130 [14 700]
2680 [18 500]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
350
390
430
480
520
560
610
650
690
780
[2400]
[2700]
[3000]
[3300]
[3600]
[3900]
[4200]
[4500]
[4800]
[5400]
400
450
500
560
610
660
710
760
810
910
[2800]
[3100]
[3400]
[3900]
[4200]
[4500]
[4900]
[5200]
[5600]
[6300]
A
The minimum test pressure for outside diameters and wall thicknesses not listed shall be computed by the formula given below. The computed test pressure shall be used in all cases with the following exceptions:
(1) When the wall thickness is greater than the heaviest wall thickness shown for a given diameter, the test pressure for the heaviest
wall listed shall be the required test pressure.
(2) For Grades A and B in sizes under NPS 2 [DN 50], when the wall thickness is lighter than the lightest shown for a given diameter,
use the test pressure given for the lightest wall thickness of the table for the diameter involved.
(3) For all sizes of Grades A and B pipe smaller than NPS 2 [DN 50], the test pressure has been arbitrarily assigned. Test pressures
for intermediate outside diameters need not exceed those for the next larger listed size.
P p 2St/D
where:
P
S
t
D
p
p
p
p
minimum hydrostatic test pressure, psi [kPa]),
0.60 times the specified minimum yield strength, psi [kPa],
nominal wall thickness, in. [mm], and
specified outside diameter, in. [mm].
185
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-53/SA-53M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE X2.3
DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR THREADED AND COUPLED PIPE
NPS
Designator
DN
Designator
Outside
Diameter, in.
[mm]
Nominal Wall
Thickness, in.
[mm]
Nominal Weight [Mass]
per Unit Length, Threaded Weight
and Coupled, lb/ft [kg/m]
Class
Test Pressure, psi [kPa]
Schedule
No.
Grade A
Grade B
1
⁄8
6
0.405 [10.3]
0.068 [1.73]
0.095 [2.41]
0.25 [0.37]
0.32 [0.46]
STD
XS
40
80
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
1
⁄4
8
0.540 [13.7]
0.088 [2.24]
0.119 [3.02]
0.43 [0.63]
0.54 [0.80]
STD
XS
40
80
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
3
⁄8
10
0.675 [17.1]
0.091 [2.31]
0.126 [3.20]
0.57 [0.84]
0.74 [1.10]
STD
XS
40
80
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
1
⁄2
15
0.840 [21.3]
0.109 [2.77]
0.147 [3.73]
0.294 [7.47]
0.86 [1.27]
1.09 [1.62]
1.72 [2.54]
STD
XS
XXS
40
80
...
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
1000 [6900]
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
1000 [6900]
3
⁄4
20
1.050 [26.7]
0.113 [2.87]
0.154 [3.91]
0.308 [7.82]
1.14 [1.69]
1.48 [2.21]
2.45 [3.64]
STD
XS
XXS
40
80
...
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
1000 [6900]
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
1000 [6900]
1
25
1.315 [33.4]
0.133 [3.38]
0.179 [4.55]
0.358 [9.09]
1.69 [2.50]
2.19 [3.25]
3.66 [5.45]
STD
XS
XXS
40
80
...
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
1000 [6900]
700 [4800]
850 [5900]
1000 [6900]
11⁄4
32
1.660 [42.2]
0.140 [3.56]
0.191 [4.85]
0.382 [9.70]
2.28 [3.40]
3.03 [4.49]
5.23 [7.76]
STD
XS
XXS
40
80
...
1000 [6900]
1500 [10 300]
1800 [12 400]
1100 [7600]
1600 [11 000]
1900 [13 100]
11⁄2
40
1.900 [48.3]
0.145 [3.68]
0.200 [5.08]
0.400 [10.16]
2.74 [4.04]
3.65 [5.39]
6.41 [9.56]
STD
XS
XXS
40
80
...
1000 [6900]
1500 [10 300]
1800 [12 400]
1100 [7600]
1600 [11 000]
1900 [13 100]
2
50
2.375 [60.3]
0.154 [3.91]
0.218 [5.54]
0.436 [11.07]
3.68 [5.46]
5.08 [7.55]
9.06 [13.44]
STD
XS
XXS
40
80
...
2300 [15 900]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
21⁄2
65
2.875 [73.0]
0.203 [5.16]
0.276 [7.01]
0.552 [14.02]
5.85 [8.67]
7.75 [11.52]
13.72 [20.39]
STD
XS
XXS
40
80
...
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
3
80
3.500 [88.9]
0.216 [5.49]
0.300 [7.62]
0.600 [15.24]
7.68 [11.35]
10.35 [15.39]
18.60 [27.66]
STD
XS
XXS
40
80
...
2200 [15 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
2500 [17 200]
31⁄2
90
4.000 [101.6]
0.226 [5.74]
0.318 [8.08]
9.27 [13.71]
12.67 [18.82]
STD
XS
40
80
2000 [13 800]
2800 [19 300]
2400 [16 500]
2800 [19 300]
4
100
4.500 [114.3]
0.237 [6.02]
0.337 [8.56]
0.674 [17.12]
10.92 [16.23]
15.20 [22.60]
27.62 [41.09]
STD
XS
XXS
40
80
...
1900 [13 100]
2700 [18 600]
2800 [19 300]
2200 [15 200]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
5
125
5.563 [141.3]
0.258 [6.55]
0.375 [9.52]
0.750 [19.05]
14.90 [22.07]
21.04 [31.42]
38.63 [57.53]
STD
XS
XXS
40
80
...
1700 [11 700]
2400 [16 500]
2800 [19 300]
1900 [13 100]
2800 [19 300]
2800 [19 300]
6
150
6.625 [168.3]
0.280 [7.11]
0.432 [10.97]
0.864 [21.95]
19.34 [28.58]
28.88 [43.05]
53.19 [79.18]
STD
XS
XXS
40
80
...
1500 [10 300]
2300 [15 900]
2800 [19 300]
1800 [12 400]
2700 [18 600]
2800 [19 300]
8
200
8.625 [219.1]
0.277 [7.04]
0.322 [8.18]
0.500 [12.70]
0.875 [22.22]
25.53
29.35
44.00
72.69
...
STD
XS
XXS
30
40
80
...
1200 [8300]
1300 [9000]
2100 [14 500]
2800 [19 300]
1300 [9000]
1600 [11 000]
2400 [16 500]
2800 [19 300]
10
250
10.750 [273.0]
0.279 [7.09]
0.307 [7.80]
0.365 [9.27]
0.500 [12.70]
32.33 [48.80]
35.33 [53.27]
41.49 [63.36]
55.55 [83.17]
...
...
STD
XS
...
30
40
60
950 [6500]
1000 [6900]
1200 [8300]
1700 [11 700]
1100 [7600]
1200 [8300]
1400 [9700]
2000 [13 800]
12
300
12.750 [323.8]
0.330 [8.38]
0.375 [9.52]
0.500 [12.70]
45.47 [67.72]
51.28 [76.21]
66.91 [99.4]
...
STD
XS
30
...
...
950 [6500]
1100 [7600]
1400 [9700]
1100 [7600]
1200 [8300]
1600 [11 000]
[38.07]
[43.73]
[65.41]
[107.94]
186
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-53/SA-53M
TABLE X2.4
TABLE OF MINIMUM WALL THICKNESSES ON INSPECTION FOR NOMINAL PIPE WALL THICKNESSES
Nominal Wall
Thickness
(tn), in. [mm]
Minimum Wall
Thickness
on Inspection
(tm), in. [mm]
Nominal Wall
Thickness (tn),
in. [mm]
Minimum Wall
Thickness
on Inspection
(tm), in. [mm]
Nominal Wall
Thickness (tn),
in. [mm]
Minimum Wall
Thickness
on Inspection (tm),
in. [mm]
0.068
0.088
0.091
0.095
0.109
[1.73]
[2.24]
[2.31]
[2.41]
[2.77]
0.060
0.077
0.080
0.083
0.095
[1.52]
[1.96]
[2.03]
[2.11]
[2.41]
0.294
0.300
0.307
0.308
0.312
[7.47]
[7.62]
[7.80]
[7.82]
[7.92]
0.257
0.262
0.269
0.270
0.273
[6.53]
[6.65]
[6.83]
[6.86]
[6.93]
0.750
0.812
0.844
0.864
0.875
[19.05]
[20.62]
[21.44]
[21.94]
[22.22]
0.656
0.710
0.739
0.756
0.766
[16.66]
[18.03]
[18.77]
[19.20]
[19.46]
0.113
0.119
0.125
0.126
0.133
[2.87]
[3.02]
[3.18]
[3.20]
[3.38]
0.099
0.104
0.109
0.110
0.116
[2.51]
[2.64]
[2.77]
[2.79]
[2.95]
0.318
0.322
0.330
0.337
0.343
[8.08]
[8.18]
[8.38]
[8.56]
[8.71]
0.278
0.282
0.289
0.295
0.300
[7.06]
[7.16]
[7.34]
[7.49]
[7.62]
0.906
0.938
0.968
1.000
1.031
[23.01]
[23.82]
[24.59]
[25.40]
[26.19]
0.793
0.821
0.847
0.875
0.902
[20.14]
[20.85]
[21.51]
[22.22]
[22.91]
0.140
0.145
0.147
0.154
0.156
[3.56]
[3.68]
[3.73]
[3.91]
[3.96]
0.122
0.127
0.129
0.135
0.136
[3.10]
[3.23]
[3.28]
[3.43]
[3.45]
0.344
0.358
0.365
0.375
0.382
[8.74]
[9.09]
[9.27]
[9.52]
[9.70]
0.301
0.313
0.319
0.328
0.334
[7.65]
[7.95]
[8.10]
[8.33]
[8.48]
1.062
1.094
1.125
1.156
1.219
[26.97]
[27.79]
[28.58]
[29.36]
[30.96]
0.929
0.957
0.984
1.012
1.067
[26.30]
[24.31]
[24.99]
[25.70]
[27.08]
0.179
0.187
0.188
0.191
0.200
[4.55]
[4.75]
[4.78]
[4.85]
[5.08]
0.157
0.164
0.164
0.167
0.175
[3.99]
[4.17]
[4.17]
[4.24]
[4.44]
0.400
0.406
0.432
0.436
0.437
[10.16]
[10.31]
[10.97]
[11.07]
[11.10]
0.350
0.355
0.378
0.382
0.382
[8.89]
[9.02]
[9.60]
[9.70]
[9.70]
1.250
1.281
1.312
1.343
1.375
[31.75]
[32.54]
[33.32]
[34.11]
[34.92]
1.094
1.121
1.148
1.175
1.203
[27.79]
[28.47]
[29.16]
[29.85]
[30.56]
0.203
0.216
0.218
0.219
0.226
[5.16]
[5.49]
[5.54]
[5.56]
[5.74]
0.178
0.189
0.191
0.192
0.198
[4.52]
[4.80]
[4.85]
[4.88]
[5.03]
0.438
0.500
0.531
0.552
0.562
[11.13]
[12.70]
[13.49]
[14.02]
[14.27]
0.383
0.438
0.465
0.483
0.492
[9.73]
[11.13]
[11.81]
[12.27]
[12.50]
1.406
1.438
1.500
1.531
1.562
[35.71]
[36.53]
[38.10]
[38.89]
[39.67]
1.230
1.258
1.312
1.340
1.367
[31.24]
[31.95]
[33.32]
[34.04]
[34.72]
0.237
0.250
0.258
0.276
0.277
[6.02]
[6.35]
[6.55]
[7.01]
[7.04]
0.207
0.219
0.226
0.242
0.242
[5.26]
[5.56]
[5.74]
[6.15]
[6.15]
0.594
0.600
0.625
0.656
0.674
[15.09]
[15.24]
[15.88]
[16.66]
[17.12]
0.520
0.525
0.547
0.574
0.590
[13.21]
[13.34]
[13.89]
[14.58]
[14.99]
1.594
1.750
1.781
1.812
1.968
[40.49]
[44.45]
[45.24]
[46.02]
[49.99]
1.395
1.531
1.558
1.586
1.722
[35.43]
[38.89]
[39.57]
[40.28]
[43.74]
0.279 [7.09]
0.280 [7.11]
0.281 [7.14]
0.244 [6.20]
0.245 [6.22]
0.246 [6.25]
0.688 [17.48]
0.719 [18.26]
0.602 [15.29]
0.629 [15.98]
2.062 [52.37]
2.344 [59.54]
1.804 [45.82]
2.051 [52.10]
Note 1 — The following equation, upon which this table is based, shall be applied to calculate minimum wall thickness from nominal wall
thickness:
tn ⴛ 0.875 p tm
where:
tn p nominal wall thickness, in. [mm], and
tm p minimum wall thickness, in. [mm].
The wall thickness is expresssed to three decimal places, the fourth decimal place being carried forward or dropped in accordance with
Practice E 29.
Note 2 — This table is a master table covering wall thicknesses available in the purchase of different classifications of pipe, but it is not
meant to imply that all of the walls listed therein are obtainable under this specification.
187
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-53/SA-53M
2004 SECTION II
X3. BASIC THREADING DATA
X3.1 Figure X3.1 is to be used with Table X3.1.
Figure X3.2 is to be used with Table X3.2.
.
A
NL
W
L2
E1
L4
L1
D
FIG. X3.1 DIMENSIONS OF HAND TIGHT ASSEMBLY FOR USE WITH TABLE X3.1
TABLE X3.1
BASIC THREADING DATA FOR STANDARD-WEIGHT NPS 6 [DN 50] AND UNDER
Pipe
NPS
DN
Desig- Designator nator
Threads
Outside
Diameter,
in. [mm]
D
Number
per
inch
1
⁄8
6
0.405 [10.3]
27
1
⁄4
8
0.540 [13.7]
18
3
⁄8
10
0.675 [17.1]
18
1
⁄2
15
0.840 [21.3]
14
3
⁄4
20
1.050 [26.7]
14
1
25
1.315 [33.4]
111⁄2
11⁄4
32
1.660 [42.2]
111⁄2
11⁄2
40
1.900 [48.3]
111⁄2
2
50
2.375 [60.3]
111⁄2
21⁄2
65
2.875 [73.0]
8
3
80
3.500 [88.9]
8
31⁄2
90
4.000 [101.6]
8
4
100
4.500 [114.3]
8
5
125
5.563 [141.3]
8
6
150
6.625 [168.3]
8
Coupling
End of
Pipe to
Hand
Tight
Plane,
in. [mm]
L1
Effective
Length,
in. [mm]
L2
0.1615
[4.1021]
0.2278
[5.7861]
0.240
[6.096]
0.2638
[6.7005]
0.4018
[10.2057]
0.4078
[10.3581]
0.3924
0.37360
[9.9670]
[9.48944]
0.5946
0.49163
[15.1028] [12.48740]
0.6006
0.62701
[15.2552] [15.92605]
0.320
[8.128]
0.339
[8.611]
0.400
[10.160]
0.5337
[13.5560]
0.5457
[13.8608]
0.6828
[17.3431]
0.420
[10.668]
0.420
[10.668]
0.436
[11.074]
Total
Length,
in. [mm]
L4
Pitch
Diameter at
Hand Tight
Plane,
in. [mm]
E1
0.563 [14.3]
Length,
min.,
in. [mm]
NL
3
⁄4 [19]
Hand Tight
Stand-Off
(Number of
Threads)
A
4
0.719 [18.3]
11⁄8 [29]
51⁄2
0.875 [22.2]
11⁄8 [29]
5
0.7815
0.77843
[19.8501] [19.77212]
0.7935
0.98887
[20.1549] [25.11730]
0.9845
1.23863
[25.0063] [31.46120]
1.063 [27.0]
11⁄2 [38]
5
1.313 [33.4]
1 [40]
5
1.576 [40.0]
115⁄16 [49]
5
0.7068
[17.9527]
0.7235
[18.3769]
0.7565
[19.2151]
1.0085
1.58338
[25.6159] [40.21785]
1.0252
1.82234
[26.0401] [46.28744]
1.0582
2.29627
[26.8783] [58.32526]
1.900 [48.3]
2 [50]
5
2.200 [55.9]
2 [50]
51⁄2
2.750 [69.8]
21⁄16 [52]
51⁄2
0.682
[17.323]
0.766
[19.456]
0.821
[20.853]
1.1376
[28.8950]
1.2000
[30.4800]
1.2500
[31.7500]
1.5712
2.76216
[39.9085] [70.15886]
1.6337
3.38850
[41.4960] [86.06790]
1.6837
3.88881
[42.7660] [98.77577]
3.250 [82.5]
31⁄16 [78]
51⁄2
4.000 [101.6] 33⁄16 [81]
51⁄2
4.625 [117.5] 35⁄16 [84]
51⁄2
0.844
[21.438]
0.937
[23.800]
0.958
[24.333]
1.3000
[33.0200]
1.4063
[35.7200]
1.5125
[38.4175]
1.7337
4.38713
[44.0360] [111.43310]
1.8400
5.44929
[46.7360] [138.41200]
1.9462
6.50597
[49.4335] [165.25164]
5.000 [127.0] 37⁄16 [87]
5
6.296 [159.9] 311⁄16 [94]
5
7.390 [187.7] 415⁄16 [125]
6
Note 1 — All dimensions in this table are nominal and subject to mill tolerances.
Note 2 — The taper of threads is 3⁄4 in./ft [62.5 mm/m] on the diameter.
188
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Outside
Diameter,
in. [mm]
W
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-53/SA-53M
A
NL
W
L2
E1
L4
L1
D
FIG. X3.2 DIMENSIONS OF HAND TIGHT ASSEMBLY FOR USE WITH TABLE X3.2
TABLE X3.2
BASIC THREADING DATA FOR STANDARD-WEIGHT PIPE IN NPS 8 [DN 200] AND LARGER, AND ALL SIZES OF
EXTRA-STRONG AND DOUBLE-EXTRA-STRONG WEIGHT
Pipe
NPS
DN
Desig- Designator nator
Threads
Outside
Diameter,
in. [mm]
D
Number
per
inch
1
⁄8
6
0.405 [10.3]
27
1
⁄4
8
0.540 [13.7]
18
3
⁄8
10
0.675 [17.1]
18
1
⁄2
15
0.840 [21.3]
14
3
⁄4
20
1.050 [26.7]
141⁄2
1
25
1.315 [33.4]
11
11⁄4
32
1.660 [42.2]
111⁄2
11⁄2
40
1.900 [48.3]
111⁄2
2
50
2.375 [60.3]
111⁄2
21⁄2
65
2.875 [73.0]
8
3
80
3.500 [88.9]
8
31⁄2
90
4.000 [101.6]
8
4
100
4.500 [114.3]
8
5
125
5.563 [141.3]
8
6
150
6.625 [168.3]
8
8
200
8.625 [219.1]
8
Coupling
End of
Pipe to
Hand
Tight
Plane,
in. [mm]
L1
Effective
Length,
in. [mm]
L2
Total
Length,
in. [mm]
L4
Pitch
Diameter at
Hand Tight
Plane,
in. [mm]
E1
0.1615
[4.1021]
0.2278
[5.7861]
0.240
[6.096]
0.320
[8.128]
0.339
[8.611]
0.400
[10.160]
0.420
[10.668]
0.420
[10.668]
0.436
[11.074]
0.682
[17.323]
0.766
[19.456]
0.821
[20.853]
0.844
[21.438]
0.937
[23.800]
0.958
[24.333]
1.063
[27.000]
0.2638
[6.7005]
0.4018
[10.2057]
0.4078
[10.3581]
0.5337
[13.5560]
0.5457
[13.8608]
0.6828
[17.3431]
0.7068
[17.9527]
0.7235
[18.3769]
0.7565
[19.2151]
1.1375
[28.8950]
1.2000
[30.4800]
1.2500
[31.7500]
1.3000
[33.0200]
1.4063
[35.7200]
1.5125
[38.4175]
1.7125
[43.4975]
0.3924
[9.9670]
0.5946
[15.1028]
0.6006
[15.2552]
0.7815
[19.8501]
0.7935
[20.1549]
0.9845
[25.0063]
1.0085
[25.6159]
1.0252
[26.0401]
1.0582
[26.8783]
1.5712
[39.9085]
1.6337
[41.4960]
1.6837
[42.7660]
1.7337
[44.0360]
1.8400
[46.7360]
1.9462
[49.4335]
2.1462
[54.5135]
0.37360
[9.48944]
0.49163
[12.48740]
0.62701
[15.92605]
0.77843
[19.77212]
0.98887
[25.11730]
1.23863
[31.46120]
1.58338
[40.21785]
1.82234
[46.28744]
2.29627
[58.32526]
2.76216
[70.15886]
3.38850
[86.06790]
3.88881
[98.77577]
4.38713
[111.43310]
5.44929
[138.41200]
6.50597
[165.25164]
8.50003
[215.90076]
189
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Outside
Diameter,
in. [mm]
W
Length,
min.,
in. [mm]
NL
Hand Tight
Stand-Off
(Number of
Threads)
A
0.563 [14.3]
11⁄16 [27]
3
0.719 [18.3]
15⁄8 [41]
3
0.875 [22.2]
15⁄8 [41]
3
1.063 [27.0]
21⁄8 [54]
3
1.313 [33.4]
21⁄8 [54]
3
1.576 [40.0]
25⁄8 [67]
3
2.054 [52.2]
23⁄4 [70]
3
2.200 [55.9]
23⁄4 [70]
3
2.875 [73.0]
27⁄8 [73]
3
3.375 [85.7]
41⁄8 [105]
2
4.000 [101.6] 41⁄4 [108]
2
4.625 [117.5] 43⁄8 [111]
2
5.200 [132.1] 41⁄2 [114]
2
6.296 [159.9] 45⁄8 [117]
2
7.390 [187.7] 47⁄8 [124]
2
9.625 [244.5] 51⁄4 [133]
2
SA-53/SA-53M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE X3.2
BASIC THREADING DATA FOR STANDARD-WEIGHT PIPE IN NPS 8 [DN 200] AND LARGER, AND ALL SIZES OF
EXTRA-STRONG AND DOUBLE-EXTRA-STRONG WEIGHT (CONT’D)
Pipe
NPS
DN
Desig- Designator nator
Threads
Outside
Diameter,
in. [mm]
D
Number
per
inch
10
250
10.750 [273.0]
8
12
300
12.750 [323.8]
8
14
350
14.000 [355.6]
8
16
400
16.000 [406.4]
8
18
450
18.000 [457]
8
20
500
20.000 [508]
8
Coupling
End of
Pipe
toHand
Tight
Plane,
in. [mm]
L1
Effective
Length,
in. [mm]
L2
Total
Length,
in. [mm]
L4
Pitch
Diameter at
Hand Tight
Plane,
in. [mm]
E1
1.210
[30.734]
1.360
[34.544]
1.562
[39.675]
1.812
[46.025]
2.000
[50.800]
2.125
[53.975]
1.9250
[48.8950]
2.1250
[53.9750]
2.2500
[57.1500]
2.4500
[62.2300]
2.6500
[67.3100]
2.8500
[72.3900]
2.3587
[59.9110]
2.5587
[64.9910]
2.6837
[68.1660]
2.8837
[73.2460]
3.0837
[78.3260]
3.2837
[83.4060]
10.62094
[269.77188]
12.61781
[320.49237]
13.87263
[352.36480]
15.87575
[403.24405]
17.87500
[454.02500]
19.87031
[504.70587]
Note 1 — The taper of threads is 3⁄4 in./ft [62.5 mm/m] on the diameter.
190
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Outside
Diameter,
in. [mm]
W
Length,
min.,
in. [mm]
NL
Hand Tight
Stand-Off
(Number of
Threads)
A
11.750 [298.4] 53⁄4 [146]
2
14.000 [355.6] 61⁄8 [156]
2
15.000 [381.0] 63⁄8 [162]
2
17.000 [432]
63⁄4 [171]
2
19.000 [483]
71⁄8 [181]
2
21.000 [533]
75⁄8 [194]
2
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-53/SA-53M
X4. ELONGATION VALUES
X4.1 Tabulated in Table X4.1 are the minimum elongation values calculated by the equation given in Table 2.
TABLE X4.1
ELONGATION VALUES
Tension Test Specimen
Elongation in 2 in., min, %
Nominal Wall Thickness, in.
3
Specified Tensile Strength, psi
Area, A,
in.2
⁄4 in.
Specimen
1 in.
Specimen
11⁄2 in.
Specimen
0.75 and
greater
0.74
0.73
0.72
0.71
0.70
0.69
0.68
0.67
0.66
0.65
0.64
0.63
0.62
0.61
0.60
0.59
0.58
0.57
0.56
0.55
0.54
0.53
0.52
0.51
0.50
0.49
0.48
0.47
0.46
0.45
0.44
0.43
0.42
0.41
0.40
0.39
0.38
0.37
0.994 and
greater
0.980–0.993
0.967–0.979
0.954–0.966
0.941–0.953
0.927–0.940
0.914–0.926
0.900–0.913
0.887–0.899
0.874–0.886
0.861–0.873
0.847–0.860
0.834–0.846
0.820–0.833
0.807–0.819
0.794–0.806
0.781–0.793
0.767–0.780
0.754–0.766
0.740–0.753
0.727–0.739
0.714–0.726
0.701–0.713
0.687–0.700
0.674–0.686
0.660–0.673
0.647–0.659
0.634–0.646
0.621–0.633
0.607–0.620
0.594–0.606
0.580–0.593
0.567–0.579
0.554–0.566
0.541–0.553
0.527–0.540
0.514–0.526
0.500–0.513
0.487–0.499
0.746 and
greater
0.735–0.745
0.726–0.734
0.715–0.725
0.706–0.714
0.695–0.705
0.686–0.694
0.675–0.685
0.666–0.674
0.655–0.665
0.646–0.654
0.635–0.645
0.626–0.634
0.615–0.625
0.606–0.614
0.595–0.605
0.586–0.594
0.575–0.585
0.566–0.574
0.555–0.565
0.546–0.554
0.535–0.545
0.526–0.534
0.515–0.525
0.506–0.514
0.495–0.505
0.486–0.494
0.475–0.485
0.466–0.474
0.455–0.465
0.446–0.454
0.435–0.445
0.426–0.434
0.415–0.425
0.406–0.414
0.395–0.405
0.386–0.394
0.375–0.385
0.366–0.374
0.497 and
greater
0.490–0.496
0.484–0.489
0.477–0.483
0.471–0.476
0.464–0.470
0.457–0.463
0.450–0.456
0.444–0.449
0.437–0.443
0.431–0.436
0.424–0.430
0.417–0.423
0.410–0.416
0.404–0.409
0.397–0.403
0.391–0.396
0.384–0.390
0.377–0.383
0.370–0.376
0.364–0.369
0.357–0.363
0.351–0.356
0.344–0.350
0.337–0.343
0.330–0.336
0.324–0.329
0.317–0.323
0.311–0.316
0.304–0.310
0.297–0.303
0.290–0.296
0.284–0.289
0.277–0.283
0.271–0.276
0.264–0.270
0.257–0.263
0.250–0.256
0.244–0.249
191
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
48 000
60 000
36
30
36
36
36
36
36
36
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
31
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
SA-53/SA-53M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE X4.1
ELONGATION VALUES (CONT’D)
Tension Test Specimen
Elongation in 2 in., min, %
Nominal Wall Thickness, in.
Specified Tensile Strength, psi
Area, A,
in.2
3
⁄4 in.
Specimen
1 in.
Specimen
11⁄2 in.
Specimen
0.36
0.35
0.34
0.33
0.32
0.31
0.30
0.29
0.28
0.27
0.26
0.25
0.24
0.23
0.22
0.21
0.20
0.19
0.18
0.17
0.16
0.15
0.14
0.13
0.12
0.11
0.10
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01 and
less
0.474–0.486
0.461–0.473
0.447–0.460
0.434–0.446
0.420–0.433
0.407–0.419
0.394–0.406
0.381–0.393
0.367–0.380
0.354–0.366
0.340–0.353
0.327–0.339
0.314–0.326
0.301–0.313
0.287–0.300
0.274–0.286
0.260–0.273
0.247–0.259
0.234–0.246
0.221–0.233
0.207–0.220
0.194–0.206
0.180–0.193
0.167–0.179
0.154–0.166
0.141–0.153
0.127–0.140
0.114–0.126
0.100–0.113
0.087–0.099
0.074–0.086
0.061–0.073
0.047–0.060
0.034–0.046
0.020–0.033
0.019 and
less
0.355–0.365
0.346–0.354
0.335–0.345
0.326–0.334
0.315–0.325
0.306–0.314
0.295–0.305
0.286–0.294
0.275–0.285
0.266–0.274
0.255–0.265
0.246–0.254
0.235–0.245
0.226–0.234
0.215–0.225
0.206–0.214
0.195–0.205
0.186–0.194
0.175–0.185
0.166–0.174
0.155–0.165
0.146–0.154
0.135–0.145
0.126–0.134
0.115–0.125
0.106–0.114
0.095–0.105
0.086–0.094
0.075–0.085
0.066–0.074
0.055–0.065
0.046–0.054
0.035–0.045
0.026–0.034
0.015–0.025
0.014 and
less
0.237–0.243
0.231–0.236
0.224–0.230
0.217–0.223
0.210–0.216
0.204–0.209
0.197–0.203
0.191–0.196
0.184–0.190
0.177–0.183
0.170–0.176
0.164–0.169
0.157–0.163
0.151–0.156
0.144–0.150
0.137–0.143
0.130–0.136
0.124–0.129
0.117–0.123
0.111–0.116
0.104–0.110
0.097–0.103
0.091–0.096
0.084–0.090
0.077–0.083
0.071–0.076
0.064–0.070
0.057–0.063
0.050–0.056
0.044–0.049
0.037–0.043
0.031–0.036
0.024–0.030
0.017–0.023
0.010–0.016
0.009 and
less
192
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
48 000
60 000
31
31
31
31
30
30
30
30
30
29
29
29
29
29
28
28
28
27
27
27
27
26
26
25
25
25
24
24
23
22
22
21
20
19
17
15
26
25
25
25
25
25
25
24
24
24
24
24
24
23
23
23
23
22
22
22
22
21
21
21
20
20
20
19
19
18
18
17
16
16
14
12
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-53/SA-53M
X4.2 Tabulated in Table X4.2 are the minimum elongation values calculated by the equation given in Table 2.
TABLE X4.2
ELONGATION VALUES
Tension Test Specimen
Elongation in 50 mm, min, %
Nominal Wall Thickness, mm
Specified Tensile Strength, MPa
Area, A,
mm2
19 mm
Specimen
25 mm
Specimen
38 mm
Specimen
500 and
greater
480–499
460–479
440–459
420–439
400–419
380–399
360–379
340–359
320–339
300–319
280–299
260–279
240–259
220–239
200–219
190–199
180–189
170–179
160–169
150–159
140–149
130–139
120–129
110–119
100–109
90–99
80–89
70–79
60–69
50–59
40–49
30–39
26.3 and
greater
25.3–26.2
24.2–25.2
23.2–24.1
22.1–23.1
21.1–22.0
20.0–21.0
19.0–19.9
17.9–18.9
16.9–17.8
15.8–16.8
14.8–15.7
13.7–14.7
12.7–13.6
11.6–12.6
10.5–11.5
10.0–10.4
9.5–9.9
9.0–9.4
8.4–8.9
7.9–8.3
7.4–7.8
6.9–7.3
6.3–6.8
5.8–6.2
5.3–5.7
4.8–5.2
4.2–4.7
3.7–4.1
3.2–3.6
2.7–3.1
2.1–2.6
1.6–2.0
20.0 and
greater
19.2–19.9
18.4–19.1
17.6–18.3
16.8–17.5
16.0–16.7
15.2–15.9
14.4–15.0
13.6–14.3
12.8–13.5
12.0–12.7
11.2–11.9
10.4–11.1
9.6–10.3
8.8–9.5
8.0–8.7
7.6–7.9
7.2–7.5
6.8–7.1
6.4–6.7
6.0–6.3
5.6–5.9
5.2–5.5
4.8–5.1
4.4–4.7
4.0–4.3
3.6–3.9
3.2–3.5
2.8–3.1
2.4–2.7
2.0–2.3
1.6–1.9
...
13.2 and
greater
12.7–13.1
12.1–12.6
11.6–12.0
11.1–11.5
10.6–11.0
10.0–10.5
9.5–9.9
9.0–9.4
8.5–8.9
7.9–8.4
7.4–7.8
6.9–7.3
6.4–6.8
5.8–6.3
5.3–5.7
5.0–5.2
4.8–4.9
4.5–4.7
4.2–4.4
4.0–4.1
3.7–3.9
3.5–3.6
3.2–3.4
2.9–3.1
2.7–2.8
2.4–2.6
2.1–2.3
1.9–2.0
1.6–1.8
...
...
...
330
415
36
30
36
36
36
35
35
35
34
34
34
33
33
32
32
31
31
30
30
30
29
29
29
28
28
27
27
26
26
25
24
24
23
22
30
29
29
29
29
28
28
28
27
27
27
26
26
26
25
25
24
24
24
24
23
23
23
22
22
21
21
21
20
19
19
18
193
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
194
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL FORGINGS
FOR PIPING APPLICATIONS
SA-105 /SA-105M
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 105 /A 105M-98.)
1.
system must be used independently of the other. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification.
Scope
1.1 This specification covers forged carbon steel piping components for ambient- and higher-temperature service in pressure systems. Included are flanges, fittings,
valves, and similar parts ordered either to dimensions
specified by the purchaser or to dimensional standards
such as the ANSI and API specifications referenced in
Section 2. Forgings made to this specification are limited
to a maximum weight of 10 000 lb [4540 kg]. Larger
forgings may be ordered to Specification A 266. Tubesheets and hollow cylindrical forgings for pressure vessel
shells are not included within the scope of this specification. Although this specification covers some piping components machined from rolled bar and seamless tubular
products, (see 4.4) it does not cover raw material produced
in these product forms.
NOTE 1 — The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has
been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as “nominal
diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.”
2.
1.4 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound
units and SI units. However, unless the order specifies
the applicable “M” specification designation (SI units),
the material shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
A 266 /A 266M Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings
for Pressure Vessel Components
A 275 /A 275M Test Method for Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings
A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
A 675 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot Wrought,
Special Quality, Mechanical Properties
A 695 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought,
Special Quality, for Fluid Power Applications
A 696 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought
or Cold-Finished, Special Quality, for Pressure Piping
Components
A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
A 788 Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements
E 165 Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination
E 340 Test Method for Macroetching Metals and Alloys
1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or
SI are to be regarded separately as standard. Within the
text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated
in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
2.2 MSS Standards:
SP-25 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings,
Flanges and Unions
SP-44 Standard for Steel Pipe Line Flanges
1.2 Supplementary requirements are provided for use
when additional testing or inspection is desired. These
shall apply only when specified individually by the purchaser in the order.
1.3 Specification A 266 /A 266M covers other steel
forgings and Specifications A 675, A 695, and A 696
cover other steel bars.
195
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-105 /SA-105M
2004 SECTION II
2.3 ASME Standards:
Section IX, Welding Qualifications, ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code
B16.5 Dimensional Standards for Steel Pipe Flanges and
Flanged Fittings
B16.9 Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings
B16.10 Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous Valves
B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Weld, and Threaded
B16.34 Valves-Flanged, Threaded and Welding End
B16.47 Large Diameter Steel Flanges
including NPS 4) not including flanges may be machined
from hot-rolled or forged bar. Elbows, return bends, tees,
and header tees shall not be machined directly from
bar stock.
4.5 Except as permitted by 4.4, the finished product
shall be a forging as defined in the Terminology Section
of Specification A 788.
5.
Heat Treatment
5.1 Heat treatment is not a mandatory requirement of
this specification except for the following piping components:
2.4 API Standards:
API-600 Flanged and Butt-Welding-End Steel Gate
Valves
API-602 Compact Design Carbon Steel Gate Valves for
Refinery Use
5.1.1 Flanges above Class 300,
5.1.2 Flanges of special design where the design
pressure at the design temperature exceeds the pressure–
temperature ratings of Class 300, Group 1.1,
2.5 AWS Standard:
AWS A5.1 Mild Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes
5.1.3 Flanges of special design where the design
pressure or design temperature are not known,
5.1.4 Piping components other than flanges which
meet both of the following criteria: (1) over NPS 4 and
(2) above Class 300, and
3.
Ordering Information
3.1 It is the purchaser’s responsibility to specify in
the purchase order all ordering information as necessary
to purchase the needed material. Examples of such information include but are not limited to the following:
5.1.5 Piping components of Special Class other
than flanges which meet both of the following criteria:
(1) over NPS 4 and (2) when the working pressure at the
operating temperature exceeds the tabulated values for
Special Class 300, Group 1.1.
3.1.1 Quantity,
3.1.2 Size and pressure class or dimensions (Tolerances and surface finishes should be included),
5.2 Heat treatment when required by 5.1 shall be
annealing, normalizing, or normalizing and tempering or
quenching and tempering.
3.1.3 Specification number (The year date should
be included),
3.1.4 Supplementary requirements, and
5.2.1 Annealing — The procedure for annealing
shall consist of allowing the forgings immediately after
forging or rolling, to cool to a temperature below 1000°F
[538°C]. They shall then be reheated to a temperature
between 1550°F [843°C] and 1700°F [927°C] to refine
the grain (a group thus reheated being known as an
“annealing charge”) and allowed to cool uniformly in the
furnace.
3.1.5 Additional requirements (See Table 1 footnotes, 12.1, and 16.2).
4.
Materials and Manufacture
4.1 The steel shall be made by the open-hearth, basicoxygen, or electric-furnace process and shall be fully
killed.
4.3 The material shall be forged as close as practicable
to the specified shape and size.
5.2.2 Normalizing — The procedure for normalizing
shall consist of allowing the forgings, immediately after
forging or rolling, to cool to a temperature below 1000°F
[538°C]. They shall then be uniformly reheated to a temperature between 1550°F [843°C] and 1700°F [927°C]
to refine the grain (a group thus reheated being known
as a “normalizing charge”) and allowed to cool in air.
4.4 Except for flanges of all types, hollow cylindrically shaped parts may be machined from hot-rolled bar,
forged bar, or seamless tubular materials provided that
the axial length of the part is approximately parallel to
the metal flow lines of the stock. Other parts (up to and
5.2.3 Tempering — The procedure for tempering
shall consist of heating the forgings to a temperature
between 1100°F [593°C] and the lower transformation
temperature for a minimum of 1⁄2 h /in. [1⁄2 h /25.4 mm]
of maximum section thickness.
4.2 A sufficient discard shall be made from source
material to secure freedom from injurious piping and
undue segregation.
196
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-105 /SA-105M
5.2.4 Quenching — The procedure for quenching
shall consist of either (1) fully austenitizing the forgings
followed by quenching in a suitable liquid medium or
(2) using a multiple stage procedure whereby the forging
is first fully austenitized and rapidly cooled, then reheated
to partially reaustenitize, followed by quenching in a
suitable liquid medium. All quenched forgings shall be
tempered as prescribed in 5.2.3.
of the represented forging. In addition, for quenched and
tempered forgings, the midlength of the test specimen
shall be at least T from any second heat-treated surface.
When section thickness does not permit this positioning,
the test specimen shall be positioned as near as possible
to the prescribed location.
6.
9.4.2 One tension test shall be made from each
heat-treating charge. If more than one heat is included in
such a charge, each heat shall be tested.
9.4 Tension Tests:
9.4.1 One tension test shall be made for each heat
of as-forged components.
Chemical Composition
6.1 The steel shall conform to the chemical requirements specified in Table 1. Test Methods, Practices and
Terminology A 751 shall apply.
9.4.2.1 When the heat-treating temperatures are
the same and the furnaces (either batch or continuous
type), are controlled within ±25°F [±14°C] and equipped
with recording pyrometers so that complete records of
heat treatment are available, then one tension test from
each heat is required instead of one test from each heat
in each heat-treatment charge. The test specimen material
shall be included with a furnace charge.
6.2 Steels to which lead has been added shall not
be used.
7.
Cast or Heat (Formerly Ladle) Analysis
7.1 An analysis of each heat of steel shall be made
from samples taken, preferably during the pouring of the
heat, and the results shall conform with Table 1.
9.4.3 Testing shall be performed in accordance with
Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The largest feasible
round specimen as described in Test Methods and Definitions A 370 shall be used except when hollow cylindrically shaped parts are machined from seamless tubulars.
The gage length for measuring elongation shall be four
times the diameter of the test section. When hollow cylindrically shaped parts are machined from seamless tubular
materials, strip tests may be used.
8.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Product Analysis
8.1 The purchaser may make a product analysis on
forgings supplied to this specification. Samples for analysis may be taken from midway between center and surface
of solid forgings, midway between inner and outer surfaces of hollow forgings, midway between center and
surface of full-size prolongations, or from broken
mechanical test specimens. The chemical composition
thus determined shall conform to Table 1 within the tolerances stated in Table 2.
9.4.4 Forgings too small to permit obtaining a subsize specimen of 0.250 in. [6.35 mm] diameter or larger
(see Test Methods and Definitions A 370) parallel to the
dimension of maximum working, and produced in equipment unsuitable for the production of a separately forged
test bar such as an automatic or semi-automatic press,
may be accepted on the basis of hardness only. One
percent of the forgings per lot (see Note 2), or ten forgings, whichever is the lesser number, shall be selected at
random, prepared, and tested using the standard Brinell
test in Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The locations
of the indentations shall be at the option of the manufacturer but shall be selected to be representative of the
forging as a whole. One indentation per forging shall
be required but additional indentations may be made to
establish the representative hardness. The hardness of all
forgings so tested shall be 137 to 187 HB inclusive.
9.
Mechanical Properties
9.1 The material shall conform to the mechanical
property requirements prescribed in Tables 3 and 4.
9.2 For the purpose of determining conformance with
Tables 3 and 4, specimens shall be obtained from production forgings after heat treatment, when heat treatment
is required, or from separately forged test blanks prepared
from the stock used to make the finished product. Such
test blanks shall receive approximately the same working
as the finished product. The test blanks shall be heat
treated with the finished product.
NOTE 2 — A lot is defined as the product from a mill heat or if heat
treated, the product of a mill heat per furnace charge.
9.3 For normalized, normalized and tempered, or
quenched and tempered forgings, the central axis of the
test specimen shall correspond to the 1⁄4 T plane or deeper
position, where T is the maximum heat-treated thickness
9.5 Hardness Tests — Except when only one forging
is produced, a minimum of two forgings shall be hardness
197
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-105 /SA-105M
2004 SECTION II
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
tested per batch or continuous run as defined in 9.4.2.1
to ensure that forgings are within the hardness limits
given in Table 3. When only one forging is produced, it
shall be hardness tested as defined in 9.4.2.1 to ensure it
is within the hardness limits given in Table 3. Testing
shall be in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions
A 370. The purchaser may verify that the requirement
has been met by testing at any location on the forging,
provided such testing does not render the forging useless.
10.
12.3 Machining or Grinding Imperfections Not Classified as Injurious — Surface imperfections not classified
as injurious shall be treated as follows:
12.3.1 Forgings showing seams, laps, tears, or
slivers not deeper than 5% of the nominal wall thickness
or 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm], whichever is less, need not have
these imperfections removed. If the imperfections require
removal, they shall be removed by machining or grinding.
12.3.2 Mechanical marks or abrasions and pits
shall be acceptable without grinding or machining provided the depth does not exceed the limitations set forth
in 12.2 and if not deeper than 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm]. If such
imperfections are deeper than 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm], but do
not encroach on the minimum wall thickness of the forging, they shall be removed by grinding to sound metal.
Hydrostatic Tests
10.1 Forgings manufactured under this specification
shall be capable of passing a hydrostatic test compatible
with the rating of the finished forging. Such tests shall
be conducted by the forging manufacturer only when
Supplementary Requirement S7 is specified.
11.
12.3.3 When imperfections have been removed
by grinding or machining, the outside dimension at the
point of grinding or machining may be reduced by the
amount removed. Should it be impracticable to secure a
direct measurement, the wall thickness at the point of
grinding, or at imperfections not required to be removed,
shall be determined by deducting the amount removed
by grinding from the nominal finished wall thickness of
forging, and the remainder shall not be less than the
minimum specified or required wall thickness.
Retreatment
11.1 If the results of the mechanical tests do not
conform to the requirement specified, the manufacturer
may heat treat or reheat treat the forgings as applicable
and repeat the test specified in Section 9.
12.
13. Repair by Welding
13.1 Repair of defects by the manufacturer is permissible for forgings made to dimensional standards such as
those of ANSI or for other parts made for stock by the
manufacturer. Prior approval of the purchaser is required
to repair-weld special forgings made to the purchaser’s
requirements.
Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
12.1 The forgings shall be free of injurious imperfections, as defined below, and shall have a workmanlike
finish. At the discretion of the inspector representing the
purchaser, finished forgings shall be subject to rejection
if surface imperfections acceptable under 12.3 are not
scattered but appear over a large area in excess of what
is considered a workmanlike finish. Unless otherwise
specified in the purchase order, the fittings shall be
cleaned to remove all scale and processing compounds
prior to final surface examination. The cleaning process
shall not injure the surface finish, material properties, or
the metallurgical structure. The cleaned fittings shall be
protected to prevent recontamination. Protective coatings
on socket weld and butt welding fittings shall be suitable
for subsequent welding without removal of the coating.
When specified in the purchase order, parts may be furnished in the as-formed or as-forged condition.
13.2 The welding procedure and welders shall be
qualified in accordance with Section IX of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
13.3 Weld repairs shall be made by a process that
does not produce undesirably high levels of hydrogen in
the welded areas.
13.4 Defects shall be completely removed by chipping
or grinding to sound metal as verified by magnetic particle
inspection prior to welding.
13.5 After repair welding, the area welded shall be
ground smooth to the original contour and shall be completely free of defects as verified by magnetic-particle or
liquid-penetrant inspection.
12.2 Depth of Injurious Imperfections — Selected typical linear and other typical surface imperfections shall
be explored for depth. When the depth encroaches on the
minimum wall thickness of the finished forging, such
imperfections shall be considered injurious.
13.6 All forgings repaired by welding shall be postweld heat treated between 1100°F [593°C] and the lower
transformation temperature for a minimum of 1⁄2 h /in.
198
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-105 /SA-105M
[1⁄2 h /25.4 mm] of maximum section thickness, or alternatively annealed, normalized and tempered, or quenched
and tempered. If the forging was not previously heat
treated, the original tempering temperature was exceeded,
or the forging was fully heat treated in the post weld
cycle, then the forging shall be tested in accordance with
Section 9 on completion of the cycle.
16.2 Test Reports — When test reports are required,
the manufacturer shall also provide the following, where
applicable:
13.7 The mechanical properties of the procedurequalification weldment shall, when tested in accordance
with Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, conform with the requirements listed in Table 3
for the thermal condition of repair-welded forgings.
16.2.3 Chemical analysis results, Section 6 (Table
1). When the amount of an unspecified element is less
than 0.02%, then the analysis for that element may be
reported as “<0.02%,”
13.8 Repair by welding shall not exceed 10% of the
surface area of the forging nor 331⁄3% of the wall thickness
of the finished forging or 3⁄8 in. [10 mm] whichever is
less, without prior approval of the purchaser.
16.2.5 Any supplementary testing required by the
purchase order.
14.
16.2.1 Type heat treatment, Section 5,
16.2.2 Tensile property results, Section 9 (Table
3), report the yield strength and ultimate strength in ksi
[MPa], elongation and reduction in area, in percent,
16.2.4 Hardness results, Section 9 (Table 3), and
17. Product Marking
17.1 Identification marks consisting of the manufacturer’s symbol or name (see Note 3), the heat number or
manufacturer’s heat identificaion, designation of service
rating, this specification number, and size shall be forged
or legibly stamped on each forging, and in such a position
as not to injure the usefullness of the forging. The Standard Marking System of Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and
Unions (SP-25-1978) of the Manufacturers’ Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry may be
followed except the word “Steel” shall not be substituted
for this specification number.
Inspection
14.1 The manufacturer shall afford the purchaser’s
inspector all reasonable facilities necessary to satisfy him
that the material is being furnished in accordance with
the purchase order. Inspection by the purchaser shall not
interfere unnecessarily with the manufacturer’s operations. All tests and inspections shall be made at the place
of manufacture, unless otherwise agreed upon.
15.
NOTE 3 — For purposes of identification marking, the manufacturer
is considered the organization that certifies the piping component was
manufactured, sampled, and tested in accordance with this specification
and the results have been determined to meet the requirements of this
specification.
Rejection and Rehearing
15.1 Each forging that develops injurious defects during shop working or application shall be rejected and the
manufacturer notified.
17.1.1 If the forgings have been quenched and tempered, the letters “QT” shall be stamped on the forgings
following this specification number.
15.2 Samples representing material rejected by the
purchaser shall be preserved until disposition of the claim
has been agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
16.
17.1.2 Forgings repaired by welding shall be
marked with the letter “W” following this specification
number.
17.2 When test reports are required for larger products, the markings shall consist of the manufacturer’s
symbol or name, this specification number, and such other
markings as necessary to identify the part with the test
report (17.1.1 and 17.1.2 shall apply). The specification
number marked on the forgings need not include specification year of issue and revision letter.
Certification
16.1 Identification Marking — For forgings made to
specified dimensions, when agreed upon by the purchaser,
and for forgings made to dimensional standards, application of identification marks as required in 17.1 shall be
the certification that the forgings have been furnished in
accordance with the requirements of this specification.
The specification designation included on test reports
shall include year of issue and revision letter, if any.
17.3 Bar Coding— In addition to the requirements in
17.1 and 17.2, bar coding is acceptable as a supplementary
identification method. The purchaser may specify in the
order a specific bar coding system to be used. The bar
199
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-105 /SA-105M
2004 SECTION II
coding system, if applied at the discretion of the supplier,
should be consistent with one of the published industry
standards for bar coding. If used on small parts, the bar
code may be applied to the box or a substantially
applied tag.
18. Keywords
18.1 pipe fittings, steel; piping applications; pressure
containing parts; steel flanges; steel forgings, carbon;
steel valves; temperature service applications, elevated;
temperature service applications, high
TABLE 1
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
Element
Composition, %
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus
Sulfur
Silicon
Copper
Nickel
Chromium
Molybdenum
Vanadium
Columbium
0.35 max
0.60–1.05
0.035 max
0.040 max
0.10–0.35
0.40 max [Note (1)]
0.40 max [Note (1)]
0.30 max [Notes (1)(2)]
0.12 max [Notes (1)(2)]
0.05 max
0.02 max
GENERAL NOTE: For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified
carbon maximum (0.35%), an increase of 0.06% manganese above
the specified maximum (1.05%) will be permitted up to a maximum
of 1.35%.
NOTES:
(1) The sum of copper, nickel, chromium and molybdenum shall not
exceed 1.00%.
(2) The sum of chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed 0.32%.
200
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-105 /SA-105M
TABLE 2
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN PRODUCT ANALYSIS
Permissible Variations over the Maximum Limit or Under the Minimum Limit, %
Carbon
Manganese:
Up to and including 0.90
0.91 and over
Phosphorus
Sulfur
Silicon
Copper
Nickel
Chromium
Molybdenum
Vanadium
Colombium
200 in.2
[1290 cm2]
and Under
Over 200 to
400 in.2 [1290
to 2580 cm2],
incl
Over 400 to
800 in.2 [2580
to 5160 cm2],
incl
Over 800 to
1600 in.2 [5160
to 10 320 cm2]
incl
Over 1600 in.2
[10 320 cm2]
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.05
0.04
0.06
0.008
0.010
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.05
0.07
0.010
0.010
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.06
0.08
0.010
0.010
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.07
0.08
0.015
0.015
0.05
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.08
0.09
0.015
0.015
0.06
0.03
0.03
0.04
0.01
0.01
0.01
GENERAL NOTES: Product cross-sectional area (taken at right angles to the axis of the original ingot or billet) is defined as either:
(a) maximum cross-sectional area of rough machined forging (excluding boring),
(b) maximum cross-sectional area of the unmachined forging, or
(c) maximum cross-sectional area of the billet, bloom or slab.
TABLE 4
COMPUTED MINIMUM VALUES
TABLE 3
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS [NOTE (1)]
Tensile strength, min, psi [MPa]
Yield strength, min, psi [MPa] [Note (2)]
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, %:
Basic minimum elongation for walls 5⁄16 in.
[7.9 mm] and over in thickness, strip tests.
When standard round 2 in. or 50 mm gage
length or smaller proportionally sized
specimen with the gage length equal to 4D
is used
For strip tests, a deduction for each 1⁄32 in.
[0.8 mm] decrease in wall thickness below
5
⁄16 in. [7.9 mm] from the basic minimum
elongation of the percentage points of Table
4
Reduction of area, min, % [Note (4)]
Hardness, HB, max
Wall Thickness
70 000 [485]
36 000 [250]
30
in.
mm
Elongation in 2 in. or 50
mm, min, %
⁄16 (0.312)
⁄32 (0.281)
1
⁄4 (0.250)
7
⁄32 (0.219)
3
⁄16 (0.188)
5
⁄32 (0.156)
1
⁄8 (0.125)
3
⁄32 (0.094)
1
⁄16 (0.062)
7.9
7.1
6.4
5.6
4.8
4.0
3.2
2.4
1.6
30.00
28.50
27.00
25.50
24.00
22.50
21.00
19.50
18.00
5
9
22
1.50 [Note (3)]
GENERAL NOTE: The above table gives the computed minimum
elongation values for each 1⁄32 in. [0.8 mm] decrease in wall thickness.
Where the wall thickness lies between two values shown above, the
minimum elongation value is determined by the following equation:
30
187
NOTES:
(1) For small forgings, see 9.4.4.
(2) Determined by either the 0.2% offset method or the 0.5%
extension-under-load method.
(3) See Table 4 for computed minimum values.
(4) For round specimens only.
E p 48T + 15.00
where:
E p elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, %, and
T p actual thickness of specimen, in. [mm].
201
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-105 /SA-105M
2004 SECTION II
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the inquiry, contract, and order.
S6. Liquid-Penetrant Examination
S6.1 All surfaces shall be examined by a liquid-penetrant method. The method shall be in accordance with
Practice E 165. Acceptance limits shall be as agreed upon
by the manufacturer and the purchaser.
S1. Macroetch Test
S1.1 A sample forging shall be sectioned and etched
to show flow lines and internal imperfections. The test
shall be conducted in accordance with Test Method E
340. Details of the test shall be agreed upon between the
manufacturer and the purchaser.
S7. Hydrostatic Testing
S7.1 A hydrostatic test at a pressure agreed upon by
the manufacturer and the purchaser shall be applied by
the manufacturer.
S2. Product Analysis
S2.1 A product analysis shall be made from each heat
offered for delivery. The analysis shall conform to the
requirements specified in Table 1 with tolerances in Table
2. If the results of any test fail to comply, two additional
forgings or representative test pieces from the same heat
shall be retested and the results shall comply with the
tables listed. If the results of either one of these pieces
fail to comply, each forging shall be checked or the heat
rejected. All results shall be reported to the purchaser
and all forgings which do not comply shall be rejected.
S8. Repair Welding
S8.1 No repair welding shall be permitted without
prior approval of the purchaser.
S9. Heat Treatment
S9.1 All forgings shall be heat treated as specified
by the purchaser.
S3. Hardness
S3.1 The purchaser may check the hardness of any
or all forgings supplied at any location on the forging
and the hardness shall be 137 to 187 HB. All forgings
not within the specified hardness range shall be rejected.
S9.2 When forgings not requiring heat treatment by
5.1 are supplied heat treated by purchaser request, the
basis for determining conformance with Table 3 and
Table 4 shall be hardness testing per 9.5 and either (1)
tensile testing of heat treated forgings per 9.2, or (2)
tensile tests from as-forged forgings or separately forged
test blanks, as agreed upon between the supplier and
purchaser.
S4. Tension Tests
S4.1 In addition to the requirements of Section 9, the
heat identification shall be marked on each forging and
one tensile specimen shall be obtained from a representative forging at a location agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser. The results of the test shall
comply with Table 3 and shall be reported to the purchaser.
S9.3 When test reports are required, and tensile test
results were obtained from as-forged forgings or asforged test blanks, it shall be so indicated on the test
report.
S9.4 In addition to the marking required by Section
17, this specification shall be followed by the letter: A
for annealed, N for normalized, NT for normalized and
tempered, or QT for quenched and tempered, as appropriate.
S5. Magnetic-Particle Examination
S5.1 All accessible surfaces of the finished forging
shall be examined by a magnetic-particle method. The
method shall be in accordance with Test Method A 275/
A 275M. Acceptance limits shall be as agreed upon
between the manufacturer and purchaser.
S10. Marking Small Forgings
S10.1 For small products where the space for marking
is less than 1 in. [25 mm] in any direction, test reports
202
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
are mandatory and marking may be restricted to only
such symbols or codes as are necessary to identify the
parts with the test reports.
S10.2 When the configuration or size does not permit
marking directly on the forging, the marking method shall
be a matter of agreement between the manufacturer and
the purchaser.
section thickness of 2 in. or less, and 0.48 for forgings
with a maximum section thickness of greater than 2 in.
S11.2 Determine the carbon equivalent (CE) as
follows:
CE p C+ Mn ⁄6 + (Cr + Mo + V) ⁄5 + (Ni + Cu) ⁄15
S11. Carbon Equivalent
S11.1 The maximum carbon equivalent, based on heat
analysis, shall be 0.47 for forgings with a maximum
S11.3 A lower maximum carbon equivalent may be
agreed upon between the supplier and the purchaser.
203
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-105 /SA-105M
Not for Resale
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
204
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS CARBON STEEL
PIPE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE
SA-106
(Identical with ASTM A 106-95 except for editorial differences in 8.1, 13.4, and 24.1 and the deletion of ASTM caveat 1.5.)
1.
NOTE 3 — The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has
been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as “nominal
diameter,” “size,” and “nominal size.”
Scope
1.1 This specification covers seamless carbon steel
pipe for high-temperature service (Note 1) in NPS 1⁄8 to
NPS 48 inclusive, with nominal (average) wall thickness
as given in ANSI B36.10. Pipe having other dimensions
may be furnished provided such pipe complies with all
other requirements of this specification. Pipe ordered
under this specification shall be suitable for bending,
flanging, and similar forming operations, and for welding.
When the steel is to be welded, it is presupposed that a
welding procedure suitable to the grade of steel and
intended use or service will be utilized (Note 2).
1.5 DELETED
2.
Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
A 520 Specification for Supplementary Requirements for
Seamless and Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon
Steel Tubular Products for High-Temperature Service
Conforming to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction
A 530/A 530M Specification for General Requirements
for Specialized Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data
to Determine Conformance With Specifications
E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
and Tubing
E 309 Practice for Eddy-Current Examination of Steel
Tubular Products Using Magnetic Saturation
E 381 Method of Macrotech Testing, Inspection, and Rating Steel Products, Comprising Bars, Billets, Blooms,
and Forgings
E 570 Practice for Flux Leakage Examination of Ferromagnetic Steel Tubular Products
NOTE 1 — Consideration should be given to possible graphitization
of the material at the higher temperatures at which it may be used.
NOTE 2 — Grade A rather than Grade B or Grade C pipe should be
used for close coiling, or cold bending. The purpose for which the pipe
is to be used should be stated in the order. This note is not intended
to prohibit the cold bending of Grade B seamless pipe.
1.2 Supplementary requirements (S1 to S4) of an
optional nature are provided for seamless pipe intended
for use in applications where a superior grade of pipe
is required. These supplementary requirements call for
additional tests to be made and when desired shall be so
stated in the order.
1.3 When these products are to be used in applications
conforming to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction, the requirements of Specification A 520
(Mechanical Property Requirements Section) shall supplement and supersede the requirements of this specification.
2.2 ANSI Standard:
ANSI B36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be
regarded as the standard.
2.4 Federal Standard:
Fed. Std. 123 Marking for Shipments (Civil Agencies)
2.3 Military Standards:
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products, Preparation for Shipment and Storage
205
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-106
2004 SECTION II
4.4 Unless otherwise specified, pipe NPS 2 and over
shall be furnished hot finished. When agreed upon
between the manufacturer and the purchaser, cold-drawn
pipe may be furnished.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Fed. Std. 183 Continuous Identification Marking of Iron
and Steel Products
2.5 Other Standards:
SSPC-SP6 Surface Preparation Specification No. 6
5.
Heat Treatment
5.1 Hot-finished pipe need not be heat treated. Colddrawn pipe shall be heat treated after the final cold draw
pass at a temperature of 1200°F (650°C) or higher.
3.
Ordering Information
3.1 Orders for materials under this specification
should include the following, as required, to describe the
desired material adequately:
3.1.1 Quantity (feet or number of lengths),
6.
General Requirements
6.1 Material furnished to this specification shall conform to the applicable requirements of the current edition
of Specification A 530/A 530M unless otherwise provided herein.
3.1.2 Name of material (seamless carbon steel
pipe),
3.1.3 Grade (Table 1),
3.1.4 Manufacture (hot-finished or cold-drawn),
3.1.5 Size (either NPS and weight class or schedule
number, or both, or outside diameter and nominal wall
thickness, ANSI B36.10),
7.
Chemical Composition
7.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
chemical composition prescribed in Table 1.
3.1.6 Length (specific or random, Section 20),
3.1.7 Optional requirements (Section 9 and S1 to
S4),
8.
Heat Analysis
8.1 An analysis of each heat of steel shall be made
by the steel manufacturer to determine the percentages
of the elements specified in Section 7. If the secondary
melting processes of 4.1 are employed, the heat analysis
shall be obtained from one remelted ingot or the product
of one remelted ingot of each primary melt. The chemical
composition thus determined, or that determined from a
product analysis made by the manufacturer, if the latter
has not manufactured the steel, shall be reported to the
purchaser or the purchaser’s representative, and shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 7.
3.1.8 Test report required (Section on Certification
of Specification A 530/A 530M),
3.1.9 Specification designation,
3.1.10 End use of material,
3.1.11 Hydrostatic test in accordance with Specification A 530/A 530M or 13.3 of this specification, or
NDE in accordance with Section 14 of this specification.
3.1.12 Special requirements.
4.
Process
4.1 The steel shall be killed steel made by one or more
of the following processes: open-hearth, basic-oxygen, or
electric-furnace. The primary melting may incorporate
separate degassing or refining, and may be followed by
secondary melting, using electroslag remelting or vacuum-arc remelting. If secondary melting is employed, the
heat shall be defined as all of the ingots remelted from
a single primary heat.
9.
Product Analysis
9.1 At the request of the purchaser, analyses of two
pipes from each lot (Note 4) of 400 lengths or fraction
thereof, of each size up to, but not including, NPS 6, and
from each lot of 200 lengths or fraction thereof of each
size NPS 6 and over, shall be made by the manufacturer
from the finished pipe. The results of these analyses shall
be reported to the purchaser or the purchaser’s representative and shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 7.
4.2 Steel may be cast in ingots or may be strand cast.
When steels of different grades are sequentially strand
cast, identification of the resultant transition material is
required. The producer shall remove the transition material by any established procedure that positively separates
the grades.
9.2 If the analysis of one of the tests specified in 9.1
does not conform to the requirements specified in Section
7, analyses shall be made on additional pipes of double
the original number from the same lot, each of which
shall conform to requirements specified.
4.3 Pipe NPS 11⁄2 and under may be either hot finished
or cold drawn.
206
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE 4 — A lot shall consist of the number of lengths specified in
Sections 9 and 20 of the same size and wall thickness from any one
heat of steel.
SA-106
o’clock locations, cracks at these locations shall not be
cause for rejection if the D-to-t ratio is less than 10.
NOTE 6 — The “H” values have been calculated for sizes from NPS
21⁄2 to 24, inclusive, and are shown in Table X1.1 of this specification.
10. Tensile Requirements
10.1 The material shall conform to the requirements
as to tensile properties prescribed in Tables 2 and 3.
13. Hydrostatic Test
13.1 Each length of pipe shall withstand without leakage through the pipe wall, a hydrostatic test, except as
provided for in 13.2, 13.3, and 13.4.
11. Bending Requirements
11.1 For pipe NPS 2 and under a sufficient length of
pipe shall stand being bent cold through 90° around a
cylindrical mandrel, the diameter of which is 12 times
the nominal diameter (as shown in ANSI B36.10) of the
pipe, without developing cracks. When ordered for close
coiling (Note 2), the pipe shall stand being bent cold
through 180° around a cylindrical mandrel, the diameter
of which is eight times the outside diameter (as shown
in ANSI B36.10) of the pipe, without failure.
13.2 When specified by the purchaser, pipe may be
tested by the nondestructive electric test method in lieu
of the hydrostatic test as shown in Section 14.
13.3 When specified in the order, pipe may be furnished without hydrostatic test and without the NDE in
Section 14. In this case, each length so furnished shall
include the mandatory marking of the letters “NH.”
13.4 When the hydrostatic test and the NDE test are
omitted and the lengths marked with the letters “NH,”
the certification, when required, shall clearly state “Not
Hydrostatically Tested,” the specification number and
material grade, as shown on the certification, shall be
followed by the letters “NH.”
11.2 For pipe whose diameter equals or exceeds 10
in. (254 mm) a bend test may be conducted instead of
the flattening test. The bend test specimens shall be bent
at room temperature through 180° without cracking on
the outside of the bent portion. The inside diameter of
the bend shall be 1 in. (25.4 mm). Substitution of the
bend test for the flattening test shall be subject to the
approval of the purchaser.
14. Nondestructive Electric Test
14.1 As an alternative to the hydrostatic test, and
when specified by the purchaser, each pipe shall be tested
with a nondestructive electric test in accordance with
Practice E 213, Practice E 309, or Practice E 570. In this
case, each length so furnished shall include the mandatory
marking of the letters “NDE.” It is the intent of this
test to reject pipe with imperfections which produce test
signals equal to or greater than that of the calibration
standard.
11.3 For pipe whose diameter exceeds 25 in. (635
mm) and whose diameter to wall thickness ratio is 7.0
or less, the bend test described in 11.2 shall be conducted
instead of the flattening test.
NOTE 5 — Diameter to wall thickness ratio p specified outside diameter/nominal wall thickness.
Example: For 28 in. diameter 5.000 in. thick pipe the
diameter to wall thickness ratio p 28/5 p 5.6.
14.2 When the nondestructive electric test is performed, the lengths shall be marked with the letters
“NDE.” The certification, when required, shall state
“Nondestructive Electric Tested” and shall indicate which
of the tests was applied. Also the letters “NDE” shall be
appended to the product specification number and material grade shown on the certification.
12. Flattening Tests
12.1 For pipe over NPS 2 a section of pipe not less
than 21⁄2 in. (63.5 mm) in length shall be flattened cold
between parallel plates until the opposite walls of the
pipe meet. Flattening tests shall be in accordance with
Specification A 530/A 530M, except that in the formula
used to calculate the “H” value, the following “e” constants shall be used:
14.3 The following information is for the benefit of
the user of this specification:
0.08 for Grade A
0.07 for Grades B and C
14.3.1 The reference standards defined in 14.4
through 14.6 are convenient standards for calibration of
nondestructive testing equipment. The dimensions of
these standards should not be construed as the minimum
size imperfection detectable by such equipment.
12.2 When low D-to-t ratio tubulars are tested,
because the strain imposed due to geometry is unreasonably high on the inside surface at the six and twelve
207
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-106
2004 SECTION II
14.3.2 The ultrasonic testing can be performed to
detect both longitudinally and circumferentially oriented
defects. It should be recognized that different techniques
should be employed to detect differently oriented imperfections. The examination may not detect short, deep
defects.
14.5.2 Transverse Tangential Notch — Using a
round tool or file with a 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) diameter, a
notch shall be filed or milled tangential to the surface
and transverse to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Said
notch shall have a depth not exceeding 121⁄2% of the
specified wall thickness of the pipe or 0.004 in. (0.102
mm), whichever is greater.
14.3.3 The eddy current examination referenced in
this specification has the capability of detecting significant discontinuities, especially of the short abrupt type.
14.5.3 Longitudinal Notch — A notch 0.031 in.
(0.787 mm) or less in width shall be machined in a radial
place parallel to the tube axis on the outside surface of
the pipe, to have a depth not exceeding 121⁄2% of the
specified wall thickness of the tube or 0.004 in. (0.102
mm), whichever is greater. The length of the notch shall
be compatible with the testing method.
14.3.4 The flux leakage examination referred to in
this specification is capable of detecting the presence
and location of significant longitudinally or transversely
oriented discontinuities. It should be recognized that different techniques should be employed to detect differently
oriented imperfections.
14.5.4 Compatibility — The discontinuity in the calibration pipe shall be compatible with the testing equipment and the method being used.
14.3.5 The hydrostatic test referred to in Section
13 has the capability of finding defects of a size permitting
the test fluid to leak through the tube wall and may be
either visually seen or detected by a loss of pressure. This
test may not detect very tight, through-the-wall defects or
defects that extend an appreciable distance into the wall
without complete penetration.
14.6 For flux leakage testing, the longitudinal calibration reference notches shall be straight-sided notches
machined in a radial plane parallel to the pipe axis. For
wall thickness under 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm), outside and inside
notches shall be used; for wall thickness equal and above
1
⁄2 in. (12.7 mm), only an outside notch shall be used.
Notch depth shall not exceed 121⁄2% of the specified wall
thickness, or 0.004 in. (0.102 mm), whichever is greater.
Notch length shall not exceed 1 in. (25.4 mm), and the
width shall not exceed the depth. Outside diameter and
inside diameter notches shall be located sufficiently apart
to allow separation and identification of the signals.
14.3.6 A purchaser interested in ascertaining the
nature (type, size, location, and orientation) of discontinuities that can be detected in the specific application of
these examinations should discuss this with the manufacturer of the tubular product.
14.4 For ultrasonic testing, the calibration reference
notches shall be, at the option of the producer, any one
of the three common notch shapes shown in Practice E
213. The depth of notch shall not exceed 121⁄2% of the
specified wall thickness of the pipe or 0.004 in. (0.102
mm), whichever is greater.
14.7 Pipe producing a signal equal to or greater than
the signal produced by the calibration standard shall be
subject to rejection. The area producing the signal may
be reexamined.
14.5 For eddy current testing, the calibration pipe
shall contain, at the option of the producer, any one
of the following discontinuities to establish a minimum
sensitivity level for rejection:
14.7.1 Test signals produced by imperfections
which cannot be identified, or produced by cracks or
crack-like imperfections shall result in rejection of the
pipe, unless it is repaired and retested. To be accepted,
the pipe must pass the same specification test to which
it was originally subjected, provided that the remaining
wall thickness is not decreased below that permitted by
this specification. The OD at the point of grinding may
be reduced by the amount so reduced.
14.5.1 Drilled Hole — The calibration pipe shall
contain depending upon the pipe diameter three holes
spaced 120° apart or four holes spaced 90° apart and
sufficiently separated longitudinally to ensure separately
distinguishable responses. The holes shall be drilled radially and completely through the pipe wall, care being
taken to avoid distortion of the pipe while drilling.
Depending upon the pipe diameter the calibration pipe
shall contain the following hole:
≤ 1⁄2 in.
> 1⁄2 ≤ 11⁄4 in.
> 11⁄4 ≤ 2 in.
> 2 in. ≤ 5 in.
> 5 in.
0.039
0.055
0.071
0.087
0.106
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
14.7.2 Test signals produced by visual imperfections such as those listed below may be evaluated in
accordance with the provisions of Section 18:
14.7.2.1 Dinges,
(1 mm)
(1.4 mm)
(1.8 mm)
(2.2 mm)
(2.7 mm)
14.7.2.2 Straightener marks,
14.7.2.3 Cutting chips,
14.7.2.4 Scratches,
208
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
14.7.2.5 Steel die stamps,
with respect to depth. Exploration of all surface imperfections is not required but may be necessary to assure
compliance with 18.2.
14.7.2.6 Stop marks, or
14.7.2.7 Pipe reducer ripple.
18.2 Surface imperfections that penetrate more than
121⁄2% of the nominal wall thickness or encroach on the
minimum wall thickness shall be considered defects. Pipe
with such defects shall be given one of the following
dispositions:
14.8 The test methods described in this section may
not be capable of inspecting the end portion of pipes.
This condition is referred to as “end effect.” The length
of the end effect shall be determined by the manufacturer
and, when specified in the purchase order, reported to
the purchaser.
18.2.1 The defect may be removed by grinding
provided that the remaining wall thickness is within specified limits.
15. Nipples
15.1 Nipples shall be cut from pipe of the same dimensions and quality described in this specification.
18.2.2 Repaired in accordance with the repair welding provisions of 18.6.
18.2.3 The section of pipe containing the defect
may be cut off within the limits of requirements on length.
16.
Dimensions, Weight, and Permissible
Variations
16.1 Weight — The weight of any length of pipe shall
not vary more than 10% over and 3.5% under that specified. Unless otherwise agreed upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser, pipe in NPS 4 and smaller may
be weighed in convenient lots; pipe larger than NPS 4
shall be weighed separately.
18.2.4 Rejected.
18.3 To provide a workmanlike finish and basis for
evaluating conformance with 18.2 the pipe manufacturer
shall remove by grinding the following noninjurious
imperfections:
18.3.1 Mechanical marks, abrasions (Note 8) and
pits, any of which imperfections are deeper than 1⁄16 in.
(1.58 mm).
16.2 Diameter — Variations in outside diameter shall
not exceed those specified in Table 4.
18.3.2 Visual imperfections commonly referred to
as scabs, seams, laps, tears, or slivers found by exploration
in accordance with 18.1 to be deeper than 5% of the
nominal wall thickness.
16.3 Thickness — The minimum wall thickness at any
point shall not be more than 12.5% under the nominal
wall thickness specified.
18.4 At the purchaser’s discretion, pipe shall be subjected to rejection if surface imperfections acceptable
under 18.2 are not scattered, but appear over a large area
in excess of what is considered a workmanlike finish.
Disposition of such a pipe shall be a matter of agreement
between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
NOTE 7 — The minimum wall thicknesses on inspection of some of
the available sizes are shown in Table X2.1.
17. Lengths
17.1 Pipe lengths shall be in accordance with the
following regular practice:
17.1.1 The lengths required shall be specified in
the order, and
17.1.2 No jointers are permitted unless otherwise
specified.
17.1.3 If definite lengths are not required, pipe may
be ordered in single random lengths of 16 to 22 ft (4.8
to 6.7 m) with 5% 12 to 16 ft (3.7 to 4.8 m), or in double
random lengths with a minimum average of 35 ft (10.7
m) and a minimum length of 22 ft with 5% 16 to 22 ft.
18.5 When imperfections or defects are removed by
grinding, a smooth curved surface shall be maintained,
and the wall thickness shall not be decreased below that
permitted by this specification. The outside diameter at
the point of grinding may be reduced by the amount so
removed.
18.5.1 Wall thickness measurements shall be made
with a mechanical caliper or with a properly calibrated
nondestructive testing device of appropriate accuracy. In
case of dispute, the measurement determined by use of
the mechanical caliper shall govern.
18.6 Weld repair shall be permitted only subject to
the approval of the purchaser and in accordance with
Specification A 530/A 530M.
18. Workmanship, Finish and Appearance
18.1 The pipe manufacturer shall explore a sufficient
number of visual surface imperfections to provide reasonable assurance that they have been properly evaluated
18.7 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight.
209
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-106
Not for Resale
SA-106
2004 SECTION II
NOTE 8 — Marks and abrasions are defined as cable marks, dinges,
guide marks, roll marks, ball scratches, scores, die marks, etc.
specimen as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the
specimen before testing, a retest shall be allowed. If a
specimen breaks in an inside or outside surface flaw, a
retest shall be allowed.
19. End Finish
19.1 The pipe shall be furnished to the following
practice, unless otherwise specified.
21.2 Should a crop end of a finished pipe fail in the
flattening test, one retest may be made from the failed
end. Pipe may be normalized either before or after the first
test, but pipe shall be subjected to only two normalizing
treatments.
19.1.1 NPS 11⁄2 and Smaller — All walls shall be
either plain-end square cut, or plain-end beveled at the
option of the manufacturer.
19.1.2 NPS 2 and Larger — Walls through extra
strong weights, shall be plain end-beveled.
22. Test Specimens and Test Methods
22.1 On NPS 8 and larger, specimens cut either longitudinally or transversely shall be acceptable for the tension test. On sizes smaller than NPS 8, the longitudinal
test only shall be used.
19.1.3 NPS 2 and Larger — Walls over extra strong
weights, shall be plain-end square cut.
NOTE 9 —Plain-end beveled is defined as plain-end pipe having a bevel
angle of 30°, +5° or −0°, as measured from a line drawn perpendicular to
the axis of the pipe with a root face of 1⁄16 in. ± 1⁄32 in. (1.5875 ± 0.7938
mm). Other bevel angles may be specified by agreement between the
purchaser and the manufacturer.
22.2 Test specimens for the bend test specified in
Section 11 and for the flattening tests shall consist of
sections cut from a pipe. Specimens for flattening tests
shall be smooth on the ends and free form burrs, except
when made on crop ends.
20. Number of Tests
20.1 The tensile requirements specified in Section 7
shall be determined on one length of pipe from each lot
(Note 4) of 400 lengths or fraction thereof of each size
under NPS 6, and from each lot of 200 lengths or fraction
thereof of each size NPS 6 and over.
22.3 Test specimens for the bend test specified in
11.2 and 11.3 shall be cut from one end of the pipe and,
unless otherwise specified, shall be taken in a transverse
direction. One test specimen shall be taken as close to
the outer surface as possible and another from as close
to the inner surface as possible. The specimens shall be
either 1⁄2 by 1⁄2 in. (12.7 by 12.7 mm) in section or 1 by
1
⁄2 in. (25.4 by 12.7 mm) in section with the corners
rounded to a radius not over 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) and need
not exceed 6 in. (152 mm) in length. The side of the
samples placed in tension during the bend shall be the
side closest to the inner and outer surface of the pipe
respectively.
20.2 For pipe NPS 2 and under, the bend test specified
in 11.1 shall be made on one pipe from each lot of 400
lengths or fraction thereof of each size. The bend test,
where used as permitted by 11.2 or required by 11.3,
shall be made on one end of 5% of the pipe from each
lot. For small lots, at least one pipe shall be tested.
20.3 The flattening test specified in Section 12 shall
be made on one length of pipe from each lot of 400
lengths or fraction thereof of each size over NPS 2, up
to but not including NPS 6, and from each lot of 200
lengths or fraction thereof, of each size NPS 6 and over.
22.4 All routine check tests shall be made at room
temperature.
23. Certification
23.1 When test reports are requested, in addition to
the requirements of Specification A 530/A 530M, the
producer or supplier shall furnish to the purchaser a chemical analysis report for the elements specified in Table 1.
20.4 Each length of pipe shall be subjected to the
hydrostatic test specified in Section 13.
20.5 If any test specimen shows defective machining
or develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen substituted.
24. Product Marking
24.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification A 530/A 530M, the marking shall include heat
number, the information as per Table 5, an additional
symbol “S” if the pipe conforms in any case to the supplementary requirements specified in S1 to S5, the length
21. Retests
21.1 If the percentage of elongation of any tension
test specimen is less than that prescribed in Table 1 and
any part of the fracture is more than 3⁄4 in (19.0 mm)
from the center of the gage length of a 2 in., or 50 mm,
210
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
and schedule number, and on pipe sizes larger than NPS
4 the weight shall be given. Length shall be marked in
feet and tenths of a foot, or metres to two decimal places,
depending on the units to which the material was ordered,
or other marking subject to agreement. For sizes NPS 11⁄2,
11⁄4, 1, and 3⁄4, each length shall be marked as prescribed in
Specification A 530/A 530M. These sizes shall be bundled in accordance with standard mill practice and the
total bundle footage marked on the bundle tag; individual
lengths of pipe need not be marked with footage. For
sizes less than NPS 3⁄4, all required markings may be on
the bundle tag and shall include the total footage; individual lengths of pipe need not be marked with footage. If
not marked on the bundle tag, all required marking shall
be on each length.
identification method. The purchaser may specify in the
order a specific bar coding system to be used.
25. Government Procurement
25.1 When specified in the contract, material shall be
preserved, packaged, and packed in accordance with the
requirements of MIL-STD-163. The applicable levels
shall be as specified in the contract. Marking for the
shipment of such material shall be in accordance with
Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD-129
or Fed. Std. No. 183 if continuous marking is required
for military agencies.
25.2 Inspection — Unless otherwise specified in the
contract, the producer is responsible for the performance
of all inspection and test requirements specified herein.
Except as otherwise specified in the contract, the producer
may use his own, or any other suitable facilities for the
performance of the inspection and test requirements specified herein, unless disapproved by the purchaser. The
purchaser shall have the right to perform any of the
inspections and tests set forth in this specification where
such inspections are deemed necessary to ensure that the
material conforms to the prescribed requirements.
24.2 When pipe sections are cut into shorter lengths
by a subsequent processor for resale as material, the processor shall transfer complete identifying information,
including the name or brand of the manufacturer to each
unmarked cut length, or to metal tags securely attached
to bundles of unmarked small diameter pipe. The same
material designation shall be included with the information transferred, and the processor’s name, trademark, or
brand shall be added.
26. Keywords
26.1 carbon steel pipe; seamless steel pipe; steel pipe
24.3 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements in
24.1 and 24.2, bar coding is acceptable as a supplementary
TABLE 1
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
Composition, %
Carbon, max A
Manganese
Phosphorus, max
Sulfur, max
Silicon, min
Chrome, max B
Copper, max B
Molybdenum,
max B
Nickel, max B
Vanadium, max B
Grade A
Grade B
Grade C
0.25
0.27–0.93
0.035
0.035
0.10
0.40
0.40
0.30
0.29–1.06
0.035
0.035
0.10
0.40
0.40
0.35
0.29–1.06
0.035
0.035
0.10
0.40
0.40
0.15
0.40
0.08
0.15
0.40
0.08
0.15
0.40
0.08
A
For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maximum, an increase of 0.06% manganese above the specified maximum will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%.
B
These five elements combined shall not exceed 1%.
211
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-106
Not for Resale
SA-106
2004 SECTION II
TABLE 2
TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
Tensile strength, min, psi (MPa)
Yield strength, min, psi (MPa)
Grade A
(Explanatory
Note 2)
Grade B
Grade C
48 000 (330)
30 000 (205)
60 000 (415)
35 000 (240)
70 000 (485)
40 000 (275)
LongituLongituLongitudinal
Transverse
dinal
Transverse
dinal
Transverse
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, %:
Basic minimum elongation transverse strip tests, and for all small
sizes tested in full section
When standard round 2 in. or 50 mm gage length test specimen is
used
For longitudinal strip tests
For transverse strip tests, a deduction for each 1⁄32 in. (0.8 mm)
decrease in wall thickness below 5⁄16 in. (7.9 mm) from the basic
minimum elongation of the following percentage shall be made
A
35
25
30
16.5
30
16.5
28
20
22
12
20
12
A,B
A,B
1.25 C
A,B
1.00 C
1.00 C
The minimum elongation in 2 in. (50.8 mm) shall be determined by the following equation:
e p 625 000 A0.2/U0.9
where:
e p minimum elongation in 2 in. (50.8 mm), %, rounded to the nearest 0.5%.
A p cross-sectional area of the tension test specimen, in.2, based on specified outside diameter or nominal specimen width and specified
wall thickness rounded to the nearest 0.01 in.2 If the area thus calculated is greater than 0.75 in.2 shall be used, and
U p specified tensile strength, psi.
B
C
See Table 3 for minimum elongation values for various size tension specimens and grades.
The following table gives the computed minimum values:
Wall Thickness
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, %
in.
mm
Grade A, Transverse
Grades B and C, Transverse
⁄16 (0.312)
⁄32 (0.281)
1
⁄4 (0.250)
7
⁄32 (0.219)
3
⁄16 (0.188)
5
⁄32 (0.156)
1
⁄8 (0.125)
3
⁄32 (0.094)
1
⁄16 (0.062)
7.9
7.1
6.4
5.6
4.8
4.0
3.2
2.4
1.6
25.00
23.75
22.50
...
...
...
...
...
...
16.50
15.50
14.50
...
...
...
...
...
...
5
9
NOTE: The above table gives the computed minimum elongation values for each 1⁄32 in. (0.8 mm) decrease in wall thickness. Where the
wall thickness lies between two values shown above, the minimum elongation value is determined by the following equation:
Grade
Direction of Test
Equation
A
B and C
Transverse
Transverse
E p 40 t + 12.50
E p 32 t + 6.40
where:
E p elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, %, and
t p actual thickness of specimen, in.
212
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-106
TABLE 3
ELONGATION VALUES
Elongation in 2 in. min., Specified
Tensile Strength, psi
Tension Test Specimen Wall Thickness, in. [Note (2)]
Area, in.2
[Note (1)]
1
⁄2 in. Specimen
3
1
Grade A
Grade B
Grade C
⁄4 in. Specimen
1 in. Specimen
1 ⁄2 in. Specimen
48 000
60 000
70 000
≥0.75
0.74
0.73
0.72
0.71
≥1.491
1.470–1.490
1.451–1.469
1.430–1.450
1.411–1.429
≥0.994
0.988–0.993
0.967–0.979
0.954–0.966
0.941–0.953
≥0.746
0.735–0.745
0.726–0.734
0.715–0.725
0.706–0.714
≥0.497
0.490–0.496
0.484–0.489
0.477–0.483
0.471–0.476
36.0
36.0
36.0
36.0
35.5
29.5
29.5
29.5
29.5
29.0
25.5
25.5
25.5
25.5
25.5
0.70
0.69
0.68
0.67
0.66
1.390–1.410
1.371–1.389
1.350–1.370
1.331–1.349
1.310–1.330
0.927–0.940
0.914–0.926
0.900–0.913
0.887–0.899
0.874–0.886
0.695–0.705
0.686–0.694
0.675–0.685
0.666–0.674
0.655–0.665
0.464–0.470
0.457–0.463
0.450–0.456
0.444–0.449
0.437–0.443
35.5
35.5
35.5
35.5
35.0
29.0
29.0
29.0
29.0
29.0
25.5
25.5
25.0
25.0
25.0
0.65
0.64
0.63
0.62
0.61
1.291–1.309
1.270–1.290
1.251–1.269
1.230–1.250
1.211–1.229
0.861–0.873
0.847–0.860
0.834–0.846
0.820–0.833
0.807–0.819
0.646–0.654
0.635–0.645
0.626–0.634
0.615–0.625
0.606–0.614
0.431–0.436
0.424–0.430
0.417–0.423
0.410–0.416
0.404–0.409
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
34.5
28.5
28.5
28.5
28.5
28.5
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
24.5
0.60
0.59
0.58
0.57
0.56
1.190–1.210
1.171–1.189
1.150–1.170
1.131–1.149
1.110–1.130
0.794–0.806
0.781–0.793
0.767–0.780
0.754–0.766
0.740–0.753
0.595–0.605
0.586–0.594
0.575–0.585
0.566–0.574
0.555–0.565
0.397–0.403
0.391–0.396
0.384–0.390
0.377–0.383
0.370–0.376
34.5
34.5
34.5
34.0
34.0
28.5
28.0
28.0
28.0
28.0
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.5
0.55
0.54
0.53
0.52
0.51
1.091–1.109
1.070–1.090
1.051–1.069
1.030–1.050
1.011–1.029
0.727–0.739
0.714–0.726
0.701–0.713
0.687–0.700
0.674–0.686
0.546–0.554
0.535–0.545
0.526–0.534
0.515–0.525
0.506–0.514
0.364–0.369
0.357–0.363
0.351–0.356
0.344–0.350
0.337–0.343
34.0
34.0
33.5
33.5
33.5
28.0
27.5
27.5
27.5
27.5
24.9
24.0
24.0
24.0
24.0
0.50
0.49
0.48
0.47
0.46
0.990–1.010
0.971–0.989
0.950–0.970
0.931–0.949
0.910–0.930
0.660–0.673
0.647–0.659
0.634–0.646
0.621–0.633
0.607–0.620
0.495–0.505
0.486–0.494
0.475–0.485
0.466–0.474
0.455–0.465
0.330–0.336
0.324–0.329
0.317–0.323
0.311–0.316
0.304–0.310
33.5
33.0
33.0
33.0
33.0
27.0
27.0
27.0
27.0
27.0
23.5
23.5
23.5
23.5
23.5
0.45
0.44
0.43
0.42
0.41
0.891–0.909
0.870–0.890
0.851–0.869
0.830–0.850
0.811–0.829
0.594–0.606
0.580–0.593
0.567–0.579
0.554–0.566
0.541–0.553
0.446–0.454
0.435–0.445
0.426–0.434
0.415–0.425
0.406–0.414
0.297–0.303
0.290–0.296
0.284–0.289
0.277–0.283
0.271–0.276
32.5
32.5
32.5
32.0
32.0
26.5
26.5
26.5
26.5
26.0
23.0
23.0
23.0
23.0
23.0
0.40
0.39
0.38
0.37
0.36
0.790–0.810
0.771–0.789
0.750–0.770
0.731–0.749
0.710–0.730
0.527–0.540
0.514–0.526
0.500–0.513
0.487–0.499
0.474–0.486
0.395–0.405
0.386–0.394
0.375–0.385
0.366–0.374
0.355–0.365
0.264–0.270
0.257–0.263
0.250–0.256
0.244–0.249
0.237–0.243
32.0
31.5
31.5
31.5
31.0
26.0
26.0
26.0
25.5
25.5
22.5
22.5
22.5
22.5
22.0
213
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-106
2004 SECTION II
TABLE 3
ELONGATION VALUES (CONT’D)
Elongation in 2 in. min., Specified
Tensile Strength, psi
Tension Test Specimen Wall Thickness, in. [Note (2)]
Area, in.2
[Note (1)]
1
⁄2 in. Specimen
3
1
Grade A
Grade B
Grade C
⁄4 in. Specimen
1 in. Specimen
1 ⁄2 in. Specimen
48 000
60 000
70 000
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
0.35
0.34
0.33
0.32
0.31
0.691–0.709
0.670–0.690
0.651–0.669
0.630–0.650
0.611–0.629
0.461–0.473
0.447–0.460
0.434–0.446
0.420–0.433
0.407–0.419
0.346–0.354
0.335–0.345
0.326–0.334
0.315–0.325
0.306–0.314
0.231–0.236
0.224–0.230
0.217–0.223
0.210–0.216
0.204–0.209
31.0
31.0
30.5
30.5
30.5
25.5
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
22.0
22.0
22.0
21.5
21.5
0.30
0.29
0.28
0.27
0.26
0.590–0.610
0.571–0.589
0.550–0.570
0.531–0.549
0.510–0.530
0.394–0.406
0.381–0.393
0.367–0.380
0.354–0.366
0.340–0.353
0.295–0.305
0.286–0.294
0.275–0.285
0.266–0.274
0.255–0.265
0.197–0.203
0.191–0.196
0.184–0.190
0.177–0.183
0.170–0.176
30.0
30.0
29.5
29.5
29.0
24.5
24.5
24.5
24.0
24.0
21.5
21.5
21.0
21.0
21.0
0.25
0.24
0.23
0.22
0.21
0.491–0.509
0.470–0.490
0.451–0.469
0.430–0.450
0.411–0.429
0.327–0.339
0.314–0.326
0.301–0.313
0.287–0.300
0.274–0.286
0.246–0.254
0.235–0.245
0.226–0.234
0.215–0.225
0.206–0.214
0.164–0.169
0.157–0.163
0.151–0.156
0.144–0.150
0.137–0.143
29.0
29.0
28.5
28.5
28.0
23.5
23.5
23.5
23.0
23.0
20.5
20.5
20.5
20.0
20.0
0.20
0.19
0.18
0.17
0.16
0.390–0.410
0.371–0.389
0.350–0.370
0.331–0.349
0.310–0.330
0.260–0.273
0.247–0.259
0.234–0.246
0.221–0.233
0.207–0.220
0.195–0.205
0.186–0.194
0.175–0.185
0.166–0.174
0.155–0.165
0.130–0.136
0.124–0.129
0.117–0.123
0.111–0.116
0.104–0.110
27.5
27.5
27.0
27.0
26.5
22.5
22.5
22.0
22.0
21.5
19.5
19.5
19.5
19.0
19.0
0.15
0.14
0.13
0.12
0.11
0.291–0.309
0.270–0.290
0.251–0.269
0.230–0.250
0.211–0.229
0.194–0.206
0.180–0.193
0.167–0.179
0.154–0.166
0.141–0.153
0.146–0.154
0.135–0.145
0.126–0.134
0.115–0.125
0.106–0.114
0.097–0.103
0.091–0.096
0.084–0.090
0.077–0.083
0.071–0.076
26.0
26.0
25.5
25.0
24.5
21.5
21.0
21.0
20.5
20.0
18.5
18.5
18.0
18.0
17.5
0.10
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.190–0.210
0.171–0.189
0.150–0.170
0.131–0.149
0.110–0.130
0.127–0.140
0.114–0.126
0.100–0.113
0.087–0.099
0.074–0.086
0.095–0.105
0.086–0.094
0.075–0.085
0.066–0.074
0.055–0.065
0.064–0.070
0.057–0.063
0.050–0.056
0.044–0.049
0.037–0.043
24.0
23.5
23.0
22.5
22.0
19.5
19.5
19.0
18.5
18.0
17.0
17.0
16.5
16.0
15.5
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
≤0.01
0.091–0.109
0.070–0.090
0.051–0.069
0.030–0.050
≤0.029
0.061–0.073
0.047–0.060
0.034–0.046
0.020–0.033
≤0.019
0.046–0.054
0.035–0.045
0.026–0.034
0.015–0.025
≤0.014
0.031–0.036
0.024–0.030
0.017–0.023
0.010–0.016
≤0.009
21.0
20.0
19.0
17.5
15.0
17.0
16.5
15.5
14.5
12.5
15.0
14.5
13.5
12.5
11.0
NOTES:
(1) 1 in.2 p 645.16 mm2.
(2) 1 in. p 25.4 mm.
214
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE 4
VARIATIONS IN OUTSIDE DIAMETER
TABLE 5
MARKING
Permissible Variations in Outside
Diameter
Over
NPS Designator
1
⁄8 to 11⁄2, incl
Over 11⁄2 to 4, incl
Over 4 to 8, incl
Over 8 to 18, incl
Over 18 to 26, incl
Over 26 to 34, incl
Over 34 to 48, incl
1
⁄64
⁄32
1
⁄16
3
⁄32
1
⁄8
5
⁄32
3
⁄16
1
Under
in.
mm
(0.015)
(0.031)
(0.062)
(0.093)
(0.125)
(0.156)
(0.187)
0.40
0.79
1.59
2.38
3.18
3.97
4.76
1
⁄64
⁄32
1
⁄32
1
⁄32
1
⁄32
1
⁄32
1
⁄32
1
in.
mm
(0.015)
(0.031)
(0.031)
(0.031)
(0.031)
(0.031)
(0.031)
0.40
0.79
0.79
0.79
0.79
0.79
0.79
Hydro
NDE
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
215
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-106
Not for Resale
Marking
Test Pressure
NDE
NH
Test Pressure/NDE
SA-106
2004 SECTION II
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
One or more of the following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified
in the purchase order. The purchaser may specify a different frequency of test or analysis
than is provided in the supplementary requirement. Subject to agreement between the
purchaser and manufacturer, retest and retreatment provisions of these supplementary
requirements may also be modified.
S1. Product Analysis
S1.1 Product analysis shall be made on each length of
pipe. Individual lengths failing to conform to the chemical
composition requirements shall be rejected.
material free form injurious laminations, cracks, and similar objectionable defects. If this supplementary requirement is specified, the number of tests per pipe required
shall also be specified. If a specimen from any length
shows objectionable defects, the length shall be rejected,
subject to removal of the defective end and subsequent
retests indicating the remainder of the length to be sound
and reasonably uniform material.
S2. Transverse Tension Test
S2.1 A transverse tension test shall be made on a
specimen from one end or both ends of each pipe NPS
8 and over. If this supplementary requirement is specified,
the number of tests per pipe shall also be specified. If a
specimen from any length fails to meet the required tensile
properties (tensile, yield, and elongation), that length shall
be rejected subject to retreatment in accordance with
Specification A 530/A 530M and satisfactory retest.
S5. Carbon Equivalent
S5.1 The steel shall conform to a carbon equivalent
(CE) of 0.50 maximum as determined by the following
formula:
CE p %C +
%Mn %Cr + %Mo + %V %Ni + %Cu
+
+
6
5
15
S5.2 A lower CE maximum may be agreed upon
between the purchaser and the producer.
S3. Flattening Test
S3.1 The flattening test of Specification
A 530/A 530M shall be made on a specimen from one
end or both ends of each pipe. Crop ends may be used.
If this supplementary requirement is specified, the number
of tests per pipe shall also be specified. If a specimen
from any length fails because of lack of ductility prior
to satisfactory completion of the first step of the flattening
test requirement, that pipe shall be rejected subject to
retreatment in accordance with Specification
A 530/A 530M and satisfactory retest. If a specimen from
any length of pipe fails because of a lack of soundness,
that length shall be rejected, unless subsequent retesting
indicates that the remaining length is sound.
S5.3 The CE shall be reported on the test report.
S6. Heat Treated Test Specimens
S6.1 At the request of the purchaser, one tensile test
shall be performed by the manufacturer on a test specimen
from each heat of steel furnished which has been either
stress relieved at 1250°F or normalized at 1650°F, as
specified by the purchaser. Other stress relief or annealing
temperatures, as appropriate to the analysis, may be specified by agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer. The results of this test shall meet the
requirements of Table 2.
S7. Internal Cleanliness — Government Orders
S7.1 The internal surface of hot finished ferritic steel
pipe and tube shall be manufactured to a free of scale
condition equivalent to the visual standard listed in SSPCSP6. Cleaning shall be performed in accordance with a
written procedure that has been shown to be effective.
This procedure shall be available for audit.
S4. Metal Structure and Etching Test
S4.1 The steel shall be homogeneous as shown by
etching tests conducted in accordance with the appropriate sections of Method E 381. Etching tests shall be
made on a cross section from one end or both ends of
each pipe and shall show sound and reasonable uniform
216
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-106
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. CALCULATED H VALUES FOR
SEAMLESS PIPE
X1.1 Table XI.1 and X1.2 lists values for H to be
used for the test of Section 12.
TABLE X1.1
CALCULATED “H” VALUES FOR SEAMLESS PIPE
Inch-Pound Units
NPS
Designator
Outside
Diameter,
in.
Wall
Thickness,
in.
Distance, in inches,
Between Plates
“H” by Equation:
(1 + e) t
Hp−
e + t/D
Schedule
Number
Grade
A
Grades
B&C
21⁄2
2.875
0.203
0.276
0.375
40
80
160
1.456
1.694
1.925
1.545
1.779
2.002
3
3.500
0.216
0.300
0.438
40
80
160
1.646
1.955
2.306
1.755
2.062
2.398
31⁄2
4.000
0.226
0.318
40
80
1.788
2.153
1.912
2.276
4
4.500
0.237
0.337
0.438
0.531
40
80
120
160
1.929
2.350
2.687
2.896
2.067
2.489
2.818
3.022
5
5.563
0.258
0.375
0.500
0.625
40
80
120
160
2.205
2.747
3.179
3.509
2.372
2.920
3.346
3.667
6
6.625
2.80
0.432
0.562
0.719
40
80
120
160
2.473
3.213
3.682
4.116
2.669
3.419
3.884
4.307
0.250
0.277
0.322
0.406
0.500
0.593
0.719
0.812
0.906
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
2.477
2.668
2.964
3.451
3.914
4.305
4.750
5.036
5.288
2.702
2.902
3.210
3.711
4.181
4.573
5.013
5.293
5.538
8
8.625
10
10.750
0.250
0.307
0.365
0.500
0.593
0.719
0.843
1.000
1.125
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
2.615
3.054
3.459
4.268
4.738
5.320
5.747
6.242
6.580
2.868
3.333
3.757
4.592
5.070
5.621
6.077
6.564
6.892
12
12.750
0.250
0.330
0.406
0.562
0.687
0.843
1.000
1.125
1.312
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
2.711
3.366
3.921
4.892
5.542
6.231
6.817
7.222
7.747
2.985
3.683
4.266
5.271
5.934
6.627
7.209
7.607
8.119
Outside
Diameter,
in.
Wall
Thickness,
in.
14
14.000
16
16.000
18
18.000
20
20.000
24
24.000
0.250
0.312
0.375
0.438
0.593
0.750
0.937
1.093
1.250
1.406
0.250
0.312
0.375
0.500
0.656
0.843
1.031
1.218
1.438
1.593
0.250
0.312
0.438
0.562
0.750
0.937
1.156
1.375
1.562
1.781
0.250
0.375
0.500
0.593
0.812
1.031
1.281
1.500
1.750
1.968
0.250
0.375
0.562
0.687
0.968
1.218
1.531
1.812
2.062
2.343
NPS
Designator
217
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Distance, in inches,
Between Plates
“H” by Equation:
(1 + e) t
Hp−
e + t/D
Schedule
Number
Grade
A
Grades
B&C
10
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
10
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
10
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
10
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
10
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
2.759
3.294
3.792
4.669
5.234
6.064
6.887
7.479
7.974
8.416
2.284
3.387
3.915
4.854
5.855
6.861
7.709
8.426
9.141
9.579
2.876
3.462
4.535
5.457
6.656
7.663
8.657
9.495
10.115
10.665
2.919
4.101
5.143
5.841
7.272
8.464
9.601
10.452
11.284
11.913
2.986
4.236
5.869
6.831
8.690
10.061
11.449
12.585
13.424
14.248
3.045
3.617
4.146
5.125
5.647
6.494
7.322
7.902
8.397
8.827
3.124
3.730
4.294
5.284
6.324
7.352
8.206
8.919
9.625
10.050
3.189
3.823
4.963
5.941
7.185
8.214
9.216
10.043
10.660
11.198
3.242
4.521
5.632
6.367
7.856
9.072
10.221
11.069
11.889
12.504
3.326
4.686
6.437
7.454
9.390
10.793
12.244
13.332
14.150
14.958
SA-106
2004 SECTION II
TABLE X1.2
CALCULATED “H” VALUES FOR SEAMLESS PIPE
SI Units
Distance, in mm,
Between Plates
“H” by Equation:
(1 + e) t
Hp−
e + t/D
Outside
Diameter,
mm
Wall
Thickness,
mm
Schedule
Number
21⁄2
73.0
5.16
7.01
9.52
40
80
160
37.0
43.0
48.9
39.2
45.2
50.8
3
88.9
5.49
7.62
11.13
40
80
160
41.8
49.6
58.6
44.6
52.4
60.9
31⁄2
101.6
5.74
8.08
40
80
45.4
54.7
48.6
57.8
4
114.3
6.02
8.56
11.13
13.49
40
80
120
160
49.0
59.7
67.0
73.6
52.5
63.2
71.6
76.8
5
141.3
6.55
9.52
12.70
15.88
40
80
120
160
56.0
69.8
80.8
89.1
60.2
74.2
85.0
93.1
6
168.3
7.11
10.97
14.27
18.24
40
80
120
160
62.8
81.6
93.5
104.6
67.8
86.8
98.6
109.4
8
219.1
6.35
7.04
8.18
10.31
12.70
15.06
18.24
20.62
23.01
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
63.0
67.8
75.3
87.7
99.4
109.4
120.6
127.9
134.3
68.6
73.7
81.5
94.3
106.2
116.2
127.3
134.4
140.7
6.35
7.80
9.27
12.70
15.06
18.24
21.41
25.40
28.58
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
66.4
77.6
87.9
108.4
120.4
135.1
146.0
158.6
167.1
72.8
84.7
95.4
116.6
128.8
142.8
154.4
166.7
175.1
6.35
8.38
10.31
14.27
17.35
21.41
25.40
28.58
33.32
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
68.9
85.5
99.6
124.3
140.8
158.3
173.2
183.4
196.8
75.8
93.6
108.4
133.9
150.7
168.3
183.1
193.2
206.2
NPS
Designator
10
12
273.0
323.8
Grade
A
Grades
B&C
NPS
Designator
Outside
Diameter,
mm
14
Distance, in mm
Between Plates
“H” by Equation:
(1 + e) t
Hp−
e + t/D
Wall
Thickness,
mm
Schedule
Number
Grade
A
355.6
6.35
7.92
9.52
11.13
15.06
19.05
23.80
27.76
31.75
35.71
10
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
70.1
83.7
96.3
118.6
132.9
154.0
174.9
190.0
202.5
213.8
77.3
91.8
105.3
130.2
143.4
165.0
186.0
200.7
213.3
224.2
16
406.4
6.35
7.92
9.52
12.70
16.66
21.41
26.19
30.94
36.53
40.46
10
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
71.7
89.0
99.4
123.3
148.7
174.3
195.8
214.0
232.2
243.3
79.4
94.7
109.1
143.2
160.6
186.7
208.4
226.6
244.5
255.3
18
457.2
6.35
7.92
11.13
14.27
19.05
23.80
29.36
34.92
39.67
45.24
10
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
73.0
87.9
115.2
139.5
169.1
194.6
219.9
241.2
256.9
270.9
81.0
97.1
126.1
150.9
182.5
208.6
234.1
255.1
270.7
284.4
20
508.0
6.35
9.52
12.70
15.06
20.62
26.19
32.54
38.10
44.45
49.99
10
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
74.1
104.2
130.6
148.4
184.7
215.0
243.9
265.5
286.6
302.6
82.4
114.8
143.0
161.7
199.5
230.4
259.6
281.2
302.0
317.6
24
609.6
6.35
9.52
14.27
17.35
24.59
30.94
38.89
46.02
52.37
59.51
10
20
30
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
75.8
107.6
149.1
173.5
220.7
255.6
290.8
319.7
341.0
361.9
84.5
119.0
163.5
189.3
238.5
274.1
311.0
338.6
359.4
379.9
218
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Grades
B&C
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-106
X2. MINIMUM WALL THICKNESSES
X2.1 Table X2.1 lists minimum wall thicknesses for
nominal pipe wall thickness.
TABLE X2.1
MINIMUM WALL THICKNESSES ON INSPECTION FOR NOMINAL (AVERAGE) PIPE WALL THICKNESS
Nominal
(Average)
Thickness
(tn)
Minimum
Thickness
on Inspection
(tm)
Nominal
(Average)
Thickness
(tn)
Minimum
Thickness
on Inspection
(tm)
Nominal
(Average)
Thickness
(tn)
Minimum
Thickness
on Inspection
(tm)
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
in.
mm
0.068
0.083
0.088
0.091
0.095
0.109
0.113
0.119
0.125
0.126
0.133
0.140
0.141
0.145
0.147
0.154
0.156
0.172
0.179
0.188
0.191
0.200
0.203
0.210
0.216
0.218
0.219
0.226
0.237
0.250
0.258
0.276
0.277
0.279
0.280
1.73
2.11
2.24
2.31
2.41
2.77
2.87
3.02
3.18
3.20
3.38
3.56
3.58
3.68
3.73
3.91
3.96
4.37
4.55
4.78
4.85
5.08
5.16
5.33
5.49
5.54
5.56
5.74
6.02
6.35
6.55
7.01
7.04
7.09
7.11
0.060
0.073
0.077
0.080
0.083
0.095
0.099
0.104
0.109
0.110
0.116
0.122
0.123
0.127
0.129
0.135
0.136
0.150
0.157
0.164
0.167
0.175
0.178
0.184
0.189
0.191
0.192
0.198
0.207
0.219
0.226
0.242
0.242
0.244
0.245
1.52
1.85
1.96
2.03
2.11
2.41
2.51
2.64
2.77
2.79
2.95
3.10
3.12
3.23
3.28
3.43
3.45
3.81
3.99
4.17
4.24
4.44
4.52
4.67
4.80
4.85
4.88
5.03
5.26
5.56
5.74
6.15
6.15
6.19
6.22
0.281
0.294
0.300
0.307
0.308
0.312
0.318
0.322
0.330
0.337
0.344
0.358
0.365
0.375
0.382
0.400
0.406
0.432
0.436
0.438
0.469
0.500
0.531
0.552
0.562
0.594
0.600
0.625
0.656
0.674
0.688
0.719
0.750
0.812
0.844
7.14
7.47
7.62
7.80
7.82
7.92
8.07
8.18
8.38
8.56
8.74
9.09
9.27
9.52
9.70
10.16
10.31
10.97
11.07
11.12
11.91
12.70
13.49
14.02
14.27
15.09
15.24
15.88
16.66
17.12
17.48
18.26
19.05
20.62
21.44
0.246
0.257
0.262
0.269
0.270
0.273
0.278
0.282
0.289
0.295
0.301
0.313
0.319
0.328
0.334
0.350
0.355
0.378
0.382
0.383
0.410
0.438
0.465
0.483
0.492
0.520
0.525
0.547
0.574
0.590
0.602
0.629
0.656
0.710
0.739
6.25
6.53
6.65
6.83
6.86
6.93
7.06
7.16
7.34
7.49
7.64
7.95
8.10
8.33
8.48
8.89
9.02
9.60
9.70
9.73
10.41
11.13
11.81
12.27
12.50
13.21
13.34
13.89
14.58
14.99
15.29
15.98
16.66
18.03
18.77
0.864
0.875
0.906
0.938
0.968
1.000
1.031
1.062
1.094
1.125
1.156
1.219
1.250
1.281
1.312
1.375
1.406
1.438
1.500
1.531
1.562
1.594
1.635
1.750
1.781
1.812
1.875
1.969
2.000
2.062
2.125
2.200
2.344
2.500
21.94
22.22
23.01
23.82
24.59
25.40
26.19
26.97
27.79
28.58
29.36
30.96
31.75
32.54
33.32
34.92
35.71
36.53
38.10
38.89
39.67
40.49
41.53
44.45
45.24
46.02
47.62
50.01
50.80
52.37
53.98
55.88
59.54
63.50
0.756
0.766
0.793
0.821
0.847
0.875
0.902
0.929
0.957
0.984
1.012
1.066
1.094
1.121
1.148
1.203
1.230
1.258
1.312
1.340
1.367
1.395
1.431
1.531
1.558
1.586
1.641
1.723
1.750
1.804
1.859
1.925
2.051
2.188
19.20
19.46
20.14
20.85
21.51
22.22
22.91
23.60
24.31
24.99
25.70
27.08
27.79
28.47
29.16
30.56
31.24
31.95
33.32
34.04
34.72
35.43
36.35
38.89
39.57
40.28
41.68
43.76
44.45
45.82
47.22
48.90
52.10
55.58
NOTE 1: The following equation, upon which this table is based, may be applied to calculate minimum wall thickness from nominal (average) wall thickness:
tn ⴛ 0.875 p tm
where:
tn p nominal (average) wall thickness, in. and
tm p minimum wall thickness, in.
The wall thickness is expressed to three decimal places, the fourth decimal place being carried forward or dropped, in accordance with
Practice E 29.
NOTE 2: This table covers some wall thicknesses associated with standard pipe sizes but is not meant to imply that these are the only thicknesses obtainable under this specification.
219
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
220
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SPECIFICATION FOR PIPE, STEEL, ELECTRICFUSION (ARC)-WELDED (SIZES NPS 16 AND OVER)
SA-134
[Identical with ASTM Specification A 134-96 (R01) except that the following additional requirement applies.]
All products furnished under this SA specification are intended for application under the rules for ASME Section
III for Class III piping. Furnishing of such products is limited to manufacturers who hold the appropriate ASME
Code Symbol Stamp. Weld procedures, welder, and welding machine operators shall be qualified in accordance
with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX. The product shall meet all applicable requirements
of Class III Piping including those requirements pertaining to heat treatment and butt welds. The plate used to
fabricate the pipe shall conform to SA-283 or SA-285. Authorized inspection at the point of manufacture, and
application of the appropriate Code Symbol Stamp is required.
The applicable ASME Partial Data Report Form, signed by an Authorized Inspector, and a certified mill test
report shall be furnished for each lot of pipe. The term “lot” applies to all pipe of the same mill heat of material
and wall thickness which is heat treated in one furnace charge. For pipe which is not heat treated, or which is
heat treated in a continuous furnace, a lot shall consist of each 200 ft (61 m) or fraction thereof of all pipe of
the same mill heat of material and wall thickness, subjected to the same heat treatment. For pipe which is heat
treated in a batch-type furnace which is automatically controlled within a 50°F range and equipped with recording
pyrometers so that the heating records are available, a lot may be defined the same as for continuous furnaces.
Each length of pipe shall be marked in such a manner as to identify each such piece with the lot and the certified
mill test report.
1.
Scope
1.1 This specification covers electric-fusion (arc)welded straight seam or spiral seam steel pipe NPS 16
and over in diameter (inside or outside as specified by
purchaser), with wall thicknesses up to 3⁄4 in. (19.0 mm),
inclusive. Pipe having other dimensions may be furnished
provided such pipe complies with all other requirements
of this specification.
1.3 The following precautionary caveat pertains specifically to Section 5 of this specification. This standard
does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, if
any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the
user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and
health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2.
Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
A 36/A 36M Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
A 283/A 283M Specification for Low and Intermediate
Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates
A 285/A 285M Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates,
Carbon Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile Strength
A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
A 570/A 570M Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality
NOTE 1 — Acceptability for many services may be controlled by codes
or standards such as those published by the American National Standards
Institute and American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
NOTE 2 — For testing methods not specifically covered in this specification, reference can be made to Test Methods and Definitions A 370,
with particular reference to Annex A 2 on Steel Tubular Products.
NOTE 3 — A comprehensive listing of standardized pipe dimensions
is contained in ANSI B 36.10.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be
regarded as the standard.
NOTE 4 — The dimensionless designator NPS (nominal pipe size) has
been substituted in this standard for such traditional terms as “nominal
diameter”, “size”, and “nominal size”.
2.2 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX Welding Qualifications
221
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
04
SA-134
2004 SECTION II
6.
Number of Production Weld Tests
6.1 One weld test specimen specified in Section 8
shall be made from each lot of 3000 ft (900 m) of pipe
or fraction thereof of each size and wall thickness.
2.3 American National Standards Institute Standard:
B 16.25 Buttwelding Ends
B 36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
6.2 If any test specimen shows defective machining
or develops flaws not associated with the welding, it may
be discarded and another specimen substituted.
3.
Ordering Information
3.1 Orders for material under this specification should
include the following, as required, to describe the desired
material adequately:
6.3 Each length of pipe shall be subjected to the
hydrostatic test specified in Section 11, unless otherwise
specified in 11.3.
3.1.1 Quantity (feet, meters, or number of lengths),
3.1.2 Name of material (electric-fusion-(arc)
welded pipe),
7.
Retests
7.1 If any specimen tested in accordance with Section
10 fails to meet the requirements, retests of two additional
specimens from the same lot of pipe shall be made, each
of which shall meet the requirements specified. If any
of the retests fail to conform to the requirements, test
specimens may be taken from each untested pipe length
at the manufacturer’s option. Each specimen shall meet
the requirements specified, or that pipe shall be rejected.
3.1.3 Grade (Section 4),
3.1.4 Size (inside or outside diameter and nominal
wall thickness),
3.1.5 Length (specified or random),
3.1.6 Specific straightness requirements (see 12.3),
3.1.7 End finish (Section 15),
3.1.8 Hydrostatic test pressure (Section 11),
3.1.9 ASTM designation, and
8.
Material
4.1 The steel from which the pipe is made shall conform to Specifications A 283/A 283M, A 285/A 285M,
A 570, or A 36/A 36M or to other ASTM specifications
for equally suitable weldable material, as specified: For
purposes of marking and certification, when required, the
pipe grade of material shall be established by the A xxx
plate specification designation and plate grade, when
applicable.
Test Specimens of Production Welds
8.1 The weld-test specimens for the reduced-section
tension test shall be taken perpendicularly across the weld
and from the end of the pipe or alternatively, from flat
test pieces of material conforming to the requirements in
the specifications used in the manufacturer of the pipe.
The alternative weld-test specimens shall be welded with
the same procedure and by the same operator and equipment, and in sequence with the welding of the longitudinal
joints in the pipe. The test pieces shall have the weld
approximately in the middle of the specimen. The specimens shall be straightened cold, and shall be tested at
room temperature.
5.
8.2 Reduced-section tension-test specimens shall be
prepared in accordance with Fig. number 21 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
3.1.10 End use of material.
4.
Manufacture
5.1 The longitudinal edges of the steel shall be shaped
to give the most satisfactory results by the particular
welding process employed. The steel shall then be properly formed and may be tacked preparatory to welding.
The weld shall be made by automatic means (except tack
welds) and shall be of reasonably uniform width and
height for the entire length of the pipe. By agreement
between the purchaser and the manufacturer, manual
welding by qualified procedure and welders may be used
as an equal alternate under this specification.
9.
Qualification of Welding Procedure
9.1 The welding procedure shall be qualified in accordance with the American Welding Society Standard Qualification Procedure or ASME Section IX of the Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser using the tests and test values
specified in 9.2 and 9.3. Thicknesses less than 3⁄8 in. (10
mm) shall be qualified for each wall thickness of pipe
manufactured. Thicknesses 3⁄8 to 3⁄4 in. (10 mm to 19.0
mm), inclusive, shall be qualified in 3 ⁄8 -in. (10-mm)
thickness.
5.2 All longitudinal seams, spiral seams, and shop
girth seams shall be butt-welded.
222
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
9.2 Two reduced-section tension specimens (transverse weld) made in accordance with Fig. number 21
of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, with the weld
reinforcement removed, shall show a tensile strength not
less than 100% of the minimum specified tensile strength
of the base material used.
SA-134
11.2 Test pressure shall be held for not less than 5 s,
or for a longer time as agreed upon between the purchaser
and the manufacturer.
NOTE 7 — When agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer and so stated on the order, pipe may be tested to one and one
half times the specified working pressure, except that the maximum
test pressure shall not exceed 2800 psi (19 MPa) nor shall the maximum
fiber stress exceed 85% of specified minimum yield point of steel or
to a fiber stress that does not exceed 85% of the specified minimum
yield point of the steel or 2800-psi (19-MPa) test pressure.
9.3 Two face-bend test specimens shall be prepared
in accordance with Fig. number 2 (a) of Test Methods
and Definitions A 370 and shall withstand being bent
180° in a jig substantially in accordance with Fig. 30 of
Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The bend test shall
be acceptable if no cracks or other defects exceeding 1⁄8
in. (3.2 mm) in any direction be present in the weld metal
or between the weld and the pipe metal after bending.
Cracks that originate along the edges of the specimens
during testing and that are less than 1⁄4 in. (6.3 mm) in
any direction, shall not be considered.
11.3 When specified in the order, pipe may be furnished without hydrostatic testing and each length so
furnished shall include the mandatory marking of the
letters “NH”. Additionally, the certification, when
required, shall state “Not Hydrostatically Tested” and the
specification number and material grade, as shown on
the certification, shall be followed by the letters “NH”.
12.
Permissible Variations in Weights and
Dimensions
12.1 Thickness and Weight — The wall thickness and
weight for welded pipe under this specification shall be
governed by the requirements of the specifications to
which the steel was ordered.
10. Tensile Properties of Production Welds
10.1 Reduced-section tension test specimens required
in Section 8 taken perpendicularly across the weld with
the weld reinforcement removed, shall show a tensile
strength not less than 95% of the specified minimum
strength of the steel. At the manufacturer’s option, the
test may be made without removing the weld reinforcement, in which case the tensile strength shall be not less
than the specified minimum tensile strength for the grade
of steel used.
12.2 Circumference — The outside circumference of
the pipe shall not vary more than ±0.5% from the nominal
outside circumference based upon the diameter specified,
except that the circumference at ends shall be sized, if
necessary, to meet the requirements of Section 14.
12.3 Straightness — Finished pipe shall be commercially straight. When specific straightness requirements
are desired, the order should so state, and the tolerances
shall be a matter of agreement between the purchaser and
the manufacturer.
11. Hydrostatic Test (Note 5)
11.1 Each length of pipe shall be tested by the manufacturer to a hydrostatic pressure that will produce in the
pipe wall a stress of 60% of the specified minimum yield
point of the steel used at room temperature. The pressure
shall be determined by the following equation:
12.4 Ovality — Out-of-roundness — The difference
between major and minor outside diameter shall not
exceed 1%. Closer tolerances may be established by
agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
Where the D/T (outside diameter/wall thickness) is over
120, internal bracing should be utilized to achieve sizing
of ends and ovality shall be by agreement between the
manufacturer and purchaser.
P p 2St/D
where:
P p minimum hydrostatic test pressure, psi (Note 6)
(not to exceed 2800 psi (19 MPa)),
S p 0.60 times the minimum specified yield point of
the steel used, psi (MPa),
t p specified wall thickness, in. (mm), and
D p specified outside diameter, in. (mm).
13. Lengths
13.1 Pipe lengths shall be supplied in accordance with
the following regular practice:
13.1.1 The lengths shall be as specified on the order
with a tolerance of ±1⁄2 in. (13 mm), except that the shorter
lengths from which test coupons have been cut may also
be shipped.
NOTE 5 — A hydrostatic sizing operation is not to be considered a
hydrostatic test or a substitute for it.
NOTE 6 — When the diameter and wall thickness of pipe are such
that the capacity limits of testing equipment are exceeded by these
requirements, the test pressures may be reduced by agreement between
the purchaser and the manufacturer.
223
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-134
2004 SECTION II
13.1.2 When random lengths are specified, pipe
shall be furnished in lengths having a minimum average
of 29 ft (9 m) with a minimum length of 20 ft (6 m), but
not more than 5% may be under 25 ft (8 m).
16. Inspection
16.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall
have entry at all times while work on the contract of the
purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufacturer’s works that concern the manufacture of the material
ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is
being furnished in accordance with this specification. All
tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment and unless otherwise specified,
shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily
with the operation of the works. If agreed upon, the
manufacturer shall notify the purchaser in time so that
he may have his inspector present to witness any part
of the manufacture or tests that may be desired. The
certification shall include reference to this specification
and the pipe grade (ASTM plate specification designation
and plate grade, when applicable).
13.2 Pipe lengths containing circumferentially welded
joints (Note 8) shall be permitted by agreement between
the manufacturer and the purchaser. Tests of these welded
joints shall be made in accordance with the procedure
tests specified in Section 9 and the production weld tests
specified in Section 10. The number of production weld
tests shall be one per each lot of 100 joints or fraction
thereof, but not less than one for each welder or welding
operator.
NOTE 8 — Joints are defined for the purpose of this specification as
a circumferential welded seam lying in one plane, used to join lengths
of straight pipe.
14.
16.2 Certification — Upon request of the purchaser in
the contract or order, a manufacturer’s certification that
the material was manufactured and tested in accordance
with this specification together with a report of the chemical and tensile tests shall be furnished. When hydrostatic
test is omitted, the certificate shall include the letters
“NH”.
Ends
14.1 Pipe shall be furnished with a plain right-angle
cut or with bevel ends as specified. All burrs at the ends
of pipe shall be removed.
14.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, pipe with beveled ends shall meet the requirements of ANSI B 16.25.
14.2 Unless otherwise specified, the outside circumference of pipe ends for a distance of not less than 4 in.
(100 mm) shall not vary more than ±60% of the nominal
wall thickness of the pipe from the nominal outside circumference based on the diameter specified, except that
the tolerance shall not be less than ±3⁄16 in. (5 mm).
17. Rejection
17.1 Each length of pipe received from the manufacturer may be inspected by the purchaser and, if it does
not meet the requirements of this specification based on
the inspection and test method as outlined in the specification, the length may be rejected, and the manufacturer
shall be notified. Disposition of rejected pipe shall be a
matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
14.3 By agreement between the manufacturer and the
purchaser the ends of the pipe may be sized within agreedupon tolerances if necessary to meet the requirements of
special installations.
15.
17.2 Pipe found in fabrication or in installation to
be unsuitable for the intended use, under the scope and
requirements of this specification, may be set aside and
the manufacturer notified. Such pipe shall be subject to
mutual investigation as to the nature and severity of the
deficiency and the forming or installation, or both, conditions involved. Disposition shall be a matter for
agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
Finish
15.1 Repair by Welding — The welding of injurious
defects in the pipe wall, provided their depth does not
exceed one third the specified wall thickness, will be
permitted. Defects in the welds, such as sweats or leaks,
shall be repaired or the piece rejected at the option of
the manufacturer. Repairs of this nature shall be made
by completely removing the defect, cleaning the cavity,
and then welding.
18. Certification
18.1 Upon request of the purchaser in the contract or
order, a manufacturer’s certification that the material was
manufactured and tested in accordance with this specification, including year date, together with a report of the
chemical and tensile tests shall be furnished. The pipe
15.2 All repaired pipe shall be tested hydrostatically
in accordance with Section 11, unless otherwise specified
in 11.3.
224
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
grade shall be identified by the plate specification designation (year date not required) and the plate grade (where
applicable).
19.2 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements in
19.1, bar coding is acceptable as a supplemental identification method. The purchaser may specify in the order
a specific bar coding system to be used.
19. Product Marking
19.1 Each section of pipe shall be marked with the
manufacturer’s distinguishing marking, this specification
number and the pipe grade. The marking need not include
the year date of the pipe or plate specification.
20. Protective Coating
20.1 If agreed upon between the purchaser and the
manufacturer, the pipe shall be given a protective coating
of the kind and in the manner specified by the purchaser.
225
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-134
Not for Resale
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
226
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC-RESISTANCEWELDED STEEL PIPE
SA-135
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 135-01.)
1.
Scope
1.1 This specification covers two grades of electricresistance-welded steel pipe in NPS 2 to NPS 30 inclusive, with nominal (average) wall thickness up to 0.500
in. (12.70 mm), inclusive, and in nominal sizes NPS 3/
4 to NPS 5 inclusive with nominal (average) wall thickness 0.083 in. (2.11 mm) to 0.134 in. (3.40 mm),
depending on size. Pipe having other dimensions (Note
1) may be furnished provided such pipe complies with
all other requirements of this specification. The pipe is
intended for conveying gas, vapor, water or other liquid;
only Grade A is adapted for flanging and bending (Note
2). The suitability of pipe for various purposes is somewhat dependent upon its dimensions, properties, and conditions of service, so that the purpose for which the pipe
is intended should be stated in the order. The pipe may
be furnished either nonexpanded or cold expanded at the
option of the manufacturer. When pipe is cold expanded,
the amount of expansion shall not exceed 1.5% of the
outside diameter pipe size.
A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
A 865 Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black
and Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seamless,
for Use in Steel Pipe Joints
A 941 Terminology Relating to Steel, Stainless Steel,
Related Alloys, and Ferroalloys
E 6 Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical
Testing
E 29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data
to Determine Conformance with Specifications
E 59 Practice for Sampling Steel and Iron for Determination of Chemical Composition
E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
and Tubing
E 273 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Longitudinal Welded Pipe and Tubing
E 309 Practice for Eddy-Current Examination of Steel
Tubular Products Using Magnetic Saturation
NOTE 1 — A comprehensive listing of standardized pipe dimensions
is contained in ASME B36.10.
2.2 ANSI Standard:
B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose
NOTE 2 — This provision is not intended to prohibit the cold bending
of Grade B pipe.
2.3 Federal Standards:
Fed. STD No. 123 Marking for Shipments (Civil
Agencies)
Fed. STD No. 183 Continuous Identification Marking of
Iron and Steel Products
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be
regarded as the standard. The SI values, given in parentheses, are for information only.
2.4 Military Standards:
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products, Preparation for Shipment and Storage
2.
Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading
Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment
2.5 ASME Standard:
B36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
227
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
04
SA-135
2004 SECTION II
3.
Terminology
3.1 For definitions of terms relating to steel manufacturing and properties, refer to Terminology A 941.
required. The producer shall remove the transition material by any established procedure that positively separates
the grades.
3.2 For definitions of terms relating to mechanical
testing, refer to Terminology E 6.
5.3 The pipe shall be manufactured from flat rolled
steel in individual lengths or in continuous length by
electric-resistance or electric-induction welding without
the addition of extraneous material.
3.3 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.3.1 burr, n — a rough or sharp edge left on pipe
ends by cutting or sawing.
5.4 The weld seam of electric-resistance welded pipe
to Grade B pipe shall be heat treated after welding to a
minimum temperature of 1000 °F (540 °C) or processed
in such a manner that no untempered martensite remains.
3.3.2 lot, n — all pipe of the same size, wall thickness and rolled length that is produced from the same
heat of steel and subject to the same heat treatment.
3.3.3 black thread, n — a thread crease exhibiting
the original pipe surface after machining.
6.
Chemical Composition
6.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 2, based on the heat analysis. When
specified in the order, the heat analyses shall be reported
to the purchaser or a representative of the purchaser.
4.
Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification should
include the following, as required, to describe the desired
material adequately:
7.
Product Analysis
7.1 An analysis may be made by the purchaser on
samples of pipe selected at random and shall conform
to the requirements specified in Table 2. Methods and
Practices relating to chemical analysis shall be in accordance with Test Method, Practices, and Terminology
A 751.
4.1.1 Quantity (feet or number of lengths),
4.1.2 Name of material (electric-resistancewelded pipe),
4.1.3 Specification designation and year of issue,
4.1.4 Grade (see Table 1),
4.1.5 Size (nominal size, or outside diameter; and
nominal wall thickness),
8.
4.1.6 Length (specific or random, see 12.4),
4.1.7 End finish (plain or threaded, see 13.2),
Mechanical Properties Requirements
8.1 Tensile Properties:
8.1.1 The material shall conform to the requirements as to tensile properties prescribed in Table 1.
4.1.7.1 Threaded and coupled, if specified,
4.1.7.2 Threads only, if specified,
8.1.2 The yield strength shall be determined by the
offset method utilizing 0.2% of the gage length or by the
total extension under load method using 0.5% of the gage
length.
4.1.7.3 Plain end, if specified,
4.1.8 Alternative electric test (see Section 11),
4.1.9 Tension test specimen (see Section 15),
8.1.3 Longitudinal test specimens shall be full-size
longitudinal test specimens (see Figure A2.1 of Test
Methods and Definitions A 370) or longitudinal strip test
specimens (see Specimen No. 4 in Fig. A2.3 of Test
Methods and Definitions A 370).
4.1.10 Heat analysis, if required (see 6.1),
4.1.11 Certificate of compliance, if required (see
Section 19), and
4.1.12 Special requirements.
8.2 The test specimen taken across the weld shall
show a tensile strength not less than the minimum tensile
strength specified for the grade of pipe ordered. This test
will not be required for pipe under NPS 8.
5.
Manufacture
5.1 The steel shall be made by either or both of the
following processes: basic-oxygen or electric-furnace.
9.
Flattening Test
9.1 A specimen at least 4 in. (102 mm) in length shall
be flattened cold between parallel plates in three steps
5.2 Steel may be cast in ingots or may be strand cast.
When steels of different grades are sequentially strand
cast, identification of the resultant transition material is
228
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
with the weld located either 0° or 90° from the line of
direction of force as required in 9.2. During the first step,
which is a test for ductility of the weld, no cracks or
breaks on the inside or outside surfaces shall occur until
the distance between the plates is less than two thirds of
the original outside diameter of the pipe. As a second
step, the flattening shall be continued. During the second
step, which is a test for ductility exclusive of the weld,
no cracks or breaks on the inside or outside surfaces shall
occur until the distance between the plates is less than
one third of the original outside diameter of the pipe but
is not less than five times the wall thickness of the pipe.
During the third step, which is a test for soundness, the
flattening shall be continued until the specimen breaks
or the opposite walls of the pipe meet. Evidence of laminated or unsound material or of incomplete weld that is
revealed during the entire flattening test shall be cause
for rejection.
t p specified wall thickness, in., and
D p specified outside diameter, in.
Plain end pipe may be tested at the discretion of the
manufacturer in single lengths or in multiple lengths.
10.2 The hydrostatic pressure shall be maintained for
not less than 5 s.
10.3 When specified in the order, pipe may be furnished without hydrostatic testing, and each length so
furnished shall include with the mandatory marking the
letters “NH.”
NOTE 3 — This provision is not intended to apply to light wall (Schedule 10) pipe listed in Table X1.1.
10.4 When certification is required by the purchaser
and the hydrostatic test has been omitted, the certification
shall clearly state “Not Hydrostatically Tested.” The specification number and material grade, as shown on the
certification, shall be followed by the letters “NH.”
9.2 For pipe produced in single lengths, the flattening
test specified in 9.1 shall be made on both crop ends cut
from each length of pipe. The tests from each end shall
be made alternately with the weld at 0° and at 90° from the
line of direction of force. For pipe produced in multiple
lengths, the flattening test shall be made on crop ends
representing the front and back of each coil with the weld
at 90° from the line of direction of force, and on two
intermediate rings representing each coil with the weld
0° from the line of direction of force.
11. Nondestructive Examination Requirements
11.1 As an alternate to the hydrostatic test for Schedule 10 pipe in sizes NPS 3⁄4 to NPS 5 inclusive, and when
accepted by the purchaser, each pipe shall be tested with
a nondestructive electric test in accordance with Practice
E 213, Practice E 273, or Practice E 309. It is the intent
of this test to reject pipe containing defects.
9.3 Surface imperfections in the test specimen before
flattening, but revealed during the first step of the flattening test, shall be judged in accordance with the finish
requirements in Section 13.
11.2 Recognized methods for meeting this test are
electromagnetic (eddy current) or ultrasonic.
11.3 The following information is for the benefit of
the user of this specification:
9.4 Superficial cracks as a result of surface imperfections shall not be cause for rejection.
11.3.1 The ultrasonic examination referred to in
this specification is intended to detect longitudinal imperfections having a reflective area similar to or larger than
the reference notch. The examination may not detect
circumferentially oriented imperfections of short, deep
imperfections.
10. Hydrostatic Test
10.1 Except as provided for in 10.3, each length of
pipe shall be hydrostatically tested at the mill, without
leakage through the wall, to a pressure calculated from
the following Eq. 1:
P p 2St/D
11.3.2 The eddy-current examination referenced in
this specification has the capability of detecting significant imperfections, especially of the short, abrupt type.
(1)
11.3.3 The hydrostatic test referred to in Section
10 is a test method provided for in many product specifications. This test has the capability of finding imperfections of a size permitting the test fluid to leak through
the tube wall and may be either visually seen or detected
by a loss of pressure. This test may not detect very tight,
through-the-wall imperfections or imperfections that
extend an appreciable distance into the wall without complete penetration.
where:
P p minimum hydrostatic test pressure, psi (MPa).
The test pressure need not exceed 2500 psi
(17.24 MPa),
S p allowable fiber stress 18 000 psi (124 MPa) for
Grade A and 21 000 psi (144 MPa) for Grade
B. This does not prohibit testing at higher pressure at the manufacturer’s option,
229
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-135
Not for Resale
SA-135
2004 SECTION II
NOTE 5 — The minimum wall thickness on inspection is shown in
Table X1.2 of the Appendix.
11.3.4 A purchaser interested in ascertaining the
nature (type, size, location, and orientation) of imperfections that can be detected in the specific application of
these examinations should discuss this with the manufacturer of the tubular product.
12.4 Lengths:
12.4.1 Except as allowed in 12.4.2, pipe shall be
furnished in lengths averaging 38 ft (11.6 m) or over,
with a minimum length of 20 ft (6.1 m), but no more
than 5% may be under 32 ft (9.8 m). Jointers made by
welding are permissible. When threaded pipe is ordered,
jointers shall be made by threaded connections and shall
not exceed 5% of the order.
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
11.4 In order to accommodate the various types of
nondestructive electric testing equipment and techniques
in use, the calibration pipe shall contain, at the option of
the producer, any one or more of the following discontinuities to establish a minimum sensitivity level for rejection:
11.4.1 Drilled Hole — A hole not larger than 0.031in. (0.8-mm) diameter shall be drilled radially and completely through pipe wall, preferably in the weld area,
care being taken to avoid distortion of the pipe while
drilling.
11.4.2 Transverse Tangential Notch — A notch
shall be filed or milled tangential to the surface and transverse to the longitudinal axis of the pipe preferably in
the weld area. Said notch shall have a depth not exceeding
12.5% of the nominal wall thickness of the pipe or 0.004
in. (0.10 mm), whichever is greater.
11.4.3 Longitudinal Notch — A notch 0.031 in. (0.8
mm) or less in width shall be machined in a radial plane
parallel to the pipe axis on the outside surface of the pipe
preferably in the weld area, to have a depth not exceeding
12.5% of the nominal wall thickness of the pipe or 0.004
in. (0.10 mm), whichever is greater.
12.4.2 Unless otherwise specified, Schedule 10
pipe shall be between 16 and 22 ft (4.9 and 6.7 m) for
a minimum of 90% of the footage furnished, with any
balance being shorter lengths at least 8 ft (2.4 m) long.
13. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
13.1 The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight
and free of defects. Surface imperfections in excess of
12.5% of the nominal wall thickness shall be considered
defects.
13.2 End Finish:
13.2.1 Schedule 10 Pipe — Pipe furnished to Schedule 10 shall be plain end only. All inside and outside
cutting burrs shall be removed. This generally involves
breaking the corners.
13.2.2 Ends, Plain End Pipe — Unless otherwise
specified, plain end pipe for use with the Dresser or
Dayton type coupling shall be reamed both outside and
inside sufficiently to remove all burrs. Plain end pipe for
welding shall be beveled on the outside to an angle of
30° with a tolerance of + 5° and – 0° and with a width
of flat at the end of the pipe of 1⁄16 +/− 1⁄32 in. (1.6 +/−
0.8 mm). When material is ordered beveled to any other
than a 30° angle, it should be understood that the angle
is to be measured from a line drawn perpendicular to the
axis of the pipe. This means that a greater amount of
material is removed with a 60° angle than with a 30°
angle. Pipe shall be sufficiently free from indentations,
projections, or roll marks for a distance of 8 in. (203
mm) from the end of the pipe to make a tight joint with
the rubber gasket type of coupling. All plain end pipe
intended for Dresser or Dayton type joints or for welding,
sizes NPS 10 and smaller in outside diameter specified,
shall be not more than 1⁄32 in. (0.8 mm) smaller than the
outside diameter specified for a distance of 8 in. (203
mm) from the ends of the pipe and shall permit the passing
for a distance of 8 in. (203 mm) of a ring gage that has
a bore 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) larger than the outside diameter
specified of the pipe. Sizes larger than NPS 10 shall be
not more than 1⁄32 in. (0.8 mm) smaller than the nominal
11.5 Pipe producing a signal equal to or greater than
the calibration imperfection shall be rejected.
12.
Dimensions, Weight, and Permissible
Variations
12.1 Weight — The weight of any length of pipe other
than Schedule 10 shall not vary more than 3.5% under
or 10% over that specified, but the carload weight shall
be not more than 1.75% under the nominal weight. The
weight of pipe furnished to Schedule 10 shall not vary
more than ±10% from that calculated using the weight
(mass) per unit length prescribed in Appendix Table X1.1.
The weight of the pipe shall be calculated from the relevant equation in ASME B36.10 and with a constant of
10.69 rather than 10.68.
NOTE 4 — A system of standard pipe sizes has been approved by the
American National Standards Institute as American National Standard
for Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe (ASME B36.10).
12.2 Diameter — The outside diameter shall not vary
more than ±1% from the nominal size specified.
12.3 Minimum Wall Thickness — The minimum wall
thickness at any point shall be not more than 12.5% under
the specified wall thickness.
230
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
outside diameter for a distance of 8 in. (203 mm) from
the end of the pipe and shall permit the passing for a
distance of 8 in. (203 mm) of a ring gage which has a
bore 3⁄32 in. (2.4 mm) larger than the nominal outside
diameter of the pipe.
14. Weld Repair
14.1 Welding Repair:
14.2 Defects in the pipe wall, provided their depth
does not exceed one third the specified wall thickness,
shall be repaired by electric welding. Defects in the welds
such as sweats or leaks, unless otherwise specified, shall
be repaired or the piece rejected at the option of the
manufacturer. Repairs of this nature shall be made by
completely removing the defect, cleaning the cavity, and
then electric welding.
13.2.3 Ends, Threaded Pipe — Each end of threaded
pipe shall be reamed to remove all burrs. All threads shall
be in accordance with the American National Standard
Pipe Threads (Note 6) and cut so as to make a tight joint
when the pipe is tested at the mill to the specified internal
hydrostatic pressure. The variation from the standard,
when tested with the standard working gage, shall not
exceed one and one-half turns either way. Pipe shall not
be rounded by hammering in order to get a full thread.
There shall be not more than two black threads for 3⁄4in. (19.0-mm) taper among the perfect threads. Black
threads should not be confused with imperfect threads,
such as those torn, shaven, or broken.
14.3 All repaired pipe shall be retested hydrostatically
in accordance with Section 10.
15. Sampling
15.1 Chemical Analysis:
15.1.1 Samples for chemical analysis, except for
spectrochemical analysis, shall be taken in accordance
with Practice E 59. The number of samples shall be
determined as follows:
NOTE 6 — A complete description of the American National Standard
Pipe Threads applicable to pipe, valves, and fittings is contained in the
American National Standard for Pipe Threads (ANSI B1.20.1); also
“Screw-Thread Standards for Federal Services, 1942,” National Bureau
of Standards Handbook H 28, January, 1942, the pertinent data in both
sources being identical.
13.3 Couplings — Each length of threaded pipe shall
be provided with one coupling manufactured in accordance with Specification A 865 except that the coupling
may be wrought iron (Note 7). Threads shall be cut so
as to make a tight joint. Taper-tapped couplings shall be
furnished on all weights of threaded pipe NPS 21⁄2 and
larger.
NPS
Numbers of Samples Selected
Under 6
6 to 20, incl
Over 20 to 30, incl
2 from each lot of 400 pipes or fraction thereof
2 from each lot of 200 pipes or fraction thereof
2 from each lot of 100 pipes or fraction thereof
15.2 Tension Test:
15.2.1 One longitudinal tension test shall be made
on length (Note 8) from each lot of 400 lengths or fraction
thereof of each size under NPS 8 and one transverse body
and one transverse weld tension test on one length from
each lot of 200 lengths or fraction thereof of each size
NPS 8 to NPS 20 and on one length from each lot of
100 lengths or fraction thereof of each size over NPS 20
to NPS 30. When taken from the skelp, the number of
tests shall be determined in the same manner as when
taken from the finished pipe.
NOTE 7 — For sizes NPS 2 and smaller, it is commercial practice to
furnish straight-tapped couplings for standard-weight (Schedule 40)
pipe and taper-tapped couplings for extra-strong (Schedule 80) and
double-extra-strong pipe. If taper-tapped couplings are required for
sizes NPS 2 and smaller on standard weight (Schedule 40) pipe, line
pipe in accordance with Specification 5L of the American Petroleum
Institute should be ordered, thread lengths to be in accordance with the
American National Standard for Pipe Threads (ANSI B1.20.1). Tapertapped couplings for sizes NPS 2 and smaller in standard weight may
be used on mill-threaded standard weight type of the same size.
NOTE 8 — Length is defined as the length as ordered, except that in
the case of orders for cut lengths shorter than double random, which
is defined as the length as rolled, prior to cutting to the required short
lengths.
15.3 Flattening Test:
15.3.1 The flattening test specified in 9.1 shall be
made on both crop ends cut from each length of pipe.
When pipe is produced in multiple lengths, flattening
tests are required on the crop ends from the front and
back ends of each coil and on two intermediate rings
representing each coil.
13.4 Protective Coating:
13.4.1 After the pipe has been subjected to the
hydrostatic test, and if required by the purchaser, it shall
be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, oil, grease, loose scale,
and rust; then dried, and given a protective coating of
the kind and in the manner specified by the purchaser.
Pipe furnished to Schedule 10 shall be normally shipped
with a light coating of processing oil. If so specified, the
pipe can be given a mill coating or a special coating.
15.4 Hydrostatic Test:
15.4.1 Each length of pipe shall be subjected to
the hydrostatic test specified in Section 10.
231
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-135
Not for Resale
SA-135
2004 SECTION II
80% of its length after the initial cropping; otherwise,
the length shall be rejected. For pipe produced in multiple
lengths, retests may be cut from each end of each individual length in the multiple; such tests shall be made with
the weld alternately 0° and 90° from the line of direction
of force.
16. Test, Retest, and Resampling
16.1 Chemical Analysis:
16.1.1 If the results of the analysis of either length
of pipe do not conform to the requirements specified in
Section 7, analyses of two additional lengths from the
same lot shall be made, each of which shall conform to
the requirements specified.
16.4 All specimens shall be tested at room temperature.
16.2 Tension Test:
16.2.1 The test specimens and the tests required
by this specification shall conform to those described
in Test Methods and Definitions A 370, except that all
specimens shall be tested at room temperature.
17. Inspection
17.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall
have free entry, at all times while work on the contract
of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the
manufacturer’s works that concern the manufacture of
the material ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the
inspector, without charge, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance
with this specification. All tests (except check analysis)
and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture
prior to shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall
be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with
the manufacturer’s operation.
16.2.2 The longitudinal tension test specimen shall
be taken from the end of the pipe, or by agreement
between the manufacturer and the purchaser may be taken
from the skelp, at a point approximately 90° from the
weld, and shall not be flattened between gage marks. The
sides of each specimen shall be parallel between gage
marks. At the manufacturer option, the tension test may
be made on full section of pipe.
16.2.3 Transverse weld test specimens shall be
taken with the weld at the center of the specimen. Transverse body test specimens shall be taken opposite to the
weld. All transverse test specimens shall be approximately 11⁄2 in. (38.1 mm) wide in the gage length and
shall represent the full wall thickness of the pipe from
which the specimen was cut.
18. Rejection
18.1 Each length of pipe received from the manufacturer may be inspected by the purchaser and, if it does
not meet the requirements of this specification based on
the inspection and test method as outlined in the specification, the length may be rejected and the manufacturer
shall be notified. Disposition of rejected pipe shall be a
matter of agreement between the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
16.2.4 If any test specimen shows defective
machining or develops flaws not associated with the quality of the steel or the welding, it may be discarded and
another specimen substituted.
16.2.5 If the results of the tension tests of any lot
do not conform to the requirements specified in 9.1, retests
of two additional lengths from the same lot shall be made,
each of which shall conform to the requirements specified.
18.2 Pipe found in fabrication or in installation to
be unsuitable for the intended use, under the scope and
requirements of this specification, may be set aside and
the manufacturer notified. Such pipe shall be subject to
mutual investigation as to the nature and severity of the
deficiency and the forming or installation, or both, conditions involved. Disposition shall be a matter for
agreement.
16.2.6 If the percentage of elongation of any tension
test specimen is less than that specified in 8.1, and any
part of the fracture is more than 3⁄4 in. (19.0 mm) from the
center of the gage length as indicated by scribe scratches
marked on the specimen before testing, the specimen may
be discarded and another substituted.
16.3 Flattening Test:
16.3.1 Specimens for flattening tests shall be
smooth at the ends and free from burrs.
19. Certificate of Compliance
19.1 When specified in the purchase order, the producer or supplier shall furnish to the purchaser a certificate
of compliance stating that the pipe has been manufactured, sampled, tested and inspected in accordance with
this specification (including the year of issue) and has
been found to meet the requirements.
16.3.2 If any section of the pipe fails to comply
with the requirements of 9.1, for pipe produced in single
lengths, other sections may be cut from the same end of
the same length until satisfactory tests are obtained,
except that the finished pipe shall not be shorter than
232
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
20. Identification of Material
20.1 Each length of pipe shall be legibly marked with
appropriate symbols by stenciling, stamping, or rolling to
show the manufacturer’s name, the size, the specification
designation, the grade, and the hydrostatic test pressure
when tested, or the letters “NH” when not tested.
20.2 In addition to the requirements in 20.1, bar coding is acceptable as a supplemental identification method.
The purchaser may specify in the order a specific bar
coding system to be used.
SA-135
21.2 When specified in the contract or purchase order,
the material shall be preserved, packaged, and packed in
accordance with MIL-STD 163. The applicable levels
shall be as specified in the contract. Marking for shipment
of such material shall be in accordance with Fed. Std.
No. 123 for civil agencies and MIL-STD 129 or Fed.
Std. No. 183 if continuous marking is required for military
agencies.
21.
Packaging, Marking, and Loading for
Shipment
21.1 When specified on the purchase order, packaging, marking, and loading for shipment shall be in accordance with Practices A 700.
22.
Keywords
22.1 eddy current testing; electric resistance welded
pipe; hydrostatic testing; plain end pipe; Schedule 10
pipe; threaded pipe
TABLE 1
TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
Tensile strength, min, ksi (MPa)
Yield strength, min, ksi (MPa)
Elongation in 2 in. (50 mm), min, %:
For pipe having a specified wall thickness of 5⁄16 in. (7.9 mm) or more, if tested using a longitudinal strip test
specimen.
For pipe having a specified wall thickness of less than 5⁄16 in. (7.9 mm), if tested using a longitudinal strip test
specimen.
For pipe of any size, if tested using a full-size longitudinal test specimen.
A
Grade A
Grade B
48 (331)
30 (207)
60 (414)
35 (241)
35
30
A
B
35
30
The minimum elongation shall be determined by the following equation, with the calculated value rounded to the nearest percent:
E p 56 t + 16.5
where:
E p elongation in 2 in. (50 mm), min, %, and
t p specified wall thickness, in.
B
The minimum elongation shall be determined by the following equation, with the calculated value rounded to the nearest percent:
E p 48 t + 14.00
where:
E p elongation in 2 in. (50 mm), min, %, and
t p specified wall thickness, in.
TABLE 2
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
Composition, max, %
Element
Grade A
Grade B
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus
Sulfur
0.25
0.95
0.035
0.035
0.30
1.20
0.035
0.035
233
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-135
2004 SECTION II
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. ADDITIONAL DATA
X1.1 Additional data on dimensions nominal weights
and test pressures is provided in Table X1.1.
X1.2 Additional data on wall thicknesses are provided
in Table X1.2.
TABLE X1.1
DIMENSIONS, NOMINAL WEIGHTS, AND TEST PRESSURES FOR LIGHT WALL STEEL PIPE
Test Pressure, psi (MPa) A
Schedule 10
Outside Diameter,
in. (mm)
NPS
3
⁄4
1
11⁄4
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
3
31⁄2
4
5
A
1.050
1.315
1.660
1.900
2.375
2.875
3.500
4.000
4.500
5.563
(26.7)
(33.4)
(42.2)
(48.3)
(60.3)
(73.0)
(88.9)
(101.6)
(114.3)
(141.3)
Specified Wall
Thickness A in.
(mm)
0.083
0.109
0.109
0.109
0.109
0.120
0.120
0.120
0.120
0.134
Weight (Mass) per
Unit Length, lb/ft
(kg/m)
(2.11)
(2.77)
(2.77)
(2.77)
(2.77)
(3.05)
(3.05)
(3.05)
(3.05)
(3.40)
0.86
1.40
1.81
2.09
2.64
3.53
4.34
4.98
5.62
7.78
Grade A
(1.28)
(2.09)
(2.69)
(3.11)
(3.93)
(5.26)
(6.46)
(7.41)
(8.37)
(11.58)
2500
2500
2400
2100
1700
1500
1200
1000
900
850
(17.24)
(17.24)
(16.55)
(14.48)
(11.72)
(10.34)
(8.27)
(6.89)
(6.21)
(5.86)
The test pressures are calculated by the following equation (but need not exceed 2500 psi or 17.24 MPa):
P p 2St/D
where:
P
S
t
D
p
p
p
p
pressure, psi (MPa)
fiber stress, 60% of the specified minimum yield strength, psi (MPa),
specified wall thickness, in. (mm), and
specified outside diameter, in. (mm).
234
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Grade B
2500
2500
2500
2400
1900
1700
1400
1200
1100
1000
(17.24)
(17.24)
(17.24)
(16.55)
(13.10)
(11.72)
(9.65)
(8.27)
(7.58)
(6.89)
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-135
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
TABLE X1.2
MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE WALL THICKNESS ON INSPECTION
Specified Wall
Thickness (t),
in. (mm)
0.068
0.088
0.091
0.095
0.113
0.119
0.125
0.126
0.133
0.140
0.145
0.147
0.154
0.156
0.179
0.187
0.188
0.191
0.200
0.203
0.216
0.218
0.219
0.226
0.237
0.250
0.258
0.276
0.277
0.279
0.280
0.281
Minimum Permissible
Wall Thickness (tm),
in. (mm)
(1.73)
(2.24)
(2.31)
(2.41)
(2.87)
(3.02)
(3.18)
(3.20)
(3.38)
(3.56)
(3.68)
(3.73)
(3.91)
(3.96)
(4.55)
(4.75)
(4.78)
(4.85)
(5.08)
(5.16)
(5.49)
(5.54)
(5.56)
(5.74)
(6.02)
(6.35)
(6.55)
(7.01)
(7.04)
(7.09)
(7.11)
(7.14)
0.060
0.077
0.080
0.083
0.099
0.104
0.109
0.110
0.116
0.122
0.127
0.129
0.135
0.136
0.157
0.164
0.164
0.167
0.175
0.178
0.189
0.191
0.192
0.198
0.207
0.219
0.226
0.242
0.242
0.244
0.245
0.246
(1.52)
(1.96)
(2.03)
(2.11)
(2.51)
(2.64)
(2.77)
(2.79)
(2.95)
(3.10)
(3.23)
(3.28)
(3.43)
(3.45)
(3.99)
(4.17)
(4.17)
(4.24)
(4.45)
(4.52)
(4.80)
(4.85)
(4.88)
(5.03)
(5.26)
(5.56)
(5.74)
(6.15)
(6.15)
(6.20)
(6.22)
(6.25)
Specified Wall
Thickness (t),
in. (mm)
0.294
0.300
0.307
0.308
0.312
0.318
0.322
0.330
0.337
0.343
0.344
0.358
0.365
0.375
0.382
0.400
0.406
0.432
0.436
0.437
0.438
0.500
0.531
0.552
0.562
0.593
0.600
0.625
0.656
0.674
0.687
0.719
Minimum Permissible
Wall Thickness (tm),
in. (mm)
(7.47)
(7.62)
(7.80)
(7.82)
(7.92)
(8.08)
(8.18)
(8.38)
(8.56)
(8.71)
(8.74)
(9.09)
(9.27)
(9.53)
(9.70)
(10.16)
(10.31)
(10.97)
(11.07)
(11.10)
(11.13)
(12.70)
(13.49)
(14.02)
(14.27)
(15.06)
(15.24)
(15.88)
(16.66)
(17.12)
(17.45)
(18.24)
0.257
0.262
0.269
0.270
0.273
0.278
0.282
0.289
0.295
0.300
0.301
0.313
0.319
0.328
0.334
0.350
0.355
0.378
0.382
0.382
0.383
0.438
0.465
0.483
0.492
0.519
0.525
0.547
0.574
0.590
0.601
0.629
(6.53)
(6.65)
(6.83)
(6.86)
(6.93)
(7.06)
(7.16)
(7.34)
(7.49)
(7.62)
(7.65)
(7.95)
(8.10)
(8.33)
(8.48)
(8.89)
(9.02)
(9.60)
(9.70)
(9.70)
(9.73)
(11.13)
(11.81)
(12.27)
(12.50)
(13.18)
(13.34)
(13.89)
(14.58)
(14.99)
(15.27)
(15.98)
Specified Wall
Thickness (t),
in. (mm)
0.750
0.812
0.843
0.864
0.875
0.906
0.937
0.968
1.000
1.031
1.062
1.093
1.125
1.156
1.218
1.250
1.281
1.312
1.343
1.375
1.406
1.437
1.500
1.531
1.562
1.593
1.750
1.781
1.812
1.968
2.062
2.343
(19.05)
(20.62)
(21.41)
(21.95)
(22.23)
(23.01)
(23.80)
(24.59)
(25.40)
(26.19)
(26.97)
(27.76)
(28.58)
(29.36)
(30.94)
(31.75)
(32.54)
(33.33)
(34.11)
(34.93)
(35.71)
(36.53)
(38.10)
(38.89)
(39.68)
(40.46)
(44.45)
(45.24)
(46.03)
(49.99)
(52.38)
(59.51)
Minimum Permissible
Wall Thickness (tm),
in. (mm)
0.656
0.710
0.738
0.756
0.766
0.793
0.820
0.847
0.875
0.902
0.929
0.956
0.984
1.012
1.066
1.094
1.121
1.148
1.175
1.203
1.230
1.258
1.312
1.340
1.367
1.394
1.531
1.558
1.586
1.722
1.804
2.050
(16.66)
(18.03)
(18.75)
(19.20)
(19.46)
(20.14)
(20.83)
(21.51)
(22.23)
(22.91)
(23.60)
(24.28)
(24.99)
(25.70)
(27.08)
(27.79)
(28.47)
(29.16)
(29.85)
(30.56)
(31.24)
(31.95)
(33.33)
(34.04)
(34.72)
(35.41)
(38.89)
(39.57)
(40.28)
(43.74)
(45.82)
(52.07)
NOTE 1 — The following equation, upon which this table is based, is used to derive the minimum permissible wall thickness values from
the specified wall thickness values, with the calculated values rounded to three decimal places in accordance with the rounding method of
Practice E 29:
tm ⴛ 0.875 p t
where:
tm p minimum permissible wall thickness, in.
t p specified wall thickness, in.
NOTE 2 — This table is a master table covering wall thicknesses available in the purchase of different classifications of pipe, but it is not
meant to imply that all of the walls listed therein are obtainable under this specification.
235
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
236
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 178lA 178M-95.)
1.
Scope
1.1 This specification covers minimum-wall-thickness, electric-resistance-welded tubes made of carbon
steel and carbon-manganese steel intended for use as
boiler tubes, boiler flues, superheater flues, and safe ends.
NOTE 1 - Type C and D tubes are not suitable for safe-ending for
forge welding.
1.2 The tubing sizes and thicknesses usually furnished
to this specification are '/2 to 5 in. [12.7 to 127 mm] in
outside diameter and 0.035 to 0.320 in. [0.9 to 9.1 mm],
inclusive, in minimum wall thickness. Tubing having
other dimensions may be furnished, provided such hlbes
comply with all other requirements of this specification.
1.3 Mechanical property requirements do not apply
to tubing smaller than in. 13.2 mm] in inside diameter
or 0.015 in. [0.4 mm] in thiclcness.
2.
Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Strrnrlrrrcls:
A 226lA 226M Specification for Electric-ResistanceWelded Carbon Steel Boiler and S~lperheaterTubes
for High-Pressure Service
A 450IA 450M Specification for General Requirements
for Carbon, Fenitic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel
Tubes
A 520 Specification for S~lpplementaryRequirements for
Seamless and Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon
Steel Tubular Products for High-Temperature Service
Confo~~ning
to I S 0 Reconmendations for Boiler Construction.
E 213 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Metal Pipe
and Tubing
E 273 Practice for Ultrasonic Examination of Longitudinal Welded Pipe and Tubing
3.
1.4 When these products are to be used in applications
confosming to I S 0 Recomlnendations for Boiler Construction, the requirements of Specification A 520 shall
supplement and supersede the requirements of this specification.
1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or
SI units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within
the text, the ST units are shown in brackets. The values
stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore,
each system must be used independently of the other.
Combining val~lesfrom the two systems may result in
nonconformance with the specification. The inch-pound
units shall apply unless the "M" designation of this specification is specified in the order.
Ordering Information
3.1 Orders for material under this specification should
include the following, as required, to describe the desired
material adequately:
3.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
3.1.2 Name of material (electric-resistance-welded
tubes),
3.1.3 Grade (A, C, or D, Table I),
3.1.4 Size (outside diameter and ~ninimumwall
thickness),
3.1.5 Length (specific or random),
3.1.6 Optional requirenlents (product analysis, Section 7; crush test, Section 10; hydrostatic or nondestructive electric test, 11.6),
§A-178lSA-178M
2004 SECTION I1
3.1.7 Test report required (Certification Section of
Specification A 450lA 450M),
3.1.8 Specification, and designation,
3.1.9 Individual supplementary requirements, if
required, and
3.1.10 Special requirements.
4.
Manufacture
4.1 The steel for Grade D shall be killed.
4.2 Tubes shall be made by electric-resistance
welding.
5.
eat Treatment
5.1 After welding, all tubes shall be heat treated at a
temperature of 1650°F [900°C] or higher and followed
by cooling in air or in the cooling chamber of a controlledatmosphere f ~ ~ r n a cCold-drawn
e.
tubes shall be heat
treated after the final cold-draw pass at a temperature of
1200" [650°C] or higher.
emical Composition
6.1 The steel shall confonn to the requirements as to
chemical composition prescribed in Tabie i.
6.2 When a grade is ordered under this specification,
supplying an alloy grade that specifically requires the
addition of any element other than those listed in Table
1 is not permitted.
7.1 When requested on the p~lrchaseorder, a product
analysis shall be made by the manufacturer or supplier
from one tube per 100 pieces for sizes over 3 in. [76.2
mm] and one tube per 250 pieces for sizes 3 in. C76.2
mm] and under; or when hlbes are identified by heat, one
tube per heat shall be analyzed. The chemical composition
thus determined shall confo~mto the requirements specified.
7.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests
of two additional lengths of flat-rolled stoclc or tubes shall
be made. Both retests, for the elements in question, shall
meet the req~~irements
of the specification; otherwise all
remaining material in the heat or lot (Note 2) shall be
rejected or, at the option of the producer, each length of
flat-rolled stock or tube may be individually tested for
acceptance. Lengths of flat-rolled stock or tubes which
do not meet the requirements of the specifications shall
be rejected.
NOTE 2 - A lot consists of 250 tubes for sizes 3 in. [76.2 mm] and
under and of 100 tubes for sizes over 3 in. 176.2 mm], prior to cutting
to length.
8.
General Requirements
8.1 Material furnished under this specification shall
conform to the applicable requirements of the current
edition of Specification A 450lA 450M unless otherwise
provided herein.
9.
Tensile Requirements
9.1 Grade C and D tubes shall conform to the requirements as to tensile properties prescribed in Table 2.
NOTE 3: E.~p/nr~nto~y
Note - For purposes of design the following
lensile properties may be assumed for Grade A tubes:
Tensile strength, min, ltsi [MPa]
Yield Strength, min, ltsi [MPa]
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, %
10. Crush Test
10.1 When required by the purchaser, crushing tests
shall be made on sections of tube 2'/2 in. [63 mm] in
length which shall stand crushing longitudinally without
cracking, splitting, or opening at the weld, as follows:
Wall Thicltness
of Tubes,
in. Lmm]
0.135 [3.43] and
under
Over 0.135 [3.43]
Height of Crushed Section, in. [mm]
Grade A Tubes
% [I91 or until
outside folds are
in contact
1!/J 1321
Grade C
and D Tubes
Crush tests not
required
...
10.2 Table 3 gives the computed minimum elongation
in. [0.8 mm] decrease in wall thickvalues for each
ness. Where the wall thickness lies between two values
shown above, the minim~lmelongation value shall be
determined by the following equation:
where:
E = elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, %, and,
t = actual thickness of specimen, in. [rnm].
10.3 For tubing less than 1 in. 125.4 mm] in outside
diameter, the length of the specimen shall be 21/2 times
the outside diameter of the tube. Slight surface checks
shall not be cause for rejection.
PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-178lSA-178M
11. Mechanical Tests Required
11.1 Flattening Test:
of the same size and heat, heat treated in the same furnace.
at the same temperature, time at heat, and f~irnacespeed.
11.1.1 For Grade A, one flattening test shall be
made on specimens from each of two tubes from each
lot (Note 2) or fraction thereof, and from each 2000 ft
[600 m] or fraction thereof of safe-end material.
11.5 Reverse Flattening Test - One reverse flattening
test shall be made on each 1500 ft [450 m] of finished
tubing.
11-1-2 For Chdes C and D, one flattening test shall
be made on specimens from each of two tubes from each
lot (Note 2) or fraction thereof.
11.2 Flange Test:
11.2.1 For Grade A, one flange test shall be made
on specimens from each of two tubes from each lot (Note
2) or fraction thereof, and from each 2000 ft [600 ~ n or
]
fraction thereof of safe-end material.
11.2-2
Grades and D, One flange test
be lnade On s ~ e c i m e ~ l s each
tubes froin
lot (Note 2) or fraction thereof. The width of the flange
shall not be less than 75% of that specified in Specification
11.3 Clvslz Test - For Grade A, when required by
the purchaser, one crush test shall be made on specimens
from each of two tubes from each lot (Note 2) or fraction
thereof, and from each 2000 ft [600 m] or fraction thereof
of safe-end material.
11.4 Tensior7 Test - For Grades C and D, one tension
test shall be made on specimens from each of two tubes
from each lot. The term lot for tension test requirements
applies to all tubes prior to cutting, of the same nominal
diameter and wall thickness, which ase produced from
the same heat of steel. When final heat treatment is in a
batch-type furnace, a lot shall include only those tubes
of the same size and the same heat which ase heat treated
in the same furnace charge. m e n the find heat treatment
is in a continuous furnace, a lot shall include all tubes
11.6 Hydrostatic or N o i ~ d e s t ~ ~ ~ ~Electric
c t i v e Test Each tube shall be subjected to either the hydrostatic or the
nondestructive electric test. The p~lrchasermay specify
which test is to be used.
12. Forming Operatioils
12.1 When inserted in the boiler, t~tbesshall withstand
expanding and beading without showing cracks or flaws,
or opening at the weld. When properly manipulated,
superheater tubes shall withstand all forging, welding,
and bending operations necessary for application without
developing defects.
13.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification A 450lA 450M, the letters "ERW" shall be legibly
stenciled on each tube, or marked on a tag attached to
the bundle or box in which the tubes are shipped.
13.2 The manufacturer's name or symbol may be
placed permanently on each tube by rolling or light stamping before norn~alizing.If a single stamp is placed on
the tube by hand, this mark should not be less than 8 in.
[200 mm] from one end of the tube.
14. Keywords
141 boiler tube; resistance welded steel tnbe; steel
tube, carbon; welded steel tube
2004 SECTION I1
TABLE 1
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
Composition, %
Grade A,
Low-Carbon
Steel
Element
Carbon
0.06-0.18
Manganese
0.27-0.63
0.035
Phosphorus, max
Sulfur, max
0.035
...
Silicon
Grade C,
MediumCarbon Steel
Grade D,
Carbon-Manganese
Steel
0.35 max
0.80 max
0.035
0.035
0.27 max
1.00-1.50
0.030
0.015
0.10 lnin
...
TABLE 2
TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
Tensile strength, min, ltsi CM Pal
Yield strength, min, ltsi CMPal
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, %
For longitudinal strip tests a deduction for each
in. C0.8 m m l decrease in
wall thickness below 5/1b in. C8 m m l from the basic minimum elongation of
the following percentage points shall be made.
A
Grade C
Grade D
60 C4151
37 C2551
30
1.50~
70 C4851
40 C2751
30
1.50~
See Table 3 for the computed minimum values:
TABLE 3
MINIMUM ELONGATION VALUES
Wail Thiclmss
in.
A
mm
Elongation in 2 in. or 50
mm, min, % A
Calculated elongation requirements shall be rounded to the nearest whole number.
PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-178lSA-178M
The fc)1lowing supplementasy req~iirenlentsmay become a part of the specification when
specified in the inquiry or invitation to bid, and production order or contract. These
requirements shall not be considered, unless specified in the order and the necessary tests
shall be made at the 1ni11.
S1. Additional Testing of Welded Tubing for
ASME Requirements
S1.1 The weld seam of each tube shall be subjected
to an ~lltrasonicinspection employing Practices E 273 or
E 213 with the rejection criteria referenced in Specification A 4501A 450M.
permitted by Specification A 450lA 450M.
S1.2 If Practice E 273 is employed, a 100% volumetric
inspection of the entire length of each tube shall also be
perfor~nedusing one of the nondestructive electric tests
S1.4 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification A 4501A 450M, "S 1" shall be added after the grade
designation.
S1.3 The test methods described in the supplement
may not be capable of inspecting the end portions of
tubes. This condition is referred to as end effect. This
portion, as determined by the manufacturer, shall be
removed and discarded.
Slandilrd~Worldwide
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 179lA 179M-90a.)
1.
Scope
1.1 This specification covers minimum-wallthickness, seamless cold-drawn low-carbon steel tubes
for tubular heat exchangers, condensers, and similar heat
transfer apparatus.
4.
Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification should
include the following, as required, to describe the desired
material adequately:
4.1.1 Quality (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
1.2 This specification covers tubes '/8 to 3 in. [3.2 to
76.2 mm], inclusive, in outside diameter.
NOTE 1 - Tubing smaller in outside diameter and having a thinner
wall than indicated in this specification is available. Mechanical property
requirements do not apply to tubing smaller than 1/8 in. [3.2 mm] in
outside diameter or with a wall thickness under 0.015 in. [0.4 mm].
1.3 The values stated in either inch-pound units or
SI units are to be regasded separately as standard. Within
the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values
stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore,
each system must be used independently of the other.
Combining values from the two systems may result in
nonconformance with the specification. The inch-pound
units shall apply unless the "M" designation of this specification is specified in the order.
4.1.2 Name of nlaterial (seamless tubes),
4.1.3 Manufacture (cold-drawn),
4.1.4 Size (outside diameter and minimum wall
thickness),
4.1.5 Length (specific or random),
4.1.6 Optional requirements (product analysis, Section 9, flange test, 11.3),
4.1.7 Test report required (Certification Section of
Specification A 450lA 450M),
4.1.8 Specification number, and
4.1.9 Special requirements.
5.
2.
Referenced Document
2.1 ASTM Stnnclnl-d:
A 450lA 450M Specification for General Requirements
for Carbon, Fersitic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel
Tubes
General Requirements
3.1 Material furnished under this specification shall
conform to the applicable requirements of the current
edition of Specification A 450lA 450M, unless otherwise
provided herein.
Manufacture
5.1 Tubes shall be made by the seanlless process and
shall be cold drawn.
6.
Neat Treatment
6.1 Tubes shall be heat treated after the final cold
draw pass at a temperature of 1200°F [65O0C] or higher.
3.
7.
Surface Condition
7.1 Finished tubes shall be free of scale. A slight
amount of oxidation will not be considered as scale.
2004 SECTION I1
8.
Chemical Corn
8.1 The steel shall conform to the following requirements as to chemical composition:
Carbon, %
IvIanganese, %
Phosphorus, max, %
Sulfur, max, 70
0.06-0.18
0.27-0.63
0.035
0.035
8.2 Supplying an alloy grade that specifically requires
the addition of any element other than those listed in 8.1
is not permitted.
9.1 When requested on the purchase order, a product
analysis shall be made by the supplier from one tube per
250 pieces or when tubes are identified by heat, one tube
per heat shall be analyzed. The chemical composition thus
determined shall confom to the requirements specified.
9.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests
of two additional billets or tubes shall be made. Both
retests, for the elements in question shall meet the requirements of this specification; otherwise all remaining material in the heat or lot (Note 2) shall be rejected or, at
the option of t!?e rn r o d l ~ r ~Pr S ~ billet
~ I
or @ ~ bmay
e be
individually tested for acceptance. Billets or tubes which
do not meet the requirements of the specification shall
be rejected.
--
---9
----
NOTE 2 - A lot consists of 250 tubes.
10. Hardness Requirements
10.1 The tube shall have a hardness number not
exceeding 72 HRB.
11. Mechanical Tests Required
11.1 Flattening Test - One flattening test shall be
made on specimens from each of two tubes from each
lot (Note 2) or fraction thereof.
11.2 Flaring Test - One flaring test shall be made
on specimens from each of two tubes from each lot (Note
2) or fraction thereof.
11.3 Flange Test - When specified as a substitute for
the flaring test, for tubes having a wall thickness (actual
mean wall) less than 10% of the outside diameter, one
test shall be made on specimens from each of two tubes
from each lot (Note 2) or fraction thereo1. For tubes other
than specified above, the flange test shall not be required.
11.4 Hardness Test - Rockwell llardness tests shall
be made on specimens from two tubes from each lot.
The term lot applies to all tubes, prior to cutting, of the
same nominal diameter and wall thickness which are
produced from the same heat of steel. When final heat
treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot shall include
only those h ~ b e of
s the same size and the same heat which
are heat treated in the same furnace charge. When the
final heat treatment is in a continuous furnace, a lot shall
include all htbes of the same size and heat, heat treated
in the same furnace at the same temperature, time at heat,
and furnace speed.
11.5 Hydl-ostntic Test - Each tube shall be subjected
to the hydrostatic test, or instead of this test, a nondestructive electric test may be used when specified by the purchaser.
12. Product Marking
12.1 In addition to the marlung prescribed in Specification A 45WA 4501~1,the marking shail inciude the name
and order number of the purchaser.
PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE - For purposes of design, the following tensile properties may be assumed:
Tensile strength, min, ltsi [MPa]
Yield strength, min, ltsi [MPa]
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mrn, min, %
§A-179lSA-B79M
SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL FORGINGS,
FOR GENERAL-PURPOSE PIPING
SA-181 /SA-181M
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 181 /A 181M-95b except for editorial differences in paras. 7.3.2 and 12.6.)
1.
Scope
1.1 This specification covers nonstandard as-forged
fittings, valve components, and parts for general service.
Forgings made to this specification are limited to a maximum weight of 10 000 lb [4540 kg]. Larger forgings may
be ordered to Specification A 266.
A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
A 788 Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements
E 165 Test Methods for Liquid Penetrant Inspection
Method
E 709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination
1.2 Two grades of material are covered, designated
as Classes 60 and 70, respectively, and are classified in
accordance with their chemical composition and mechanical properties as specified in 5.1 and 6.1.
2.2 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX, Welding Qualifications
Section VIII, Pressure Vessels, Div. 1
1.3 Class 60 was formerly designated Grade I and
Class 70 was formerly designated Grade II.
2.3 Military Standard:
MIL-STD-163 Steel Mill Products, Preparation for Shipment and Storage
1.4 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound
units and SI units. However, unless the order specifies
the applicable “M” specification designation (SI units),
the material shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
2.4 AIAG Standard:
AIAG B-5 02.00 Primary Metals Identification Tag
Application Standard
1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or
SI units are to be regarded as standard. Within the text,
the SI units are shown in brackets. The values stated in
each system are not exact equivalents; therefore, each
system must be used independently of the other. Combining values from the two systems may result in nonconformance with the specification.
3.
Ordering Information
3.1 It is the purchaser’s responsibility to specify in
the purchase order all ordering information necessary to
purchase the needed material. Examples of such information include but are not limited to the following:
2.
Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
A 266 Specification for Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Pressure Vessel Components
A 275 /A 275M Test Method for Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings
A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
A 700 Practices for Packaging, Marking, and Loading
Methods for Steel Products for Domestic Shipment
3.1.1
3.1.2 Dimensions (Tolerances and surface finishes
should be included),
3.1.3 Specification number (The year date should
be included) and class,
3.1.4 Supplementary requirements, and
3.1.5 Additional requirements (See 4.6, 12.2, 10,
12.7, 17.2, 18.1, 18.2, and 11.1).
247
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Quantity,
Not for Resale
SA-181 /SA-181M
2004 SECTION II
4.
Materials and Manufacture
4.1 The steel shall be made by the open-hearth, basicoxygen, or electric-furnace process and shall be fully
killed.
The chemical composition thus determined shall conform
to Table 1 within the permissible variations of Table 2.
5.2.2 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A
751 shall apply.
4.2 A sufficient discard shall be made from source
material to secure freedom from injurious piping and
undue segregation.
6.
Mechanical Properties
6.1 The material shall conform to the requirements
as to tensile properties prescribed in Table 3.
4.3 The material shall be forged as close as practicable
to the specified shape and size.
6.2 Testing shall be performed in accordance with
Test Methods and Definitions A 370.
4.4 Except for flanges of all types, hollow, cylindrically shaped parts may be machined from hot-rolled or
forged bar, provided that the axial length of the part is
approximately parallel to the metal flow lines of the stock.
Other parts, excluding flanges of all types, up to and
including NPS 4 may be machined from hot-rolled or
forged bar. Elbows, return bends, tees, and header tees
shall not be machined directly from bar stock.
7.
Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
7.1 The forgings shall be free of injurious imperfections as defined below and shall have a workmanlike
finish. At the discretion of the inspector representing the
purchaser, finished forgings shall be subject to rejection
if surface imperfections acceptable under 7.3 are not scattered but appear over a large area in excess of what is
considered a workmanlike finish.
4.5 Except as permitted in 4.4, the finished product
shall be a forging as defined in the Terminology section
(exclusively) of Specification A 788.
7.2 Depth of Injurious Imperfections — Selected typical linear and other typical surface imperfections shall
be explored for depth. When the depth encroaches on the
minimum wall thickness of the finished forging, such
imperfections shall be considered injurious.
4.6 When specified in the order, the manufacturer
shall submit for approval of the purchaser a sketch showing the shape of the rough forging before machining.
4.7 Forgings shall be protected against sudden or too
rapid cooling from the rolling or forging while passing
through the critical range.
7.3 Machining or Grinding Imperfections Not Classified as Injurious — Surface imperfections not classified
as injurious shall be treated as follows:
4.8 Heat treatment is neither required nor prohibited,
but when applied, heat treatment shall consist of tempering, annealing, normalizing, or normalizing and tempering.
7.3.1 Forgings showing seams, laps, tears, or slivers
not deeper than 5% of the nominal wall thickness or 1⁄16
in. [1.6 mm], whichever is less, need not have these
imperfections removed. If the imperfections require
removal, they shall be removed by machining or grinding.
5.
Chemical Composition
5.1 Cast or Heat Analysis — An analysis of each cast
or heat shall be made by the manufacturer to determine
the percentages of the elements specified in Table 1. The
analysis shall be made from a test sample taken preferably
during the pouring of the cast or heat. The chemical
composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements in Table 1.
7.3.2 Mechanical marks or abrasions and pits shall
be acceptable without grinding or machining provided
the depth does not exceed the limitations set forth in
7.2 and if not deeper than 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm]. If such
imperfections are deeper than 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm] but do
not encroach on the minimum wall thickness of the forging they shall be removed by grinding to sound metal.
7.3.3 When imperfections have been removed by
grinding or machining, the outside dimension at the point
of grinding or machining may be reduced by the amount
removed. Should it be impracticable to secure a direct
measurement, the wall thickness at the point of grinding,
or at imperfections not required to be removed, shall be
determined by deducting the amount removed by grinding, from the nominal finished wall thickness of the forging, and the remainder shall not be less than the minimum
specified or required wall thickness.
5.2 Product Analysis:
5.2.1 The purchaser may make a product analysis
on forgings supplied to this specification by any of the
commonly accepted methods that will positively identify
the material. Samples for analysis may be taken from
midway between center and surface of solid forgings,
midway between inner and outer surfaces of hollow forgings, midway between center and surface of full-size
prolongations, or from broken mechanical test specimens.
248
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
8.
Number of Tests
8.1 One tension test shall be made from each heat.
12.2 Prior approval of the purchaser shall be required
to weld repair special parts made to the purchaser’s
requirements.
8.2 If any test specimen is defectively machined, it
may be discarded and another specimen substituted.
12.3 The welding procedure and welders shall be
qualified in accordance with Section IX of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
9.
Retests
9.1 When one or more representative test specimens
do not conform to specification requirements for the tested
characteristic, only a single retest for each nonconforming
characteristic may be performed to establish product
acceptability. Retests shall be performed on twice the
number of representative specimens that were originally
nonconforming. When any retest specimen does not conform to specification requirements for the characteristic
in question, the lot represented by that specimen shall be
rejected, heat-treated or reheat-treated in accordance with
4.8, and tested in accordance with Sections 6, 8, and 10.
12.4 The composition of the weld deposits shall be
similar to the base metal and in accordance with the
procedure qualification for the applicable material. Welding shall be accomplished with a weld procedure designed
to produce low hydrogen in the weldment. Short-circuit
gas metal arc welding is permissible only with the
approval of the purchaser.
12.5 Unacceptable imperfections shall be removed by
mechanical means or thermal cutting or gouging methods.
Cavities prepared for welding shall be examined by one
of the following methods to verify removal of the imperfection:
10. Test Specimens
10.1 The tension test specimens shall be machined
to the form and dimensions of the standard 2 in. [50 mm]
gage length tension test specimen shown in Fig. 4 of
Test Methods and Definitions A 370, except as specified
in 10.2.
12.5.1 Magnetic particle examination in accordance with Test Method A 275 or Guide E 709.
12.5.2 Liquid penetrant examination in accordance
with Test Method E 165.
12.6 Weld repaired area(s) shall be blended uniformly
to the base metal and shall be examined by the same
method used for 12.5.
10.2 In the case of small sections which will not
permit the taking of standard test specimen specified in
10.1, the tension test specimen shall be as large as feasible
and its dimensions shall be proportional to those shown
in Fig. 4 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. The
gage length for measuring elongation shall be four times
the diameter of the specimen.
12.7 Repair by welding shall neither exceed 10% of
the surface area of the part, nor 331⁄3% of the wall thickness of the finished product at the location of repair,
without prior approval of the purchaser.
10.3 For the purpose of determining conformance to
Table 3, specimens shall be obtained from the production
forgings, or from separately forged test blanks prepared
from the stock used to make the finished product. Such
test blanks shall receive approximately the same working
as the finished product.
13. Marking of Forgings
13.1 Identification marks consisting of the manufacturer’s symbol or name (Note), designation of service
rating, Specification number, grade, and size shall be
legibly forged or stamped on each forging, and in such
a position as not to injure the usefulness of the forgings.
The specification number marked on the forgings need
not include specification year of issue and revision letter.
11. Reports of Testing
11.1 Upon request of the purchaser in the contract or
order, a report of the test results and chemical analyses
shall be furnished. The specification designation included
on reports of testing shall include year of issue and revision letter, if any.
NOTE — For purposes of identification marking, the manufacturer is
considered the organization that certifies the piping component was
manufactured, sampled, and tested in accordance with this specification
and the results have been determined to meet the requirements of this
specification.
13.2 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements
in 13.1, bar coding is acceptable as a supplementary
identification method. The purchaser may specify in the
order a specific bar coding system to be used. The bar
coding system, if applied at the discretion of the supplier,
12. Repair by Welding
12.1 Repair welding, by the manufacturer, is permissible for parts made to dimensional standards such as those
of ANSI or equivalent standards.
249
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-181 /SA-181M
Not for Resale
SA-181 /SA-181M
2004 SECTION II
should be consistent with one of the published industry
standards for bar coding. If used on small parts, the bar
code may be applied to the box or a substantially
applied tag.
17.
Packaging, Marking, and Loading for
Shipment
17.1 Packaging, marking, and loading for shipment
shall be in accordance with Practices A 700.
17.2 When specified in the contract or order, and for
direct procurement by or direct shipment to the government, when level A is specified, preservation, packaging,
and packing shall be in accordance with the Level A
requirements of MIL-STD-163.
14. Inspection
14.1 The manufacturer shall afford the purchaser’s
inspector all reasonable facilities necessary to satisfy him
that the material is being produced and furnished in accordance with this specification. Mill inspection by the purchaser shall not interfere unnecessarily with the
manufacturer’s operations. All tests and inspections shall
be made at the place of manufacture, unless otherwise
agreed to.
18. Certificate of Compliance
18.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract,
a producer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished
to the purchaser that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification and has been found to meet the requirements.
The specification designation included on certificates of
compliance shall include year of issue and revision letter,
if any.
15. Rejection
15.1 Each forging that develops injurious defects during shop working or application shall be rejected and the
manufacturer notified.
18.2 When specified in the purchase order or contract,
a report of the test results shall be furnished.
16. Rehearing
16.1 Samples representing material rejected by the
purchaser shall be preserved until disposition of the claim
has been agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
19. Keywords
19.1 pipe fittings; steel; piping applications; pressure
containing parts; steel forgings; carbon; steel valves
250
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-181 /SA-181M
TABLE 1
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
Element
Composition, %
Classes 60 and 70
Carbon, max
Manganese, max
Phosphorus, max
Silicon, max
Sulfur, max
0.35
1.10 A
0.05
0.10–0.35
0.05
A
Manganese may be increased to 1.35% max provided the carbon is reduced 0.01% for each 0.06% increase in manganese over
the limit shown in the table.
TABLE 2
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS IN PRODUCT ANALYSIS
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Permissible Variations over the Maximum Limit or Under the Minimum Limit, %
Manganese
Up to and including 0.90
0.91 and over
Phosphorus
Sulfur
Silicon
200 in.2 [1290 cm2]
and under
Over 200 to 400 in.2
[1290 to 2580 cm2]
incl
Over 400 to 800 in.2
[2580 to 5160 cm2]
incl
Over 800 to 1600 in.2
[5160 to 10 320
cm2]
Over 1600 in.2
[10 320 cm2]
0.04
0.06
0.008
0.010
0.03
0.05
0.07
0.010
0.010
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.010
0.010
0.04
0.07
0.08
0.015
0.015
0.05
0.08
0.09
0.015
0.015
0.06
NOTE 1 — Product cross-sectional area (taken at right angles to the axis of the original ingot or billet) is defined as either:
(a) maximum cross-sectional area of rough machined forging (excluding boring),
(b) maximum cross-sectional area of the unmachined forging, or
(c) maximum cross-sectional area of the billet, bloom or slab.
TABLE 3
TENSILE REQUIREMENTS
Tensile strength, min, ksi [MPa]
Yield strength, A min, ksi [MPa]
Elongation in 2 in. [50 mm], min, %
Reduction of area, min, %
Class 60
Class 70
60 [415]
30 [205]
22
35
70 [485]
36 [250]
18
24
A
Determined by either the 0.2% offset method or the 0.5%
extension-under-load method.
251
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-181 /SA-181M
2004 SECTION II
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
S1.
Carbon Equivalent
S1.2 Determine the carbon equivalent (CE) as
follows:
S1.1 The maximum carbon equivalent based on heat
analysis shall be as follows:
Class
60
70
CE p Mn/6 + (Cr + Mo + V)/5 + (Ni + Cu)/15
S1.3 A lower maximum carbon equivalent may be
agreed upon between the supplier and the purchaser.
Maximum Carbon Equivalent Value
Maximum Section Thickness Maximum Section Thickness
Less Than or Equal to 2 in.
Greater Than 2 in.
0.45
0.47
S1.4 When this Supplementary Requirement is
invoked, all elements in the carbon equivalent formula
shall be analyzed and the amounts reported.
0.46
0.48
252
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SPECIFICATION FOR FORGED OR ROLLED
ALLOY-STEEL PIPE FLANGES, FORGED FITTINGS,
AND VALVES AND PARTS FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE
SERVICE
SA-182/SA-182M
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 182/A 182M-99 except for the inclusion of Grades S33228 and S30815 in the parenthetical section of
para. 5.3.1 disallowing direct heat treatment. Editorial changes have been made in paras. 1.2 and 2.1 and in Table 2.)
1.
Scope
1.1 This specification covers forged low alloy and
stainless steel piping components for use in pressure systems. Included are flanges, fittings, valves, and similar
parts to specified dimensions or to dimensional standards
such as the ASME specifications that are referenced in
Section 2.
Within the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The
values stated in each system are not exact equivalents;
therefore, each system must be used independently of the
other. Combining values from the two systems may result
in nonconformance with the specification.
2.
Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
A 234 / A 234M Specification for Piping Fittings of
Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate
and Elevated Temperatures
A 262 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steels
A 275 /A 275M Test Method for Magnetic Particle Examination of Steel Forgings
A 336 /A 336M Specification for Steel Forgings, Alloy,
for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts
A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
A 403 /A 403M Specification for Wrought Austenitic
Stainless Steel Piping Fittings
A 479 /A 479M Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and
Other Pressure Vessels
A 484 /A 484M Specification for General Requirements
for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Bars, Billets, and
Forgings
A 739 Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Hot-Wrought,
for Elevated Temperature or Pressure-Containing
Parts, or Both
1.2 For bars and products machined directly from bar,
refer to Specifications A 479 /A 479M and A 739 for the
similar grades available in those specifications. Products
made to this specification are limited to a maximum
weight of 10, 000 lb [4540 kg]. For larger products and
products for other applications, refer to Specification
A 336 / A 336M and A 965 / A 965M for the similar
grades available in these specifications.
1.3 Several grades of low alloy steels and ferritic,
martensitic, austenitic, and ferritic-austenitic stainless
steels are included in this specification. Selection will
depend upon design and service requirements.
1.4 Supplementary requirements are provided for use
when additional testing or inspection is desired. These
shall apply only when specified individually by the purchaser in the order.
1.5 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound
units and in SI units. However, unless the order specifies
the applicable “M” specification designation (SI units),
the material shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
1.6 The values stated in either inch-pound units or
SI units are to be regarded separately as the standard.
253
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-182/SA-182M
2004 SECTION II
A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
A 763 Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Ferritic Stainless Steels
A 788 Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements
A 965 /A 965M Specification for Steel Forgings, Austenitic, for Pressure and High-Temperature Parts
E 112 Test Methods for Determining the Average
Grain Size
E 165 Practice for Liquid Penetrant Inspection Method
E 340 Test Method for Macroetching Metals and Alloys
rough forging before machining and the exact location
of test specimen material (see 7.3.1).
4.
Manufacture
4.1 The low-alloy ferritic steels may be made by
the open-hearth, electric-furnace, or basic-oxygen process
with separate degassing and refining optional. The basicoxygen process shall be limited to steels containing not
over 6% chromium.
4.2 The stainless steels shall be melted by one of the
following processes: (a) electric-furnace (with separate
degassing and refining optional); (b) vacuum-furnace; or
(c) one of the former followed by vacuum or electroslagconsumable remelting. Grade F XM-27Cb may be produced by electron-beam melting. Because of difficulties
that may be met in retaining nitrogen, vacuum melting
or remelting processes should not be specified for Grades
F XM-11, F 304LN, F 316LN, F 304N, F 316N, F XM19, F 44, F 45, F 48, F 49, F 50, F 51, F 52, F 53, F 54,
F 55, F 58, F 59, or F 60.
2.2 MSS Standard:
SP 25 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings,
Flanges, and Unions
2.3 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes:
Section IX Welding Qualifications
SFA-5.4 Specification for Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Covered Welding
Electrodes
SFA-5.5 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Covered ArcWelding Electrodes
SFA-5.9 Specification for Corrosion-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Welding Rods and
Bare Electrodes
SFA-5.11 Specification for Nickel and Nickel-Alloy Covered Welding Electrodes
4.3 A sufficient discard shall be made to secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation.
4.4 The material shall be forged as close as practicable
to the specified shape and size. Except for flanges of any
type, forged or rolled bar may be used without additional
hot working for small cylindrically shaped parts within
the limits defined by Specification A 234 /A 234M for
low alloy steels and martensitic stainless steels and Specification A 403 /A 403M for austenitic and ferritic-austenitic stainless steels. Elbows, return bends, tees, and header
tees shall not be machined directly from bar stock.
2.4 ANSI Standards:
B16.5 Dimensional Standards for Steel Pipe Flanges and
Flanged Fittings
B16.10 Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous Valves
B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Weld, and Threaded
4.5 Except as provided for in 4.4, the finished product
shall be a forging as defined in the Terminology section
of Specification A 788.
3.
Ordering Information
3.1 It is the purchaser’s responsibility to specify in
the purchase order all ordering information necessary to
purchase the needed material. Examples of such information include but are not limited to the following:
3.1.1
5.
Heat Treatment
5.1 After hot working, forgings shall be cooled to a
temperature below 1000°F [538°C] prior to heat treating
in accordance with the requirements of Table 1.
Quantity,
3.1.2 Size and pressure class or dimensions (tolerances and surface finishes should be included),
5.2 Low Alloy Steels and Ferritic and Martensitic
Stainless Steels — The low alloy steels and ferritic and
martensitic stainless steels shall be heat treated in accordance with the requirements of 5.1 and Table 1.
3.1.3 Specification number, grade, and class if
applicable (the year date should be included),
3.1.4 Supplementary requirements,
5.2.1 Grade F 22V shall be furnished in the normalized and tempered, or liquid quenched and tempered condition. The minimum austenitizing temperature shall be
1650°F [900°C], and the minimum tempering temperature shall be 1250°F [677°C].
3.1.5 Additional requirements (see 5.2.2, Table 2
footnotes, 7.3, 15.1, and 18.2), and
3.1.6 Requirement, if any, that manufacturer shall
submit drawings for approval showing the shape of the
254
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.2.2 Liquid Quenching — When agreed to by the
purchaser, liquid quenching followed by tempering shall
be permitted provided the temperatures in Table 1 for
each grade are utilized.
6.3 Starting material produced to a specification that
specifically requires the addition of any element beyond
those listed in Table 2 for the applicable grade of material,
is not permitted.
5.2.2.1 Marking — Parts that are liquid quenched
and tempered shall be marked “QT.”
7.
Mechanical Properties
7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements
as to mechanical properties for the grade ordered as listed
in Table 3.
5.2.3 Alternatively, Grades F 1, F 2, and F 12,
Classes 1 and 2 may be given a heat treatment of 1200°F
[650°C] minimum after final hot or cold forming.
5.3 Austenitic and Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless
Steels — The austenitic and ferritic-austenitic stainless
steels shall be heat treated in accordance with the requirements of 5.1 and Table 1.
7.2 Mechanical test specimens shall be obtained from
production forgings, or from separately forged test blanks
prepared from the stock used to make the finished product.
In either case, mechanical test specimens shall not be
removed until after all heat treatment is complete. If repair
welding is required, test specimens shall not be removed
until after post-weld heat treatment is complete, except
for ferritic grades when the post-weld heat treatment is
conducted at least 50°F [30°C] below the actual tempering temperature. When test blanks are used, they shall
receive approximately the same working as the finished
product. The test blanks shall be heat treated with the
finished product and shall approximate the maximum
cross-section of the forgings they represent.
5.3.1 Alternatively, immediately following hot
working, while the temperature of the forging is not less
than the minimum solutioning temperature specified in
Table 1, forgings made from austenitic grades (except
grades S33228, S30815, F 304H, F 316H, F 321, F 321H,
F 347, F 347H, F 348, and F 348H) may be individually
rapidly quenched in accordance with the requirements of
Table 1.
5.3.2 See Supplementary Requirement S14 if a particular heat treatment method is to be employed.
5.4 Time of Heat Treatment — Heat treatment of forgings may be performed before machining.
7.3 For normalized and tempered, or quenched and
tempered forgings, the central axis of the test specimen
shall correspond to the 1⁄4 T plane or deeper position
where T is the maximum heat-treated thickness of the
represented forging. In addition, for quenched and tempered forgings, the midlength of the test specimen shall
be at least T from any second heat-treated surface. When
the section thickness does not permit this positioning, the
test specimen shall be positioned as near as possible to
the prescribed location, as agreed to by the purchaser and
the supplier.
5.5 Forged or Rolled Bar — Forged or rolled austenitic
stainless bar from which small cylindrically shaped parts
are to be machined, as permitted by 4.4, and the parts
machined from such bar, without heat treatment after
machining, shall be furnished to the annealing requirements of Specification A 479 or this specification, with
subsequent light cold drawing and straightening permitted
(see Supplementary Requirement S9 if annealing must
be the final operation).
7.3.1 With prior purchase approval, the test specimen for ferritic steel forgings may be taken at a depth (t)
corresponding to the distance from the area of significant
stress to the nearest heat-treated surface and at least twice
this distance (2t) from any second surface. However, the
test depth shall not be nearer to one treated surface than
3
⁄4 in. [19 mm] and to the second treated surface than 11⁄2
in. [38 mm]. This method of test specimen location would
normally apply to contour-forged parts, or parts with thick
cross-sectional areas where 1⁄4 T ⴛ T testing (7.3) is not
practical. Sketches showing the exact test locations shall
be approved by the purchaser when this method is used.
NOTE 1 — A solution annealing temperature above 1950°F [1065°C]
may impair the resistance to intergranular corrosion after subsequent
exposure to sensitizing conditions in F 321, F 321H, F 347, F 347H,
F 348, F 348H. When specified by the purchaser, a lower temperature
stabilization or resolution annealing shall be used subsequent to the
initial high temperature solution anneal (see Supplementary Requirement S16).
6.
Chemical Composition
6.1 The steel shall conform to the requirements as to
chemical composition for the grade ordered as listed in
Table 2. Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology A
751 shall apply.
7.4 For annealed low alloy steel, ferritic stainless
steels, and martensitic stainless steels, and also for austenitic and ferritic-austenitic stainless steels, the test specimen may be taken from any convenient location.
6.2 Grades to which lead, selenium, or other elements
are added for the purpose of rendering the material freemachining shall not be used.
255
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-182/SA-182M
Not for Resale
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
SA-182/SA-182M
2004 SECTION II
7.5 Tension Tests:
7.5.1 Low Alloy Steels and Ferritic and Martensitic
Stainless Steels — One tension test shall be made for
each heat in each heat treatment charge.
NOTE 3 — The tension test required in 7.5.1 is used to determine
material capability and conformance in addition to verifying the adequacy of the heat-treatment cycle. Additional hardness tests in accordance with 7.6.2 are required when 7.5.1.1 is applied to enssure the
prescribed heat-treating cycle and uniformity throughout the load.
7.5.1.1 When the heat-treating cycles are the
same and the furnaces (either batch or continuous type)
are controlled within ±25°F [±14°C] and equipped with
recording pyrometers so that complete records of heat
treatment are available, then only one tension test from
each heat of each forging type (Note 1) and section size
is required instead of one test from each heat in each
heat-treatment charge.
7.7 Notch Toughness Requirements — Grades F 3V,
F 3VCb, and F 22V.
7.7.1 Impact test specimens shall be Charpy Vnotch type, as shown in Fig. 11a of Test Methods and
Definitions A 370. The usage of subsize specimens due to
material limitations must have prior purchaser approval.
7.7.2 The Charpy V-notch test specimens shall be
obtained as required for tension tests in 7.2, 7.3, and 7.5.
One set of three Charpy V-notch specimens shall be taken
from each tensile specimen location.
NOTE 2 — “Type” in this case is used to describe the forging shape
such as a flange, ell, tee, etc.
7.5.2 Austenitic and Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless
Steel Grades — One tension test shall be made for
each heat.
7.7.3 The longitudinal axis and mid-length of
impact specimen shall be located similarly to the longitudinal axis of the tension test specimens. The axis of the
notch shall be normal to the nearest heat-treated surface
of the forging.
7.5.2.1 When heat treated in accordance with
5.1, the test blank or forging used to provide the test
specimen shall be heat treated with a finished forged
product.
7.7.4 The Charpy V-notch tests shall meet a minimum energy absorption value of 40 ft-lbf [54 J] average
of three specimens. One specimen only in one set may
be below 40 ft-lbf [54 J], and it shall meet a minimum
value of 35 ft-lbf [48 J].
7.5.2.2 When the alternative method in 5.3.1 is
used, the test blank or forging used to provide the test
specimen shall be forged and quenched under the same
processing conditions as the forgings they represent.
7.7.5 The impact test temperature shall be 0°F
[−18°C].
7.5.3 Testing shall be performed in accordance with
Test Methods and Definitions A 370 using the largest
feasible of the round specimens. The gage length for
measuring elongation shall be four times the diameter of
the test section.
8.
Grain Size for Austenitic Grades
8.1 All H grades shall be tested for average grain size
by Test Methods E 112.
7.6 Hardness Tests:
7.6.1 Except when only one forging is produced,
a minimum of two pieces per batch or continuous run as
defined in 7.6.2 shall be hardness tested in accordance
with Test Methods and Definitions A 370 to ensure that
the forgings are within the hardness limits given for each
grade in Table 3. The purchaser may verify that the
requirement has been met by testing at any location on
the forging provided such testing does not render the
forging useless.
8.1.1 Grades F 304H, F 309H, F 310H, and F 316H
shall have a grain size of ASTM No. 6 or coarser.
8.1.2 Grades F 321H, F 347H, and F 348H shall
have a grain size of ASTM No. 7 or coarser.
9.
Corrosion Testing for Austenitic Grades
9.1 Corrosion testing is not required by this specification.
7.6.2 When the reduced number of tension tests
permitted by 7.5.1.1 is applied, additional hardness tests
shall be made on forgings or samples as defined in 7.2
scattered throughout the load (Note 2). At least eight
samples shall be checked from each batch load and at
least one check per hour shall be made from a continuous
run. When the furnace batch is less than eight forgings,
each forging shall be checked. If any check falls outside
the prescribed limits, the entire lot of forgings shall be
reheat treated and the requirements of 7.5.1 shall apply.
9.2 Austenitic grades shall be capable of meeting
the intergranular corrosion test requirements described in
Supplementary Requirement S10.
10. Cast or Heat (Formerly Ladle) Analysis
10.1 Each heat or furnace ladle of steel shall be analyzed by the manufacturer to determine the percentage
of elements prescribed in Table 2. This analysis shall be
256
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
made from a test specimen preferably taken during the
pouring of the steel. For multiple-heat ingots, either individual heat analyses or a weighted average analysis may
be reported. The steel shall conform to the chemical
composition requirements prescribed in Table 2.
SA-182/SA-182M
13.3 Depth of Injurious Imperfections — Linear
imperfections shall be explored for depth. When the depth
encroaches on the minimum wall thickness of the finished
forging, such imperfections shall be considered injurious.
13.4 Machining or Grinding Imperfections Not Classified as Injurious — Surface imperfections not classified
as injurious shall be treated as follows:
10.1.1 If the test sample is lost or declared inadequate for chemical determinations, the manufacturer may
take alternative samples from appropriate locations near
the surface of the ingot or forging as necessary to establish
the analysis of the heat in question.
13.4.1 Seams, laps, tears, or slivers not deeper than
5% of the nominal wall thickness or 1⁄16 in. [1.6 mm],
whichever is less, need not be removed. If these imperfections are removed, they shall be removed by machining
or grinding.
10.1.2 If consumable remelting processes are
employed, a chemical analysis made on one remelted
ingot (or the product of one remelted ingot) per heat shall
be taken as the heat analysis, and shall conform to the
chemical composition requirements prescribed in Table
2. For this purpose, a heat is defined as all of the ingots
remelted from a single primary melt.
13.4.2 Mechanical marks or abrasions and pits shall
be acceptable without grinding or machining provided
the depth does not exceed the limitations set forth in
13.4.1. Imperfections that are deeper than 1⁄16 in. [1.6
mm], but which do not encroach on the minimum wall
thickness of the forging shall be removed by grinding to
sound metal.
11. Product Analysis
11.1 The purchaser may make a product analysis on
forgings supplied to this specification. Samples for analysis shall be taken from midway between the center and
surface of solid forgings, midway between the inner and
outer surfaces of hollow forgings, midway between the
center and surface of full-size prolongations, or from
broken mechanical test specimens. The chemical composition thus determined shall conform to Table 2 with the
tolerances as stated in Table 4 or Table 5.
13.4.3 When imperfections have been removed by
grinding or machining, the outside dimension at the point
of grinding or machining may be reduced by the amount
removed. Should it be impracticable to secure a direct
measurement, the wall thickness at the point of grinding,
or at an imperfection not required to be removed, shall be
determined by deducting the amount removed by grinding
from the nominal finished wall thickness of the forging,
and the remainder shall be not less than the minimum
specified or required wall thickness.
12. Retreatment
12.1 If the results of the mechanical tests do not
conform to the requirements specified, the manufacturer
may reheat treat the forgings and repeat the tests specified
in Section 7.
14. Repair by Welding
14.1 Weld repairs shall be permitted (see Supplementary Requirement S7) at the discretion of the manufacturer
with the following limitations and requirements:
14.1.1 The welding procedure and welders shall
be qualified in accordance with Section IX of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
13. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
13.1 The forgings shall be free of scale, machining
burrs which might hinder fit-up, and other injurious
imperfections as defined herein. The forgings shall have
a workmanlike finish and machined surfaces (other than
surfaces having special requirements) shall have a surface
finish not to exceed 250 AA (arithmetic average)
roughness height.
14.1.2 The weld metal shall be deposited using
the electrodes specified in Table 6 except as otherwise
provided in Supplementary Requirement S11. The electrodes shall be purchased in accordance with ASME Specification SFA-5.4, SFA-5.5, SFA-5.9, or SFA-5.11. The
submerged arc process with neutral flux, the gas metalarc process, the gas tungsten-arc process, and gas shielded
processes using flux-core consumables, may be used.
13.2 At the discretion of the inspector representing the
purchaser, finished forgings shall be subject to rejection
if surface imperfections acceptable under 13.4 are not
scattered but appear over a large area in excess of what
is considered to be a workmanlike finish.
14.1.3 Defects shall be completely removed prior
to welding by chipping or grinding to sound metal as
verified by magnetic particle inspection in accordance
with Test Method A 275 /A 275M for the low alloy steels
and ferritic, martensitic, or ferritic-austenitic stainless
257
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
SA-182/SA-182M
2004 SECTION II
steels, or by liquid penetrant inspection in accordance
with Practice E 165 for all grades.
been met. The specification designation included on test
reports shall include year of issue and revision letter, if
any. The manufacturer shall provide the following where
applicable:
14.1.4 After repair welding, the welded area shall
be ground smooth to the original contour and shall be
completely free of defects as verified by magnetic-particle
or liquid-penetrant inspection, as applicable.
17.2.1 Type heat treatment, Section 5;
17.2.2 Product analysis results, Section 11 (Tables
2, 4, and 5);
14.1.5 The preheat, interpass temperature and postweld heat treatment requirements given in Table 6 shall
be met. Austenitic stainless steel forgings may be repairwelded without the post-weld heat treatment of Table 6,
provided purchaser approval is obtained prior to repair.
17.2.3 Tensile property results, Section 7 (Table
3), report the yield strength and ultimate strength, in ksi
[MPa], elongation and reduction in area, in percent;
17.2.4 Chemical analysis results, Section 6
(Table 2);
14.1.6 Repair by welding shall not exceed 10% of
the surface area of the forging nor 331⁄3% of the wall
thickness of the finished forging or 3⁄8 in. [9.5 mm],
whichever is less, without prior approval of the purchaser.
17.2.5 Hardness results, Section 7 (Table 3);
17.2.6 Grain size results, Section 8, and
14.1.7 When approval of the purchaser is obtained,
the limitations set forth in 14.1.6 may be exceeded, but
all other requirements of Section 14 shall apply.
17.2.7 Any supplementary testing required by the
purchase order.
14.1.8 No weld repairs are permitted for F 6a
Classes 3 and 4.
18.
Product Marking
18.1 Identification marks consisting of the manufacturer’s symbol or name (Note 3), the heat number or
manufacturer’s heat identification, designation of service
rating, the specification number, the designation, F 1, F 2,
etc., showing the grade of material, and the size shall be
legibly stamped on each forging or the forgings may
be marked in accordance with Standard SP 25 of the
Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and
Fittings Industry, and in such position so as not to injure
the usefulness of the forging. The specification number
marked on the forgings need not include specification
year of issue and revision letter.
15. Inspection
15.1 The manufacturer shall afford the purchaser’s
inspector all reasonable facilities necessary to satisfy him
that the material is being furnished in accordance with
the purchase order. Inspection by the purchaser shall not
interfere unnecessarily with the manufacturer’s operations. All tests and inspections shall be made at the place
of manufacture unless otherwise agreed upon.
16. Rejection
16.1 Each forging that develops injurious defects during shop working operations or in service shall be rejected
and the manufacturer notified.
NOTE 4 — For purposes of identification marking, the manufacturer
is considered the organization that certifies the piping component was
manufactured, sampled, and tested in accordance with this specification
and the results have been determined to meet the requirements of this
specification.
16.2 Samples representing material rejected by the
purchaser shall be preserved until disposition of the claim
has been agreed upon between the manufacturer and the
purchaser.
18.1.1 Quenched and tempered low alloy or martensitic stainless forgings shall be stamped with the letters
“QT” following the specification designation.
17. Certification
17.1 For forgings made to specified dimensions, when
agreed upon by the purchaser, and for forgings made to
dimensional standards, the application of identification
marks as required in 18.1 shall be the certification that
the forgings have been furnished in accordance with the
requirements of this specification.
18.1.2 Forgings repaired by welding shall be
marked with the letter “W” following the Specification
designation. When repair-welded austenitic stainless steel
forgings have not been postweld heat treated in accordance with Table 6, the letters “WNS” shall be marked
following the specification designation.
18.1.3 When test reports are required, the markings
shall consist of the manufacturer’s symbol or name, the
grade symbol, and such other markings as necessary to
17.2 Test reports, when required, shall include certification that all requirements of this specification have
258
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
identify the part with the test report (18.1.1 and 18.1.2
shall apply).
for bar coding. If used on small parts, the bar code may
be applied to the box or a substantially applied tag.
18.1.4 Parts meeting all requirements for more than
one class or grade may be marked with more than one
class or grade designation such as F 304/F 304H, F 304/
F 304L, etc.
19. Keywords
19.1 austenitic stainless steel; chromium alloy steel;
chromium-molybdenum steel; ferritic/austenitic stainless
steel; ferritic stainless steel; martensitic stainless steel;
nickel alloy steel; notch toughness requirements; pipe
fittings, steel; piping applications; pressure containing
parts; stainless steel fittings; stainless steel forgings; steel
flanges; steel forgings, alloy; steel valves; temperature
service applications, elevated; temperature service application, high; wrought material
18.2 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements in
18.1, bar coding is acceptable as a supplemental identification method. The purchaser may specify in the order
a specific bar coding system to be used. The bar coding
system, if applied at the discretion of the supplier, should
be consistent with one of the published industry standards
259
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-182/SA-182M
Not for Resale
SA-182/SA-182M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE 1
HEAT TREATING REQUIREMENTS
Grade
Heat Treat Type
Austenitizing/Solutioning
Temperature, Min.
°F (°C) A
Cooling
Media
Quenching
Cool Below
°F (°C)
Tempering
Temperature,
Min. °F (°C)
Low Alloy Steels
F1
F 91
anneal
normalize
anneal
normalize
anneal
normalize
anneal
normalize
normalize
F 92
F 911
normalize and temper
normalize and temper
F 11, Classes 1, 2, and 3
anneal
normalize
anneal
normalize
anneal
normalize
anneal
normalize
anneal
normalize
normalize
F2
F 5, F 5a
F9
F 12, Classes 1 and 2
F 21, F 3V, and F 3VCb
F 22, Classes 1 and 3
FR
and temper
and temper
and temper
and temper
and temper
and temper
and temper
and temper
and temper
and temper
1650 [900]
1650 [900]
1650 [900]
1650 [900]
1750 [955]
1750 [955]
1750 [955]
1750 [955]
1900–2000
[1040–1095]
1900 [1040]
1900–2000
[1040–1095]
1650 [900]
1650 [900]
1650 [900]
1650 [900]
1750 [955]
1750 [955]
1650 [900]
1650 [900]
1750 [955]
1750 [955]
1750 [955]
furnace cool
air cool
furnace cool
air cool
furnace cool
air cool
furnace cool
air cool
air cool
B
B
B
1150 [620]
air cool
air cool or liquid
B
furnace cool
air cool
furnace cool
air cool
furnace cool
air cool
furnace cool
air cool
furnace cool
air cool
air cool
B
B
B
1150 [620]
B
B
B
1150 [620]
B
B
B
1250 [675]
B
B
B
1250 [675]
1350 [730]
B
B
1350 [730]
1350 [730]
B
B
B
1150 [620]
B
B
B
1250 [675]
B
B
B
1250 [675]
B
B
B
B
B
1250 [675]
furnace cool
air cool
B
B
400 [205]
B
B
1325 [725]
1325 [725]
furnace cool
air cool
B
B
400 [205]
B
B
1250 [675]
1250 [675]
furnace cool
air cool
furnace cool
air cool
furnace cool
air cool
air cool
B
B
furnace cool
furnace cool
furnace cool
Martensitic Stainless Steels
F 6a Class 1
F 6a Class 2
F 6a Class 3
F 6a Class 4
F 6b
F 6NM
anneal
normalize
temper
anneal
normalize
temper
anneal
normalize
anneal
normalize
anneal
normalize
normalize
and temper
and temper
and temper
and temper
and temper
and temper
not specified
not specified
not required
not specified
not specified
not required
not specified
not specified
not specified
not specified
1750 [955]
1750 [955]
1850 [1010]
400 [205]
1100 [595]
B
B
400 [205]
1000 [540]
B
B
400 [205]
200 [95]
1150 [620]
1040–1120
[560–600]
B
B
B
B
B
B
Ferritic Stainless Steels
F XM-27Cb
F 429
F 430
anneal
anneal
anneal
1850 [1010]
1850 [1010]
not specified
260
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-182/SA-182M
TABLE 1
HEAT TREATING REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D)
Grade
Heat Treat Type
Austenitizing/Solutioning
Temperature, Min.
°F (°C) A
Cooling
Media
Quenching
Cool Below
°F (°C)
Tempering
Temperature,
Min. °F (°C)
Austenitic Stainless Steels
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
304
304H
304L
304N
304LN
309H
310
310H
310MoLn
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
316
316H
316L
316N
316LN
317
317L
347
347H
348
348H
321
321H
XM-11
XM-19
10
20
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
solution
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
treat
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
and
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
quench
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
F 44
F 45
F 46
solution treat and quench
solution treat and quench
solution treat and quench
F
F
F
F
solution
solution
solution
solution
47
48
49
56
F 58
treat
treat
treat
treat
and
and
and
and
quench
quench
quench
quench
solution treat and quench
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
1900–2010
[1050–1100]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
2000 [1095]
1900 [1040]
2000 [1095]
1900 [1040]
2000 [1095]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
1700–1850
[925–1010]
2100 [1150]
1900 [1040]
2010–2140
[1100–1140]
1900 [1040]
1900 [1040]
2050 [1120]
2050–2160
[1120–1180]
2025 [1105]
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
B
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
B
liquid
liquid
liquid
500 [260]
500 [260]
500 [260]
B
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
500
500
500
500
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
B
liquid
500 [260]
B
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
liquid
500
500
500
500
500
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
[260]
B
liquid
500 [260]
B
liquid
liquid
175 [80]
500 [260]
B
liquid
liquid
500 [260]
500 [260]
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels
F
F
F
F
F
50
51
52
53
54
C
solution treat and
solution treat and
...
solution treat and
solution treat and
quench
quench
quench
quench
F 55
solution treat and quench
F 57
F 59
solution treat and quench
solution treat and quench
F 60
F 61
solution treat and quench
solution treat and quench
1925 [1050]
1870 [1020]
...
1880 [1025]
1920–2060
[1050–1125]
2010–2085
[1100–1140]
1940 [1060]
1975–2050
[1080–1120]
1870 [1020]
1920–2060
[1050–1125]
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
Minimum unless temperature range is listed.
Not applicable.
C
Grade F 52 shall be solution treated at 1825 to 1875°F [995 to 1025°C] 30 min/in. of thickness and water quenched.
B
261
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
...
K11597
K11572
K11572
K11562
K11564
K31545
K31830
F 11 Class 1
F 11 Class 2
F 11 Class 3
F 12 Class 1
F 12 Class 2
F 21
F 3V
...
F 911
F 92
K41545
K42544
K90941
...
F1
F 2A
5B
5aB
9
91
K12822
K12122
Identification Symbol
F
F
F
F
UNS
Designation
262
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Not for Resale
1.25% chromium, 0.5%
molybdenum
1.25% chromium, 0.5%
molybdenum
1.25% chromium, 0.5%
molybdenum
1% chromium, 0.5%
molybdenum
1% chromium, 0.5%
molybdenum
chromium-molybdenum
3% chromium, 1% molybdenum, 0.25% vanadium plus boron and
titanium
9% chromium, 1% molybdenum, 0.2% vanadium
plus columbium and
nitrogen
9% chromium, 1.8% tungsten, 0.2% vanadium
plus columbium
carbon-molybdenum
0.5% chromium, 0.5%
molybdenum
4 to 6% chromium
4 to 6% chromium
9% chromium
9% chromium, 1% molybdenum, 0.2% vanadium
plus columbium and
nitrogen
Grade
0.040
0.020
0.30–0.60
0.30–0.60
0.05–0.15
0.05–0.18
0.040
0.30–0.80
0.10–0.20
0.045
0.040
0.040
0.030
0.040
0.020
0.040
0.045
0.040
0.040
0.030
0.010
0.010
0.020
0.045
0.040
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.010
0.020
Silicon
0.50 max.
0.10 max.
0.10–0.60
0.80–1.06
0.90–1.10
2.7–3.3
2.8–3.2
...
...
0.44–0.65
0.80–1.25
...
0.44–0.65
0.44–0.65
0.44–0.65
0.44–0.65
0.90–1.10
...
0.015–
0.035
...
...
...
...
Other elements
V 0.20–0.30
B 0.001–0.003
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Titanium
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Other elements
W 0.90–1.10
Cb 0.060–0.01
Al 0.04 max.
N 0.04–0.09
V 0.18–0.25
B 0.0003–0.006
Other elements
Cb 0.04–0.09
V 0.15–0.25
N 0.030–0.070
Al 0.04 max.
W 1.50–2.00
B 0.001–0.006
0.30–0.60
...
...
Tantalum,
Max.
...
...
...
...
...
...
Other elements
Cb 0.06–0.10
N 0.03–0.07
Al 0.04 max.
V 0.18–0.25
...
...
Columbium
0.44–0.65
0.44–0.65
0.90–1.10
0.85–1.05
0.44–0.65
0.44–0.65
0.80–1.25
1.00–1.50
1.00–1.50
1.00–1.50
8.5–10.5
8.50–9.50
4.0–6.0
4.0–6.0
8.0–10.0
8.0–9.5
...
0.50–0.81
Chromium
Molybdenum
...
...
0.50–1.00
0.50 max.
...
...
0.40 max.
0.40 max.
0.50 max.
0.50 max.
...
0.40 max.
...
...
Nickel
Composition, %
0.50–1.00
0.50–1.00
0.10–0.50
0.50 max.
0.50 max.
0.50 max.
0.50–1.00
0.20–0.50
0.15–0.35
0.10–0.60
Low Alloy Steels
Sulfur,
Max.
0.030
0.040
0.030
0.020
0.045
0.040
0.30–0.60
0.30–0.80
0.30–0.80
0.30–0.60
0.30–0.60
0.30–0.60
0.30–0.60
0.60 max.
0.30–0.60
0.30–0.60
0.60–0.90
0.30–0.80
0.05–0.15
0.10–0.20
0.10–0.20
0.05–0.15
0.09–0.13
0.07–0.13
0.15 max.
0.25 max.
0.15 max.
0.08–0.12
0.28 max.
0.05–0.21
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus,
Max.
TABLE 2
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS
SA-182/SA-182M
2004 SECTION II
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
S41500
S44627
F 6NM
F XM-27CbD
263
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
S30451
F 304NF
F 309H
S30909
S30453
S30400
S30409
S30403
F 304E
F 304H
F 304LE
F 304LN
S42900
S43000
F 429
F 430
F
S41000
S41026
F 22 Class 1
F 22 Class 3
F 22V
F 6a
F 6b
K21590
K21590
K31835
F 3VCb
K22035
...
Identification Symbol
FR
UNS
Designation
18 chromium, 8 nickel
18 chromium, 8 nickel
18 chromium, 8 nickel,
low carbon
18 chromium, 8 nickel,
modified with nitrogen
18 chromium, 8 nickel,
modified with nitrogen
23 chromium, 13.5 nickel
15 chromium
17 chromium
27 chromium, 1 molybdenum
13% chromium
13% chromium, 0.5%
molybdenum
13% chromium, 4%
nickel
2% nickel, 1% copper
chromium-molybdenum
chromium-molybdenum
2.25% chromium, 1%
molybdenum, 0.25%
vanadium
...
Grade
0.30–0.60
0.30–0.60
0.30–0.60
0.10–0.15
0.05–0.15
0.05–0.15
0.11–0.15
0.04–0.10
0.030 max.
0.08 max.
0.08 max.
0.04–0.10
0.030 max.
0.12 max.
0.12 max.
0.010 max.
0.05 max.
0.15 max.
0.15 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
0.40 max.
0.50–1.00
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
0.40–1.06
0.30–0.60
Carbon
0.20 max.
Manganese
Sulfur,
Max.
Silicon
0.050
0.040
0.040
0.010
0.010
...
0.50 max.
0.50 max.
0.10 max.
0.10 max.
0.030
0.030
0.020
0.60 max.
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
0.030
0.030
0.020
0.75 max.
0.75 max.
0.40 max.
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
1.00 max.
1.0 max.
1.0 max.
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
Austenitic Stainless Steels
0.040
0.040
0.020
Ferritic Stainless Steels
0.030
0.040
0.020
Martensitic Stainless Steels
0.045
0.040
0.040
0.015
0.020
Low Alloy Steels (Cont’d)
Phosphorus,
Max.
12.0–15.0
8.0–10.5
8.0–10.5
8.0–11.0
8.0–11.0
8.0–13.0
0.50 max.
0.50 max.
0.50 max.
3.5–5.5
0.50 max.
1.00–2.00
1.60–2.24
...
...
0.25 max.
0.25 max.
Nickel
22.0–24.0
18.0–20.0
18.0–20.0
18.0–20.0
18.0–20.0
18.0–20.0
14.0–16.0
16.0–18.0
25.0–27.5
11.5–14.0
11.5–13.5
11.5–13.5
...
2.00–2.50
2.00–2.50
2.00–2.50
2.7–3.3
Chromium
Composition, %
TABLE 2
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D)
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
0.75–1.50
0.50–1.00
...
0.40–0.60
...
0.87–1.13
0.87–1.13
0.90–1.10
0.90–1.10
Molybdenum
Tantalum,
Max.
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Other elements
N 0.015 max.
Cu 0.20 max.
Cb 0.05–0.20
...
...
...
...
...
...
Other elements
Cu 0.50 max.
...
...
Other elements
Cu 0.75–1.25
...
...
...
...
Other elements
Cu 0.20 max.
V 0.25–0.35
Cb 0.07 max.
B 0.002 max.
Ca 0.015 max.C
Other elements
V 0.20–0.30
Cb 0.015–0.070
Cu 0.25 max.
Ca 0.0005–0.0150
Columbium
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
0.030
max.
0.015
max.
Titanium
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-182/SA-182M
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
S31000
S31009
S31050
Identification
Symbol
F 310
F 310HF
F 310MoLN
S31600
S31609
S31603
S31651
S31653
S31700
S31703
S32100
S32109
S34700
S34709
S34800
S34809
S21904
F 316E
F 316H
F 316LE
F 316NF
F316LNF
F 317
F 317L
F 321
F 321H
F 347
F 347H
F 348
F 348H
F XM-11
F
UNS
Designation
264
Not for Resale
18 chromium, 8 nickel,
modified with
columbium
20 chromium, 6 nickel, 9
manganese
25 chromium, 20 nickel
25 chromium, 20 nickel
25 chromium, 22 nickel,
modified with molybdenum and nitrogen, low
carbon
18 chromium, 8 nickel,
modified with molybdenum
18 chromium, 8 nickel,
modified with molybdenum
18 chromium, 8 nickel,
modified with molybdenum, low carbon
18 chromium, 8 nickel,
modified with molybdenum and nitrogen
18 chromium, 8 nickel,
modified with molybdenum and nitrogen
19 chromium, 13 nickel,
3.5 molybdenum
19 chromium, 13 nickel,
3.5 molybdenum
18 chromium, 8 nickel
modified with titanium
18 chromium, 8 nickel,
modified with titanium
18 chromium, 8 nickel
modified with
columbium
18 chromium, 8 nickel,
modified with
columbium
18 chromium, 8 nickel
modified with
columbium
Grade
8.0–10.0
2.00 max.
0.04–0.10
0.040 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
0.04–0.10
0.08 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
0.08 max.
0.04–0.10
0.08 max.
0.030 max.
0.08 max.
0.030 max.
0.08 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
0.04–0.10
0.030 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
0.08 max.
0.25 max.
0.04–0.10
0.020 max.
Carbon
Manganese
Sulfur,
Max.
Silicon
0.060
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.010
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
5.5–7.5
9.0–13.0
9.0–13.0
9.0–13.0
9.0–13.0
9.0–12.0
9.0–12.0
11.0–15.0
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
11.0–15.0
11.0–14.0
11.0–14.0
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
10.0–15.0
10.0–14.0
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
10.0–14.0
19.0–22.0
19.0–22.0
20.5–23.5
Nickel
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
0.50 max.
Austenitic Stainless Steels (Cont’d)
Phosphorus,
Max.
Chromium
19.0–21.5
17.0–20.0
17.0–20.0
17.0–20.0
17.0–20.0
17.0–19.0
17.0–19.0
18.0–20.0
18.0–20.0
16.0–18.0
16.0–18.0
16.0–18.0
16.0–18.0
16.0–18.0
24.0–26.0
24.0–26.0
24.0–26.0
Composition, %
TABLE 2
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D)
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
3.0–4.0
3.0–4.0
2.00–3.00
2.00–3.00
2.00–3.00
2.00–3.00
2.00–3.00
...
...
1.60–2.60
Molybdenum
...
J
I
J
I
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Columbium
Titanium
...
...
H
G
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
0.10
Other elements
Co 0.20 max.
Other Elements
N 0.15–0.40
0.10
...
Other elements
Co 0.20 max.
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Other elements
N 0.09–0.15
Tantalum,
Max.
SA-182/SA-182M
2004 SECTION II
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
S33100
N08020
S31254
S30815
S30600
F 10
F 20
F 44
F 45
F 46
S31726
S34565
S33228
N08367
S31200
S31803
S32950
S32750
F 48
F 49
F 56
F 58
F 50
F 51
F 52
F 53
S31725
S20910
F XM-19
F 47
UNS
Designation
Identification
Symbol
265
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Not for Resale
25 chromium, 6 nickel,
modified with nitrogen
22 chromium, 5.5 nickel,
modified with nitrogen
26 chromium, 3.5 nickel,
1.0 molybdenum
25 chromium, 7 nickel, 4
molybdenum, modified
with nitrogen
21 chromium, 25 nickel,
6.5 molybdenum
19 chromium, 15 nickel,
4 molybdenum
24 chromium, 17 nickel,
6 manganese, 5 molybdenum
32 nickel, 27 chromium,
with columbium
19 chromium, 15 nickel,
4 molybdenum
20 nickel, 8 chromium
35 nickel, 20 chromium,
3.5 copper, 2.5 molybdenum
20 chromium, 18 nickel,
6 molybdenum, low
carbon
21 chromium, 11 nickel
modified with nitrogen
and cerium
18 chromium, 15 nickel,
4 silicon
22 chromium, 13 nickel,
5 manganese
Grade
0.030 max.
0.030 max.
0.030 max.
0.030 max.
0.030 max.
0.04–0.08
0.030 max.
0.030 max.
0.030 max.
0.018 max.
0.05–0.10
0.020 max.
0.10–0.20
0.07 max.
0.06 max.
Carbon
0.040
0.80 max.
1.20 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
Silicon
0.030
0.015
0.010
0.030
0.030
0.020
0.030
0.010
0.030
0.035
0.030
1.00 max.
0.30 max.
1.00 max.
0.75 max.
0.75 max.
3.7–4.3
1.40–2.00
0.80 max.
1.00–1.40
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
0.035
0.035
0.030
0.045
0.020
0.010
0.020
0.030
0.80 max.
0.60 max.
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels
0.040
0.020
1.00 max.
2.0 max.
0.030
0.045
0.045
5.0–7.0
2.00 max.
2.00 max.
0.020
0.030
0.040
0.045
0.50–0.80
2.00 max.
1.00 max.
0.040
2.00 max.
Sulfur,
Max.
Nickel
6.0–8.0
3.5–5.2
4.5–6.5
5.5–6.5
23.50–25.50
31.0–33.0
16.0–18.0
13.5–17.5
13.0–17.5
14.0–15.5
10.0–12.0
17.5–18.5
19.0–22.0
32.0–38.0
11.5–13.5
Austenitic Stainless Steels (Cont’d)
4.0–6.0
Manganese
Phosphorus,
Max.
24.0–26.0
26.0–29.0
21.0–23.0
24.0–26.0
3.0–5.0
1.00–2.50
2.5–3.5
1.2–2.0
6.00–7.00
...
26.0–28.0
20.00–22.00
4.0–5.0
4.0–5.0
4.0–5.0
23.0–25.0
17.0–20.0
18.0–20.0
0.20 max.
...
20.0–22.0
17.0–18.5
6.0–6.5
...
2.00–3.00
1.50–3.00
Molybdenum
19.5–20.5
7.0–9.0
19.0–21.0
20.5–23.5
Chromium
Composition, %
TABLE 2
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D)
...
...
...
...
...
0.6–1.0
0.10
...
...
...
...
...
8 x C min.
−1.00
max.
...
0.10–0.30
Columbium
Titanium
Other elements
N 0.15–0.35
Other elements
N 0.24–0.32
Cu 0.50 max.
Other elements
N 0.14–0.20
Other elements
N 0.08–0.20
Other elements
Ce 0.05–0.10
Al 0.025
Other elements
N 0.18–0.25
Cu 0.75 max.
Other elements
N 0.10–0.20
Other elements
N 0.40–0.60
Other elements
N 0.10 max.
Other elements
Cu 0.50–1.00
N 0.18–0.22
Other elements
N 0.14–0.20
Ce 0.03–0.08
Other elements
Cu 0.50 max.
Other elements
N 0.20–0.40
V 0.10–0.30
...
...
Other elements
Cu 3.0–4.0
Tantalum,
Max.
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-182/SA-182M
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
F 57
266
Not for Resale
S32550
25 chromium, 6.5 nickel,
4 molybdenum with
nitrogen
22 chromium, 5.5 nickel,
3 molybdenum, modified
with nitrogen
26 chromium, 6 nickel,
3.5 molybdenum with
nitrogen and copper
25 chromium, 7 nickel,
3.5 molybdenum, modified with nitrogen and
tungsten
26 chromium, 7 nickel,
3.7 molybdenum
25 chromium, 7 nickel,
modified with nitrogen
and tungsten
Grade
0.04 max.
0.030 max.
0.030 max.
0.025 max.
0.030 max.
0.030 max.
Carbon
1.50 max.
0.80 max.
1.00 max.
1.5 max.
2.00
Sulfur,
Max.
Silicon
0.040
0.030
0.035
0.025
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.020
0.020
0.002
0.010
0.020
1.00 max.
1.00 max.
0.80 max.
0.80 max.
1.00 max.
0.80 max.
Nickel
4.5–6.5
4.5–6.5
5.5–8.0
6.5–8.0
6.0–8.0
6.0–8.0
Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels (Cont’d)
1.00 max.
Manganese
Phosphorus,
Max.
24.0–27.0
22.0–23.0
24.0–26.0
24.0–26.0
24.0–26.0
24.0–26.0
Chromium
2.9–3.9
3.0–3.5
3.0–5.0
3.0–4.0
3.0–4.0
2.5–3.5
Molybdenum
...
...
...
...
...
...
Columbium
Titanium
Other elements
Cu 1.50–2.50
N 0.10–0.25
Other elements
N 0.20–0.30
Cu 0.50–1.00
W 0.50–1.00 K
Other elements
Cu 1.20–2.00
W 0.80–1.20
N 0.23–0.33
Other elements
N 0.20–0.35
Cu 0.50–3.00
Other elements
N 0.14–0.20
Other elements
N 0.24–0.32
Cu 0.20–0.80
W 1.50–2.50
Tantalum,
Max.
B
Grade F 2 was formerly assigned to the 1% chromium, 0.5% molybdenum grade which is now Grade F 12.
The present grade F 5a (0.25 max. carbon) previous to 1955 was assigned the identification symbol F 5. Identification symbol F 5 in 1955 was assigned to the 0.15 max. carbon
grade to be consistent with ASTM specifications for other products such as pipe, tubing, bolting, welding fittings, etc.
C
For Grade F 22V, rare earth metals (REM) may be added in place of calcium, subject to agreement between the producer and the purchaser. In that case the total amount of REM
shall be determined and reported.
D
Grade F XM-27Cb shall have a nickel plus copper content of 0.50 max %. Product analysis tolerance over the maximum specified limit for carbon and nitrogen shall be 0.002%.
E
Grades F 304, F 304L, F 316, and F 316L shall have a maximum nitrogen content of 0.10%.
F
Grades F 304N, F 316N, F 304LN, and F 316LN shall have a nitrogen content of 0.10 to 0.16%.
G
Grade F 321 shall have a titanium content of not less than five times the carbon content and not more than 0.70%.
H
Grade F 321H shall have a titanium content of not less than 4 times the carbon content and not more than 0.70%.
I
Grades F 347 and F 348 shall have a columbium content of not less than ten times the carbon content and not more than 1.10%.
J
Grades F 347H and F 348H shall have a columbium content of not less than 8 times the carbon content and not more than 1.10%.
K
%Cr + 3.3 ⴛ %Mo + 16 ⴛ %N p 40 min.
A
F 61
S32205
S39277
F 55
F 60
S32760
F 54
S32520
S39274
Identification Symbol
F 59
UNS
Designation
Composition, %
TABLE 2
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D)
SA-182/SA-182M
2004 SECTION II
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-182/SA-182M
TABLE 3
TENSILE AND HARDNESS REQUIREMENTS
Tensile Strength,
Min., ksi [MPa]
Grade Symbol
Yield Strength,
Min., ksi
[MPa]A
Elongation in
2 in. [50 mm]
or 4D, Min., %
Reduction of
Area, Min., %
Brinell Hardness
Number
Low Alloy Steels
F1
F2
F5
F 5a
F9
F 91
F 92
F 911
F 11 Class 1
F 11 Class 2
F 11 Class 3
F 12 Class 1
F 12 Class 2
F 21
F 3V and F 3VCb
F 22 Class 1
F 22 Class 3
F 22V
FR
70 [485]
70 [485]
70 [485]
90 [620]
85 [585]
85 [585]
90 [620]
90 [620]
60 [415]
70 [485]
75 [515]
60 [415]
70 [485]
75 [515]
85–110 [585–760]
60 [415]
75 [515]
85–110 [585–780]
63 [435]
40
40
40
65
55
60
64
64
30
40
45
32
40
45
60
30
45
60
46
70 [485]
85 [585]
110 [760]
130 [895]
110–135 [760–930]
115 [790]
40
55
85
110
90
90
[275]
[275]
[275]
[450]
[380]
[415]
[440]
[440]
[205]
[275]
[310]
[220]
[275]
[310]
[415]
[205]
[310]
[415]
[315]
20.0
20.0
20.0
22.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
18.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
18.0
20.0
20.0
18.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
35.0
50.0
40.0
40.0
45.0
40.0
45.0
30.0
30.0
45.0
30.0
30.0
45.0
35.0
30.0
45.0
38.0
143–192
143–192
143–217
187–248
179–217
248 max.
269 max.
187–248
121–174
143–207
156–207
121–174
143–207
156–207
174–237
170 max.
156–207
174–237
197 max.
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
45.0
45.0
143–207
167–229
235–302
263–321
235–285
295 max.
45.0
45.0
45.0
190 max.
190 max.
190 max.
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
40.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Martensitic Stainless Steels
F
F
F
F
F
F
6a Class
6a Class
6a Class
6a Class
6b
6NM
1
2
3
4
[275]
[380]
[585]
[760]
[620]
[620]
18.0
18.0
15.0
12.0
16.0
15.0
Ferritic Stainless Steels
F XM-27Cb
F 429
F 430
60 [415]
60 [415]
60 [415]
35 [240]
35 [240]
35 [240]
20.0
20.0
20.0
Austenitic Stainless Steels
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
304
304H
304L
304N
304LN
309H
310
310MoLN
310H
316
316H
316L
316N
316LN
75
75
70
80
75
75
75
78
75
75
75
70
80
75
[515]
[515]
[485]
[550]
[515]
[515]
[515]
[540]
[515]
[515]
[515]
[485]
[550]
[515]
B
B
C
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
B
30
30
25
35
30
30
30
37
30
30
30
25
35
30
[205]
[205]
[170]
[240]
[205]
[205]
[205]
[255]
[205]
[205]
[205]
[170]
[240]
[205]
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
D
D
267
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
E
E
SA-182/SA-182M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE 3
TENSILE AND HARDNESS REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D)
Grade Symbol
Tensile Strength,
Min., ksi [MPa]
Yield Strength,
Min., ksi
[MPa]A
Elongation in
2 in. [50 mm]
or 4D, Min., %
Reduction of
Area, Min., %
Brinell Hardness
Number
Austenitic Stainless Steels (Cont’d)
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
317
317L
347
347H
348
348H
321
321H
XM-11
XM-19
10
20
44
45
46
47
48
49
56
58
B
75 [515]
70 [485] C
75 [515] B
75 [515] B
75 [515] B
75 [515] B
75 [515] B
75 [515] B
90 [620]
100 [690]
80 [550]
80 [550]
94 [650]
87 [600]
78 [540]
75 [525]
80 [550]
115 [795]
73 [500]
95 [655]
30
25
30
30
30
30
30
30
50
55
30
35
44
45
35
30
35
60
27
45
[205]
[170]
[205]
[205]
[205]
[205]
[205]
[205]
[345]
[380]
[205]
[240]
[300]
[310]
[240]
[205]
[240]
[415]
[185]
[310]
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
45.0
35.0
30.0
30.0
35.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
35.0
30.0
30.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
55.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
50.0
40.0
35.0
50.0
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
50.0
45.0
...
...
30.0
45.0
50.0
40.0
45.0
50.0
...
...
...
310 max.
310 max.
...
...
...
...
...
Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
50
51
52
53
54
55
57
59
60
61
100–130 [690–900]
90 [620]
100 [690]
116 [800] F
116 [800]
109–130 [750–895]
118 [820]
112 [770]
90 [620]
109 [750]
65
65
70
80
80
80
85
80
65
80
[450]
[450]
[485]
[550]
[550]
[550]
[585]
[550]
[450]
[550]
25.0
25.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
F
A
Determined by the 0.2% offset method. For ferritic steels only, the 0.5% extension-under-load method may also be used.
For sections over 5 in. [130 mm] in thickness, the minimum tensile strength shall be 70 ksi [485 MPa].
C
For sections over 5 in. [130 mm] in thickness, the minimum tensile strength shall be 65 ksi [450 MPa].
D
Longitudinal. The transverse elongation shall be 25% in 2 in. or 50 mm, min.
E
Longitudinal. The transverse reduction of area shall be 45% min.
F
For sections over 2 in. [50 mm] in thickness, the minimum tensile strength shall be 106 ksi [730 MPa]; the minimum yield strength
shall be 75 ksi [515 MPa].
B
268
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE 4
PRODUCT ANALYSIS TOLERANCES FOR LOW ALLOY
STEELS WITH A MAXIMUM CHROMIUM LIMIT OF
4% OR MORE AND STAINLESS STEELSA
Elements
Limit or Maximum of
Specified Range, %
Tolerance Over
the Maximum
Limit or Under
the Minimum
Limit
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Carbon
0.030, incl.
over 0.030 to 0.20, incl.
0.005
0.01
Manganese
to 1.00, incl.
over 1.00 to 3.00, incl.
over 3.00 to 6.00
over 6.00 to 10.00
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
Phosphorus
to 0.040, incl.
0.005
Sulfur
to 0.030, incl.
0.005
Silicon
to 1.00, incl.
over 1.00 to 5.00, incl.
0.05
0.10
Chromium
over
over
over
over
4.00 to 10.00, incl.
10.00 to 15.00, incl.
15.00 to 20.00, incl.
20.00 to 27.50, incl.
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
Nickel
to 1.00, incl.
over 1.00 to 5.00, incl.
over 5.00 to 10.00, incl.
over 10.00 to 20.00, incl.
over 20.00 to 22.00, incl.
0.03
0.07
0.10
0.15
0.20
Molybdenum
to 0.20, incl.
over 0.20 to 0.60, incl.
over 0.60 to 2.00, incl.
over 2.00 to 7.00, incl.
all ranges
all ranges
0.01
0.03
0.05
0.10
0.05
0.05
Cerium
to 0.10, incl.
0.05 to 0.20, incl.
to 0.19, incl.
over 0.19 to 0.25
over 0.25 to 0.35
over 0.35 to 0.45
over 0.45 to 0.60
0.05 to 0.20, incl.
to 0.05, incl.
to 0.10, incl.
over 0.10 to 0.25, incl.
0.03 to 0.08
Tungsten
Copper
to 1.00, incl.
to 1.00, incl.
0.02
0.01B
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.02
−0.005
+0.01
0.04
0.03
Titanium
Columbiumtantalum
Tantalum
Cobalt
Nitrogen
Columbium
Aluminum
Vanadium
A
This table does not apply to heat analysis.
Product analysis limits for cobalt under 0.05% have not been
established and the producer should be consulted for those limits.
B
269
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-182/SA-182M
SA-182/SA-182M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE 5
PRODUCT ANALYSIS TOLERANCES FOR LOW-ALLOY STEELS WITH MAXIMUM
CHROMIUM LIMIT LESS THAN 4%
Tolerance Over Maximum Limit or Under Minimum
Limit for Size Ranges Shown, %B
Limit or Maximum of
Specified Range, %
100 in.2
(6.45 ⴛ
104 mm2),
or Less
Over 100
to 200 in.2
(1.290 ⴛ
105 mm2),
Incl.
Over 200
to 400 in.2
(2.581 ⴛ
105 mm2),
Incl.
Manganese
to 0.90, incl.
over 0.90 to 1.00, incl.
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.05
0.05
0.06
0.06
0.07
Phosphorus
to 0.045, incl.
0.005
0.010
0.010
0.010
Sulfur
to 0.045, incl.
0.005
0.010
0.010
0.010
Silicon
to 0.40, incl.
over 0.40 to 1.00, incl.
0.02
0.05
0.02
0.06
0.03
0.06
0.04
0.07
Nickel
to 0.50
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
Chromium
to 0.90, incl.
over 0.90 to 2.10, incl.
over 2.10 to 3.99, incl.
0.03
0.05
0.10
0.04
0.06
0.10
0.04
0.06
0.12
0.05
0.07
0.14
Molybdenum
to 0.20, incl.
over 0.20 to 0.40, incl.
over 0.40 to 1.15, incl.
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.01
0.03
0.04
0.02
0.03
0.05
0.03
0.04
0.06
Copper
to 1.00, incl.
over 1.00 to 2.00, incl.
0.03
0.05
0.03
0.05
0.03
0.05
0.03
0.05
Titanium
to 0.10
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
Vanadium
to 0.10, incl.
0.11 to 0.25, incl.
0.26 to 0.50, incl.
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.01
0.02
0.03
ElementA
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
A
B
Product analysis for carbon, boron, columbium, and calcium shall conform to Table 2.
Cross-sectional area.
270
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
Over
400
in.2
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-182/SA-182M
TABLE 6
REPAIR WELDING REQUIREMENTS
Grade Symbol
Recommended Preheat and Interpass
Temperature Range, °F [°C]
ElectrodesA
Minimum Post-Weld HeatTreatment Temperature
°F [°C]
Low Alloy Steels
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
5
5a
9
91
92
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
911
11, Classes 1, 2, and 3
12, Classes 1 and 2
21
3V and F 3VCb
22 Class 1
22 Class 3
22V
E7018-A1
E8018-B1
E502-15 or 16
E502-15 or 16
E505-15 or 16
9% Cr, 1% Mo, VCbN
9% Cr, 0.5% Mo, 1.5% W,
VCbNiN
9% Cr, 1% Mo, 1% W, VCbN
E8018-B2
E8018-B2
E9018-B3
3% Cr, 1% Mo, 1⁄4% V-Ti
E9018-B3
E9018-B3
2.25% Cr, 1% Mo, 0.25% V-Cb
F
F
F
F
6a, Class 1
6a, Class 2
6b
6NM
E410-15 or 16
E410-15 or 16
13% Cr, 11⁄2% Ni, 1⁄2% Mo
13% Cr, 4% Ni
200–400
300–600
400–700
400–700
400–700
400–700
[95–205]
[150–315]
[205–370]
[205–370]
[205–370]
[205–370]
1150
1150
1250
1250
1250
1300
[620]
[620]
[675]
[675]
[675]
[705]
400–700
400–700
300–600
300–600
300–600
300–600
300–600
300–600
300–600
[205–370]
[205–370]
[150–315]
[150–315]
[150–315]
[150–315]
[150–315]
[150–315]
[150–315]
1300
1300
1150
1150
1250
1250
1250
1250
1250
[705]
[705]
[620]
[620]
[675]
[675]
[675]
[675]
[675]
[205–370]
[205–370]
[205–370]
[150–370]
1250
1250
1150
1050
[675]
[675]
[620]
[565]
Martensitic Stainless Steels
400–700
400–700
400–700
300–700
Ferritic Stainless Steels
F XM-27Cb
F 429
F 430
FR
NRB
400–700 [205–370]
NR
NR
26% Cr, 1% Mo
E430-16
E430-16
E8018-C2
NR
1400 [760]
1400 [760]
NR
Austenitic Stainless Steels
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
304
304L
304H
304N
304LN
309H
310
310H
310MoLN
E308-15 or 16
E308L-15 to 16
E308-15 or 16
E308-15 or 16
E308L-15 or 16
E309-15 or 16D
E310-15 or 16
E310-15 or 16
E310Mo-15 or 16
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
316
316L
316H
316N
316LN
317
317L
321E
321HE
347
347H
348
348H
XM-11
XM-19
E316-15 or 16
E316L-15 or 16
E316-15 or 16
E316-15 or 16
E316L-15 or 16
E317-15 or 16
E317L-15 or 16
E347-15 or 16
E347-15 or 16
E347-15 or 16
E347-15 or 16
E347-15 or 16
E 347-15 or 16
XM-10W
XM-19W
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
271
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
1900 [1040] + WQC
1900 [1040] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1920–2010 [1050–
1100] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1925 [1050] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1925 [1050] + WQ
1900 [1040] + WQ
1925 [1050] + WQ
NR
NR
SA-182/SA-182M
2004 SECTION II
TABLE 6
REPAIR WELDING REQUIREMENTS (CONT’D)
Recommended Preheat and Interpass
Temperature Range, °F [°C]
ElectrodesA
Grade Symbol
Minimum Post-Weld HeatTreatment Temperature
°F [°C]
Austenitic Stainless Steels (Cont’d)
F 10
E
...
...
NR
NR
...
...
...
...
...
NR
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
20
44
45E
46
47
48
49
58
E/ER-320, 320LR
ENiCrMo-3
...
...
. . .F
. . .F
. . .F
ENiCrMo-3
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
50
51
52
53
54
55
57
25% Cr, 6% Ni, 1.7% Mo
22% Cr, 5.5% Ni, 3% Mo
26% Cr, 8% Ni, 2% Mo
25% Cr, 7% Ni, 4% Mo
25% Cr, 7% Ni, 3% Mo, W
25% Cr, 7% Ni, 3.5% Mo
25% Cr, 7% Ni, 3% Mo, 1.5%
Cu, 1% W
ENi CrMo-10
22% Cr, 5.5% Ni, 3% Mo
26% Cr, 9% Ni, 3.5% Mo
...
1700–1850 [925–
1010] + WQ
2100 [1150] + WQ
...
...
2100 [1150] + WQ
2100 [1150] + WQ
2100 [1150] + WQ
2025 [1105] + WQ
Ferritic-Austenitic Stainless Steels
F 59
F 60
F 61
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
A
Electrodes shall comply with ASME SFA-5.4, SFA-5.5, and corresponding ER grades of SFA-5.9 or SFA-5.11.
NR p not required.
C
WQ p water quench.
D
Filler metal shall additionally have 0.04% minimum carbon.
E
Purchaser approval required.
F
Match filler metal is available. Fabricators have also used AWS A5.14, Class ER, NiCrMo-3, and AWS A5.11, Class E, NiCrMo-3 filler
metals.
B
272
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-182/SA-182M
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the purchaser in the inquiry, contract, and order.
S6. Hydrostatic Testing
S6.1 A hydrostatic test at a pressure agreed upon
between the manufacturer and the purchaser shall be
applied by the manufacturer.
S1. Macroetch Test
S1.1 A sample forging shall be sectioned and etched
to show flow lines and internal imperfections. The test
shall be conducted according to Test Method E 340.
Details of the test shall be agreed upon between the
manufacturer and the purchaser.
S7. Repair Welding
S7.1 No repair welding shall be permitted without
prior approval of the purchaser. If permitted, the restrictions of Section 14 shall apply.
S2. Product Analysis
S2.1 A product analysis shall be made from each heat
offered for delivery. The analysis shall conform to the
requirements specified in Table 2 with tolerances in Table
4 or Table 5. If the results of any test fail to comply, two
additional forgings or representative test pieces from the
same heat shall be retested and the results shall comply
with the tables listed. If the results of either one of these
pieces fail to comply, each forging shall be checked or
the heat rejected. All results shall be reported to the
purchaser and all forgings which do not comply shall be
rejected.
S8. Heat Treatment Details
S8.1 The manufacturer shall furnish a detailed test
report containing the information required in 17.2 and
shall include all pertinent details of the heat-treating cycle
given the forgings.
S9.
Material for Optimum Resistance to StressCorrosion Cracking
S9.1 Austenitic stainless steel shall be furnished in
the solution-annealed condition as a final operation with
no subsequent cold working permitted, except, unless
specifically prohibited by the purchaser, straightening of
bars from which parts are machined is permitted to meet
the requirements of Specification A 484 /A 484M.
S3. Tension Test
S3.1 In addition to the requirements of Section 7, one
tension specimen shall be obtained from a representative
forging from each heat at a location agreed upon between
the manufacturer and the purchaser. The results of the
test shall comply with Table 3 and shall be reported to
the purchaser.
S10. Corrosion Tests
S10.1 All austenitic stainless steel shall pass intergranular corrosion tests performed in accordance with
Practice E of Practices A 262.
S4. Magnetic Particle Examination
S4.1 All accessible surfaces of the finished forging
shall be examined by a magnetic-particle method. The
method shall be in accordance with Test Method
A 275 /A 275M. Acceptance limits shall be as agreed
upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
S10.2 Intergranular corrosion tests shall be performed
on specimens of ferritic stainless steels as described in
Practices A 763.
S10.3 For both the austenitic and ferritic stainless
steels, details concerning the number of specimens and
their source and location are to be a matter of agreement
between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
S5. Liquid-Penetrant Examination
S5.1 All accessible surfaces shall be examined by a
liquid-penetrant method in accordance with Practice
E 165. Acceptance limits shall be as agreed upon between
the manufacturer and the purchaser.
S11. Special Filler Metal
S11.1 In repair welded F 316, F 316L, F 316H, and
F 316N forgings, the deposited weld metal shall conform
273
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-182/SA-182M
2004 SECTION II
to E 308 composition wire. Forgings repair welded with
E 308 weld metal shall be marked F___W 308.
S14.2 The manufacturer shall provide a test report
containing the information required in 17.2 and shall
include a statement of the heat treatment method
employed.
S12. Hardness Test
S12.1 Each forging shall be hardness tested and shall
meet the requirements of Table 3.
S15.
S13.
Alternate Heat Treatment (Grades F 91 and
F 92)
S13.1 Grade F 91 shall be normalized in accordance
with Section 5 and tempered at a temperature, to be
specified by the purchaser, less than 1350°F [730°C]. It
shall be the purchaser’s responsibility to subsequently
temper at 1350°F [730°C] minimum to conform to the
requirements of the specification. All mechanical tests
shall be made on material heat treated in accordance with
Section 5. The certification shall reference this supplementary requirement indicating the tempering temperature applied. The notation “S13” shall be included with
the required marking of the forging.
Grain Size for Austenitic Grades
S15.1 Forgings made from austenitic grades other
than H grades shall be tested for average grain size by
Test Method E 112. Details of the test shall be agreed
upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
S16.
Stabilization Treatment
S16.1 Subsequent to the solution anneal for Grades
F 321, F 321H, F 347, F 347H, F 348, and F 348H, these
grades shall be given a stabilization heat treatment at
1500 to 1600°F [815 to 870°C] for a minimum of 2 h/
in. [4.7 min/mm] of thickness and then cooling in the
furnace or in air. In addition to the marking required in
Section 18, the grade designation symbol shall be followed by the symbol “S16.”
S14. Heat Treatment of Austenitic Forgings
S14.1 The purchaser shall specify the heat treatment
method (in 5.1 or in 5.3.1) that shall be employed.
274
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS CARBON STEEL
BOILER TUBES FOR HIGH-PRESSURE SERVICE
SA-192/SA-192M
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 192/A 192M-91.)
1.
Scope
1.1 This specification covers minimum-wall thickness, seamless carbon steel boiler and superheater tubes
for high-pressure service.
A 520 Specification for Supplementary Requirements for
Seamless and Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon
Steel Tubular Products for High-Temperature Service
Conforming to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction
1.2 The tubing sizes and thicknesses usually furnished
to this specification are 1⁄2 in. to 7 in. [12.7 to 177.8 mm]
outside diameter and 0.085 to 1.000 in. [2.2 to 25.4 mm],
inclusive, in minimum wall thickness. Tubing having
other dimensions may be furnished, provided such tubes
comply with all other requirements of this specification.
3.
General Requirements
3.1 Material furnished under this specification shall
conform to the applicable requirements of the current
edition of Specification A 450/A 450M, unless otherwise
provided herein.
1.3 Mechanical property requirements do not apply
to tubing smaller than 1⁄8 in [3.2 mm] inside diameter or
0.015 in. [0.4 mm] thickness.
4.
Ordering Information
4.1 Orders for material under this specification should
include the following, as required, to described the desired
material adequately:
1.4 When these products are to be used in applications
conforming to ISO Recommendations for Boiler Construction, the requirements of Specification A 520 shall
supplement and supersede the requirements of this specification.
4.1.1 Quantity (feet, metres, or number of lengths),
4.1.2 Name of material (seamless tubes),
1.5 The values stated in either inch-pound units or
SI units are to be regarded separately as standard. Within
the text, the SI units are shown in brackets. The values
stated in each system are not exact equivalents; therefore,
each system must be used independently of the other.
Combining values from the two systems may result in
nonconformance with the specification. The inch-pound
units shall apply unless the “M” designation of this specification is specified in the order.
4.1.3 Manufacture (hot-finished or cold-drawn),
4.1.4 Size (outside diameter and minimum wall
thickness),
4.1.5 Length (specific or random),
4.1.6 Optional Requirements (Section 8),
4.1.7 Test report required (see section on Certification of Specification A 450/A 450M),
4.1.8 Specification designation, and
4.1.9 Special requirements.
2.
Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
A 450/A 450M Specification for General Requirements
for Carbon, Ferritic Alloy, and Austenitic Alloy Steel
Tubes
5.
Manufacture
5.1 Tubes shall be made by the seamless process and
shall be either hot-finished or cold-finished, as specified.
275
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-192/SA-192M
2004 SECTION II
Brinell Hardness Number
(Tubes 0.200 in. [5.1
mm] and over in wall
thickness)
137 HB
6.
Heat Treatment
6.1 Hot-finished tubes need not be heat treated. Coldfinished tubes shall be heat treated after the final coldfinished at a temperature of 1200°F [650°C] or higher.
7.
Chemical Composition
7.1 The steel shall conform to the following requirements as to chemical composition:
Carbon, %
Manganese, %
Phosphorus, max
Sulfur, max, %
Silicon, max, %
10. Mechanical Tests Required
10.1 Flattening Test — One flattening test shall be
made on specimens from each of two tubes selected from
each lot (see Note) or fraction thereof.
0.06–0.18
0.27–0.63
0.035
0.035
0.25
10.2 Flaring Test — One flaring test shall be made
on specimens from each end of two tubes selected from
each lot (see Note) or fraction thereof. These tubes shall
be selected apart from those used for the flattening test.
7.2 Supplying an alloy grade of steel that specifically
requires the addition of any element other than those
listed in 7.1 is not permitted.
10.3 Hardness Test — Brinell or Rockwell hardness
tests shall be made on specimens from two tubes from
each lot. The term lot applies to all tubes prior to cutting,
of the same nominal diameter and wall thickness which
are produced from the same heat of steel. When final
heat treatment is in a batch-type furnace, a lot shall
include only those tubes of the same size and the same
heat which are heat treated in the same furnace charge.
When the final heat treatment is in a continuous furnace,
a lot shall include all tubes of the same size and heat,
heat treated in the same furnace at the same temperature,
time at heat, and furnace speed.
8.
Product Analysis
8.1 When requested on the purchase order, a product
analysis shall be made by the supplier from one tube per
100 pieces for sizes over 3 in. [76.2 mm] and one tube
per 250 pieces for sizes 3 in. [76.2 mm] and under; or
when tubes are identified by heat, one tube per heat shall
be analyzed. The chemical composition thus determined
shall conform to the requirements specified.
10.4 Hydrostatic Test — Each tube shall be subjected
to the hydrostatic pressure test, or instead of this test, a
nondestructive test may be used when specified by the
purchaser.
8.2 If the original test for product analysis fails, retests
of two additional billets or tubes shall be made. Both
retests, for the elements in question shall meet the requirements of the specification; otherwise all remaining material in the heat or lot (see Note) shall be rejected or, at
the option of the producer, each billet or tube may be
individually tested for acceptance. Billets or tubes which
do not meet the requirements of the specification shall
be rejected.
11. Forming Operations
11.1 Tubes when inserted in the boiler shall stand
expanding and beading without showing cracks or flaws.
Superheater tubes when properly manipulated shall stand
all forging, welding, and bending operations necessary
for application without developing defects.
NOTE — A lot consists of 250 tubes for sizes 3 in. [76.2 mm] and
under and of 100 tubes for sizes over 3 in. [76.2 mm], prior to cutting
to length.
12. Product Marking
12.1 In addition to the marking prescribed in Specification A 450/A 450M, the marking shall indicate whether
the tube is hot finished or cold finished.
9.
Hardness Requirements
9.1 The tubes shall have a hardness number not
exceeding the following:
276
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Rockwell Hardness
Number (Tubes less than
0.200 in. [5.1 mm] in
wall thickness)
77 HRB
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-192/SA-192M
EXPLANATORY NOTE
NOTE — For purposes of design, the following tensile properties may be assumed:
Tensile strength, min, ksi [MPa]
Yield strength, min, ksi [MPa]
Elongation in 2 in. or 50 mm, min, %
47 [325]
26 [180]
35
277
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
278
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 193/A 193M-98a except for differences in paras. 3.1.1 and 19.4, Note 6 of Table 1, and editorial
differences in Table 2.)
1.
Scope
1.1 This specification covers alloy and stainless steel
bolting material for pressure vessels, valves, flanges, and
fittings for high-temperature service. The term "bolting
material" as used in this specification covers bass, bolts,
screws, studs, stud bolts and wire. Bass and wire shall
be hot-wrought. The material may be further processed
by centerless grinding or by cold drawing. Austenitic
stainless steel may be carbide solution treated or carbide
solution treated and strain-hardened. When strain hardened austenitic steel is ordered, the purchaser should take
special care to ensme that Appendix X1 is thoroughly
understood.
1.2 Several grades are covered, including ferritic
steels and a~~stenitic
stainless steels designated B5, B8,
etc. Selection will depend upon design, service conditions, mechanical propesties, and high-temperature characteristics.
NOTE 1 -The committee formulating this specification has included
fifteen steel types that have been rather extensively used for the present
purpose. Other compositions will be considered for inclusion by the
committee from time to time as the need becomes apparent.
NOTE 2 - For grades of alloy-steel bolting material suitable for use
at lower range of high-temperature applications, reference should be
made to Specification A 354.
NOTE 3 - For grades of alloy-steel bolting material suitable for use
in low-temperature applications, reference should be made to Specification A 320/A 320M.
1.3 Nuts for use with this bolting material are covered
in Section 14.
1.4 Supplementary Requirements S1 through S8 are
provided for use when additional tests or inspection ase
desired. These shall apply only when specified in the
purchase order.
1.5 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound
units and in SI units. However, unless the order specifies
the applicable " M specification designation (SI units),
the material shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
2.
Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Stnrzclnrds:
A 29lA 29M Specification for General Requirements for
Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought and ColdFinished
A 194lA 194M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel
Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperaiure Service
A 320lA 320M Specification for Alloy Steel Bolting
Materials for Low-Temperature Service
A 354 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy
Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners
A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
A 479lA 479M Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other
Pressure Vessels
A 4841484M Specification for General Requirements for
Stainless and Heat-Resisting Bars, Billets, and
Forgings
A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
A 788 Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements
§A-193lSA-193M
2004 SECTION I1
E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials
E 21 Practice for Elevated Temperature Tension Tests
of Metallic Materials
E 139 Practice for Conducting Creep, Creep-Rupture,
and Stress-Rupture Tests of Metallic Materials
E 150 Practice for Conducting Creep and Creep-Rupture
Tension Tests of Metallic Materials Under Conditions
of Rapid Heating and Short Times
E 151 Practice for Tension Tests of Metallic Materials
at Elevated Temperatures with Rapid Heating and Conventional or Rapid Strain Rates
E 292 Practice for Conducting Time-for-Rupture Notch
Tension Tests of Materials
E 328 Methods for Stress-Relaxation Tests for Materials
and Structures
E 381 Method of Macroetch Testing Products, Inspection,
and Rating Comprising Steel Bars, Billets, Blooms and
Forgings
E 566 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Sorting of Ferrous Metals
E 709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination
F 606 Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical
Properties of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, and Rivets
2.2 ANSI StiiiziEniiZ~:
B 1.1 Screw Threads
B 1.13M Metric Screw Threads
B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws
B18.2.3.1M Metric Hex Cap Screws
B18.3 Hexagon Socket and Spline Socket Screws
B18.3.1M Metric Soclcet Head Cap Screws
stainless steels; Class 1D applies to material carbide solution treated by cooling rapidly from the rolling temperature),
3.1.3 Quantity (that is, number of pieces or weight),
3.1.4 Description of items required (that is, bars,
bolts, screws, or studs),
3.1.5 Dimensions (that is, diameter, length of point,
overall length, finish, shape, and threads),
3.1.6 Nuts, if required by purchaser, in accordance
with 14.1,
3.1.7 Supplementary requirements, if any, and
3.1.8 Special requirements, in accordance with 6.3,
6.6, 11.3, 15.1, 16.1, 17.1, and 18.1.
.
Manufacture (
4.1 The steel shall be produced by any of the following
processes: open-hearth, basic-oxygen, electric-furnace or
vacuum-induction melting (VIM). The primary melting
method may incorporate separate degassing or refining.
The molten steel may be vacuum-treated prior to or during
pouring of the ingot or strand casting. The basic-oxygen
process shall be limited to steels containing not over 6%
chromium.
Ordering Information
3.1 The inquiry and order for material under this
specification shall include the following as required to
describe the material adequately:
4.2 Qunli~l- To ensure soundness, fenitic steel bars
and wire shall be tested in accordance with Method E
381, or other suitable method as agreed upon between
the purchaser and the producer. When bar or wire is
supplied, the bar or wire producer shall perform the test.
When fasteners are supplied, either the bar or wire producer or the fastener producer, as agreed upon between
them, shall perfo~mthe test. Quality control procedures
shall be s-dficient to demonstrate that tkhe tcsting was
pei-foimed and that the resulis were acceptable. A bar lot
consisting of one heat or 10 000 lbs whichever is smaller,
shall be represented by a minimum of one macroetch.
Visual examination of transverse sections shall show no
imperfections worse than the macrographs of Method E
381 S4-R4-C4 or equivalent as agreed upon. Distinct
zones of solidification shall not be present.
3.1.1 Specification, designation, year date, and
grade.
5.
2.3 AIAG Standard:
AIAG B-5 02.00 Primary Metals Identification Tag
Application Standard
3.
3.1.2 Heat-treated condition (that is, normalized
and tempered, or quenched and tempered, for the femtic
materials, and carbide solution treated (Class I), carbide
solution treated after finishing (Class IA), and carbide
solution treated and strain hardened (Classes 2, 2B, and
2C), for the austenitic stainless steels; Classes 1B and 1C
apply to the carbide solution-treated nitrogen-bearing
Discard
5.1 A sufficient discard shall be made to secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation.
Heat Treatment
6.1 Ferritic steels shall be properly heat treated as
best suits the high-temperature characteristics of each
6.
PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
grade. Immediately after rolling or forging, the bolting
material shall be allowed to cool to a temperature below
the cooling transformation range. The materials which
ase to be furnished in the liquid-quenched condition shall
then be unifortnly reheated to the proper temperahire to
refine the grain (a group thus reheated being known as
a "quenching charge") and quenched in a liquid medium
under substantially uniform conditions for each quenching charge. Use of water quenching is prohibited for any
femtic grade when heat treatment is part of the fastener
manufacturing process. This prohibition does not apply
to heat treated bar or to fasteners machined therefrom.
Material Grade B16 shall be heated to a temperahise
range of 1700°F to 1750°F [925"C to 954"CI and oil
quenched. The materials that ase to be furnished in the
normalized or air-quenched condition shall be reheated
to the proper temperature to refine the grain and cooled
uniformly in air to a temperature below the transformation
tempei-ature range. The material, whether liquidquenched or normalized, shall then be unifo~mlyreheated
for tempering. The minimum tempering temperature shall
be as specified in Table 2 and Table 3.
6.1.1 Quenched and tempered or normalized and
tempered fenitic material that is suibsequently cold drawn
for dimensional control shall be stress-relieved after cold
drawing. The minimum stress-relief temperature shall be
100°F [55"C] below the tempering temperature. Tests
for mechanical properties shall be peffosmed after stress
relieving.
6.2 Both B6 and B6X materials shall be held, at
the tempering temperature for a minimum time of 1 11.
Identification Symbol B6X material may be furnished in
the as-rolled-and-tempered condition. Cold worlcing is
pennitted with the hardness limitation (26 HRC maximum) of Table 2 for the B6X grade.
6.3 ~ l austenitic
l
stainless steels shall receive a casbide solution treatment (see 6.3.1, 6.3.4 for specific
requirements for each class). Classes 1, lB, 1C (Grades
B8R and B8S only), 2, 2B, and 2C can apply to bar,
wire, and finished fasteners. Class 1A (all grades) and
Class 1C (Grades B8RA and B8SA only) can apply to
finished fasteners. Class 1D applies only to bas and wire
and finished fasteners that ase machined directly from
Class 1D bas or wire without any subsequent hot or cold
worlcing.
6.3.1 Classes I a17d IB, and Class IC Glades BSR
and BSS - After rolling of the bas, forging, or heading,
whether done hot or cold, the material shall be heated
from ambient temperature and held a sufficient time at a
temperature at which the chromium casbide will go into
solution and then shall be cooled at a rate sufficient to
prevent the precipitation of the casbide.
SA-193lSA-193M
6.3.2 Class I D - Rolled or forged Grades B8,
B8M, B8P, B8LN, B8MLN, B8N, B8MN, B8R, and B8S
bas shall be cooled rapidly immediately following hot
worlcing while the temperature is above 1750°F [955"C],
so that grain boundary carbides are in solution (see A
479-88b and subsequent revisions). Class 1D shall be
restricted to applications at temperahues less than 850°F
[455"C].
6.3.3 Class 1A and Class I C Glndes BSRA and
B8SA - Finished fasteners shall be carbide solution
treated after all rolling, forging, heading, and threading
operations are complete. This designation does not apply
to starting material such as bas. Fasteners shall be heated
from ambient temperature and held a sufficient time at a
temperature at which the chromium carbide will go into
solution and then shall be cooled at a rate s~ifficientto
prevent the precipitation of the casbide.
6.3.4 Classes 2, 2B, and 2C - Material shall be
carbide solution treated by heating from ambient temnperature and holding a sufficient time at a temperature at
which the chro~ni~lm
carbide will go into solution and
then cooling at a rate sufficient to prevent the precipitation
of the casbide. Following this treatment the material shall
then be strain hardened to achieve the required properties.
NOTE 4 -Heat treatment followilig operations perromed on a limited
portion of the product, such as heading, may result in non-uniform
grain size and mechanical properlies through the section arrected.
6.4 If scale-free bright finish is required, this shall be
specified in the purchase order.
6.5 B7 and B7M bolting shall be heat treated by
quenching in a liquid medium and tempering. For B7M
bolting, the final heat treatment, which may be the tempering operation if conducted at 1150°F [62O0C]minim~im,
shall be done after all machining and forming operations,
including thread rolling, ase complete.
6.5.1 Unless otherwise specified, material for
Grade B7 may be heat treated by the Fusnace, the Induction or the Electrical Resistance method.
NOTE 5 -It should be taken into consideration that stress-relaxation
properties may vary from heat lot to heat lot or these properties may
vary from one heat treating method to another. The purchaser may
specify Requirement S8, if stress-relaxation testing is desired.
7.
Chemical Composition
7.1 Each alloy shall conform to the chemical composition requirements prescribed in Table 1. Steels with added
lead shall not be used.
7.2 The steel shall not contain an unspecified element
for the ordered grade to the extent that the steel confonns
SA-193JSA-193M
2004 SECTION I1
to the requirelnents of another grade for which that element is a specified element. Furthermore, elements present in concentrations greater than 0.75 weight/% shall
be reported. Chemical analysis shall be performed in
accordance with Test Methods A 75 1.
8.
Heat Analysis
8.1 An analysis of each heat of steel shall be made
by the manufachlrer to determine the percentages of the
elements specified in Section 7. This analysis shall be
made from a test specimen taken dusing the pouring of
the heat. The chemical composition thus detennined shall
be reported to the purchaser or the purchaser's representative, and shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 7. For strand cast materials, the requirements of
8.2 and 8.3 of Specification A 788 shall be met. Should
the purchaser deem it necessary to have the transition
zone of two heats sequentially cast discarded, the purchaser shall invoke Supplementary Requirement S3 of
Specification A 788.
9.1 An analysis may be made by the purchaser from
samples representing the bolting material. The chemical
composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements of Section 7.
10. Mechanical
10.1 Teizsile Pi-opel-ties:
10.1.1 Requil-enzents - The material as represented
by the tension specimens shall conform to the requireinents prescribed in Table 2 at room temperature after
heat treatment.
10.1.2 Metlzod of Test -Tension test shall be made
in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370,
including the parts of Annex A3 "Steel Fasteners" applicable to machined test specimens. The speed of testing
shall not exceed the limits specified in 7.4.1 of Test
Methods and Definitions A 370. The yield strength corresponding to a limiting permanent offset of 0.2% of the
gage length of the specimen shall be determined.
10.1.3 Full Size Fnsteizeia, Wedge Teizsile Testi i ~ g-When applicable, see 13.1.4, headed fasteners shall
be wedge tested full size in accordance with Annex A3
of A 370 and shall conform to the tensile strength shown
in Table 2. The minimum full size breaking strength (lbf)
for individual sizes shall be as follows:
where:
Ts = wedge tensile strength
UTS = tensile strength specified in Table 2, and
As = stress area, square inches, as shown in ANSI
B 1.1 or calculated as follows:
where:
O = nominal thread size, and
iz = the number of threads per inch
10.2.1 The hardness shall confonn to the requirements prescribed in Table 2. Hardness testing shall be
performed in accordance with either Test Methods and
Definitions A 370 or with Test Methods F 606. In the
event a controversy exists relative to minimum strength,
tension tests shall prevail over hardness readings.
10.2.2 Grade B7M - The maximum hardness of
the grade shall be 235 HB or 99 HRB (conversion in
accordance with Table 2B of Test Methods and Definitions A 370). The minimum hardness shall not be less
than 200 HB or 93 HRB. Conformance to this hardness
shall be insured by testing the hardness of each stud or
bolt by Brinell or Rockwell B methods in accordance
with 10.2.1. The use of 100% electromagnetic testing for
hardness as an alternative to 100% indentation hardness
testing is pennissible when qualified by sampling using
indentation hardness testing. Each lot tested for hardness
electromagnetically shall be 100% examined in accordance with Practice E 566. Following electromagnetic
testing for hardness a random sample of a minimum of
100 pieces of each heat of steel in each lot (as defined
in 13.1.2) shall be tested by indentation hardness methods.
All samples must meet hardness requirements to permit
acceptance of the lot. If any one sample is outside of the
specified lnaxilnum or minimum hardness, the lot shall
be rejected and either reprocessed and resampled or tested
100% by indentation hardness methods. Product which
has been 100% tested and found acceptable shall have a
line under the grade symbol.
10.2.2.1 Surface preparation for indentation
hardness testing shall be in accordance with Test Methods
E 18. Hardness tests shall be performed on the end of
the bolt or stud. When this is impractical, the hardness
test shall be performed elsewhere.
ip, Finish, and Appearance
11.1 Bolts, screws, studs, and stud bolts shall be
pointed and shall have a workmanlike finish. Points shall
PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIHCATIONS
be flat and chamfered or rounded at option of the manufacturer. Length of points on studs and stud bolts shall be
not less than one nor more than two complete threads as
measured from the extreme end parallel to the axis.
Length of studs and stud bolts shall be measured from
first thread to first thread.
11.2 Standard permissible variations for dimensions
of bars shall be as prescribed in Specification A 29lA
29M and Specification A 484/A 484M, latest revisions.
11.3 Bolt heads shall be in accordance with the dimensions of ANSI B18.2.1 or ANSI B18.2.3.1M. Unless
otherwise specified in the purchase order, the Heavy Hex
Screws Series should be used, except the maximum body
diameter and radius of fillet may be the same as for the
Heavy Hex Bolt Series. The body diameter and head fillet
radius for sizes of Heavy Hex Cap Screws and Bolts that
are not shown in their respective tables in ANSI B18.2.1
or ANSI B18.2.3.1M may be that shown in the corresponding Hex Cap Screw and Bolt Tables respectively.
Socket head fasteners shall be in accordance with ANSI
B18.3 or ANSI B18.3.1M.
Diameter, in. [mml
1% [30] and under
Over 1% [30] to 1%
[42], incl
Over 1?4[42] to 2%
[64], incl
Over 2% [64]
SA-193lSA-193M
Lot Size
1500 Ib [780 kg] or fraction thereof
4500 Ib [2000 kg] or fraction thereof
6000 Ib [2700 kg] or fraction thereof
100 pieces or fraction thereof
13.1.3 Tension tests are not required to be made
on bolts, screws, st~tds,or stud bolts that are fabricated
from heat-treated bars furnished in accordance with the
requirements of this specification and tested in accordance
with 13.1.1, provided they are not given a subsequent
heat tzeatment.
13.1.4 Full Size Specimeizs, Headed Fasteners Headed fasteners 1% in. in body diameter and smaller,
with body length three times the diameter or longer, and
which are produced by upsetting or forging (hot or cold)
shall be subjected to full size testing in accordance with
10.1.3. This testing shall be in addition to tensile testing
as specified in 10.1.1 and 10.I .2. The lot size shall be as
shown in 13.1.2. Failure shall occur in the body or
threaded section with no failure, or indications of failure,
such as cracks, at the junction of the head and shank.
12. Retests
12.1 If the results of the mechanical tests of any test
lot do not conform to the requirements specified, the
manufacturer may retreat such lot not more than twice,
in which case two additional tension tests shall be made
from such lot, all of which shall conform to the requirements specified.
14. Nuts
14.1 Bolts, studs, and stud bolts shall be furnished
with nuts, when specified in the purchase order. Nuts
shall conform to Specification A 194lA 194M.
13. Test Specimens
13.1 Tension test specimens taken from finished bolts,
screws, studs, or stud bolts shall be machined to the fosm
and dimensions and shall be taken from positions shown
in A3.2.1.7 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. Tension test specimens from bar stock are covered by Annex
A1.3 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, Annex A l .
15. Threads
15.1 When inch series product is ordered, all bolts,
studs, stud bolts, and accompanying nuts, unless otherwise specified in the purchase order shall be threaded in
accordance with ANSI B1.l Class 2A fit, sizes 1 in. and
smaller in diameter with the coarse-thread series, and 1'/*
in. and larger in diameter with the 8-pitch-thread series.
When metric product is ordered, threads shall be metric
coarse thread series as specified in ANSI B1.13M, and
shall have Grade 6G tolerances.
13.1.1 Number of Tests -For heat-treated bars, one
tension test shall be made for each diameter of each heat
represented in each tempering charge. When heat treated
without interruption in continuous furnaces, the material
in a lot shall be the same heat, same prior condition, same
size and subjected to the same heat treatment. Not fewer
than two tension tests are required for each lot containing
20 000 lb [9000 kg] or less. Every additional 10 000 lb
14.500 kg] or fraction thereof requires one additional test.
13.1.2 For studs, bolts, screws, etc., one tension
test shall be made for each diameter of each heat involved
in the lot. Each lot shall consist of the following:
15.2 Where practical, all threads shall be formed after
heat treatment. Class lA, Grades B8A, B K A , B8MA,
B8PA, B8TA, B8LNA, BsMLNA, B8NA, B8MNA, and
B~MLCUNA,
and Class 1C Grades B8RA and B8SA are
to be solution treated in the finished condition.
16. Inspection
66.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall
have entry, at all time while work on the contract of the
purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the place of
SA-193lSA-193M
2004 SECTION I1
manufacture that concern the manufacture of the material
ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is
being furnished in accordance with this specification. All
tests (except product analysis) and inspection shall be
made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless
otherwise specified in the purchase order and shall be
so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operation of the works.
17. Rejection and Rehearing
17.1 Unless otherwise specified in the basis of purchase, any rejection based on tests made in accordance
with Section 9 shall be reported to the manufacturer
within 30 days from the receipt of samples by the purchaser.
17.2 Material that shows defects subsequent to its
acceptance at the place of manufacture shall be rejected,
and the manufacturer shall be notified.
17.3 Samples tested in accordance with Section 9 that
represent rejected material shall be preserved for 2 weeks
from the date of the test report. In the case of dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the manufacturer may
make claim f x a rehearing within hat time.
18. Certification
18.1 The producer of the raw material or finished
fasteners shall furnish a certification to the purchaser or
his representative showing the results of the chemical
analysis, macroetch examination (Carbon and Alloy
Steels Only), and mechanical tests, and state the method
of heat treatment employed.
supplementary requirements or other requirements designated in the purchase order or contract and was found to
meet those requirements.
18.2.2 The specification number, year date, and
identification symbol.
19.1 Gradelclass and manufacturer's identification
symbols shall be applied to one end of studs 3/8 in. [I0
mm] in diameter and larger and to the heads of bolts '/4
in. [6 mm] in diameter and larger. (If the available area
is inadequate, the grade symbol may be marked on one
end and the manufacturer's identification symbol marked
on the other end.) The identification symbol shall be as
shown in Table 4 and 5. Grade B7M which has been
100% evaluated in conformance with the specification,
shall have a line under the grade symbol to distinguish
it from B7M produced to previous specification revisions
not requiring 100% hardness testing.
19.2 For bolting materials, including threaded bars,
that are furnished bundled and tagged or boxed, the tags
and boxes shall carry the grade symbol for the material
identification and the manufacturer's identification mark
or name.
19.3 For purposes of identification marking, the manufacturer is considered the organization that certifies the
fastener was manufactured, sampled, tested, and
inspected in accordance with the specification and the
results have been determined to meet the requirements
of this specification.
18.2 Certification shall also include at least the following:
19.4 Bar Coding - In addition to the requirements
in 19.1, 19.2, and 19.3, bar coding is acceptable as a
supplementary identification method. Bar coding should
be consistent with AIAG Standard B-5 02.00. If used on
small items, the bar code may be applied to the box or
a substantially applied tag.
18.2.1 A statement that the material or the fasteners,
or both, were manufactured, sampled, tested and
inspected in accordance with the specification and any
20. Keywords
20.1 hardness; heat treatment
PART A -FERROUS MATEFUAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE 1
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (COMPOSITION, PERCENT) [NOTE ( 1 ) l
Type
Ferritic Steels
B5
B6 and B6X
5% Chromium
12% Chromium
Grade
Description
A I S I Type 410
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note ( 2 ) l
Range
Carbon
Manganese, max
Pliospliorus, niax
Sulfur, max
Silicon
Cliromiu~n
Molybden~~m
0.10 min
1.00
0.040
0.030
1.00 niax
4.0-6.0
0.40-0.65
0.01 under
0.03 over
0.005 over
0.005 over
0.05 over
0.10
0.05
Type
0.15 max
1.00
0.040
0.03
1.00 niax
11.5-13.5
0.01 over
0.03 over
0.005 over
0.005 over
0.05 over
0.15
...
...
Ferritic Steels
B7, B 7 M
B16
Chromium-Molybdenum [Note ( 3 ) l
Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium
Grade
Description
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus, max
S ~ ~ l f u max
r,
Silicon
Chromiuni
Molybdenum
Vanadium
Aluminum, max % CNote ( 5 ) l
Range
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note ( 2 ) l
0.37-0.49 [Note (411
0.65-1.10
0.035
0.040
0.15-0.35
0.75-1.20
0.15-0.25
0.02
0.04
0.005 over
0.005 over
0.02
0.05
0.02
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note (211
Range
0.02
0.03
0.005 over
0.005 over
0.02
0.05
0.03
0.03
Austenitic Steels, [Note ( 6 ) l Classes 1, lA, ID, and 2
TYpe
Grade
Description
Carbon, max
Manganese, max
Phosphorus, max
Sulfur, max
Silicon, max
Chromium
Nickel
Molybdenum
Columbium +
tantalum
Range
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note (211
68, B8A
BDC, BBCA
BDM, BBMA, 68M2, 68M3
68P, GSPA
AISI Type 304
AISI Type 347
AISI Type 316
AISI Type 305 with
restricted carbon
Range
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note (211
0.08
2.00
0.045
0.030
1.00
18.0-20.0
8.0-11.0
0.01 over
0.04 over
0.010 over
0.005 over
0.05 over
0.20
0.15
0.08
2.00
0.045
0.030
1.00
17.0-19.0
9.0-12.0
0.01 over
0.04 over
0.010 over
0.005 over
0.05 over
0.20
0.15
...
...
...
...
...
1 0 x carbon
content, min;
1.10 max
Range
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note ( 2 ) l
Range
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note ( 2 ) l
...
0.08
2.00
0.045
0.030
1.00
16.0-18.0
10.0-14.0
2.00-3.00
0.01 over
0.04 over
0.010 over
0.005 over
0.05 over
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.05 under
...
...
Range
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note ( 2 ) l
0.12
2.00
0.045
0.030
1.00
17.0-19.0
11.0-13.0
0.01 over
0.04 over
0.010 over
0.005 over
0.05 over
0.20
0.15
...
...
...
...
TABLE 1
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (COMPOSITION, PERCENT) [NOTE (111 (CONT'D)
Austenitic Steels, [Note (611 Classes lA, l B , l D , and 2
Type
Grade
Description
B8N, B8NA
B8MN, B8MNA
BBMLCuN, B8MLCuNA
A I S I Type 304N
AISI Type 316N
Unstabilized, 2 0 Chromium, 1 8 Nickel,
6 Molybdenum with restricted carbon
Range
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note ( 2 ) l
Carbon, niax
Manganese, rnax
Phosphorus, rnax
Sulfur, rnax
Silicon, rnax
Chromium
Nicltel
Molybdenum
Nitrogen
Copper
Range
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note (211
0.01 over
0.04 over
0.010 over
0.005 over
0.05 over
0.20
0.15
Range
0.01 over
0.04 over
0.010 over
0.005 over
0.05 over
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.01
Austenitic Steels [Note (611, Classes 1, l A , and 2
TYpe
Grade
B8T, B8TA
Description
AISI Type 3 2 1
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note (211
Range
--
Carbon, max
Manganese, max
Phosphorus, max
Sulfur, max
Silicon, max
Nickel
Chromium
Titanium
Austenitic Steels [Note (611, Classes 1C and 1D
Type
Grade
Description
B8R, B8RA
B8S, B8SA
22 Chromium-13 Nickel-5 Manganese
1 8 Chromium-8 Nickel-4 Silicon + Nitrogen
Range
Carbon, rnax
Manganese
Phosphorus, max
Sulfur, max
Silicon
Chromium
Nicltel
Molybdenum
Nitrogen
Columbium +
tantalum
Vanadium
0.01 over
0.04 over
0.010 over
0.005 over
0.05 over
0.15
0.20
0.05 under
0.08
2.00
0.045
0.030
1.00
9.0-12.0
17.0-19.0
5 X ( C + N ) min, 0.70 max
0.06
4.0-6.0
0.045
0.030
1.00 max
20.5-23.5
11.5-13.5
1.50-3.00
0.20-0.40
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note (211
0.01 over
0.05
0.005 over
0.005 over
0.05 over
0.25
0.15
0.10
0.02
Range
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note (211
0.01 over
0.06
0.005 over
0.005 over
0.15
0.20
0.10
PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE 1
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (COMPOSITION, PERCENT) [NOTE (111 (CONT'D)
Austenitic Steels [Note (6)1, Classes 1, 1A and 1 D
Type
Grade
Description
B8LN, B 8 L N A
B8MLN, B 8 M L N A
A I S I Type 3 0 4 N w i t h restricted carbon
A I S I Type 3 1 6 N with restricted carbon
Range
Carbon, niax
Manganese
Phosphorus, niax
Sulfur, max
Silicon
Chromium
Nicltel
Molybdenum
Nitrogen
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note (211
0.030
2.00
0.045
0.030
1.00
18.0-20.0
8.0-11.0
0.005 over
0.04 over
0.010 over
0.005 over
0.05 over
0.20
0.15
0.10-0.16
0.01
...
.. .
Range
0.030
2.00
0.045
0.030
1.00
16.0-18.0
10.0-13.0
2.00-3.00
0.10-0.16
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note (2)l
0.005 over
0.04 over
0.010 over
0.005 over
0.05 over
0.20
0.15
0.10
0.01
NOTES:
( 1 ) The intentional addition of Bi, Se, Te, and Pb is not permitted.
( 2 ) Product analysis - Individual determinations sometimes vary from the specified limits on ranges as shown in the tables. The several
determinations of any individual element in a heat may not vary both above and below the specified range.
( 3 ) Typical steel compositions used for this grade include 4140, 4142, 4145, 4140H, 4142H, and 4145H.
( 4 ) For bar sizes over 3'/2 in. C9O mml, inclusive, the carbon content may be 0.50%, max. For the B 7 M grade, a minimum carbon content of
0.28% is permitted, provided that the required tensile properties are met in the section sizes involved; the use of A I S I 4130 or 4130H is
allowed.
( 5 ) Total of soluble and insoluble.
n
material. Class
( 6 ) Classes 1and 1 D are solution treated. Classes 1, 1 0 and some 1C (BBR and 0 8 s ) products are made from s o l ~ ~ t i otreated
1 A (B8A, BBCA, BBMA, B8PA, B8TA, B8LNA, B8MLNA, B8NA and BBMNA) and some Class 1C ( B R A and BBSA) products are
solution treated i n the finished condition. Class 2 products are solution treated and strain hardened.
2004 SECTION I1
TABLE 2
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Grade
Diameter, in.
Minimum
Tempering
Temperature,
"F
Tensile
Strength,
Min., ltsi
Yield
Strength,
Min.,
0.2%
offset,
ltsi
Elongation
in 4D,
Min., %
Reduction
of Area,
Min., %
Hardness,
Max.
Ferritic Steels
B5
4 to 6% cliromium
B6
1 3 % chromium
B6X
13% cliro~i~ium
87
Chromium-molybdenum
LIP
to 4, i~icl.
up to 4, incl.
up to 4, incl.
26 HRC
2'/, and under
3 2 1 HB or
3 5 HRC
3 0 2 HB or
3 3 HRC
277 HB or
2 9 HRC
235 HB or
9 9 HRB
2 3 5 BHN or
9 9 RIB
235 BHN or
9 9 RIB
over 2/',
to 4
over 4 to 7
B7M [Note (111
2'/, and under
Cliromi~~m-molytrde~ium
over 2 5 ; to 4
over 4 to 7
B16
Chromium-molybdenulnvanadium
2',$ and under
over 21/2 to 4
over 4 to 7
3 2 1 HB or
3 5 HRC
3 0 2 H B or
3 3 HRC
277 HB or
2 9 HRC
PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE 2
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS (CONT'D)
Grade, Diameter, in.
Heat Treatment [Note (211
Tensile
Strength,
min, ltsi
Yield
Strength,
mint 0.2
% offset,
ltsi
Elongation
in 40,
min, %
Reduction
of Area,
min %
Hardness,
max
Austenitic Steels
Classes 1 and 1D: 68, 68M,
B8P, B8LN, B8MLN, all
diameters
Class 1: B8C, B8T, all
diameters
Class 1A: B8A, B8CA, B8MA,
B8PA, BBTA, B8LNA,
BBMLNA, B8NA,
B8MNA, B ~ M L C U N A all
,
diameters
Classes 1 B and 1D: B8N,
BBMN, and BBMLCuN, a1
diameters
Classes 1C and 1D: B8R, all
diameters
Class 1C: B8RA, all diameters
Classes 1C and 1D: 885, all
diameters
Class 1C: B8SA, all diameters
Class 2: 88, B8C, B8P, B8T,
and B8N CNote (411
3/4 and under
over 3/4 t o 1, incl
over 1t o 11/, incl
over 11/, t o 11/, incl
Class 2: B8M, BBMN,
B8MLCuN
[Note ( 4 ) l
3/, and under
over 3/4 t o 1 incl
over 1t o 11/4incl
over 11/, t o 11/, incl
Class 28: 88, B 8 M 2 CNote
(411
2 and under
over 2 t o 2l/, incl
over 2% t o 3 incl
Class 2C: B 8 M 3 CNote ( 4 ) l
2 and under
over 2
carbide solution treated
223 HB or 9 6 HRB
CNote ( 3 ) l
carbide solution treated
223 HB or 9 6 HRB
[Note ( 3 ) l
192 HB or 9 0 HRB
carbide solution treated in the
finished condition
carbide solution treated
223 HB or 9 6 HRB
CNote (311
carbide solution treated
2 7 1 HB or 28 HRC
carbide solution treated in the
finished condition
carbide solution treated
2 7 1 HB or 28 HRC
carbide solution treated in the
finished condition
carbide solution treated and
strain hardened
carbide solution treated and
strain hardened
carbide solution treated and
strain hardened
carbide solution treated and
strain hardened
2 7 1 HB or 28 HRC
2 7 1 HB or 28 HRC
3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC
321
321
321
321
HB
HB
HB
HB
or
or
or
or
35
35
35
35
HRC
HRC
HRC
HRC
321
321
321
321
HB
HB
HB
HB
or
or
or
or
35
35
35
35
HRC
HRC
HRC
HRC
3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC
3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC
3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC
3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC
NOTES:
(1) To meet the tensile requirements, the Brinell hardness shall be over 200 HB (93 HRB).
(2) Class 1 is solution treated. Class 1 A is solution treated in the finished condition for corrosion resistance; heat treatment is critical due t o
physical property requirement. Class 2 is solution treated and strain hardened. Austenitic steels in the strain-hardened condition may not
show uniform properties throughout the section particularly in sizes over 3/, in. in diameter.
(3) For sizes 3/, in. in diameter and smaller, a maximum hardness of 2 4 1 HB (100 HRB) is permitted.
(4) For diameters 1%and over, center (core) properties may be lower than indicated by test reports which are based on values determined at
I/, radius.
2004 SECTION I1
TABLE 3
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS - METRIC PRODUCTS
Class
Diameter, mm
Minimum
Tensile Yield Strength,
Tempering Strength,
min, 0.2%
Elongation Reduction
of Area,
Temperature,
min,
offset,
in 40,
"C
M Pa
M Pa
min, %
min, %
Hardness, max
Ferritic Steels
85
4 to 6% chromium
B6
13% chromium
B6X
13% chromium
87
Chromium-molybdenum
up to M100, incl
up to M100, incl
26 HRC
up to M100, incl
M64 and under
over M64 to MlOO
over MlOO to M I 8 0
3 2 1 HB or 35 HRC
302 HB or 33 HRC
277 H B or 29 H RC
M64 and under
MlOO and under
over MlOO to M180
235 HB or 99 HRB
235 BHN or 99 RIB
235 BHN or 99 RIB
816
Chromium-molybdenum-vanadium M64 and under
over M64 to MlOO
over MlOO to M180
3 2 1 HB or 35 HRC
302 HB or 33 HRC
277 HB or 29 HRC
B ~ M ~
Chromium-molybdenum
Class
Diameter, mm
Tensile
Strength,
rnin,
M Pa
Heat TreatmentB
Yield
Strength,
rnin, 0.2%
offset,
MPa
Elongation Reduction
of Area,
in 40,
min, %
min, %
Hardness, max
Austenitic Steels
Classes 1 and 1D: 88, B8M,
carbide solution treated
B8P, a8LN, B8MLN, all
diameters
Class 1: BBC, BBT, all diame- carbide solution treated
ters
Class 1A: B8A, B8CA, BBMA, carbide solution treated in the finished
BBPA, BBTA, B8LNA,
condition
B8MLNA, BBNA, BBMNA,
BBMLCuNA, all diameters
Classes 1 B and I D : BBN,
carbide solution treated
BBMN, and BBMLCuN, all
diameters
carbide solution treated
Classes 1C and 1D: BBR, all
diameters
Class 1C: B8RA, all diameters carbide solution treated in the finished
condition
carbide solution treated
Classes 1C and 1D: 885, all
diameters
Class 1C: B8SA, all diameters carbide solution treated in the finished
condition
515
205
30
50
223 HE' or 96 HRB
515
205
30
50
223 HE' or 96 HRB
515
205
30
50
192HBor90HRB
550
240
30
40
2 2 3 ~ ~ ~ o r 9 6 H R B
690
380
35
55
2 7 1 HB' or 28 HRC
690
380
35
55
271HBor28HRC
655
345
35
55
271HBor28HRC
655
345
35
55
271HBor28HRC
PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE 3
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS - METRIC PRODUCTS (CONT'D)
Class
Diameter, m m
Tensile
Strength,
min,
M Pa
Heat TreatmentB
Yield
Strength,
min, 0.2%
offset,
MPa
Elongation Reduction
of Area,
i n 40,
min, %
min, %
Hardness, max
Austenitic Steels
Class 2: B8, B8C, B8P, B8T,
and 6 8 N D
M 2 0 and under
over M 2 0 t o M24, incl
over M 2 4 t o M30, incl
over M 3 0 t o M36, incl
carbide solutioli treated and strain hardened
Class 2: B8M, BBMN,
B~MLCUN~
M20 and under
over M 2 0 to M24, incl
over M 2 4 to M30, incl
over M 3 0 t o M36, incl
8
~
Class 28: B8, ~
M48 and under
over M 4 8 t o M64, incl
over M 6 4 t o M72, incl
8
~
3
Class 2C: ~
M48 and under
over M 4 8
carbide solution treated and strain hardened
3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC
3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC
3 2 1 HB or 35 HRC
3 2 1 HB or 35 HRC
3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC
321
321
321
321
2
~solution treated and strain harcarbide
dened
HB
HB
HB
HB
or
or
or
or
35
35
35
35
HRC
HRC
HRC
HRC
3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC
3 2 1 HB or 35 HRC
3 2 1 HB or 35 HRC
carbide
solution treated and strain hat=
~
dened
3 2 1 HB or 3 5 HRC
To meet the tensile requirements, the Brillell Iiardness shall be over 200 HB (93 HRB).
'Class 1 is solution treated. Class 1 A is solution treated in the finished condition for corrosion resistance; heat treatment is critical due t o
physical property requirement. Class 2 is solution treated and strain hardened. Austenitic steels in the strain-hardened condition may not
show uniform properties throughout the section particularly in sizes over M20 mm in diameter.
For sizes M 2 0 mni in diameter and smaller, a maximum hardness of 2 4 1 HB (100 HRB) is permitted.
For diameters M38 and over, center (core) properties may be lower than indicated by test reports which are based on values determined
at '4 radius.
A
TABLE 4
MARI<ING OF FERRITIC STEELS
Grade
B5
B6
B6X
87
B 7 M [Note ( 1 ) l
NOTE:
(1) For explanations, see 10.2.2 and 19.1.
Marking
2004 SECTION 11
TABLE 5
MARKING OF AUSTENITIC STEELS [NOTE (111
Class
Grade
Marltincl
Class 1
Class 1 A
Class 1 B
Class 1C
Class 1D
Class 2
Class 2 8
Class 2C
B8M3
B9H
NOTE:
(1) Classes 1, l A , l B , lC, 2, 2B, and 2C may be marked with either
grade or marking listed. Class 1 D may only be marked with
marking listed.
PART A -FERROUS MATERIAL SPECFICATIONS
SA-193lSA-193M
N
These requirements shall not apply unless specified in the order and in the Ordering
Information, in which event the specified tests shall be made before shipment of the
product.
S1. High-Temperatiire Tests
S1.1 Tests to determine high temperahire properties
shall be made in accordance with Practice E 21, and
Practices E 139, E 292, E 150, and E 151.
S2. Charpy Impact Tests
S2.1 Charpy impact tests based on the requirements
of Specification A 320lA 320M, Section 6 and 7 shall
be made as agreed between the manufachlrer and the
purchaser. When testing temperatures are as low as those
specified in Specification A 320lA 320M, bolting should
be ordered to that specification in preference to this specification.
ardness Testing of Gra
S3.1 Each Grade B7M bolt or stud shall be tested
for hardness by indentation method and shall meet the
requirements specified in Table 2.
ardness Testing of Grade
S4.1 For bolts or studs 2% in. [65 mm] or smaller,
the hasdness for Grade B 16 shall be measured on or near
the end of each bolt or stud using one of the methods
prescribed in 10.2.1 for the Brine11 or Rockwell C test.
The hasdness shall be in the range 253-319 HB or 2534 HRC.
S5.1 Grade and manufacturer's identification symbols
shall be applied to one end of studs and to the heads of
bolts of all sizes. (If the available area is inadequate,
the grade symbol may be marked on one end and the
manufactuser's identification symbol marked on the other
end.) For bolts smaller than l/J in. [6 mm] in diamctcr
and shids smaller than 3/8 in. [10 mm] in diameter and
for '/4 in. [6 mm] in diameter studs requiring more than
a total of three symbols, the maslcing shall be a matter of
agreement between the purchaser and the manufachxer.
S6. Stress Relieving
S6.1 A stress-relieving operation shall follow straightening after heat treatment.
S6.2 The minimum stress-relieving temperature shall
be 100°F [55"C] below the tempering temperature. Tests
for mechanical properties shall be performed after stress
relieving.
article Inspection
S7.1 Bass shall be magnetic particle examined in
accordance with Guide E 709. Bars with indications of
craclcs or seams are subject to rejection if the indications
extend more than 3% of the diameter into the bar.
S8. Stress-Relaxation Testing
S8.1 Stress-Relaxation Testing, when required, shall
be done in accordance with Practice E 328. The test shall
be pesfonned at 850°F [454"C] for a period of 100 h.
The initial stress shall be 50 M psi (345 MPa). The
residual stress at 100 h shall be 17 M psi (1 17 MPa)
minimum.
SA-193/SA-193M
2004 SECTION I1
G OF AUSTENITHC
STEELS
X1.1 Strain hardening is the increase in strength and
hardness that results from plastic deformation below the
recrystallization temperature (cold work). This effect is
produced in austenitic stainless steel by reducing oversized bars or wire to the desired final size by cold drawing
or other process. The degree of stsain hardening achievable in any alloy is limited by its strain hardening characteristics. In addition, the amount of strain hardening that
can be produced is further limited by the variables of
the process, such as the total amount of cross-section
reduction, die angle and bar size. In large diameter bars,
for example, plastic deformation will occm principally
in the outer regions of the bar, so that the increased
strength and hardness due to strain hardening is achieved
predominantly near the surface of the bas. That is, the
smaller the bas, the greater the penetration of stsain hardening.
X1.2 Thus, the mechanical properties of a given strain
hardened fastener are dependent not just on the alloy, but
also on the size of bar from which ii is machiiled. The
minimum bar size that can be used, however, is established by the configuration of the fastener, so that the
configuration can affect the strength of the fastener.
X1.3 For example, a stud of a particular alloy and
size may be machined from a smaller diameter bas than
a bolt of the same alloy and size because a larger diameter
bar is required to accommodate the head of the bolt. The
stud, therefore, is likely to be stronger than the same size
bolt in a given alloy.
X2.
A 193M
X3.1 See Table X2.1 fer Mzking Cress References:
PART A - FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE X2.1
MARKING SYMBOL CROSS REFERENCE
Grade
Class Designation
Marlting Symbol Used Prior
to A 1931A 193M-89
Marlting Symbol Used in A 193lA 193M8 9 through A 193lA 193M-91a
Marlting Symbol Used in A 193lA 193M-92
and Later Versions
88
B8C
B8M
B8 P
B8T
B8F or B8LN
B8G or B8MLN
B8A
B8B or B8CA
B8D or B8MA
B8H or B8PA
B8J or B8TA
B8L or B8LNA
B81< or BBMLNA
B8V or B8NA
B8W or BBMNA
~91<' or B8MLCuNA
B8N
B8Y or B8MN
B
B9JB or B8MLCuN
B9A or B8R
B9B or B8RA
B9D or B8S
B9F or B8SA
894
B95
896
897
898
899
0100
BlOl
8102
88
B8C
B8 P
B8T
B8N
BRM
Option to mark with grade symbol added when A 193lA 193M-91a was published.
'Class designation corrected when A 1931A 193M-93a was published.
Class or Grade added when A 193lA 193M-91a was published.
A
'
SPECIFICATION FOR ALLOY-STEEL AND STAINLESS
STEEL BOLTING MATERIALS FOR HIGHTEMPERATURE SERVICE
SA-193 /SA-193M
(Identical with ASTM Specification A 193 /A 193M-98a except for differences in paras. 3.1.1 and 19.4, Note 6 of Table 1, and editorial
differences in Table 2.)
1.
Scope
1.1 This specification covers alloy and stainless steel
bolting material for pressure vessels, valves, flanges, and
fittings for high-temperature service. The term “bolting
material” as used in this specification covers bars, bolts,
screws, studs, stud bolts and wire. Bars and wire shall
be hot-wrought. The material may be further processed
by centerless grinding or by cold drawing. Austenitic
stainless steel may be carbide solution treated or carbide
solution treated and strain-hardened. When strain hardened austenitic steel is ordered, the purchaser should take
special care to ensure that Appendix X1 is thoroughly
understood.
desired. These shall apply only when specified in the
purchase order.
1.5 This specification is expressed in both inch-pound
units and in SI units. However, unless the order specifies
the applicable “M” specification designation (SI units),
the material shall be furnished to inch-pound units.
2.
Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
A 29 /A 29M Specification for General Requirements for
Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought and ColdFinished
A 194 /A 194M Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel
Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service
A 320 /A 320M Specification for Alloy Steel Bolting
Materials for Low-Temperature Service
A 354 Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy
Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners
A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
A 479/A 479M Specification for Stainless and HeatResisting Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other
Pressure Vessels
A 484 /484M Specification for General Requirements for
Stainless and Heat-Resisting Bars, Billets, and
Forgings
A 751 Test Methods, Practices, and Terminology for
Chemical Analysis of Steel Products
A 788 Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements
1.2 Several grades are covered, including ferritic
steels and austenitic stainless steels designated B5, B8,
etc. Selection will depend upon design, service conditions, mechanical properties, and high-temperature characteristics.
NOTE 1 — The committee formulating this specification has included
fifteen steel types that have been rather extensively used for the present
purpose. Other compositions will be considered for inclusion by the
committee from time to time as the need becomes apparent.
NOTE 2 — For grades of alloy-steel bolting material suitable for use
at lower range of high-temperature applications, reference should be
made to Specification A 354.
NOTE 3 — For grades of alloy-steel bolting material suitable for use
in low-temperature applications, reference should be made to Specification A 320 /A 320M.
1.3 Nuts for use with this bolting material are covered
in Section 14.
1.4 Supplementary Requirements S1 through S8 are
provided for use when additional tests or inspection are
279
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-193 /SA-193M
2004 SECTION II
stainless steels; Class 1D applies to material carbide solution treated by cooling rapidly from the rolling temperature),
E 18 Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness and Rockwell
Superficial Hardness of Metallic Materials
E 21 Practice for Elevated Temperature Tension Tests
of Metallic Materials
E 139 Practice for Conducting Creep, Creep-Rupture,
and Stress-Rupture Tests of Metallic Materials
E 150 Practice for Conducting Creep and Creep-Rupture
Tension Tests of Metallic Materials Under Conditions
of Rapid Heating and Short Times
E 151 Practice for Tension Tests of Metallic Materials
at Elevated Temperatures with Rapid Heating and Conventional or Rapid Strain Rates
E 292 Practice for Conducting Time-for-Rupture Notch
Tension Tests of Materials
E 328 Methods for Stress-Relaxation Tests for Materials
and Structures
E 381 Method of Macroetch Testing Products, Inspection,
and Rating Comprising Steel Bars, Billets, Blooms and
Forgings
E 566 Practice for Electromagnetic (Eddy-Current) Sorting of Ferrous Metals
E 709 Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination
F 606 Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical
Properties of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, and Rivets
3.1.3 Quantity (that is, number of pieces or weight),
3.1.4 Description of items required (that is, bars,
bolts, screws, or studs),
3.1.5 Dimensions (that is, diameter, length of point,
overall length, finish, shape, and threads),
3.1.6 Nuts, if required by purchaser, in accordance
with 14.1,
3.1.7 Supplementary requirements, if any, and
3.1.8 Special requirements, in accordance with 6.3,
6.6, 11.3, 15.1, 16.1, 17.1, and 18.1.
4.
Manufacture (Process)
4.1 The steel shall be produced by any of the following
processes: open-hearth, basic-oxygen, electric-furnace or
vacuum-induction melting (VIM). The primary melting
method may incorporate separate degassing or refining.
The molten steel may be vacuum-treated prior to or during
pouring of the ingot or strand casting. The basic-oxygen
process shall be limited to steels containing not over 6%
chromium.
2.2 ANSI Standards:
B1.1 Screw Threads
B1.13M Metric Screw Threads
B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws
B18.2.3.1M Metric Hex Cap Screws
B18.3 Hexagon Socket and Spline Socket Screws
B18.3.1M Metric Socket Head Cap Screws
4.2 Quality — To ensure soundness, ferritic steel bars
and wire shall be tested in accordance with Method E
381, or other suitable method as agreed upon between
the purchaser and the producer. When bar or wire is
supplied, the bar or wire producer shall perform the test.
When fasteners are supplied, either the bar or wire producer or the fastener producer, as agreed upon between
them, shall perform the test. Quality control procedures
shall be sufficient to demonstrate that the testing was
performed and that the results were acceptable. A bar lot
consisting of one heat or 10 000 lbs whichever is smaller,
shall be represented by a minimum of one macroetch.
Visual examination of transverse sections shall show no
imperfections worse than the macrographs of Method E
381 S4-R4-C4 or equivalent as agreed upon. Distinct
zones of solidification shall not be present.
2.3 AIAG Standard:
AIAG B-5 02.00 Primary Metals Identification Tag
Application Standard
3.
Ordering Information
3.1 The inquiry and order for material under this
specification shall include the following as required to
describe the material adequately:
3.1.1 Specification, designation, year date, and
grade.
5.
Discard
5.1 A sufficient discard shall be made to secure freedom from injurious piping and undue segregation.
3.1.2 Heat-treated condition (that is, normalized
and tempered, or quenched and tempered, for the ferritic
materials, and carbide solution treated (Class 1), carbide
solution treated after finishing (Class 1A), and carbide
solution treated and strain hardened (Classes 2, 2B, and
2C), for the austenitic stainless steels; Classes 1B and 1C
apply to the carbide solution-treated nitrogen-bearing
6.
Heat Treatment
6.1 Ferritic steels shall be properly heat treated as
best suits the high-temperature characteristics of each
280
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
grade. Immediately after rolling or forging, the bolting
material shall be allowed to cool to a temperature below
the cooling transformation range. The materials which
are to be furnished in the liquid-quenched condition shall
then be uniformly reheated to the proper temperature to
refine the grain (a group thus reheated being known as
a “quenching charge”) and quenched in a liquid medium
under substantially uniform conditions for each quenching charge. Use of water quenching is prohibited for any
ferritic grade when heat treatment is part of the fastener
manufacturing process. This prohibition does not apply
to heat treated bar or to fasteners machined therefrom.
Material Grade B16 shall be heated to a temperature
range of 1700°F to 1750°F [925°C to 954°C] and oil
quenched. The materials that are to be furnished in the
normalized or air-quenched condition shall be reheated
to the proper temperature to refine the grain and cooled
uniformly in air to a temperature below the transformation
temperature range. The material, whether liquidquenched or normalized, shall then be uniformly reheated
for tempering. The minimum tempering temperature shall
be as specified in Table 2 and Table 3.
6.1.1 Quenched and tempered or normalized and
tempered ferritic material that is subsequently cold drawn
for dimensional control shall be stress-relieved after cold
drawing. The minimum stress-relief temperature shall be
100°F [55°C] below the tempering temperature. Tests
for mechanical properties shall be performed after stress
relieving.
6.3.2 Class 1D — Rolled or forged Grades B8,
B8M, B8P, B8LN, B8MLN, B8N, B8MN, B8R, and B8S
bar shall be cooled rapidly immediately following hot
working while the temperature is above 1750°F [955°C],
so that grain boundary carbides are in solution (see A
479-88b and subsequent revisions). Class 1D shall be
restricted to applications at temperatures less than 850°F
[455°C].
6.3.3 Class 1A and Class 1C Grades B8RA and
B8SA — Finished fasteners shall be carbide solution
treated after all rolling, forging, heading, and threading
operations are complete. This designation does not apply
to starting material such as bar. Fasteners shall be heated
from ambient temperature and held a sufficient time at a
temperature at which the chromium carbide will go into
solution and then shall be cooled at a rate sufficient to
prevent the precipitation of the carbide.
6.3.4 Classes 2, 2B, and 2C — Material shall be
carbide solution treated by heating from ambient temperature and holding a sufficient time at a temperature at
which the chromium carbide will go into solution and
then cooling at a rate sufficient to prevent the precipitation
of the carbide. Following this treatment the material shall
then be strain hardened to achieve the required properties.
NOTE 4 — Heat treatment following operations performed on a limited
portion of the product, such as heading, may result in non-uniform
grain size and mechanical properties through the section affected.
6.4 If scale-free bright finish is required, this shall be
specified in the purchase order.
6.2 Both B6 and B6X materials shall be held, at
the tempering temperature for a minimum time of 1 h.
Identification Symbol B6X material may be furnished in
the as-rolled-and-tempered condition. Cold working is
permitted with the hardness limitation (26 HRC maximum) of Table 2 for the B6X grade.
6.5 B7 and B7M bolting shall be heat treated by
quenching in a liquid medium and tempering. For B7M
bolting, the final heat treatment, which may be the tempering operation if conducted at 1150°F [620°C] minimum,
shall be done after all machining and forming operations,
including thread rolling, are complete.
6.3 All austenitic stainless steels shall receive a carbide solution treatment (see 6.3.1, 6.3.4 for specific
requirements for each class). Classes 1, 1B, 1C (Grades
B8R and B8S only), 2, 2B, and 2C can apply to bar,
wire, and finished fasteners. Class 1A (all grades) and
Class 1C (Grades B8RA and B8SA only) can apply to
finished fasteners. Class 1D applies only to bar and wire
and finished fasteners that are machined directly from
Class 1D bar or wire without any subsequent hot or cold
working.
6.3.1 Classes 1 and 1B, and Class 1C Grades B8R
and B8S — After rolling of the bar, forging, or heading,
whether done hot or cold, the material shall be heated
from ambient temperature and held a sufficient time at a
temperature at which the chromium carbide will go into
solution and then shall be cooled at a rate sufficient to
prevent the precipitation of the carbide.
6.5.1 Unless otherwise specified, material for
Grade B7 may be heat treated by the Furnace, the Induction or the Electrical Resistance method.
NOTE 5 — It should be taken into consideration that stress-relaxation
properties may vary from heat lot to heat lot or these properties may
vary from one heat treating method to another. The purchaser may
specify Requirement S8, if stress-relaxation testing is desired.
7.
Chemical Composition
7.1 Each alloy shall conform to the chemical composition requirements prescribed in Table 1. Steels with added
lead shall not be used.
7.2 The steel shall not contain an unspecified element
for the ordered grade to the extent that the steel conforms
281
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
SA-193 /SA-193M
Not for Resale
SA-193 /SA-193M
2004 SECTION II
to the requirements of another grade for which that element is a specified element. Furthermore, elements present in concentrations greater than 0.75 weight/% shall
be reported. Chemical analysis shall be performed in
accordance with Test Methods A 751.
where:
Ts p wedge tensile strength
UTS p tensile strength specified in Table 2, and
As p stress area, square inches, as shown in ANSI
B1.1 or calculated as follows:
As p 0.785 (D − (0.974/n))2
8.
Heat Analysis
8.1 An analysis of each heat of steel shall be made
by the manufacturer to determine the percentages of the
elements specified in Section 7. This analysis shall be
made from a test specimen taken during the pouring of
the heat. The chemical composition thus determined shall
be reported to the purchaser or the purchaser’s representative, and shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 7. For strand cast materials, the requirements of
8.2 and 8.3 of Specification A 788 shall be met. Should
the purchaser deem it necessary to have the transition
zone of two heats sequentially cast discarded, the purchaser shall invoke Supplementary Requirement S3 of
Specification A 788.
where:
D p nominal thread size, and
n p the number of threads per inch
10.2 Hardness Requirements:
10.2.1 The hardness shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 2. Hardness testing shall be
performed in accordance with either Test Methods and
Definitions A 370 or with Test Methods F 606. In the
event a controversy exists relative to minimum strength,
tension tests shall prevail over hardness readings.
10.2.2 Grade B7M — The maximum hardness of
the grade shall be 235 HB or 99 HRB (conversion in
accordance with Table 2B of Test Methods and Definitions A 370). The minimum hardness shall not be less
than 200 HB or 93 HRB. Conformance to this hardness
shall be insured by testing the hardness of each stud or
bolt by Brinell or Rockwell B methods in accordance
with 10.2.1. The use of 100% electromagnetic testing for
hardness as an alternative to 100% indentation hardness
testing is permissible when qualified by sampling using
indentation hardness testing. Each lot tested for hardness
electromagnetically shall be 100% examined in accordance with Practice E 566. Following electromagnetic
testing for hardness a random sample of a minimum of
100 pieces of each heat of steel in each lot (as defined
in 13.1.2) shall be tested by indentation hardness methods.
All samples must meet hardness requirements to permit
acceptance of the lot. If any one sample is outside of the
specified maximum or minimum hardness, the lot shall
be rejected and either reprocessed and resampled or tested
100% by indentation hardness methods. Product which
has been 100% tested and found acceptable shall have a
line under the grade symbol.
9.
Product Analysis
9.1 An analysis may be made by the purchaser from
samples representing the bolting material. The chemical
composition thus determined shall conform to the requirements of Section 7.
10. Mechanical Properties
10.1 Tensile Properties:
10.1.1 Requirements — The material as represented
by the tension specimens shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 2 at room temperature after
heat treatment.
10.1.2 Method of Test — Tension test shall be made
in accordance with Test Methods and Definitions A 370,
including the parts of Annex A3 “Steel Fasteners” applicable to machined test specimens. The speed of testing
shall not exceed the limits specified in 7.4.1 of Test
Methods and Definitions A 370. The yield strength corresponding to a limiting permanent offset of 0.2% of the
gage length of the specimen shall be determined.
10.2.2.1 Surface preparation for indentation
hardness testing shall be in accordance with Test Methods
E 18. Hardness tests shall be performed on the end of
the bolt or stud. When this is impractical, the hardness
test shall be performed elsewhere.
10.1.3 Full Size Fasteners, Wedge Tensile Testing — When applicable, see 13.1.4, headed fasteners shall
be wedge tested full size in accordance with Annex A3
of A 370 and shall conform to the tensile strength shown
in Table 2. The minimum full size breaking strength (lbf)
for individual sizes shall be as follows:
Ts p UTS ⴛ As
11. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
11.1 Bolts, screws, studs, and stud bolts shall be
pointed and shall have a workmanlike finish. Points shall
(1)
282
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
(2)
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Diameter, in. [mm]
be flat and chamfered or rounded at option of the manufacturer. Length of points on studs and stud bolts shall be
not less than one nor more than two complete threads as
measured from the extreme end parallel to the axis.
Length of studs and stud bolts shall be measured from
first thread to first thread.
1
1 ⁄8 [30] and under
Over 11⁄8 [30] to 13⁄4
[42], incl
Over 13⁄4 [42] to 21⁄2
[64], incl
Over 21⁄2 [64]
11.2 Standard permissible variations for dimensions
of bars shall be as prescribed in Specification A 29 /A
29M and Specification A 484/A 484M, latest revisions.
SA-193 /SA-193M
Lot Size
1500 lb [780 kg] or fraction thereof
4500 lb [2000 kg] or fraction thereof
6000 lb [2700 kg] or fraction thereof
100 pieces or fraction thereof
13.1.3 Tension tests are not required to be made
on bolts, screws, studs, or stud bolts that are fabricated
from heat-treated bars furnished in accordance with the
requirements of this specification and tested in accordance
with 13.1.1, provided they are not given a subsequent
heat treatment.
11.3 Bolt heads shall be in accordance with the dimensions of ANSI B18.2.1 or ANSI B18.2.3.1M. Unless
otherwise specified in the purchase order, the Heavy Hex
Screws Series should be used, except the maximum body
diameter and radius of fillet may be the same as for the
Heavy Hex Bolt Series. The body diameter and head fillet
radius for sizes of Heavy Hex Cap Screws and Bolts that
are not shown in their respective tables in ANSI B18.2.1
or ANSI B18.2.3.1M may be that shown in the corresponding Hex Cap Screw and Bolt Tables respectively.
Socket head fasteners shall be in accordance with ANSI
B18.3 or ANSI B18.3.1M.
13.1.4 Full Size Specimens, Headed Fasteners —
Headed fasteners 11⁄2 in. in body diameter and smaller,
with body length three times the diameter or longer, and
which are produced by upsetting or forging (hot or cold)
shall be subjected to full size testing in accordance with
10.1.3. This testing shall be in addition to tensile testing
as specified in 10.1.1 and 10.1.2. The lot size shall be as
shown in 13.1.2. Failure shall occur in the body or
threaded section with no failure, or indications of failure,
such as cracks, at the junction of the head and shank.
12. Retests
12.1 If the results of the mechanical tests of any test
lot do not conform to the requirements specified, the
manufacturer may retreat such lot not more than twice,
in which case two additional tension tests shall be made
from such lot, all of which shall conform to the requirements specified.
14. Nuts
14.1 Bolts, studs, and stud bolts shall be furnished
with nuts, when specified in the purchase order. Nuts
shall conform to Specification A 194 /A 194M.
13. Test Specimens
13.1 Tension test specimens taken from finished bolts,
screws, studs, or stud bolts shall be machined to the form
and dimensions and shall be taken from positions shown
in A3.2.1.7 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370. Tension test specimens from bar stock are covered by Annex
A1.3 of Test Methods and Definitions A 370, Annex A1.
15. Threads
15.1 When inch series product is ordered, all bolts,
studs, stud bolts, and accompanying nuts, unless otherwise specified in the purchase order shall be threaded in
accordance with ANSI B1.1 Class 2A fit, sizes 1 in. and
smaller in diameter with the coarse-thread series, and 11⁄8
in. and larger in diameter with the 8-pitch-thread series.
When metric product is ordered, threads shall be metric
coarse thread series as specified in ANSI B1.13M, and
shall have Grade 6G tolerances.
13.1.1 Number of Tests — For heat-treated bars, one
tension test shall be made for each diameter of each heat
represented in each tempering charge. When heat treated
without interruption in continuous furnaces, the material
in a lot shall be the same heat, same prior condition, same
size and subjected to the same heat treatment. Not fewer
than two tension tests are required for each lot containing
20 000 lb [9000 kg] or less. Every additional 10 000 lb
[4500 kg] or fraction thereof requires one additional test.
15.2 Where practical, all threads shall be formed after
heat treatment. Class 1A, Grades B8A, B8CA, B8MA,
B8PA, B8TA, B8LNA, B8MLNA, B8NA, B8MNA, and
B8MLCuNA, and Class 1C Grades B8RA and B8SA are
to be solution treated in the finished condition.
16. Inspection
16.1 The inspector representing the purchaser shall
have entry, at all time while work on the contract of the
purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the place of
13.1.2 For studs, bolts, screws, etc., one tension
test shall be made for each diameter of each heat involved
in the lot. Each lot shall consist of the following:
283
--`,,```,,,,````-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
SA-193 /SA-193M
2004 SECTION II
manufacture that concern the manufacture of the material
ordered. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector all
reasonable facilities to satisfy him that the material is
being furnished in accordance with this specification. All
tests (except product analysis) and inspection shall be
made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless
otherwise specified in the purchase order and shall be
so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operation of the works.
supplementary requirements or other requirements designated in the purchase order or contract and was found to
meet those requirements.
18.2.2 The specification number, year date, and
identification symbol.
19. Product Marking
19.1 Grade/class and manufacturer’s identification
symbols shall be applied to one end of studs 3⁄8 in. [10
mm] in diameter and larger and to the heads of bolts 1⁄4
in. [6 mm] in diameter and larger. (If the available area
is inadequate, the grade symbol may be marked on one
end and the manufacturer’s identification symbol marked
on the other end.) The identification symbol shall be as
shown in Table 4 and 5. Grade B7M which has been
100% evaluated in conformance with the specification,
shall have a line under the grade symbol to distinguish
it from B7M produced to previous specification revisions
not requiring 100% hardness testing.
17. Rejection and Rehearing
17.1 Unless otherwise specified in the basis of purchase, any rejection based on tests made in accordance
with Section 9 shall be reported to the manufacturer
within 30 days from the receipt of samples by the purchaser.
17.2 Material that shows defects subsequent to its
acceptance at the place of manufacture shall be rejected,
and the manufacturer shall be notified.
19.2 For bolting materials, including threaded bars,
that are furnished bundled and tagged or boxed, the tags
and boxes shall carry the grade symbol for the material
identification and the manufacturer’s identification mark
or name.
17.3 Samples tested in accordance with Section 9 that
represent rejected material shall be preserved for 2 weeks
from the date of the test report. In the case of dissatisfaction with the results of the test, the manufacturer may
make claim for a rehearing within that time.
19.3 For purposes of identification marking, the manufacturer is considered the organization that certifies the
fastener was manufactured, sampled, tested, and
inspected in accordance with the specification and the
results have been determined to meet the requirements
of this specification.
18.
Certification
18.1 The producer of the raw material or finished
fasteners shall furnish a certification to the purchaser or
his representative showing the results of the chemical
analysis, macroetch examination (Carbon and Alloy
Steels Only), and mechanical tests, and state the method
of heat treatment employed.
18.2 Certification shall also include at least the following:
19.4 Bar Coding — In addition to the requirements
in 19.1, 19.2, and 19.3, bar coding is acceptable as a
supplementary identification method. Bar coding should
be consistent with AIAG Standard B-5 02.00. If used on
small items, the bar code may be applied to the box or
a substantially applied tag.
18.2.1 A statement that the material or the fasteners,
or both, were manufactured, sampled, tested and
inspected in accordance with the specification and any
20. Keywords
20.1 hardness; heat treatment
284
Copyright ASME International
Provided by IHS under license with ASME
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
Not for Resale
PART A — FERROUS MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
SA-193 /SA-193M
TABLE 1
CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS (COMPOSITION, PERCENT) [NOTE (1)]
Type
Ferritic Steels
Grade
Description
B5
B6 and B6X
5% Chromium
12% Chromium
AISI Type 410
Range
Carbon
Manganese, max
Phosphorus, max
Sulfur, max
Silicon
Chromium
Molybdenum
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note (2)]
Range
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note (2)]
0.01 under
0.03 over
0.005 over
0.005 over
0.05 over
0.10
0.05
0.15 max
1.00
0.040
0.03
1.00 max
11.5–13.5
...
0.01 over
0.03 over
0.005 over
0.005 over
0.05 over
0.15
...
0.10 min
1.00
0.040
0.030
1.00 max
4.0–6.0
0.40–0.65
Type
Ferritic Steels
Grade
Description
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus, max
Sulfur, max
Silicon
Chromium
Molybdenum
Vanadium
Aluminum, max % [Note (5)]
B7, B7M
B16
Chromium-Molybdenum [Note (3)]
Chromium-Molybdenum-Vanadium
Range
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note (2)]
Range
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note (2)]
0.37–0.49 [Note (4)]
0.65–1.10
0.035
0.040
0.15–0.35
0.75–1.20
0.15–0.25
...
...
0.02
0.04
0.005 over
0.005 over
0.02
0.05
0.02
...
...
0.36–0.47
0.45–0.70
0.035
0.040
0.15–0.35
0.80–1.15
0.50–0.65
0.25–0.35
0.015
0.02
0.03
0.005 over
0.005 over
0.02
0.05
0.03
0.03
...
Type
Austenitic Steels, [Note (6)] Classes 1, 1A, 1D, and 2
Grade
B8, B8A
Description
Carbon, max
Manganese, max
Phosphorus, max
Sulfur, max
Silicon, max
Chromium
Nickel
Molybdenum
Columbium +
tantalum
AISI Type 304
Range
Product Variation,
Over or Under
[Note (2)]
0.08
2.00
0.045
0.030
1.00
18.0–20.0
8.0–11.0
...
...
0.01 over
0.04 over
0.010 over
0.005 over
0.05 over
0.20
0.15
...
...
B8C, B8CA
B8M, B8MA, B8M2, B8M3
B8P, B8PA
AISI Type 316
AISI Type 305 with
restricted carbon
AISI Type 347
Range
0.08
2.00
0.045
0.030
1.00
17.0–19.0